2019 Audi A3 19

Owner's Manual
2019 A3
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trustin us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality
equipment that a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly
so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and makeuseofall of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, we provide manyuseful tips and information
concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. We also
give you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environ-
mentally-friendly manner.
Wehope you enjoy driving your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motoring.
AUDI AG
A WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize expo-
sure, avoid breathing exhaust, do notidle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.
ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
8V2012721B)
Table of contents
About this Owner's Manual...... Luggage compartment ............... 63

Roof rack... eee eee 66
SUIMIMAFY: « « 225% : 222% : seen s eos
Quik aCCESS his: 6 i esi a 6 wees as ewe Warrant Goudie: ¢ sws s 0 wenn oe ve 68
Controls ataglance.................. Climate control system............... 68
Indicator lights overview...........0.. 10
DPINIIG): « wees ce ges se wesee sa eee a 2 ae 72
Display and operation............ 14 General information..............0.. 72
Instrumentcluster............... 14 Steering... 6... c cee eee eee eee 73
Instrumentcluster overview........... 14 Starting and stopping the engine
Coolant temperature indicator......... 15 (vehicles with an ignition lock)......... 74
Tachometer......... 0.0 eee ee eee 15 Starting and stopping the engine
Fulellevélse. : 2 wes sy sews so eee so ees 16 (vehicles with convenience key)......... 75
Odometer icc eo sisiecs ores ee seven ee omens a 16 Messages « sivas + © mavens 0 a savers 6 eroase 6 se 77
Outside temperature display........... 16 Starting the engine when thereis a
Multifunction steering wheel plus...... 17 THALGUNCCION acme + new = mean Ge Rem ses 77
Multifunction steering wheel.......... 20 Start/Stopisystem « sew. ee ews ve ees ee 78
Vehicle functions. ............0000 00s 21 Electromechanical parking brake....... 80
MESSAGES cares 5 2 eneu 5 x awa § ¥ REG eB 24 Starting fromastop..............005 81
Automatic transmission.............. 82
Starting and driving............. 30
Opening and closing............. 30 CGO: « & cain ¢ 5 Sates ¢ 4 Saw tf eae oe 90
Gentrabloeking si 2 2 ssc so wim 2 ween 2 30 Plug-in hybrid drive.............+.-5. 90
Luggage compartment lid............. 36 Refueling .......... 00.0 eee eee eee 101
Child safety lock..............0.-000. 38 Charging 102
POWer WiNdOWS!ns « saves ¥ 3 eas a ¢ aaa 5 38 Important safety precautions.......... 103
Panoramic glass roof................- 40 Charging at public charging stations.... 105
Charging the battery with the Audi
POWEF top’. « « sees ¢ « ses gt ewes ce ce 41 charging systeM........... ee eee eee 106
Automatic power top . weicoe ss wesc ee eco 41 Charging system (version 1)........... 110
Wind deflector................00000. 44 Charging system (version 2)........... rs
Power top emergency operation........ 44 Indicator lights and messages......... 121
Emergency release ..........ceeseeeee 121
Lights and Vision................. 48 Climate control.................200. 121
EXterior lighting sas y ¢ sews zo eee s 2 eee 48 Cleaning and maintenance information.. 122
Interior lightingie: + « sews ss wes se eee 51
Vision. 52 Trailer towing.................... 124
Windshield wipers...............0005 54 Driving with atrailer................. 124
Digital.compass': « sci: «5 eews ee meee eee 56
Driver assistance................. 126
58 Assist systems................... 126
58 Speed warning system.............--- 126
PROMESEALES«css © canisen oo snosene © 0 acme 4 a 58 Cruise control system..............-. 126
Head restraints. ..........0 0.00 eee eee 60 Laptimer......... 0... cee eee eee eee 128
Audi adaptive cruise control........... 129
Stowing and using............... 62 AUG PReISEMSEb. « sxevsue ie + enanene © x vunente © 6 on 136
Power sources ...... 00-00-00 eee eae 62 Audi active lane assist................ 139
Storing 62
Table of contents
Audiside assist'. «ssi: ov onace ev ewe a oe 142 Mele HOMe ai: 2 2 see. 2 6 eevee e waver ee ee 188
Audi drive select.......... 0.00 eee eee 146 Introduction... ... 6... eee eee eee 188
SGtUD = aus oo eRe & E REU o eee & Re 8 188
PAE Cpals, sis: 5 6 eos oe wae 3 wae 4 149 Using the Audi phone box............. 191
Generalinformation................. 149 Using the telephone.................. 192
Parking system plus...........000000- 150 FAVOTIteS ssmm « x eeu » ¥ eee 5g eee & ee 195
Rearview CaMeraien . 2 scsi a 6 sews 6 scree LS MeSSAGES sevice & ewan ov mer wo mE 6 wore 195
Park assist... 0.2.0.0... 0c eee eee eee 153 Listening to voicemail................ 198
Adjusting the parking aid............. 157 DiP@CtOry : sees ts sees ¢ 5 oe58 fe oes 3 Bes 198
Error'mesSages:. « ¢ esau ss een ec vee ee 158 Additional settings................0. 200
TEOUBLESHOOLIMG weuess «© cesses wo aiange 9 w enone 201
Intelligent Technology........... 58
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC).... 159 AGA GOMMBEE: esas se cows 5 x cares so ce 203
Brakes « sieves x 2 snare « @ amen wo srivete w © oearere 161 General information................. 203
Electromechanical steering............ 162 Audi connect Infotainment............ 204
All wheel drive (quattro).............. 162 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot................ 204
Energy management................. 163 Audi connect Infotainmentservices..... 204
Notice about data recorded by the Event Audi connect e-tron services........... 207
Data Recorder and vehicle control SECLINGS cama xo anes + nase se RENE 3 EEO 208
Modules... » wsivs + ee os ween ao ww + es 163 DatarPRiVvaGy iene 3 0 sccwexs o voctes ae ates so ons 209
Troubleshooting. .............20e0 00s 210
Infotainment system............ 165
Multi Media Interface............ 165 NAVIGAGIONT os: 6 eevee s & oro & emis 8 ¥en 211
Traffic safety information............. 165 Opening navigation.................. 211
Introduction. .............. eee eee eee 165 Entering adestination................ 211
MMI On/Off knob with joystick function.. 165 Personal route assistance............. 217
Infotainment system display.......... 166 Home address ..........--.00 eee eee 218
MMI operation...........002.0ee eee 166 Favorites... ......... 0.00.02. e ee eee 218
MMI TOUGH: « + some 2 + awam 6 2 aepme 5 2 ae 168 Directory contacts iis ss sees ss eis ss we 218
Control knob with joystick function... .. 170 Alternative routes.............0.000. 219
Letter/number speller................ 172 Additional settings.................. 219
Preettextisearch = swan: « x seme: 2 2 meme 2 oe 173 Mapes ¢ s secs 7 v meee Ye omen yo eee oe 220
Menus and Symbols.............00005 174 Satellite map 223
Map update 224
Multifunction steering wheel.... 176 Accessing traffic information.......... 225
IMtroduction « & sessed 2 2 sere 3% samen 2 ¥ weer 176 e-tron navigation functions............ 227
Radio... 2.6... eee eee eee 176 Troubleshooting.............-.020-05 227
Media: 2 sens: 2 sae 5 2 ems 5 x ee Gs 176
Telephones <x mcws v wae o ¥ waren © ¥ wasn 177 RAHI. e008 & 6 cise as worn so aman vo cewTe 228
Navigation..................0.0000. 178 Opening the radio................4.. 228
Radio functions as: <<: ese ss wees es pees 229
Voice recognition system........ 181 Radio menu 231
OPerating « « smsses s+ essen oo cesmere © eum @ & 180 PresetS......... 0.00.0... 0.22 e eee 231.
Command overview information........ 181 Additional settings ..............00 ee 231
GomMmanids » ver ¢ 2 ven = 2 sume 4 2 ees 8 182 Troubleshooting wei es anise 2 wn oo mew 232
External voice operation.............. 186
8V2012721B)
Table of contents
Siderairbagssevs x 5 soc vo wae wo wee © oe 294

Side curtain airbags.............0000. 297
CHARSYiea se maces oe wae ao we 301

Bluetooth audio player............... Important information............... 301
Wi-Fi audio player................... Child Safety Seats ecic ss eas i eae ay tes 307
Online media and Internet radio........ Securing child safety seats............ 312
Multimedia connections.............. LATCH system (lower anchorages and
Playing Media): : sees s seeg te eeee ee es tethers for children) .................. 315
Additional settings.................. Additional information............... 320
Supported media and file formats ......
Troubleshooting ..............eee eens Maintenance and Care........... 321
Checking and Filling............. 321
Fue biaiins x suiriea 2 o avawiae wi axamare wa annus fe a ana 321
Refueling. ........ 0... e cece eee eee 322
Operating: « sacs « = ews & x ewe 5 2 caw se Emissions control system............. 324
TroubleshOOting wes s+ snes » a cxecene 6 0 enews Engine:compartment « 6 ssves « « soneos vo o00 325
Engine Oil... 6... eee eee eee eee 328
SYStEMSECCINGS : . «ewe ss eeu ss ee COOLING 'SVSECM: s 2 ewes x x ces go ere + oe 332
Setting the date andtime............. Brake fluidees « & snus vv ewaee ve emare 9 ¥ er 334
MMI settings............-.0-.0-005- Electrical system. ...........000- 00s 334
Connection manager................. Battenycn ss mem : 5 sme § ee oe eee ee 335
System Update ssc. 2 ess ss eens oe ewes a Windshield washer system............ 337
Sound settings.............-.-.0000- Service interval display............... 338
Volume settingS .........:eeeeeeereee
Restarting the MMI.................. WVINGENS « « seers & ¢ poem 3 2 newR ox eES Eee 339
Softwarelicense information.......... Wheelsiand Tires: « isis «wasn « sienna © 0 339
Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator . 357
Safety Titst's « cews s ¢ cease 5 ¢ quwe 4 e ewe Tire pressure monitoring system....... 359
Driving safety....................
Care and cleaning................ 362
Correct passenger seating positions..... General information ous eis cows 362
Driver's and front passenger's footwell.. Car washes. « assis < + aavius wo cwavate o uhewees 362
Pedalarea.... 0... 2. eee eee eee Cleaning and care information......... 363
Active rollover protection system....... Taking your vehicle out of service....... 367
Safety belts...................088 Troubleshooting................. 368

General notes: « 2e.% 22 es.6: erence ees Emergencyassistance........... 368
Trunk escape latch. «2 nici seen e seers 368
General information 0.0.0.0... cee ees 368
Equipment.....................000. 368
Tire MODILIDY kit's mss se eons x e seme x oa 369
AlP DAG SYSTEIA oi:. 5 6 secs oe creseee oo ou Replacing wheels.................04. 371
Important information............... Spare tire... 02... cee eee eee eee 377
Frontiairbags’, « essa «= ssw. sy eee ee ee
Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System .
Knee airbags.......... 2... eee eee eee
Table of contents
Fuses and bulbs.................. B79.

FUSES 2. eee 379
Bil BSicc « « oean ¢ & ewe & nas ¢ eee Fe ee 381
Emergencysituations............ 383
General iss ¢ ¢ wars so ewe ob ee eo ae 383
Starting by pushing or towing.......... 383
JUPAS SEAREIG o coonese « onanens o> rawcens wo & renee « 383
Towing with atowtruck..............- 386
Raising the vehicle...............00.. 388
Customer information........... 389

Accessories and technical
GIYGIIOES . & cisswrs & crane a voeveas a 6 emawen ¥en 389
Warranty......... 00.0.0. cece eee 389
Audi Literature Shop « eis se eens ss ees 389
Driving in other countries............. 389
Maintenance, repairs, and technical
MOdITICALIONS xs s veanw + wees 2 x pom a 389
Accessories and parts................ 391
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 391
Declaration of compliance for
telecommunications equipment and
electronic systems............--.000- 392
Technical data.................... 394

Identification data................04. 394
Vehicle data... ..... eee eee eee 394
ENO: 5 scccans 2 & cussions « cave 9 6 ewan 2 wens 396

8V2012721B)
About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual applies to all versions of

G) Tips
this model. It contains important information,
tips, suggestions, and warnings for using your ve- Text with this symbol contains additional use-
hicle. ful information.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. This

is especially important if you loan your vehicle to
othersor sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment

range specified for this model at the time of
printing. Individual equipment options described
mayonly be available at a later date or may only
be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply toall

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the section indicates the validity, for example
“Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system”.
Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also
identified with an asterisk “*”.
The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

Some of the details in your vehicle maydiffer
from the illustration.
All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

“rear”, are based on the vehicle's direction of
travel.
*
Optional or vehicle-specific equipment
b> The section continues on the next page.
=> A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING”within a

section. If a page number is indicated, the
WARNING is located outside of the section.
ZA\ WARNING
Text with this symbol contains information
about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
rious personal injury or death.
@) Note
Text with this symbol contains information
about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
hicle.
@ For the sake of the environment

Text with this symbol contains information on
protecting the environment.
(aTZZZTOZAS
Quick access
Quick access
Controls at a glance
Fig. 2 Cockpit: right section
8
Quick access
©OOOCOLO Door handle @) Infotainment system display ..... 166

SidG-ASSISE « = + sear x o ews 3 foe « 142 @) Glove compartment ............
Central locking switch ........... 34 @) Drives for CD, DVD, SIM cards .... 234
Lightswiteh cic ee soveee 2 @ sven @ a « 48 @) Front passenger's airbag ........ 280
VENUS! « soe ¢ ¢ wees 2 ¢ ewe 5 © eer = 68 @3) Depending on equipment, buttons
Lever for: for:
—Turn signals and high beams .... 49 — Driveselect® sass ¢ = eae = & gees x 146
— High beam assistant .......... 49 — Start/Stop system ............ 78
— Active lane assist ............. 139 —{|="| button (plug-in hybrid drive) . 96
Multifunction steering wheel with: eParkcassist 3 ss sswiees « & ssswens wv come 153
Q
— Horn be —Parkingaid .................. 150

— Driver's airbag ............... 280 —Emergency flashers ........... 50
— Driver information system con- — Electronic Stabilization Control
HEOUSS oo seceie + a casmeie ts smote ot ee 17,20 (ES©) op < 2 sees « eee = oe g x oe 159
— Audio/video, telephone, naviga- — Infotainment system display .... 166
tion, and voice recognition con- — Front passenger airbag off indica-
EOUS! 2 2 secs 2 2 avec 8 someon oo sees 19,20 EGON coeseae +o smncams 4 «mines « 2 eeanews © ee 288
—L[k/steering wheel heating button . 19, 20 @8 Deluxe automatic climate control . 69
— Shift paddles ................ 86 @ Socket ...............000 0008, 62
Instrument cluster ............. 14 @8) Selector lever (automatic transmis-
O©O®
Windshield washer system lever .. 54 (0) 1) 82

Steering column, with the follow- @) Cupholders ..............0000. 62
ing, depending on equipment: G0 Infotainment system on/off button . 165
HIQitiomlocks « «series « snennee = 0 sme 74 @) Infotainment unit .............. 165
— Starting the engine when thereis @ Power top operation ............ 4l
amalfunction ................ 77 63. Center armrest with storage com-
Adjustable steering column ...... 73 partment. Depending on vehicle
®®
Lever for: equipment,it may have:

— Cruise control system ......... 126 — Audi music interface .......... 239
— Adaptive cruise control ........ 129 — Audi smartphone interface ..... 251
Knee airbag .........0 ee eee eee 292 —Audi phone box ............... 191
O©O8®@
Instrument illumination ......... 51 @4 Electromechanical parking brake . . 80

@) [START ENGINE STOP] button .... 75
Hood release: s « eves se ems se eras 327
Data link connector for On Board G8 Audi music interface ............ 239
Diagnostic System (OBDII) ...... 325
Gi) Tips
Switch (depending on the equip-
©
ment) for: Some the equipment listed here is only instal-

— Luggage compartment lid ...... 36 led in certain modelsor is available as an op-
tion.
— Fuel filler door (plug-in hybrid
OIiVe) coos 2 2 woe ¢ y cous ye ogee oe 101
Power exterior mirror adjustment . 52
©O®
Power windows .............4.- 38

8V2012721B)
Depending on equipment:
—Parentalcontrol .............. 38
— Central power window switch ... 38
Quick access
Indicator lights overview Brake system 4

=> page 24
Brake system ¥
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster => page 24
blink or turn on. They indicate functions or Electromechanical parking brake
malfunctions.
=>page 25
With some indicator lights, messages may ap- Electromechanical parking brake
pear and warning signals may sound. The indica- => page 25
tor lights and messages maybe covered by other
Cooling system
displays. To show them again in the driver infor-
=>page 25
mation system, select the second tab for mes-
sages with the multifunction steering wheel Engine oil pressure
=> page 17 or > page 20. => page 329
Some indicator lights in the display can display in Electrical system

=> page 334
several colors.
Safety belt
MMeTeelem lis => page 26
Electromechanical steering V
If the wa or indicator light turns on, check
=> page 162
the instrument cluster display for more informa-
tion. Steering lock
=> page 26
Applies to: vehicles with monochrome display
Engine stop while driving
If a message appears together with a central in-
=> page 27
dicator light A or wa the central indicator light
will indicate the priority of the warning. Ifa Transmission
white indicator light also appears, the central in- => page 88
dicator light will have its own color. For example, Hood
it appears together with Bw read the descrip- => page 27
tion for EE.
Adaptive cruise control
=> page 131
e-tron: system warning
Some indicator lights turn on briefly as a function => page 94
check when you switch the ignition on. These sys-
tems are marked with a V in the following tables.
If one of these indicator lights does not turn on,
e-tron: charging system
there is a malfunction in that system.
=> page 121
The following indicator lights may be available,
depending on the vehicle equipment: Yellow indicator lights
Central indicator light
Red indicator lights
=> page 10
Central indicator light Brake booster
=> page 10, => page 24
Audi pre sense
Electronic Stabilization Control
=> page 137
(ESC) ¥
=> page 27
10
Quick access
Electronic Stabilization Control Remote control key

(ESC) ¥ => page 77
=> page 27 Driver's door
Electronic Stabilization Control > page 28
(ESC) Battery in remote control key
=> page 159
=> page 32
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ¥
Bulb failure indicator
=> page 27
=> page 29
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ¥
Headlight range control system
=> page 27
=> page 29
Safety systems /
Adaptivelight
=> page 26
=> page 29
Brake pads
Light/rain sensor
=> page 24
=> page 29
Electromechanical parking brake
Transmission
=>page 25
=> page 88
Hill hold assist
Steering lock
=> page 27
=> page 26
Tire pressure
Engine start system
=> page 357, or > page 359
=> page 26
Tire pressure
Electromechanical steering
=> page 357, or > page 359
=> page 162
Engine control
Suspension control
=> page 27
=> page 29
Engine control
Power top
=> page 28
=> page 43
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Active lane assist
v
=> page 140
=> page 325
Side assist
Engine speed limitation
=> page 146
=> page 28
pre sense
Engine oil level (MIN)
=> page 329
=> page 139
Engine oil sensor
=> page 94
=> page 329
Electrical system
=> page 334
e-tron: Mileage
Tank system
=> page 94, > page 102
=> page 28
Washer fluid level
8V2012721B)
=> page 28
Windshield wipers
=> page 28
11
Quick access
e-tron: vehicle sound Speed warning system

=> page 94 => page 126
e-tron: charging system Speed warning system
=> page 121 => page 126
Cruise control system
Other indicator lights
=> page 126
Turn signals
=> page 29
=> page 126
Park assist
=> page 153
Park assist
=> page 127
=> page 153
=> page 127 Adaptive cruise control
=> page 132
=> page 131 Adaptive cruise control
=> page 132
=> page 131 Active lane assist
=> page 140
=> page 131 Side assist
=> page 146
=> page 132 pre sense
> page 139
Active lane assist
=> page 140 High beam assistant
=> page 49
Start/Stop system
=> page 78
Start/Stop system
=> page 78
High beams
=> page 49
Convenience key
=> page 77 High beam assistant
=> page 49
Engine start system
=> page 26 e-tron: electric drive ready mode
=> page 96
Transmission
=> page 88 e-tron: electric drive ready mode
=> page 94
AL e-tron: charging system
cy =>page 25
> page 121
PARK BRAKE
> page 121
=>page 25
e-tron: gasoline engine
=> page 96
=> page 25
Hill hold assist
=> page 94
=>page 27
Quick access
e-tron: tank system

=> page 102
=> page 121
8V2012721B)
13
Instrumentcluster
Instrument cluster overview

The instrument clusteris the central information centerfor the driver.
88-0400]
EH-l0r
12/5/2016
an ~\
ee
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit

Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview
[8-039]
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster

Fig. 4 Instrumentcluster overview
Vehicles with Plug-in hybrid drive”: the instru- @) Central area with
mentcluster is different > page 93. — Driver information system (Audi
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- virtual cockpit) Corrrnsnsssss ss 17
ing items may appear in the instrument cluster: — Driver information system (ana-
_ log instrument cluster) ........ 20
WY Coolant temperature £ or — Indicator lights .............. 10
boost indicator ..............-. 15, 23 3) Status line (displayed on one or two
WaGho Meter sis x 2 ewcsnss oo owen 2 ws seve 15 lines)
— With OFF status indicator ...... 74,75 © Trip odometer reset button ...... 16
— With READYstatus indicator ...74, 75, 78 pS A 5
) Speedometer/convenience display
) Tab area
Fuellevel .............0.0 000% 16>
14
Instrumentcluster
@® Speedometer ment cluster display turns on, the coolant tem-

@ Left additional display perature is too high > page 25.
There may be additional indicator lights in the Vehicles without a coolant temperature
tachometer (2), the speedometer(7), the status indicator
line © and, depending on the instrumentcluster, The B indicator light turns on when the coolant
above or below the central area (4). temperature is high > page 25. Refer to 9@.
The following pages will primarily show illustra-
tions of the multi-color analog instrument clus- C) Note
ter*. The display and/or position of the element — Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in
shown mayvary in monochrome instrument clus- front of the air intake impair the cooling ef-
ters or in the Audi virtual cockpit*. fect of the coolant. This increases the risk of
the engine overheating during high outside
@ Tips temperatures and heavy engine load.
— Depending on vehicle equipment, the in- — The front spoiler also helps to distribute
strument illumination (needles and gauges) cooling air correctly while driving. If the
may turn on when the lights are off and the spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
ignition is switched on. The illumination for be impaired and the risk of the engine over-
the gauges reduces automatically and even- heating will increase. See an authorized Au-
tually turns off as brightness outside indi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
creases. This function reminds the driver to for assistance.
turn the low beams on at the appropriate — Vehicles without a coolant temperature dis-
time. play: to promote a long engine service life,
— You can select the units used for tempera- avoiding high engine speeds, full accelera-
ture, speed, and other measurementsin the tion and heavy engine loads during approxi-
Infotainment system > page 253. mately the first 15 minutes when the en-
— Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per gine is cold is recommended. The amountof
hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour). time that the engine is cold depends on the
outside temperature.
Coolant temperature
indicator Tachometer
The tachometerdisplays the engine speedin rev-
The coolant temperaturedisplay @ > page 14,
olutions per minute (RPM).
fig. 4 or > page 14,fig. 3 only functions when
the ignition is switched on. To reducethe risk of The beginning of the red zone in the tachometer
engine damage, please observethe following indicates the maximum permissible engine speed
notes about the temperature ranges. for all gears once the engine has been broken in
and when it is warmed up to operating tempera-
Cold range
ture. Before reaching the red zone, you should
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn shift into the next higher gear, choose the "D" or
on, the engine has not reached operating tem- "S" selector lever position, or remove your foot
perature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accel- from the accelerator pedal.
erating and heavy engine loads.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Normal range Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are

different display formats available > page 93. >
8V2012721B)
The engine has reached its operating tempera-

ture once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge
turn on. If the & indicator light in the instru-
15
Instrumentcluster
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by press-

@) Note
ing the reset button ©) > page 14,fig. 4 or
The needle in the tachometer 2) > page 14, => page 14, fig. 3.
fig. 4 or > page 14,fig. 3 may only be in the
red area of the gauge for a short time or there The odometer showsthe total distance that the
is a risk of engine damage. The location where vehicle has been driven.
the red zone begins varies depending on the Malfunction indicator
engine.
If there is a malfunction in the instrument clus-
@ For the sake of the environment ter, DEF will appear in the trip odometer display.
Have the malfunction corrected as soon as possi-
Upshifting early helps you to save fuel and re-
ble
duces operating noise.
@ Tips
Fuel level
Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km
The display @) > page 14,fig. 4 or > page 14, (kilometers).
fig. 3 only functions when the ignition is switch-
ed on. When the display has reached the reserve Outside temperature
mark, a red LED appears and the ED] indicator display
light turns on > page 28.
If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the
very low speeds, the temperature displayed may
Technical Data > page 395.
be slightly higher than the actual temperature
outside due to the heat radiating from the en-
@) Note
gine.
Never drive until the tank is completely emp-
ty. The irregular supply offuel that results At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake
from that can cause engine misfires. Uncom- symbol appearsin front of the temperature dis-
busted fuel will then enter the exhaust sys- play > A\.
tem. This can cause overheating and damage
to the catalytic converter.
ZA WARNING
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based
Odometer on the outside temperature display. Be aware
that there maybe ice on roads even when the
outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C)
B8U-0340
and thatice can increase the risk of accidents.
<3 72 Olea
3/3/2016
Fig. 5 Instrumentcluster: odometer
Trip odometer and odometer

The trip odometer showsthe distance driven
since it was last reset. It can be used to measure
short distances.
16
Instrumentcluster
Multifunction steering Third tab Radio > page 176

wheel plus Media > page 176
Fourth tab Telephone* > page 177
Fifth tab Navigation* > page 178
Map* > page 178
a) This tab is only visible when thereis at least one indicator

light or message displayed.
@ Button [<>
— Switching tabs: press the [<>] button repeated-
ly until the desired tab is shown (for example,
Radio).
@ MEW] button
Fig. 6 Example: driver information system view (Audi virtu- Switching views: see > page 18, Switching
al cockpit) views.
@®|[=] button
Return to functions at higher levels.
©DJand[control buttons
Opening/closing the selection menu or options
menu > page 18.
@ Left thumbwheel
Fig. 7 Left side of multifunction steering wheel plus
— Selecting a function in a menu/list: turn the
left thumbwheel to the desired function (for ex-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ample, selecting a frequency).
— Confirming a selection: press the left thumb-
The driver information system contains multiple wheel %) © fig. 7.
tabs @ 9 fig. 6 that display various information — Zooming in/out on the map: when a map is
©. displayed, turn the left thumbwheel to zoom in
The following tabs maybe available, depending and out on the map.
on vehicle equipment:
First tab Vehicle functions > page 21

Second Messages
tab?)
8V2012721B)
17
Instrumentcluster
curd
(eT eran ests an ean rst)
BOrela
Fig. 8 Selection menu and options menu
Left control button

— Opening/closing the selection menu: press the
respective left control button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel > fig. 8 . You can select and
confirm a function in the selection menu using
the left thumbwheel (for example, selecting a
frequency band).
Right control button

— Opening/closing the options menu: press the
respective right control button on the multi-
function steering wheel fig. 8. You can
change any context-dependent functions and
settings using the left thumbwheel (for exam-
ple, additional station information).
G) Tips 03:30"
EOS
The availability of a selection menu or options
menu depends on the function that is select-
ed.
Fig. 9 Standard view: classic/sport*
18
Instrumentcluster
Other function buttons

Fig. 10 Enhanced view
Change view
> Press the [VIEW] button @) > page17,fig. 7 to
switch from the default view > fig. 9 to the en- Fig. 11 Right side of multifunction steering wheel plus
hanced view fig. 10. To return to the default
view, press the [VIEW] button again. @ el button
— Accepting a call: press the |<] button when
Setting the default view
there is an incoming call.
Applies to: vehicles with sport view
— Ending call: press the [¢] button during a
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can phone call to end the call.
choose between the classic and the sport view.
— Opening thecall list: if no phone callis in prog-
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the ress and there are no incoming calls, press the
<>} button on the multifunction steering €| button.
wheel.
@ |] button
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left
control button > Layout > Sport layout or Clas- — Switching the voice recognition system on:
sic layout. briefly press the |] button. Say the desired
command after the Beep.
Adjusting the additional display — Switching the voice recognition system off:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the addi- press and hold the [2] button. Or: say the com-
tional displays that can be selected mayvary. mand Cancel.
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the For more information about the voice recognition
<>] button on the multifunction steering system, see > page 181, Voice recognition sys-
wheel. tem.
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel:
@ Right thumbwheel
right control button > Additional display.
> Select the desired additional display. You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a
system message (for example, from the voice
@ Tips recognition system) when the sound is playing.
Applies to: vehicles with sport view — Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the
Always set the desired default view before right thumbwheel up or down.
driving, becausethe display functions will not — Muting or pausing: turn the right thumbwheel
be available for several seconds. down. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
—Unmuting or resuming: turn the right thumb-
wheel up. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
8V2012721B)
19
Instrumentcluster
@ ls] bei] button

— Selecting the previous/next track or station:
press the |<<] or [>>!] button.
— Fast forwarding/rewinding audio files: press
and hold the Kid] or [>>I button until the desired
location in the file is reached.
©) [x] button / steering wheelheating [#

— Steering wheelheating*: you can find addition-
al information in > page 71. Fig. 13 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel
— Programmable steering wheel button - Open-

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ing a function: press the [+] button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel. @ Operating the driver information system
— Programmable steering wheel button - Re-
The driver information system contains multiple
questing a function: press and hold the [+] but-
tabs @ > page17,fig. 6 that display various in-
ton.
formation @) > page 17,fig. 6.
— Programmablesteering wheel button in the
Infotainment system, select: [MENU] button > The following tabs may be available, depending
Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings on vehicle equipment:
> Steering wheel button assignment.
First tab Vehicle functions > page 21
©] button Second Messages
— Repeating the last navigation prompt: press tab?)
the [| button when route guidanceis active. Third tab Radio > page 176
— Changing the voice guidance volume: when Media > page 176
route guidanceis active, turn the right thumb- Fourth tab Telephone* > page 177
wheel upward or downward during a navigation Fifth tab Navigation* > page 178
prompt.
a) This tab is only visible when thereis at least one indicator
light or message displayed.
Multifunction steering
— Switching tabs: press the [<>] button repeated-
wheel
ly until the desired tab is shown.
— Opening/closing the menu: press the [=] but-
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster ton.
— Selecting a function in the menu/list: turn the
Sy3|yl
|
Baa left thumbwheel to the desired function.
a — Confirming a selection: press the left thumb-
wheel to confirm your selection.
— Returning to functions at higher levels: press
the [>] button.
— Scrolling within lists: turn the left thumb-
wheel quickly.
@|el button
Fig. 12 Left side of multifunction steering wheel
— Accepting a call: press the |<] button when
there is an incoming call.
— Ending call: press the |¢] button during a
phone call to end the call.
20
Instrumentcluster
— Opening thecall list: if no phone call is in prog- @ [=] Button

ress and there are no incoming calls, press the — Repeating the last navigation prompt: press
€| button. the |} button when route guidance is active.
@|[2J Button — Changing the voice guidance volume: when
route guidanceis active, turn the right thumb-
— Switching the voice recognition system on:
wheel upward or downward during a navigation
briefly press the [2] button. Say the desired
prompt.
command after the Beep.
— Switching the voice recognition system off:
press and hold the |] button. Or: say the com-
Vehicle functions
mand Cancel.
For more information about the voice recognition

The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of
system, see > page 181, Voice recognition sys- the driver information system. Additional vehicle
tem. functions can be accessed depending on the vehi-
@ Right thumbwheel cle equipment.
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a > Press either the [=] button or the left control
system message (for example, from the voice button depending on the vehicle equipment.
recognition system) when the sound is playing.
— On-board computer > page 21, or > page 22
— Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the — Efficiency program > page 23
right thumbwheel up or down. — Digital speedometer
— Muting or pausing: turn the right thumbwheel — Lap timer > page 128
down. Or: press the right thumbwheel. — Assist > page 126
— Unmuting or resuming: turn the right thumb- — Reduced display
wheel up. Or: press the right thumbwheel. — Energy flow > page 99
—Lap times > page 128
© ls] / bei] Button
— Statistics > page 129
— Selecting the previous/next track or station: — Sport displays > page 24
press the |<] or [>>!] button.
— Layout > page 18
— Fast forwarding/rewinding audio files: press
and hold the kid} or [DDI button until the desired
Trip computer (Audi virtual cockpit)
location in the file is reached.
© [x] button / steering wheel heating* |[#

— Steering wheel heating”: you can find addition-
al information in > page 71.
— Programmable steering wheel button - Open-
ing a function: press the [+] button on the mul- nialaemniemeseeniael
tifunction steering wheel. Cer eee) crs
— Programmablesteering wheel button - Re-

questing a function: press and hold the [+] but-
ton.
— Programmablesteering wheel button in the Fig. 14 Instrumentcluster: fuel consumption display
Infotainment system, select: [MENU] button >
Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle settings
8V2012721B)
> Steering wheel button assignment.
21
Instrumentcluster
Resetting values to zero listed first. If more than three items using power
Requirement: the Fuel consumption, Short-term are switched on, the equipment that is currently
memory, or Long-term memorydisplay must be using the most power is displayed. A chart also
selected. showsyou the current total ofall other consum-
e rs.
> To reset the values in the respective memory to
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on Tips
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec-
The date, time of day, and time and date for-
ond. Or
mat can be setin the Infotainment system
> On the multifunction steering wheel, select:
=> page 253.
the right control button > Reset values*.
The following displays are available, depending Trip computer (analog instrument cluster)
on vehicle equipment: Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
— Date and time > page 253
B8U-0402
— Plug-in hybrid drive: Range > page 95
— Average consumption
— Short-term memory overview
— Long-term memoryoverview
— Energy consumers > page 22
— Driver assistance > page 126
The short-term memorycollects driving informa-

tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
Fig. 15 Instrumentcluster: fuel consumption display
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
two hoursafter switching the ignition off, the Resetting values to zero
new values are included when calculating the cur-
Requirement: the Fuel consumption, Short-term
rent trip information.
memory, or Long-term memory display must be
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term selected.
memoryis not erased automatically. You can se-
> To reset the values in the respective memory to
lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on
tion yourself.
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec-
Fuel consumption ond.
The current fuel consumption can be shown using On-board computer

a bar graph > fig. 14. The average consumption
In the trip computer, you can call up the follow-
stored in the short-term memoryis also dis-
ing displays one after the other by turning the
played. If the bar is green, your vehicle is saving
left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
fuel using the following methods:
wheel:
— Recuperation: electrical energy can be stored in
— Date > page 253
the battery when the vehicle is coasting or driv-
— Remaining range
ing downhill. The bar will move toward (1.
— Plug-in hybrid drive*: Tachometer > page 93,
Energy consumers* Range > page 95, Energy flow display
The Energy consumersview lists other equip- => page 99
ment thatis currently affecting fuel consump- — Short-term memory
tion. The display showsup to three equipment — Average consumption
items. The equipment using the most power is — Long-term memory
22
Instrumentcluster
— Engine oil temperature* power is displayed. A chart also shows you the
current total of all other consumers.
The short-term memorycollects driving informa-
— Economytips: in certain situations, economy
tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
tips appear automatically for a short time in
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
the efficiency program. If you follow these
two hoursafter switching the ignition off, the
economytips, you can reduce your vehicle's fuel
new values are included when calculating the cur-
consumption. To turn an economy message off
rent trip information.
immediately after it appears, press any button
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term on the multifunction steering wheel.
memoryis not erased automatically. You can se-
lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
Engine oil temperature display and boost
tion yourself. indicator
Applies to: vehicles with engine oil temperature display/boost
@ Tips indicator
The date, time of day, and time and date for- Engine oil temperature indicator 2
mat can be setin the Infotainment system
=> page 253.
The engine oil temperatureis only shown in the
lap timer display > page 128.
Efficiency program
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency program
Resetting values to zero The engine oil temperature is only shownin the
> To reset the values in the respective memory to enhanced viewor in the sport view* > page 18.
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec- When engine oil temperatures are low,the dis-
ond. play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-
ter.
The efficiency program can help you to use less
The engine has reached its operating tempera-
fuel. It evaluates driving information in reference
ture when the engine oil temperature is between
to fuel consumption and showsother equipment
176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under normal
influencing consumption. Economy tips provide
driving conditions. The engine oil temperature
advice for efficient driving.
maybe higher if there is heavy engine load and
The efficiency program receives distance and con- high temperatures outside. This is not a cause for
sumption data from the short-term memory.If concern as long as the EE => page 329 or =
the data in the efficiency program is deleted, the = page 329 indicator lights do not turn on.
values in the short-term memoryarealsoreset.
Boostindicator
The following additional displays may be availa-
ble in the efficiency program, depending on vehi-
cle equipment: The boost indicator is only shown in the en-
hanced view or in the sport view* > page 18.
— Other equipment: other equipment thatis cur-
rently affecting fuel consumption is listed in
The current engine load (meaning the current
the efficiency program. The display shows up to
boost pressure) is indicated by a bar.
three other equipment items. The equipment
using the most power is listed first. If more
than three items using power are switched on,
8V2012721B)
the equipment thatis currently using the most
23
Instrumentcluster
STAM hee eele Tire Pressure Monitoring System*

Applies to: vehicles with shift light indicator The tire pressure monitoring system displays the
The shift light indicator informs the driver when current tire pressures and temperature. Also see
the rpm limit is reached. => page 359, Tire pressure monitoring system.
Accessing the shift light indicator Messages

Requirement: tiptronic mode mustbe activated
BRAKE@)/‘C) Brake system
=> page 86.
> Select the sport view > page 18. The shift light If this indicator light turns on, there is a malfunc-
indicator is displayed with green, yellow and tion in the brake system.
red ranges in the upper areas of the tachome- EG ©) Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake
ter. fluid level
The shift light indicator will blink red when ap- Stop the vehicle and check the brakefluid level.
proaching the engine speed limit. Shift to the See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
next highest gear at the right time. Service Facility for assistance.
GRNG / BH warning! No brake booster!

Sport displays
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit and sport dis- If the brake booster is not working, you have to
plays use much moreforce when braking the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the sport See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
displays may include the G-meter, the engine da- Service Facility for assistance.
ta and the tire pressure monitoring system. GRING / Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle
safely
Accessing the sport displays
If the indicator light turns on and this message
> Open the first vehicle functions tab using the
appears, there is a malfunction in the brake brake
[<>] button on the multifunction steering
system.
wheel.
> Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left 1f BES / Gand B also turn on, there is a mal-
control button > Sport displays. function in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribu-
> Turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction tion.
steering wheel until the desired sport display
Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
appearsin the instrumentcluster.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
G meter* sistance > A\.
The G meter displays the longitudinal and lateral GG t @ Parking brake: malfunction! Safely
acceleration. The maximum values that are stop vehicle. See owner's manual
reached are stored and displayed when the vehi-
— If the indicator light and the message appear
cle is stationary.
when the vehicle is stationary or after switch-
> To reset the stored values, select on the multi- ing the ignition on, check if you can release the
function steering wheel: right control button > parking brake. If you cannotrelease the parking
Resetvalues. brake, see an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility. If you can release the
Engine data*
parking brake and the message still appears,
The engine data displays the current power and see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au-
torque. di Service Facility immediately to have the mal-
function corrected.
24
Instrumentcluster
— If the indicator light and message appear while could cause the rear of the vehicle to
driving, the hill start assist or emergency brak- swerve, which increasesthe risk that the ve-
ing function may be malfunctioning. It may not hicle will slide. Do not continue driving. See
be possible to set the parking brake or release an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au-
it once it has been set. Do not park your vehicle di Service Facility for assistance.
on hills. See an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
PARK/(@)/S2 Electromechanical parking
GG / fe Brake pads: wear limit reached. You PEL
can continue driving. Please contact Service
If the in / ® indicator light turns on, the
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized parking brake was set.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as
soon as possible to have the malfunction correct-
If the [MW / indicator light flashes, the brak-
ing force has not built up enough or it has de-
ed.
creased. Select the "P" selector lever position to
Brake booster: limited function. You can contin- help secure the vehicle. Make sure the indicator
ue driving. Please contact Service light is off before you start driving.
There is a malfunction in the brake booster. The wg Parking brake: malfunction! Safely stop ve-
brake booster is available, but its effectiveness is hicle. See owner's manual
reduced. Braking behavior may be different from
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive
how it normally functions and the brake pedal
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
mayvibrate. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on hills,
have the malfunction corrected.
because it could roll.
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual
ES / ZING / (@) Parking brake: auto release
The brake booster remains active for a brief peri- unavailable
od of time after switching off the ignition. Secure
If this message appears, press the brake pedal
the vehicle from rolling by selecting “P” (auto-
first and then release the parking brake.
matic transmission) or shift into 1st gear (man-
ual transmission) and set the parking brake. FS / (ENG / (@) Parking brake: warning!
Vehicle parked too steep
ZA\ WARNING There is not enough braking force to hold the ve-
— Read and follow the warnings in hicle in place. The brakes have overheated. The
=> page 325, General information before vehicle could roll away, even on a small incline.
opening the hood and checking the brake
fluid level. G) Tips
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
For additional information on the parking
marking, it can impair the braking effect and
brake, see > page 80.
driving safety, which increase the risk of an
accident. Do not continue driving. See an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi meerUe
Service Facility for assistance. || Turn off engine and check coolantlevel! See
— If the brake system indicator light turns on owner's manual
together with the ABS and ESC indicator
lights, the ABS/ESC regulating function may || Stop vehicle and check coolant level! See
8V2012721B)
be malfunctioning. Functions that stabilize owner's manual

the vehicle are no longer available. This The coolant level is too low.
25
Instrumentcluster
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the

coolant level > page 332.
ZA WARNING
Have the safety systems inspected immedi-
Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to > page 101. ately. Otherwise, there is a risk that the sys-
— If the coolant level is too low, add coolant tems maynotactivate during a collision,
=> page 333. Only continue driving once the in- which increases the risk of serious injury or
dicator light turns off. death.
B Coolant temperaturetoo high! Pleaselet en-

gine run while vehicle is stationary Eva tlt
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to The A indicator light stays on until the driver's
cool off, until the indicator light turns off. and front passenger's safety belts are buckled.
Abovea certain speed, there will also be a warn-
— If the indicator light does not turn off, do not
ing tone.
continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility (i) Tips
for assistance.
For additional information on safetybelts,
ZA\ WARNING see > page 268.
— Never open the hood if you can see or hear

steam or coolant escaping from the engine @- Steering lock
compartment. This increases the risk of 3] Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
burns. When you no longer see or hear
steam or coolant escaping, you may open The le—o| indicator light turns on if there is a mal-
the engine compartment with caution. function in the electronic steering lock. You can-
— The engine compartment in any vehicle can not turn the ignition on.
be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and al- Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be
low it to cool before working in the engine steered. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
compartment. Alwaysfollow the informa- ized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
tion found in > page 325, General informa-
|@—| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact
tion.
Service
() Note There is a malfunction in the electronic steering

Do not continue driving if the B indicator lock.
light turns on as this increases the risk of en- Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
gine damage. or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
malfunction repaired.
BFaT
Z\ WARNING
The ka indicator light monitors the safety sys-
To reduce the risk of an accident, do not tow
tems.
your vehicle when thereis a malfunction in
If the ka indicator light turns on or blinks, there the electronic steering lock.
is a malfunction in a safety system.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized =® Engine start system

Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
SB Engine start system: malfunction. Please
malfunction corrected.
contact Service
26
Instrumentcluster
Do not switch the ignition off because you may If the I indicator light turns on, the system has
not be able to switch it on again. switched the ESC off. In this case, you can switch
the ignition off and then on to switch the ESC on
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
again. The indicator light turns off when the sys-
tem is fully functional.
If the J indicator light turns on, ESC was
Ee Engine start system: malfunction. Please
switched off using the |£*| button > page 160.
contact Service
Stabilization control (ESC/ABS): malfunction!
There is a malfunction in the engine starting sys-
See owner's manual
tem.
If the BA indicator lamp and the fs i ©) ABS in-
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
dicator lamp turn on and the driver message ap-
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
pears, the ABS or electronic differential lock is
malfunctioning. This also causes the ESC to mal-
function. The brakes still function with their nor-
*®& Enginestop while driving mal power, but ABS is notactive.
If the S indicator light turns on, there may be a Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
malfunction in the engine or fuel supply. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
Moreforce is needed to steer and brake the mov-
ing vehicle when the engine is stopped. If the ve-
hicle is rolling, try to bring it to a stop off to the @ Tips
side from moving traffic. See an authorized Audi For additional information on ESC and ABS,
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as- see > page 159.
sistance.
*S Hill hold assist
ZX WARNING
Bw Hill hold assist: unavailable
If the engine stops while driving, you will
need to use moreforce to brake the vehicle. When this message appears, hill hold assistis
This increases the risk of an accident. There not available.
will still be power steering if the ignition is
Manual control!
switched on while the vehicleis rolling and
thereis sufficient vehicle battery charge. Oth- If this message appears, press the brake pedal.
erwise, you must use greater force when Continue driving with the help of the parking
steering. brake > page 80.
<5 Engine control
If the B indicator light turns on, the hood lock If the B indicator light turns on if there is a mal-
is not latched correctly. function in the engine control.
Stop immediately and close the hood Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
=> page 327. thorized Audi Service Facility to have the engine
checked.
53/2 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)

8V2012721B)
If the 3 indicator light blinks while driving, the

ESC or ASR (Anti-Slip Regulation) is actively regu-
lating.
27
Instrumentcluster
EPC Engine control AN} Tank system: malfunction! Please contact

Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engines Service
If the fa indicator light turns on if there is a There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system.
malfunction in the engine control. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to have the engine
checked. () Tips
For more information on fueling, see
Engine speedlimitation => page 322.
Applies to: vehicles with engine speed limitation
If the Bw indicator light turns on, the engine will G) Tips

be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
the instrument cluster. This protects the engine If the engine turned off becausethe fuel level
from overheating. was too low,then you may need to refuel with
up to 4.0 gallons (15 liters) of fuel in order
The engine speed limitation deactivates once the
for the vehicle to detect the new fuel level.
engine is no longer in the critical temperature
Otherwise, the engine may notrestart.
range and you have released the accelerator ped-
al once.
@® Washer fluid level
If the engine speed limitation was activated by
an engine control malfunction, the B or EPC in- If the ES indicator light turns on, the washer flu-
dicator light also turns on. Make sure the engine id is almost out. Fill the washer fluid for the
speed does not go above the speed displayed, for windshield washer system and the headlight
example when downshifting. Drive to an author- washer system* when the ignition is switched off
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- => page 337.
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ed. >! Windshield wipers
BESee) If the => indicator light turns on, then there is a

windshield wiper malfunction. Drive to an au-
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:For thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
additional information on refueling, refer to Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
=> page 101. rected.
fw Please refuel
<3 Driver's door*
The first time the indicator light turns on and the
message appears, there are approximately 1.8 B&B Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before
gallons (7 liters) of fuel in the tank on front leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
wheel drive vehicles, or approximately 2.2 gal-
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Select
lons (8.5 liters) of fuel in the tank on all wheel
the P selector lever position (automatic transmis-
drive vehicles.
sion) to secure the vehicle.
wy Please refuel immediately
If the indicator light turns on and this message or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
appears, the fuel tank is almost empty. Refuel malfunction repaired.
the vehicle immediately.
238
Instrumentcluster
-& Bulb failure indicator Light/rain sensor

Applies to: vehicles with light/rain sensor
If the 8; indicator light turns on, a bulb has
failed. The message indicates the location of the a Automatic headlights/wipers: malfunction!
bulb. See owner's manual
Replace the bulb immediately. The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning.
Vehicle lights: system fault! The low beams remain switched on at all times
for safety reasons when the light switch is in the
There is a malfunction in the headlights or the
AUTOposition. You can continue to turn the
light switch. Drive immediately to an authorized
lights on and off using the light switch. You can
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
still control all wiper functions that are inde-
have the malfunction repaired.
pendent ofthe rain sensor.
ZA\ WARNING Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer

— Light bulbs are pressurized and can explode or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
when theyare replaced, which increases the malfunction repaired.
risk of injury.
— With HID headlights (xenon headlights), the MSE amarace|
high-voltage component must be handled Applies to: vehicles with suspension control
correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal If the ¢ indicator light turns on, then there is a
injury. malfunction in the suspension control. Drive im-
mediately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Dynamic headlight range control ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction
repaired.
By Headlight range control: malfunction! See
owner's manual
Rete ere
There is a malfunction in the dynamic headlight
range control system, which maycause glare for If the a or B indicator light blinks, a turn sig-
other drivers. nal is turned on. If both indicator lights are blink-
ing, the emergencyflashersare on.
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual,
malfunction corrected. a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
BOP NEE Lahm
rected.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own-

er's manual
There is a malfunction in the adaptive lights. The

headlights still function.

8V2012721B)
29
Opening and closing
Opening and closing The following conditions prevent you from lock-
ing your remote control key in the vehicle:
Central locking
— If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
motecontrol key or by touching the locking
You can lock and unlock the vehicle centrally. You
sensor* ona door.
have the following options:
— If the most recently used convenience key*is
— Remote control key > page 32 inside the luggage compartment, the luggage
— Sensorsin the front door handles* > page 33 compartment lid will automatically open again
— Lock cylinder on the driver's door > page 35, after closing it.
or — If the last convenience key* that was used is de-
— Interior central locking switch > page 34 tected inside the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be
locked from the outside for a brief time > ©.
Turn signals
The turn signals flash twice when you unlock the ZA WARNING
vehicle and flash once when you lock the vehicle. — If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the vehicle key with you. This
If they do not flash, then the ignition maystill be
applies particularly when children remain in
switched on or one of the doors, the luggage
the vehicle. Otherwise the children could
compartment, or the hood maybe open, for ex-
start the engine or operateelectrical equip-
ample.
ment such as power windows.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock) —No one, especially children, should stay in
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the the vehicle when it is locked from the out-
side, because the windowscan no longer be
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). opened from the inside > page 35. Locked
doors makeit moredifficult for emergency
The vehicle will unlock again if the ignition key is workersto getinto the vehicle, which puts
removed, the opening function in the central lives at risk.
locking switch is activated, or one of the door
handles is operated. @) Note
In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
the doors will also automatically unlock to allow — If the convenience key* that was last used is
access to the vehicle. detected inside the passenger compart-
ment, then the vehicle cannot be locked
Selective door unlocking
from the outside. The turn signals will flash
The doors and luggage compartmentlid will lock several times to indicate this. If you do not
when theyclose. You can set in the Infotainment open the vehicle within a short time tore-
system whether only the driver's door or the en- movethe vehicle key, then the vehicle will
tire vehicle should be unlocked when unlocking lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle
=> page 34. from being left unlocked for long periods of
time. The keywill then be locked inside the
Unintentionally locking yourself out
vehicle.
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and — If the convenience key* that was used last is
the luggage compartment lid are closed and the detected inside the luggage compartment,
remote control keyis not in the vehicle. This re- it will not be possible to lock the luggage
duces the risk of locking yourself out accidental- compartment and the luggage compart-
ly. ment lid will open. The turn signals will >
30
Opening and closing
flash several times to indicate this. The you. If a key is lost, you should report it to your
doorswill lock. Always take the convenience insurance company.
key with you, or unauthorized people may
Electronic immobilizer
be able to enter the vehicle.
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of
@ Tips the vehicle. Under certain circumstances, the ve-
— Do not leave valuables unattended in the vehicle may notbe ableto start if there is a key
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe! from a different vehicle manufacturer on the key
—The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when chain.
you lock the vehicle. If the LED lights up for Data in the master key
approximately 30 seconds after locking,
there is a malfunction in the central locking During driving, data that is relevant for service
system. Have the problem corrected by an and maintenance is continuously stored on your
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi master key. Your Audi service advisor can read
Service Facility. out this data and tell you about the work your ve-
hicle needs. This applies also to vehicles with a
convenience key*.
G) Note
B8V-0376
Protect the remote control key against high

temperatures, direct sunlight, and moisture.
@) For the sake of the environment

XE Do not dispose of remotecontrol keys in
household trash. They contain materials that
can be recycled. Contact an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi ServiceFacility for
Fig. 16 Your vehicle key set moreinformation.
Remoteor convenience key* @ Tips

The convenience key* is a remote control key with — The operation of the remote control key can
special functions > page 33 and > page 75. be temporarily disrupted by interference
You can unlock/lock your vehicle with the remote from transmitters near the vehicle working
control key. To fold the key out and back in place, in the same frequency range (such as a cell
press the release button fig. 16. phone or radio equipment). Always check if
your vehicle is locked.
Number of keys
— For an explanation on conformity with the
You can check the number of keys assigned to FCC regulations in the United States and the
your vehicle in the Infotainment system. To do Industry Canada regulations, see
this, select the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left => page 392.
control button > Service & checks > Vehicle in-
formation. This way, you can makesure that you
have all the keys when purchasing a used vehicle.
Replacing a key
8V2012721B)
If a key is lost, see an authorized Audi dealer or

authorized Audi Service Facility. Have this key de-
activated. It is important to bring all keys with
31
Opening and closing
LED and batteries in the remote control key Remotecontrol key synchronization
The remote control key must be synchronized if
B8X-0506
the vehicle does not lock/unlock with the remote
control.
> Press the (@ remote control key button.

> Insert the key in the driver's door lock within 30
seconds > page 35.
> Press the @ buttonorfj button.
eT ele aire Rem cr ale mSMe)melt eke) |

Fig. 17 Remotecontrol key (rear side): opening the cover
B8U-0317
LED on the remotecontrol key
The LED in the remote control key informs you of
the key operation.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks

once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience
opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
> If the LED does notblink, the remote control
Fig. 18 Remote control key or convenience key: button pro-
key battery is drained. The = indicator light
gramming
and the message Please change key battery ap-
pear. Replace the battery in the remote control > To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button @
key. > fig. 18.
Replacing the remotecontrol key battery > To lock the vehicle, press the & button @ > /A\
once.
> Pry the cover @) off of the key @ using a coin > To unlock the luggage compartmentlid, press
fig. 17. the <¥ button @) briefly.
> Insert the new battery with the “+” facing up. > To open* the luggage compartment lid, press
> Press the cover back onto the keyuntil it clicks and hold the < button @) for at least one sec-
into place.
ond.
> To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] button
@) For the sake of the environment @. The vehicle horn and emergencyflashers
Discharged batteries must be disposedof us- are activated.
ing methods that will not harm the environ- > To turn off the alarm, press the LPANIC] button
ment. Do not dispose of them in household @ again.
trash.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open any of
G) Tips the doors, the hood, or the luggage compart-
ment lid within 45 seconds, the vehicle automati-
Replacement batteries for the remote control
cally locks again. This feature prevents the vehi-
key must meet the same specifications as the
cle from being accidentally left unlocked for a
original battery.
long period of time. This does not apply if you
press and hold the <¥ button @) for at least one
second.
32
Opening and closing
You can select in the Infotainment system if the Deactivating the unlock function
entire vehicle or only the driver's door should un-
You can deactivate the unlock function with the
locking when unlocking the vehicle > page 34. convenience key (keyless access) for one locking
and unlocking cycle.
Z\ WARNING
> Place the selector lever in the "P" position; oth-
Read and following all warnings > A\ in De-
erwise, the vehicle cannot be locked.
scription on page 30.
> Close the door.
> Press the f lock button on the convenience key
@) Tips
and touch the sensor on the door handle (driv-
— Only use the remotecontrol key when you er's door) one time within five seconds of press-
are within viewofthe vehicle. ing the button > fig. 19. Do not grasp the door
— The vehicle can only be locked when the se- handle while locking the vehicle, or else the ve-
lector lever is in the P position. hicle will not lock.
— Only use the panic function in an emergen- > To check if the function has been deactivated,
cy. wait at least 10 seconds and pull the door han-
dle again. The door should not open.
Unlocking and locking with the
After that, it will only be possible to unlock the
convenience key
vehicle using the remotecontrol key or by me-
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
chanically unlocking the lock cylinder. Keyless ac-
The doors and luggage compartment lid can be cess will be active again after the next time the
unlocked andlocked without using the remote vehicle is locked/unlocked.
control key.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle can only be
done at the front doors. The convenience key
B8v-0010
must no be more than approximately 5 feet (1.5

meters) from the door handle. It makesno differ-
ence whether the conveniencekeyis in, for exam-
ple, your jacket pocket, purse, or briefcase.
If you hold the door handle while locking, this

can impair the locking function.
The door cannot be opened for a brief period di-

Fig. 19 Door handle: sensor for locking rectly after Locking it. This allows you the oppor-
tunity to check that the driver's door is locked.
Unlocking the vehicle
The settings in the Infotainment system deter-
> Grasp the driver's or front passenger's door mine if the entire vehicle or only one of the doors
handle. The door unlocks automatically. is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle
> Pull on the door handle to open the door. => page 34.
Locking the vehicle
Z\ WARNING
> Place the selector lever in the "P" position; oth-
Read and following all warnings > A\ in De-
erwise, the vehicle cannot be locked.
> To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
the sensor on the door handle once fig. 19,
G@) Tips
> AX. Do not hold the door handle while doing
8V2012721B)
this. If your vehicle is left standing for a long peri-

od of time, note the following:
33
Opening and closing
— The proximity sensor switchesoff after a

few days to save energy. You then have to
‘\ WARNING
pull once on the door handle to unlock the - Read and following all warnings > A\ in De-
vehicle and a second time to open it. scription on page 30.
—To preventthe vehicle battery from dis- — The central locking switch also works when
charging, the energy management gradual- the ignition is switched off and automatical-
ly switches off convenience functions that ly locks the entire vehicle when the & but-
are not needed. You then may no longer be ton is pressed.
able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors. — The central locking switch is inoperative
when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
— Locked doors makeit more difficult for
Central locking switch
emergency workers to getinto the vehicle,
which putslives at risk. Do not leave anyone
behind in the vehicle, especially children.
Your vehicle locks automatically when it

reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). You can
unlock the vehicle again using the @ button in
the central locking switch.
Fig. 20 Driver's door: central locking switch

Setting the central locking system
> To lock the vehicle, press the & button > A\. You can adjust the central locking system to your
> To unlockthe vehicle, press the @ button preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
> fig. 20. equipment.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
switch, the following applies: ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle
settings > Central locking.
— The doors and the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened from the outside for security Door unlocking - You can decide if All doors or
reasons, such as to prevent unauthorized open- only the Driver's door should unlock. The lug-
ing while stopped at a light. gage compartmentlid also unlocks when All is
— The LED in the central locking switch turns on selected. If you select Driver's door in a vehicle
when all doors are closed and locked. with a convenience key*, only the door whose
— Front doors: you can open the doorsindividual- handle you pull will unlock.
ly from the inside by pulling the door handle.
If you select Driver's door, all the doors and lug-
— Rear doors*: pull on the door handle once to
gage compartmentlid will unlock if you press the
unlock the door. Pull on the door handle again
@ button on the remotecontrol key twice.
to open the door.
— In the event of a crash with airbag deployment, Long press to open windows- The convenience
the doors unlock automatically to allow access opening/closing function can be switched on/off
to the vehicle. > page 39.
Fold mirrors - If you switch the function on, the

exterior mirrors will fold in automatically when
the vehicle is locked.
34
Opening and closing
Confirmation tone - When checked off Y, a tone > Removethe cap from the opening > fig. 22.
will sound when you lock the vehicle ). > Insert the keybit in the slot inside and turn the
key all the wayto the right (right door) or left
Mechanically unlocking and locki mar (left door*).
doors
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or

Z\ WARNING
lock the doors separately. Read and following all warnings > A\ in De-
B8V-0009
Cees CL ei
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle

break-in, audio and visual warning signals are
triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switch-
ed on or off when locking or unlocking your vehi-
cle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
matically after a certain amount of time.
Switching the alarm off manually

0
Ss
Fa > To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
=
& the remote control key or switch the ignition
oO
on.
Break-in security feature

The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the
doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid.
Fig. 22 Front side of the door: emergency release
Unlocking and locking the driver's door

> To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the
unlock position @) > fig. 21.
> To lock the driver's door, put the selector lever
in the P position and turn the key once to the
lock position > A\.
The settings in the Infotainment system deter-
mine if the entire vehicle or only one of the doors
is unlocked when unlocking the vehicle
> page 34.
Locking the front passenger's door/rear

doors*
The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the
front passenger's door and the rear doors”. It is
8V2012721B)
only visible when the door is open.
)_ This function is not available in all countries.
35
Opening and closing
Luggage compartment — Never drive with the luggage compartment

lid lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
can enter the vehicle interior and create the
|
Opening and closing the luggage risk of asphyxiation.
compartment lid — Never leave your vehicle unattended when
the luggage compartmentlid is open. A
Bav--0014
child could climb into the vehicle through
the luggage compartment. If the luggage
compartment lid was then closed, the child
would be trapped in the vehicle and unable
to escape. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
allow children to play in or around the vehi-
cle. Always keep the luggage compartment
lid and the doors closed when the vehicleis
notin use.
— Always makesure no one is in the luggage
compartment lid's range of motion when it
is closing, especially near the hinges. Fin-
gers or hands could be pinched.
@) Tips
— When the vehicleis locked, the luggage
compartment lid can be unlocked separately
by pressing the << button on the remote
control key. The luggage compartmentlid
Fig. 24 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment
locks automatically when it is closed again.
lid
— In case of an emergencyor a faulty handle,
Opening the luggage compartmentlid the luggage compartmentlid can be opened
manually from the inside > page 37.
> Press and hold the < button on the remote
control key for at least one second, or
> Movethe selector lever to the "P" position and
pull the <2s switch* in the driver's door
> fig. 24, or
>» Press the handle in the luggage compartment
lid > fig. 23.
Closing the luggage compartmentlid

> Use the inside grip to pull the luggage com-
partmentlid down and allowit to close using a
gentle push > /\.
Z\ WARNING
— After closing the luggage compartment lid,
makesurethat it is latched. Otherwise the
luggage compartmentlid could open sud-
denly when driving, which increases the risk
of an accident.
36
Opening and closing
Mechanically unlocking the luggage > Removethe screwdriver from the vehicle tool
(oYnny oe Tataat tae eMac m alias kit > page 368. Use the flat side of the reversi-
Applies to: vehicles with emergencyrelease from inside ble screwdriver blade.
» Use the screwdriver to pry the cover off 3)
The luggage compartment lid can be released
> fig. 26.
from the inside in an emergency.
> Press the lever with the keyin the direction of
+
o
oO
the arrow (4) to release the luggage compart-
g
>
&
mentlid.
oO
Mechanically unlocking the luggage

compartment lid from the outside
Applies to: vehicles with emergencyrelease from outside
B8V-0319
Applies to: version 1
Fig. 25 Section of the luggage compartment: accessto the
emergencyrelease
Fig. 27 Luggage compartmentlid: emergencyrelease lock

cylinder
> Insert the key into the lock cylinder near the
handle.
> Turn the key counterclockwise.
Fig. 26 Section of the luggage compartment: access to the
emergencyrelease
Applies to: vehicles with emergency release from

the outside: Note the information in > page 37,
Mechanically unlocking the luggage compart-
ment lid from the outside.

> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seatfor-
ward > page 66.
> Pry off the cover using the key bit on the
opened vehicle key (@) © fig. 25.
> Press the lever with the key in the direction of
the arrow @) to release the luggage compart-
mentlid.

> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seatfor-
8V2012721B)
ward > page 66.
37
Opening and closing
Child safety lock There is a malfunction in the child safety lock.

Applies to: vehicles with mechanical child safety locks Press the button again.
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors If the message stays on, drive immediately to an
from being openedfrom the inside and the rear authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
powerwindowsfrom being operated. Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
ZAWARNING
B8U-0320
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
the vehicle. Otherwise children could start
the engine or operate electrical equipment
(such as power windows), which increases
the risk of an accident.
—A malfunction in the child safety lock could
allow the rear doors to be opened from the
inside, which increases the risk of an acci-
B8W-0085
dent.
Power windows
The driver can control all power windows.
rey
q
2
g
Fig. 29 Rear door: manual child safety lock =]
a
a
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock

for the power windowswitches in the rear
doors,press the 6&3 switch in the driver's door
> fig. 28. The indicator light in the button turns
on/blinks.
> To activate or deactivate the manual child safe-
ty lock for the rear door handle, open the rear Fig. 30 Driver's door: power windowcontrols
door and turn the key switch either in the direc-
tion of the arrow (to activate) or opposite the All power window switches are equipped with a
direction of the arrow (to deactivate) using with two-stage function:
the vehicle key > fig. 29. This will disable the
function of the rear door handle. Opening and closing the windows
> Makesure the child safety lock is working by > To open or close the window completely, press
checking the function on the rear power win- the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to
dow switch and door handle. the second level. The operation will stop if the
switch is pressed or pulled again.
Message in the instrument cluster display
> To select a position in between opened and
Childproof catch: malfunction! Please con- closed, pressor pull the switch tothe first level
tact Service until the desired windowposition is reached. >
338
Opening and closing
Power window switches Convenienceclosing feature

@ Left front > Press the f button on the remotecontrol key
@ Right front until all windows and the panoramic glass roof*
@® Left rear* are closed > A\. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
@ Right rear*
Touch the sensor on one ofthe front door han-
© Central switch* for opening or closing all side
dles and continue touching it until all of the
windowsat the same time
windowsand the panoramic glass roof* are
closed. Do not place your hand in the door han-
Z\ WARNING dle when doing this.
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition > Hold the keyin the driver's door lock in the lock
off and take the vehicle key with you. This position until all windows and the panoramic
applies particularly when children remain in glass roof* are closed > A\.
the vehicle. Otherwise the children could
start the engine or operate electrical equip- Setting convenience opening in the
ment such as power windows. Infotainment system
— Pay careful attention when closing the win- The function can be switched on/off in the Info-
dows. Pinching could causeserious injuries. tainment system > page 34.
— When locking the vehicle from outside, the
vehicle must be unoccupied since the win- Z\ WARNING
dowscan no longer be opened in an emer-
— Never close the windowsor panoramic glass
gency.
roof* carelessly or in an uncontrolled man-
ner, because this increases the risk of injury.
@) Tips — For security reasons, the windowsand the
After turning the ignition off you can still panoramic glass roof* can only be opened
open and close the windowsfor approximate- and closed with the remote control key at a
ly 10 seconds. The power windowsdo not maximum distance of approximately 6.5
switch off until the driver's door or front pas- feet (2 m) away from the vehicle. Always pay
senger's door has been opened. attention when using the & button to close
the windowsand the panoramic glass roof*
Convenience opening and closing so that no one is pinched. The closing proc-
Applies to: vehicles with convenience opening/closing ess will stop immediately when the f but-
ton is released.
All of the windows and the panoramicglass
roof* can be opened or closed at the same time.
Correcting power window malfunctions
For power top convenience opening and closing,
refer to the information in > page 42. You can reactivate the one-touch up/downfunc-
tion if it malfunctions.
Convenience opening feature
> Pull the power window switch until the window
> Press and hold the &@ button on the remote con-
is completely raised.
trol key until all windows and the panoramic
> Release the switch and pull it up again for at
glass roof* have reached the desired position.
least one second.
Or
> Hold the keyin the driver's door lock until all
windowsand the panoramic glass roof* have
8V2012721B)
reached the desired position.
39
Opening and closing
Panoramic glass roof WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten-
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof tion when closing the panoramic glass roof.
Always switch the ignition off when leaving
B8x-0200
the vehicle and always take the vehicle key
with you.
@) Note
Alwaysclose the panoramic glass roof when
leaving your vehicle. Rain can cause damage
to the interior equipment of your vehicle, par-
ticularly the electronic equipment.
Fig. 31 Section of headliner: panoramicglass roof button
@ Tips
The button has twostages. In the second stage, — For information about convenience open-
the roof automatically runs to the end position ing/closing, see > page 39.
(open/closed) when the button is operated brief- — You can still operate the panoramic glass
ly. The operation will stop if the button is press- roof for about 10 minutes after the ignition
ed/pulled again. is switched off. The switch is deactivated
once the driver's or front passenger's door is
@ Tilting/sliding
opened.
> To tilt the sunroof completely, press the switch — The panoramic glass roof can only be
briefly to the second level. opened when the temperature is warmer
> To close the roof completely, pull the button than -4 °F (-20 °C).
down briefly to the second level or slide the
button forward briefly to the second level ECCae Cem sal eal]
>A. Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof
> To select an intermediate position, press/pull
the switch in the first level until the desired po- If the panoramic glass roof detects resistance or
sition is reached. an object in its path while closing, the roof will
open again automatically. If the sunrooffails to
Opening/closing close after removing the object and after trying
> To open the sunroof completely, slide the but- to close a second time, you can perform an emer-
ton back to just before the second Level. gencyclosing.
> To close the roof completely, push the button > Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-
forward briefly to the second level or pull the tomatically, pull the switch until the roof
button down briefly to the second level > A\. closes.
> To select an intermediate position, press/pull
the switch forward/back in the first level until If you release the switch early, the panoramic
the desired position is reached. glass roof will open again.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manual-
ly, depending on the position of the panoramic
glass roof. The sunshade can be opened partially.
40
Power top
Power top Opening and closing the power top

Applies to: vehicles with power top
Automatic power top
B8V-0595
General information
The power top opens and closes automatically.

When open, the power top is stored completely
in the power top compartment. The power top
can be opened or closed at speeds up to 30 mph
(50 km/h). The power top will not open when the
temperature is below -5 °F (-15 °C).
Fig. 32 Center console: power top switch
Under normal conditions, the power top is wind-
and waterproof. In rare cases, small droplets of Requirement: the power top storage compart-
water may form under extreme weather condi- ment must be lowered > page 43 and the lug-
tions such as torrential or prolonged rain. That is gage compartmentlid must be closed.
normal and no causefor concern.
> Switch the ignition on.
Follow the care instructions to keep the power > To open or close the power top, pull or press
top free of leaks and to maintain its appearance and hold the switch @ until it is completely
=> page 362, Care and cleaning. Also observe the opened or closed.
following:
The status of the power top is shown in the in-
— Open and stow the power top only when it is
strument cluster display when operating the
clean and dry. Stowing the power top when it is power top switch.
damp can create imprintsin it, and if it is left
that way for long periods of time, mildew and You can close the power top when the wind de-
other damage can form. To prevent scratching flector is installed > page 44.
or damaging the power top, do not use any A message will appear in the instrument cluster
sharp-edged objects to remove ice and snow. if the power top cannot be opened or closed
The rear window maybe cleared ofice with a => page 43.
standardice scraper.
— Do not leave the power top open for several ZXWARNING
weeksor the creasesin it may become discol-
— When operating the power top, make sure
ored.
the function is not affected by wind or other
— Do not open the power top when the tempera- factors and that it does not interfere with
ture is below 32 °F (0 °C). The fabric in the
other drivers.
power top loses elasticity in sub-zero tempera-
— Never drive when the power top is not
tures.
locked correctly. The wind from driving
could cause the power top to open. This can
result in injuries and damage tothe vehicle.
— Make sure no one will be injured by the pow-
er top supports and other moving compo-
nents when opening and closing the top.
— The headroom in the rear is reduced when
opening and closing the power top. Make >
8V2012721B)
41
Power top
sure the rear passengers keep enough dis- Power top convenience opening and closing
tance from the power top to reduce the risk Applies to: vehicles with power top
ofinjury.
B8V-0009
— Visibility to the rear is limited when operat-
ing the power top. Avoid operating the top @)
while driving in reverse.
@) Note
%
— To prevent damage to the power top:
— do notstore any objects in the power top
storage compartment.
if
— make sure there is enough space above Fig. 33 Turning the key to open and close
the vehicle when opening or closing the
power top. Convenience opening with the driver door
—To reduce the risk of damage, make sure
lock
there are no sensitive objects in the power > Turn the key oncein the driver door lock to the
top storage compartment's range of mo- opening position @).
tion. > Turn the key to the opening position again
within two seconds and hold it there until the
@ Tips power top opens completely.
— To prevent the vehicle battery from draining
Convenience closing with the driver door lock
unnecessarily, do not open or close the pow-
er top repeatedly when the engine is switch- > Turn the key once in the driver door lock to the
ed off. closing position @).
— A message will appear in the instrument > Turn the key to the closing position again with-
cluster if there is a malfunction in the power in two seconds and hold it there until the pow-
top > page 43. er top closes completely.
— The power top can also be operated manual-
Releasing the key stops the opening or closing
ly temporarily if there is a malfunction
process immediately.
=> page 44, Power top emergency opera-
tion. An authorized Audi dealer or author- ZA\ WARNING
ized Audi Service Facility should diagnose
Read and follow the important safety precau-
and correct the cause of the malfunction as
tions > A\ in Opening and closing the power
soon as possible.
top on page 41.
— If the vehicle is parked with the power top
open, the vehicle interior is not protected
from damaging weather or unauthorized ac-
cess. Lock any items you leave behind in the
luggage compartment. Close the power top
before leaving the vehicle.
— The side windowsautomatically lower
slightly when opening or closing the power
top.
42
Power top
Power top storage compartment the power top is open. Becauseofthis, the cargo
Applies to: vehicles with power top area in the luggage compartment is smaller
when the power top is open than when it is
closed.
B Powertop: malfunction! You can continue

driving with limited functionality. See owner's
manual
This message appearsif there is a malfunction in

Fig. 34 Luggage compartment: power top storage com-
partment lowered
the system. Try to open/close the power top
again. If the message still appears, then have an
Facility correct the malfunction. Do notdrive
more than 30 mph (50 km/h)until it is corrected.
Power top: malfunction! Unable to operate
This message appears when there is a malfunc-

tion. The power top can be operated manually
=> page 44.
Power top: operation currently not possible

Fig. 35 Luggage compartment: power top storage com-
partmentraised If the power top is operated continually for a
long period of time, the overload protection acti-
The power top storage compartment must be vates for approximately 15 to 30 minutes. You
lowered to open the power top. To avoid damage, can open or close the power top again after that.
make sure that are no sensitive objects in the
storage compartment's range of motion. Z\ WARNING
Raising the power top storage compartment Never drive when the power top is not locked
correctly. The wind from driving could cause
> Press the trim on the handle in the direction of
the power top to open. This can result in inju-
the arrowtoraise the power top storage com-
ries and damage tothe vehicle.
partment © fig. 34.
Lowering the power top storage

compartment
> Press the trim on the handle in the direction of

the arrow to lower the power top storage com-
partment© fig. 35.
The power top storage compartment can be

raised when the power topis closed. This pro-
vides more cargo space in the luggage compart-
ment.
8V2012721B)
The open power top is stored and protected in

the power top storage compartment. The power
top storage compartment cannotbe raised when
43
Power top
Wind deflector Removing the wind deflector

Applies to: vehicles with wind deflector > Fold the handle (2) upward and fold the wind
° deflector frame back.
o
CQ
g > Fold the handle @) upwardand lift the center of
>
&
oO the wind deflector slightly @).
> Removethe wind deflector from the mountsin
the side trim on the passenger's side.
> Pull the wind deflector out of the mounts on
the driver side and lift it out.
> Fold the wind deflector together and storeit
securely.
Z\ WARNING
B8V-0281
— Do not use the wind deflector to secure car-
go.
— Be careful when installing so you do not
pinch your fingers.
— Pay attention to the traffic when installing
the wind deflector. Install the wind deflec-
tor from the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
aN oe
Fig. 37 Rear of the vehicle: positioning the wind deflector
C) Note
The wind deflector reduces air movement in the Do not lean against the vehicle when instal-
passenger compartment in order to makedriving ling the wind deflector. Hard objects and dec-
more comfortable. orations on clothing such as belt buckles can
scratch the paint.
The wind deflector is located in the luggage com-
partment in a storage bag*. G@) Tips
Inserting and positioning the wind deflector — The wind deflector works best when all of
> Open the rear window on the passenger's side. the windowsare rolled up while driving.
> Removethe wind deflector from the luggage — Only store the wind deflector in the storage
compartment and fold it apart once. The wind bag* when it is dry.
deflector is installed in the correct position
when the long side is toward the front and the Power top emergency
wind deflector frame is at the top. operation
> Insert both pins on the wind deflector @ into
the mountsin the side trim panel on the driv- General information
er's side.
> Fold the handle (2) upwardand lift the center of The powertop can be closed manuallyif thereis
the wind deflector slightly @). a malfunction.
> Now guide the wind deflector into the mounts
on the passenger's side (@) and presslightly in > Set the parking brake.
the middle of the wind deflector ©) until the > Open all windows.
handle locks in place. > Switch the ignition off.
> Raise the wind deflector completely. > To reduce the pressure in the power top hy-
draulics, pull the switch to open the power top >
44
Power top
and hold for approximately 10 to 15 seconds

@ © page 41, fig. 32.
Only close the power top manually in an emer-

gency. Have a second person assist. Drive imme-
diately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction
repaired.
Fig. 39 Opening the side covers

— Thereis a risk of pinching the hands or other
people during all of the power top emergen- > Open the luggage compartment lid.
cy operation steps. > Fold the rear seat backrests forward
— Makesureall windowsare lowered during => page 66.
emergency operation. > Removethe wheel wrench from the vehicle tool
— Do not reach into the power top supports kit.
or other moving components. > Close the luggage compartmentlid.
— Never drive when the power top is not > Pull the release loop downfrom the rear tore-
locked correctly. The wind from driving lease the power top storage compartment lid
could cause the power top to open. This can > fig. 38.
result in injuries and damage to the vehicle. > Slide the covers on both sides of the vehicle in
the direction of the arrow until they lock in
place > fig. 39.
The power top storage compartmentlid is not
latched after the emergency operation is com-
plete. Drive immediately to an authorized Au-
di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired.
Step 1: Release the power top storage

compartment lid
B8Vv-0283
Fig. 38 Rear seats folded forward: release loop for the

powertop storage compartmentlid
8V2012721B)
45
Power top
Step 2: Lift the power top storage Step 3: Open the locking pin
compartment lid out Applies to: vehicles with power top
tS
oO
Nn
a
B8V-0285
Ss
®
a
y=," =P
Fig. 42 Rear ofthe vehicle: opening the locking pin
Fig. 40 Lifting the power top storage compartmentlid out
and setting up the supports > Removethe cap on the trip and insert the
wheel wrench into the opening.
B8V-0286
> Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until it stops

to open the locking pin.
> Removethe wheel wrench.
Step 4: Close the power top

ry
©
S
2
>
o
Fig. 41 Power top storage compartment lid: supports set a
up
> Raise the power top storage compartmentlid

out of the power top compartment and hold it
in place @ & A\ in General information on
page 45.
> Secure the power top storage compartment lid
by pressing on the side supports on both
sides 2).
B8V-0289
Z\ WARNING
— Always makesure that the side supports on
the open power top storage compartment
lid are in place, even when the power top is
not fully open or closed. Otherwise, the
power top storage compartmentlid could
fall, which increasesthe risk of an accident.
— Avoid touching the support rods and other Fig. 44 Rear of the vehicle: lowering the edge of the power
moving parts when opening the power top top
storage compartment lid. If do you make

> Position yourself near the vehicle.
contact, your hands could be pinched.
> Hold the power top byits front edge and pull it
out completely = fig. 43 > A\ in Generalinfor-
mation on page 45.
46
Power top
> Lift the rear edge of the power top. — When pressing the power top downonto the
> Release the power top storage compartment lid windshield frame, make sure that you do not
by pulling on the side supports to release them. pinch yourself or anyone else.
> Close the power top storage compartment
lid @ and allow the rear edge of the power top @Tips
to lower(2).
Makesure the locking mechanisms are locked
securely.
Step 5: Lock the power top
ra
a
Q
3
uw
oO
oO
——W Vy
Fig. 46 Inside of the power top: locking the power top
» Press the power top onto the windshield frame

> fig. 45 > A\ in General information on
page 45.
> Insert the wheel wrench into the opening and
turn it counterclockwiseuntil it stops > fig. 46.
> Removethe wheel wrench and seal the opening
with the cap.
> Put the wheel wrench back into the vehicle tool
kit.
ZX WARNING
— When positioning the power top, avoid con-
tact with the supports or other moving
parts. Otherwise you could pinch your
8V2012721B)
hands.
47
Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision Audi adaptivelight

Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptivelight
Exterior lighting Adaptive light provides better visibility when it is
Sistem cL Lats eal dark by adapting the lights to the road conditions
based on speed, such as on expressways, rural
roads, at intersections, and in curves. The adap-
B8V-0430
tive lights only function when the light switch is
in the AUTO* position and the all-weather lights
are switched off.
AN WARNING
— Automatic headlights* are only intended to
assist the driver. They do notrelieve the
driver of responsibility to check the head-
Fig. 47 Instrumentpanel: light switch with buttons lights and to turn them on manually based
on the currentlight and visibility conditions.
Light switch © For example, fog cannot be detected by the
Turn the light switch to the corresponding posi- light sensors. So always switch on the low
tion when the ignition is switched on. 2and the beams ZO under these weather conditions
selected position turn on (except position 0). and when driving in the dark.
—To preventglare for traffic behind your vehi-
O - The daytime running lights automatically turn
cle, the rear fog lights should only be turned
on. In vehicles for certain markets, you can
on in accordance withtraffic regulations.
switch the automatic daytime running lights on
and off in the Infotainment system.
0) Tips
AUTO*- The headlights automatically adapt to
— Follow the regulations applicable to the
the surrounding brightness.
country where you are operating the vehicle
300 - Parking lights when stopping the vehicle and when using
the lighting systems.
2D - Low beam headlights
— If the vehicle battery has been discharging
Buttons for a while, the parking light may switch off
automatically. Avoid using the parking
When you turn the light switch to the AUTO* or
lights for several hours.
low beam headlight ZO position, you can activate
— The light sensor for the automatic head-
the following:
lights* is in the rearview mirror mount. Do
220 - All-weather lights. The front lights are ad- not place anystickers in this area on the
justed automatically so that there is less glare for windshield.
the driver from his or her own lights, for example — Only the front headlights turn on when the
when roads are wet. daytime running lights are switched on*. In
- Rear fog light(s) vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights
will also turn on.
Automatic headlight range control —In cool or damp weather,the inside of the
Applies to: vehicles with headlight range control
headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic head- fog over due to the temperaturedifference
light range control system that reduces glare for between the inside and outside. They will
oncoming traffic if the vehicle load changes. The clear shortly after switching them on. This
headlight range adjusts automatically. doesnotaffect the service life of the light-
ing.
48
Lights and Vision
Turn signal and high beam lever thm eee

Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
/ @
©
C
The high beam assistant automatically turns the
high beams on or off depending on the surround-
ing conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-

tect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
on the position of vehicles driving ahead and on-
coming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as oth-
Fig. 48 Turn signal and high beam lever er environmental factors and traffic conditions.
The lever operates the turn signals, the high Activating high beam assistant
beams and the headlight flasher. Requirement: the light switch must be set to AU-
Turn signals 15> TO, the low beams mustbe switched on and the
high beam assistant must be switched on in the
The turn signals activate when you move the lev- Infotainment system = page 50.
er into a turn signal position when the ignition is
switched on. The respective a or B indicator > To activate the high beam assistant, press the
light flashes. lever forward @) © page 49, fig. 48. The BY in-
dicator light in the instrument cluster display
@- Right turn signal appears and the high beams are switched on or
@- Left turn signal off automatically. The Ed indicator light turns
on if the high beams were switched on.
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the
lever (convenience turn signal). Switching the high beams on or off manually
High beams ZO and headlight flasher If the high beams did not switch on or off auto-
matically as expected, you may switch them on or
Movethe lever to the corresponding position:
off manually instead:
@®)- High beams on (vehicles with High beam as-
> To switch the high beams on manually, push
sistant* > page 49)
the lever forward @). The Egg indicator light
@ - High beams off or headlight flasher turns on. To switch the high beams off again,
pull the lever back @).
The =o} indicator light in the instrument cluster
> To switch the high beams off manually, pull the
turns on.
lever back @). The high beam assistant is deac-
ZA WARNING tivated.
High beams can cause glare for other drivers, Operating the headlight flasher
which increasesthe risk of an accident. For > To operate the headlight flasher when the high
this reason, only use the high beams or the beam assistant is activated and high beams are
headlight flasher when theywill not create switchedoff, pull the lever back (). The high
glare for other drivers. beam assistant remains active.
Messagesin the instrumentcluster display

High beam assistant: malfunction! See own-
8V2012721B)
er's manual
49
Lights and Vision
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer Automatic headlights*

or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the You can adjust the following settings in the Auto-
malfunction repaired. You can still switch the matic headlights menu:
high beams on or off manually.
Activation time® - You can adjust if the head-
Headlight assistant: currently unavailable. lights switch on Early, Medium or Late according
No camera view to the sensitivity of the light sensor.
Headlight assistant: currently unavailable. Headlight assistant* - You can switch the high
Camera view restricted due to surroundings. beam assistant* on and off.
See owner's manual
Entry/exit lighting*
The camera viewis blocked, for example by a
sticker or debris. Please clean the windshield. You can switch the entry/exit lighting* on and off.
When it is dark,it illuminates the area around
The sensor is located in the interior rearview mir-
the vehicle when unlocking the vehicle and after
ror mount. Do notplace any stickers in this area
switching off the ignition and opening the driv-
on the windshield.
er's door.
Z\ WARNING The entry/exit lighting only works when it is dark

High beam assistant is only intended to assist and the light switch is in the AUTO*position.
the driver. The driver is still responsible for Daytime runninglights)
controlling the headlights and may need to
switch them on and off manually depending The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off. When daytime running lights are turned on,
on light and visibility conditions. It may be
necessary to operate them manually in situa-
the lights will stay on continuously whenever the
tions such as: ignition is switched on.
— In adverse weather conditions such as fog,
heavy rain, blowing snowor spraying water. Emergencyflashers
— On roads where oncoming traffic may be
B8V-0210
partially obscured, such as expressways.
— If there are road users with poor lighting,
such as bicyclists.
—In tight curves and on steep hills.
—In poorlylit areas.
— With strong reflectors, such as signs.
— If the area of the windshield near the sensor
is fogged over, dirty, icy or covered with a
sticker. Fig. 49 Instrument panel: emergency flasher button
NITIESTare datacom ce LULA The emergency flashers makes other drivers

aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment
system.
> Press the A button to switch the emergency
flashers on or off.
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the
settings > Exterior lighting. emergencyflashers are switched on by using the >
D_ This function is not available in all countries.
sO
Lights and Vision
turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop Rear interior lighting
temporarily. Appliesto: vehicles with rear reading lights
The emergencyflashers also work when the igni-

tion is turnedoff.
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting
x
3
g
>
&
oO
Fig. 52 Headliner: rear reading lights (example)
> To turn a reading light on or off, press the 7%

or “S* button.
Mc tacelm ce Label}
Appliesto: vehicles withinterior lighting
The Interior lighting can be adjustedin the Info-

B8V-0617
tainment system.

ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle
settings > Interior lighting.
You maybe able to adjust the brightness of the

individual zones, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
Applies to: vehicles with touch-sensitive reading lights >» Press the right control button and select one of
Fig. 51 Headliner: frontinteriorlights the zonesthat is shown.
The interior lighting turns on when you switch

Press the corresponding button in the headliner
the headlights on while the ignition is on.
to activate the following:
ae" =nterior lighting on/off Mera rae ieyatla}

4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
oo. . You can adjust the background brightness of the
ing is controlled automatically.
instruments and displayillumination.
“* - Reading lights on/off
2
yt
Applies to: vehicles with touch-sensitive reading lights g
>
ios
a
> To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
face @ briefly > fig. 51.
> To activate the manual dimming function,
touch the surface @ when the light is switched
off and keep touching it until the desired
brightnessis reached.
8V2012721B)
Fig. 53 Instrumentillumination
51
Lights and Vision
> Press the knob to release it. Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt
> Turn the knob toward "-" or "+" to reduceor in- function*
crease the brightness. To help you see the curb when backing into a
> Press the knob again to return it to its original parking space, the surface of the mirror tilts
position. slightly. For this to happen, the knob mustbe in
the position for the front passenger's exterior
G)Tips mirror.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the instru- You can adjustthe tilted mirror surface by turn-
ment illumination (needles and gauges) may ing the knob in the desired direction. When you
turn on when the lights are off and the igni- moveout ofreverse and into another gear, the
tion is switched on. The illumination for the new mirror position is stored and assigned to the
gauges reduces automatically and eventually key you are using.
turns off as brightness outside increases. This
function reminds the driver to turn the low The mirror goes back into its original position
beams on at the appropriate time. once you drive forward faster than 9 mph
(15 km/h) or turn the ignition off.
Vision
ZA\ WARNING
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex)
enlarge the field of vision. However, they
RAZ-0150
makeobjects in the mirror appear smaller and

farther away. You may estimate incorrectly
when you usethese mirrors to gauge your dis-
tance from the vehicles behind you when
changing lanes, which increases the risk of an
accident.
© @) Note
Fig. 54 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors (exam-

— Applies to: vehicles with power folding exte-
ple) rior mirrors: If the mirror housing was
moved by outside forces (such as an impact
Turn the knob to the desired position: when maneuvering), you must use the pow-
er folding function to fold the mirror all the
0 - All adjustment functions are deactivated.
wayout. The mirrors will make a loud noise
C)/ © - Adjusts the left/right exterior mirror. when theylatch into place. The mirror hous-
Movethe knob in the desired direction. ing must not be moved back into place by
GA - Heats* the mirror glass depending on the hand because this could impair the function
outside temperature.
of the mirror mechanism.
— Applies to: vehicles without power folding
©) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir- exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was
rors out, turn the knob to one of the other posi- moved by outside forces (such as an impact
tions. In the Infotainment system, you can select when maneuvering), you must moveit back
if the mirrors fold in automatically when you lock in place by hand.
the vehicle > page 34. — If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you mustfold the exterior mirrors in
to reducethe risk of damage to the mirrors.
Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* >
52
Lights and Vision
by hand. Only fold them in and out using least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting
the power controls. unless this is recommended by medical pro-
fessionals. Seek medical attention immedi-
@ Tips ately.
If the power adjustmentfails, both mirrors
can be adjusted by hand by pressing on the @) Note
edge of the mirror surface. Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming rearview
mirror
Dimming the mirrors Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mir-
ror glass. This liquid damages plastic surfa-
Your vehicle is equipped with a manual or auto- ces. Clean this liquid as quickly as possible
matic* dimming rearview mirror. with a wet sponge.
Manual dimming rearview mirror

@® Tips
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back. Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming rearview
mirror
Automatic dimming rearview mirror*
— If the light reaching the rearview mirror is
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automati- obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
cally when light shines on them, for example will not function correctly,
from headlights on a vehicle behind you. — The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim
when the interior lighting is turned on or
ZA WARNING the reverse gear is selected.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming rearview
mirror
Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mir-

ror glass. This liquid can irritate the skin, eyes
B8X-0209
and respiratory system. If there is contact
with the fluid, flush immediately with plenty
of water. Consult a physician if necessary.
— Repeated or long-term exposureto electro-
lyte fluid can lead toirritation of the air-
ways, especially in people with asthma or
other respiratory conditions. Take deep
breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the Fig. 55 Left side: sun visor (example)
doors and windowsas wide as possible.
— If electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, flush The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets
them thoroughly with a large amount of and turned toward the doors (@). The sunshade
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then can also be moved back and forth lengthwise in
seek medical attention. this position*.
— If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with The mirror light switches on when the cover over
the skin, flush the affected area with clean the vanity mirror* @) opens.
water for at least 15 minutes and then clean
with soap and water and seek medical atten-
tion. Clean affected clothing and shoes thor-
oughly before wearing again.
8V2012721B)
— If the fluid was swallowed and the person is

conscious, flush the mouth with water for at
53
Lights and Vision
Windshield wipers ©®- Clean the windshield . To eliminate water

droplets, the windshield wipers perform one af-
Switching the windshield wipers on terwipe after several seconds while driving in
temperatures above 39 °F (4 °C). You can switch
B8V-0600
this function off by moving the lever to position
© within 10 seconds ofthe afterwipe. The after-
wipe function is reactivated the next time you
switch the ignition on.
Clean the headlights. The headlight washer sys-

tem operates only when the low beam headlights
are switched on. If you movethe lever in position
©, the headlights will be cleaned in fixed inter-
vals.
B8v-0601 Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper

©- Wipe the rear window &. The rear wiper
moves about every 6 seconds.
The rear wiper automatically switches on when

the reverse gear is selected and the front wind-
shield wipers are on and running.
@- Clean the rear window @. The number of

wipes depends on howlong the lever is held in
Fig. 57 Rear window wiper* operation position @).
Move the windshield wiper lever S7 to the corre- ZX WARNING

sponding position: — The rain sensor* is only intended toassist
© - Windshield wipersoff the driver. The driver maystill be responsi-
ble for manually switching the wipers on
@- Interval mode. To increase/decrease the wip- based on visibility conditions.
er intervals, move the switch (A) to the left/right. — The windshield mustnot be treated with
In vehicles with a rain sensor, the wipers turn on water-repelling windshield coating agents.
in the rain once the vehicle speed exceeds ap- Unfavorable conditions, such as wetness,
proximately 2 mph (4 km/h). The higher the sen- darkness, and when the sun is low, can
sitivity of the rain sensor that is set (switch @) to cause increased glare, which increases the
the right), the earlier the windshield wipers react risk of an accident. Wiper blade chatter is al-
to moisture on the windshield. You can deacti- so possible.
vate the rain sensor mode in the Infotainment — Properly functioning windshield wiper
system, which switches the intermittent mode blades are required for a clear view and safe
on. To do this, select: [MENU] button > Vehicle >
driving > page 55, Replacing the front
left control button > Driver assistance > Rain wiper blades.
sensor.
@- Slowwiping () Note
@- Fast wiping — If thereis frost, make sure the windshield
wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-
@- Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi- shield. Switching on the windshield wipers
tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping when the blades are frozen to the wind-
to fast wiping. shield can damage the wiper blades.
54
Lights and Vision
— The windshield wiper system must be Replacing the front wiper blades
switched off (lever in position @)) before us-
B8R-0379
ing a car wash. This prevents the wipers
oh
from switching on unintentionally and caus-
ing damage to the windshield wiper system.
G) Tips
— The windshield wipers switch off when the
ignition is switched off. You can activate the
windshield wipersafter the ignition is
switched on again by moving the windshield
Fig. 58 Removing windshield wiper blades
wiper lever to anyposition.
— Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
Windshield wiper service position/blade
in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor replacementposition
function. Check your windshield wiper
blades regularly. > To bring the wipers into the service position,
— The washer fluid nozzles in the windshield turn the ignition off and move the windshield
washer system are heated* at low tempera- wiper lever into position @) for at least two sec-
tures when the ignition is on. onds > page 54, fig. 56.
> To bring the windshield wipers back to the nor-
— When stopping temporarily, such as at a
mal position, switch the ignition on and hold
traffic light, the speed of the windshield
the windshield wiper lever in position @) until
wipers automatically reduces by one level.
the windshield wipers go back to the normal
position, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
Cleaning the wiper blades
Removing the wiper blade
Clean the wiper blades when you see wiper
streaks. Use a soft cloth and a glass cleaner. > Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
Windshield wiper > Press the locking knob (@) > fig. 58 on the wiper
> Place the windshield wiper arms in the service blade. Hold the wiper blade firmly.
position > page 55. > Removethe wiper blade in the direction of the
> Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the arrow.
windshield.
Installing the wiper blade
Rear window wiper > Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper the wiper arm @) until you hear it latch into
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window. place.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield.
ZA\ WARNING > Turn the service position off.
Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi-

sion, which increasesthe risk of an accident.
Z\ WARNING
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
@) Note blades should be replaced once or twice each
year.
If you see streaks again after cleaning the
wiper blades, the blades mustbe replaced
© Note
8V2012721B)
=> page 55.

— Only fold the windshield wipers away when
they are in the service position. Otherwise,
55
Lights and Vision
you risk damaging the paint on the hood or > Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear
the windshield wiper motor. window.
— You should not drive your vehicle or press
the windshield wiper lever when the wiper Z\ WARNING
arms are folded away from the windshield. For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
The windshield wipers would move back in- blades should be replaced once or twice each
to their original position and could damage year.
the hood and windshield.
G) Tips Digital compass

— You can also usethe service position, for ex- Switching the compass on and off
ample, if you want to protect the windshield Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
from icing by using a cover.
BFV-0288
— You cannotactivate the service position
when the hood is open.
Replacing rear wiper blade

Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper
@
Q
SN
s
2
=
&
a
Fig. 60 Rearview mirror: digital compassis switched on
> To turn the compasson or off, press the button

@ until the compass display in the mirror turns
on or off.
The digital compass only works when the ignition

Fig. 59 Rear window wiper: removing the wiper blade is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east),
Removing the wiper blade
SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window. (west), NW (northwest).
> Hold the wiper blade below the center in the di-
rection of the arrow and pull it out of the re- G) Tips
tainer. Hold the windshield wiper arm securely To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do
while doing this. not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
Installing the wiper blade ces or metallic objects near the mirror.
> Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer.

Securely hold the wiper arm at the upper plas-
tic end.
56
Lights and Vision
Adjusting the magnetic zone

Appliesto: vehicles with digital compass
B42-0405
Fig. 61 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone mustbe adjusted correctly for

the compassto read accurately.
To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-
> Press and hold the button @ > page 56, fig. 60 ers, calibrate the compass in an area where
until the number of the magnetic zone appears thereis no traffic.
in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button () repeatedly to select the
correct magnetic zone. The selection mode
turns off after a few seconds.
If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the com-

pass mustberecalibrated.
> Press and hold the button @untila “C” ap-

pearsin the interior rearview mirror.
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
a direction is displayed in the interior rearview
mirror.
8V2012721B)
57
Seats
Seats Adjusting the upper thigh support

> To increase or decrease the upper thigh sup-
General information
port,lift the handle @). A spring moves the
support forward.
\. WARNING
Refer to the chapter Driving Safely Adjusting the angle of the seat surface
=> page 260, Driving safety for important in- > To adjust the angle of the seat surface, pull or
formation, tips, suggestions and warnings press thelever (3).
that you should read and follow for your own
safety and the safety of your passengers. Adjusting the lumbar support
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
® Note @ atthe applicable location.
Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head re-
straints Adjusting the massage function
To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful > Switching the massage function on or off @).
when adjusting the seat to make sure the
head restraints do not hit the headliner or the A WARNING
panorama glass roof*.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
the front seats when the vehicle is station-
Front seats ary.
— Exercise caution when adjusting the seat
Manual seat adjustment
Applies to: vehicles with manual adjustable seats
height. Adjusting the seat carelessly or with-
out checking can pinch hands and fingers.
oD
2
oS — The front seat backrests must notbe re-
2
=
a clined too far back when driving, because
oO
this impairs the effectiveness of the safety
belts and airbag system, which increases the
risk of injury.
® Tips
The massage function switches off automati-
cally after approximately 10 minutes.
Fig. 62 Front seat: manual seat adjustment
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. eyaeslar leieeidat lald

Applies to: vehicles with power adjustable seats
Adjusting the seat position
> To adjust the seat forward or back, pull the lev-
er @ and slide the seat.
> To adjust the seat up or down, pull or press the
lever ©).
Adjusting the backrests
> To adjust the backrest so thatit is higher or
lower, turn the handwheel (7).
Fig. 63 Front seat: power seat adjustment
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. >
58
Seats
Adjusting the backrests

@ Tips
> To adjust the backrest so thatit is higher or
The massage function switches off automati-
lower, press the button @ forwardor back-
cally after approximately 10 minutes.
ward.
Adjusting the seat position VA

Applies to: vehicles with entry assistance
> To movethe seat forward or backward, press
the button @) forward or backward. Entry assistance makesit easier for the rear pas-
> To move the seat upward or downward, press sengers to enter and leave the vehicle.
the button @) upward or downward.
B8W-0269
Adjusting the lumbar support
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
@) atthe applicable location.
Adjusting the upper thigh support

> To can increase or decrease the upper thigh
support,lift the handle @). A spring moves the
support forward.
Fig. 64 Front seat: controls on the seat backrest: 1) back-
Adjusting the massage function rest release, 2) power entry assistance
> Switching the massage function on or off ©).

Power entry assistance
Z\ WARNING > Lift the handle @ and fold the seat backrest
forward.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
> Briefly press the button @). The seat automati-
the front seats when the vehicle is station-
cally moves all the way forward. When the seat
ary.
is moved back,it will stop in its original posi-
— The power adjustmentfor the front seats al-
tion. The operation will stop if the button is
so workswith the ignition switched off or
pressed again.
with the ignition key removed. To reduce the
risk of injury, children should never be left If you press and hold the button @) while the
unattended in the vehicle for this reason. backrest is in the upright position, the seat will
— Exercise caution when adjusting the seat move until you release the button.
height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjust-
ment could cause parts of the bodyto get Z\ WARNING
pinched, which increasesthe risk of injury. — Always makesurethe front seats are upright
— The front seat backrests must notbe re- and securely lockedin place.
clined too far back when driving, because — Power entry assistance also works when the
this impairs the effectiveness of the safety ignition is switched off!) or whenthe igni-
belts and airbag system, which increases the tion key is removed, so that rear seat pas-
risk of injury. sengerscan still moveto the front of the ve-
hicle in an emergencysituation. To reduce
the risk of injury, children should never be
8V2012721B)
D Requirement: the vehicle battery must havea sufficient

charge level.
59
Seats
B4G-0044
left unattended in the vehicle for this rea-
son.
ceased
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
There is a storage compartment under the arm-

rest.

Fig. 67 Frontseat: adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as

even as possible with the top of your head. If that
is not possible, try to adjust as close to this posi-
tion as possible.

> To move the head restraint upward or down-
Fig. 65 Armrest between the driver’ s/front passenger's
seats. ward, slide it until it locks into place > fig. 66.
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest from the Applies to: version 2
starting position notch by notch. > To adjust the head restraint upward or forward,
> To bring the armrest back into the starting po- slide it > fig. 67 until it locks into place.
sition, raise it out of the top notch and foldit > To adjust the head restraint downwardor back-
back down. ward, press the side button and slide the head
restraint in the desired direction until it locks
The armrestcan slide forward and back.
into place.
Head restraints Z'\WARNING

ame esr) Alwaysread and follow the applicable warn-
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints ings > page 263, Proper adjustment of head
restraints.
B8V-0028
Rear head restraints

Fig. 66 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
Fig. 68 Outer rear head restraints: release point (example)
60
Seats
If there are passengersin the rear seat, fold the with the head restraints removed or not in
head restraints up on the occupied seats at least the upright position increases the risk of se-
to the next notch > A\. rious injury.
Adjusting the head restraints

> To adjust the head restraint up, hold it at the
sides with both hands and slide it upward until
you feel it click into place.
> To adjust the head restraint down, press the
button @) © fig. 68 and slide the head restraint
downward.
Removing the head restraints

To remove the head restraints, the backrest must
be folded forward partially.
> Removethe screwdriver from the vehicle tool

kit > page 368.
> Release the backrest > page 66.
> Press the button @) 9 fig. 68 and slide the head
restraint up as far as it can go.
» Place the screwdriver in position in the
opening, press the button @) and pull the head
restraint out of the backrest at the same time
of.
> Fold the backrest down until it latches securely
=> page 63.
Installing the head restraints

To install the head restraints, the backrest must
be folded forward partially.
>» Release the backrest > page 66.

> Slide the posts on the head restraint down into
the guides until the postsclick into place. You
should not be able to pull the head restraint
out ofthe backrest.
> Fold the backrest down until it latches securely
=> page 63.
Z\ WARNING
— Alwaysread and follow the applicable warn-
ings > page 263, Proper adjustment of
headrestraints.
— Only removethe rear seat head restraints
when necessaryin order to install a child
safety seat > page 301, Child safety. Install
8V2012721B)
the head restraint again immediately once

the child safety seat is removed. Driving
61
Stowing and using
Stowing and using Storing

Power sources Cet melts (Te
z
When the ignition is switched on, you may be z
S
g|
able to use the electric power sources for exter- =
&
a
nal devices, depending on the vehicle equipment.
12 volt sockets
You can connectelectrical accessories to the 12
volt sockets. The power usage must not exceed
120 watts.
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the & or

Fig. 69 Rear benchseat: cup holder*
12V symbol. They are located in the front center
console*, in the rear* and on the side trim panel
Your vehicle has cup holdersin the front center
in the luggage compartment”.
console, in the door pockets, in the rear bench
USB ports seat* and/or in the rear center console”.
Applies to: vehicles with USB port
Rear cup holders*
You can charge mobile devices using the USB
> Fold the center armrest* downward.
ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «> or
> To open the cup holders, press inward on the
[4symbol or CHARGE ONLY.
trim@.
ZXWARNING > To place the beverage container in the cup hold-
er, push the arm outward.
— To reducethe risk of fatal injury, store all
> Then push the arm against the beverage con-
connected devices securely when driving so
tainer so that the arm lies closely againstit.
that they do not move around inside the ve-
> To close the cup holders, push them back into
hicle when braking or in the eventof an acci-
the slot.
dent.
— Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries
or burns. To reducethe risk of injuries, never
ZAWARNING
leave children unattendedin the vehicle — Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
with the vehicle key. holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
erages could spill, which increases the risk
@) Note of injury.
— Do not use any breakable beverage contain-
— Read the operating manualsfor the con-
ers (for example, made out of glass or por-
nected devices.
celain). You could be injured by them in the
—To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle
event of an accident.
electrical system, never attempt to charge
the vehicle battery by connecting accesso-
@) Note
ries that provide power to the power sour-
ces. Beverage containers in the cup holders should
— Do not connect any device whose network always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside
class (voltage) does not match the network could spill and cause damage tovehicle
class designed for the socket. equipment.
— Disconnect the connectors from the power

sources carefully to reduce the risk of dam-
aging them.
62
Stowing and using
Other storage — No heavy or hard objects may be placed on

the storage compartment behind the rear
B8V-0434
seat backrest. Thereis a risk of injuring the
vehicle passengers when braking suddenly.
— Applies to: vehicles with garment hooks: On-
ly lightweight clothing should be hung from
the garment hooksin the vehicle. Do not use
clothes hangersto hang clothing. The pock-
ets of the clothing must not contain any
heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged objects.
This could impair the effectiveness of the
Applies to: sedan
side curtain airbags.
Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: bag hooks*
There are additional storage compartments, () Note

compartments and holdersat other locations in Objects on the rear shelf that rub against the
the vehicle: rear window can damage the rear window
heating wires.
— Glove compartment: the glove compartment
can be locked* using the key
— Retainer* for the vehicle key and cell phone in Luggage compartment
the front center console
General information
— Storage compartment under the front center
armrest* All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely
— Storage compartment on the rear side of the fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the
front seat*. The compartment can hold a maxi- following to maintain good vehicle handling:
mum weight of 2 lbs (1 kg).
> Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
— Garment hooks* on the B-pillar partment.
— Garment hooks* above the rear doors* > Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the lug-
— Side bag hooks*in the luggage compartment gage compartment as possible.
— Applies to: sedan: Bag hooks* under the rear » Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs
shelf => fig. 70 to secure objects.
Z\ WARNING Z\ WARNING
—To reducethe risk of injury, make sure all
— Applies to: sedan: The storage compartment
storage compartmentsare always closed
mustnotbe used to transport heavy objects,
while driving.
hard objects, or animals. Such objects en-
— Loose objects can be thrownaround the ve- danger vehicle occupants and increase the
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- risk of injury during sudden driving or brak-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of ing maneuversor in an accident.
an accident. Store objects securely while
— The luggage compartmentcover mustal-
driving.
ways be securely fastened when in useto re-
— Only use the storage compartmentsin the duce the risk of an accident.
door trim panels to store small objects that
— The luggage compartmentcover is not a
will not stick out of the compartment and
surface for storing objects. Objects placed
impair the function of the side airbags.
on the cover increase the risk ofinjury to all
8V2012721B)
— Make sure your view toward the rear is not vehicle occupants during sudden driving or
blocked, for example by hanging clothing or
objects in the vehicle.
63
Stowing and using
braking maneuversor in the eventof an ac- — The backrest mustbe securely latched so
cident. objects cannotslide forward out of the lug-
— Loose objects can be thrownaround the ve- gage compartment during sudden braking.
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — The backrest mustbe latched securely to en-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of sure that the safety belt is protecting the
an accident. Always stow objects securely in center seating position.
the luggage compartment and secure them — Alwayspull forward on the backrest to make
at the tie-downs. Usestraps suitable for sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
heavy objects. place.
— If pieces of luggage or objects are secured
to the tie-downs with unsuitable or dam- @) Note
agedstraps, this can increase the risk of in- —To reduce the risk of damage, movethe rear
jury during braking maneuversor accidents. head restraints down > page60 beforefold-
— When transporting heavy objects, the vehi- ing the rear backrests forward.
cle characteristics will change due to the — When folding the backrest forward, make
shift in the center of gravity, which increases sure the outer safety belts arein the belt
the risk of an accident. You may need to guide recess so that they do not get pinched
adapt your driving style and speed to the in the backrest lock and damaged. Other ob-
current conditions. jects should be removed from the rear
— The cargo netis only strong enough to se- bench seatto protect the backrest from
cure light objects. Heavy objects are not ade- damage.
quately secured. Attempting to secure heavy — If you movethe front seat back when the
objects increases the risk ofinjury. rear seat backrest is folded forward, you
— Never exceed the permitted axle and load could damage the head restraints on the
and vehicle weight > page 395. rear seat.
— Never secure a child safety seat to the tie- — Make sure that the heating grid strips for
downs. the rear window defogger are not damaged
— Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- by abrasive objects.
cially if the luggage compartmentlid is
open. Children could enter the luggage com- G@) Tips
partment and close the luggage compart-
— The tire pressure must be adapted to the
ment lid from the inside. This creates the
load > page 350.
risk of fatal injury, since the children would
— You can purchasestrapsat specialty stores.
be locked in and may notbe able to escape
by themselves.
— Do not allow children toplayin or on the ve- Luggage compartment cover
Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment cover
hicle. Close and lock the luggage compart-
ment lid as well as all other doors when you qb
x
S
leave the vehicle. =
=
&
oO
— Never transport passengersin the luggage
compartment. Every passenger mustbe cor-
rectly secured with the safety belts in the
vehicle > page 268.
— Be careful when releasing the backrest and
folding it forward. To reducethe risk of be-
ing pinched, pay attention and check when
folding backrests forward.
partment cover
64
Stowing and using
Follow the safety precautions > page 63. Tie-downs and luggage compartment net
Removing
> Unhinge the straps @ and pull the cover @) in
the direction of the arrow out of the holder @).
Installing
> Slide the cover @) horizontally into the desig-
nated holder (2) in the side bracket until the
cover is lined up.
> Hook the straps into the luggage compartment
lid @. Fig. 73 Luggage compartment:location of the tie-downs
(example)
eae melee Coma Coles

Applies to: vehicles with adjustable cargo floor
(example)
Fig. 72 Luggage compartment: lowered cargofloor Follow the safety precautions > page 63.
The cargo floor can lower to expand the storage Tie-downs

area in the luggage compartment. There are tie-downs (@) in the luggage compart-
> Lift the cargo floor in order to lower it. ment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
> Pull the cargo floor back slightly and insertit in » Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
the lowerposition @).
Cargo net
To make loading and unloading easier, bringing Applies to: vehicle with cargo net
the cargo floor back into position @) after trans-
Use the cargo net (2) to securelighter objects in
porting bulky items is recommended.
the luggage compartment
>» Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward.

» Attach the hooksfor the cargo netto the tie-
downs.
8V2012721B)
65
Stowing and using
Increasing the cargo area and fold down the pass-through cover in the di-
Appliesto: vehicles with folding backrests rection of the arrow > fig. 76.
> Applies to: version 1: To close the pass-
a
o
S|
through, fold up the pass-through cover and
2
&
oO the center armrest > fig. 76.
Opening/closing the pass-through from the

luggage compartment
> Applies to: version 2: To fold the backrest for-

ward, pull the release lever on the respective
seat in the direction of the arrow. The backrest
will fold forward automatically after it has been
released.
> Applies to: version 1: To open the pass-through,
The rear seat backrests can be folded forwardei- press the lever in the rear seat backrest down-
ther separately or together. ward.
Follow the safety precautions > page 63. > To close the pass-through, fold the backrest
back until it latches securely.
Folding the backrest forward/back
> Push the corresponding head restraint down- Roof rack
ward > page 60. Applies to: vehicles with roof rack
> Pull the release lever @) in the direction of the 2
2
arrow and fold the backrest forward. 3
3
2
> Fold the backrest down until it latches securely. &
a
When you can no longer see the red mark on
the pin @,,the seatis latched.
Pass-through
Applies to: vehicles with pass-through
B8V-0693
Fig. 77 -Applies to: vehicles without roofrail-Roof: mount-

ing points
B8P-1962
Fig. 76 Version 1: left side: backrest: pass-through cover;

Version 2: right side: luggage compartment: release lever
Follow the safety precautions > page 63.
Opening/closing the pass-through from the Fig. 78 -Applies to: vehicles with roof rail-Roofrail: mount-
vehicle interior ing points
> Applies to: version 1: To open the pass-through,
fold down the center armrestin the backrest If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof,
you must observethe following:
66
Stowing and using
— Only approved roof racks may be used on your

vehicle. These roof racks are the basis for a
complete roof rack system. Additional attach-
mentsor carrier systems are needed to trans-
port luggage and sports equipment. Roof racks
and attachments from the Audi Genuine Acces-
sories program are recommended.
— When installing the roof rack, make sure that it
is mounted only at the designated points on
the roof > fig. 77 or > fig. 78.
— Note the permitted axle load, permitted total
weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle
=> page 395. The roof load is the total of the
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must
also note the permitted load of the carrier sys-
tem being used.
ZA WARNING
— Follow the installation instructions provided
with the roof rack system. If you do not se-
cure the roof rack system and objects on the
roof correctly, they could come loose from
the vehicle and causean accident.
— The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
driving characteristics by shifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface
area exposed to wind. You may need to
adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions.
@) Note
— If you use other roof luggage rack systems
or do notinstall the racks as intended, any
damage to the vehicle is not covered by the
warranty. Carefully follow the assembly and
installation instructions included with the
roof rack carrier system.
— Makesure that the luggage compartment
lid and the panoramic glass roof* do not
come into contact with objects on the roof
when theyare open.

8V2012721B)
Your vehicle will use more energy due to the

increased wind resistance. Removethe roof
rack when you are no longer using it.
67
Warm and cold
Warm and cold the windshield has been warmedbythe cli-

mate control system. The washer fluid could
Climate control system freeze on the windshield and impair visibili-
ty.
The climate control system circulates, warms or @) Note

cools, and removes humidity from the air in the
— If you suspect that the climate control sys-
vehicle interior. It is the most effective when the
tem is damaged, switch the system off to
windowsand panoramic glass roof* or power
prevent further damage and haveit checked
top” are closed. If there is a build-up of heat in-
by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
side the vehicle, ventilation can help to speed up
Audi Service Facility.
the cooling process.
— Repairs to the Audi climate control system
Pollutant filter require special technical knowledge and
special tools. See an authorized Audi dealer
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as
or authorized Audi Service Facility.
dust and pollen from the air.
Key recognition @) For the sake of the environment
Various settings are stored and assigned to the — Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C
vehicle key being used. mode on the climate control system.
— In vehicles with the efficiency program”, you
These settings are different when the power top* can see other consumption information and
is open or closed. more economytips.
Presets
Gi) Tips
Several functions can be presetin the Infotain-
—To preventinterference with the heating
ment system.
and cooling output and to prevent the win-
Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but- dowsfrom fogging over, the air intake in
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Air condi- front of the windshield mustbe free ofice,
tioning snow,or leaves.
— Condensation from the cooling system* can
Z\WARNING drip and form a puddle of water under the
Poor visibility can lead to accidents. vehicle. This is normal and does not mean
— For safer driving, keep all windowsfree of there is a leak.
ice, snow and fog. — The energy management system may tem-
— Become familiar with the correct use and porarily switch off certain functions, such as
function of the climate control system as the seat heating” or rear window defogger.
quickly as possible, especially with the de- These systems are available again as soon as
frosting and defogging functions. the energy supply has been restored.
— When the temperatureis below freezing,
only use the windshield washer system after
68
Warm and cold
Automatic climate control system

Applies to: vehicles with automatic climate control system
B8V-0590
Fig. 79 Automatic climate control system: controls (example)
The functions can be switched on and off by cooled and humidity is not removed when cooling
pressing the buttons or adjusted by turning the mode is switched off. This can cause fog on the
knob. The LED in a button will light up when the windows. The cooling mode switches off auto-
function is switched on. matically when there are cold outside tempera-
tures.
Automatic climate control system
The automatic climate control system automati-
@ / @ Temperature
cally maintains a temperature once it has been The temperature for the driver's and front pas-
set. In all heating mode functions except defrost, senger's side can be adjusted separately with the
the blower only switches to a higher speed once dials @/@). Temperatures between 60 °F
the engine coolant has reached a certain temper- (+16 °C) and 84 °F (+28 °C) can beset. If outside
ature. of this range, LO or HI will appear in the climate
control system display. In both settings, the cli-
AUTO Automatic mode or “eco” mode*
mate control runs constantly at the maximum
Automatic mode maintains a constant tempera- cooling or heating level. The temperatureis not
ture inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow regulated.
and air distribution are controlled automatically.
Synchronization: By pressing the AUTO button
AUTO mode switches off once a button in the cli-
for two seconds, the temperature setting for the
mate control system is pressed.
driver is transferred to the front passenger's side.
Applies to: vehicles with eco mode: When auto- This applies a temperature change to the front
matic mode is active, pressing the AUTO button passenger's side.
briefly activates the “eco” mode. In “eco” mode,
all settings are lowered slightly to save fuel.
S$ Blower
When in “eco” mode, Eco is shown in the display. Using the regulator $, you can manually adjust
To exit “eco” mode, press the AUTO button again. the volume ofair generated by the blower to your
preference. The blower should always run at a
A/C Cooling mode
low setting to prevent the windows from fogging
8V2012721B)
The cooling mode only functions with the blower and to ensure a continuous exchange ofair inside
turned on. You can turn the cooling system on or the vehicle. To have the blower regulated auto-
off by pressing the A/C button. The air is not matically, press the AUTO button.
69
Warm and cold
85/ 23/ & Air distribution andair vents Pressing the <> button, AUTO or the ® button
The air distribution can adjusted with the but- switches recirculation mode off.
tons. To have the air distribution regulated auto- @ Rear window defogger
matically, press the AUTO button.
If the rear window defogger is activated when
The round air ventsin the cockpit are adjustable the ignition is switched on, the battery manage-
=> page 71. ment determines based on the battery charge if
To keep the front side windows from fogging up it is possible to turn on. Otherwise, the rear win-
in damp weather, we recommend opening the dow defogger functions with the engine running
side air vents and tilting them to the side. and switches off automatically after approxi-
mately 10 - 20 minutes, depending on the out-
Foot vents are located under the front seats and side temperature.
adjustable vents on the end of the center console
to heat the rear of the vehicle. To prevent the rear window defogger from
switching off automatically, press and hold the
Defrosting ® button for more than two seconds. This re-
The windshield and side windowsare defrosted mains stored up to approximately 15 minutes af-
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. ter turning off the ignition.
The maximum amount ofair flows mainly from a Seat heating*
the vents below the windshield. Recirculation
mode switches off. The temperature should be Pressing the a button switches the seat heating
set at +72°F (22°C) or higher. The temperatureis on at the highest setting (level 3). The LEDs indi-
controlled automatically. In the §& setting, the cate the temperature level. To reduce the tem-
A/C cooling mode switches on automatically, de- perature, press the button again. To switch the
pending on the outside air temperature. seat heating off, press the button repeatedly un-
til the LED turns off.
The AUTO button switches the defroster off.
After approximately 10 minutes, the seat heating
< Recirculation mode automatically switches from level 3 to level 2.
The recirculation mode can be turned on manual-
ly or automatically*. Z\ WARNING
— You should not use the recirculation mode
— Switching manual recirculation mode on and
for an extended period of time, because no
off: Press the <> button.
fresh air is drawn in and the windowscan
— Automatic* recirculation mode: autorecircula-
fog when cooling mode is switched off. This
tion needs to be activated in the Infotainment
increasesthe risk of an accident.
system. Select in the Infotainment system:
— Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain
MENU] button > Vehicle > left control button >
or temperature could develop burns when
Air conditioning > Auto recirculation. The air
using the seat heating function. To reduce
quality sensor that is designed for diesel and
the risk of injury, these individuals should
gasoline exhaust automatically switches the re-
not useseat heating.
circulation mode on or off depending on the
level of pollutants in the outside air.
C) Note
In recirculation mode,the air inside the vehicleis
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat-
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil- ing elements, do not kneel on the seats or
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the place heavy pressure on one areaof the seat. >
vehicle interior. Switching recirculation mode on
when driving through a tunnel or when sitting in
traffic is recommended > A.
70
Warm and cold
If the steering wheel heating cannot be switched

on, the message: Steering wheel heating: off ap-
— The setting for the seat heating on the driv- pears. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi
er's side is assigned to the keythat is in use. dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
— If the front passenger's seat heating is the malfunction repaired.
turned on, it will not turn on again automat-
ically if more than 10 minutes have passed
between switching the ignition off and
switching it on again.
Adjusting the vents
—\ Aol
Fig. 80 Cockpit: adjusting the air vents
The following settings are possible:
-@ Air flow amount

-@Air flow direction
To adjust the air flow amount,turn the ridged
outer adjusting ring ©.To stop the air flow, turn
the adjusting ring all the wayto the right.
To adjust the air flow direction, turn the air vent

grill insert @.
Steering wheel heating

Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
The steering wheel rim can be heated.
> Press the @ button on the multifunction steer-

ing wheel to switch the steering wheel heating
on and off. The message Steering wheel heat-
ing: on/Steering wheel heating: off appears in
the instrument cluster display.
The temperature is maintained at a constant lev-

el when steering wheel heating is switched on.
The steering wheel heating settings are stored

8V2012721B)
automatically and assigned to the vehicle key

thatis in use.
71
Driving
Driving Reducing the risk of vehicle damage
General information @) Note

When driving on poor roads, over curbs, and
on steep ramps, make sure that components
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first
that hang below the vehicle, such as the spoil-
1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts
er and exhaust system, are not struck because
work smoothly together, which helps to increase
they could be damaged. This especially ap-
the service life of the engine.
plies to vehicles with low ground clearance
Do notdrive higher than two-thirds of the maxi- and vehicles that are heavily loaded.
mum permitted engine RPM during the first 600
miles (1,000 km) and do notusefull accelera- Driving through water on roads
tion. The engine can be increased RPM gradually
during the next 300 miles (500 km). Note the following to reduce the risk of vehicle
damage when driving through water, for example
on flooded roads:
Sy Tolesas eA Lal |
Applies to: RS models — The water must not be any higher than the bot-
tom of the vehicle body.
When driving in a sporty style, for example ona
— Do not drive faster than walking speed.
driving track, the wear on all vehicle components
is greatly increased, especially on the engine,
transmission, tires, brakes, and suspension. This
ZA WARNING
can result in increased wear. Also notethe fol- After driving through water or mud, the effec-
lowing points: tiveness of the brakes may be reduced due to
moisture on the brake rotors and brake pads.
— Makesure the vehicle is in good condition. A few careful brake applications should dry off
Makesure to check the brake pads, tire tread, the brakes and restore the full braking effect.
and tire pressure (when tires are warm).
— Beforehand, warm up the engine by driving no @) Note
higher than two-thirds of the maximum permit-
— Vehicle components such as the engine,
ted engine RPM. The engine oil temperature
transmission, suspension, or electrical sys-
must be brought to a minimum of 140 °F
tem, can be severely damaged bydriving
(60 °C).
through water.
— Before stopping the vehicle, allow the engine
— Alwaysswitch the Start/Stop system* off
and brakes to cool back down to a regular oper-
when driving through water > page 78.
ating temperatureby driving normally.
If necessary, use the following functions: @ Tips
— Audi drive select* Dynamic mode > page 146 — Determine the depth before driving through
— Launch Control > page 87 water.
— Limit ESC > page 160 — Do notstop the vehicle, drive in reverse, or
switch the engine off when driving through
@ Tips water.
Wear caused by load does notconstitute a ve- — Keep in mind that oncoming vehicles may
create waves that raise the water level and
hicle fault as defined by the terms of the war-
ranty. makeit too deep for your vehicle to drive
through safely.
— Avoid driving through salt water, because
this can cause corrosion.
72
Driving
aire el Neola(elt ry Steering

driving
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The amount of fuel consumption, the environ-
mental impact, and the wear to the engine,
The steering wheel position is fully adjustable up
and down and forward and back.
brakes, and tires depends mostly on your driving
style. Note the following information for efficient
and environmentally-conscious driving:
— Do not let the engine run while the vehicle

parked.
— Use the Start/Stop system > page 78.
— Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
ed, for example seat heating*.
— Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and
braking. Fig. 81 Steering column: steering column adjustmentlever
— Utilize the engine braking effect.

> Tilt the lever > fig. 81 downward > A\.
— Avoid driving short distances or at high speeds
> Bring the steering wheel into the desired posi-
when possible.
tion.
— Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicleif pos-
> Push the lever against the steering column un-
sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or
tilit is secure.
bike racks installed when they are not needed.
— Have maintenance performed regularly on the
vehicle.
Z\ WARNING
— Do not drive with winter tires during the summ- Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
er. ment and an incorrect seating position can
— Make surethe tire pressure is correct cause serious injuries.
=> page 350. — Only adjust the steering column when the
vehicle is stationary so that you do not lose
G) Tips control of the vehicle.
The amountof noise produced bythe vehicle — Adjust the driver's seat or steering wheel so
can increase significantly when driving with a that there is at least 10 inches (25 cm)dis-
sporty style. Show respect to others around tance between your chest and the steering
you and the environment with the way you op- wheel > page 261, fig. 218. If you do not
erate your vehicle, especially at night. maintain this distance, the airbag system
will not be able to provide its full protection.
> page 261, fig. 218.
— If your physical characteristics prevent you
from sitting at least 10 inches (25 cm)or
more away from the steering wheel,see if
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au-
di Service Facility can provide adapters that
will help.
— If your faceis level with the steering wheel,
the airbag does not provide as much protec-
8V2012721B)
tion during a collision. Always make sure

that the steering wheel is level with your
chest.
73
Driving
— Always hold the steering wheel with your Equipmentthat uses lot of electricity is switch-
hands in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- ed off temporarily when you start the engine.
tions to reduce the risk of injury if the airbag If the engine does not start immediately, stop
deploys. the starting procedureby turning the ignition key
— Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 to position @ and repeatafter 30 seconds.
o'clock position or with both hands on the
rim or the center of the steering wheel. Start/Stop system*
Holding the steering wheel incorrectly sig- See the information in > page 78, Start/Stop
nificantly increases the risk of injury to the system.
hands, arms and head if the airbag deploys.
ZA\ WARNING
Starting and stopping —To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never al-
the engine (vehicles with low the engine to run in confined spaces.
an ignition lock) — Never removethe ignition key from the igni-
tion lock while the vehicle is moving. Other-
Starting the engine wise the steering lock will engage and you
Applies to: vehicles with ignition lock will not be able to steer the vehicle, which
The ignition is switched on and the engine start- increased the risk of an accident.
ed with the key in the ignition.
(1) Note
Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and
heavy engine load if the engine has not
reached operating temperature yet. You could
damage the engine.
(@) For the sake of the environment

Do not let the engine run while parked to
warm up. Begin driving immediately. This re-
duces unnecessary emissions.
Fig. 82 Ignition lock: position of the ignition key
Switching the ignition on or off

G) Tips
—If itis difficult to turn the key to position
> To switch the ignition on, turn the ignition key
®, turn the steering wheel back and forth
to position @). Vehicles without the Start/Stop
slightly to release the steering wheel lock.
system*: the needle in the tachometer moves
— Some noise after starting the engine is nor-
into the READYposition.
mal and is no cause for concern.
> To switch the ignition off, turn the ignition key
to position @). The needle in the tachometer
moves into the OFF position. Stopping the engine
Applies to: vehicles with ignition lock
Starting the engine
Stopping the engine
> Press the brake pedal and movethe selector
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop.
lever to the "P" or "N"position.
> Turn the keyto position @). The needle in the
> Turn the keybriefly to position @). The ignition
tachometer moves into the OFF position.
key automatically returns to position @). Do not
press the accelerator pedal when doing this. Engaging the steering lock
Requirement: the selector lever mustbe in P. >
74
Driving
> Removethe ignition keyin position @) Starting and stopping

> page 75, fig. 83 > A. the engine (vehicles with
> Turn the steering wheel until you hear the
steering wheel lock. convenience key)
The locked steering helps prevent vehicle theft. Starting the engine
Z\ WARNING The [START ENGINE STOP] button switches the

— Never turn off the engine before the vehicle ignition on and starts the engine.
has come to a complete stop. Switching it ©
a
eS
off before the vehicle has stopped may im- 2
>
&
pair the function of the brake booster and oO
power steering. You would then need to use
moreforce to steer and brake the vehicle.
The fact that you cannot steer and brake as
usual mayincrease the risk of accidents and
serious injuries.
— Never removethe ignition key from the igni-
tion lock while the vehicle is moving. Other-
Fig. 83 Center console: START ENGINE STOP button
wise, the steering lock could suddenly en-
gage and you would notbeable to steer the Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to the information for
vehicle. starting the vehicle under > page 92.
off and takethe vehicle key with you. If you Starting the engine
do not do this, the engine could be started > Press the brake pedal and movethe selector
and electrical equipment such as the power lever to the "P" or "N" position.
windowscouldbeactivated. This can lead to > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button briefly.
serious injuries. The engine will start.
— For safety reasons, always park the vehicle
with the selector lever in the P position. Equipment that uses a lot ofelectricity is switch-
Otherwise, thereis the risk that the vehicle ed off temporarily when you start the engine.
could roll unintentionally. If the engine does not start immediately, the
starting procedure stops automatically after a
@) Note short time. If this is the case, repeat the starting
If the engine has been under heavyload for procedure after approximately 30 seconds.
an extended period of time, heat builds up in
Switching the ignition on or off
the engine compartmentafter the engine is
switched off and thereis a risk of damaging If you would like to switch the ignition on with-
the engine. For this reason, let the engine run out starting the engine, follow these steps:
at idle for approximately two minutes before > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button with-
shutting it off. out pressing the brake pedal. Vehicles without
the Start/Stop system”: the needle in the tach-
@) Tips ometer moves into the READYposition.
For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en- > To switch the ignition off, press the button
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again auto- again. The needle in the tachometer movesinto
8V2012721B)
matically or it may continue to run, even if the the OFF position. >
ignition is switchedoff.
75
Driving
If the Ee indicator light blinks and the message Steering lock”)

Please turn steering wheel appears when switch-
The steering locks when you turn the engine off
ing the ignition on, the steering lock has been en- using the [START ENGINE STOP} button, move
gaged. In this case, turn the steering wheel the selector lever into the P position and open
slightly to the left or right. the driver's door. The locked steering helps pre-
Start/Stop system* vent vehicle theft.
See the information in > page 78, Start/Stop Emergencyoff function

system.
If it is absolutely necessary, the engine can also
be turned off while driving at speeds starting at
Z\WARNING 4 mph (7 km/h). To stop the engine, press the
To reducethe risk of asphyxiation, never allow START ENGINE STOP] button twice in a row or
the engine to run in confined spaces. press and holdit one time.
@ Note ZA WARNING
Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and — Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
heavy engine load if the engine has not has come to a complete stop. Switching it
reached operating temperature yet. You could off before the vehicle has stopped may im-
damage the engine. pair the function of the brake booster and
power steering. You would then need to use
@ For the sake of the environment moreforce to steer and brakethe vehicle.
Do notlet the engine run while parked to The fact that you cannot steer and brake as
warm up. Begin driving immediately. This re- usual mayincrease the risk of accidents and
duces unnecessary emissions. serious injuries.
G) Tips off and take the vehicle key with you. If you
do not do this, the engine could be started
— Some noise after starting the engine is nor-
mal and is no cause for concern. and electrical equipment such as the power
windowscould be activated. This can lead to
— If you leave your vehicle with the ignition
serious injuries.
switched on, the ignition will switch off af-
— For safety reasons, always park the vehicle
ter a certain amountof time. Make sure that
electrical equipment such as the exterior
with the selector lever in the P position.
lights are switchedoff. Otherwise, thereis the risk that the vehicle
could roll unintentionally.
Stopping the engine

@) Note
If the engine has been under heavyload for
Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to the information un- an extended period of time, heat builds up in
der > page 92. the engine compartment after the engine is
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop. switched off and thereis a risk of damaging
> Move the selector lever into the "P" position. the engine. For this reason, let the engine run
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button at idle for approximately two minutes before
=> page 75, fig. 83. shutting it off.
)_ This function is not available in all countries.
76
Driving
the vehicle when the engine was running. If the

@) Tips
convenience keyis no longer in the vehicle, you
For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en- cannot switch the ignition on or start the engine
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again auto- once you stop it. You also cannotlock the vehicle
matically or it may continue to run, even if the from the outside.
ignition is switched off.
Please press the brake pedal
Messages This message appearsif you do not step on the

brake pedal to start the engine on a vehicle with
Pressing the start/stop button again will switch an automatic transmission.
off the engine
Please select N or P
This message appears when you press the
START ENGINE STOP} button while driving This message appears when starting or stopping
=> page 76, Emergencyoff function. the engine if the selector lever is not in the "N" or
"P" position. The engine will not start/stop.
Engine start system: malfunction! Please con-
tact Service
Starting the engine
The engine automatic start system has a mal- when thereis a
function. Drive immediately to an authorized Au-
malfunction
di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired. To start the en-
gine, turn the key to position @) > page 74 or It may not be possible to start the engine under
press and hold the [START ENGINE STOP] button certain circumstances, for example,if the bat-
until the engine is running. tery in the vehicle keyis drained,if interferenceis
affecting the key orif there is a system malfunc-
Key not recognized. See owner's manual tion.
This message appearsif there is no convenience
B8V-0062
key inside the vehicle or if the system does not
recognize the key. The convenience key may not
be recognized, for example, if it is covered by an
object that disrupts the signal (such as a brief-
case), or if the key battery is weak. Electronic de-
vices such as cell phones can also interfere with
the signal.
To still be able to start or stop the engine, refer

to > page 77. Fig. 84 Steering column/remote control key: starting the
engine if there is a malfunction
Remote control key: hold back of key
against the designated area. See owner's man- As long as the message Key not recognized.
ual
See owner's manual or Remotecontrol key:
If the indicator light turns on and this message hold back of key against the designated area.
appears, there is a malfunction > page 77. See owner's manual appears, you can start the
vehicle with the emergencystarting function.
B Key notin vehicle?
> Press the brake pedal.
B Remote control key: key not detected. Is the
> Hold the master key in the location indicated in
keystill in the vehicle?
8V2012721B)
the illustration P) © fig. 84. >

The BS indicator light turns on and this message
appearsif the convenience key was removed from
77
Driving
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button > A\ in Stopping/starting the engine
Starting the engine on page 76. The engine will Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
start. 1D
oS
> Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer aS
S$
=
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the e
3
@) Tips
You can display the message that appears
during an emergencyby pressing the
START ENGINE STOP] button.
=,
Fig. 85 Instrumentcluster: engine switched off (Stop
Start/Stop system phase)
> Brake the vehicle to a stop. The engine stops

Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system shortly before the vehicle comes to a stop or if
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel the vehicle is stationary ). Keep your foot on
economy and reduce CO2 emissions. the brake pedal. The ey indicator light ap-
pearsin the display. The needle in the tachome-
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto- ter also moves into the READYposition.
matically when the vehicle is stopped, such as at > The engine starts again when you remove your
a traffic light. The ignition remains switched on foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light
during this Stop phase. The engine will restart turns off.
automatically when needed.
Additional information
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated
once the ignition is switched on. The engine stops in the "P", "N" and "D" selector
lever positions.
Basic requirements for Start/Stop mode
If you select the "R" selector lever position during
— The driver's door mustbe closed. a Stop phase, the engine will start again.
— The driver's seat belt much be fastened.
Shift to "P" quickly to prevent the engine from
— The hood mustbe closed.
starting unintentionally when shifting through
— The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph "RM
(3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
You can control if the engine will stop or not by
@) Note reducing or increasing the amount of force you
Alwaysswitch the Start/Stop system off when use to press the brake pedal. For example, if you
driving through water > page 79. only lightly press on the brake pedal in stop-and-
go traffic or when turning, the engine will not
@ Tips switch off when the vehicleis stationary. If you
press the brake pedal harder, the engine will
The engine stops shortly before the vehicle
switch off.
comes to a stop )). The full function of the
brake booster and the power steering is still
@ Tips
available.
— Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase
to keep the vehicle from rolling.
D_Incertain countries.
78
Driving
— The ignition will turn off if you press the

START ENGINE STOP] button* during a
ZXWARNING
Stop phase. The needle in the tachometer To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never allow
moves into the OFF position. the engine to run in confined spaces.
(er eileen)
G)Tips
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system If you select the "D" or "N" selector lever posi-
tion in a vehicle with an automatic transmis-
Starting and stopping the engine automat-
sion after shifting into reverse, the vehicle
ically
mustbe driven faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
The system checksif certain conditions are met in order for the engine to switch off again.
before and during the Stop phase, and deter-
mines if the engine stops and howlong it re- Manually switching the Start/Stop system
mains stopped. For example,if power usage is col
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
other conditions, the following factorsinfluence
Ifyou do not wish to use the system, you can
the automatic engine start or stop:
switchit off manually.
— Environmental conditions (slopes,inclines, ele-
2)
vation, temperature) zs
3
g
=
— Battery (charge status, temperature, power us- &
a
age)
— Engine temperature
— Assist systems
— Driving behavior
Depending on the engine, the indicator light

may appear if the engine is not stopped.
Fig. 86 Center console: Start/Stop system button
Ignition is switched off automatically
To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the > To switch the Start/Stop system off/on manual-
ignition will switch off automatically under the ly, press the || button. The LED in the button
following conditions: turns on when the system is switched off.
— If the Start/Stop system has stopped the en-
gine @ Tips
— If the vehicle is stationary If you switch the system off during a Stop
— If you haveexited the vehicle phase, the engine will start again automati-
cally.
In this case, the activated low beam is replaced
by the parking light. The parking lights will
switch off after approximately 30 minutes or Messagesin the instrument cluster display
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
when you lock the vehicle.
If the Start/Stop system has not turned off the Start/stop system: deactivated. Please start
engine or if you have switched the Start/Stop sys- engine manually
tem off manually, the ignition will not be auto- This message appears when specific conditions
matically switched off and the engine will contin- are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop
8V2012721B)
ue to run > A\. system will not be able to restart the engine. The
engine must be started manually. >
79
Driving
Start/stop system: malfunction! Function Preventing the automatic parking brake

unavailable release
There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system. The vehicle could begin rolling unintentionally
Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or when the parking brakeis released if the vehicle
authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to is ona hill or towing a trailer.
have the malfunction corrected. > To prevent the parking brake from releasing au-
tomatically, pull and hold the switch and
Electromechanical press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake
parking brake remains set and preventsthe vehicle from roll-
ing backward.
@
2
3 > You can release the switch again once you
S|
=
& are sure that you are giving enough driving
a
force to the wheels by pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Emergencybraking function
You can use the emergencybraking function in an
emergencysituation, or if the standard brakes
are malfunctioning or the pedal is obstructed.
Fig. 87 Center console: parking brake
> Pull and hold the switch.
> As soon as you release the switch or acceler-
Your vehicle is equipped with an electromechani-
ate, the braking stops.
cal parking brake @) 9 fig. 87. The parking brake
is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling Pulling and holding the switch while driving
unintentionally and replaces the hand brake. the vehicle activates the emergency braking func-
tion. The hydraulic brake system will brakeall
Setting/manually releasing the parking
four wheels. The braking effect is similar to heavy
brake
braking > A\.
> Pull the switch to set the parking brake. The
LED in the switch turns on. The im indi- To reducethe risk of activating the emergency
cator light also turns on. braking by mistake, a warning tone (buzzer)
> To release the parking brake manually, press
sounds when the switch is pulled. Emergency
the brake or accelerator pedal whilethe igni- braking stops as soon as the switch is released
tion is switched on and press the switch at or the accelerator pedal is pressed.
the same time. The LED in the button and the Parking
indicator light will turn off.
> Press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
Releasing the parking brake automatically > Pull the © switch to set the parking brake.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed. > Place the selector lever in the “P” position.
> Turn the engine off > /\.
> To start driving and release the parking brake > Turn the steering wheel when parking on in-
automatically, press the accelerator pedal as clines so that the wheelswill roll into the curb
usual. if the vehicle starts moving.
In addition to releasing the parking brake auto-
matically, other convenience and safety functions ZA\ WARNING
are available when you start driving > page 81, — Ifa gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta-
Starting from a stop. tionary and the engine is running, do not
press the accelerator pedal inadvertently. >
80
Driving
Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the brake releases automatically and the vehicle
vehicle to move, and this could result in an starts to move > page 81.
accident.
— Emergencybraking should only be used in Gi)Tips
an emergency, when the when the standard — Occasional noises when the parking brake is
brake pedal is malfunctioning or obstructed. set and released are normal and are not a
During emergency braking, your vehicle will cause for concern.
brake similar to heavy braking. ESC and the — The parking brake goes through a self-test
associated components (ABS, ASR, EDL) can- cycle at regular intervals when the vehicleis
not overcome the lawsof physics. A full stopped. Any noises associated with this are
brake application while driving through normal.
curves or in poor road or weather conditions —If there is a power failure, the parking brake
can cause the vehicle to slide or the rear of will not setif it is released, and it will not
the vehicle to swerve, which increases the release if it is set > A\. See an authorized
risk of an accident. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
— If the power supply fails, you cannot set the cility for assistance.
parking brake onceit is released. In this
case, park the vehicle on level ground and Starting from a stop
secureit by engaging the "P” gear. Contact
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au- Various convenience and safety functions may be
di Service Facility for assistance. available when the vehicle begins driving, de-
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition pending on vehicle equipment.
Starting on hills with the parking brake set
the vehicle. Otherwise, children could start Requirement: the driver's door must be closed.
the engine, release the parking brake, or op- > To start driving comfortably when on hill, set
erate electrical equipment such as power the parking brake and begin driving as usual.
windows, which increasesthe risk of an acci- The braking force of the parking brake does not
dent. release automatically until the wheels build up
— No one, especially children, should remain in enough driving force.
the vehicle when it is locked. Locked doors
makeit moredifficult for emergency work- Starting on hills with hill hold assist
ers to enter the vehicle, which puts lives at Hill hold assist makes it easier to start on hills.
risk.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed
@) Note and the engine must be running.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while > To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the
the engine is running, because this increases brake pedal for several seconds. The vehicle
the risk of an accident. mustbe facing uphill.
After releasing the brake pedal, the braking pow-

G) Tips er is maintained briefly > A\ to preventthe vehi-
When stopping at a traffic signal or stopping cle from rolling back when starting. This allows
in city traffic, you can set the parking brake you to begin driving moreeasily.
manually. The vehicle does not have to be
held with the brake pedal. The parking brake
8V2012721B)
eliminates the tendency to creep when a se-

lector lever position is engaged. As soon as
you press the accelerator pedal, the parking
81
Driving
ZA\ WARNING transmissions and allow the vehicle to accelerate

without a noticeable interruption in traction.
Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
— If you do not begin driving immediately or

Selector lever positions
the engine stalls after releasing the brake
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
pedal, your vehicle may begin to roll back-
ward. Press the brake pedal or set the park- 8
)
ing brake immediately. Lee S|
a
— The intelligent technologyofhill hold assist
rs 74 0 as
cannot overcome the limitations imposed by
natural physical laws. The increased comfort
offered by hill hold assist should not cause 10/09/2014
—
you to take safety risks.
Ryx)
— Hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle in a
place on all hills (for example, if the ground
is slippery or icy). Fig. 88 Instrumentcluster: selector lever positions
—To reducethe risk of an accident, always 2
8
s
makesurethe vehicle is situated safely S|
3
while stationary. a
Automatic transmission
Introduction
The automatic transmission is controlled elec-

tronically. Upshifting and downshifting occur au- Fig. 89 Selector lever lock
tomatically.
The selected selector lever position is shown hear
When a moderatedriving styleis used, the
the selector lever > fig. 89 and in the instrument
transmission selects the most economical driving
cluster display > fig. 88.
mode. The transmission upshifts at a lower RPM
and downshifts at a higher RPM to improvefuel » Switch the ignition on.
efficiency. >In the "P/N" position, you mustrelease the se-
lector lever lock > page 82.
In the "S" selector lever position, the transmis-
> Move the selector lever into the desired posi-
sion switches to a sporty mode after a kick-down
tion. The engaged selector lever position is
or when the driver uses a sporty driving style
shown in the shift gate.
characterized by quick accelerator pedal move-
ments, heavy acceleration, frequent changes in Selector lever lock
speed and traveling at the maximum speed.
The selector lever lock prevents you from select-
If desired, the driver can also select the gears ing a gear accidentally, causing the vehicle to
manually (tiptronic mode) > page 86, Manual roll.
shifting (tiptronic mode).
The selector lever is locked in the "P" and "N" po-
The S tronic is a dual-clutch transmission. Power sitions when the ignition is switched on. You
is transferred using two clutches that work inde- mustpress the brake pedal to select another po-
pendently from one another. They replace the sition. You mustalso press the interlock button if
torque converter used in conventional automatic you are moving from the "P" and "N"position. >
82
Driving
The selector lever lock only functions when the mode or in the "S" sport mode. To select the "S"
vehicle is stationary or at speeds below approxi- sport mode, pull the selector lever back briefly.
mately 1 mph (2 km/h). At higher speeds, the Pulling the lever back again will select the nor-
lock is automatically deactivated in the "N" posi- mal"D" mode. The instrumentcluster display
tion. showsthe selected driving mode.
The selector lever is not locked when shifting In the normal mode "D", the transmission auto-
quickly through "N", for example from "R" to matically selects the suitable gear ratio. It de-
"D/S". This makes it possible to free the vehicle pends on engine load, vehicle speed and driving
when it is stuck by “rocking” it. The selector lever style.
lock engages if the lever stays in the "N" position
The engine’s power reserves are used fully in the
longer than approximately two seconds when the
Sport mode "S". Shifting may become noticeable
brake pedal is not pressed.
when accelerating.
Ignition key safety interlock* To move from selector lever position "N" to "D",
Applies to: vehicles with ignition lock
you mustpress the brake pedal and the vehicle
You can only removethe key from the ignition af- mustbe traveling less than 1 mph (2 km/h) or be
ter switching the ignition off if the selector lever stationary > A\.
is in the "P" position. The selector lever will be
locked in the "P" position as long as the keyis not Z\ WARNING
in the ignition. Read and follow all WARNINGS.
P - Park — The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
switched off.
This selector lever position prevents the vehicle
— Never select "R" or "P" while driving, be-
from rolling. You can only shift into Park when
cause this increases the risk of an accident.
the vehicle is stationary > A.
— Power is still transmitted to the wheels
To shift in and out of the "P" selector lever posi- when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
tion, press the selector lever lock (button in the vent the vehicle from “creeping”, you must
selector lever handle) and press the brake pedal keep your foot on the brakein all selector
at the same time. lever positions (except "P") when the engine
is running. Otherwise, this increasesthe risk
The selector lever will be locked in the "P" posi-
of an accident.
tion if there is a power failure > page 89, Re-
— Do not inadvertently press the accelerator
leasing the selector lever in an emergency.
pedal when the vehicle is stopped if a gear is
R - Reverse engaged. Pressing the pedal increases risk
of accident becausethe vehicle will move,
Only shift into reverse gear when the vehicleis
even if parking brakeis set.
stationary and the engine is running at idle
— To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
speed >A.
press the accelerator pedal when changing
To select the "R" selector lever position, press the the selector lever position while the vehicle
selector lever lock while pressing the brake ped- is stationary and the engine is running.
al. — Never leave your vehicle with the engine
running while in gear. If you must leave your
N - Neutral
vehicle when the engine is running, set the
The transmission is in idle in this position. parking brake and movethe selector lever to
the "P" position.
D/S - Normal position for driving forward
8V2012721B)
—To reducethe risk of an accident, the selec-

In the "D/S" selector lever position, the transmis- tor lever must be in the "P" position and the
sion can be operated either in the normal "D"
83
Driving
parking brake must be set before opening G) Tips

the hood and working ona running engine.
Plug-in hybrid drive*: the transmission
Alwaysread and follow the applicable warn-
switches automatically to the normal mode
ings > page 325, General information.
"D"if the || button > page 96is pressed
— Read and following all WARNINGS > A\ in
while in sport mode "S".
Driving tips on page 85.
@ Note Driving tips

Never let the vehicle roll downhill with engine
o
off and the selector lever in the "N" position, &
S
2
because this could damage the automatic 2
e
oO
transmission and catalytic converter.
@) Tips
— Audi drive select: sporty shifting character-
istics can be selected using the Dynamic
driving mode = page 146 "S" will appear in
the instrumentcluster display instead of
+p" Fig. 90 Section of the center console: selector lever with
interlock button
— If you accidentally select "N" while driving,
take your foot off the accelerator pedal im-
Starting the engine
mediately and wait for the engine to slow
downtoidle before selecting "D" or "S". > Select the "P" or "N" selector lever position. At
— If there is a power failure, the selector lever low temperatures (below 14 °F (-10 °C)), the
will not move out of the "P" position. The engine can only be started when the selector
emergencyrelease can be used if this hap- lever is in the "P" position.
pens > page 89.
Starting from a stop
@ Tips » Press and hold the brake pedal.

> Press and hold the interlock button in the selec-
If the selector lever does not engage, thereis
tor lever handle, select the desired selector lev-
a malfunction. The engine is disabled to pre-
er position such as "D" > page 82 and release
vent the vehicle from driving off unintention-
the lock button.
ally. To allow the selector lever to engage
> Wait a momentuntil the transmission shifts.
again, proceedas follows:
You will notice a slight movement when the
— Briefly press the brake pedal.
gear engages.
— If the vehicle does not move forward or in
> Release the brake pedal and press the accelera-
reverse even though a drive position is se-
tor pedal > A\.
lected, proceed as follows:
— If the vehicle does not movein the desired Various convenience functions are available for
direction, the system may not have engaged starting on hills > page 81.
the drive position correctly. Press the brake
Stopping temporarily
pedal and select the drive position again.
— If the vehicle still does not move in the de- > Keep the vehicle stationary using the braking
sired direction, there is a system malfunc- pedal, for exampleat traffic lights.
tion. See an authorized Audi dealer or au- > Do not press the accelerator pedal when doing
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance this.
to have the system checked.
84
Driving
> To prevent the vehicle from rolling when you or "R" position or “tiptronic” mode is select-
start driving, set the parking brake when stop- ed.
ping on steep hills > A\ and >@. — Do not inadvertently press the accelerator
> The parking brake will release automatically pedal when the vehicle is stopped if a gear is
and the vehicle will start moving once you press engaged. Pressing the pedal increases risk
the accelerator pedal. Requirement: the driver's of accident because the vehicle will move,
door mustbe closed. even if parking brakeis set.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
Stopping/parking
press the accelerator pedal when changing
If the selector lever is not in the "P" position the selector lever position while the vehicle
when you open the driver’s door, the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.
could roll. In vehicles with a convenience key*,
— Never engage the "R" or "P" selector level
the following message appears: Shift to P, other- positions while driving. It could cause a
wisevehicle can roll away. Doors do notlock if crash.
lever is not in P A warning tone will also sound.
— Before driving down a steep slope, reduce
> Press and hold the brake pedal > /\. your speed and shift into a lower gear with
> Set the parking brake. “tiptronic”.
> Select the "P" selector lever position. — Do not ride the brakes or press the brake
pedal too often or too long when driving
Under certain circumstances, such as driving in downhill. Constant braking causes the
the mountains,it may be useful to switch tempo- brakes to overheat and can substantially re-
rarily to the manual shift program in order to duce braking performance, increase braking
manually adjust the gears to the driving condi- distance, or cause completefailure of the
tions > page 86. brake system.
When parking ona level surface, simply place the — Ifyou must stop on an incline, always hold
selector lever in the "P" position. On inclines, ac- the vehicle in place with the foot brake or
tivate the parking brake first and then move the parking brake to prevent it from rolling
selector lever to the "P" position > page 80. This back.
prevents the locking mechanism from being load- — Never hold the vehicle on an incline with a
ed too heavily and will make it easier to move the slipping clutch. The clutch opens automati-
selector lever out of the "P" position. cally when it becomes too hot from the over-
load. The fs} indicator light turns on anda
ZA\ WARNING message appears > page 88 when the
— The vehicle can roll even when the engine is clutch is overloaded.
switched off.
— Unintended vehicle movementcan lead to @) Note
serious injuries. — When stopping on an incline, do not try to
— Never leave your vehicle with the engine hold the vehicle in place by pressing the ac-
running while in gear. If you must leave your celerator pedal while a driving gear is se-
vehicle when the engine is running, set the lected. This can cause the automatic trans-
parking brake and movethe selector lever to mission to overheat and can damage it. Set
the "P" position. the parking brake or press the brake pedal
— Power is still transferred to the wheels when to preventthe vehicle from rolling.
the engine is running at idle. To prevent the — Allowing the vehicle to roll when the engine
vehicle from “creeping”, you must keep your is stopped while the selector lever is in the
8V2012721B)
foot on the brake when the engine is run- "N" position will damage the automatic
ning and the selector lever is in the "D", "S" transmission, because it is not lubricated >
8s
Driving
under those circumstances > page 386, Manual shifting (tiptronic mode)
Towing with a tow truck. Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission
— The transmission can overheat and be dam-
The tiptronic mode allows the driverto shift the
aged under certain driving and traffic condi-
gears manually.
tions such as frequentstarts, creeping for a
long time, or stop-and-go traffic. When the
E83 or FJ indicator light turns on, stop the
vehicle at the next opportunity and let the
transmission cool > page 88.
@)Tips
For safety reasons, the parking brake only re-
leases automatically when the driver's door is
closed.
Fig. 91 Center console: shifting manually with the selector
lever
Hill descent control
B8V-0606
The hill descent control system assists the driver
whendriving downhills.
Hill descent control is activated when the selec-

tor lever is in the "D" or "S" position and you
press the brake pedal. The transmission automat-
ically selects a gear that is suitable for the hill.
Hill descent control tries to maintain the speed
that was selected at the time of braking, within Fig. 92 Steering wheel: shifting manually with the shift
physical and technical limitations. If may still be paddles*
necessary to adjust the speed with the brakes.
Becausehill descent control cannot shift down Shifting with the selector lever
farther than 3rd gear, it may be necessaryto shift You can shift into tiptronic mode while the vehi-
into tiptronic mode in very steep areas. In this cle is stationary or while driving.
case, shift into 2nd or 1st gear in tiptronic mode
> To shift into tiptronic mode, push the selector
to use the engine's braking force to relieve the
lever from the "D/S" position to the right in the
brakes.
tiptronic shift gate. Once the transmission has
Hill descent control switches off once the hill lev- switched modes,the selector lever position M
els out or if you press the accelerator pedal. is shown in the instrument cluster display
=> page 82, fig. 88. For example, M4 means the
On vehicles with a cruise control system*
=> page 126,hill descent control is also activated fourth gear is engaged.
> To shift up a gear, tap the selector lever for-
when the speedis set.
ward @) © fig. 91.
Z\WARNING > To shift downa gear, tap the selector lever
backward ©).
Hill descent control may not be able to main-
tain a constant speed under all conditions. Al- Shifting with the shift paddles*
waysbe ready to apply the brakes.
You can operate the shift paddles in the "D/S"or
"M"(tiptronic shift gate) selector lever positions. >
86
Driving
> To shift up one gear, tap the shift paddle @)

> fig. 92.
ZX WARNING
> To shift down a gear, tap the ©) shift paddle. Please note that the wheels could spin on
> Applies to: RS models: To select the lowest/ slick or slippery roads when kick-down is ac-
highest possible gear, press and hold the shift tive.
paddle @)/@).
ETT eel ace) |
If the shift paddles are tapped while in the "D/S"
Applies to: vehicles with S tronic transmission and Launch
selector lever position, automatic mode switches Control Program
off briefly. To switch from manually shifting back
to automatic shifting immediately, tap the shift The launch control program provides the best
paddle 4) ° fig. 92 for 1 second. possible acceleration when starting from a stop.
To keep shifting using the shift paddles, move the Requirement: the engine mustbe at operating
selector lever to the right out of the "D/S"posi- temperature and the steering wheel must not be
tion into the tiptronic shift gate. turned.
The transmission automatically shifts up or down > Deactivate )) the Start/Stop system*
beforecritical engine speed is reached. => page 79. The LED in the |#] button turns on.
> With the engine running, press the |& OFF] but-
Applies to: RS models: When accelerating, the ton briefly one time. The B indicator light
transmission will not automatically shift to the turns on and the message Stabilization control
next gear shortly before the maximum permitted (ESC): sport. Warning! Limited stability ap-
engine RPM is reached. Shift to the next highest pearsin the instrument cluster display.
gear at the right time. > Pull the selector lever back out of the "D/S" po-
The transmission only allows manual shifting sition briefly to select the S position, or press it
when the engine speed is within the permitted toward the right into the tiptronic position or
range. select the Dynamic driving mode in drive se-
lect* > page 146.
> Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot
and holdit all the way down for at least one
second.
Kick-down enables maximum acceleration. > At the same time, press the gas pedal all the
way down with your right foot until the engine
When you pressthe accelerator pedal down be-
reaches and stays at a high RPM level.
yond the resistance point (called kick-down), the
> Removeyour left foot from the brake pedal
automatic transmission downshifts into a lower
within five seconds > /\.
gear, depending on vehicle speed and engine
RPM. It shifts up into the next higher gear once
the maximum permitted engine RPM is reached. ZA WARNING
— Always adaptyour driving to the traffic flow.
Applies to: RS models: In tiptronic mode, the
— Only use Launch Control when road and traf-
transmission does not automatically shift down
fic conditions allow it and other drivers will
into a lower gear. If you must accelerate, for ex-
not be endangered or impacted by your driv-
ample to pass a vehicle, you must shift manually.
ing and the vehicle's acceleration.
— Please note that the drive wheels can spin
and the vehicle can break away when sport >
8V2012721B)
D_ Itis not possible to deactivate the system with all versions

of the transmission.
87
Driving
mode is switched on, especially when the Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
road is slippery. or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
— Once the vehicle has started moving, press malfunction repaired.
the | OFF] button briefly to turn the sport | Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
mode off. ue driving with limited function. No reverse
gear
C) Note
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
When accelerating using Launch Control,all
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
vehicle componentsare subject to heavy
mode. This mode onlyshifts into certain gears or
loads. This can result in increased wear. may no longer shift at all. The engine maystall.
You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an
G) Tips
After accelerating using the Launch Control, Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
the temperature of some vehicle components rected.
mayincrease greatly. If that happens, the
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
function will not be available for a few mi-
ue driving in D until engine is off
nutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a
cool-down period, Launch Control will be Drive the vehicle away from moving traffic and
available again. park. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Miche smelt) fal Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving
style
75 Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehi- The transmission temperature has increased sig-
cle nificantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon from driving until the temperature returns to the
as possible in a safe location and secureit so it normal range and the indicator light turns off.
does not roll. See an authorized Audi dealer or Transmission: please press brake pedal and
authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. select gear again
5 Transmission: too hot! Please stop the vehi- If the transmission malfunctions because the
cle! temperatureis too high, a message appears
The transmission is too hot and can become dam- when the transmission is cooled.
aged. Stop and let the transmission cool with the
engine running (at idle) in the "P" selector lever
position. Then the indicator light and the mes-
sage turn off, drive to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the malfunction corrected. If the indicator
light and the driver message do notturn off, do
not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
sistance.
fs} Transmission: malfunction: You can contin-

ue driving
838
Driving
Releasing the selector lever in an > Carefully pry the shifter boot out with the
Caleta screwdriver while gripping the bootat the fold
Applies to: vehicles with automatic transmission and pulling it upward and out until all four cor-
© ners are released.
2
é > Fold the shifter boot up around the shifter knob
S
=
&
oO > fig. 94.
Selector lever emergency release

> Press and hold the yellow release button with
the screwdriver > fig. 94.
> Press the release button in the selector lever (@)
and movethe lever into the "N" position.
> Clip the shift cover back into the shift gate after
using the emergencyrelease.
B6V-0228] Z\WARNING
— Only activate the emergency release while
on level surface or a slight slope.
— The parking lock mayonly be released using
the emergencyrelease if the parking brake
is set. If it is not working, secure the vehicle
from rolling using the brake pedal or other
suitable means, such as blocking a front and
Fig. 94 Selector lever: using the emergencyrelease to
a rear wheel. An unsecured vehicle mayroll
moveout of the Park position
away, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent.
To maneuver or tow the vehicle, the emergency
release must be used to movethe selector lever
out of the “P” position.
The emergency release mechanism is located in

the right area under the selector lever shift gate.
Using the emergencyrelease can be complicated.
We recommend contacting an authorized Audi
sistance,if necessary.
You will need the screwdriver from the vehicle

tool kit to release it > page 368. Usethe flat side
of the reversible screwdriver blade.
Removing the shifter boot

> Set the parking brake to secure your vehicle
from rolling away. If this is not possible, secure
your vehicle from rolling using another meth-
od.
> Switch the ignition off.
8V2012721B)
> To loosen the shifter boot, carefully insert the

flat side of the screwdriver sidewaysinto the
slit near the shifter boot > fig. 93.
89
e-tron
e-tron authorized repair facilities that are certified

may perform work on the high-voltage sys-
Plug-in hybrid drive tem.
— Never damage, alter or remove the orange
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive high-voltage cable or disconnectit from the
high-voltage system.
General information
— Never perform any work using cutting, shap-
The plug-in hybrid drive is a drive conceptthat al- ing or sharp-edged tools or heat sources
lows you to choose between driving with the elec- near the high-voltage system and high-volt-
tric motor, with the gasoline engine or using a age cables.
combination of both. — Audi regulations mustbe followed during all
workperformed on the high-voltage system
All work done on the high-voltage system must
and high-voltage components.
only be performed bycertified high-voltage tech-
— When working on the high-voltage system
nicians at authorized Audi dealers or authorized
and high-voltage components, make sure
Audi Service Facilities in accordance with Audi
the remote control key is kept far enough
guidelines.
away from the vehicle so that there is no risk
The high-voltage system is composed ofthe fol- of the ignition being inadvertently switched
lowing high-voltage components: the high-volt- on.
age battery, the power electronics, the electric — Gases that escape from the high-voltage
motor, the high-voltage A/C compressor, the battery can be poisonous or flammable.
high-voltage heater, the charging system and — Damage to the high-voltage battery could
charging port as well as the orange high-voltage cause the high-voltage battery to leak im-
wiring. mediately or in the future, and poisonous or
The pedal referred to in this section of the Own- flammable gases could escape. Do notin-
er's Manual is the equivalent of the accelerator hale the gases!
pedal (gas pedal) in a standard vehicle. — Do not expose yourself to any leaking fluids
and do not come into contact with them.
High-voltage battery — The high-voltage battery electrolytefluid is
The high-voltage battery is located on the vehicle caustic. If electrolyte fluid comes into con-
underbodyin front of the rear axle and does not tact with the skin, flush the affected area for
require any maintenance from the driver. Addi- at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then
tional information about the high-voltage bat- wash the affected area with soap. Have the
tery can be found under > page 106. affected area examined by a medical profes-
sional.
Z\ WARNING — In the event of a technical emergency, in-
The voltage in the high-voltage system is life- form the respondersthat the vehicleis
threatening. Touching a damaged high-volt- equipped with a high-voltage battery.
age component can resultin a fatal electric
shock. The componentsin the high-voltage ZA WARNING
system are marked with a warning label which Never leave the vehicle unattended when in
warns against the high-voltage. drive ready mode > page 92 with a gear en-
— The voltage level in the high-voltage system gaged. The vehicle can start moving (“creep-
is still dangerous and potentially life-threat- ing”) even if the gasoline engine is switched
ening when the ignition is switched off. off, since the electric motor is still operating.
— Never perform work on orange high-voltage This may causecollisions and severe or fatal
cables or on high-voltage components. Only injuries. When the vehicle enters drive ready
90
e-tron
mode, the status message e-tron READY ap- high-voltage battery. Make sure the charge lev-
pearsbriefly in the instrument cluster display el is below 98 % when you start the charging
and the needle in the power meter points to process.
READY > page93. — Should the vehicle be parked for longer than
— Makesure that the selector lever is in the P 2 days at temperatures below - 13 °F (-25 °C),
position and the ignition is switched off the high-voltage battery could freeze and not
when leaving the vehicle. be able to provide energyto the electric motor.
The battery will start working again, once it
@) Note warms up. The battery can be warmed up when
the outside temperature rises or when the vehi-
— The high-voltage system can be damaged if
cle is garaged appropriately. The batterywill al-
the vehicle underbody comes into contact
so warm up when being used (switching on the
with the ground. Immediately drive your ve-
air conditioner, the heater or by driving the ve-
hicle to an authorized repair facility and
hicle). Should you have to park your vehicle at
have it inspected.
very low temperatures for longer than 1 day,
— The electric drive motor can become very
makesure that the high-voltage battery does
hot during operation. Do not stop the vehi-
not freeze by parking the vehicle in a garage
cle if there is oil, fuel residue or other flam-
that is heated or protected from the outside
mable substances under or nextto the vehi-
temperature.
cle.
— The high-voltage battery can be damaged and
the capacity can be decreased when the vehicle
Special considerations for the high-voltage is parked for longer than 24 hours when the
Pe laclays
ambient temperatureis higher than 118 °F
(48 °C). Always make sure that the high-voltage
Please first read and note the introductoryinfor- battery is not exposed to temperatures above
mation and heed the warnings > page 90. 118 °F (48 °C) for a long time.
— Never park the vehicle in areas that arelikely to
All batteries age with use and over time. There
be flooded, such as beaches or river banks, and
are things you should know about the care of the
never drive the vehicle in WATER, on flooded
high voltage battery that will help it keep giving
roads or through water that is higher than the
you good service and reliability over time. Please
bottom of the vehicle body. The high-voltage
read and keep the following information in mind
battery, along with other vehicle components,
while you enjoy the performance and economy of
can be damagedseverelyif the high-voltage
your vehicle.
battery is exposed to open water especially for
— Be sure to charge the high voltage battery be- a longer time. However, you can drive through
fore leaving the vehicle parked and unused for a water on roads under certain conditions
longer period of time. Ideally the high-voltage => page 72.
battery should have a charge level between
Failure to heed any of these requirements can
40 % and 60 % when parked for a long time.
age the battery prematurely and lead to a perma-
—If the battery charge level is below 3 %, never
nent decrease of the high-voltage battery’s ca-
park the vehicle for more than 21 days without
pacity.
charging the high-voltage battery. Should you
have to park the vehicle for a long time, make (i) Tips
sure that the charge level is sufficient to help
Always makesure that the high-voltage bat-
prevent the battery from aging prematurely.
tery is not exposed to extremely low and high
— Frequent and consecutive charging of the high-
8V2012721B)
temperatures as well as to water especially

voltage battery when the charge level is above
for a longer time. Failure to protect and care
98 % can also decrease the capacity of the
for the high voltage battery can lead to
91
e-tron
serious damage and/or a decrease of the ca- when the sounds from the tires and wind start in-
pacity void coverage under the NewVehicle creasing.
Limited Warranty.
Switching the ignition on/off
Starting/driving the vehicle You can switch the ignition on without establish-
Appliesto: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive ing drive ready mode.
The vehicle is started and stopped with the —To switch the ignition on or off, press the
START ENGINE STOP] button. Please also read START ENGINE STOP] button. Do not press the
the information under > page 75, Starting the brake pedal while doing this.
engine. When the ignition is switched on, the needle
stays pointed at OFF @) > page93,fig. 96 or
Establishing drive ready mode
OFF is displayed @) > page 93,fig. 96.
See > A\ in Introduction on page 90.
No indicator lights stay turned on when the igni-
Requirement: a charging cable must not be con- tion is switched off.
nected to the vehicle > page 121 and the selec-
tor lever must be in the "P" or "N" position. Ignition is switched off automatically
— Press the brake pedal. To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the
— Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. ignition will switch off automatically under the
following conditions:
When the vehicle enters drive ready mode, the
status message e-tron READY appearsbriefly in — If the vehicle has already been driven
the instrument cluster display and the needlein — If the vehicle is stationary
the power meter points to READY > page 93. — If the gasoline engine is not running
— If the driver's door is opened
Driving —If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
The vehicle starts with the electric motor after —If the brake pedal is not pressed
establishing the drive ready mode and if the con-
In this case, the activated low beam is replaced
ditions for electric drive mode have been met
by the parking light. The message Side marker
=> page 96.
lights will switch off automatically in 30 mi-
The conditions to drive are essentially the same nutes. See owner's manual appearsin the instru-
as for the automatic transmission > page 82. ment cluster display. The parking lights will
switch off after approximately 30 minutes or
You and your passengers should anticipate the
when you lock the vehicle.
possibility of a sporty acceleration.
If the gasoline engine was not stopped, the mo-
Ending drive ready mode tor continues running and the ignition does not
— Place the selector lever in the “P” position. automatically switch off > A\.
— Switch the ignition off with the
START ENGINE STOP] button. ZX WARNING
To reduce the risk of poisoning, never allow
Vehicle sound»)
the engine to run in confined spaces. >
The vehicle generates an electronic engine sound
so that your vehicle can be heard from the out-
side when in electric drive mode. The vehicle
sound automatically fades out at higher speeds
D_ Notavailable in all markets.
92
e-tron
@ Tips
The vehicle cannot start when outside tem-
peratures are below -18 °F (-28 °C)
=> page 94.
The power meter showsthe status of the plug-in hybrid drive and the availability of the plug-in hybrid
system.
|
&
|
Ss
>
%
a

Fig. 95 Power meter overview (diagram)
a]
ta]
o|
i
=
&|
Ey

Fig. 96 Power meter overview (diagram)
Selecting the power meter display format > Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using Select on the multifunction steering wheel:
the [<>] button on the multifunction steering right control button > Left dial > Tachometer or
8V2012721B)
Power meter > Combination view. >

wheel.
93
e-tron
For additional information, see > page 21, Trip Be Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop
computer(Audivirtual cockpit). vehicle
» Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
There is a malfunction in the plug-in hybrid sys-
cluster: Open the Tachometer display by turn-
tem. The brake booster and the power steering
ing the left thumbwheel on the multifunction
may stop working. Stop the vehicle immediately
steering wheel.
or as soon as possible. Park the vehicle in a safe
When opening the driver's door, the charge level place outdoorsthat is not near buildings, roof
is shownin the instrument cluster when the igni- overhangs, carports or similar structures. Switch
tion is switched on, or the charge level and the the ignition off. Have the problem corrected by
remaining charge time for the high-voltage bat- an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
tery is displayed when charging. Service Facility.
The power meter gives feedback about the partic- Be Electric drive: overheated! Safely stop
ular accelerator pedal position and shows the vehicle and check coolant
current demand (%)for electricity or fuel regard- The coolant level is too Low or the coolant tem-
less of which engine is active. perature is too high.
An economical driving and recuperation range is Stop the vehicle in the outdoors as soon as it is
shown in green > page 97, Energy recovery (re- safely possible. Switch the ignition off.
cuperation). A driving range that is not economi-
cal is shownin orange. Read the important safety precautions > A\ in
Coolant on page 101 and check the coolant level
Vehicle not drive ready (OFF)
©80
=>page 101.
Recuperation (CHARGE)
If the coolant level is OK, the malfunction may be
Vehicle ready to drive (READY) or
caused by the system overheating. Let the vehi-
coasting
cle's electric drive system cool down for some
Efficient driving with electric motor
®©®
time.
and/or gasoline engine (EFFICIEN-
cy) If the message turns off after cooling down and
Economic driving while the electric switching the ignition back on, you can continue
©
motor or gasoline engine is in the driving. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
partial power range thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
the malfunction corrected.
Driving in full power range
©0®@
100% output If the indicator light stays on, contact an author-

BOOST: the electric motor supports ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
the combustion engine ty.
High-voltage battery charge level Bea Drive system: malfunction! Please con-
©©&
EV mode: active —*", standby, <8 tact Service

or currently unavailable. 2x5" There is a malfunction in the plug-in hybrid sys-
Speed limit for electric driving in EV
®
tem. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi

mode (80 mph / 130 km/h) dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
the malfunction repaired.
Indicator lights and messages
Be Drive system: malfunction! Restart not
possible. Please contact Service
Also notethe indicator lights in > page 10.
There is a malfunction in the plug-in hybrid sys-
The gasoline engine is active when the indica- tem. Do not open the hood. Drive to an author-
tor light turns on. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
94
e-tron
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- Range display

rected. Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Be Battery temperature too low. Vehicle
B8V-0674
cannotbe started. See owner's manual
The outside temperatureis too low. The vehicle

can no longer start at temperatures below -18 °F
(-28 °C). Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility.
#7]POWER Warning! Limited performance
If the indicator light turns on and this message

appears, there may be an engine control mal- Fig. 97 Instrumentcluster: range display
function. The Ga: indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster also turns on. The engine output is The range can be displayed in the trip computer.
reduced. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- You can access the range display with the multi-
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have function steering wheel buttons > page 17, Mul-
the malfunction corrected. tifunction steering wheel plus or > page 20, Mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
e-tron mode: EV currently unavailable
Depending on the selected plug-in hybrid mode,
This message appearsif the <SY button is pressed the display gives the following information:
but the conditions for electric drive mode are not
met. @ Remaining electric motor range or combined
total range
Drive system: engine must be running.
Please exit EV e-tron mode @ Remaining gasoline engine range
It may be necessary for the gasoline engine to @ Remaining electric motor range
run longer for technical reasons, such as when
condensation accumulates in the engine. Driving G@) Tips
exclusively in electric mode is not possible in this The values given are based on the latest con-
phase. sumption values.
BS Vehicle sound: malfunction! Pedestrians

cannothear vehicle. Please contact Service Roemeee)
The vehicle sound is no longer functioning. Drive
extremely carefully, since others may not hear
your vehicle. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer elsSeteaeLe
Smeal
Vets
have the malfunction corrected. ECC TanTir naar
Tee eaeeu)
arte)
Fig. 98 Infotainment system: e-tron range monitor
Opening the range monitor

The range monitor in the Infotainment system
8V2012721B)
showsthe relationship between energy consum-

ers and electric range > fig. 98. The three largest >
95
e-tron
energy consumerswill be listed in sequential or- <SV e-tron mode: EV - EV mode is electric driving
der. Switching off the consumersincreases the only. EV mode is active at the beginning of every
electric range. trip depending on the operating condition of the
vehicle. The LED in the <$¥ button turns on.
The B indicator light also appears in the instru-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Range &
ment cluster. The gasoline engine remains
statistics > Range.
turned off, as long as the conditions for electric
Opening the statistics driving are met > page 96, Conditions for elec-
tric driving.
The statistics in the Infotainment system show
the distances driven without emissions (electric) © e-tron mode: Hybrid - The electric motor and
and with fuel. The values are taken from the the gasoline engine work efficiently together in
short-term memory and long-term memory of hybrid mode. The high-voltage battery will be
the on-board computer. used to the fullest extent when this mode is
switched on. This mode is best suited for long
distances.
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Range &
statistics > e-tron statistics. *S e-tron mode: Battery Hold - The electric mo-
> To switch between the short-term and long- tor and the gasoline engine work together in Bat-
term memory, turn the left thumbwheel on the tery Hold mode, so that the high-voltage battery
multifunction steering wheel. charge level is maintained as much as possible.
Setting plug-in hybrid drive modes @ Tips

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive — Applies to: Battery Hold mode: The high-
voltage battery charge level can still de-
You can select between one electric mode and
crease depending on the driving behavior.
two hybrid modes.
— If you select the sport driving mode "S", the
Tr
x
S Battery Hold mode is automatically select-
g|
=
© ed.
a.
— If the <8’ > page 96 button is pressed while
in sport driving mode "S", the transmission
switches automatically to normal mode "D".
— When temperaturesare below approximate-
ly 14 °F (-10 °C), the vehicle heat output in
EV mode is reducedin order to attain higher
ranges. If the windowsfog up or a higher
Fig. 99 Center console: Button <SY heat output is desired, switch on the Hybrid
or Battery Hold mode.
> Press the $Y button repeatedly until the de-
sired drive mode is displayed in the instrument
Conditions for electric driving
cluster/Infotainment system display. Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You can change modes when the vehicleis sta-

The EV mode can only be switched on if the fol-
tionary or while driving. If the vehicle operating
lowing conditions are met:
conditions will not allow you to set the mode
manually, the last active mode is selected. —The charge level of the high-voltage battery
mustbe sufficient.
The active mode is displayed the first time the
— The temperature of the high-voltage battery
<-$" button is pressed.
must be adequate (outside temperatures not >
96
e-tron
below approximately 14°F / -10°C and not Full-throttle acceleration (boost)

above 104°F / 40°C) The boost function is activated by pressing the
— The speed mustnot be higher than approxi- accelerator pedal all the way down. The vehicleis
mately 80 mph (130 km/h). powered by both the gasoline engine and the
— Kick-down mustnot be activated. electric motor when in full acceleration. Boostis
—The sport drive mode "S" must not be selected. only available for a short time, becauseit uses a
EV mode is switched off if one or more of the large amount of energy. Availability depends on
conditions are not met. The gasoline engine will the high-voltage battery charge level.
start automatically. The indicator light turns Coasting
on as a message in the instrument cluster. The
LED in the <8 button and the B indicator light The gasoline engine switches off and disengages
turn off. If the Tachometer display is selected on at speeds up to approximately 112 mph
vehicles with an Audi virtual cockpit in the instru- (180 km/h)if the accelerator pedal is not pressed
ment cluster*, the indicator light is hidden and the "D"position is selected. Driving conserva-
=> page 93. tively like this can reduce fuel consumption.
Electric drive mode will not continue automati- Energy recovery (recuperation)
cally. Reactivate the EV mode > page 96. When braking, the electric motor will act as a
generator creating electric energy that is then
@ Tips stored in the high-voltage battery. This also oc-
— It may be necessary for the gasoline engine curs when the vehicle is coasting or driving down-
to run longer for technical reasons, such as hill.
when condensation accumulatesin the en-
If the brakes are applied early and evenly, the
gine. Driving exclusively in electric mode is
electric motor will brake the vehicle 2)
not possible in this phase.
=> page 93,fig. 96. By doing this, a large amount
— Applies to: Automatic transmission: Before
of the kinetic energy is recovered and may be
driving downhill a long distance on a steep
stored as electric energy in the high-voltage bat-
hill, decrease your speed and select a lower
tery. The conventional brakes are also activated
gear. When driving with a trailer, the "S" se-
when the brakesare pressed very hard.
lector lever position must be selected. This
makesuse of the engine braking effect and The strength of recuperation can depend on the
reduces the load placed on the brakes. If following factors:
you need to brake additionally, brakein in-
— If you are in tiptronic mode > page 86. Or
tervals and not continuously.
— If the sport driving mode "S"was selected.
Plug-in hybrid functions The energy recovery is shownin the energy flow
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive display in the instrument cluster display/Info-
tainment system > page 99.
The functions described below activate automati-
cally depending on the driving style.
8V2012721B)
97
e-tron
BET Meleaiaimee aiare)

Driving situations Conditions Vehicle behavior

- Cautious driving and reserved ac- The kinetic energy of the vehicle is used to
celeration. movethe vehicle.
Constant driving and - Release the accelerator pedal The gasoline engine turns off automati-
coasting (gliding) early and entirely. cally and disengages when you release the
accelerator pedal completely. The vehicle
glides without being propelled.
- Brake early and evenly with short The electric motor brakes the vehicle. By
pedal movements. doing this, a large amount of the kinetic
Energyrecovery (re-
energy is recovered and maybe stored in
cuperation)
the high-voltage battery in the form of
electric energy.
- Accelerate moderately and brake The kinetic energy of the vehicle is used to
Driving in city traffic
early and evenly. movethe vehicle.
- Intentionally take your foot off of The gasoline engine turns off automati-
the gas pedal to allow for pro- cally and disengages when you release the
longed coasting. accelerator pedal completely. The vehicle
glides without being propelled.
Driving on highways
— Reduce the vehicle speed by re- Fuel consumption can be reduced by
and expressways
leasing the accelerator pedal and coasting.
not by braking.
- Use the "S" selector lever position A sporty driving style increases fuel con-
and tiptronic mode sparingly. sumption.
- Do not run the gasoline engine to The temperature of the gasoline engine
warm the engine while the vehicle rises very slowly and the fuel consump-
is parked tion increases considerably.
- Use the rear window/exterior mir- This conserves the energy in the high-volt-
ror defogger and the seat heating age battery so that it is available to run
Driving in cold weath-
sparingly. the vehicle in electric mode.
er
- Park the vehicle in a garage over- This reduces exposure of the high-voltage
night. battery to cold temperatures. The re-
quired temperature range for the high-
voltage battery will then be reached more
quickly after you start driving.
98
e-tron
Energy flow display

B8V-0675
Comfort
Auto
DTT
Sic
Fig. 101 Infotainment system*: energyflow display
Fig. 100 Instrument cluster: energy flow display
An energy flow display can be shown in the in- > Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
strumentclusterdisplay/Infotainment system )). cluster: Open the Energy flow indicator by
turning the left thumbwheel on the multifunc-
The image is animated in the Infotainmentsys-
tion steering wheel.
tem).
Image in the Infotainment display!)
Display of energy flowindicator in the
instrument cluster display > In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using button > Vehicle > left control button > Audi
drive select.
the [<>] button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
Select on the multifunction steering wheel: left
control button > Energy flow.
Component Color Meaning

@ Gasoline engine Orange The gasoline engine is running
Gray The gasoline engine is off
@ High-voltage battery Green High-voltage battery charge level
Green The high-voltage battery is charging
(animated in the
Infotainment sys-
tem ?))
Gray The vehicle is not in drive ready mode
Motion arrow Green Electric driving
Orange Driving with the gasoline engine
Green-orange Driving with the gasoline engine and electric mo-
tor (boost)
@) Motion arrow Green Recuperation
@) Notavailable in all Infotainmentsystems.

8V2012721B)
)) Notavailablein all Infotainment systems.
99
e-tron
Vehicle tool kit and tire mobility kit

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive nn ies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
© The term "vehicle battery" refers to the 12 volt

6B
¥
gz
= battery in your vehicle.
©
a
Fig. 102 Luggage compartment:vehicle toolkit andtire

mobility kit
The vehicle tool kit and the tire mobility kit (Tire Fig. 103 Engine compartment: connectorsfor a charger
and jump start cables
Mobility System)are located in the side trim pan-
el @ and in the luggage compartment.
The vehicle is equipped with one vehicle battery
Additional information about the vehicle tool kit and one high-voltage battery.
may be found under > page 368 and information
If the vehicle battery is drained, it can be charged
about the tire mobility kit under > page 369.
with a charger or you can jump start the vehicle
using another vehicle's battery in the same way
@ Tips
as a conventional vehicle.
The vehicle must not be operated without the
tire repair set. Read the information about charging the vehicle
battery > page 336 and for jump starting the ve-
hicle > page 383.
Wala mar lary lela
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive > Open the hood > page 327.
This section contains information you should » Removethe fuse box cover (8) to access the
positive terminal ) > page 328.
know about transporting yourvehicle.
> Clamp the terminal clamps from the charging
A lithium-ion high-voltage battery system equip- device or jump start cable to the positive termi-
ped in your vehicle has passed test 38.3 in ac- nal @) and to the body ground point ©).
cordance with the UN Tests and Criteria hand-
book and is manufactured in accordance with a () Note
quality managementprogram. The vehicle may
You mustnotgive a jump start with your vehi-
be transported with the high-voltage battery in-
cle. This could causesignificant damage to
stalled as conventional class 9 hazardous materi-
the electrical system in your vehicle.
als without additional official authorization for
air and sea shipment (current law IATA-DGR and
IMDG code 01.01.2018).
100
e-tron
Refueling
Opening the fuel filler door
2
g
>
a
a
Fig. 104 Engine compartment: coolant expansion tank
Your vehicle has two coolant expansion tanks Fig. 105 Driver's door: Button A)
that are separate from each other:

The tank system mustbe vented beforerefueling
@: expansion tank for gasoline engine and elec-
tric motor. > Switch the ignition off with the
START ENGINE STOP] button.
@®):expansion tank for the high-voltage area. > Pull the M switch.
The expansiontank must not be opened > The fuel filler door will open automatically af-
>/\. ter venting is complete.
> Switch the ignition off. Read and follow the directions for inserting the
> Open the hood > page 327. fuel pump nozzle > page 101.
> Always check the coolant level in both coolant Read and follow the instructions for refueling
expansion tanks @) and using the outer => page 322.
markings.
> When you fill coolant in the expansion tank @),
Inserting the fuel pump nozzle
please refer to > page 332, Cooling system.
> Do notdrive anyfarther if the coolant level in
the expansion tank is low. Contact an au-
B8V-0559
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility immediately > A\.
ZA WARNING
— Read and follow the warnings in
=> page 325, General information before
opening the hood and checking the coolant
level.
Fig. 106 Fueling procedure: insert the fuel pump nozzle
— The expansion tank may only be opened
correctly
and filled by an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility. Makesure when inserting the fuel pump nozzle
— Coolant can enter the inside of the high- that you do not press on the fuel filler door open-
voltage battery when filling the expansion er @ withthe fuel pump nozzle. See the label in
tank and cause a shortcircuit, which in- the fuel filler door ©. Otherwise, a valve will
8V2012721B)
creasesthe risk offire. close in the fuel filler neck and fueling will stop
even if the tank is not full. >
101
e-tron
You must vent the tank system again if you press

G) Tips
on the fuel filler door opener. The fuel pump noz-
zle can stay in the fuel filler neck when doing Pressure can escape if you open the tank cap
this. Vent the tank system bypulling the A) after using the emergencyrelease. This can
switch again in the driver's door > page 101. create noises.
Messages Charging
iy Fuel filler door open. Please press button Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
again to refuel Twooptions are available for charging the vehi-

Fueling is possible for a little while after pressing cle:
the Gf) button. You must press the f button — Charge at a public charging station with a spe-
again if the time limit is exceeded.
cial charging cable* > page 105.
AN] Fuel filler door: malfunction! Unlock fuel — Charge with household and industrial* sockets
filler door manually. See owner's manual using the Audi charging system > page 106.
There is a malfunction. You must manually un- Using the charging equipment
lock the fuel filler door > page 102.
Pay attention to the following information for
fw Warning! Vehicle performance maybelimit- safe handling of the charging equipment:
ed
— Secure the charging equipment against any
The fuel tank is almost empty. You mustantici- strain, such as being run over,falling, pulling,
pate a significant power loss. Drive immediately bending, and crushing.
to agas station. — Do not submerge the charging equipment in
water and do notcover it with snowor ice.
|"POWER Warning! Limited performance
— Only pull at the plugs when removing the
The gasoline engine is no longer available be- charging cable from the vehicle and from the
cause there is not enough fuel. Drive immediately power supply.
to a gas station. — Put the cap on after using the charging cable.
— Only operate the Audi charging system ina
Fuel filler door emergency release power supply system with a frequency of
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive 50 Hz/60 Hz.
— Only operate the Audi charging system at a hu-
You must use the emergencyrelease to open the
midity level between 5% and 95% (non-con-
fuel filler door when there is a malfunction
densing).
=> page 324.
— The Audi charging system is protected against
The tank is not vented. You can onlyfill a small dust and splashing water (IP54 (USA: enclosure
amount offuel in the tank. 3R)) or protected against dust and jet streams
> Fill only until the automatic fuel pump nozzle of water (IP55 (USA: Enclosure 3))
turns off for the first time when it is operated Depending on the country,different warnings
correctly. may be on the charging equipment.
102
e-tron
Symbol Meaning Grounding instructions

Operate the Audi charging system Audi charging systems must be grounded. Ifit
at a temperature range of -22 °F should malfunction or break down, grounding
(-30 °C) to +122 °F (+50 °C). provides a path of least resistance for electric
Operate the Audi charging system current to reduce the risk of electric shock. Audi
<4000m at a maximum elevation of charging systems are equipped with a cord hav-
13,000 ft (4,000 m)abovesea lev- ing an equipment grounding conductor and a
el. grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into
The Audi charging system's equip= an appropriate outlet that is properly installed
ped with a ground conductor that is and grounded in accordance with all local codes
st and ordinances.
not connected.
The Audi charging system is equip- A WARNING
WY ped with a connected ground con- : .
ductor Improper connection of the equipment-
- - - grounding conductor is able to result in a risk
SBS Do not operatelthe)Audl charging of electric shock. Check with a qualified elec-
Ys system in power networksthat are trician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to
not grounded (for example, IT net- whether the productis properly grounded. Do
works). Only operate the Audi not modify the plug provided with the product
charging system in grounded power - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper out-
networks. let installed by a qualified electrician.
Surfaces can become very hot when
in direct sunlight.
Important safety
precautions
Incorrect use increases the risk of
Z\ WARNING
electric shock.
Sockets that are installed incorrectly can
causeelectric shock or fire when charging the
high-voltage battery using the vehicle charg-
Pay attention to the applicable own- ing connection.
er's manual, particularly the safety — Read all information and safety precautions
precautions. for the Audi charging system before using
the Audi charging system.
Pay attention to all applicable dis- — Monitor the Audi charging system when it is
posal regulations when disposing. being used near children.
Do not use any extensions cords or — Installation and setup of the household con-
cable reels. nection for the Audi charging system may
only be performed by a qualified electrician.
Do not use anytravel adapters.
The qualified electrician is thereby fully re-
sponsible for adhering to applicable stand-
Do not use any power strips.
ards and regulations.
— Makesure that the selected charging con-
Do not use any charging cables with nector is suitable for drawing the current
damage tothe electronics or the specified on the Audi charging system.
8V2012721B)
connecting wires. — Make sure that the household socketis

grounded and shielded from water.
103
e-tron
— The Audi charging system may only be used or an adapter, for example, a travel adapter
with a power network that is grounded prop- or timer.
erly. It cannot be used with non-grounded — Disconnect the Audi charging system from
power networks(such as IT networks). the power network during a thunderstorm.
— Please follow the safety precautions in the — Do not modify or repair any electrical com-
assembly instructions for the Audi charging ponents.
dock* or the Audi charging clip*. — Never submerge the Audi charging systems
or the connectorsin water.
Z\WARNING — The Audi charging system mustonly be
If you are not familiar with the socket or the cleaned when the control unit is completely
electrical installation or it has not been disconnected from the power supply and
checked by qualified experts, never use it for from the vehicle. Use a dry towel to clean.
charging. Even very low charging currents can —Ifa110 volt household socket is used for
cause serious damage and in particular fires if charging, only connect one vehicle at a time
the socket or electrical installation is in bad to the same circuit. Use a different circuit if
condition. If necessary, get expert assistance an additional vehicle needs to be charged at
from a qualified electrical installation special- the same time. Note the maximum permit-
ist. ted current draw for the circuit. Contact a
qualified electrical technician if there is any
Z\ WARNING doubt.
— If Audi charging systems do not function ac-
Incorrect handling of the connector contacts
cording to the specifications in the operat-
can causeelectric shock or fire.
ing manual, they must not be used. Contact
— Do not touch the contacts for the vehicle
charging port and for the Audi charging sys-
di Service Facility.
tem.
— Audi charging systems are intended for use
— Do not insert any objects into the vehicle
in private and semi-private areas (for exam-
charging portor into the Audi charging sys-
ple, private property and companyparking
tem.
lots). Depending on the country, charging in
— Protect the sockets and connectors against
mode 2 maybe forbidden in public areas
any moisture, water and other fluids.
and public spaces. Contact an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
Z\ WARNING ty for more information.
Using a damaged or incorrect charging cable — Do not disconnect the vehicle charging cable
or socket, using the Audi charging system in- from the socket or the vehicle charging port
correctly, or disregarding the safety precau- while the vehicle is charging. End the charg-
tions could cause short circuiting, electric ing process before removing the vehicle
shock, explosions, fires, and burns. charging cable from the socket in order to
— Do not use the Audi charging system if it is reduce the risk of damaging the connector
damagedand/or dirty. Check the cable and contacts from sparks.
connector for damage and dirt before using.
— The Audi charging system mustonly be con- ZA WARNING
nected to sockets that are installed correctly
The componentsin the Audi charging system
and that are not damaged, or to electrical
can trigger sparks which can cause flammable
equipment that is functioning correctly.
or explosive fumesto ignite.
— Never use the Audi charging system with an
—To reduce the risk of explosions, especially in
extension cable, a cable reel, a power strip,
garages, makesure the control unit is at
104
e-tron
least 19 inches (50 cm) abovethe floor > Follow the operating instructions at the charg-
when charging. ing station to charge the high-voltage battery.
— Do not use the Audi charging system in > Unlock the vehicle if necessary > page 30.
areas at risk for explosions. > Make sure that the selector lever is in the P po-
— The Audi charging system is only intended sition and drive ready mode is switched off.
for use on Audi vehicles and vehicles within > Turn the lock until it is vertical to open the cov-
the Volkswagen Group. Using the device on er on the charging unit > page 109,fig. 113.
vehicles made by another manufacturer is > Slide the cover carefully to the side if necessary.
not authorized. > Removethe lock on the charging port
=> page 109, fig. 114.
@) Note > Removethe cap from the charging cable.
> Connect the cable to the vehicle charging port.
Makesure that you always use the correct
> If acharging timer is not set, the charging proc-
power plug provided with the Audi charging
ess will start automatically depending on the
system for the country in which it is being
charging station > page 110, Setting the
used. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
charging timer.
authorized Audi Service Facility for morein-
> The vehicle operating status is indicated by the
formation.
status LED > table on page 113.
> Also read the information found in > page 112,
@ Tips
After charging.
— Only use the factory-provided charging ca-
ble from Audi or the Volkswagen Group to (i) Tips
charge your vehicle.
Only charge your vehicle at charging stations
— For an uninterrupted charging process, we
that conform to the following standards, de-
recommend only charging using sockets
pending on the country:
that are connected to a separately protected
— GB/T 18487.1 and GB/T 20234 (China)
circuit.
— IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (Europe)
— Using either NEMA sockets with a current
rating of at least 30 A or industrial sockets — SAE J1772 (North America, Japan)
in accordance with IEC 60309 when charg-
G) Tips
ing is recommended.
— When charging the high-voltage battery us- — It is not possible to charge using the charg-
ing household or industrial* sockets, the ing timer at some charging stations.
electrical installation can be used at full ca- — You can use your Audi charging system if
pacity. Having a qualified electrician regu- there is a household or industrial* connec-
larly inspect the electrical installations that tion available at the charging station.
are used for charging is recommended.
— The vehicle radio and TV systems may have
limited reception when charging the vehicle.
Charging at public
charging stations
Use the charging cable supplied at the public

charging station for charging. Contact an author-
8V2012721B)
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-

ty for more information.
105
e-tron
Charging the battery until the temperature has lowered back

within the normal range.
with the Audi charging
system
Changing and attaching the power/vehicle
(Gieleneine) ad (li cable
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
B4G-0681
Fig. 107 Audi charging system overview (example) Fig. 108 Control unit: removing and attaching the cable
@ Power cable Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may

not be able to change the vehicle cable.
@ Power plug (for industrial sockets)*
Requirements:
@®) Power plug (for household sockets)
> The charging process for the high-voltage bat-
@ Control unit
tery must be ended.
© Vehicle charging connector (connector for the > The vehicle charging connector mustbe re-
vehicle) moved from the vehicle charging port.
> The power cable must be removed from the
© Vehicle cable
socket.
The power cable @) is plugged into the upper end
of the control unit and the vehicle cable ©) is Loosening the cable
plugged into the lower end of the control unit @). > If necessary, loosen the screw @) > fig. 108 us-
Thereare different charging systems depending ing the screwdriver provided.
on the market and the equipment: > Lift the lever @ all the way up.
> Pull the connector @) out just until you feel re-
— Charging system (version 1) > page 110 sistance.
— Charging system (version 2) > page 115 > Close the lever @ until it is resting on the con-
nector (2).
@ Tips > Remove the connector (2) completely.
— Using the control unit while operating the
Attaching the cable
charging dock* > page 107 or charging clip*
= page 107 is recommended. When this is > Lift the lever @ up slightly.
not possible, always position Audi charging > Insert the connector @) into the control unit
systems on secure surface during the just until you feel resistance.
charging process. > Lift the lever @ all the wayup.
— To reducethe risk of overheating during op- > Insert the connector (2) all the way into the
eration, do not place the Audi charging sys- control unit.
tem in direct sunlight for long periods of > Close the lever @).
time. If the control unit is overheated, the > Tighten the screw (3) using the screwdriver pro-
charging process is automatically paused vided.
106
e-tron
Mounting the charging system in the

ZA\ WARNING charging dock
— Always remove the power cable from the
> Open the door on the charging dock.
socket before changing the power cable or
» First insert the control unit in the bottom tabs
vehicle cable.
on the charging dock and then into the upper
— Alwaysfollow the instructions given when
tabs.
charging the high-voltage battery.
> Push the control unit toward the rear and letit
— Only change cablesin a dry environment.
lock into place.
— The Audi charging system may only be used > Guide the vehicle cable through the opening @)
as a complete unit consisting of the power > fig. 110.
cables, the control unit, and the vehicle ca- > Wrap the extra cable length around the adapter
ble. We recommend using only cables ap- ©.
proved by Audi.
> Plug the power cable into the socket in the
charging dock.
Charging dock > Close the door.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and charging > After charging, you can place the vehicle charg-
dock
ing connector () > page 106, fig. 107 in the
2
3 holder on the charging dock door > fig. 109.
é=
& Removing the charging system from the
a
charging dock
> Open the door on the charging dock.
» Removethe power cable connector from the
socket in the charging dock.
>» Unwrap the cable from the adapter (8).
> To loosen the control unit from the holder,
press the release tabs above the control unit in
Fig. 109 Opening/closing the charging dock
the direction of the arrow © fig. 110.
3Z|
3
&
a
(i) Tips
— Alwayskeep the door on the charging dock
closed.
— Do not place any objects on the door or the
charging dock.
(eerie mat)
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and charging clip
Fig. 110 Charging dock: mounting the charging system
RAZ-0075|
You can store the charging system in the charg-

ing dock.
Opening/closing the charging dock

> If necessary, you can unlock/lock the charging
dock using the key provided by turning it to the
unlocked position or locked position @)
8V2012721B)
> fig. 109.

> Opening/closing the door on the charging dock.
Fig. 111 Charging clip: charging system connected
107
e-tron
Connecting the charging system to the place and endanger vehicle occupants when
charging clip braking, when changing directions, or in an
> First insert the control unit in the bottom tabs accident.
on the charging clip and then into the upper — Never transport the Audi charging system or
tabs. the special charging cable* without securing
> Push the control unit in the direction of the ar- them.
row toward the rear > fig. 111 and letit lock in- — Store the Audi charging system or the spe-
to place. cial charging cable* in the storage bag in the
> Wrap the extra cable length around the charg- luggage compartment.
ing connector mount (4). — Alwaystransport the storage bag in the lug-
> Plug the power cableinto the socket(2). gage compartmentand never in the passen-
> After charging, you can hook the vehicle charg- ger compartment(for example the seats or
ing connector () > page 106, fig. 107 to the in front of them).
charging connector mount (@) © fig. 111.
Removing the charging system from the

() Note
charging clip Alwayslift or transport the Audi charging sys-
tem as an entire unit and never by the cables.
> Remove the power cable connector from the
socket (2).
> Unwind the cable from the charging connector Charging time
mount(4). Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
> To loosen the control unit from the bracket, The length of the charging process using the Audi
push the locking mechanism@) upward charging system may vary based on the following
> fig. 111. factors:
— The sockets that are used (household or indus-

Mey Sadie)
trial* sockets)
— The system voltage and current strength that
are specific to a country
— The value set for the charging power level on
the control unit (50% or 100%).
— Fluctuations in the system voltage
— The temperature outside the vehicle
— The temperature of the high-voltage battery
— Settings for the climate control inside the vehi-
cle
— Current capacity of the charging connector
Fig. 112 Storage bag — Whether the ignition is on or off
> Store the charging system and the special Example charging times
charging cable* in the bag before transporting. Connection Charging time at
> Secure the bag using the tie-downs > page 65. 100% charge
The flat hook mustbe secured tothe left side
Household socket approximately 10
of the tie-downs.
(100 V, 10 A) hours
ZA\ WARNING Household socket

(120 V, 10 A)
approximately 8.2
hours
— If the vehicle charging cable is not secured
Household socket approximately 5.2
or positioned correctly, it can slide out of
(220 V, 8A) hours
108
e-tron
ey
Connection Charging time at o
+
3S
100% charge >
@
oO
Household socket approximately 3.8
(230 V, 10 A) hours
Industrial socket (200 V, approximately 2.3
16 A) hours
Industrial socket (220 V, approximately 2.3
16 A) hours
Industrial socket (230 V, approximately 2.3 Fig. 114 Radiator grille: charging port cap
16 A) hours
Industrial socket (240 V, approximately 2.3 > Unlock the vehicle if necessary > page 30.
16 A) hours > Make sure the "P" selector lever position is en-
gaged, the parking brakeis set, and ready
@ Tips mode is switched off > page 92.
> Turn the lock until it is vertical to open the cov-
— Multiple versions of charging cablesare of-
er on the charging unit > fig. 113.
fered due to the different power supply sys-
> Slide the cover carefully to the side if necessary.
tems in different countries. The maximum
> Removethe lock on the charging port
charging power maypotentially be unavaila-
> fig. 114.
ble because of this. Contact an authorized
> Insert the plug @) or @) into the socket
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
=> page 106,fig. 107.
cility for more information.
> Plug the vehicle charging connector (5)
— Charging may take longer when tempera-
=> page 106, fig. 107 into the vehicle charging
tures are extremely high or low.
port > fig. 114. The charging process starts au-
—The charging time at public charging sta-
tomatically if no charging timer is set.
tions mayvary from the times given in the
table > table on page 108.
@) Tips
Removeice and snow from the cover using a
ETSMCs Tale)
hand brush and solvent-free deicing spray.
y
=
+
g
2
e
a
Fig. 113 Radiator grille: opening the charging unit cover

8V2012721B)
109
e-tron
Charging system (version The meaning ofthe different status displays for
the charging system and the vehicle can be found
1)
under > page 112, Status displays.
Charging overview
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive ZA WARNING
The control unit is malfunctioning if the LED
RAZ-0076,
@ is red. Disconnect the control unit from the
power supply. Refer to this chapter
=> page 112, Status displays.
G) Tips
— The device runs a self test after power has
been restored to the control unit.
— You can activate a PIN for the control unit
=> page 114.
IS
— The vehicle cannot be started if a charging
9
INx connector is connected.
fc
(eae Tse Tiare)

You can switch between the immediate charging

@ and charging timer ©) options > page 110,
fig. 116 during the charging process if a charging
timer has been set. Press the desired button to
Fig. 116 Radiator grille: vehicle charging port and button
do this > page 110,fig. 116.
module
You havedifferent charging options:
There are different control units depending on
the vehicle equipment. Check the image Immediate charging
> fig. 115 or > page 115,fig. 118 to see which To start the charging process immediately, press
control unit applies to your vehicles. the button @ > page 110, fig. 116. The LED in
The charging unit is located behind the Audi rings the button will turn on.
on the front ofthe vehicle. Setting the charging timer
@ © Button/LED You can delay the charging time with the charg-
@ Displayfield ing timer in the Infotainment system 2). You can
set twodifferent timers.
@ Arrow buttons
> If a timer has been set, press the button G)
@[CK] Button => page 110, fig. 116. The LED in the button
© Charging timer button will turn on.
> To set a charging timer, select: [MENU] button >
© Status LED Vehicle > left control button > Charge > right
@ Immediate charging button control button > Program timer.
> Select Individual timer or Repeat timer.
D_ Notavailablein all Infotainment systems.
110
e-tron
> Set the departure time, the date or day of the connection. Additional information on cli-
week. mate control can be found under
> You can specify a preferred charging time with > page 121.
the charging timer, for example if you would
like to use the off-peak rate. Setting the charging power level
> You can activate the auxiliary air conditioning Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
with the charging timer while charging byse-
lecting Air conditioning with the control knob. The control unit automatically recognizes the
AV appearsin the box. This activation is sepa- voltage and the available current strength. You
rate from the Infotainment system settings in can set whether you would like to charge with the
the climate control menu > page 121. full or half of the charging power.
> Press the [BACK] button. > Press the [OK] @) > page 110, fig. 115 button
> To activate the desired timer, confirm the set- on the control unit.
ting with the control knob. A ¥ appearsin the > Enter the PIN if necessary.
box. > POWER and SETPIN appear in the display
field.
Power save mode
> Select POWER using the arrow buttons (3).
Power save mode is automatically switched on > Press the [OK] button @).
when the control unit has not been operated for > The charging power display appears. The cur-
more than one minute. The LED @) > page 110, rent set value (50% or 100%) is marked with a
fig. 115 stays on. All other displays turn off. frame.
> To switch power save mode on or off, press the > If necessary, change the setting using the ar-
® button @ > page 110,fig. 115. row button @) to move downward or upward.
> Press the [OK] button @).
Power save mode ends automatically when the
vehicle charging connector is plugged into the ve- G) Tips
hicle.
— If a household socketis used for the charg-
The LED @ blinks when the high-voltage battery ing process, the charging power level is au-
is charging. tomatically set to 100%. If multiple electri-
cal consumersare connected to circuit,
@) Tips the charging power maybe limited to 50%
— Auxiliary climate control is powered electri- when charging with a household socket in
cally if you select climate control using the order to relieve the load on the electrical in-
charging timer. This mayalso be used in stallation.
confined spaces such as garages. —If an industrial socket is used for the charg-
— Using the auxiliary climate control while ing process, the charging power level is au-
charging can also reduce the charge level of tomatically set to 50%. To receive the maxi-
the high-voltage battery. mum charging power, the value must be set
— The high-voltage battery also chargesin to 100%.
power save mode. — A selected value remains set until the power
— If the charging process is in progress, it will cable is connected again.
not be interrupted when power save mode
switches on.
— The charging process can be interrupted at
any time. Press the active button on the ve-
8V2012721B)
hicle to do this > page 110,fig. 116.

— The climate control output while charging
depends on the capacity of the electrical
111
e-tron
Nilaie leet ile] Unlocking the vehicle charging connector

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive > Press the release (@) > fig. 117.
i
B
> Removethe vehicle charging connector (2).
re
£
3
e
a
Closing the charging unit
> Put the cap back on the charging port
=> page 109, fig. 114.
> Carefully slide the cover back in its original po-
sition.
> Turn the lock to the horizontal position
=> page 109, fig. 113.
Fig. 117 Radiator grille: unlocking and removing the vehi-
cle charging connector () Note
If you drive with an open charging unit, both
After completing the charging or climate control the cover and the electronics installed behind
process, the vehicle enters a sleep mode. No dis- it could be damaged.
plays are visible on the charging unit during this
period. (i) Tips
Deactivating sleep mode The instrument cluster will indicateif the
charging unit is open while driving. Check be-
> Unlock the vehicle > page 30. Or
fore every drive after charging if the cover is
> Open the driver's door. Or
locked.
> Press the Z) button > page 110,fig. 116.
Status displays
You can check the operating status using the LED => page 110, fig. 115, and the status LED on the
on the control unit @,the display field @) vehicle ©) > page 110,fig. 116
Charging system: control unit
LED on the control
Symbol
ymbol | E Error code
di unit® Meani.
eaning Soluti
‘olution
OmD Blue Flashing Self test
D On Cable inserted correctly.

> AND Green BIShing Cable iinserted and charg =
ing.
Self test completed suc-
cessfully, cable is not con-
D White On nected or is connected in- Insert the cable correctly.
correctly to the vehicle
charging port.
Check the cable and insert
Cable i ted i tl
AP Gray 330,340 Red On able inserted incorrectty it correctly or replace the
or faulty. esble
112
e-tron
LED on the control

Symbol| Error code . Meaning Solution
unit @
Disconnect the control unit
200, 210, from the power supply and
260, 410, . . have the malfunction cor-
a Gimd 450, 460, Red On Erroriin the controbunit. rected at an authorized Au-
490, 500 di dealer or authorized Au-
di Service Facility
a. Allow the control unit to
The control unit is over- cool down aroperataitin
eae 180,190 |Red On heating or notcooled hear
the specified temperature
enough.
range.
Have the malfunction cor-
130, 140, Communication to the ve- rected by an authorized
ane Red On ae i : P
470 hicle is malfunctioning. Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility.
H he electrical i l-
fey 300, 310, Red On Error in the household in- huncheckadMe acaati
Sas 370, 390 stallation. ——
fied electrician.
Havethe electrical instal-
; Fault in the household in- lation up to the control
= 480 Red Flash
Cees © asning stallation. unit checked by a qualified
electrician.
Reset the ground fault in-
terrupter with the [OK] @)
Ground fault interrupter button > page 110,
‘wy 110 Red Flashing (GFI) triggered in the con- fig, 715. Have the electri-
trol unit. cal installation checked by
a qualified electrician if
the same display appears.
Vehicle: charging unit

LED on vehicle ©) Meaning Solution
. . Removethe charger, put the cap
High-voltage b h
On 'g vor age battery charging on and close the cover on the
process is completed. . ‘
charging unit.
The high-voltage battery is charg-
Flashing ing or the vehicle is being air con-
Green ditioned/heated.
Charging timer was programmed
Blinks for approxi-
but the charging process has not
mately one minute
started yet. The LED in the button
after leaving the vehi-
© > page110,fig. 116 also
cle
8V2012721B)
turns on.
113
e-tron
LED on vehicle©) Meaning Solution

Have the power supply or power
supply system inspected. Check
No power supply was recognized the status display on the control
On even though the charging cable is unit > table on page 112. See an
Yellow plugged in. authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assis-
tance if necessary.
‘ The selector lever in notin the P Movethe selector lever into the P
Flashing aA ut
position. position.
Check if the charging connector is
inserted correctly > page 110. Re-
The charging connector could not move the charging connector and
On be correctly locked in the vehicle insert it into the charging port
charging port. again. See an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service
Red Facility for assistance if necessary.
Fault in the charging system. The
oo babteny carnage See an authorized Audi dealer or

Flashing 9 . . authorized Audi Service Facility for
Or: The outside temperatureis . :
. assistance if necessary.
too low. The high-voltage battery
could not be fully charged.
> Select the desired value by pressing the arrow

@ Tips
buttons (@) up or down.
The operation status indicated by the LED ©) » Use the right arrow button @) to go to the next
on the vehicle is also displayed in the instru- digit.
mentcluster display/Infotainment system. > Press the left arrow button @) to go to the pre-
vious menu.
Audi charging system PIN > Enter all of the digits.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive > Press the [OK] button @) afterthe last digit.
> REPEATPIN appearsin the display field.
The control unit can be locked by entering a 4-
> Enter the PIN again using the arrow buttons
digit PIN of your choice. If a PIN is activated, the
®.
selected PIN must be entered before every use.
> Press the [OK] button @).
We recommend locking your control unit to pro- > PIN OK appearsin the displayfield if both en-
tect it against unauthorized access by a third par- tries match.
ty. > The PIN is now activated.
Activating the PIN Deactivating the PIN

> Press the [OK] (@) > page 110,fig. 115 button Requirement: the control unit must be unlocked.
on the control unit. POWER and SETPIN ap-
> Enter the numerical code 0000. Proceed as if
pear in the displayfield.
you wereactivating the PIN > page 114.
> Select SET PIN using the arrow button @).
> The PIN is deactivated.
> Press the [OK] button @). ENTER PIN appearsin
the displayfield. Locking the control unit
Requirement: the PIN mustbe activated.
114
e-tron
> Press the @) button @ page 110,fig. 115 on There are different control units depending on
the control unit. the vehicle equipment. Check the image
= page 110, fig. 115 or > fig. 118 to see which
Unlocking the control unit
control unit applies to your vehicles.
Requirement: the PIN mustbeactivated.
The charging unit is located behind the Audi rings
> Press any button on the control unit. on the front of the vehicle.
> PIN? appearsin the display field.
> Enter the PIN. 2) On/Off button, charging power level,
> Press the [OK button @). and LED
@ Status LED
@) Tips a Network/house
— The PIN is deactivated in the factory default & Vehicle
settings. 0 Control unit
J Reset
©/|O|@|©
— If you do not remember your PIN, contact
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au- Charging timer button
di Service Facility. Status LED
— If the first PIN entry differs from the second
Immediate charging button
entry,the first PIN entry is displayed.
- If nothing is entered within 20 seconds of The meaning ofthe different status displays for
this, the set value is not changed. the charging system and the vehicle can be found
under > page 117.
Charging system (version
@) Tips
2)
— The device runs a self test after power has
Charging overview been restored to the control unit. If a self
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive test is successful, all indicator lights will il-
luminate green for two seconds.
RAZ-0077
— The vehicle cannotbe started if a charging

connector is connected.
Charging
You can switch between the immediate charging

© and charging timer @) options > page 115,
fig. 119 during the charging process if a charging
timer has been set. Press the desired button to
do this > page 115,fig. 119.
Immediate charging
To start the charging process immediately, press
the button © > page 115,fig. 119. The LED in
the button will turn on. >
8V2012721B)
Fig. 119 Charging unit: vehicle charging connection and

button module
115
e-tron
Setting the charging timer Setting the charging power level

You can delay the charging time with the charg-
ing timer in the Infotainment system )). You can The control unit automatically recognizes the
set twodifferent timers. voltage and the available current strength. You
> If a timer has been set, press the button @) can set whether you wouldlike to charge with the
=> page 115,fig. 119. The LED in the button full or half of the charging power. With the
will turn on. charging power level, you can reducethe risk of
> To set a charging timer, select: [MENU] button > the electrical installation becoming overheated.
Vehicle > left control button > Charge > right > To set the charging power level, press the but-
control button > Program timer. ton @ > page 115,fig. 118.
> Select Individual timer or Repeat timer.
> Set the departure time, the date or day of the The charging power display appears. The set val-
week. ue is displayed.
> You can specify a preferred charging time with
the charging timer, for example if you would G) Tips
like to use the off-peak rate. — If a household socketis used for the charg-
> You can activate the auxiliary air conditioning ing process, the charging power level is au-
with the charging timer while charging byse- tomatically set to 100%. If multiple electri-
lecting Air conditioning with the control knob. cal consumersare connected to circuit,
AV appearsin the box. This activation is sepa- the charging power maybe limited to 50%
rate from the Infotainment system settings in when charging with a household socketin
the climate control menu > page 121. order torelieve the load on the electrical in-
> Press the [BACK] button. stallation.
> To activate the desired timer, confirm the set- — If an industrial socket is used for the charg-
ting with the control knob. A V appearsin the ing process, the charging power level is au-
box. tomatically set to 50%. To receive the maxi-
mum charging power, the value must be set
@) Tips to 100%.
— Auxiliary climate control is powered electri-
cally if you select climate control using the Nile lae tials]
charging timer. This mayalso be used in Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
confined spaces such as garages.
After completing the charging or climate control
— Using the auxiliary climate control while
process, the vehicle enters a sleep mode. No dis-
charging can also reducethe charge level of
plays are visible on the charging unit during this
the high-voltage battery.
period. Always removethe vehicle charging con-
— The charging process can be interrupted at
nector first after charging.
any time. Press the active button on the ve-
hicle to do this > page 115,fig. 119. The vehicle charging connector is locked during
— The climate control output while charging and after charging. You must unlock the connec-
depends on the capacity of the electrical tor to removeit.
connection. Additional information on cli-
Unlocking the vehicle charging connector
mate control can be found under when the vehicle is locked
=>page 121.
> Unlock the vehicle. The connector will unlock
for 30 seconds. >
))_ Notavailablein all Infotainment systems.
116
e-tron
> Remove the connector. Closing the charging unit

> If the connector is not removed within 30 sec- >» Put the cap back on the charging port
onds,it will lock again automatically. => page 109,fig. 114.
Deactivating sleep mode > Carefully slide the cover back in its original po-
sition.
> Unlock the vehicle > page 30. Or > Turn the lock to the horizontal position
> Open the driver's door. Or => page 109,fig. 113.
> Press the button © > page 115,fig. 119.
Unlocking the vehicle charging connector

when thevehicle is unlocked If you drive with an open charging unit, both
> If necessary, deactivate sleep mode. the cover and the electronics installed behind
> Press the button with the illuminated LED @) or it could be damaged.
© 2° page 115,fig. 119. Or
> Press the @ button in the driver's door
> page 34, fig. 20or the @ button on the re- The instrument cluster will indicate if the
motecontrol key. charging unit is open while driving. Check be-
> The connector will unlock for 30 seconds. fore every drive after charging if the cover is
> Remove the connector. locked.
> If the connector is not removed within 30 sec-
onds,it will lock again automatically.
Semele
You can check the mode status using the LED on and the status LED on the vehicle G) > page 115,
the control unit @or @) > page 115,fig. 118, fig. 119
Charging system: control unit
The charging infrastructure peiher Se system coolsidown;

. the error will automatically
LED is overheatedor limited. It ‘
a ‘lumi aq will charaewith reduced reset. If the error continues,
blinking green Illuminat- ower g then you can only charge
, and _ Pawel with reduced power.
i ellow
7 — y The charging infrastructure After the system cools down,
2 - 0 is overheating. It will charge the error will automatically
illuminated .
with reduced power. reset.
Off O30 Vehicle is charging.
LED illuminated
in white
sf Plug the vehicle charging
d Th trol unit dy f
au Off oa) : ie PoE S20) (2k connector into the vehicle
charging power charging. charging port
level SIGIR OE :
8V2012721B)
illuminated
117
e-tron
The charging infrastructure After the system cools down,

is overheating. Charging is the error will automatically
wanna interrupted. reset.
€
yellow The charging infrastructure After the system cools down,
is overheating. Charging is the error will automatically
interrupted. reset.
The charging infrastructure The error will reset automat-
is limited. Charging is inter- ically once the networkis
LED rupted. stable again.
illuminated
red The Audi charging system is oe ie Liiauaurane cor .
. ._,_ |rected by an authorized Audi
malfunctioning. Charging is 4 ‘
. . dealer or authorized Audi
Flashing interrupted. . a
Service Facility.
yellow
Check and change charging
infrastructure, if necessary.
The charging infrastructure
is insufficient. Charging is in-
rected by an authorized Audi
terrupted.
dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
118
e-tron

The Audi charging system is
rected by an authorized Audi
lfunctioning. Charging i
= rcuumed, Charging is dealer or authorized Audi
pests Service Facility.
The control unit has a techni- Have thie mriakrunetion cor .

0 eat fault, Charging linger: rected by an authorized Audi
rupted ; dealer or authorized Audi
PRES Service Facility.
The charging infrastruct
is caftionet. The, nd If the error continues, have
eondvereris oe eater the malfunction corrected by
oa not'oresené: The ar P nd con- an authorized Audi dealer or
vecharsnanitonhector ©” authorized Audi Service Fa-
. cility.
Illuminat- rupted the charging process.
ed Have the malfunction cor-
The control unit has a techni- : .
res C3 |cal fault. Charging is inter- kactad hysaniouiwanaed Muth
rupted , SIng dealer or authorized Audi
prea. Service Facility.
Press and hold the *2 button
LED
for longer than two seconds.
illuminated
OE 0 [Residual current has been If the error continues, have
red
*a (flash- detected. Charging is inter- the malfunction corrected by
es) rupted. an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
H h lfuncti -
The control unit has a serious et solyieveanautherized
+I technical fault. Charging i
Creal —— arging.!s Audi dealer or authorized
BEES: Audi Service Facility.
Thereis an overvoltage in The error will reset automat-
a the charging infrastructure. ically once the network is
Charging is interrupted. stable again.
The charging infrastructure Have the malfunction cor-
Flashin 0 and control unit are malfunc- rected by an authorized Audi
red 9 tioning. Charging is inter- dealer or authorized Audi
rupted. Service Facility.
H h lfuncti -
The charging infrastructure veered i. ae uthornedAudi
O€x6) fis faulty. Charging is inter- y
rupted.
Service Facility.
8V2012721B)
119
e-tron
Have th lfuncti -
LED Illuminat- The charging infrastructure ave me manrane on cor 7
flashing ed 0 is faulty. Charging is inter- nested bye authorized Aqui
Si teal vapred : dealer or authorized Audi
pre. Service Facility.
IlLuminat- The LED on the control unit Have the mialruniction cor .
- _—— rected by an authorized Audi
Off ed CO &36-s |is faulty. Charging is inter- . .
red rupted. : a
Service Facility.
Vehicle: charging unit
. . Removethe charger, put the cap

On High voltage battery charging on and close the cover on the
process is completed. . :
charging unit.
The high-voltage battery is charg-
Flashing ing or the vehicle is being air con-
ESE ditioned/heated.
Blinks fi i-
ns for ete Charging timer was programmed
RiiatelPantesniinets but the charging process has not
after leaving the vehi- ging P
started yet.
cle
Have the power supply or power
supply system inspected. Check
No power supply was recognized the status display on the control
On even though the charging cable is unit > table on page 117. See an
Yellow plugged in. authorized Audi dealer or author-
tance if necessary.
3 The selector lever in notin the P Movethe selector lever into the P
Flashing vt ae
position. position.
Check if the charging connector is
inserted correctly. Remove the
The charging connector could not charging connector and insert it in-
On be correctly locked in the vehicle to the charging port again. See an
charging port. authorized Audi dealer or author-
Red tance if necessary.
Fault in the charging system. The
cgi GenteSenniahebe See an authorized Audi dealer or
iasining Or: The outside temperatureis authorized Audi Service haailayten

too low. The high-voltage battery ¥
could notbe fully charged.
120
e-tron
@) Tips Emergency release

The operation status indicated by the LED G) Charging unit cover emergencyrelease
on the vehicle is also displayed in the instru- Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
mentcluster/Infotainment system. o|
6
x
2
=
Indicator lights and a
messages
If the 09 indicator light turns on, the high-volt-

age battery is charging or is already completely
charged.
If the 105} indicator light stays on, there is a mal-
function in the charging system. Have the prob-
lem corrected immediately by an authorized Audi You can release the cover using the emergency
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. release.
Charging connector still attached. Vehicle > Turn the cover lock to the horizontal position.
cannotbe driven > Unlock the vehicle.
This message appears when the charging system > Open the hood > page 327, Opening and clos-
is still connected to the vehicle. Remove the con- ing the hood.
nector > page 112, After charging. > Carefully pull on the knob (@) until thereis re-
sistance.
Incompatible charging system. Please check > Turn the cover lock to the vertical position
charging system => page 109, fig. 113.
This message appears when the charging system > Slide the cover carefully to the side if necessary.
is incompatible. Only charge using the charging
system that is designed for your vehicle. Climate control
B@ac charging system: malfunction! Please
contact Service Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
This message appearsif there is a malfunction in Your vehicle has auxiliary air conditioning
the charging system. Have the problem corrected
The auxiliary air conditioning is activated depend-
immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
ing on the outside temperature and the tempera-
ture set on the climate control unit. You can im-
Warning! Charging unit cover is unlocked. mediately switch the climate control on or off
See owner's manual => page 122 as wellas set a timer > page 122.
This message appearsif the charging unit cover is Auxiliary climate control
open. Close the cover and lock it > page 112.
The auxiliary climate control controls the temper-
ature in the vehicle interior entirely with electric
power.It turns on only if the high-voltage battery
charge level is sufficient and there is enough fuel
in the tank. >
8V2012721B)
121
When you reprogram a timer, the next calendar
day is automatically entered in the Infotainment
— The temperaturethat the climate control system. To activate the auxiliary climate control
system adjusts to depends on the last tem- for the next day, confirm the setting (V in the In-
perature you set in the climate control unit fotainment system).
=> page 69.
— Using the auxiliary climate control while Error messages
charging can also reducethe charge level of (A - The high-voltage battery charge level is too
the high-voltage battery. low to heat/air condition the vehicle using only
— The climate control system does not auto- electric power.
matically switch on or off earlier if the high-
If one of the following symbols appearsin the
voltage battery charge or fuel level is too
display, then you cannot switch on the auxiliary
low.
climate control:
Switching on and off 2— - There is a system malfunction.

Appliesto: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
fh - The fuel level is too low.
Switching the auxiliary climate control on/
off: (i) Tips
> Select the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left con- — You can set the timer a maximum of seven
trol button > Auxiliary air conditioning > Turn days in advance.
on auxiliary heating/AC or Turn off auxiliary — You can operate the climate control system
A/C. in the vehicle when the high-voltage battery
is charging using the charging timer
@ Tips => page 110 or > page 116. The climate con-
trol output depends on the power socket ca-
— The auxiliary climate control can also be
pacity.
switched on and off immediately when a
— Make sure the time and date match in the
timer is set.
Infotainment system settings so that the
— If the bloweris switched off with the $
timer can function correctly > page 253.
=> page 69,fig. 79 button, then the auxiliary
— The auxiliary climate control can continue to
air conditioning also switches off immedi-
run after the departure time is reached.
ately.
Cleaning and
Setting the timer
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive maintenance
information
By setting the departure time, you determine
when your vehicle should reach the desired tem-
perature. You can set the timer in the auxiliary air When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash-
conditioning menu in the Infotainment system. er, always follow the operating instructions pro-
vided with the pressure washer.This is especially
Auxiliary climate control: setting the timer important in regard to the pressure and spraying
> Select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left control distance. Do not direct cleaning spray at the
button > Auxiliary A/C > right control button > charging unit in the radiator grille or at the
Program timer. charging dock*/charging clip*. Keep a distance of
>» Set the time and the date. at least 16 in (40 cm).
> Press the [BACK] button.
Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
> Confirm the setting with the control knob toac-
washer.
tivate the timer. A V appearsin the box.
122
e-tron
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F

(60 °C).
Remove contaminants on the Audi charging sys-

tem with a dry towel.
Remove contaminants on the charging dock*/

charging clip* with a wet towel dampened with
alcohol-free cleaning solution.
— Never immersethe Audi charging system

and connectorsin water.
— The Audi charging system mustonly be
cleaned when the control unit is completely
disconnected from the power supply and
from the vehicle.
To decrease the risk of discoloration, never

clean the charging dock*/charging clip* with
harsh cleaning solutions or solutions that
contain alcohol.
8V2012721B)
123
Trailer towing
Trailer towing Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the
Driving with a trailer engine and the cooling system. The cooling sys-
eT re eeleurl tela} tem must be designed for additional load and
contain enough coolant > ©.
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transport-
ing people and luggage. However, if you drive (1) Note
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements,
Longer inclines cannot be driven without a
the operation and driving tips, and the legal reg-
suitable cooling system, especially if the out-
ulations.
side temperatures are high. Otherwise, this
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's fuel increases the risk of engine damage.
consumption, performance and wear. It also re-
quires higher concentration from the driver. Operating instructions
Z\ WARNING Towing capacity

Do not transport any peoplein a trailer due to Your vehicle can only be operated with class 1 or
the risk offatal injury. class 2 trailers.
Load distribution
Technical requirements
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively
Certain requirements must be met when towing impact vehicle handling. To have the lowest im-
a trailer. pact as possible, load the trailer according to
these criteria:
Trailer hitch
— Store objects in the vehicle luggage compart-
Only use a trailer hitch with a removableball
ment,if possible. The vehicle should always
hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must
carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer
be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the
should havethe lightest possible load.
permitted total weight of the trailer being
pulled. Aboveall, it must be securely and safely — Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
attached to the vehicle trailer.
heavy objects are as close to the axle as possi-
ble.
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The — Secure objects so that they do not slide.
trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does — Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
not impair the function of the bumper. Do not if possible.
make any changesto the exhaust system and the
brake system. Tires
Check regularlyif the trailer hitch is securely Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a “full
mounted. Alwaysfollow the instructions given by load”; see the tire pressure sticker > page 350. If
the trailer hitch manufacturer. necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the
trailer according to the manufacturer's specifica-
Trailer brakes tions.
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol- The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped
low the manufacturer specifications. However, with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-
the brake system on the trailer must never be tures.
connected to the vehicle brake system.
Outside mirrors
If you cannotsee the traffic behind the trailer
with the standard exterior mirrors, then you >
124
Trailer towing
must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust Hill

them so you have a sufficient visibility behind When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers
you. may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona
Exterior lighting level surface. If small swaying movements have
already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by
Follow the legal regulations regarding the light- firmly braking immediately. Never try to
ing equipment on your trailer. Contact an author-
“straighten out”the trailer by accelerating.
ty for more information. Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the en-
gine braking effect > A\.
Before you start driving, check all lighting equip-
ment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehi- Brakes
cle.
When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
The headlight range control automatically ad- brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of
justs the light range of the headlights. jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
Safety chains Engine coolant temperature
Makesure the safety chains are correctly applied Pay attention specifically to the coolant tempera-
when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang ture display when there are high outside temper-
enough so that the trailer can drive around atures, and when driving on long inclines
curves. However, they must not touch the => page 15. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
ground. ner.
i) Tips JN WARNING
— Block the wheels with chocks when parking Constant braking causes the brakes to over-
on inclines if the trailer is loaded. heat and can substantially reduce braking per-
— Having the vehicle inspected between the formance, increase braking distance, or cause
inspection intervals is recommended if you completefailure of the brake system.
towa trailer frequently.
— Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehi-
cle break-in period.
Driving with a trailer
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhereto the legal speed limits. Follow the legal
regulations specific to the country.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of

the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not
exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
conditions. This especially applies when driving
downhill.
8V2012721B)
125
Assist systems
Assist systems ZA WARNING

Speed warning system — Alwayspay attention to the traffic around
your vehicle when the cruise control system
is in operation. As the driver, you are always
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
responsible for controlling your vehicle
The speed warning system helps you to stay be- speed and the distance between your vehicle
low a specified maximum speed that can beset, and other vehicles.
changed or deleted in the Infotainment system. — For safety reasons, cruise control should not
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on
The speed warning system warns you if you are winding roads, and when road conditions are
exceeding the maximum speed that you haveset. poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain,
A warning tone will sound as soon as your speed and conditions that could lead to hydroplan-
exceeds the stored value slightly. The oe) in- ing), because this increases the risk of an ac-
dicator light will appear at the same time in the cident.
instrumentcluster display along with a message. — Switch the cruise control off temporarily
The be) indicator light and the message turn when driving in turning lanes, highwayexits,
off if the speed falls back below the stored maxi- or in construction zones.
mum speed.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you should
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would only resume the stored speedif it is suitable
like to be reminded when you reach a certain for the currenttraffic conditions.
maximum speed. Situations where you may want
to do so include driving in a country with a gener- () Note
al speed limit or if there is a specified maximum Before driving downhill a long distance ona
speed for winter tires. steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
Setting the warning threshold lower gear. This makes use of the engine brak-
ing effect and reduces the load placed on the
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but- brakes.
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
sistance > Speed warning > Manual. G) Tips
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are
G) Tips applied automatically.
Regardless of the speed warning system, you
should always monitor your speed using the Switching the system on
speedometer and makesureyou are following Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
the legal speed limit.
BFV-0220
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
The cruise control system assists the driver in

maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
Fig. 121 Lever: switching on the cruise control system
Requirement: switch the ignition on.
126
Assist systems
> To switch the system on, pull the lever toward cruise control speed will be stored and you can
you to position @). resume that speed.
The Gg or {§] indicator light and the corre- Requirement: the system must be switched on
sponding message will appear in the instrument and activated.
cluster.
Overriding
Z\ WARNING > To temporarily override the cruise control

speed, press the accelerator pedal.
If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example,
> Once you release the accelerator pedal, the sys-
overheating) while the cruise control system
tem will adjust back to the stored cruise control
is switched on, it may shut off automatically.
speed.
Preselecting or activating a cruise control If you override the cruise control system for a
ey-t-fe) long period of time, the cruise control system
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system will be deactivated. The indicator light is dis-
played and the cruise control speed will be saved.
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect
the cruise control speed or activate the speed Deactivating
while driving. > To deactivate the cruise control speed, press
Requirement: the system must be switched on. the lever toward (2) (not locked into place)
=> page 126,fig. 121.
> To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
> Press the brake pedal.
hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 126,fig. 121.
> To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
ZA\ WARNING
lever toward position @ while driving, or Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
> To set the current driving speed as the cruise could override the cruise control. This will pre-
control speed, press the button (@) on the lever. vent braking interventions by the system.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with

the Gg or BS indicator light in the instrument SeemeLal
cluster.
When you switch the system off completely, the
Changing the cruise control speed cruise control speed will be deleted.
Appliesto: vehicles with cruise control system
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
> To switch the system off, press the lever toward
in increments, tap the lever toward @/C) @ (locked into place) > page 126, fig. 121, or
=> page 126,fig. 121.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
continuously, press and hold the lever to-
ward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise Gr / Speed control system: currently un-

control speed available. See owner's manual
Appliesto: vehicles with cruise control system
You can override or deactivate the cruise control

8V2012721B)
system. When you deactivate the system, your
127
Assist systems
If the indicator light turns on and this message yee lial)

appears, the cruise control system has been deac- Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
tivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for ex-
Requirement: the lap timer must be open
ample the brakes are overheating. Switch the
> page 128.
cruise control system on again later.
Timing laps
Lap timer > To start timing, select Lap 1 - press OK or Start
Introduction lap 1 in the menu.
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer » Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: To
start timing automatically when you start driv-
You can measure and analyze lap times with the
ing, select Start lap 1 by driving off or Start by
lap timerin the display.
driving off in the menu.
Opening the lap timer > To measurethe lap time, select New lap - press
OK or Newlap in the menu. This starts timing
> Open the first Vehicle tab (trip computer) using
the next lap at the same time.
the [<>] button on the multifunction steering
wheel. After completing, the difference between the last
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument lap and the previous best lap time will be indicat-
cluster: Press the button on the multifunc- ed witha “/[ or “"/.
tion steering wheel and select Lap timer in the
Pausing timing and displaying a split time
menu.
» Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: > To insert a pause fh select Pause in the menu.
On the multifunction steering wheel, select: > To continue timing, select Press OK to resume
left control button > Lap times. or Resume in the menu.
> To display a split time, select Split time in the
Operating the lap timer menu. The split time appears for approxi-
> On the multifunction steering wheel, turn the mately 10 seconds in the instrument cluster.
left thumbwheel %) > page 17 or @ > page 20 The timing of the current lap continues.
until the desired menu item is displayed in the
Resetting timing
instrument cluster.
> Press the left thumbwheel to confirm the selec- > Using the multifunction steering wheel, select
tion. Reset or Reset times in the menu.
ZA WARNING G) Tips
Your focus should always be on driving your —A maximum of 30 lap times (analog instru-
vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com- ment cluster) or 99 lap times (Audi virtual
plete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only cockpit*) can be measured.
use the functions such as the lap timer in such —If timing is paused, you can continue it later
a way that you always maintain complete con- even if you switch the ignition off.
trol over your vehiclein all traffic situations. — Saved lap times cannotbe individually de-
leted from the total results.
@) Tips —The saved lap timer values will remain after
You can retrieve information from the trip switching the ignition off.
computer while the lap timer stopwatch is
running.
128
Assist systems
Lap statistics The adaptive cruise control system is a combina-

Applies to: vehicles with lap timer tion of speed and distance regulation. It assists
the driver by both regulating the speed and
Displaying lap statistics
maintaining a distance to the vehicle driving
You can display the number oflaps driven, the ahead, within the limits of the system. If the sys-
fastest lap “+”, the slowest lap “—”, and the aver- tem detects a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive
age time “@”in the instrument cluster. cruise control can brake and accelerate your vehi-
cle. This increases driving comfort during long
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
trips on highways and in stop-and-go traffic.
cluster: Select Statistics in the menu using the
multifunction steering wheel. What can adaptive cruise control do?
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
The adaptive cruise control system usesradar.
On the multifunction steering wheel, select:
The radar is subject to designated system limits
left control button > Lap statistics or Statis-
=> page 130.
tics.
> Turn the thumbwheel downor up to display the On open roads with no traffic, it functions like a
individual lap times. cruise control system. The stored speed is main-
> To return to the lap timing that was begun, tained. When approaching a vehicle ahead and
press the left thumbwheel. the system detectsit, the adaptive cruise control
system automatically brakes to match that ob-
Resetting lap statistics
ject's speed and then maintains the stored dis-
Appliesto: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
tance. As soon as the system does not detect a
> On the multifunction steering wheel, select: vehicle driving ahead, adaptive cruise control ac-
the right control button > Reset statistics. celerates up to the stored speed.
Within the limits of the system, adaptive cruise

0) Tips”
control can brake in stop-and-go traffic until the
— The lap statistics list the lap times for the vehicle is stationary and then begin driving again
last 30 laps. under certain conditions > page 133, Driving in
— Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cock- stop-and-go traffic.
pit: The fastest and slowestlap times from
up to 99 timed laps will be displayed. Which functions can be controlled?
When you switch adaptive cruise control on, you
Audi adaptive cruise can set the current speed as the “control speed”
control = page 131, Switching on and off.
When driving, you can stop cruise control

Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
= page 133 or change the speed > page 132 at
any time.
B8V-0126
You can also set the distance to the vehicle ahead

and set the adaptive cruise control driving pro-
gram > page 134.
8V2012721B)
Fig. 122 Detection range
129
Assist systems
General information manycurves, when the road surfaceis in

Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control/Audi pre poor condition and/or in bad weather (such
sense front
as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain and hydroplan-
ing). Using the system under these condi-
B8U-0349
tions could result in a collision.
a
— Switch adaptive cruise control off temporari-
ly when driving in turning lanes, on express-
wayexits or in construction zones. This pre-
vents the vehicle from accelerating to the
stored speed when in these situations.
— The adaptive cruise control system will not
brake byitself if you put your foot on the ac-
Fig. 123 Frontof vehicle: sensor celerator pedal. Doing so can override the
speed and distance regulation.
The radar sensor area > fig. 123 must not be cov- — Adaptive cruise control does not respond to
ered with stickers, deposits or any other obstruc- people, animals,or crossing or oncoming
tions as it may impair the function of the adap- objects.
tive cruise control or the pre sense front. For in- — The function of the radar sensorscan be af-
formation on cleaning, see > page 362. The fected by reflective objects such as guard
same applies for any modifications made in the rails, the entrance to a tunnel, heavyrain or
front area. ice.
The function of the adaptive cruise control sys-
@) Note
tem or pre sense front is limited in some condi-
tions: The sensor can be displaced by impacts or
damage to the bumper, wheel housing and
— Vehicles can only be detected when they are
underbody. This can impair the adaptive
within the sensor range > page 129,fig. 122.
cruise control. Have an authorized Audi dealer
— The system has a limited ability to detect vehi-
or authorized Audi Service Facility check their
cles that are a short distance ahead, off to the
function.
side of your vehicle or moving into your lane.
— Objects that are difficult to detect such as mo- G) Tips
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance
For an explanation on conformity with the
or an overhanging load are detected late or not
FCC regulations in the United States and the
detected at all.
Industry Canada regulations, see > page 392.
— When driving through curves > page 131.
— When the vehicle is stationary > page 131.
Z\ WARNING
Alwayspay attention to the traffic around you
when adaptivecruise control is switched on.
As the driver, you arestill responsible for your
own speed and the distanceto other vehicles.
The adaptive cruise control is used to assist
you. The driver must always take action to
avoid a collision. The driver is always responsi-
ble for braking at the correct time.
— For safety reasons, do not use adaptive
cruise control when driving on roads with
130
Assist systems
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control/Audi pre Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
sense front
B4M-0231
Fig. 124 Example:driving into a curve
When driving into a curve > fig. 124 and out of a

curve, the system mayreact to a vehicle in the
neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can
prevent that by pressing the accelerator pedal
briefly.
Stationary vehicles
Fig. 127 Instrument cluster: adaptive cruise control
2
2.
©
g|
2
& ACC: you can set any speed between 20 and 95
Es}
mph (30 and 150 km/h).
Indicator lights and messages in the instrument

cluster display inform you aboutthe current sit-
uation and setting.
Switching adaptivecruise control on

> Pull the lever toward you into position @)
Fig. 125 Example: vehicle changinglanes and stationary
vehicle
> fig. 126.
Storing the speed and activating regulation
The adaptive cruise control system only reacts to
vehicles that being moving orto vehicles that the” [0 store the current speed andactivate the reg-
system has already detected as moving. For ex- ulation, press the SET button © fig. 126 > /\.
ample, it can react when a vehicle that has al- The stored speed is shown in the tachometer
ready been detected (@ turns or changeslanes, LED line @ and appearsbriefly in the informa-
but adaptive cruise control does notreact to a tion line @ © fig. 127.
stationary vehicle (2). Press the brake pedal to > To activate the regulation while stationary, you
slow the vehicle down. mustpress the brake pedal.
Switching adaptive cruise control off

> Push the lever away from you into position @
8V2012721B)
until it clicks into place. The message ACC: off

appears.
The stored speed in the LED line is erased.
131
Assist systems
@® Indicatorlights G) Tips
B - Adaptive cruise control must be switched — If you switch the ignition or the adaptive
on. No vehicles are detected ahead. The stored cruise control system off, the set speed is
speed is maintained. erased for safety reasons.
— The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
B - Avehicle driving ahead was detected. The and the Anti-Slip-Regulation (ASR) are auto-
adaptive cruise control system regulates the matically switched on when the adaptive
speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and cruise control is switched on.
brakes/accelerates automatically.
EB - Adaptive cruise control must be switched Changing the speed

on. A vehicle was detected ahead. Your vehicle re- Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
mains stopped and will not start driving auto-
fi RAZ-0344}
matically.
B - The automatic braking is not enough to

maintain a sufficient distance to a vehicle driving
ahead. You mustintervene > page 135, Driverin-
tervention request.
@ Instrument cluster display

If adaptive cruise control is not shownin the in-
strument cluster display, you can call it up using Fig. 128 Operating lever: changing the speed
the multifunction steering wheel buttons
=> page 17. > To increase or decrease the speed in incre-
Based on the graphicsin the display, you can de- ments,tap the lever in the @/@) direction.
termine if the system is maintaining a distance to
> To increase or decrease the speed quickly, hold
a vehicle ahead and what that distance tothis ve- the lever toward @)/G) until the red LED @)
hicleis:
=> page 131, fig. 127 reaches the desired
speed.
No vehicle - No vehicle was detected driving
ahead. You can also preselect the speed when adaptive
cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
Silver vehicle - A vehicle was detected driving
the desired direction @)/@). Activate the previ-
ahead.
ously selected speed by pulling the lever into po-
Red vehicle - Requestfor driver intervention sition @ > page 131, fig. 126.
=> page 135.
After each change, the new stored speed appears
The five distance bars on the gauge (4) represent briefly in the status line > page 131, fig. 127©.
the set distance (refer to > page 134 for infor- When adaptivecruise control is active, the or
mation on how to change the distance). If you a indicator light turns on, and when adaptive
fall below the selected distance, the distance cruise control is not active, the indicator light
bars become red from the bottom upward. turns on. In the Audi virtual cockpit*, the indi-
cator light turns on instead.
ZX WARNING
If you press the [SET] button when driving at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle
accelerates automatically up to 20 mph (30
km/h), which is the minimum speed that can
be set.
132
Assist systems
Driving in stop-and-go traffic when starting. This may also occur in some situa-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control tions when there is no apparent obstacle.
— Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle

down.
ZA\ WARNING
If the message ACC: autom. go”) appears,
your vehicle will start driving, even if there is
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle driving ahead. This increases the risk of
an accident.
Fig. 129 Instrumentcluster: safe start monitor
©Tips
The adaptive cruise control system assists you in
If adaptive cruise control is active and your ve-
stop-and-go traffic. If a vehicle that is detected
hicle does not start driving even though the
ahead stops, your vehicle will brake and stay at a
message ACC: autom. go”) appears, you can
stop, within the limits of the system.
start driving by tapping the accelerator pedal.
> To resume driving with adaptive cruise control,
tap the accelerator pedal or Interrupting cruise control
> Pull the lever toward you into position @) Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
=> page 133, fig. 130.
B4M-0233
Starting to drive with adaptive cruise
control!)
As long as the message ACC autom. go is dis-
played and the object detected ahead starts to
move, your vehicle will continue driving > A\. You
can activate ACC: autom. go again for a short
time bypulling the lever to position @).
The ACC: autom. go start mode ends when the

Fig. 130 Operating lever
brake pedal is pressed.
For safety reasons, your vehicle will only start to Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be
drive automaticallyif: switched on.
— The driver's safety belt is fastened Overriding cruise control

— All doors and the hood are closed > To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward
— Your vehicle is not stationary for more than you into position @) and holdit there, or press
three minutes the accelerator pedal. The message ACC: over-
Safe start monitor ride appears.
> To resume cruise control, release the lever or
If an obstacle is detected when you start driving, take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
you will be alerted to the danger by the BA indi-
cator light and the image in the instrument clus- Interrupting cruise control while driving
ter display > fig. 129 > A\. An audio signal will > Movethe lever into position (). The message
also sound. Your vehicle will drive more slowly
8V2012721B)
ACC: standby appears. Or
D_ This is not available in some countries.
133
Assist systems
> Press the brake pedal. The distances provided are specified values. De-
> To resume the stored speed, movethe lever in- pending on the driving situation and how the ve-
to position @). hicle ahead is driving, the actual distance may be
moreor less than these target distances.
Interrupting cruise control when stopped
If you change the time gaps, the value you have
> Push the lever away from you into position @).
just set appearsbriefly in the instrument cluster
The message ACC: standbyappears.
display, for example for Distance 3. This only
> To resume cruise control, press the brake pedal
occursif the adaptive cruise control is not cur-
and pull the lever toward you into position @).
rently shown in the display > page 131, fig. 127.
Z\ WARNING Distance 1: this setting corresponds to a distance

of 92 feet (28 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
It is dangerous to activatecruise control and
km/h), or a time distance of 1 second.
resume the stored speed when the current
road, traffic or weather conditions do not per- Distance 2: this setting corresponds to a distance
mit this. This increases the risk of an accident. of 118 feet (36 m) when traveling at 62 mph
(100 km/h), or a time distance of 1.3 seconds.
Setting the distance Distance 3: this setting corresponds to a distance
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control of 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at 62 mph
B4M-0234
Distance 4: this setting corresponds to a distance

of 219 feet (67 m) when traveling at 62 mph
Distance 5: this setting corresponds to a distance

of 328 feet (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
ZA WARNING
Fig. 131 Operating lever: setting the distance
When setting the distance, the driver is re-
> Tap the switch to display the distance that is sponsible for adhering to any applicable legal
currently set > fig. 131. regulations.
> To increase or reduce the distance in incre-
ments, tap the switch upward/downward again. (i) Tips
The distance between the twovehicles will Your settings are automatically stored and as-
change in the instrument cluster display. signed to the remote control key being used.
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the

adaptive cruise control system brakes to match Setting the driving program
that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, Depending on the selected driving program and
then the adaptivecruise control will also acceler- distance, driving behavior when accelerating will
ate up to the speed that you haveset. vary from dynamic to comfortable.
The higher the speed, the greater the distance Setting the driving program on vehicles
=> A\. The Distance 3 setting is recommended. without drive select*
That is equal to the general recommendation of
> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU but-
“half the speed shown on the speedometer”.
sistance > Audi adaptive cruise control > >
134
Assist systems
Driving program > Comfort, Standard or Dy- Description

namic.
At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65
Setting the driving mode on vehicles with km/h), this function measures the distance to the
drive select* vehicle ahead as time.
See > page 147. > Switch the adaptive cruise control display on in
the instrument cluster display > page 17.
@) Tips The B indicator light turns on if you fall below
Your settings are automatically stored and as- the set distance.
signed to the remotecontrol key being used.
Setting the warning threshold
Driver intervention request You can set, change or delete the warning thresh-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control old in the Infotainment system.
> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU

button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver
assistance > Distance warning.
Z\ WARNING
— Read and follow the warnings on > A\ in
General information on page 130.
— The driver is always responsible for adhering
to the regulations applicable in the country
Fig. 132 Instrumentcluster: request for driver interven- wherethe vehicle is being operated.
tion
(i) Tips
The request for driver intervention instructs you
to take over if the adaptive cruise control braking You mayfall below he warning threshold
function is not able to maintain a sufficient dis- briefly when passing or when quickly ap-
tanceto the vehicle driving ahead > fig. 132. Proaching a slow vehicle. There is no warning
in this scenario. A warning is given onlyif you
fall below the warning threshold for an ex-
PeMeeNAL eReeC lul ile)
tended period of time.
This function measures the time between the ve-

tLe [Ly
hicle driving ahead and showsthis in the instru- Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
ment cluster display.
ACC: unavailable
The system cannot guaranteethatit will detect

vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The
sensor was moved or is faulty. Drive to an author-
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ed.
ACC: currently unavailable. No sensor view

8V2012721B)
ACC: currently unavailable. Sensor vision re-

Fig. 133 Instrumentcluster: distance indicator/warning
stricted due to surroundings. See owner's man-
ual >
135
Assist systems
This message appearsif the sensor view is ob- This message appearsif the sensor view is ob-
structed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy structed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy
spray or dirt. Clean the sensor > page 130, spray or dirt. Clean the sensor > page 130,
fig. 123. fig. 123.
ACC: currently unavailable. Incline too steep Distance warning: currently unavailable. See
owner's manual
The road exceeds the maximum possible angle
for safe adaptive cruise control operation. The This message appearsif the system has a tempo-
adaptive cruise control cannot be switched on. rary failure. If this occurs multiple times, drive to
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
ACC: only available in D, S orM
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
Select the "D/S" or "M" selector lever position. tion corrected.
ACC: currently unavailable. Parking brake Fasten seatbelt

applied
The system is not completely available if the driv-
The adaptive cruise control system switches off er's seat belt is unfastened.
automatically if the parking brake is set. The
Stat. obj. ahead
adaptive cruise control is available again after re-
leasing the parking brake. This message appearsif you would like to switch
the system on and thereis a stationary object di-
ACC: currently unavailable. Stabilization
rectly in front of your vehicle.
control input
Door open
This message appearsif the Electronic Stabiliza-
tion Control (ESC) is taking action to stabilize the The system is not available when the vehicleis
vehicle. In this case, adaptive cruise control stationary and the driver's door is open.
switches off automatically.
ACC: Please take over! Audi pre sense

This message appearsif the vehicle rolls back Introduction
when starting on slight incline, even though Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
ACCis active. Press the brake pedal to prevent Within the limits of the system, the pre sense
the vehicle from rolling or starting to move.
functions can initiate measures in particularly
ACC: currently unavailable. Park assist active dangerous situations to protect the vehicle pas-
sengers and other road users.
The systems switch off when Park assist* is ac-
tive. The systems are available again after com- — Due to the interlinking of various vehicle sys-
pleting the parking process. tems, critical driving situations can be detected
by pre sense basic and measures for preventa-
Distance warning: malfunction! Please contact
tive occupant protection are can be initiated.
Service
— The pre sensefront uses the data from the ra-
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect dar sensors and calculates the probability of an
vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The ra- accident > page 130. An impending collision
dar sensor was movedor is faulty. Drive to an au- with vehicles can be detected within the limits
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service of the system. In this case, the system warns
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- the driver visually, acoustically and with a jerk
rected. on the brakes if necessary. If needed, it can ini-
tiate a partial or full deceleration to reduce the
Distance warning: currently unavailable. Sensor
collision speed or to avoid the collision under
view limited due to surroundings.
certain circumstances. In conjunction with pre >
136
Assist systems
sense basic, the front safety belts are also re- Audi pre sensefront
versibly tensioned when needed. The pre sense Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front
front is also active when adaptive cruise con-
RAH-8970.
trol* is switched off.
ZA WARNING Audi pre sense

Also follow the general instructions found in
=> A in Generalinformation on page 130.
G) Tips
— Certain pre sense functions switch off when
driving in reverse. Fig. 134 Instrumentcluster: approach warning
— The pre sense functions may notbe availa-
ble if there is a malfunction in the ESC sys- Description
tem or the airbag control module.
Within the limits of the system and depending
— Note that the reversible belt tensioner on on the situation and speed, pre sense front can
the front passenger's side deactivates when warn you about impending collisions with sta-
the front passenger's airbag is deactivated. tionary, stopped, and moving vehicles and ini-
— Switch the pre sense off when you are not tiate appropriate braking measures.
using public streets or when loading the ve-
hicle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or If detection is not possible, then pre sense front
other type of transportation. This can pre- does notreact.
vent an undesired intervention from the pre The following functions trigger in conjunction
sense system. with pre sense basic at corresponding vehicle
speeds:
NUT Te sia
— Reversible tensioning of the front safety belts
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic
— Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof*
The pre sense basic functions are activated at a
Early warning/acute warning
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or
higher. The system can provide visual and audible warn-
ings when dangerous situations are detected. The
The following functions can be triggered under
early warning mayoccur if:
certain conditions within the limits of the sys-
tem: —a vehicle driving ahead brakes strongly,
— your vehicle is traveling at speeds between ap-
—Tensioning of the safety belts (for example,
proximately 20 to 50 mph (30 to 85 km/h) and
during heavy braking): the front safety belts
it approaches a stationaryvehicle.
have reversible belt tensioners. If a collision
— your vehicle is traveling at speeds between ap-
does not occur, the safety belts loosen slightly
proximately 20 to 155 mph (30 to 250 km/h)
and are ready to trigger again.
and it approaches a vehicle thatis clearly trav-
— Initiating the closing of the windows and the
eling more slowlyor a vehicle in your direction
panoramic glass roof* (for example when un-
of travel that is stopped.
der- or oversteering).
When this warning occurs, it may only be possi-
Audi drive select*: the trigger times are adjusted
ble to avoid a collision by swerving or braking
depending on the mode selected.
strongly. The message Audi pre sense wA
8V2012721B)
=> fig. 134 and a warning tone will warn you

about the danger.
137
Assist systems
If there is an impending collision with vehicles, — Please note that the sensor does not always
therewill also be an acute warningin the form of detect all objects. This increases the risk of a
sharp braking. If you do not react to the acute collision.
warning, pre sense front can brake with increas- — Pre sense front does not react to vehicles
ing force within the limits of the system. This re- traveling toward you in the same lane, to
duces the vehicle speed in the event of a colli- people, groupsof people, animals, objects
sion. that are crossing the road, or objects that
are difficult to detect > A\ in Generalinfor-
Automatic deceleration
mation on page 130.
Depending on the speed, pre sense front can de-
celerate automatically shortly before a collision: ZA WARNING
—if there are stationary vehicles when you are Pre sense front mayberestricted or not avail-
traveling at speeds up to approximately 28 able in the following examplesituations:
mph (45 km/h) — If there are other reflective objects nearby,
— if there are vehicles driving or stopped ahead such as guardrails or vehicles
when you aretraveling at speeds up to approxi- — When driving into a tunnel
mately 155 mph (250 km/h) — In heavy fog, rain, spray, or snow
— If the radar sensor is dirty, coveredin ice,
Automatic braking force increase
damaged, or covered
If pre sense front determines that you are not —Incurves
braking strongly enough when a collision is immi- — If the ESC was restricted or switched off
nent,it can increase the braking force, depending
on the situation and speed: () Note
— if there are stationary vehicles when you are The sensor can be displaced by impacts or
traveling at speeds up to approximately 50 damage to the bumper, wheel housing and
mph (85 km/h) underbody. Pre sense front can be impaired by
— if there are vehicles driving or stopped ahead this. Have an authorized Audi dealer or au-
when you aretraveling at speeds up to approxi- thorized Audi Service Facility check their func-
mately 155 mph (250 km/h) tion.
Z\WARNING G) Tips
Pre sense front cannot overcome the laws of — You can cancel the braking with increasing
physics. It is a system designedto assist and force that is initiated by the system by brak-
it cannot prevent a collision in every circum- ing yourself, by accelerating noticeably or by
stance. The driver must always intervene. The swerving.
driver is always responsible for braking at the — Certain pre sense front functions switch off
correct time. Do notlet the increased safety when ESC is switched off (sport mode) or
provided temptyou into taking risks. This when driving in reverse.
could increase your risk of a collision. — If you restrict or switch off the ESC, the pre
— Keep in mind that pre sense front can pro- sensealso switches itself off > page 160.
vide warnings or brake unexpectedly. Always
secure any cargo or objects that you are
Settings in the Infotainment system
transporting to reduce the risk of damage or
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
injury.
— The system can deployincorrectly due to > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
system-specific limits. ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
sistance > Audi pre sense.
138
Assist systems
System - The pre sense functions can be switched ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
on/off. ty to have the malfunction corrected.
If the system is switched off, it switches on again Audi pre sense: emergency braking system
automatically once the ignition is switched on off
again.
This message appearsif the pre sense functions
Prewarning - The early warning can be switched are switched off through the Infotainment sys-
off permanently or the pre sense front warning tem or if the system is not ready.
point can be set (Early/Medium/Late).
Set the warning time for the early warning to Audi active lane assist
Early at first. If this causes undesired early warn-
ings to appear, then set the warning time to Me- Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
dium. The Late warning time should only be set
in special circumstances. Active lane assist (lane departure warning) de-
tects lane marker lines within the limits of the
G) Tips system using a camerain the windshield. If you
are approaching a detected lane marker line and
If the system is switched off, it switches on
again automatically once the ignition is it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the
system will warn you with corrective steering.
switched on again.
You can override this steering at any time. If you
pass over a line, the steering wheel will vibrate
Messages
lightly. In order for this warning vibration to oc-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
cur, it must first be switched on in the Infotain-
By udi pre sense: malfunction! Please contact ment system. Active lane assist is ready for oper-
Service ation when the lane marker line is detected on at
least one side of the vehicle.
This message appears when the pre sense func-
tion is affected. For example, this could be The system is designed for driving on express-
caused bya faulty sensor. If the message stays ways and highwaysand therefore only activates
on, drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal- at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the km/h).
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
Audi pre sense: currently limited. Sensor If you activate a turn signal when active lane as-
view limited due to surroundings. sist is ready and it classifies a lane change as crit-
ical because of vehicles traveling alongside you or
This message appearsif the sensor view is ob-
approaching you, therewill be noticeable correc-
structed, for example by leaves, snow, heavy
tive steering shortly before you leave the lane.
spray or dirt. Clean the sensor if necessary
This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the lane.
=> page 130, fig. 123.
Audi pre sense: currently restricted Applies to: vehicles without Audi side assist
This message appearsif the ESC is restricted or The system will not warn you before crossing a
switched off, for example. lane marker line if you have activated the turn
signal. In this case, it assumes that you are
Audi pre sense: currently limited. See own- changing lanesintentionally.
er's manual
Z\WARNING
8V2012721B)
This message appears when there is a temporary

failure in a subsystem, such as the ESC. If this — The system warns the driver that the vehicle
message appears repeatedly, drive to an author- is leaving the lane using corrective steering. |>
139
Assist systems
The driver is always responsible for keeping SCR moll

the vehicle within the lane. Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
— The system can help you keep the vehicle in
B4M-0064|
the lane, but it does not drive by itself. Al-
ways keep your hands on the steering wheel.
— Corrective steering may notoccur in certain
situations, such as during heavy braking.
— There may be cases where the camera does
not recognize all lane marker lines. Correc-
tive steering can only take place on the side
of the vehicle where lane marker lines are
eee Fig. 135 Turn signal lever: switching Active lane assist on
— Other road structures or objects could possi- andlor
bly be identified unintentionally as lane
B4M-0090
marker lines. As a result, corrective steering
may be unexpected or may not occur.
— The cameraview can be restricted, for exam-
ple by vehicles driving ahead or by rain,
snow,heavy spraylight shining into the
camera or by dirt on the window.This can
result in active lane assist not detecting the
lane marker lines or detecting them incor-
rectly.
Fig. 136 Windshield: camera windowfor active lane assist
— Under certain conditions such as ruts in the
road, an inclined roadway or crosswinds, the
> Press the button to switch the system on and
corrective steering alone may not be enough
off > fig. 135. The indicator light in the instru-
to keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane.
ment cluster turns on or off. >
— For safety reasons, active lane assist must
not be used when there are poor road and/or
weather conditions such as slippery roads,
fog, gravel, heavy rain, snow and the poten-
tial for hydroplaning. Using active lane as-
sist under these conditions mayincrease the
risk of a crash.
140
Assist systems
Analoginstru- Audi virtual Meaning on Display in the instrument cluster

mentcluster cockpit* the corre- Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
spondingside
Green lines Green line(s) Active lane as-
i (left/right) sist is activat-
1X ed and ready
to provide
warnings.
- Redline Active lane as-
(left/right) sist will warn
1X you before the
vehicle leaves Fig. 137 Instrumentcluster: active lane assist is switched
a lane. The on and ready to provide warnings
steering wheel
will also vi- You can open the active lane assist display using
bratelightly. the buttons in the multifunction steering wheel
=> page 17 or > page 20.
Yellow lines Gray line(s) Active lane as-
an (left/right) sist is activat- Displayin the in- Meaningon thecorre-
71% ed, but is not strument cluster spondingside
ready to pro-
Green line(s) Activelane assistis acti-
vide warnings.
(left or right) vated and ready to pro-
If the system is switched on but is not ready to vide warnings.
provide warnings, one of the following could be Red line Active lane assist will
the cause: (left or right) warn you before the vehi-
— Thereis no lane marker line
cle leaves a lane. The
steering wheel will also
— The relevant lane marker lines are not detected
vibrate lightly.
(for example, markings in a construction zone
or because they are obstructed by snow,dirt, Gray line(s) Active lane assistis acti-
water or lighting) (left or right) vated, but is not ready to
— The vehicle speed is below the activation speed provide warnings.
of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h)
Messagesin the instrumentcluster display
— The lane is too narrow or too wide
— The curve is too narrow If the active lane assist switches off automatical-
— The driver's hands are not on the steering ly, the indicator light in the display turns off and
wheel one of the following messages appears:
B Audi active lane assist: malfunction! See

@ Tips owner's manual
— Make sure the camera's field of view
> fig. 136 is not obstructed bystickers or
anything else. For information on cleaning,
see > page 362.
— In certain markets: if the system is switched Audi active lane assist: currently unavaila-
on, it will switch on automatically each time ble. No camera view
the ignition is switched on.
8V2012721B)
This message appearsif the camerais unable to

detect the lines. This could happen if: >
141
Assist systems
— The camerafield of view > page 140,fig. 136 is

@ Tips
dirty or covered in ice. Clean this area on the
windshield. In certain markets: certain settings are stored
— The camerafield of view is fogged over. Wait automatically and assigned to the remote
until the fog has cleared before switching the control key in use.
active lane assist on again.
— The system has been unableto detect the lanes Audi side assist
for an extended period of time due to road con-
ditions. Switch active lane assist back on when
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
the lines are morevisible.
B4H-0761
Audi active lane assist: currently unavailable
There is a temporary active lane assist malfunc-

tion. Try switching the active lane assist on again
later.
HB audi active lane assist: Please take over

steering!
This message appearsif you are not steering by

yourself. Active lane assist is activated, but is not
ready to provide warnings.
B8V-0059
ZA\WARNING
Note that messages maybe delayed or not
displayed on vehicles with accessories mount-
ed on the steering wheel, such as a steering
wheel spinner knob. Always keep your hands
on the steering wheel.
Setting the vibration warning Fig. 139 Display on the exterior mirror
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
You can adjust individual Audiactive lane assist Side assist (lane change assist) helps you monitor
settings in the Infotainment system. your blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle.
Within the limits of the system, it warns you
> Select in the Infotainment system: MENU but- about vehicles that are coming closer or that are
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as- traveling with you within sensor range @)
sistance > Audi active laneassist. > fig. 138. If a lane change is classified as criti-
cal, the display @) in the exterior mirror turns on
Vibration warning
> fig. 139.
You can switch the additional vibration warning
The display in the left exterior mirror provides as-
in the steering wheel on or off.
sistance when making a lane change to the left,
ZX WARNING while the display in the right exterior mirror pro-
vides assistance when making a lane change to
With the vibration warning switched off, there
the right.
will also be no visual warning in the instru-
mentcluster display when crossing a lane Information stage
marker line.
As long as you do notactivate the turn signal,
side assist informs you about vehicles that are >
142
Assist systems
detected and classified as critical. The displayin
B8U-0348
the mirror turns on, but is dim.
The display remains dim in the information stage

so that your view towardthe front is not distur-
bed.
Warning stage
If the display in a mirror blinks brightly when you
activate a turn signal, side assist is warning you
Fig. 141 Rear of the vehicle: position of the sensors
about detected vehicles that it has classified as
critical. If this happens, check traffic by glancing
Side assist functions at speeds above approxi-
in the exterior mirrors and over your shoulder
mately 9 mph (15 km/h).
=> A\ in General information on page 144.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist

Approachingvehicles
The display in the mirror can also blink if you In certain cases, a vehicle will be classified as
have not activated a turn signal: if you are ap- critical for a lane change even ifit is still some-
proaching a detected lane marker line and it ap- what far away. The faster a vehicle approaches,
pears you will be leaving the lane, side assist will the sooner the display in the outside mirror will
warn you about detected vehicles that it has clas- turn on.
sified as critical.
@ Vehicles traveling with you
@Tips Vehicles traveling with you are indicated in the
You can adjust the brightness on of the dis- exterior mirror if they are classified as critical for
play on the rearview mirror > page 144. a lane change. All vehicles detected by side assist
are indicated by the time they enter your “blind
spot”, at the latest.
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist @ Vehicles you are passing
If you slowly pass a vehicle that side assist has
B8U-0342|
detected (the difference in speed between the ve-

hicle and your vehicle is less than approximately
9 mph (15 km/h)), the display in the exterior mir-
ror turns on as soon as the vehicle enters your
blind spot.
The display will not turn on if you quickly pass a

vehicle that side assist has detected (the differ-
ence in speed is greater than approximately 9
mph (15 km/h)).
Functional limitations
The radar sensors are designed to detect the left
and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are
the normal width. In some situations, the display
in the exterior mirror may turn on even though
8V2012721B)
there is no vehicle located in the area that is criti-

cal for a lane change. For example: >
Fig. 140 Driving situations
143
Assist systems
— If the lanes are narrow or if you are driving on display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the rect.
system mayhave detected a vehicle in another — For an explanation on conformity with the
lane that is not adjacent to your current lane. FCC regulations in the United States and the
— If you are driving through a curve. Side assist Industry Canada regulations, see
mayreact to a vehicle that is one lane over from => page 392.
the adjacent lane.
—If side assist reacts to other objects (such as Switching on and off
high or displaced guardrails). Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
— In poor weather conditions. The side assist
The system can be switched on/off in the Info-
functions are limited.
tainment system.
Do not cover the radar sensors > fig. 141 with
stickers, deposits, bicycle wheels or other ob- If the system is activated, the displays in the ex-
jects, because theywill impair the function. For terior mirrors will turn on briefly when the igni-
information on cleaning, see > page 362. tion is switched on.

ZA WARNING ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
— Alwayspay attention to traffic and to the sistance > Audi side assist. Off switches the
area around your vehicle. Side assist cannot system off.
replace a driver's attention. The driver alone
is always responsible for lane changes and Setting the display brightness
similar driving maneuvers. Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
—Insome situations, the system may not
The display brightness can be adjustedin the In-
function or its function maybe limited. For
fotainment system.
example:
—If vehicles are approaching or being left > Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but-
behind very quickly. The display may not ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
turn on in time. sistance > Audi side assist.
— In poor weather conditions such as heavy
The display brightness adjusts automatically to
rain, snow or heavy mist.
the brightness of the surroundings, both in the
— On very wide lanes,in tight curves,or if
information and in the warning stage. In very
thereis a rise in the road surface. Vehicles
dark or very bright surroundings, the automatic
in the adjacent lane may not be detected
adjustment will set the display to the minimum
because they are outside of the sensor
or maximum level. In such cases, you may notice
range.
no change when adjusting the brightness, or the
change mayonly be noticeable once the sur-
C) Note roundings change.
The sensors can be displaced by impacts or
damage to the bumper, wheel housing and Adjust the brightness to a level where the display
underbody. This can impair the system. Have in the information stage will not disrupt your
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
view ahead. If you change the brightness, the dis-
Service Facility check their function. play in the exterior mirror will briefly show the
brightness level in the information stage. The
@) Tips brightness of the warning stage is linked to the
brightness in the information stage and is adjust-
— If the window glass in the driver's door or
ed along with the information stage.
front passenger's door has been tinted, the
144
Assist systems
— Visual indicator: an indicator appears in the In-

@ Tips
fotainment system display with a red arrow
— Side assist is not active while you are mak- symbol. The arrow points in the direction from
ing the adjustment. which the object is approaching > fig. 143.
— Your settings are automatically stored and — Audible warning signal: a continuous tone may
assigned to the remote control key being sound as an additional indicator when driving in
used. reverse.
— Automatic brake activation: a brief activation

Tmtlait of the brakes may also warn you of a potential
Appliesto: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist collision with an approaching object.
ire}
S The audible warning signal and the automatic
2
= brake activation occur only when driving in re-
+
a
verse.
ZX WARNING
—The rear cross-traffic assist is an assist sys-
tem and cannotprevent a collision byitself.
The driver must always intervene. The driver
is always responsible for braking at the cor-
rect time.
— Please note that the rear cross-traffic assist
may activate the brakes unexpectedly. Se-
cure any cargo that you are transporting to
reducethe risk of damage or injury.
— An additional brake activation maybe trig-
gered within 10 seconds after an automatic
brake activation.
—If there is an acoustic warning signal from
Fig. 143 Infotainment system: rear cross-traffic assist dis- the rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking
play system may not warn you of detected obsta-
Activating rear cross-traffic assist cles under certain circumstances.
— The view of the radar sensors may be im-
The rear cross-traffic assist is activated automati- paired by leaves, snow,heavy sprayor dirt.
cally if you turn on the parking aid > page 149 or Clean the area in front of the sensors
shift into reverse gear. => page 143, fig. 141.
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn the driver of
a potential collision with approaching cross-traf- ZXWARNING
fic when driving in reverse at speeds up to ap- —The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
proximately 7 mph (12 km/h). Within its limits, alerts about people and cannot warn you
the system monitors the areas behind and next about every type of approaching objects,
to the vehicle using the radar sensors when leav- such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic
ing a parking space > page 143,fig. 141. Moving as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
objects that are approaching, such as cars, are rect eye contact.
detected > fig. 142. —The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
alerts if your vehicleis parallel or diagonally
8V2012721B)
If the system detectscritical cross traffic when

backing out of a parking space, it will react as fol-
lows:
145
Assist systems
parked or if your vehicle is pulled too far in- Side assist cannot be switched on at this time be-
to the parking space sothatit is hidden by cause thereis a malfunction (for example, the
adjacent vehicles. battery charge level may be too low).
Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restrict-

G@) Note ed
Also read the information in >@© in General
The rear cross-traffic assist is not available. Ei-
information on page 144.
ther the ESC is switched off, or the radar sensors
maybe covered by a bike rack,stickers, leaves,
@) Tips
snowor other objects. Switch the ESC on, or
— You can cancel the automatic brake activa- clean the area in front of the sensorsif necessary
tion with increasing braking force if you ap- => page 143, fig. 141. If this message continues
ply the brakes yourself or accelerate consid- to be displayed, drive immediately to an author-
erably. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
—In some situations, rear cross-traffic assist ty to have the malfunction repaired.
may warn you even if there is no crosstraffic
in a critical area, for example when backing
Audi drive select
into a parking space or maneuvering.
— The rear cross-traffic assist also switches off Introduction
when you switch off the ESC. Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
— For an explanation on conformity with the

Audi drive select makes it possible to experience
FCC regulations in the United States and the different types of vehicle settings in one vehicle.
Industry Canada regulations, see
The driver can select from three modes, Comfort,
=> page 392.
Auto and Dynamic,using the si button in the
center console or by using the Infotainment sys-
Messages tem. This allows you to switch between a sporty
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist and a comfortable driving mode, for example. In
8 Audi side assist: malfunction! Please contact the Individual* mode, the settings can be adjust-
ed to your personal preferences. This makesit
Service
possible to combine settings such as a sporty en-
The system cannot guarantee thatit will detect gine setting with light steering.
vehicles correctly and it has switched off. The
sensors have been moved or are faulty. Have the
system checked by an authorized Audi dealer or
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
authorized Audi Service Facility soon.
The vehicle setup in each mode depends on the
Audi side assist: currently unavailable. No
vehicle's features. However, the engine and steer-
sensor view
ing are always affected.
Audi side assist: currently unavailable. Sen-
Engine and automatic transmission
sor vision restricted due to surroundings. See
owner's manual Depending on the mode, the engine and auto-
matic transmission* respond more quickly or in a
The radar sensor vision is impaired. Do not cover
more balanced manner to accelerator pedal
the area in front of the sensors with bike wheels,
movements. In the sporty dynamic mode, the
stickers, dirt or other objects. Clean the area cov-
transmission shifts at higher speed ranges.
ering the sensors, if necessary > page 143,
fig. 141. Suspension control (Audi magnetic ride)*
Audi side assist: currently unavailable The suspension control uses sensorsto record in-
formation regarding steering movements,
146
Assist systems
braking and acceleration operations by the driver, Selecting the driving mode
as well as information about the road surface, Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
driving speed, and load. With Audi drive select
You can choose between comfort, auto, dynamic
you can adjust the suspension control to sporty
and individual*.
(dynamic), comfortable (comfort) or balanced
(auto).
B8V-0646
Steering
The steering adapts in terms of steering assis-
tance. There are different modes > page 147.In-
direct steering that moves easily as in comfort
mode is especially suited to long drives on a high-
way. The dynamic mode provides sporty, direct
steering.
For vehicles with progressive steering* the steer- Fig. 144 Center console: drive select button
ing performanceis moreagile.

>» Press the sta & fig. 144 button repeatedly until
Audi adaptive light* the desired mode is displayed in the instrument
The illumination on curves in adaptive light is cluster/Infotainment system. Or
> In the Infotainment system, select: [MENU
adapted to the selected mode.
button > Vehicle > left control button > Audi
Audi adaptive cruise control* drive select.
The behavior when accelerating can be adjusted » Select and confirm the desired setting.
from comfortable to sporty, depending on the You can change the driving mode when the vehi-
drive select mode. Adaptive cruise control also cle is stationary or while driving. If traffic per-
responds to the driving behavior of the vehicle mits, after changing modes,briefly remove your
ahead in a more conservative or sporty manner. foot from the accelerator pedal so that the re-
cently selected mode is also activated for the en-
@)Tips gine.
—In some models, the maximum vehicle
Comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle
speed can only be reached in the auto and
setup and is suited for long drives on highways.
dynamic modes.
—The "S" selector lever position automatically Auto- Provides an overall comfortable yet dy-
engages if the dynamic mode is selected. namic driving feel and is suited for everyday use.
Dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel

and is suited to a sporty driving style.
Individual* - > page 147.
Adjusting the Individual mode
You can adjustthe vehicle settings to your personalpreferences.
> Select: MENU button > Vehicle > Audi drive The systems you can adjust depend on the equip-
select > Individual > right control button. ment and engine in your vehicle. The following
table gives an overview of the characteristics. >
8V2012721B)
After you have closed the settings, you will auto-

matically drive in the Individual* mode.
147
Assist systems
Engine/transmission comfortable balanced sporty

Steering comfortable balanced sporty
Engine sound* subtle subtle/sporty® sporty
Audi adaptive cruise control* comfortable balanced sporty
Suspension control* comfortable balanced sporty
quattro* balanced balanced sporty
Applies to: RS models: quattro balanced neutral sporty
a) Subtle in the selector lever position "D" and sporty in "S".
Your Individual* mode settings are automati-

cally stored and assigned to the remote con-
trol key being used.
148
Parking aid
Parking aid C@) Note

General information — Some objects are not detected or displayed
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview cam- by the system under certain circumstances:
era/park assist
— objects such as barrier chains, trailer draw
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, various bars, vertical poles or fences
parking aids will help you when parking and ma- — objects above the sensors such as wall ex-
neuvering. tensions
— objects with certain surfaces or structures
The parking system plus assists you when park-
such as chain link fences or powder snow
ing by audibly and visually indicating objects de-
— If you continue driving closer to a low ob-
tected in front of and behind the vehicle
ject, it may disappear from the sensor
=> page 150.
range. Note that you will no Longer be
The rearview camera showsthe area behind the warned aboutthis obstacle.
vehicle in the Infotainment system display. The — Maintain enough distance from the curb to
lines in the rearview camera image help you to reduce the risk of damage to the rims.
park or maneuver > page 151.
@) Tips
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking
spaces when parallel or perpendicular parking, — The system mayprovide a warning even
and also helps when leaving a parallel parking though thereare no obstacles in the cover-
space > page 153. age area in some situations, such as:
— certain road surfaces or when thereis tall
Z\ WARNING grass
— Alwayslook for traffic and check the area — external ultrasonic sources such as from
around your vehicle by looking at it directly cleaning vehicles
as well. The parking system cannot replace — in heavy rain, snow,or thick vehicle ex-
the driver's attention. The driver is always haust
responsible when entering or exiting a park- — We recommend thatyou practice parking in
ing space and during similar maneuvers. a traffic-free location or parking lot to be-
— Please note that some surfaces, such as come familiar with the system. Practice
clothing, are not detected by the system. parking in good light and weather condi-
— Sensors and cameras haveblind spots in tions.
which people and objects cannot be detect- — You can change the volume and pitch of the
ed. Be especially cautious of small children signals as well as the display > page 157.
and animals. — What appearsin the infotainmentdisplay is
— Alwayspay attention to the area around the somewhat time-delayed.
vehicle - using the rearview mirror, too. — The sensors mustbe kept clean and free of
— The sensors can be displaced by impacts or snowand icefor the parking aid to operate.
damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel housing and the underbody. The park-
ing system maybe impaired as a result.
Have an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility check their func-
tion.
8V2012721B)
149
Parking aid
Parking system plus nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle

is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away
plead|)dled) from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continu-
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/park assist ous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than
approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the
B8V-0686
sides* of the vehicle. Do not continue driving for-
ward or in reverse >@ in General information on
page 149.
Visual warnings
The visual warnings in the Infotainment system
display help you to detect the critical vehicle area
and to estimate the distance to an obstacle
fig. 146.
RAH-8914
Red segments showidentified obstacles that are
in your vehicle's path. The red lines mark the ex-
pected direction of travel according to the steer-
ing angle. A white segment indicates an identi-
fied obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's path.
As your vehicle comes closer to the obstacle, the
segments movecloser to the vehicle. The colli-
sion area has been reached when the next to last
Fig. 146 Infotainmentsystem: visual distance display segment is displayed. Obstacles in the collision
area, including those outside of the vehicle's
The parking system plus uses audio and visual path, are shown in red. Do not continue driving
warnings to help you avoid obstacles when park- forward or in reverse > A\ in General information
ing. on page 149, >@ in General information on
Sensorsare located in the front and rear bump- page 149!
ers. If these detect an obstacle, audible and visu-
al signals warn you.
@ Tips
— The segmentsin the side area* are detected
Makesure the sensorsare not covered by stick-
and analyzed when passing. If you switch
ers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may
the ignition off and on again or open the
impair the function of the system. For informa-
door,or if the vehicle is stationary for a peri-
tion on cleaning, see > page 362.
od of time, the surrounding area may have
The display field begins approximatelyat: changed in the meantime. Therefore, the
side area* will be displayed in black.
®@ 4 ft (1.20 m) — If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
@ 3 ft (0.90 m) stant, the volume of the distance warning
® 5.2 ft (1.60 m) gradually lowers after a few seconds until it
@ 3 ft (0.90 m) is muted (this does not apply to the continu-
ous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
©* 3 ft (0.90 m)®
it was before the sound was muted, the
2) Applies to: vehicles with park assist tone will sound again. If the obstacle be-
Audio signals comesfarther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta- attention to the vehicle's surroundings
cle, the shorter the time between the audible sig- when you start todrive.
150
Parking aid
Switching on and off —The "P" selector lever position is engaged

Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/park assist and released again
B8V-0643
Rearview camera
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
B8V-0629
Fig. 147 Center console: parking aid button
Switching on and off

Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Fig. 148 Illustration: cross parking
> Press the Pt button in the center console. A
short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-
the button turns on. ver using the orientation lines.
Switching on automatically
General information
The system switches on automatically when re- Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
verse gear is engaged while the engine is run- a
n
ning. A brief tone will sound. oO
S|
=
&
a
If Activate automatically is switched on in the
Infotainment system and if the vehicle ap-
proaches an obstacle at speeds under approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h), the parking aid will
switch on automatically. Audible signals will
sound once the obstacle is within the sensor de-
tection area.
Fig. 149 Area covered @ and area notcovered (2) by the

Switching off automatically
rearview camera (example)
The system switches off automatically when driv-
ing forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
@) Tips
If you press the Pa button to switch the park-
ing aid off, it can only be reactivated automat-
ically when one of the following conditions is
met:
— The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)
— The ignition is switched off and back on Fig. 150 Luggage compartmentlid: location of the rear-
again >
8V2012721B)
view camera (example)
— The parking brake is set and then released
151
Parking aid
The rearview camerais located abovethe rear li-

@) Note
cense plate bracket. Make sure that the lens for
the parking system > fig. 150 is not covered by — Alwaysread and follow the applicable warn-
deposits or any other obstructions because this ings >@ in General information on
can affect the function of the parking system. For page 149.
information on cleaning, see > page 362. — The orange-colored orientation lines in the
Infotainment display show the vehicle path
The rearview camera coverage area includes () based on the steering wheel angle. The
> fig. 149. Only this area is shown in the Info-
front of the vehicle swings out more than
tainmentdisplay. Objects that are in area Q), the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
which is not covered, are not displayed. distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
ZA WARNING obstacles.
ings > A in General information on
SCR
page 149. Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera
— If the position and the installation angle of
the rearview camera was changed, for exam- Switching on and off
ple after a collision, do not continue to use Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
the system for safety reasons. Haveit approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
> Press the Pa button in the center console. A
short confirmation tone sounds and the LED in
— Only use the rearview camerato assist you if
the button turns on.
it shows a good, clear picture. For example,
the image maybe affected by the sun shin- Switching on automatically
ing into the lens,dirt on the lens, or if there
The system switches on automatically when re-
is a malfunction.
verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
— Use the rearview camera onlyif the luggage
ning.
compartment lid is completely closed. If the
luggage compartmentlid is open the orien- Switching off automatically
tation lines and blue surfaces are hidden.
The system switches off automatically when driv-
Makesure any objects you may have mount-
ing forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
ed on the luggage compartmentlid do not
block the rearview camera.
@ Tips
— The cameralens enlarges and distorts the
field of vision. The object appears both al- — The visual display* in the right section of the
tered and inaccurate on the screen. display should help you detect the critical
—Incertain situations, people or objects in vehicle area.
the display appear closer or farther away: — You can change the volume ofthe signals
— For objects that do not touch the ground, and the display > page 157.
such as the bumper ofa parked vehicle, a
trailer hitch or the rear of a truck. Do not
use the orientation lines in this case.
—If driven from a level surface onto an in-
cline, or a downwardslope.
— If driven toward protruding objects.
— If the vehicle is carrying too much load in
the rear.
152
Parking aid
i Park assist
This view may be used whenparking in a garage

or ina parking space.
Fig. 152 Infotainment system: aligning the vehicle
Fig. 153 Diagram: street parking options

> Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into
reverse gear.
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking
> The orange orientation lines @showthe direc-
spaces and to park in them. You can back into
tion of travel of the vehicle. Turn the steering
parallel @) and perpendicular (2) parking spaces
wheel until the orange orientation lines align
and also drive forward out of parallel parking
with the parking space > fig. 151. Use the
spaces. You can also drive forward into perpen-
markings to help you estimate the distance
dicular parking spaces if you havealready started
from an obstacle. Each marking represents ap-
driving and the front of the vehicle is in the space
proximately 3 feet (1 meter). The blue area rep-
@,or if you have already driven pastit @). In sit-
resents an extension of the vehicle's outline by
uation @), the vehicle will back up, moveinto the
approximately 16 feet (5 meters) to the rear.
correct position, and then start to drive forward
> While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steer-
into the parking space.
ing wheel angleto fit the parking space using
the orange orientation lines for assistance > A\ The parking space can be between twovehicles or
in Generalinformation on page 152, >@) in behind a vehicle. The driver parks as usual with
General information on page 152. Area @)rep- park assist controlling the steering.
resents the rear bumper. Stop the vehicle, at
The parking system plus functions > page 150
the latest, when the red orientation line
that assist you when parking are a component of
ders an object.
the parkassist.
The park assist sensors are on the sides of the

front and rear bumper. Make sure the sensors are
8V2012721B)
not covered bystickers, deposits or any other ob-

structions as it may impair the function of the >
153
Parking aid
system. For information on cleaning, see SYieee ie Rela

=> page 362. Applies to: vehicles with park assist
When parking spaces are small, the parking sys- =

x
&
tem signals a continuous tone when an obstacle 3
©
a
is less than approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m)
away. Do not continue driving farther.
ZA WARNING
ings > A\ in General information on
page 149.
— Please note that park assist only controls
the steering. The driver is always responsi-
ble for braking and accelerating.
— The driver must decide if the parking space
displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
— The vehicle will change position when park-
ing. Make sure you do not endanger any oth-
er drivers.
— When using parkassist to drive into or out
of a parking space, the steering wheel turns Fig. 155 Infotainment system: finding a parking space
quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-

ing wheel spokes while this is happening can > To switch the park assist on, press the P@ but-
result in injury. ton > fig. 154. The LED in the button will turn
on and the display for finding a parking space
@) Note will appear in the Infotainment system
> fig. 155.
> To switch park assist off, press the Pe button.
ings >@ in General information on
The LED in the button turns off.
page 149.
— Park assist guides the vehicle either away
G) Tips
from curbs or onto them if other vehicles
are parked on the curb. Make sure that your The system preselects a space from the avail-
vehicle's tires and rims are not damaged. able parking options as soon as a space is de-
Take over steering at the right time. tected. You can change the suggested loca-
tion.
— Certain conditions around the parking space
mayresult in the vehicle not being parked
as expected.
— Objects such as pillars or posts.
— Ground covering such as gravel, snow or
ice
G) Tips
— The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
mustnot be switched off during the parking
process > page 160.
— Parking in tight curves with park assist is
not possible.
154
Parking aid
Parking space search has reached the correct position, a P appearsin

Applies to: vehicles with park assist the display over the selected parking space.
> Keep the vehicle as parallel as possible to the
parked vehicles or to the side of the road.
> If you would like to park using the system, fol-
low the instructions in the instrument cluster.
Park assist only displays parking spaces that are

suitable for the length and width of the vehicle.
@) Note
— Parking spaces classified as suitable by the
system may have been detected incorrectly.
The driver must decide if the parking space
displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
— Certain conditions near the parking space
may cause the parking process tofail, such
as if the parking space is near trees or posts,
or if the ground is covered, for example,
Fig. 157 Infotainment: notification to continue driving in with gravel, snow,or ice.
reverse (example: when parallel parking)
G) Tips
Searching for parking spaces
— You can select a space from all of the park-
> Drive forward to the row of parking spaces at a ing options found. The possible parking
low speed. For the best parking results, the ve- space will be displayed until you are too far
hicle should be approximately 3 feet (1 m) from awayfrom it.
the row of parking spaces. —If you did not drive past a suitable parking
> The parking space search is first done on one space too quickly, the system can also be ac-
side of the lane. To switch the side for the park- tivated afterwards by pressing the Pe button
ing space search, activate the turn signal for and activating the turn signal.
that side. — If suitable parking spacesare available on
both sides of the road at the same time
Selecting the parking space
(such as on a one-waystreet), the direction
> If the system finds a parking space that could of the turn signal can also be changed in or-
be suitable for the vehicle length and width, it der to usepark assist.
will be displayed > fig. 156. The system auto- — Park assist will switch off if your speed ex-
matically suggests a parking option. ceeds approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
> Make sure that the parking space is suitable for
your vehicle.
Starting the parking process
> To switch between parallel @), forward perpen-
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
dicular or reverse perpendicular © parking,
turn the control knob to the desired mode. Only The responsibility is with the driver when park-
the parking options that are currently possible ing.
are suggested.
Requirement: a suitable parking space must be
> Drive forward until the instructions for auto-
found and selected > page 155. The vehicle must
matic parking appear in the instrument cluster
8V2012721B)
initially be stationary.
> AQ in Description on page 154, >@) in De-
scription on page 154. As soon as the vehicle > Select the reverse gear after stopping briefly.
> Removeyour hands from the steering wheel. >
155
Parking aid
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. When tor pedal accordingly > A\ in Description on
the traffic situation allows, press the accelera- page 154, >@) in Description on page 154.
tor pedal accordingly > A\ in Description on > Follow the visual instructions > page 156 and
page 154, >@) in Description on page 154. the warning tones until the vehicle has finished
> Follow the visual instructions and the warning exiting the parking space.
tones until the parking process has ended. The > Drive in the direction indicated by the arrows on
arrowson the vehicle indicate the necessary di- the vehicle.
rection oftravel. > The procedure has ended when additional cor-
rective movementsare no longer necessary.
Park assist automatically steers the vehicle into Take over steering.
the parking space while the driver presses the
pedals. The maximum parking speed is 4 mph Park assist automatically steers the vehicle out of
(7 km/h). the parking space while the driver presses the
pedals. The maximum speed for exiting a parking
Interrupting the park assist
space is 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the speed is too high and you take over steer-
Interrupting the park assist
ing, park assist switches off. To continue parking,
press the Pe button again. The parkassist indica- If the speed is too high and you take over steer-
tor appears again in the display. ing, park assist switches off. To continue exiting
the parking space, switch the engine off and on.
@) Tips Then press the Pe button again. Otherwise, leave
You can also cancel the direction of travel the parking space without using park assist.
specified by the system by switching between
forward and reverse gears. Based on the posi- Messages
tion of the vehicle, the system then calculates Applies to: vehicles with park assist
the additional steering and driving directions
Park assist: canceled. Steering input by driv-
for maneuvering.
er. Please take over steering!
Driving out of a parallel parking space Park assist was canceled because the driver took
Applies to: vehicles with park assist over steering. To continue parking, press the &
button again.
The responsibility is with the driver when leaving
a parking space. ro" Parkassist: time limit exceeded
If you parked the vehicle in a parallel parking Park assist: canceled. Time limit exceeded.
space, park assist can help you drive out ofit. Take over steering!
> Start the engine. The parking process was not completed within
> Press the Pe button > page 154, fig. 154. approximately six minutes of activating park as-
sist. To continue parking, press the Pe button
> Wait until a message appears that requests the
direction to travel in for exiting the parking again.
space. Park assist: canceled. Speed too high. Please
> Activate the appropriate turn signal. The mes- take over steering!
sage Start automatic unparking procedure ap-
The speed entering the parking space is too high.
pears.
Drive no faster than 4 mph (7 km/h).
> Removeyour hands from the steering wheel.
> Press the control knob to start the procedure ro="| Park assist: canceled. Stabilization control
for exiting the parking space. (ESC) input. Please take over steering!
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. When
the traffic situation allows, press the accelera-
156
Parking aid
The ESC took action to stabilize the vehicle. Take ro" Park assist: canceled. Unavailable in current
over steering. Complete parking without using Audi drive select mode. Please take over steer-
park assist or drive out of the parking space. ing!
rox Park assist: currently unavailable. Stabiliza- Park assist is not available in certain Audi drive
tion control (ESC) off select modes. Select a different mode in drive se-
lect > page 146.
The ESC was switched off. The ESC must be
switched on touse park assist. Parkassist: stabilization control (ESC) input
Park assist: malfunction! Please contact The displayed parking space was rejected because
Service. the ESC took action to stabilize the vehicle.
Park assist: malfunction! Take over steering! Park assist: not stopped long enough
Please contact Service.
After engaging the reverse gear, park assist must
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized stop briefly in order to activate the steering. Fol-
Audi Service Facility. You cannot park with park low the instructions in the display.
assist if there is a system malfunction.
ro" Park assist: canceled. Unable to leave park-
Park assist: currently unavailable. ing space automatically. Parking space too
small.
Parkassist: currently unavailable. Please
take over steering! The parking space is too small for the vehicle to
automatically leave the space. Leave the parking
Parking with parkassist is not possible. Try park-
space without using park assist.
ing again or switch the ignition off and back on
again if necessary. roe"| Park assist: canceled. Please take over steer-
ing!
Park assist: ended. Please take over steering
and continue driving. Parking with park assist was stopped.
The processof exiting the parking space with

park assist has ended. Please take over steering. Adjusting the parking aid
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview cam-
Park assist: canceled. Parking space too era/park assist
small. Please take over steering! The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment
Parking in this space with parkassist is not possi- system.
ble. Park without using park assist or find a larger
parking space.
Park assist: canceled. Obstacle detected. sistance > Parking aid. Or
Please take over steering! > When the parking aid is active, select in the In-
fotainment system: right control button*.
Parking with park assist was stopped because the
vehicle could collide with an obstacle. End system* - Stop the parking aid
Park assist: ended Activate automatically - Switch automatic activa-
Park assist: ended. Please take over steer- tion on/off
ing! Front volume*- Volume for the front and side*
Parking with park assist has ended. area
Parkassist: unavailable in current Audi drive Rear volume - Volume for the rear area
8V2012721B)
select mode
157
Parking aid
Entertainment fader - The volume of the audio/ faulty, only obstacles that are in areas (@) and @)
video source is lowered when the parking system are shown > page150,fig. 145. If a front sensor
is turned on. is faulty, only obstacles that are in areas (3) and
@ are shown.
G) Tips
— Several menus can be accessed with the
right control button only when the parking
aid is active.
— The newlevel is demonstrated briefly* when
the volume is adjusted.
— Certain settings are automatically stored
and assigned to the remotecontrol key be-
ing used.
Error messages
Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus/rearview cam-
era/park assist
wm Rear parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles

cannotbe detected
w Front parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles

cannot be detected
w Parking aid: malfunction! Obstacles cannot

be detected
When one of these messages appears, thereis a

system malfunction. The LED in the Pbutton al-
so blinks when switching it on. The relevant mes-
sage only appears again when you manually acti-
vate the parking aid with the button.
Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restrict-

ed
The rear cross-traffic assist* > page 145, Rear
cross-traffic assist is not available. Either the ESC
is switched off, or the radar sensors may be cov-
ered by a bike rack, stickers, leaves, snow or other
objects. Switch the ESC on, or clean the area in
front of the sensorsif necessary > page 143,
fig. 141. If this message continues to be dis-
played, drive immediately to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
the malfunction repaired.
Parking system plus*/Park assist*

If a sensor or speaker is faulty, the P4 symbol
will appear in front of/behind the vehicle in the
Infotainment system display. If a rear sensor is
158
Intelligent Technology
Intelligent Technology In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off

to keep the brake on the braked wheel from over-
Electronic Stabilization heating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly.
Control (ESC) EDL will switch on again automatically when con-
ditions have returned to normal.
Power steering
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports
driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and The ESC can also supportvehicle stability
improves driving stability. ESC detectscritical sit- through steering.
uations such as the vehicle oversteering and un- Selective wheel torque control
dersteering or the wheels are spinning. The
brakes are applied or the engine torque is re- Selective wheel torque control is used when driv-
duced in order to stabilize the vehicle. When the ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the
ESC engages, the B indicator light blinks in the wheelson the inside of the curve as needed. This
instrumentcluster. allows moreprecise driving in curves.
The following systems are integrated in the ESC: Automatic post-collision braking system
The automatic post-collision braking system can
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addition-
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when brak- al collisions after an accident. If the airbag con-
ing. The vehicle can still be steered even during trol module detects a collision above a certain ve-
hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake hicle speed, the vehicle is braked by the ESC.
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. A pulsing in the
brake pedal indicates that the system is acting to
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of
stabilize the vehicle.
the following occurs:
— The driver presses the accelerator pedal

Brake assist system
— The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
The brake assist system can decrease braking dis- trical system is not functioning
tance. It increases braking power when the driver
presses the brake pedal quickly in emergencysit- A WARNING
uations. You must press and hold the brake pedal
—The ESC and its integrated systems cannot
until the dangerous situation is over. In vehicles
overcome the limits imposed by natural
with adaptive cruise control*, the brake assist
physical laws. This is especially important on
system is more sensitive if the distance detected
slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin
to the vehicle driving ahead is too small.
acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) immediately alter your speed to match the
road and traffic conditions. Do not let the in-
ASR reduces drive power when the drive wheels
creased safety provided temptyou into tak-
begin spinning and adapts the power to the road
ing risks. This could increase your risk of a
conditions. This makes it easier to start, acceler-
collision.
ate and drive up hills.
— Please notethe risk of a collision increases
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) when driving fast, especially through curves
and on slippery or wet roads, and when driv-
The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are
ing too closeto objects ahead. Thereis still
slipping and transfers the drive power to the oth-
a risk of accidents because the ESC and its
er wheels. This function is not available at higher
integrated systems cannot always prevent
8V2012721B)
speeds.
collisions.
159
— Accelerate carefully when driving on condition. Different tire sizes can lead to a
smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and reduction in engine power.
snow.The drive wheels can spin even when — You may hear noises when the systems de-
these control systems are installed and this scribed are working.
can affect driving stability and increase the
risk of a collision.
@ Tips
— The ABS and ASR only function correctly
when all four wheels have a similar wear
Scale Rolie medal
The ESCis automatically switched on whenthe ignition is switched on.

5S
zg function of the ESC will be limited or switched
2
| off. The amount of stabilization control will differ
&
oO
depending on the level.
The following examples are unusual situations

whereit may makesense to switch sport mode
on in order to allow the wheelsto spin:
— Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck

— Driving in deep snowor on loose ground
Fig. 158 Uppercenter console: ESC button — Driving with snow chains
The ESC is designed to function in levels. Depend-

ing on the level that is selected, the stabilization
Sport mode on ESC/ASRoff Sport modeoff or

ESC/ASR on
Behavior The ESC and ASR stabiliza- The stabilization function is The full stabilization func-
tion functions are limited not available > A\. ESC and_|tion of the ESC and ASR is
>A. ASR are switched off. available again.
Operation Press the |£| button brief- Press and hold the |#°"| but- Press the |£%] button again.
ly. ton longer than three sec-
onds.
Indicator Egiturns on. Band ea turn on. Egliturns off or [ig and
lights aa turn off.
Messages* Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control (ESC): Stabilization control
sport. Warning! Limited off. Warning! Limited sta- (ESC): on
stability bility
/\ WARNING ~The stabilization functionis limited when

sport mode is switched on. The driving
You should only switch sport mode on or
wheels could spin and the vehicle could
switch ESC/ASR off if your driving abilities and
swerve, especially on slick or slippery road
road conditions permit.
surfaces.
160
— Thereis no vehicle stabilization when Brake pads

ESC/ASR are switchedoff. New brake pads do not achievetheir full braking
effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They
@) Tips mustbe “broken in”first. However, you can com-
— ESC/ASR cannotbe switched off or sport pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by
mode cannotbe switched on if the cruise pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy
control system* or the adaptive cruise con- braking during the break-in period.
trol* is switched on. Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the
— Malfunctions in the Audi magnetic ride* vehicle is driven and on operating conditions.
may makeit impossible to switch the Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently
ESC/ASR off or to switch sport mode on. in the city or short distances or when using a very
sportydriving style.
Brakes
Z\WARNING
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake
— Only apply the brakes for the purpose of
pedal.
cleaning the brake system when road and
Operating noise traffic conditions permit. You must not en-
danger other road users and increase the
Noises may occur when braking depending on the
risk of an accident.
speed, braking force, and outside conditions such
as temperature and humidity. — Due to the risk of injury, only have an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Braking effect Service Facility work on the brake system.
The response time from the brakes depends on Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
the weather and environmental conditions. To — Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is
ensure the optimum braking effect, the brake stopped because this increases the risk of an
system is cleaned at regular intervals. This is accident.
done by applying the brake pads to the brake ro- — Depending on vehicle equipment, the brake
tors for a short period of time when driving at pedal may move downward automatically
high speeds when the windshield wipers are during autonomous braking maneuvers. To
switched on. reducethe risk of injury, do not place your
foot under the brake pedal.
If the brake system becomes damp, for example
after driving in heavyrain, the braking effect may C) Note
be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily
— Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the
increase the responsetime of the brakes include:
pedal lightly when braking is not actually
— Wetconditions necessary. This can cause the brakes to over-
— Low temperatures, ice, and snow heat and increases braking distance and
— Roads covered in salt causes wear.
— Dirty brake pads — Before driving on long stretches with steep
hills, reduce the vehicle speed and shift to a
Corrosion
lower gear to use the engine braking effect.
Corrosion may form on the brakerotorsif there is This reduces the load on the brakes. If you
no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for need to brake additionally, brake in intervals
long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driv- and not continuously. >
8V2012721B)
en frequently or for long distances. In this case,

braking heavily several times while driving at
high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.
161
@ Tips All wheel drive (quattro)

Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive
— If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil-
er, wheel coversor similar items, make sure In all wheeldrive, all four wheels are powered.
that the air flow to the brakes is not ob-
General information
structed. Otherwise the brake system can
overheat. In all wheel drive, the driving power is divided be-
— Also refer to the information about brake tween all four wheels. This happens automatical-
fluid > page 334. ly depending on your driving behavior as well as
the current road conditions. Also see > page 159,
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC).
Electromechanical
steering The all wheel drive conceptis designed for high
engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally pow-
The electromechanical steering supports the erful and has excellent driving characteristics
driver's steering movements. both under normal driving conditions and on
snowand ice. Always read and follow safety pre-
Power steering adapts electronically based on
cautions > A\.
the vehicle speed.
Winter tires
Indicator lights and messages
By using all wheel drive, your vehicle has good
a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
forward motion with standard tires in winter con-
If this indicator light turns on and stays on and ditions. However, using winter or all season tires
this message appears, the power steering may on all four wheels in the winter is recommended,
havefailed. because this will improve the braking effect.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as pos- Snowchains
sible. Do not continue driving. See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for If there are snow chain laws, snow chains must
assistance. also be used on vehicles with all wheel drive

= page 355, Snow chains.
eB Steering: system fault! You can continue
driving Replacing tires
If the indicator light turns on, the steering wheel For vehicles with all wheel drive, only wheels with
may be moredifficult to move or more sensitive the same rolling circumference should be used.
than usual. The steering wheel may also be Avoid using tires with different tread depths
turned to the side when driving straight. => page 346, New tires or wheels.
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or au- Is this an offroad vehicle?

thorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal- Your Audi is not an offroad vehicle - there is not
function corrected. enough ground clearance. For this reason, avoid
difficult terrain.
@) Tips
If the & or El indicator light only stays on Z\ WARNING
for a short time, you may continue driving. — Also, in vehicles with all wheel drive, adapt
your driving style to the current road and
traffic conditions. Do not let the increased
safety provided temptyou into taking risks,
because this increases the risk of an acci-
dent. >
162
— The braking ability of your vehicleis limited is designed to record data related to vehicle dy-
to the traction of the wheels. In this way,it namics and safety systems for a short period of
is not different from a two wheel drive vehi- time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
cle. Do not be tempted to accelerate to a vehicle is designed to record such data as:
high speed when the road is slippery, be- — How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
cause this increases the risk of an accident. ating;
— Note that on wetstreets, the front wheels — Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
can “hydroplane”if driving at speeds that belts were buckled/fastened;
are too high. Unlike front wheel drive vehi- — Howfar (if at all) the driver was depressing the
cles, the engine RPM does notincrease sud- accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
denly when the vehicle begins hydroplaning.
— Howfast the vehicle was traveling.
Adaptyour speed to the road conditions to
reduce the risk of an accident. These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstancesin which crashes and in-
juries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
Energy management
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent ener- no data are recorded by the EDR under normal
gy management system for distributing electrici- driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
ty. This significantly improves the starting ability name, gender, age, and crash location)are re-
and increases the vehicle batterylife. corded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the
@ Tips type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
— If you drive short distances frequently, the quired during a crash investigation.
vehicle battery may not charge enough To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
while driving. As a result, convenience func- ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
tions for electrical equipment may be tem- EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
porarily unavailable. facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
— The vehicle battery will gradually drain if that have the special equipment, can read the in-
the vehicle is not driven for long periods of formation if they have access to the vehicle or the
time, or if electrical equipment is used EDR.
when the engine is not running. To ensure
Audi will only access the EDR and/or similar data
that the vehicle can still be started, the
or give it to others with the consent of the owner
electrical equipmentwill be limited or
or lessee or in accordance with applicable law.
switched off.
States vary in their access/disclosure restrictions
for EDR data, but typically such data can be ac-
Notice about data cessed/disclosed in the following circumstances:
recorded by the Event
— when the vehicle owner (or lesseeif the vehicle
Data Recorder and has been leased) agrees; or
vehicle control modules — upon the official request by the police; or
— upon the order of a court of law or a govern-
Event Data Recorder
ment agency; or
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re- — for the defense of a lawsuit through the judicial
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to discovery process.
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- — Audi mayalso use the data, once retrieved from
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
8V2012721B)
the vehicle under permissible circumstances,in

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- an anonymous format.
ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR
163
— for research about vehicle operation and safety

performance or provide the data to a third par-
ty for such research purposes.
Vehicle control modules

Your vehicle is also equipped with a number of
electronic control modules for various vehicle
systems, such as engine management, emission
control, airbags, and safety belts.
These electronic control modules record data

during normal vehicle operation that may be
needed by trained technicians for diagnostic and
repair purposes. The recording capability of these
modules is limited to data (no sound is recorded).
Only a small amount of data is actually recorded
over a very limited period of time, or stored when
a system fault is detected by a control module.
Some of the data stored mayrelate to vehicle
speed, direction, or braking, as well as restraint
system use and performancein the eventof a
crash. Stored data can also only be read and
downloaded with special equipment that is di-
rectly connected to the vehicle.
@ Tips
Your vehicle may be equipped with Audi con-
nect. Your use of certain Audi connect fea-
tures requires wireless services that are pro-
vided by a third party wireless telecommuni-
cations provider. For details regarding how in-
formation obtained through Audi connectis
collected, processed, transmitted, used, and
shared, please see your contract with the
wireless telecommunications provider.
164
Multi Media Interface
Multi Media Interface ©) Buttons for opening menus directly . 167

(@ [MENU] button oss ss eves 2 x neues 3s 167
Traffic safety @ [BACK] button ...... 2 ee 166
information
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain- MMI On/Off knob with
ment system functions, such as entering a desti- joystick function
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary.Al-
(ey eYTe-latire]
ways be preparedto stop operating the Infotain-
ment system in the interest of your safety and
[RAH-8838,
the safety of other road users.
Z\ WARNING
Only use the Infotainment system when road,
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per-
mit and alwaysin a way that allows you to
maintain complete control over your vehicle.
G@) Tips Fig. 160 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function
Certain functions are not available while driv-

ing. Switching the MMI on/off: the MMI can be
switched on/off manually.
— Switching on manually: press the On/Off knob
Introduction
@ briefly > fig. 160, or press the [MENU] but-
ton © © page 165, fig. 159 or one ofthe but-
[RAH-8837,
tons used to open a menu G).
— Switching off manually: press and hold the

On/Off knob (@) > fig. 160 until the MMI
switches off. If the MMI has been switched off
manually, it does not switch on again automati-
cally the next time the ignition is switched on.
Additional functions:
Fig. 159 MMI control panel — Adjusting the volume: turn the On/Off knob @
> fig. 160.
The Multi Media Interface, or MMI for short, — Muting: press the On/Off knob @ © fig. 160
combines various systems for communication, briefly.
navigation* and entertainment in your Audi. You — Selecting the previous/next function (for ex-
can operate the MMI using the MMI control pan- ample, a radio station/track): press the On/Off
el, the multifunction steering wheel or the voice knob @) ° fig. 160briefly toward the left KK or
recognition system*. right Do.
— Fast forwarding/rewinding (for example
MMI control panel overview
songs): press and hold the On/Off knob @)
@ Control knob with joystick function*
=> fig. 160 toward the left Kd or right DDI.
ee eee eee eee 166, 170
@ MMI touch control pad* ......... 168 Z\WARNING
8V2012721B)
@® Left control button ............. 167 To reduce the risk of an accident, adjust the
@ Right control button ............ 167 volume of the audio systems so that signals >
165
outside of the vehicle, such as police and fire MMI operation

sirens, can be heard easily at all times.
Selecting and confirming a function
@) Tips
The MMI switches off automatically if the en-
gine is not running and the vehicle batteryis
low.
Infotainment system
display
Switching on/off
The Infotainment system display automatically

extends and retracts when you switch the igni-
tion on and off.
> When it is extended, press the [o] button to

switch the Infotainment system display on or
off.
When the MMI is switched on and the displayis

switched off, you can operatecertain functions
using the On/Off knob with the MMI joystick Fig. 161 Operating the control knob
function > page 165.
Selecting and confirming a function in a
@) Tips menu/list
There maybe delays when switching on the > Selecting a function: turn the control knob @)
display. to the desired function (such as selecting a fre-
quency).
> To confirm your selection: Press the control
knob @).
Returning to functions at higher levels

> Press the [BACK] button (%) > page 165,
fig. 159.
Coy eYTae mM Ana ale
Fig. 162 Diagram: main menu
166
Opening the main menu Options menu: using the options menu, you can
> Press the [MENU] button © > page 165, select and confirm context-dependentfunctions
fig. 159. The MMI menus (such as Radio) are as well as settings within a menu item (such as
displayed > fig. 162. Then you can select and Radio).
confirm a function using the control knob. Requirement: the options menu symbol [+] must
be displayed in the Infotainment system display
Opening a menu directly
=> fig. 163. Then you can select and confirm a
> Press the applicable button to directly open the function using the control knob.
menus () > page 165,fig. 159 in the direction
Opening and closing the options menu: Press
of the desired menu (such as |RADIO}). Then
the right control button > fig. 163. Then you can
you can select and confirm a function using the
select and confirm a function using the control
control knob.
knob.
Co} Te mate ae mal eco) eee Ley =

MithiEhecontroll buttons Information about menu paths
This guide showsyou at a glance the paths for

opening a desired menu and its settings and
functions.
Example of a path
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button >
FM.
Following the path

> Press the [RADIO] button.
> Press the left control button.
> Turn the control knob to the FM menu item to
selectit.
> Press the control knob to confirm the selected
FM menu item.
> The selected and confirmed function is execut-
ed. In this example, the FM frequency band is
set.
Fig. 163 Control buttons on the MMI control panel
Selection menu: through the selection menu,

you can open additional functions within a menu
item (such as Radio).
Requirement: the selection menu symbol must

be displayed in the Infotainment system display
> fig. 163.
Opening and closing a selection menu: Press the

left control button > fig. 163. Then you can se-
8V2012721B)
lect and confirm a function using the control

knob.
167
MMI touch Requirement: it must be possible to enter text or

numbers and the symbol (@) > fig. 165 must ap-
MMI touch control pad pear in the Infotainment system display.
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
— Initial entry: write an individual upper case or
RAH-8776
lower case letter or number/symbol on the
MMI touch control pad using your finger. A
symbol that is recognized clearly by the system
is displayed in the Infotainment system display
Angeles, CA
4p 5 @ © page 168,fig. 164, confirmed with an au-
B ¥ Downtow: s Angeles, CA dible signal if necessary, and transferred to the
AS ey eisiratl SiUO
input field.
— Entering spaces: move your finger across the
MMI touch control pad from left to right.
— Deleting characters: move your finger across
the MMI touch control pad from right to left.
— Selecting the input suggestion: press the con-
Q
trol knob.
— Switching directly to the resultslist: turn the
control knob tothe right.
— Opening thespeller: select the right control
button > Open speller. Text or numbers are en-
tered using the speller > page 172.
Fig. 164 Example: entering a navigation destination using

the MMI touch Oe mame ETL
You can enter data using handwriting recognition
Aen 8748
on the MMI touch control pad.
pS
The MMI touch control pad is on the surface with

the control knob.
~~ 4
=
S Figueroa St i
Entering letters, numbers and symbols
Fig. 165 Display when MMI touch is active
The MMI touch allows you to enter data on the

MMI touch control pad using handwriting recog-
nition. Fig. 166 Moving the crosshairs
168
Requirement: a map mustbe displayed — Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the con-
=> page 220. trol knob to show the crosshairs @) © fig. 167.
Press the BACK] button (7) > page 165,
— Showing and hiding the crosshairs: press the
fig. 159 to hide the crosshairs again.
control knob to show the crosshairs (2)
— Moving the standard map/satellite map):
=> fig. 166, or press the MMI touch control pad.
movethe crosshairs shownin the desired direc-
Press the [BACK] button () > page 165,
tion using two fingers on the MMI touch con-
fig. 159 to hide the crosshairs again.
trol pad © fig. 167.
— Moving the crosshairs on a map: move the
— Moving the map quickly: when the crosshairs
crosshairs shown in the desired direction using
are visible, pull two fingers across the MMI
your finger on the MMI touch control pad
> fig. 166. touch control pad quickly in the desired direc-
tion. The map will come to a stop after several
Moving the crosshairs quickly: when the cross- seconds.
hairs are visible @ > fig. 166,slide your finger
quickly across the MMI touch control pad in the
Zooming in/out on the map
desired direction. The crosshairs will come to a Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
stop after several seconds.
RAH-8750)
Moving the map
RAH-8744]
Fig. 168 Zooming in and out on the map
Requirement: a map mustbe displayed

=> page 220.
— Zooming in/out on the map: press the control

knob to show the crosshairs. Touch the MMI
touch control pad with twofingers and pull
your fingers apart or together > fig. 168.
Press the BACK button () to hide the crosshairs

=> page 165, fig. 159.
Adjusting the sound focus

Fig. 167 Moving the map
Requirement: the balance/fader function must
Requirement: a map mustbe displayed be selected > page 257.
=> page 220.
8V2012721B)
D AUDI AGprovides access to services from third party pro-

viders. Permanentavailability cannot be guaranteed, be-
cause that dependson thethird party provider.
169
— Moving the crosshairs for sound focus: move ment sliding menu @) > page 174, fig. 173. Then
your finger in the desired direction on the MMI you can select and confirm a function.
touch control pad.
Closing the entertainment sliding menu: push
— Storing the crosshairs location: press the con-
the control knob up to close the entertainment
trol knob twice or press the [BACK] button (7)
sliding menu or press the [BACK] button @)
=> page 165,fig. 159.
=> page 165,fig. 159.
Using the DVD main menu

Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function
Requirement: a DVD mustbe playing

Displaying the input field/switching to
=> page 241. speller input
— Selecting a menu item: moveyour finger up/ Push the control knob upwardto reach the begin-
down or left/right on the MMI touch control ning of a list in the central area or the input field.
pad. If the input field is already open, switch directly
— Confirming a selection: press the control knob. to the speller in the input field by pushing the
control knob up again > page 172.
G) Tips
On the map
The volume of the voice guidance prompts for
the MMI touch* can be adjusted separately Requirement: a map mustbe displayed
=> page 258. => page 220.
— Displaying the input field: push the control

Control knob with knob up.
joystick function — Displaying route guidance: when route guid-
anceis active, you can also display the route
guidance by pushing the control knob up
Appliesto: vehicles with joystick function
=> page 215,fig. 188.
— Zooming in/out on the map (zoom): turn the
2
RAH-8515|
control knob to the right/left to zoom in/out on

the map.
— Additional options on the map: see
e » => page 222

Applies to: vehicles without MMI touch with joystick function
— Showing/hiding the crosshairs: press the con-
& trol knob. The crosshairs are shown on the map.

Press the [BACK] button to hide the crosshairs.
Fig. 169 Operating concept for the control knob with joy- — Moving the crosshairs: when the crosshairs are
stick function
visible, turn the control knob in the direction
the crosshairs should move. Press the control
You can push the control knob up or down (@ or
knob and hold it until the crosshairs are in the
to the rightorleft @).
desired point on the map.
Opening the entertainmentsliding menu Adjusting the sound focus

Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch Applies to: vehicles without MMI touch with joystick function
Requirement: the balance/fader function must

Opening the entertainment sliding menu: push
be selected > page 257.
the control knob downto open the entertain-
170
— Moving the sound focus using the crosshairs: Requirement: the selection menu symbol 3 must
the crosshairs can be moved horizontally. Turn be displayed in the Infotainment system display
the control knob to the left or to the right. > fig. 170.
Press the control knob to move the crosshairs
Opening andclosing the selection menu: push
vertically. Turn the control knob tothe left or to
the control knob to the left > fig. 170 to open
the right. Press the control knob again to save
the selection menu. Then you can select and con-
the setting.
firm a function using the control knob.
Using the DVD main menu Press the [BACK] button (7) > page 165,fig. 159
Requirement: a DVD mustbe playing to return to the function one level up.
=> page 241.
Opening andclosing the options menu: push
— Selecting a menu item: move the control knob the control knob to the right > fig. 170 to open
with joystick function up or down or tothe left the options menu. Then you can select and con-
or right. firm a function using the control knob.
— Confirming a selection: press the control knob. Press the [BACK] button () > page 165,fig. 159
to return to the function one level up.
Coy oYTa em an -weT1 (red elay Qe Lila Maa alec ay
the control knob
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function
Applies to: MMI control panel with control knob and joy-
stick function
Fig. 170 Openingthe selection/options menu with the
control knob
8V2012721B)
171
Letter/number speller
Coeasto
AUIS, (oN
PEELE
cy Crt
i ee co aly
ai Ss)
Fig. 171 Diagram: letter/number speller
You can enter letters, numbers and symbolsin acters in the input field, press and hold the con-
the MMI using the letter/number speller. This op- trol knob on &] until all characters in the input
tion is available when the input field @) is active. field are deleted.
— Entering special characters: select and con-
— Opening and closing the letter/number spell-
firm 82] ©, [464] Z or [123] @).Select and
er: move the control knob up/down when the
confirm the desired special character (for ex-
input field is active, or select: right control but-
ample, a hyphen or period) with the number
ton > Open speller/Closespeller.
speller.
— Entering characters: turn the control knob to
— Input assistance: in some cases such as in navi-
the desired character using the character selec-
gation*, there is a word suggestion* @) based
tion @. Press the control knob to confirm the
on available entries while you are entering da-
character. Your input is displayed in the input
ta. You can select this suggestion by pushing
field @). Once you have entered all of the char-
the control knob upward.
acters, select and confirm the button @to go
— Resultslist: in some cases, such as in the direc-
to the results list or push the control knob
tory, the system switches automatically to the
down.
results list based on logical deduction @). Se-
— Entering accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi,
lect and confirm a suggestion from the list.
6)*: turn the control knob with the character
selection @9 to a character. To open the select- Requirement: the input field @) must be active.
ed accented characters, press and hold the con- — Switching between speller and MMI touch*:
trol knob. Turn the control knob with the char- the handwriting recognition for the MMI touch
acter selection @0 to an accented character. control pad* is activated automatically. Simply
Press the control knob to insert the accented start writing.
character. To close the accented characters
without selecting a character, press and hold Overview of symbolsin the speller
the control knob again, or select and confirm The symbolsin the letter/number speller are ex-
a6] (7). Select and confirm an accented charac- plained in the following table:
ter.
— Deleting characters: select and confirm 1 @

and press the control button. To delete all char-
172
Symbol/Description Description
LIST] orl Switches to the resultslist.
© |O|O
Input field Displays the current input.
Displays a list with suggestions based on the letters already en-
Resultslist
tered.
t
Switches from lower case to upper case letters or from upper case to
©
lower case letters.
&
Opens additional speller options, for example Close speller and
© |O|O| ©
Clear inputfield.
18? Character sets and special characters
aou Displays accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6).
TSSABS Switches from letter to number input or from number to letter in-
put.
Adds a space in the input field.

|e (RO)
—
Character selection Highlights the selected character.
A Inserts the suggested word* when you push the control knob up.
ea) Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

®
Opening free text search

G) Tips
> Select: [MENU] button > desired menu item
Accented charactersare not available for ev-
(such as Telephone).
ery letter.
> Keep turning the control knob tothe left until
the free text search input field @ appears, or
Free text search > Push the control knob up to open the input
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
field @.
The handwriting recognition for the MMI touch
ae
L control pad* is automatically activated. Simply
bert, Simon start writing.
Een Eta
Cmca Free text search for an entry
Oe)
CC > Enter one or more search terms in anyorder in-
to the input field. The individual search terms
Fig. 172 Example: free text search on telephone
must be separated by spaces when entering.
An input suggestion to completethe entry* @) is

Using the free text search, you can select the or- shown depending on the input. Additional entries
der that the search terms are entered in the input that contain the entered search term arelisted In
field. the resultslist @).
Free text search is available in the Vehicle*, Ra- If the desired term is still not displayed, enter
dio*, Media*, Telephone*, Navigation* and Audi additional letters until it is displayed.
8V2012721B)
connect* menus.
It is often enough just to enter the first letters of
the search term in order for it to display in the
173
resultslist. For example, in the Telephone* Selecting an entry from the results list
menu, write the initials of the contact being
Requirement: at least one entry mustbe dis-
searched, separated by a space. played in the resultslist @).
Selecting the input suggestion to complete > MMI touch input*: turn the control knob to the
the entry right. Select and confirm an entry from the list.
Requirement: an input suggestion to complete > Speller input: select and confirm [LIST] @
the entry* @) mustbe displayed. = page 172, fig. 171, or
> Push the control knob down. Select and con-
> MMI touch input*: press the control knob.
firm an entry from the list.
Menus and Symbols
OX etla ee Temata Leo)

eaenana
BICC
_ Basteig
Qe i] os
Fig. 173 Diagram: menus and symbols
® Selected text Selected function
@ TMC TMC/online traffic information reception > page 225
Displays information about the media source that is currently se-
lected or a situation (such as an incoming call). Depending on vehi-
Entertainment sliding
cle equipment, operation might also be possible using the open en-
©
menu
tertainmentsliding menu (such as selecting a radio station or ac-
cepting a call) > page 170.
Jukebox* importing proc-
Copy audio/video files to the Jukebox > page 235
® ess
® Repeat track The track currently playing is repeated. > page 245
All files on the playlist are played in random order > page 245,
huffl
© shuttle Shuffle
® Anew Access information by pressing the control knob when the selected
text is active
Telephone signal
Telephone signal strength
strength bars
Exclamation point on the
Indicates missed calls
©
telephone
174
Reception strength of the active data connection or
Data connection signal
PIN: Enter PIN (SIM)
©
strength bars*
PUK: enter the PUK
Network coverage for the active data connection > page 208
2G: GSM network
©
eeSEITTE, 3G: UMTS network

LTE*: LTE network
Mute The audio source is muted > page 257
© |O| © |®| © |®
Roaming Outside the mobile network for the connected cell phone or the in-
serted SIM card
Importing process Import/update the contacts in the directory or the call lists
Select and confirm context-dependent functions as well as settings
Options menu*
within a menu item
Bluetooth* Bluetooth device connected > page 236 or > page 188
Indicates a long list.
Scroll bars
Movewithin lists by turning the control knob.
Information that can be changed using the letter/number speller
Input field
® |@O|@| ©
PME NE = page 172 or the MMI touch* > page 168.

MMI touch* Operation using the MMI touch control pad is possible
Knob Setting for the selected function by turning the control knob
: : : F :
Check boxes You can switch certain functions on [y or off by pressing the con
trol knob.
Settings for the selected function that are accessed by pressing the
Selection list
®
control knob
8V2012721B)
175
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering Additional settings

wheel
— Select: right control button > desired entry.
Introduction
Depending on the function selected, the follow-
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
ing additional settings may be possible:
In the driver information system display, you can
— Show "NowPlaying"screen: see > page 232.
control numerous Infotainment functions using
the multifunction steering wheel plus* > page 17
or the multifunction steering wheel* > page 20. Media
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and
You can control additional Infotainment func- media
tions using the MMI control panel > page 165 in
Requirement: a media drive must contain audio/
the Infotainment system display.
video files > page 234 and the radio/media tab
mustbe displayed.
Z\WARNING
> Press either the =lbutton or the left control
Direct your full attention to driving. As the
button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip-
driver, you have complete responsibility for
ment.
safety in traffic. Only use the functions in such
a way that you always maintain complete con- Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
trol over your vehiclein all traffic situations. functions maybe available in the driver informa-
tion system.
Radio — Selecting a media source: select and confirm a
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and ra-
dio
source such as the “SD card”.
— Playing an audio/videofile: select and confirm
Requirement: radio mode mustbe started a track/file.
=> page 228 and the radio/media tab mustbe dis- — Pausing/resuming playback: pressthe right
played. thumbwheel @) > page19,fig. 11. To resume
> Press either the =Ibutton or the left control playback, press the right thumbwheel again.
button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip- Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
ment. — Switching to radio: select and confirm a fre-
quency band (such as FM).
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
functions maybe available in the driver informa-
— Switching to the radio: select and confirm
tion system.
Switch to radio.
— Selecting the frequency band: select and con- — Opening additional track information: select:
firm a frequency band. right control button > Show "NowPlaying"
— Selecting a station from the presetslist*: se- screen. For additional information, see
lect: Presets > the desired radio station. => page 244.
— Selecting a station from the station list*: se-
lect and confirm a radio station. @ Tips
— Selecting a station from the presetslist: se- — The media drives do notplay files that are
lect: Presets > the desired radio station. protected by DRM and thatareidentified
— Opening a media source: select and confirm To with the symbol ff.
media. — Please note that within a media source in
the driver information system, only playlists
that were selected through the MMI control
panel can be played > page 242.
176
— Alwayspay attention to the Infotainment Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster
system display. Additional operation — Making an additional phone call: select Hold >
through the MMI control panel may be nec- button > Directory or Call list > an entry in
essary, depending on the selected function. the list.
— Accepting an incoming call when there is an
active call and a call on hold: select and con-
Telephone
firm Replace. The active call is replaced with
Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and
telephone the incoming call.
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to
— Making an additional phone call: select: Hold
the MMI > page 188 and the telephone tab must
call > left control button > Directory or Call list
be displayed.
>anentry.
> Press either the [=lbutton or the left control — Accepting an incoming call when there is an
button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip- active call and a call on hold: select and con-
ment. firm Answer. The active call is replaced with the
incoming call.
functions maybe available in the driver informa- Additional functions include:
tion system.
Mute: if you select and confirm this function, the
— Accessing a contact: select and confirm Call other person on the phone cannot hear you. You
list / Favorites / Directory. Select and confirm a will still be able to hear the other person.
contact.
Holding/resuminga call: you can place the exist-
— Directory contacts: the driver information sys- ing call on hold and resume it again.
tem only displays directory contacts that have a
phone number stored. If several phone num- Swap call: you can alternate between two phone
bers are stored with a contact, the list of stored calls at the same time. One ofthe calls will be on
numbersis displayed first when the entry is se- hold. Selecting End call will end the active phone
lected. For more information about the dis- call. A call that was placed on hold stays on hold
played symbols,refer to > page 198. and can be taken off hold with Resume held call.
— Recentcalls: the recent calls list contains all in- Conferencecall: a call on hold and up tofive ac-
coming, outgoing and missed calls. tive parties (depending on the cell phone service
— Caller information*: the name, phone number provider) can be added to a conferencecall. To
or Unknownappearsin the driver information make an additional call, put all participants in
system display depending on whether the caller the current conferencecall on hold using Hold
has been stored in the directory and if the conference. By pressing the left control button,
phone number has been transmitted. you can makeadditional calls from the directory
Functions during an incomingcall or the call list. Resume conferencetakes all par-
ticipants off hold.
— Accepting a call: press the left thumbwheel
when thereis an incoming call. @) Tips
— Declining a call: select and confirm Decline
— The phone functions can only be controlled
when thereis an incoming call.
with the multifunction steering wheel if the
— Ending a phone call: select and confirm End phone equipment was installed at the fac-
call. tory.
Functions during a phone call — The telephone functions depend on the cell
8V2012721B)
phone and whether they are supported by

your cell phone service provider or not.
177
— The Call waiting function must be activated — Canceling active route guidance: select: right
in your cell phone and in the MMI in order to control button > Cancel route guidance.
be alerted when thereis an incoming call
Additional settings
during an active call. The call options de-
pend on the cell phone and service provider.
You can obtain more information from your — Select: right control button > desired entry.
cell phone service provider. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
function selected, the following additional set-
Navigation tings may be possible:
oy Tela R em LS — Map display > page 222.

Appliesto: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and — Map colors > page 222.
navigation system
— Map orientation > page 222.
Requirement: the navigation tab mustbe dis- — Automatic zoom > page 223.
played.
If you have not started route guidance, a com- Navigation view with route guidance
tate)
pass will display in the driver information sys-
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual
tem. The map is displayed in the Audi virtual cockpit
cockpit*.
> Press either the =lbutton or the left control

button > page 18, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.

functions maybe available in the driver informa-
tion system.
— Accessing last destinations: select and confirm Fig. 174 Diagram: standard map when route guidanceis
active (Audi virtual cockpit)
Last destinations > the desired destination.
— Accessing favorites*: select and confirm Favor-
Requirement: a destination must be entered
ites > the desired destination.
= page 211, route guidance mustbe started and
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster the navigation tab must be displayed.
— Showing navigation when route guidanceis
active: select and confirm Route guidance. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the se-
lected view > page 18, the following information
— Showing the compass when route guidanceis
inactive: select and confirm Compass. will be displayed in the driver information sys-
tem:
— Starting route guidance to the stored home
address: if necessary,first select and confirm @ Map content (such as points of interest or
Cancel route guidance and then Favorites > traffic information)
Home address.
@ Currentvehicle position (@)
— Canceling active route guidance: select and
confirm Cancel route guidance. @)A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the
— Starting route guidance to the stored home shorter the distance is until the turn. If thereis
address: if necessary,first select and confirm not an upcoming turn, the distance to the desti-
Cancel route guidance and then Favorites > nation/stopover and the calculated arrival time is
Home address. displayed in the right speedometer.
178
@ Name of the street where you are currently The following functions are also available when
driving route guidance is active:
— Repeating the last voice guidance message:

SecAU ALM eM i CeETia-eiTaece) press the |.4] button.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and analog instru-
— Adjusting the voice guidance volume: turn the
ment cluster
right thumbwheel up or down while a voice
guidance message is playing.
RAH-7513
asta
(1)5 300yrd Z\ WARNING
The route calculated by the navigation system
is a recommendation for reaching your desti-
nation. Obeytraffic lights, stopping restric-
tions, one-waystreets, lane change restric-
tions, etc.
@) Tips
— Also see the chapter > page8, Controls at a
RAH-7514)
glance.
— An exclamation point “!” in front of the
street name indicates that the information
about this street or this section of the route
is not complete in the navigation data con-
tained in the MMI. Obeytraffic laws in one-
way streets and pedestrian zones.
Fig. 176 Example: turning maneuverin the instrument.

cluster
Requirement: a destination must be entered

= page 211, route guidance mustbe started and
the navigation tab mustbe displayed.
Depending on vehicle equipment,the following

information may be shown in the driver informa-
tion system.
Distance to the next maneuver

®©O0O
Distance to the destination or stopover

Calculated arrival time
Name of the current expressway, highway or
street. If the O symbol is displayed in front
of the street name, you should turn onto the
street shown.
Direction arrow for the upcoming maneuver
CO®@
Lane recommendation
8V2012721B)
A bar graph appears when a direction arrowis

displayed. The fewer the bars that are shown,
the shorter the distance is until the turn.
179
Voice recognition system
GLOEVAL COMMANDS
+ Telephone + Favorites
+ Audi connect * Call (XY)
* Navigation * Enter number
* Directory * Redial
* Radio * Read new text message
+ Media + Navigate to (XY)
+ Sound + Enter address/destination
* Help + Online destinations
+ Help Speech dialog system * Cancel route guidance
* Help Telephone * Map
* Help Audi connect + Line (XY)
* Help Navigation * Next page / previous page
* Help Map * Cancel
* Help Radio * No, I meant(XY)
* Help Media * Correction
TELEPHONE a
+ Enter number Call list .
+ Delete number / correction Redial TEL
+ Directory Call mailbox
* Call (XY) Enter PIN / delete PIN
+ business/ private / land line / mobile Telephone favorites
NAVIGATION
+ Navigate to (XY) + Block route for (XY) miles / Block
+ Start / cancel route guidance the next section
+ Directory * Routelist
+ Last destinations * Calculate alternative routes
+ Navigation favorites * Online destinations
+ Drive home * Special destination
+ Enter address
+ Enter country / town/ street / state
+ Exclude route / Exclude route for (XY) km /m
MAP.
+ Map
* Day map / Night map
* 2D driving position map / 2D north position map / 3D map / Destination map / Overview map
AUDI CONNECT L
* Audi connect Flight information
* Travel information / Parking information + City events
* Fuel prices * Online news
* Weather * Twitter
+ Radio presets Jukebox 6}

FM CD/DVD MEDIA
* FM/AM SIRIUS XM SD card 1/SD card 2
+ Station (XY) / Frequency(XY) Audi music interface / iPod / USB / Bluetooth /
* Traffic announcementon / off Wi-Fi / Medium (XY)
Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres/
Tracks / Playlists / Videos
Folder up
Random playback on / off
Fig. 177 Command overview
180
Voice recognition system Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free mi-
crophone, which is in the roof headliner near the
Operating front interior lights.
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
Only use the system from the driver's seat be-
You can operate many Infotainment functions cause the hands-free microphone is directed to-
conveniently by speaking. ward that seat.
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be Additional settings
switched on. A system language supported by
See > page 258.
the voice recognition system mustbe set. There
must be no phone calls in progress and the park-
ing aid must not be active.
ZA WARNING
— Direct your full attention to driving. As the
> Switching on: press the [%] button @
driver, you have complete responsibility for
> page 19, fig. 11 or @) > page20, fig. 13
safetyin traffic. Only use the functions in
briefly on the multifunction steering wheel and
such a way that you always maintain com-
say the desired command after the Beep.
plete control over your vehiclein all traffic
> Switching off: press and hold the |] button.
situations.
Or: press the [5] button.
— Do not use the voice recognition system in
> Pausing: say the command Pause. To resume,
emergencies because your voice may change
press the |] button.
in stressful situations. The system may take
> Correcting: say the command Correction.
longer to dial the number or may not be
Input assistance ableto dial it at all. Dial the emergency
number manually.
The system guides you through the input with
visual and audio feedback.
G) Tips
— Visual input assistance: after switching on — The dialog pauses when thereis an incom-
voice recognition, a display with a selection of ing phone call and will continue if you ig-
possible commands appears. This command norethe call. The dialog ends if you answer
display can be switched on or off. Select: the call.
MENU] button > Settings > left control button — There are no voice guidance* prompts when
> MMI settings > Speech dialog system. a dialogis active.
— Audio input assistance: to have the possible — You can select an item in the list using ei-
commands read, turn the voice recognition sys- ther the voice recognition system or the
tem on and say Help. control knob.
For the system to understand you:
Command overview
Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume.
Speak louder when driving faster. information
Emphasize the words in the commands evenly
and do notleave long pauses. The following overviews describe the commands
that can be used to operate the MMI using the
Close the doors, the windows,and the sunroof*
voice recognition system.
to reduce background noise. Make sure that pas-
sengers are not speaking when you are giving a Alternative commands are separated using a “/”,
voice command. for example say: Telephone / (or) Navigation /
8V2012721B)
(or) Radio.
181
Sequences of commands used to perform an aces. For a Business address, you can also say busi-
tion are identified with a acm
“> , for examplesay: ness, work,office or at the office.
Enter address > (then) Enter country/state.
The majority shown are main commands. This

system also recognizes synonyms in certain cas-
Commands
Global commands
You can always use the global commands,re-

gardless of the menu selected.
Function Say:
Opening a menu Telephone/ Directory / Navigation / Radio / Media / Audi con-
nect* / Car / Tone
Having the possible commands Help / Help speech dialog system / Help Telephone /
read aloud Help Navigation / Help Map / Help Radio / Help Media / Help
Audi connect*
Telephone functions Call (XY), for example, Call "John Smith" /
Enter number / Redial / Directory / Read out new text mes-
sage / Read out new e-mail
Navigation functions* Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to (XY), for example Navigate to
John Smith /
Enter address / Cancel route guidance / Map / Online destina-
tions* / Online destination (XY)*
Accessing favorites Favorites > follow the system prompts
Selecting an entry from list Line (XY)
Scrolling through a list Next page / Previous page
Correcting the command given Correction
Switching the voice recognition sys- Cancel
tem off
Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and telephone
Requirement: A cell phone must be connected to You can say the following commands depending
the MMI > page 189 and the Telephone menu on the selected menu item:
must be open > table on page 182.
Function Say:
Calling a contact from the directory Call (XY), for example Call "John Smith"
Selecting a specific contact number Call (XY) business/ private / landline / cell phone,
for example, Call "John Smith" private
Selecting a phone number with an Call / Call work / Call private / Call landline / Call cell phone
address card open work
182
Function Say:
Calling a contact from your favor- Telephonefavorites > after being prompted, say the desired
ites list contact > Dial
Displaying the call list Call list
Calling the last number dialed Redial
Dialing a phone number Enter number > when prompted, say the telephone numberin
groupsofindividual numbers, for example. 888 555 1212 > Di-
al
Correcting the phone number that Correction / Delete number
was entered
Showing contact information Directory > say the desired contact when prompted,
for example John Smith
Listening to messages Call voicemail
Entering the PIN (SIM) Enter PIN > when prompted, say the PINin individual numbers
> Save
Correcting the PIN entry Correction / Delete PIN
Correcting data input No I meant(XY)
Closing the full-screen command Close
list
— Please note that commands can only begiv-

@) Tips
en for the primary phone* > page 189.
— Contacts in the directory can selected using — For more information on supported mobile
the full name (“first name last name” and devices, visit www.audi.com/bluetooth or
“last name, first name”) as well as with only contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
the first or last name. This appliesto cell ized Audi Service Facility.
phonesthat transmit namesseparated into
first and last names.
Audi connect Infotainment

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Infotainment
Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect

Infotainment must be met > page 203.
Function Say:
Accessing Audi connect Infotain- Audi connect > follow the system prompts
ment services
Audi connect Infotainment services Weather / Online news/ Fuel prices / Parking information /
Travel information / Twitter / Traffic information
Search areas for Audi connect Info- Near destination / Nearby / In a new city
tainment services
Correcting data input No I meant(XY) >
8V2012721B)
183
@ Tips
Always read the chapter > page 203, Audi
connect.
eremele elite elTalat 9)

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect Infotainment
Requirement: a cell phone with an active MAP

(Message Access Profile) must be connected to
the MMI > page 195.
Function Say:
Text editing commands Read out / Add / Delete / Record everything again / Replace
with (XY) / Add recipient / Send
Reading out a new message Read out new text message / Read out new e-mail
Reading a message Read out text message / Read out e-mail
Replying to the open text message Reply
Forwarding the open text message Forward > Add recipient / Insert template / Send
Correcting data input No I meant (XY)
@) Tips contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-

ized Audi Service Facility.
— For more information on supported mobile — Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
devices, visit www.audi.com/bluetooth or connect.
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and navigation system
Requirement: the Navigation menu must be You can say the following commands for entering
open > table on page 182. a destination depending on the selected menu
item:
Function Say:
Opening the list of previous naviga- |Last destinations
tion destinations
Accessing favorites Navigation favorites
Selecting the home address Home addressor Drive home
Entering an address with guidance Enter address > follow the system prompts
from the system
Individual commands for entering a Enter country/state / Enter city / Enter ZIP code / Enter
destination street / Enter house number
Making a correction while entering a Correction
destination
Navigating to a contact Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to contact, for example Drive me
to "John Smith"
Navigating to a specific address for Navigate to contact (XY) business/ private,
a contact for example “Navigate to John Smith private”
184
Function Say:
Navigating to favorites Navigation favorites > Line (XY) / Line contents > Start route
guidance when prompted
Starting route guidance with an ad- Navigate / Navigate to private address / Navigate to business
dress card open address
Entering a new destination/stop- Enter address > enter the desired address when prompted >
over when route guidance is active confirm the new destination/stopoverif prompted
Starting route guidance after enter- Start route guidance
ing a destination
Canceling current route guidance Cancel route guidance
Calculating alternative routes Calculate alternative routes
Entering a point of interest by se- Point of interest > Change search area > category or subcate-
lecting a search area with guidance gory when prompted,for example “restaurant”
from the system
Destination input categories Audi Service / Train station / Airport / Hotel / Hospital / Park-
ing area / Rest area / Restaurant/ Gas station etc.
Search areas for entering points of Nearby / Along the route / Near destination / Near stopover /
interest In newcity / In a new state/country
Entering an online destination* Online destination (XY), for example “Online destination
"Lakeview Hotel"”
list
Requirement: you must be in the Navigation or

Map menu. You can say the following commands
for more settings in Navigation:
Function Say:
General map options Map / Day map / Night map / Automatically change map color
Map type 2D heading-up map / 2D north-up map / 3D map / Destina-
tion map / Overview map / Standard map*/ Satellite map*®
Showing the routelist Routelist
Showing the remaining distance/ Destination information
time when route guidance is active
Speed limit prompt Howfastcan I drive here?
Setting voice guidance for active Voice guidance on / Voice guidanceoff / Voice guidance short-
route guidance ened / Voice guidance complete / Voice guidancetraffic
Blocking a certain section on the Block route for (XY) meters/kilometers/yards/miles / Block
route next route / Avoid next section of route
a) AUDI AGprovidesaccessto services from third party providers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because that
depends on the third party provider. >
8V2012721B)
185
@) Tips in and which menu language you have se-

. — lected.
— Destinations may have to be spelled when — Always read the chapter > page 203, Audi
entered, depending on which region you are POnnecs
Requirement: the Radio must already be open. You can say the following commands depending
on the selected frequency band:
Function Say:
Selecting the frequency band FM* / SiriusXM* / FM/AM
Selecting a station from the station Channel (XY) / Frequency (XY)
list
Selecting a station from the presets Radio presets > Line (XY)
Setting the frequency Frequency (XY) / Frequency (XY) HD 1
list
Requirement: you must be in the Media menu. You can say the following commands depending
on the active media:
Function Say:
Selecting a source directly Jukebox* / CD / DVD / SD card 1/ SD card 2 / Audi music inter-
face* / iPhone* / USB* / Bluetooth* / Wi-Fi* / Medium (XY), for
example “John's player”
Selecting audio/video*files inthe Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists /
Jukebox* Videos
Selecting audio files on an iPod Artists / Albums / Genres/ Tracks/ Playlists / Composers /
(source: Audi music interface*) Podcasts / Audio books
Navigating within a folder struc- Folder up / Line (XY)
ture/list
Selecting shuffle Shuffle on / Shuffle off
Correcting data input No I meant (XY)
list
External voice operation The ignition and the MMI mustbe switched on.
Appliesto: vehicles with voice recognition system and exter-
: No phone call is in progress.
nal voice operation
The parking aid as well as the Audi voice recogni-
Requirement:
q tion system mustnot be active.
186
A mobile device must be connected to the MMI

with the Handsfree profile > page 188.
The mobile device being connected must have

voice control that can be controlled externally.
> Switching on: press and hold the [2] button on

the multifunction steering wheel* and say the
desired command after the external speech dia-
log begins.
> Continuing/resuming the dialog: the system
remains ready to use for a short time after end-
ing the dialog. You can start a new external dia-
log during this time. Press the [2] button if
needed, and say a new command. Or: select
and confirm Resume on the MMI control unit.
> Switching off: press and hold the [2] button.
Or: select and confirm Cancel on the MMI con-
trol unit.
@ Tips
— There are no voice guidance” prompts when
a dialog is active.
— This function depends on the cell phone
used. You can obtain moreinformation from
your mobile device service provider or from
your mobile device user guide.
— AUDI AGsimply provides access to control
your mobile device with voice operation and
does not assume anyresponsibility for the
content and commands within the external
voice control.
8V2012721B)
187
Telephone
Telephone be present in the air. This also applies to all

other locations where you would normally
Introduction turn your vehicle engine off.
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
— The demands oftraffic require your full at-
To make phone calls in your vehicle using the tention. Always read the chapter
MMI, connect your cell phone to the MMI via => page 165,Traffic safety information.
Bluetooth.
@) Note
Handsfree
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
After you have connected your mobile device to General information on page 203.
the MMI via Bluetooth, you can use the handsfree
system and operate telephone functions through G) Tips
your MMI. You can makecalls using the antenna
— The Bluetooth connection range is limited
on your mobile device.
to inside the vehicle. It can also be affected
With the Audi phone box’, calls are made using by local conditions and interference with
the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the ex- other devices.
ternal antenna helps when thereis a low signal —To learn which Bluetooth connections and
and also provides better reception quality which of the functions in your mobile device
=>page 191. are supported, check with your mobile de-
vice service provider or the database for mo-
ZA\ WARNING bile devices at www.audiusa.com/
— Medical experts warn that mobile devices bluetooth.
can interfere with the function of pacemak-
ers. Always maintain a minimum distance of Setup
about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mo-
Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth
bile device antennas and the pacemaker.
— Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket
directly over the pacemaker when the MyPhone
phone is switched on. Does this PIN match the one on your
— Switch the mobile device off immediately Bluetooth device? PIN: 967536
if you suspectit may be interfering with

the pacemaker.
— Do not use the voice recognition system*
= page 181 in emergencies because your
voice may change in stressful situations. The
Fig. 178 Displaying the PIN forenteringin the cell phone
system may take longer to dial the number
or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the Requirement
emergency number manually.
The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition
— Switch your mobile device off in areas where
must be switched on.
there is a risk of an explosion. These loca-
tions are not always clearly marked. This The Bluetooth settings must be open on your
mayinclude gas stations, fuel and chemical mobile device during the connection setup.
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo-
The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI
cations where fuel vapors (such as propane
= page 256 and mobile device must be switched
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings),
on.
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti-
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
188
Telephone
The mobile device that will be connected must

C@) Note
not be connected to any other Bluetooth device.
The MMI must not be connected to a mobile de- General information on page 203.
vice.
G@) Tips
Connecting a mobile device
— Making phone calls through the MMI is only
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > Connect
possible using the Handsfree Bluetooth pro-
mobile device > Find new devices > Next. The
file.
available Bluetooth devices are shown in the In-
— You can apply additional settings to con-
fotainment system display, or
nected mobile devices using the Connection
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control
manager > page 254.
button > MMI settings > Connection manager
— You can also search for the MMI on your mo-
=> page 254.
bile device using the Bluetooth device
> Select and confirm the desired cell phone from
search.
the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
> The MMI generatesa PIN for the connection — You only haveto pair your device one time.
Bluetooth devices that are already paired
setup > fig. 178.
>» Select and confirm Yes. automatically connect to the MMI when the
Bluetooth function is switched on, when
> Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell
phone, or
they are within range, and when the ignition
is switched on. The last connected mobile
> when the PIN is displayed on your cell phone,
device is given first priority.
confirm the PIN on your cell phone and in the
MMI. The time allowed for entering the PIN is — Authorizing the MMI connection on your
limited to approximately 30 seconds. mobile device will make it possible to con-
» Pay attention to any additional system prompts nect automatically.
displayed on your cell phone, for exampleif the — Pay attention to any system promptsdis-
system should connect automatically in the fu- played on your cell phone, for exampleif
ture. Depending on the cell phone, you may the system should connect automatically in
have to confirm downloading the directory sep- the future. Depending on the cell phone,
arately. you mayalso need to download the directo-
ry and confirm access to your text messages
After connecting successfully separately.
After connecting successfully, information about — When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
the connected profiles will appear. You can also connection to the mobile device will auto-
change the profiles later: matically disconnect. Depending on your
mobile device, phone calls in progress may
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control be automatically redirected from the MMI
button > MMI settings > Connection manager to your mobile device so that you can con-
=> page 254.
tinue the call on your phone.
In addition, the cell phone contacts are automat- — You can obtain more information from your
ically loaded in the MMI directory. This process mobile device service provider or from your
can take several minutes, depending on the num- mobile device user guide. For information
ber of contacts. on using the telephone, visit www.audiusa.
com/bluetooth or contact an authorized Au-
You can also make your connected cell phone the
di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
default phone by selecting Set as default tele-
— Applies to: vehicles without secondary
8V2012721B)
phone in the Connection manager > page 256.

phone: Several cell phones can be paired to >
189
Telephone
the MMI, but only one cell phone can be ac- ondary phone, since the directory from the pri-
tively connected to the MMI. mary phone is always displayed.
— Applies to: vehicles without secondary
Switching the primary and secondary phone
phone: If a Bluetooth device is already con-
nected to the MMI,it will be disconnected Requirement: a primary phone and a secondary
when another device connects to the MMI. phone must be connected.
Select: [MENU] button > Telephone> right con-

Operating two mobile devices through the trol button > Switch primary and second. phone.
ih
G) Tips
You can connect twocell phones to the MMI, for
example your business cell phone as the primary — Please note that only the directory from the
phone and your private cell phone as the secon- primary phone is always displayed.
dary phone. You can be reached in your vehicle — You can see if a cell phone is connected as
through both cell phones. the primary phone or secondary phone in
the Connection manager > page 254.
The first connected cell phone is displayed as the
— The device name of the connected primary
primary phone in the MMI. The second cell phone
phone is shown in the Telephone menu
is connected as the secondary phone.
(such as myPhone).
The directory from the connected primary phone — If the primary phone does not connect auto-
will always be displayed. If you would like to use matically to the MMI when the ignition is
the directory from the secondary phone, you switched on, for example because it is out
must switch the primary and secondary phone of the vehicle range or the Bluetooth func-
=> page 190. tion is switched off, then a previously paired
secondary phone is automatically connected
Connecting a cell phone as the primary
as the primary phone.
phone
— You can send and receive messages on your
Connect your cell phone to the MMI via Blue- primary phone as well as on your secondary
tooth. The first connected cell phone is displayed phone > page 192,fig. 180. You do not
as the Primary phone in the MMI. need to switch your primary phone and sec-
See > page 188, Connecting a cell phone using ondary phone for this.
Bluetooth. — You can also makeyour connectedcell
phone the default phone byselecting Set as
Connecting a cell phone as the secondary default telephone in the Connection man-
phone
ager > page 256.
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to
the MMI as the primary phone.
Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right con-

trol button > Connect secondary telephone.
See > page 188, Connecting a cell phone using

Bluetooth.
Example: you have connected your business cell

phone to the MMI as the primary phone and your
private cell phone as the secondary phone. To be
able to call contacts from your private cell phone
directory, you must switch the primary and sec-
190
Telephone
Using the Audi phone an accident. Store objects securely while

box driving.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box —The mobile device may become hotduring
wireless charging. Pay attention to the tem-
RAH-8906|
perature of your mobile device and becare-
ful when removing it from the Audi phone
box.
— An alternating magnetic field is used for
wireless charging. Maintain a minimum dis-
tance of approximately 2.4 in (6 cm) to the
Audi phone box charging plate. The thresh-
olds for prolonged exposureat this distance
comply with ICNIRP1998. Therefore, inter-
Fig. 179 Storage compartmentunder the center armrest: actions such as irritation of sensory organs,
Audi phone box with connections
malfunctions of active implants (such as
pacemakers, infusion pumps,or neurosti-
You can charge your mobile device battery using
mulators) or effects on passive implants
the Audi phone box. You can makecalls through
(such as prosthetic limbs)is highly unlikely.
the exterior antenna* on the vehicle. Using the
If you have an implant, consult a medical
external antenna* helps when thereis a low sig-
specialist if you have any questions.
nal and also provides better reception quality.
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected @) Note

through Bluetooth > page 188. Applicable to U.S.A.
The options beloware available: Operation of the Audi phone boxis subject to
— Connecting to the external vehicle antenna*: the following requirements ofthe Federal
Lay the cell phone with the display facing up on Communications Commission:
the cell phone symbol in the Audi phone box — This is a CONSUMER device.
=> fig. 179. Make sure there are no objects be- — BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
tween the Audi phone box and the mobile de- VICE with your wireless provider and have
vice. your provider’s consent. Most wireless pro-
— Charge cell phone wirelessly: Place a Qi-capa- viders consent to the use of signal boosters.
ble cell phone centered on the @ symbol in Some providers may not consent to the use
the Audi phone box with the display facing up of this device on their network. If you are
=> fig. 179. The cell phone will charge. unsure, contact your service provider.
— Charge a cell phone using the USB adapter: — You MUSToperatethis device with approved
Connect your cell phone to the Audi music in- antennas and cables as specified by the
terface using a USB adapter (2). manufacturer. Antennas MUSTbeinstalled
at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person.
You can charge your mobile device using specific
— You MUSTcease operating this device im-
USB adapters > page 239, fig. 209.
mediately if requested by the FCC or a li-
ZA WARNING censed wireless service provider.

— WARNING: E911 location information may
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- not be provided or may be inaccurate for
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- calls served by using this device.
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of
8V2012721B)
D_ The Qi standard makes it possible to charge your mobile

device wirelessly.
191
Telephone
— Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Ac-

@) Note
cessories. Audi has verified their reliability,
Applicable to Canada
safety, and suitability.
In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer, — You can purchase a USB adapter from an au-
such as an Audi Phone Box,is subject to the thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
following requirementsof the Innovation, Service Facility, or at specialty stores.
Science and Economic Development Canada — If you place your remote control key togeth-
(ISED): er with your mobile device in the Audi phone
— This is a CONSUMER device. box, it may cause your mobile device to stop
— BEFORE USE, you MUST meetall require- charging if wireless charging is active.
mentsset out in CPC-2-1-05.
— You MUSToperate this device with approved
Using the telephone
antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOTbe in- Opening the telephone
stalled within 20 cm of any person. Applies to: vehicles with telephone
— You MUSTcease operating this device im-

mediately if requested by ISED or a licensed
wireless service provider.
(2 Sd Favorites
— WARNING: £911 location information may
©—r Directory
not be provided or maybe inaccurate for
calls served by using this device. EET number
Va message (mobile device)

G) Tips
— The Audi phone boxis not availablein all Fig. 180 Example: telephone functions in selection menu
countries. For additional information, con-
RAH-8725|
tact an authorized Audi dealership. am
— Placing the mobile device in a bag or protec- LR otaOna)
tive sleeve inside the Audi phone box can in- SB Text message (Additional phone)
terfere with the connection to the external (6a
Q—= E-mail (MyPhone)
antenna”*.
— Metallic objects in the Audi phone box block yl
the wireless charging of your mobile device
and calls made using the exterior antenna”*. Fig. 181 Example: additional telephone functions in selec-
tion menu
— The charging time and temperature will vary
depending on the mobile device being used. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
— Your mobile device can only be charged in to the MMI > page 188.
the Audi phone box when the ignition is
switched on. > Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left con-
—To reduce the risk of malfunctions, make trol button.
sure the mobile device is positioned correct-
The following phone functions are available
ly in the Audi phone box. > fig. 180/> fig. 181:
— The maximum charging output is 5 watts.
©) Callliste « cscs se exces a oem 9 2 mee 193
— Strong transmission quality cannot be guar-
@) Presets sacs sv sews ye wren ce geen 195
anteed if more than one mobile deviceis in
the box. @® Directory .............020- ease 198
— Only one mobile device at a time can be @ Selectinumber we. os eve si eens 193
charged wirelessly in the Audi phone box. © Text message (MyPhone)*/Text
message (secondary phone)* ..... 195>
192
Telephone
© E-mail (myPhone)*/E-mail (secon- — Edit phone no. beforecall: edit a phone num-
dary phone)* ...........0000 00 197 ber before dialing it. Select and confirm OK to
edit. press the left control button to return
The device name for your cell phone is displayed
without editing.
in the Telephone menu, for example text mes-
— Send text message: write a text message to
sage (myPhone) © fig. 181.
the selected contact.
— Deletecall list: select and confirm if you would
Dialing a phone number
like to Delete this entry or Deleteall entries.
— Store as favorite: store the selected contact as
(eT Talee a favorite.
— Showcontact details: see > page 199.
Please enter a telephone number.
— Connection manager: see > page 254.
€0123456789* #MBAB — Bluetooth settings*: See > page 256.
O800AUDISERVI — Online settings*: See > page 256.
— Wi-Fi settings*: See > page 208.
— Telephone settings: see > page 200.
Fig. 182 Number speller Favorites
UF Requirement: a phone number or contact must

be stored as a favorite > page 195.
£ Bates, Peter
Select and confirm a favorite in the favorites list.
@ Blake, Mary 11:45 AM
To we ea} Directory
& Green, Andrew rot
+170 ey ee4-03-18 Requirement: you must have at least one contact
stored in your cell phone.
Fig. 183 Dialing a phone number from the call list
Select and confirm a phone number from the di-
rectory > page 198.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left con-
trol button. Enter number
Call list — Entering a phone number as a sequence of
Requirement: the call list must contain a phone numbers: enter the number using the number
number.
speller > fig. 182.
— Entering the phone number as a sequence of
Turn the control knob to display the call list. letters: select and confirm |ABC| above the
Select and confirm the desired telephone number number speller. Enter a sequence of letters us-
from the recentcallslist. ing the letter speller, for example AUDISER-
VICE.
Call list symbols > fig. 183: — Dialing a phone number: select and confirm &,
@ Missed calls or push the control knob downward. Select and
@ Dialed numbers confirm OK.
@® Accepted calls — Deleting individual characters: select and con-
firm &l.
Select: a contact from the list > right control but-
— Deleting all characters entered at once: turn
ton.
the control knob with the character selection to
— Call: call the selected contact.
8V2012721B)
land press and hold the control knob, or se-

— Connect secondary telephone*/Switch primary
lect: right control button > Clear inputfield.
and second. phone”: see > page 190.
193
Telephone
Accepting or ending a call and answer the incoming call. If you select De-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone cline, the incoming call will be declined.
— Accepting an incoming call when there is an
— Accepting a call: select and confirm Answer.
active call and a call on hold: select Replace.
— Declining a call: select and confirm Decline.
The activecall is replaced with the incoming
— Muting the active call: select and confirm call.
Mute.
— Muting the incoming call: select and confirm
— Ending a phone call/cancel dialing: select and Mute.
confirm End call.
— Additional call: select: Find contact > Call list/
Caller information: the name, phone numberor Directory/Favorites > an entry from the list.
Unknownappearsin the Infotainment system
Mute: if you select and confirm this function, the
display depending on if the caller has been stored
other person on the phone cannothear you. You
in the directory and if the phone number has
will still be able to hear the other person. To turn
been transmitted. A picture mayalso be dis-
the microphone back on, select and confirm Un-
played, depending on whether you have assigned
mute.
a picture to a contactin your directory and if it
was transferred to your MMI. You can find out if Hold call/Resume heldcall: you can place the ex-
your mobile device supports this function from isting call on hold and resume it again. To resume
your mobile device network provider, your mobile the call, select and confirm the call you would
device owner's manual, or at www.audiusa.com/ like to resume.
bluetooth. Transfer call to mobile device*: select and con-
firm Transfer call to mobile device to transfer
G) Tips the existing call from the MMI to your cell phone.
— The radio or media playback is muted during
Switch to hands-free mode*: Requirement: you
a phone call.
must have a phone call in progress on your cell
— Missed calls are displayed with a symbol in
phone. Select and confirm Switch to hands-free
the status line of the Infotainment system
mode to transfer the call from your cell phone
display @) > page 174,fig. 173.
back to the MMI.
During a phone call Swap call: alternate between two phone calls
Applies to: vehicles with telephone while one of the calls is on hold. Selecting End
call will end the active phone call. A phone call
Requirement: there must be a call in progress. on hold can be resumed using the right control
> End call: you can end a phone call. button > Resume.
> Send tone sequence: you can enter tone se- Connection manager: see > page 254.
quences (DTMF)directly using the number
speller and send to the other person on the Telephonesettings: see > page 200.
call.
> Other call options: press the right control but-
(i) Tips
ton. — To be notified of an incoming call during a
phone call, the call waiting function in your
The following options maybe possible during a mobile device must be switched on when
call depending on the mobile device being used using the Handsfreeprofile.
and the type of connection: — You can obtain more information from your
— Answering an additional call: if there is an in- mobile device service provider or from your
coming call while another call is active, you can mobile device user guide.
select Answer to put the existing call on hold — When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
connection to the mobile device will >
194
Telephone
automatically disconnect. Depending on — Enter a name for the favorite or select a sug-
your mobile device, phone calls in progress gestion.
may be automatically redirected from the — Select and confirm Save.
MMI to your mobile device so that you can
continue the call on your phone. Renaming stored favorites
— The display of an incoming phone callin the — Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list.
Infotainment system display maystill be — Select the right control button > Rename favor-
visible for a few seconds after a call is an- ite.
swered or ignored depending on the cell . |
phone in use. Moving stored favorites
— Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list.

Making an emergencycall — Select the right control button > Movefavorite.
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone — Select and confirm the location of the selected
favorite.
trol button > Dial number > Enter emergency Deleting a stored favorite
call number (for example, 911) > OK.
— Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list.
— Select: right control button > Delete favorite >
AN WARNING Delete this entry or Delete all entries.
— Because your phone workswith radio sig-
nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un- Messages
der all circumstances. Do notrely on only
your phone when it comesto essential com- Metre (
munication (such as a medical emergency). Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)
— Alwaysfollow the instructions given by the
emergency personnel during an emergency Depending on the mobile device being used and
call and only end the call when they instruct the mobile network contract, you may be able to
you to do so. receive and send text messages using the MMI.
@ Tips Requirement: A cell phone must be connected to

P the MMI via Bluetooth MAP (Message AccessPro-
Emergency numbersare not the same every- file) > page 188.
where. Find out which emergency number is
used in your current location.
trol button > text message (myPhone)/text
message (secondary phone)*.
Favorites
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone Write new text message
Up to 50 contacts,in addition to the voicemail Select and confirm Write new text message.
number, can be stored in anyorder in the favor- — Using a template: select and confirm the de-
ites list sired template from the list.
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left con- — Writing your own text”: select and confirm Do
trol button. not use template. Enter text using the MMI
touch control pad* or the letter speller.
Storing an existing phone number as a
— Enter one or morerecipients.
favorite:
— Select and confirm Send.
8V2012721B)
— Select and confirm Call list/Directory.

— Select a contact or phone number from the list. Inbox
— Select: right control button > Store as favorite. Displays all received text messages.
195
Telephone
Sent — Create a text message.
Displays all sent text messages. — Select and confirm Store as template.
Outbox Resume last text message
Displays all text messages to be sent. The last edited text message can be resumed.
Drafts Reply*
Displays all text messages that have not yet been A reply can be sent for the selected message in
sent and stored text messages. the Inbox.
Deleted Forward
Displays all deleted text messages. The selected text message can be forwarded to a
different recipient.
@ Tips
Send again*
— Please note that you mayhaveto activate
The selected text message can beresent.
the receiving and sending of text messages
in your cell phone depending on the SIM Delete this text message*
card being used (for example, when using a
The selected text message can be deleted.
Multi-SIM). You can obtain more informa-
tion from your mobile device service provid- Read out!)
er or from your mobile device user guide.
You can have the MMI read an open text mes-
— For more information on supported mobile
sage.
devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth
or contact an authorized Audi dealer or au- Text messaging settings*
To display when a new text message is received,
— You need a mobile device with Message Ac- enable the Text message notifications. New text
cess Profile that also supports the sending messages are indicated with an envelope & in
function to be able to send text messages the Infotainment system display status line.
through the MMI.
Connection manager
Message options See > page 254.
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP) Bluetooth settings*
> Select: |TEL] button > left control button > text See > page 256.
message (myPhone)/text message (secondary
Online settings*
phone)* > Inbox/Sent/Outbox> right control
button. See > page 256.
The following options maybe available depend- Wi-Fi settings*

ing on the selected menu.
See > page 208.
Storing a text message as a template
Telephone settings
Ten text message templates are stored in the
See > page 200.
MMI. You can save up to 10 additional templates
of your own.
Notavailablein all languages.
196
Telephone
@) Tips @ Tips
Messagesthat are deleted in the MMI are also — For more information on supported mobile
deleted in the mobile device automatically. devices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth
or contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile —To ensure that your sent e-mails are re-
(MAP) ceived, connect your cell phone to the Wi-Fi
hotspot* in the vehicle so that the e-mail
Depending on the type of mobile device being
app on your cell phone continues to have In-
used, you maybe able to receive and send e-
ternet access. If you arestill not receiving e-
mails through the MMI.
mails even though you have a successful
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to connection, then contact your e-mail service
the MMI via Bluetooth MAP (Message Access Pro- provider or your cell phone service provider.
file) > page 188. You can find out if your mobile
device supports this function by checking your
Message options
mobile device owner's manual. Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message AccessProfile
(MAP)
trol button > e-mail (myPhone)/e-mail (secon- > Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left con-
dary phone)*. trol button > e-mail (myPhone)/e-mail (secon-
dary phone)* > Inbox/Sent/Outbox> right
Write new e-mail
control button.
Select and confirm Write new e-mail.
The following options maybe available depend-
— Using a template: select and confirm the de- ing on the selected menu.
sired template from the list.
— Writing your own text”: select and confirm Do Store as template
not use template. Enter text using the MMI Ten e-mail templates are stored in the MMI. You
touch control pad” or the letter speller. can save up to 10 additional templates of your
— Enter one or morerecipients. own.
— Select and confirm Send.

— Create an e-mail.
Inbox — Select and confirm Store as template.
All received e-mails are displayed. Resume last edited e-mail
Sent The last e-mail in progress can be resumed.
All sent e-mails are displayed. Reply*
Outbox A reply can be sent for the selected e-mail in the

Inbox.
All e-mails that will be sent are displayed.
Reply toall*
Drafts
A reply can be sent for the selected e-mail in the
All saved e-mails that have not been sent yet are
Inbox and it will be sent to all of the entered re-
displayed.
cipients.
@) Note Forward
8V2012721B)
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@® in The selected e-mail can be forwarded to a differ-
General information on page 203. ent recipient. >
197
Telephone
Delete this message* Requirement: a voicemail number mustbe stor-

The selected e-mail can be deleted.
ed.
— Dialing the voicemail number: select and con-
Read out) firm Voicemail.
You can have the MMI read an open e-mail.
Gi) Tips
E-mail settings*
— This service must be set up and activated in
To display when a new e-mail is received, activate advance bythe cell phone service provider.
the E-mail notifications. New e-mailsare indicat- You can obtain more information from your
ed with an envelope in the Infotainment sys- cell phone service provider.
tem display status line. — The voicemail number depends on the cell
phone service provider.
Connection manager
See > page 254. Directory
Bluetooth settings* oyster Rs LR14998
See > page 256. Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Online settings*
See > page 256.
Wi-Fi settings* 5S > Voicemail

Sean}
See > page 208. Laie ite
> Schmidt, Ralf
Telephone settings
See > page 200. Fig. 184 Directory
G) Tips After connecting the cell phone, the contacts in it

— Messages that are deleted in the MMI are are automatically imported into the MMI.
also automatically deleted in the connected Requirement: you must have at least one contact
cell phone. stored in your cell phone.
— You cannotread any messageswhile driv-
ing.
trol button > Directory.
Listening to voicemail — Calling a contact: select and confirm a contact

Applies to: vehicles with telephone from the directory. The phone numbersfor the
selected contact are displayed. To make the
call, select and confirm a phone number.
trol button. Select and confirm Call list/Direc-
— Free text search for a contact: see > page 173.
tory/Favorites > Voicemail.
Contacts are displayed in alphabetical order and
Requirement: there must be no voicemail num-
can be sorted byfirst or last name > page 201,
ber stored. Sort order.
— Entering the voicemail number: enter the de- The directory can be opened through the Tele-
sired number. Select and confirm OK. phone menu as well as through the Navigation*
menu.
198
Telephone
@ Tips Showing contact details*

— Additional information on free text searches
can be found under > page 173.
— Check for a possible request to synchronize ates)
on your cell phone. Requests to synchronize
the directory must be confirmed so that "8 0049841123456
@ 001701239873
your cell phone contacts can be loaded into
Pasa
the MMI. ho ue cualaX Tete eel
— The contact display in the MMI depends on
the mobile device being used. For morein-
Fig. 185 Diagram: showing contactdetails
formation on supported mobile devices,vis-
it www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact You maybe able to show contact details depend-
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au- ing on the vehicle equipment:
di Service Facility.
— Please note that only the directory from the > Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > left con-
trol button.
primary phone* is always displayed.
> Select and confirm Directory > a contact from
— The contacts from the mobile device may
the directory.
notbe transferred in alphabetical order. If
> Select: right control button > Show contact de-
there are too manyentries, contacts with
tails.
different first letters may be missing in the
MMI. — Calling: select and confirm the desired tele-
—The contacts in the local MMI memory are phone number.
alwaysvisible and can be accessed by other — Navigating: to start navigation, select and con-
users. firm the desired address. Select and confirm
Start route guidance.
cteaSet lee elie
Press the right control button to open additional
Appliesto: vehicles with telephone
options for the contact details.
— Add destination: To start navigation, select and
trol button > Directory.
confirm the desired address. Select and confirm
> To limit the search, enter the initials of the con-
Start route guidance.
tact being searched with each initial separated
— Store as favorite: See > page 195.
by a space in the input field. Enter additional
— Send text message”: You can send a text mes-
letters if necessary.
sage to the selected contact > page 195.
> Select and confirm a contact from the directory.
— Delete contact: The selected contact can be de-
The phone numbersfor the selected contact are
leted.
displayed.
> To make the call, select and confirm a phone
@) Tips
number.
— Contacts edited in the MMI directory cannot
G) Tips be automatically updated in the connected
cell phone. Audi recommends editing cell
— You can scroll through long lists quickly by
phone contactsdirectly in the cell phone.
turning the control knob quickly. The scroll-
— Only the contacts in the local MMI memory
ing speed depends on the number oflist en-
can be edited or deleted.
tries.
8V2012721B)
— Additional information on free text searches

can be found under > page 173.
199
Telephone
Importing and exporting contacts — There should be no other files or folders on

Applies to: vehicles with telephone the storage medium containing the contacts
to be imported.
Contacts in vCard format (.vcf) can be imported
into the directory or exported.
Additional settings
Requirement: an SD card mustbe inserted in one
of the SD card readers* > page 234 or a USB stor- Telephone settings
age device must be connected to the Audi music
interface* > page 239 or the requirements for > Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right con-
Audi connect Infotainment services* must be trol button > Telephone settings.
met > page 203.
Call options*
trol button > Directory. Call forwarding: you can switch the forwarding
> Select: right control button > Contact settings. of incoming calls to your voicemail or to another
phone number on and off. You can check if the
— Importing contacts from a storage device: se- function is activated or deactivated with Check
lect and confirm Import contacts > SD card status.
1/SD card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 >
Call waiting: you are alerted to an incoming call
desired contacts > Start import.
during a phone call when the function is switched
— Exporting contacts to a storage device: select
on [M. You can check if the function is activated or
and confirm Export contacts > SD card 1/SD
deactivated with Check status.
card 2 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired
contacts > Start export. Send own telephone number: sending your
— Selecting all contacts at once to import/ phone number with an outgoing call can be acti-
export: select and confirm Import contacts/Ex- vated and deactivated. With the Network-de-
port contacts > SD card 1/SD card 2 or USB de- pendentsetting, the setting listed in the con-
vice 1/USB device 2 > All > Start import/Start tract with the cell phone service provider is used.
export. The settings only apply to the Telephone menu in
the MMI. Please note that the settings on your
@ Tips mobile device will apply after disconnecting the
— Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi Bluetooth connection. You can check if the func-
connect. tion is activated or deactivated with Check sta-
tus.
— For additional information on the myAudi
account, visit my.audi.com. Ringtone and volumesettings!)
— The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
Using the Mute telephone function, you can
cal memoryof the directory.
switch the ringtone playback through the MMI
—A maximum of 1,000 contacts can be im-
speaker on and off. You can play the ringtones us-
ported. You can check the directory memory
ing the Ringtone function. Select and confirm an
capacity at any time > page 201.
entry from the list. For the Ringtone volume/
— Never save important data on memorycards
Message volume settings, see > page 258. The
or USB storage devices. Audi is not responsi-
Microphoneinput level can be adjusted during a
ble for damaged or lost files and media.
phone call using the control knob.
— Contacts that were downloaded from a mo-
bile device cannot be exported.
1) Depends on the connected cell phone.
200
Telephone
Memorycapacity
@) Tips
Showsthe Memory capacity for the directory.
— Several mobile devices can be paired with
the MMI, but only two* mobile devices can You can manage up to 17,000 contacts with the
be actively connected. directory. You can load up to 4,000 contacts from
—To delete all paired Bluetooth devices, the your cell phone into each directory. You can also
Bluetooth function can be reset to the fac- import up to 1,000 contacts from a storage de-
tory default settings > page 254. vice.
Sort order
Additional options
You can sort the contacts in your directory alpha-
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right con- betically according to Last name or First name.
trol button.
Import contacts/Export contacts
Connection manager
See > page 200.
See > page 254.
Download directory
Bluetooth settings*
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man-
See > page 256. ually download your mobile device contacts. De-
pending on the mobile device, you may need to
Online settings*
disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connec-
See > page 256. tion to update the contacts.
Wi-Fi settings* Hide contacts without phone number

See > page 208. When this function is switched on, grayed-out
contacts that have no phone numbersstored for
Directory settings them will be hidden in the directory.

trol button > Directory > right control button >
Contact settings.
Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
Pairing the cell phone to the MMI Make sure the requirements for connecting a cell phone have been
failed. met > page 188, or
make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establish-
ing a connection on your cell phone. If necessary, repeat the pair-
ing process > page 188.
After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names.
no contacts have been loaded into Avoid using contact groups on your cell phone.
the MMI.
8V2012721B)
201
Telephone
Certain telephone functions are The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service pro-
grayed out or not available. vider and the mobile device you are using. You can obtain morein-
formation from your cell phone service provider, in your cell phone
user guide or in the database for mobile devices at www.audiusa.
com/bluetooth.
Some telephone functions may On corporate phones, some Bluetooth settings may not be com-
be switched off or not available, patible or the cell phone Bluetooth function may be deactivated.
even though the mobile device is_| You can obtain more information from your system administrator.
supported.
202
Audi connect
Audi connect podcasts or for Internet connections and

services that use the Wi-Fi hotspot, such as
General information online media sources. Depending on the
country, data plans may need to be pur-
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
chased for these services > page 209. For
ment, the following functions may be available:
additional information, see my.audi.com.
— Audi connect Infotainment —Incertain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data
— Audi connect vehicle control services (Audi con- connection may be established as a replace-
nect e-tron services) mentfor the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device.
This feature depends on the configuration
You can also find more information on Audi con-
of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.
nect online at my.audi.com.
This could result in fees depending on your
Z\ WARNING cell phone service provider, especially if you
are using this feature while abroad. A flat
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only use rate data plan is strongly recommended. For
Audi connect services when road and traffic
moreinformation, contact your cell phone
conditions permit. Always read and follow service provider or refer to the owner's man-
the notes in > page 165,Traffic safety infor- ual for your Wi-Fi device.
mation.
— You are responsiblefor all precautions taken
— It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
for data protection, anti-virus protection,
devices and other similar devices when the
and protection against loss of data on mo-
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose
bile devices that are used, for example, to
objects, they could be thrown around the in- access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri- spot.
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se-
curely while driving. (i) Tips
— Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
— The availability of services depends on the
Fi hotspot to distract you from driving, as
subscription.
this could increase the risk of an accident.
— AUDI AGprovides access to services from
— Do not use any wireless devices on the front
third party providers. Permanent availability
seats within range of the airbags while driv-
cannot be guaranteed, because that de-
ing. Also read the warnings in the chapter
pends on the third party provider.
= page 280, Front airbags.
— Use of the most up-to-date mobile network
— To reduce the risk of an accident, use the Au
standardis not available in every country.
di connect Infotainment services with a Wi-
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Fi hotspot only in the rear seat when the ve-
thorized Audi Service Facility or your cell
hicle is in motion, or only when the vehicleis
phone service provider for additional infor-
stationary.
mation.
— Audi connect Infotainment services are only
@ Note
available within the cell phone networkcov-
— Applies to: embedded SIM card usage: The erage from your cell phone service provider.
connection costs of Audi connect Infotain- — Availability, scope, providers, screen display,
ment services are included in the price of and costs of services may vary depending on
Audi connect Infotainment during the sub- the country, model, model year, end device
scription period with some exceptions. and rates.
Please note that there may be additional
8V2012721B)
charges when using some services. For ex-

ample, this applies to Internet radio/
203
Audi connect
Audi connect > Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right con-
trol button > Wi-Fi settings > Wi-Fi. Switch on
Infotainment
the Wi-Fi hotspot.
>» Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right con-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment trol button > Wi-Fi settings > Network key. The
access data for the Wi-Fi hotspotis displayed.
With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
Switch on the visibility of the Wi-Fi hotspotif
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
necessary.
An Internet connection is required to use Audi > Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de-
connect Infotainment. Depending on the country vice and connectit to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
and the vehicle equipment, the following options using the authentication data that is shown.
maybe available: > Follow any additional system prompts on your
Wi-Fi device if necessary.
— Embedded SIM card
Your device is successfully connected with the
ZA WARNING MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\
in General information on page 203. ZA WARNING
Always follow the information found in > A\
@) Note in General information on page 203.
General information on page 203. @) Note
Embedded SIM card General information on page 203.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an
embedded SIM card
Audi connect
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain- Infotainment services
ment services is made through an embedded SIM
card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle.
You can use the Audi connect Infotainment serv- Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
ices immediately. Requirement: your vehicle must be connected to

the Internet > page 204.
@) Note
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
count before using them for the first time.
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot > Register at my.audi.com.

Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot » Add your vehicle to your myAudi account.
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right
You can connectup to eight Wi-Fi devices (such control button > Log in.
as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If > Log in to myAudi in the vehicle using your e-
the MMI is connected to the Internet mail address and password.
= page 204, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also
use the MMI’s Internet connection.
@) Tips
Requirement: The ignition must be switched on. — For some Audi connect Infotainment serv-
ices, you may also have to enter your myAu-
di access information when accessing serv-
ices in the MMI.
204
Audi connect
— Some Audi connect Infotainment services Read out!)

mustbe activated at my.audi.com. You can allow the MMI to read out the selected
— To makelogging in easier in the vehicle, you contents.
will receive an 8-digit myAudi PIN as an al-
ternative to your myAudi passwordafter you Call
have created a myAudi account. If a phone number was assigned to an entry, you
— For detailed information on configuration, can call the number, for exampleto reserve tick-
visit my.audi.com. ets.
Refresh
Accessing Audi connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment The contents for the selected Audi connect Info-
tainment service are refreshed.
> Select: the [MENU] button > Audi connect.
A list of all of the available Audi connect Infotain-

Start route guidance
ment services is shown on the Infotainment sys- If a location was saved with an entry, you can use
tem display. it as the navigation destination. Route guidance
starts immediately.
You can also filter the Audi connect Infotainment
services by category: Change search area
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > left
The set search area can be changedat any time.
control button > for example, Navigation for
Additional information on search areas can be
the Audi connect Infotainment services in the
found under > page 214.
Navigation menu.
Closing Audi connect Infotainment services
ETeat ay Regardless of the function selected, you can
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
close an Audi connect Infotainment service at
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > desired any time and return to the home screen.
Audi connect Infotainment service > right con-
trol button. Services
Depending on the equipment and the Audi con-
nect Infotainment service selected, the following Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
basic functions may be available: ment, the following services may be available:
Save as preview Weather

You can also see a preview of the selected Audi Information on current weather conditions as
connect Infotainmentservices on the Audi con- well as weather forecasts for the selected search
nect Infotainment home page. area.
Show on map > Select and confirm Weather.
You can showselected contents on the map and News

use them for route guidance.
> Select: Online news > desired newsfeed > a
Log in headline.
See > page 204.
8V2012721B)
205
Audi connect
If you logged in to myAudi in your vehicle License subscription

=> page 204, personalized newsfeeds can be The validity and expiration date of your licenses
displayed. are displayed.
Twitter Refresh
Requirement: you must have connected your ve-
The content of the selected Audi connect Info-
hicle with myAudi > page 204. You must have tainment service or the entire Audi connect Info-
connected your myAudi account with Twitter.
tainment list is updated.
You can only connect one Twitter account with
Data privacy
your myAudi account. Notall settings can be ad-
justed in the MMI. Some can only be adjusted Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
through the Twitter website. Location, vehicle, and personal data are transmit-
> Select: Twitter > left control button > desired ted when using Audi connectservices.
function (for example, Trends). Allowing sending of data
— Select and confirm Activate data connection.
ZA\ WARNING The data module for the use of all Audi connect
Alwaysfollow the information found in > AV services will be active.
in General information on page 203.
Restricting sending of data
@) Note — Select and confirm Activate privacy. The data

connection is limited or deactivated depending
on the equipment. The majority of Audi connect
services will not be available.
The following interfaces are not affected by this

Additional options
setting: Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE),
Wi-Fi connection, Audi smartphone interface
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right (ASI), Near Field Communication (NFC), charging
control button. communication (e-tron), Electronic Toll Collect
(ETC), if equipped.
Depending on the equipment and the country,
the following options maybe available in the
@) Note
overview of Audi connect Infotainment services:
About Audi connect General information on page 203.
Here you will find legal information regarding
Audi connect Infotainment usage.
G) Tips
If the transmission ofdatais limited, data
Log in will still be transmitted to verify subscrip-
See > page 204. tions.
Connection manager
See > page 254.
206
Audi connect
Audi connect e-tron Services

services Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and Audi connect
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and Audi connect
ment, the following services may be available:
With Audi connect vehicle control services )), you Trip data
can utilize various services using the myAudi app Depending on the vehicle equipment, certain
or online at my.audi.com. driver information system data is transmitted to
a server. An overview ofyour trips with the values
ZA WARNING from the short-term memory/long-term memory
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\ can be displayed, for example, the driving dura-
in General information on page 203. tion. The values maydiffer from the values dis-
played in the vehicle.
G@) Tips
Doors and lights
— Accessing specific data or controlling func-
You can check the vehicle status with this service.
tions remotely depends on the charge level
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these — If the vehicle doors and lids are open or closed
functions only havelimited availability after — If the parking lights are on or off
switching off the ignition.
For additional information on opening and clos-
— An eSIM card establishes the Internet con-
ing the doorsor for the vehicle lighting, refer to
nection for Audi connect vehicle control
=> page 30 or to > page 48.
services. The costs for this are included in
the price of Audi connect vehicle control Vehicle status report
services. The cell phone network, for exam-
You can check the vehicle status with this service.
ple, must be available to use these services.
— High-voltage battery charge level
— Electric range
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and Audi connect — Mileage
— Next inspection
Requirement: your mobile devices must be com-
patible. For additional information, see > page 93, Power
meter overview and = page 95, Rangedisplay.
> An authorized Audi dealer must complete a
one-time activation of Audi connect e-tron serv- Car Finder
ices for your vehicle before you can register on- This service transmits the parking location to a
line.
server when the ignition is switched off. The vehi-
> Register at etron.audiusa.com
cle location, your location, or the route to your
If you require assistance with your Audi connect vehicle can be displayed. The new parking loca-
e-tron services, please contact an authorized Au- tion cannot be determined with this service if the
di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. vehicle is moved after shutting the vehicle off
and without switching the ignition on and off
Using the myAudi app again, for exampleif the vehicle is towed or sto-
— Install the myAudi app on your mobile device len. >
and log in with your access information.
8V2012721B)
D Depends on the country and equipment. These services

are available for a limited time.
207
Audi connect
Remote charging > Select: right control button > Online settings >
Requirement: When changing the charging mode Data connection settings.
the ignition is switched off. Depending on the country, vehicle equipment,
You can start the charging process remotely with and connection type, the following functions may
the service. be available:
— Charging mode: immediate charging or delayed Data connection settings

charging (timer) Using the Data connection settings menu, you
— Program the timer can set when the system should connect to the
— Deactivate or activate the timer Internet. The Internet connection disconnects
For additional information, see > page 106, automatically once the requested Audi connect
Charging the battery with the Audi charging sys- Infotainment service no longer requires any data.
tem. — Connection setup: you can select when a data
Temperature control connection should be established.
— Audi connect (MMI): when this function is
Requirement: the ignition must be switched off switched on, a data connection is automatically
when starting or stopping climate control. established in order to use Audi connect Info-
You can control the climate control in your vehi- tainment services.
cle remotely using these services. — Wi-Fi devices: when this function is switched
on, you can allow or deny Internet connections.
— Start or stop climate control
— Program the timer ZA WARNING
— Deactivate or activate the timer
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\
For additional information, see > page 121, Cli- in General information on page 203.
mate control.
@) Note
ZX WARNING Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
— Do not ignore messages and warning or indi- General information on page 203.
cator lights that turn on in the vehicle be-
cause of the information in the vehicle sta- (i) Tips
tus report. This could lead to break downs in
For more information on roaming charges,
on the road, accidents and serious injuries.
contact your cell phone service provider.
— Only perform the climate control functions
if your vehicle was shut off correctly and the
Wi-Fi settings
ignition is switched off.
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
— Only perform charging functions on the
high-voltage battery if the vehicle is shut off Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
correctly, is connected to a suitable socket
> Select: [MENU] button > Telephone > right con-
and if the ignition is switched off.
trol button > Wi-Fi settings.
Settings Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-

ment, the following functions may be available:
Ce data mar -ianceli4
Wi-Fi
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect > right
When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
control button > Connection manager.
Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be con-
nected to the hotspot.
208
Audi connect
Network key
@ Tips
The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your
If driving out of the country, applicable data
Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the fol-
plans must be purchased.
lowing information if needed.
— Access point (SSID): Wi-Fi hotspot name. Data Privacy

— Password: a random password was set at the Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
factory in the MMI. The password can be
AUDI AGcollects, uses, stores and shares your
changed. The encryption method requires a
personal information, such as contact data, vehi-
passwordto beat least eight characters long.
cle data, usage data, driving data and precise ge-
Choose a secure password.
olocation, in order to provide you with the prod-
— Visible to others: you can switch the visibility
ucts and services you have purchased or request-
of the Wi-Fi hotspot on or off.
ed, and for a number of other purposes, for ex-
Z\ WARNING ample, to track quality issues, to performance

and safety, to meet our internal complianceor le-
Alwaysfollow the information found in > AV
gal requirements and to market to customers
and potential customers. For a more complete
list of the data we collect, how weuse it and with
@) Note whom weshareit, please visit your Audi nation-
Always follow the information found in >@ in al/sales region website at www.audi.com.
The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-
ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-
@) Tips
tion status, or the service offering. For example,
In vehicles without Audi connect Infotain- collection, use and sharing may vary between Au-
ment,the use of the Wi-Fi hotspotis only di connect services,if you have designated a key
possible for the Wi-Fi audio player*. A data user, or if you are driving a model equipped with
connection to the Internet cannot be estab- persistent data logging. Please review the com-
lished. plete Privacy Statement to understand our data
handling practices with respect to a particular
Data plans!) service.
Applies to: vehicles with data plans
You can find additional information about our da-
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi ta privacy practices in your MMI.
account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be
>» Select: [MENU] button > Audi connect> right
registered in your myAudi account.
control button > About Audi connect.
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com.
Information about our privacy practices in con-
junction with the mobile Audi connect applica-
Z\ WARNING tion can be found in the Application’s Privacy
Alwaysfollow the information found in > A\ Statement.
For additional information about the privacy
practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or
@) Note
other websites, applications or online services as
Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in well as your obligations with respect to using
General information on page 203. these services, and for additional information >
8V2012721B)
))_ Notavailable in every market.
209
Audi connect
regarding Audi connect terms and conditions,

please visit your Audi national/sales region web-
site at www.audi.com.
Troubleshooting
Appliesto: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
The information that followslists some trouble-

shooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.
Problem Solution
Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services mustbe activated or
ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using
tainment services are grayed out or them for the first time. You can find detailed information online
not available. at my.audi.com.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 208.
connect through Wi-Fi. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restartit.
210
Navigation
Navigation — The route calculated by the navigation sys-

tem is a recommendation for reaching your
Opening navigation destination. Obeytraffic lights, stopping re-
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
strictions, one-way streets, lane change re-
The navigation system directs you to yourdesti- strictions, etc.
nation, around traffic incidents, and on alterna- — Adjust the volume of the audio system so
tive routes,if desired. that signals from outside the vehicle, such
as police and fire sirens, can be heardeasily
RAH-8976]
at all times.
Home address
CG) Note
If the driving directions conflict with traffic
2) Gas station
4 laws, obeythe traffic laws.
Beaks
G) Tips
Fig. 186 Diagram: Enter destination menu
— Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna
or interference caused by trees and large
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button.
buildings can impair satellite reception and
The Enter destination menu is displayed after affect the system's ability to determine the
opening navigation. The following information vehicle position. Several deactivated or mal-
can be displayed in the Infotainment system dis- functioning satellites can also interrupt GPS
play: reception and affect the system's ability to
determine the vehicle position.
@ Input field for free text search .... 211
— Because street names sometimes change,
@ Home address ................. 213 the names stored in the MMI mayin rare
@® Last destinations ............... 212 cases differ from the actual street name.
@ Stored favorites cos: nce sy new ss 213
If you have connected a mobile device to the Entering a destination
MMI, your directory contacts will also be listed if
actaeestiala
they have navigation data assigned to them. Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
The Favorites (4) > fig. 186 menu item as well as With the free text search, you can enter the navi-
the directory contacts are only shown in the En- gation destination data all at once in any order
ter destination menu if you have entered one or using the MMI touch control pad* or the letter/
more characters using the input field. number speller (for example, 20 Main St., Los
Switching between destination entry and the Angeles). Likewise, you can search for points of
map: interest, contacts, previous destinationsor fa-
vorites to navigate to the desired address.
— Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
the map is displayed. Or: Select: left control Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until the
button > Switch to map. Enter destination menu is displayed > page 211,
fig. 186.
ZA WARNING > Push the control knob up. The input fieldis dis-
— The demands oftraffic require your full at- played @) > page 211, fig. 186.
tention. Always read the chapter
8V2012721B)
= page 260, Driving safety. — Enter one or more search terms into the input
— Obeyall traffic laws when driving. field. >
211
Navigation
— If available, confirm the input suggestion* to — Select and confirm one ofthe last destinations
complete the entry or a word suggestion*. See from the list.
= page 172, Letter/numberspeller.
Deleting previous destinations
— Turn the control knob to the right to change the
resultslist. — Select one of the last destinations from the list.
— Select and confirm a destination from the re- — Select: right control button > Delete destina-
sultslist. tion > Delete this last destination or Delete all
last destinations.
The route displays as an overview in the map.
Route guidance is already active. The selected destination or all last destinations
is/are deleted and no longer displayed in the En-
Narrowing the search area ter destination menu.
All countries/states are selected at the factory
for the free text search. Entering an address
— Select the right control button > Country/state
selection in the input field @ > page 211, As an alternative to free text search, you can al-
fig. 186. so enter an addressin stages.
— Select the country or state (@)that should be
searched for in the free text search in order to
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
narrow the number of results and increase the the Enter destination menu is displayed
=> page 211, fig. 186.
search speed. The selected entry in the coun-
try/state selection is stored. Or: Select All > Select: left control button > Enter address.
countries/states. — Entering a destination using a country/state:
select and confirm Country/state. Select and
(@)Tips confirm a country or state directly from the list.
— The MMI input suggestions depend on the Or: search for a country or state using the input
last navigated destinations. field.
— Up to 50 entries can be stored in the last — Entering a destination using the City/ZIP
destinations list. code: select and confirm City/ZIP code. Enter a
— Additional information on free text searches city or a ZIP code. Or: select and confirm a city
can be found under > page 173. from the list.
— Select and confirm additional details about the
Loading previous destinations destination such as Street, House number or
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system Downtown.
— Destination entry using a street intersection*:
Yourlast destinations are automatically stored
Requirement: you must enter a street. Select
and can be loadeddirectly as a destination.
and confirm Intersection. Select and confirm a
Requirement: a destination was already navigat- street directly from the list. Or: search for a
ed to. street using the input field.
— Select and confirm Start route guidance.
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
the Enter destination menu is displayed
=> page 211, fig. 186.
Your last destination is listed directly in the Enter

destination menu under the home address and
identified with the symbol @) > page 211,
fig. 186.
212
Navigation
Setting a home address/favorite as the Transferring a destination from the

elated) directory
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
You can quickly and easily start route guidance You can navigate directly to destinations in the
to your home address using the home address directory.
function. Favorites allow easier accessto fre-
quently used destinations.
(1) BTU)
Denescuar ie
the Enter destination menu is displayed @-=., HawthornAve, Los Angeles, CA
=> page 211, fig. 186.
ry MT Tira =] NZee LCi aa ON
34°03°12.7°°N, 118°14° “WwW
Setting a home addressas the destination
Requirement: a home address must be stored
Fig. 187 Possible directory/contacts
=> page 218.
Your Home addressis shown directly in the Enter Requirement: an address with navigation data or
destination menu @) > page 211, fig. 186. a navigation destination must already be as-
signed to a contact > page 218, Directory con-
— Select: Home address.
tacts.
Setting a favorite as the destination
Requirement: a favorite must be stored as a des- the Enter destination menu is displayed
tination > page 218. => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Directory > a con-
— Enter at least the first three letters of the de-
tact.
sired favorite in the free text search input field.
The favorites found are shown in the Infotain- The directory/contacts are shown in alphabetical
mentsystem display (4) > page 211, fig. 186. order and are marked with symbolsto indicate
— Select and confirm the desired entry. the storage location:
@ Tips @ Business address

@ Private address
— Additional settings for the home address
can be found under > page 218. @®) Business destination
— Additional settings for the favorites can be @ Private destination
found under > page 218. — Select and confirm an addressor a destination.
When you haveselected a destination, the
route guidance can be started directly.
— Check the address input again when selecting
an address.
—Then select and confirm Start route guidance.
Additional directory functions in the navigation

system can be found under > page 218.
G) Tips
— Addresses that have been imported from
8V2012721B)
your mobile device into the MMI can also be

used as a destination.
213
Navigation
— If a contact is grayed out in the directory, — Searching for a point of interest in a specific
this contact has neither a destination nor an category: select Select category. Select and
address assigned toit. confirm a category such as Restaurants.
eeelesa) G) Tips
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system — Distances to points of interest are displayed
as a straight-line distance from your current
location. The actual distance from your cur-
rent location to the pointof interest is up-
=> page 211, fig. 186.
dated automatically. The list of points ofin-
> Select: left control button > Points of interest.
terest that were found is not resorted when
— Changing the search area: select and confirm this happens.
Search area > a search area from the list. — There maybe entries in the list that cannot
be displayed completely due to their length.
The following search categories are available:
Select the corresponding entry from the list.
Nearby: points of interest can be selected from Select: right control button > Show destina-
different categories. The points of interest are tion details. Detailed information for the se-
listed starting from the immediate vicinity of the lected entry in the list is then displayed.
vehicle up to a radius of approximately 124 miles
(200 km). Online point of interest search (online
1k
Along the route: points of interest along the
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
route can only be selected during active route nect Infotainment
guidance. The pointsof interest are located di-
rectly along or in the immediatevicinity of the You can searchfor points of interest on the Inter-
calculated route. The points of interest can like- net.
wise be selected from various categories. For ex- Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect
ample, you can search for a hotel or parking lot Infotainment must be met > page 203.
at the destination.
Near destination/Near stopover: points of inter- the Enter destination menu is displayed
est near a destination or a stopover can only be => page 211, fig. 186.
selected during active route guidance. The points > Select: left control button > Online search. The
of interest can likewise be selected from various search area last set is displayed in the input
categories. For example, you can search for a ho- field.
tel or parking lot at the destination.
— Changing the search area: select: right control
In a new city: select a country/state or search in
button > Select search area.
a newcity. Enter the name ofthe desiredcity.
— Searching for online destinations in the se-
Points of interest can be selected from various
lected search area: enter a newcity/stateif
categories. This function allows you to search for
necessary. Enter the search term, such as hotel.
points of interestin any city regardless of the ac-
Press the control knob. Select and confirm an
tive route guidance or the vehicle position.
online destination from the list.
— Searching for a point of interest name in the — Searching for online destinations in a specific
selected search area: select Find entry > Enter category: select and confirm Select category.
point of interest. Enter the name of the point Select and confirm a category such as Restau-
of interest. rants.
Find which search areas are available under

=> page 214, Point of interest search.
214
Navigation
You can search for online destinations using the Entering a destination using geo
voice recognition system > table on page 184. coordinates
@ Tips
Always read the chapter > page 203, Audi the Enter destination menu is displayed
connect. => page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: left control button > Geographical coor-
NeemToL dinates.
Elaeol aly
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con- — Select Latitude/Longitude.
nect Infotainment — Press the control knob to set the individual val-
Importindividual destinations from your myAudi ues.
account into the MMI. — Turn the control knob to the left/right to
change the selected value.
Requirement: — Select and confirm Start route guidance.
The requirements for Audi connect Infotainment
must be met > page 203. Adding a stopover
You must have a registered myAudi account at
my.audi.com. You must have a vehicle assigned You can enter an additional destination when
to your myAudi account and you musthavestor- route guidanceis active.
ed one or more destinations.
RAX-0083
ry Craver
=> page 211, fig. 186. =| prc) destination ——$—@®)
> Select: left control button > myAudi contacts. x Elias Thomas Snack Bar
> If necessary, enter your myAudi user data or preciel —Q©_

your myAudi PIN > page 204. The contacts
stored in myAudi are displayed.
Fig. 188 Example: active route guidance with stopover
— Select and confirm a contact.
— Select and confirm a private or business desti- Requirement: route guidance mustalready be ac-
nation. tive.
— Select and confirm Start route guidance. > Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
@) Tips => page 211, fig. 186.
— You only need to enter the myAudi user data
one time. Entering a destination as a stopover
— You can receive your myAudi PIN if you have — Enter a destination in the input line
set up a myAudi account. > page 211.
— For additional information, visit www. — Select and confirm a destination from the re-
audiusa.com. sultslist.
— Select and confirm Add as stopover.
Deleting a stopover
8V2012721B)
— Push the control knob up. Free text search and

active route guidance are displayed. Or: Turn
215
Navigation
the control knob to the left until the active All parking options near the selected location are
route guidance is shown. displayed in the Infotainment system.
— Select and confirm Delete stopover (2)
Delete: the selected entry is deleted. You can de-
> fig. 188.
lete individual entries or all entries (for example,
— The stopover is deleted.
favorites or last destinations).
Audi connectat this location*: Requirement: you

Cancel route guidance
must have selected a destination from the results
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system
list. Allows you to search for items in the vicinity
Requirement: route guidance mustbe active. of the selected location, such as Travel informa-
tion.
the Enter destination menu is displayed Online traffic data*: the online traffic informa-
=> page 211, fig. 186. tion > page 226 can be switched on or off.
> Turn the control knob to the left until the active
Add destination to contact: see > page 218.
route guidance is shown > page 215,fig. 188.
> Select and confirm Delete destination @) Store as favorite: see > page 218.
=> page 215,fig. 188. The destination is delet-
Voice guidance: see > page 220.
ed. Or: select the right control button > Cancel
route guidance. Navigation settings: see > page 219.
@ Tips
Additional options when entering a
Cdr ial) Information on online traffic data* can also
Appliesto: vehicles with navigation system be found online at www.audiusa.com.
> Press the right control button.
Depending on the selected function, the follow-

ing options may be available when entering a
destination:
Cancel route guidance: Requirement: route guid-

ance mustbe active. Route guidance is canceled.
For additional information, see > page 216.
Country information: you can display the appli-

cable urban and rural speed limits for any coun-
try/state. If this function is activated, the infor-
mation will be automatically shown to you in the
route information () > page 220,fig. 193 when
the speed limit is exceeded > page 223.
Country/state selection: see > page 212, Nar-

rowing the search area.
Routecriteria: see > page 220, Routecriteria.
Showlocation on map: Requirement: you must

have selected a destination from the resultslist.
The destination entered is displayed on the map.
Parking at this location*: Requirement: you must

have selected a destination from the resultslist.
216
Navigation
Personal route al routes. Without starting route guidance, your

MMI monitorsthe traffic conditions for your per-
assistance
sonal routes and showspossible traffic incidents
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and personal
route assistance for the possible routes to be driven in the Info-
tainment system display @) > fig. 189.
Your MMIcan learn the routes that you drivefre-
quently (such as your daily commute to work and A message will be displayed if thereis a large
back) and suggest route guidance based on the traffic incident (more than 12 minute delay) re-
current vehicle position. gardless of which menu is selected > fig. 190.
Select and confirm one of the following options:
RAH-8978
— Start route guidance: the MMI starts the route
# Home address
guidance for the personal route displayed and
5 iRk] Ae searches for a faster routeif available.
n
® Market Street
14
a
52) — Ignore this route and this message: the dis-
played destination with all applicable personal
routes is no Longer factored into the current
trip. No more messages are shown for the dis-
Fig. 189 Example: personal route display played destination. The displayed destination
with all applicable personal routes will be fac-
tored into the trip again only after stopping the
Thereis a delay of 6 min on your vehicle and switching the ignition on again.
personal route to
Stevens Creek Blvd, San Jose, CA 95117. — Ignore all messages: all personal routes are no
Start route guidance longer factored into the current trip. No more
Paescrus kieiccec messages are displayed. Messages for personal
Ignoreall messages
routes when thereis increased traffic will ap-
pear again after the vehicle is stopped and the
Fig. 190 Information on personal route
ignition is switched on again.
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until As soon as you switch off personal route assis-
the Enter destination menu is displayed tance, the symbol in the status line turns off and
=> page 211, fig. 186. your trips are no longer recorded. Trips that were
> Select: right control button > Navigation set- already stored remain stored.
tings > Personal route assistance.
Deleting personal routes:
When the function is switched on M, the MMI re- — Select the desired personal route in the Enter
cords the frequently-driven routes regardless of destination menu @ fig. 189.
whether a destination was entered and reached — Select: right control button > Delete destina-
or not. tion.
As long as route guidance is not active, your per- Deleting all personal routes:
sonal routes are listed in the Enter destination
menu under the home address and indicated with — Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control
the symbol F& @) © fig. 189. When personal button > MMI settings > Factory settings.
route assistance is switched on, this symbol is — Select: Navigation and online memory > Re-
displayed in the Navigation menu and in the Info- store factory settings > page 254.
tainment system display status line at the same
time.
8V2012721B)
The distance to the destination and the calculat-

ed arrival time are also displayed for your person-
217
Navigation
— Storing a destination as a favorite: search for

@ Tips
the desired destination using the input field.
— Personal routes are learned based on the ve- Or: select and confirm a destination from the
hicle position. The routeis prioritized ac- list. Select: right control button > Store as fa-
cording to how frequently you drive to a vorite.
destination. — Renaming a favorite: select the left control
—A maximum ofthree personal routes are button > Favorites > a favorite from the list >
displayed in the Enter destination menu. right control button > Rename favorite.
Based on the currentvehicle position, the — Movefavorite: select a favorite from the list >
traffic situation for the route that is most right control button > Movefavorite. Select
likely to be driven out of the three routes and confirm the location of the selected favor-
will always be monitored. ite.
— Please note that personal routes that have — Deleting a favorite: select a favorite from the
already been stored will remain stored after list > right control button > Delete favorite >
the ignition is switched off and they must Delete this favorite or Deleteall favorites.
be deleted manually.
Directory contacts
Home address Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Two addresses(private/business) can be as-
> Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until signed as destinations for each contactin the di-
the Enter destination menu is displayed rectory.
=> page 211, fig. 186.
Storing a home address the Enter destination menu is displayed
— Select and confirm Home address (2) => page 211, fig. 186.
=> page 211, fig. 186. After opening the home Storing a destination as a contact in the
address for the first time, you will be asked to directory
create a home address.
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
— Select and confirm Create now.
to the MMI > page 188.
— Enter a destination or select a destination from
the list. — Select: a destination > right control button >
Add destination to contact.
Editing the home address
— Enter the first letters of the desired contact in
— Select the Home address (2) > page 211, the free text search input field > page 211,
fig. 186. fig. 186 and then select a contact from the list.
— Select: right control button > Edit home ad- — Select and confirm Add business destination or
dress. Add private destination.
— Select and confirm a new destination as the
home address.
The selected destination is stored as the new

home address.
Favorites

=> page 211, fig. 186.
218
Navigation
Alternative routes Additional settings

Navigation settings

=> page 211, fig. 186.
> Select: right control button > Navigation set-
tings.
Depending on the selected function, the follow-

Fig. 191 Diagram: display of alternative routesin the over-
ing settings can be selected:
view map
Showalternative routes
Requirement: a destination must be entered and
the route guidance mustbe started. Up to three suggested routes are shown on the
map when this function is switched on 4%
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until => page 219, Alternative routes.
> page 211, fig. 186. Low fuel warning
> Select: right control button > Navigation set- A message is displayed if the fuel gauge goes be-
tings > Show alternative routes. low the reserve marking when this function is
Three routes will be displayed in the overview switched on [M. Confirming this message displays
map after you enter a destination > fig. 191. a list of gas stations in the area. When a gas sta-
> Select and confirm the desired route that you tion is selected, route guidance from the current
wouldlike to use for route guidance. vehicle position is calculated.
Up to three route suggestions and their proper- Trailer mode*

ties are displayed on the overview map when the Trailer mode is switched off at the factory.
function is switched on 4 © fig. 191.
When the function is switched on , the maxi-
If available, the following information will ap- mum permitted speed for vehicles with trailersis
pear on the route suggestions: incorporated into the route guidance and the cal-
— Route type(fast ©,fast alternative (2), eco- culated arrival time is adjusted accordingly. Trail-
nomic route @)) er mode is displayed using symbols % in the side
— Distance to the destination and the calculated menu on the map.
arrival time Personal route assistance*
— Traffic congestion along the route including
Personal route assistance is switched off at the
time delays
factory.
The route that was calculated according to the
Your trips are recorded and destinations are sug-
route criteria you selected is shown on the over-
gested by the MMI when this function is switched
view map . The special properties of the route are
on page 217.
also displayed () > fig. 191 and given as a spo-
ken message. Notification when nearby*
Using the control knob, you can select the possi- The notification when nearbyis switched off at
ble routing for the alternative routes and show the factory.
8V2012721B)
them on map Select and confirm the desired

The MMI notifies you when you are approaching
route that you wouldlike to use for route guid-
selected points of interest when this function is
ance.
219
Navigation
switched on [M. You can also have a Notification > Select: right control button > Voice guidance.
tone.
Voice guidance: voice guidance can be Complete
Presentation mode or Shortened. With the Traffic function, voice
The Presentation mode helps you to effectively guidance promptsare only given when there are
plan a trip and follow the planned route without
traffic incidents on your route. When Off is se-
moving the vehicle. You can use Select starting lected, no voice guidance is given.
point when you would like to calculate a route Voice guidance during phone call: voice guidance
starting from a location other than the vehicle during a phone call can be switched on or off.
position, for example. Start Presentation mode
Entertainmentfader: see > page 258.
to simulate route guidance.
Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the vol-
Routecriteria ume during voice guidance using the On/Off knob
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system => page 165 You can also find additional informa-
tion under > page 258.
»{0] [6] |
RAH-8472|
Map
Map operation
>a] «[e
Fig. 192 Possible route criteria Giro

in 11
> Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until Wars

Fig. 193 Example: 3D position map with the crosshairs
=> page 211, fig. 186.
switched off
> Select: right control button > Routecriteria.
Peas
@HOVlanes): With the Avoid function, HOV fees
lanes will be excluded when calculating routes.
When Allow is selected, the MMI will route you
through HOV lanes and show them on the map.
Qhighways/ @)Toll roads/ @)Ferries: if the nav-

igation system should not include highways,toll
roads or ferries - if possible - when calculating
Fig. 194 Example: standard map with the crosshairs
routes, you can select the Avoid function. switched on

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system the map is displayed > fig. 193.
> Press the [LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until Zooming in/out on the map
— Turn the control knob tothe left or to the right.
=> page 211, fig. 186.
You can also zoom in and out on the map using >
) High occupancyvehicle
220
Navigation
the MMI touch control pad* > page 169. Or: @ Entertainment sliding menu*: see
turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction => page 170.
steering wheel* > page 17. ® Additional information on the crosshairs po-
Turning the crosshairs on/off sition: if you move the crosshairs to a loca-
tion on the map, available information for
— Switching the crosshairs on: press the control the current crosshairs position is displayed.
knob in the map view fig. 193. Press the control knob to open destination
— Switching the crosshairs off: press the [BACK details or to start route guidance. When the
button. crosshairs are turned off, the road being cur-
When the crosshairs are switched off > fig. 193: rently driven on is shown.
Map contents(pointsof interest, favorites).
@ Orientation: the map is either displayed as a
When there are multiple points of interest in
2D north-up map or as a 2D heading-up
the immediatevicinity, the symbols are
map.
shown stacked on the map.
@ Distance to the destination
Better route #3: if a better route is available
® When the trailer mode function is switched for the current route guidance, it will be indi-
on, the corresponding symbol is displayed cated on the map including the time that
next to the arrival time. would be saved. More information can be
@ Scale: turn the control knob tothe left or found under > page 225.
right to decrease or increase the scale. When
the Automatic zoom function is switched on
, an “A”for “Automatic”is displayed in the Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
magnifying glass.
Altitude > Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
CO®@
the map is displayed > page 220,fig. 193.

Vehicle position
> Press the left control button.
Route information: various information will
be displayed during active route guidance The following map functions can be selected:
(for example, the upcoming maneuver in-
cluding calculated distance and street Switch to destination input
names). The display also provides traffic in- The free text search in the Enter destination
formation or points of interest on the current menu is displayed > page 211, fig. 186.
route.
Traffic messages
Street being driven on: displayed hereas “off-
road” when the vehicle is stationary. Current traffic information is displayed in the In-
fotainment system display. You can also find ad-
When the crosshairs are switched on fig. 194:
ditional information under > page 225.
@®© Crosshairs: movethe crosshairsin the desired
Route list
direction using the MMI touch control pad*
or the control knob and set a point on the The route list can only be displayed when route
map as the destination or have information guidanceis active and contains information re-
about the focal point displayed. garding the route, the names of the streets and
@ Speed display): Displays the maximum per- the length of the route sections. When traveling
mitted speed on expressways and on high- on highways, possible parking lots and rest areas
ways. are shown, which you can select as a stopover.
8V2012721B)
D_ Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit

display.
221
Navigation
POIs along the route The navigation system calculates an alternative

Requirement: route guidance mustbe active. route. The route to be avoided that you have en-
tered applies only to the current route and must
Searching for points of interest along your cur- be set again, if needed. The areas you have se-
rent route For additional information, see lected to avoid will appear with red and white
=> page 214. shading on the map.
Moveroute*: move your finger over the MMI

Additional options on the map
touch control pad* or use the control knob to ad-
just the route on the overview map.
the map is displayed > page 220,fig. 193. Map settings
> Press the right control button. Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Depending on the function selected, the follow- > Press the LNAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
ing options can also be selected under the Map the map is displayed.
menu: > Select: right control button > Map settings.
Cancel route guidance: see > page 216. Depending on the selected function, the follow-
Adjust position: you can manually movethe vehi- ing settings can be selected:
cle position on the map to change the route. Map colors
Map settings: see > page 222. Day/Night: the map is displayed with a light/
Routecriteria: see > page 220. dark background.
Voice guidance: see > page 220. Automatic: the map display adaptsto the light-
ing conditions (for example, changing from Day
Navigation settings: see > page 219.
to Night when driving through a tunnel).
Showalternative routes: see > page 219.
Map display
Parking along the route”: parking options near
Standard: see > page 220,fig. 194.
the vehicle are displayed.
Satellite map): see > page 223.
Save current position*: you can save your current
vehicle position as a favorite > page 218 or save Electric range”: see > page 227.
it as a contact in the directory > page 218.
Map orientation
Audi connectat this location*: allows you to
Destination map: the map indicates the destina-
search for Travel information at the entered lo-
tion and is oriented to the north.
cation (events, weather at the destination, etc.).
2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the cur-
Online traffic data*: you can switch the online
rent vehicle position is displayed. The map is ori-
traffic data on or off M. ented in the direction of travel or to the north.
Country information: see > page 216.
3D heading-up map”: the current vehicle posi-
Avoid route*: when route guidanceis active, the tion is shown on a three-dimensional map and is
calculated route will avoid the area you have aligned to the direction of travel. At a scale of 62
specified (maximum: 12 mi (20 km)), if possible. mi (100 km)and larger, the map orientation is to
the north.
2) AUDIAGprovidesaccessto services from third party pro-

viders. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, be-
cause that depends on the third party provider.
222
Navigation
Overview map: the entire route from the vehicle Satellite map
position to the destination or the next stopover is Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
displayed on the map. The map scale depends on nect Infotainment
the length of the route and adapts automatically. You can display the navigation mapwith satel-
The map is oriented to the north. lite images.
Route information
The display of route information, such as the cur-
rent street being driven on or points of interest
along the current route, can be switched on/off
or can be minimized on the display of upcoming S Figueroa St
maneuvers.
W WashingtonBlvd
Los Angeles
Automatic zoom
Fig. 195 Example: satellite map
On: the map scale is adapted automatically de-
pending on the type of road being traveled (ex- Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect
pressway, highway, other roads) so that you al- Infotainment must be met > page 204.
ways have an optimal overview of the road ahead.
The scale will also be automatically adapted > Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
when there are upcoming maneuversto provide a the map is displayed.
better detailed view. > Select: right control button > Map settings >
Map display > Satellite map).
Intersection: when route guidance is active, the
map temporarily zooms in to a detailed scale The map viewis based on data packets received
when there are upcoming maneuversso that you from the Internet in the form ofsatellite images,
can seethe street or turn better. which are then combined with the roadways from
the Standard map view. There are two gigabytes
Off: the map scale you have chosen is main-
of memory space in the MMI memorythat can be
tained.
used to temporarily store the map or navigation
Map content data that was received. This is roughly the
amountrequired for the map/navigation data for
Map content such as weather, traffic information
a 2,485 mile (4,000 km)route. As long as the
or favorites can be displayed or hidden.
satellite images loaded for route guidance are
The weather forecast* is displayed on a 3 mile (5 stored, you can use them without having an ac-
km) scale on the map > page 219,fig. 191. tive data connection.
G Tips
—The stored satellite map data!) can be de-
leted under Factory settings > Navigation
and online memory > page 254.
—The satellite map”) is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The proc-
ess may take several seconds.
—When the satellite map display”) is switched
on with the 3D position map, the map >
8V2012721B)
)) AUDIAGprovides accessto services from third party pro-

cause that depends onthe third party provider.
223
Navigation
display automatically switches to the 2D Requirement:

map type when driving through tunnels.
The requirements for Audi connect Infotainment
— Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi
services must be met > page 204.
connect.
— For additional information, visit www. You must have a myAudi account and have as-
audiusa.com. signed your vehicle toit.
Using your vehicle position, the MMI identifies

Map update regions which you are frequently in. Based on
this, the MMI suggests update packages for
these regions, if they are available.
> Select @ Start download © fig. 196 if the mes-
There are multiple options available for updating
sage for a new map update appearsin the Info-
your map material:
tainment system display. Or:
— Map updates through the online map update* > Select [MENU] button > Settings > left control
> page 224. button > System maintenance > System up-
— Import map updates from the SD card* to your date > Online update.
MMI. You can find additional information on-
A selection with the available update packages
line at my.audi.com.
appears in the Infotainment system display
— Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or au- > fig. 197.
thorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in
additional costs. Selecting the online map update
— Select an update package from the list (MY) @
Online map update > fig. 197.
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con- — Confirm your selection with the BACK button
nect Infotainment
and go back tothe selection.
Using the online map update, you can update — The number and amount of datafor the select-
the map material in your navigation system di- ed update package are now displayed in the In-
rectly from yourvehicle. fotainment system.
Recommended regions —> Confirmation Starting the download

You have chosen to download 109 MB ofdata — Select and confirm Start download.
@
Please be aware of your mobile data
— Confirm the security promptby selecting Start
PCM MNCMC RTRekateint
download again.
BTC Cel Te)
The update packages begin to download and the

status of the download progress is shown in the
Infotainment system display.
Fig. 196 Example: display of a new online map update
Installation of online map updates
OTR tee CaratRet
The downloaded map material installs after you
Neetu es nes ]
Netra) ca stop your vehicle. The new update packages in-
Bp Select more countries (2) stall only after you switch off the ignition. After
restarting the MMI, the Infotainment system dis-
play indicates if the updates installed successful-
ly.
Fig. 197 Example: selection of a country package — Confirm the successful update with OK. >
224
Navigation
The new map material can now be used for navi- cording to road type (expressway, highway, other
gation. road), country and name.
Gi) Tips @)Tips

— The amount ofavailable online map updates — Critical traffic information, such as warnings
in the vehicle is limited. To update morere- about wrong-waydrivers, is automatically
gions, use the map updatevia SD card at displayed. To hide the traffic information,
my.audi.com. press the [BACK] button or the control knob.
— Alwaysread the chapter > page 203, Audi — TMC traffic reports are not available in Can-
connect. ada. For more information, please contact
Sirius Canada.
Accessing traffic
information Better route
Traffic information (TMC)
By receiving traffic information through TMC,
your MMIcalculates a better route if available
> Press the [NAV/MAP| button repeatedly until and the possible time saved comparedto the
the map is displayed. current route. You can decide which route you
> Select: left control button > Traffic messages. would like to use.
An overviewofall the traffic messages is dis- > Press the [NAV/MAP] button repeatedly until
played in the Infotainment system. Traffic inci- the map is displayed.
dents on your route are shown in the upper sec-
tion of the list, sorted according to distance. Requirement: route guidance mustbe active.
— Displaying all traffic messages for a street/ If your MMI has calculated a better route than
highway: select and confirm the symbol. A the current route guidance, the message A better
list of all the traffic messages for the selected routeis available. appears for several seconds
street/highwayis displayed. along with the time that maybe saved. A better
— Opening a detailed view oftraffic information: routeis indicated in the map view by the symbol
select and confirm the traffic information from > page 220,fig. 194.
the list. Apply better route
— Displaying the selected traffic information on
— Press the right control button.
the map: select the right control button >
Show on map. The shaded line shows the — Select and confirm the better route. Or: Select
street and the length ofthe traffic jam. and confirm Details to display details about the
better route. You can zoom in or out on the
— Displaying the next traffic message on the
map using the MMI touch control pad. Require-
map: press the control knob.
ment: there must be more than one optimized
Traffic information display route calculated. Press the control knob to
switch to the next route in the detailed view.
Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents on
Closing the detailed view: press the [BACK
your route are shown in the upper section of the
button.
list and are sorted according to distance.
— The better route is used for the remaining route
Warning symbols with +: avoided traffic inci- guidance and the routeis recalculated.
dents.
8V2012721B)
Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents

that are not on your route. They are sorted ac-
225
Navigation
Online traffic information Red: congestion.

Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
nect Infotainment
Shaded markings indicate the length of the area
with congestion.
The MMIcan receive real-time online traffic in-
formation about congestion, accidents, road Colored warning symbols: thereis a traffic inci-
construction, and otherincidents. dent immediately ahead on the route.
Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
RAH-8979
that are not on your route.
Reeacaett eye aCe m2)
Red warning symbols: all warning symbolswill
B} Northbound
be red when route guidance is not active.
Nogales St, Northbound
The display of colored markings, warning sym-
bols, etc. can be set in the Map content menu
=> page 223.
Fig. 198 Online traffic information display* without better
Traffic information is switched on at the factory.
route
You can switch off the reception ofonline traffic
information at any time > page 226.
Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect
Infotainment must be met > page 203.
(i) Tips
— Online traffic information is not available in
the map is displayed.
Canada.
> Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
An overviewofall the traffic messages is disconnect.
played in the Infotainment system > fig. 198. — Having the Online traffic data function
Traffic incidents on your route are shown in the switched on provides the most accurate re-
upper section ofthe list, sorted according to dis- portsof traffic situations as well as traffic
tance @ © fig. 198. Colored markings indicate forecasting. Your vehicle transmits and
the flow oftraffic > page 226. processesits anonymous, encrypted posi-
tion information at regular intervals to the
— Switching online traffic information on: press
traffic data provider. If you do not want to
the right control button and switch Online traf-
use this, you can switch off the online traf-
fic data on (M). The [ONLINE] symbol is shown
fic information function at any time.
in the Infotainment system display @)
— The onlinetraffic information network is
> fig. 198.
currently not available in all countries, and
You can also display the online traffic informa- the coverage is not nationwide. For addi-
tion on the satellite map > page 223. tional information, visit www.audiusa.com.
Traffic information display

Color-coded markings along the route indicate
the traffic flow:
Green: traffic is flowing freely.
Orange: stop-and-go traffic
2) AUDIAGprovides accessto services from third party pro-

cause that depends on the third party provider.
226
Navigation
e-tron navigation Finding the nearest charging station

functions Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
You can display charging stations at any time us-

Electric range
ing the point of interest search > page 214.
The electric range shows the maximum distance You can also display the charging stations along
that can be driven using electric power. Informa- the current route.
tion such asthetypeofroad, speeds, and alti- Requirement: route guidance mustbe active and
tude will be taken into account. the map mustbe displayed.
If available, all charging stations in the selected

search area are displayed with the following addi-
tional information:
@ Connector types
@ Symbol for charging stations that are always
open
@® Available destination details
Fig. 199 Example:electric range display
The hours of operation for the charging stations
are displayed in the destination details.
the map is displayed > page 220,fig. 194. Displaying destination details: select the right
> Select: right control button > Map settings > control button > Show destination details.
Map display > Electric range.
Apply charging station as the destination: press
> Press the [BACK] button to return to the map
the control knob. Select and confirm Start route
view.
guidance.
You can read the electric range of your vehicle
You can find additional information about charg-
based on the border @) © fig. 199.
ing your vehicle in > page 102, Charging.
The map scale will automatically adjust to the
range.
Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
Free text search: the desired des- The destination might not be entered in the navigation database.
tination cannot be found. Or: check the spelling of the term that was searched. Check if the
desired country/state was selected for the free text search using
the Country/state selection > page 212 or the option All coun-
tries/states.
8V2012721B)
227
Radio
Radio The station is stored as a preset. The symbol

showsthe stored location in the presetslist (for
Opening the radio example, 21).
The radio supports the FM, AM and SiriusXM* @ Radio text (shortened display)
(satellite radio) bands. Using the HD Radio re-
If available, program information about the set
ceiver also allows you to receive radio stations on
station is displayed in all of the station lists.
the FM and AM bandsin digital format.
@ Frequency
3
i.a
|
(5)
a=
F< @ Station name
iT
>}
© Station with HD Radio technologyavailable
STP ) € )
Neen i)
© Channel number ° fig. 201
If there is a loss of radio signal (SiriusXM*), the
Fig. 200 FMstation list (HD Radio technology FM)

following system information is displayed in the
station list:
[RAH-8598]
NoSignal: the tuner is currently not receiving a

Nesteurle
UC Desieucle
satellite signal (7) > fig. 201.
La) The system information turns off when the radio
stations are received again.
20 0n 20 NoSignal
eToys NoSignal
(i) Tips
Fig. 201 SiriusXM stationlist — Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would
like to receive satellite programming.
> Press the [RADIO] button. — Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth-
After opening the radio, the last opened station er vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
list is displayed. affect reception.
— Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and
Selecting a station: select and confirm a station Hawaii.
from the station list. FM/AM stations that can be — iTunes tagging* is not supportedbyall radio
received by digital radio are marked with the HD stations.
Radio technology symbol 4) ©) > fig. 200. If re- — When the Apple CarPlay connection is ac-
ception quality declines, the radio automatically
tive, Tag this song for iTunes* is not availa-
switches to the analog FM/AM station depending ble.
on availability. Digital HD Radio stations* may
contain multiple additional stations*. The availa-
ble additional stations* are listed under the radio
station. If you lose reception, the additional sta-
tions* are muted since they can no longer be re-
ceived.
Setting the frequency band: press the [RADIO

button repeatedly until the desired frequency
band is set.
@ Presets
228
Radio
Radio functions the MMI (maximum of 50 tracks). Once you

connect your Apple device to the Audi music in-
etme)4at 1a) terface, the tags are stored on the device.
— Manage SiriusXM alerts: see > page 230,Sir-
Using the free text search, you can select the or- iusXM alerts.
der that the search termsare enteredin the in-
— Store artist as favorite/Store track as favorite:
put field. Search in all frequency bandsfor a sta- see > page 230, SiriusXM alerts.
tion name or program type, such as News.
— Manual tuning: the frequency barsare dis-
played. Select and confirm the desired frequen-
cy.
— Seek: the radio tunes to the previous or next re-
DTaP ceivable station.
Tea ee — Scan: all stations are played for several seconds
aT Taal)
each.
— Radio settings: see > page 231.
Fig. 202 Inputfield and resultslist for free text search

tle (ol eb
— Opening the free text search: when in a station > Select: [RADIO] button > left control button >a
list, keep turning the control knob to the left frequency band (such as FM) > station.
until the free text search input field is dis- > Select: right control button > Radio text.
played.
— Using the free text search: see > page 173, Information that accompanies the program (such
Free text search. as artist, composer, track) is displayed.
You can also search for frequencies. Browsing through radio text entries: turn the
control knob to the left or right.
Stations from the presets (3) are displayed in the
results list @) > fig. 202. The symbol Q) indicates Requirement: a radio text entry mustbe dis-
which station list you switched to based on the played and the station must be broadcasting a
station selection. phone number,a navigation destination or a text
message number as Radio Text Plus information.
EX] nal options If a location, a phone number or a text message
number is included with a radio text entry, the ra-
> Select: [RADIO] button > right control button.
dio text will be shown with a colored border. You
The following options are available depending on have the following options:
the frequency band:
Call*/Start route guidance*/Write text mes-
— Sound settings: see > page 257. sage*:
— Store as preset: see > page 231, Presets. — Select a radio text entry with Radio Text Plus in-
formation and press the control knob.
— Tag this song for iTunes*: connect your Apple
— Select and confirm Call*/Start route guid-
device to the Audi music interface* on your
ance*/Write text message”. Or: press the
MMI. Select and confirm Tag this song for
BACK] button to cancel.
iTunes. The track that is currently playing is
stored on your Apple device. Synchronize your
G) Tips
Apple device with iTunes. The tagged track will
8V2012721B)
display the next time you open your iTunes me- The availability of radio text and Radio Text
dia center. If there is no Apple device connect- Plus depends on the radio station.
ed, the tagged tracks are stored temporarily in
229
Radio
SiriusXM alerts Playing tracks/artists from Sirius XM alerts

Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM Requirement: a SiriusXM alert must be stored for
You can display an overview of yourfavorite ar- a track/artist and it must be currently playing on
tists or tracks that are currently being played on a SiriusXM channel.
a SiriusXM channel. — Select: left control button > SiriusXM alerts >
an entry from the list. The selected track/artist
is played.
Playing tracks/artists from the

entertainmentsliding menu
Requirement: the SiriusXM alert notifications
function must be switched on. You mustbe in the
Vale
Tee) Radio and Navigation menu. A SiriusXM alert no-
tification is displayed in the entertainment slid-
Fig. 203 SiriusXM alertnotification
ing menu @) fig. 203.
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button > — Push the control knob down.
SiriusXM. — Select and confirm the desired track/artist.
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your fa- Managing SiriusXM alerts
vorite tracks or artists, you can display an over- — Select: right control button > Manage SiriusXM
view ofyour favorite tracks or artists currently alerts.
being received in the SiriusXM alerts menu and — Switching SiriusXM alerts on/off: when the
play them immediately. You can also receive a Sir- function is switched on,you are notified
iusXMalert notification @ for these tracksor ar- when this track or artist is being played ona
tists in the entertainment sliding menu SiriusXM channel.
> fig. 203.
— Deleting Sirius XM alerts: select an entry from
Storing a SiriusXM alert the list > right control button > Delete from
alerts > Delete this entry or Delete all entries.
Requirement: your favorite track or artist must
be playing on a SiriusXM channel.
View: additional station information
— Select: right control button > Store track as fa-
vorite or Store artist as favorite.
Switching SiriusXM alert notifications on

and off
— Select: right control button > SiriusXM alert
notifications.
When the function is switched on M, a SiriusXM

alert notification is displayed for several seconds
Fig. 204 Radio view: additional station information
in the entertainmentsliding menu for the Radio
and Navigation menus. @) fig. 203 displayed. Requirement: you mustbe tuned to a radio sta-
tion. The Show "NowPlaying" screen option
must be switched on > page 232.
Symbolsin the "Now Playing" screen > fig. 204:
@ Radiotextavailability
230
Radio
Radio textis available for the selected station. @® SiriusxXM

See > page 229. Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
@ iTunes tagging The SiriusXM* channel list is displayed.
The Tag this song for iTunes option is available Additional frequency bands
for the set station. See > page 229, Additional Depending on the vehicle equipment, you mayal-
options. so be able to select additional frequency bands
@ FM HD Radio technology @/® = fig. 205in the selection menu.
The station is received through FM HD Radio

Presets
technology.
You can store your favorite stations from every
@ Screen view
frequency bandin the presetslist.
Display Cover art or Station logo. See
=> page 232, Preferred picture view*. > Select: the [RADIO] button > left control button
> Presets.
Displaying the station list:
Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed.
Turn the control knob. Or: press the [BACK] but-
ton. — Storing presets: select and confirm a free pre-
set space. Follow the system instructions.
Radio menu — Select and confirm a station from the list if
necessary.
(a IK [Presets
Requirement: a station list must be displayed.
@o— Snreeicns — Storing presets: select: an entry from the list >
(3 Sie right control button > Store as preset. Or: press
es iM and hold the control knob for several seconds.
(5) A — Displaying the presets list: select: [RADIO] but-

ton > Presets.
Fig. 205 Example: Radio menu Requirement: the presetslist must be displayed.
— Listening to presets: select and confirm a pre-
> Select: [RADIO] button > left control button.
set from thelist.
Setting the frequency band: select and confirm — Movepreset: select a preset from the list >
the desired frequency band in the radio menu right control button > Movepreset. Or: press
=> fig. 205. Or: press the [RADIO] button repeat- and hold the control knob for several seconds.
edly until the desired frequency band is set. Dis- Select and confirm the location of the selected
plays the station list. preset.
— Deleting presets: select a preset from the list >
@ Presets right control button > Delete preset > Delete
The presetslist is displayed > page 231, Presets. this preset or Delete all presets.
@ SiriusXM alerts
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
Additional settings
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your fa- Radio settings
vorite tracks or artists > page 230, an overview
> Select: [RADIO] button > right control button >
8V2012721B)
of your favorite tracks or artists currently being

Radio settings. >
received on SiriusXM is displayed.
231
Radio
The following settings can be selected, depend- Show "NowPlaying"screen

ing on the band that is selected: When the function is switched on ¥ and the sta-
Station names (FM) tions or presetslist is open, the display will
switch to the Show "Now Playing" screen view
Variable: scrolling text transmitted by the FM
after approximately five seconds > page 230. De-
stations is shown in the Infotainment system dis- pending on availability, information about the set
play.
station (such as station name, artist and station
Fixed: scrolling text transmitted by the FM sta- logo) may be displayed in this view.
tions is not shownin the Infotainment system
Preferred picture view*
display. Only the current section of the scrolling
text is displayed. You can set your preferred screen view for the
Show "Now Playing"screen > page 230.
FM/AM HD Radio*
— Station logo: the station logo is displayed, de-
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off. pending on availability.
Channel sorting (SiriusXM*) — Cover art: the album cover is displayed if availa-
ble.
You can set the channel sorting for SiriusXM sta-
tion lists* by: Gracenote online database*
— Channel number: the channels are sorted in as- Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
cending order according to their channel num- Internet. The Cover art option mustbe selected
ber. = page 232, Preferred picture view*.
— Channel name: the channels arelisted in alpha- When the function is switched on (Y,the album
betical order.
cover or genre cover for the song that is playing is
— First category, then channel number: the chan- loaded from the Gracenote online database, de-
nels are sorted by their category and then by pending on availability.
their channel numbers.
— First category, then channel name: the sta- Subscription status (SiriusXM)*
tions are sorted by their category and then by This option is available when your subscription is
their channel names. about to expire or has already expired. The expi-
Category filter (SiriusXM*) ration date for your license is displayed.
The stations shown in the station list can be fil- Call to SiriusXM”*: the contact information for
tered by your personal preferences and by pro- your satellite radio provider is displayed. To call
gram type. The program categories that you can your satellite radio provider using the MMI, press
select depend on what is offered by your provid- Call to SiriusXM”*.
er. Select the All categories option to deactivate
all filter options and display all available stations
in the satellite station list.
Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
A station with poor reception is no longer Store the station as a preset in advance. Accessthe pre-
displayed in the station list once you sets using the presetslist > page 231.
switch to a different station.
232
Media
Media However, in some cases,the additional informa-

tion may notbe displayed.
Introduction
Restricted functionality: reset the Media set-
There are various media drives and connections tings to the factory default settings if functional-
available in the MMI. For example, you can play ity is restricted > page 254.
audio/video* files from the Jukebox* or connect
If functionality is restricted, reset the Jukebox*
your mobile device to the Audi music interface*
to the factory default settings > page 254.
and operate it through the MMI.
For information about the properties of support-
Notes ed media and file formats, see > page 246.
CG) Note
Media and formatrestrictions: the MMI (includ-
ing the SD card reader and the USB storage de-
vice connection*) was tested with a variety of
products and media available in the market. CD/DVD operation
However, there may be cases whereindividual de-
CD/DVDandformatrestrictions: the functionali-
vices or media and audio/video* files may not be
ty ofindividual storage media maybe limited due
recognized, mayplay only withrestrictions or
to the variety of blank CDs/DVDs available and
maynotplayat all.
the various capacities. Audio CDs or video DVDs
Digital Rights Management: please note that with copy protection, CDs/DVDs that do not con-
the audio/video*files are subject to copyright form to the standard, and multisession CDs may
protection. have limited playback or may notplay at all. Audi
recommends finalizing the recording process
The media drives do notplayfiles that are pro-
when creating multisession CDs. Multisession
tected by DRM and thatareidentified with the
DVDs are not supported.
symbol fi.
Using CDs/DVDs,the CD drive or the DVDdrive:
Data security: never store important data on SD
to ensurecorrect, high-quality playback and to
cards, the Jukebox*, CDs/DVDs or mobile devices.
prevent damage tothe drive or disc reading er-
Audi AG is not responsible for damaged or lost
rors, always store CDs/DVDs in a protective
files and media.
sleeve and do not expose them to direct sunlight.
Loading times: the morefiles/folders/playlists Do not use:
that are on a storage medium, the longer it will
— Damaged, dirty or scratched CDs/DVDs
take to load the audio/video* files. Audi recom-
— Single CDs/DVDs with 3 in (8 cm) diameter
mends using storage media that only contain au-
— CD/DVDs that are not round
dio/videofiles*. To decrease the time it takes to
load audio/video files*, create subfolders (for ex- — CDs/DVDs with labels
ample, for the artist or album). The loading time — Protective rings
will also increase when importing files. — Cleaning CDs
Additional information: when playing, audio Thermal protection switch: CD/DVD playback
files are automatically displayed with any addi- may be temporarily unavailable if outside tem-
tional information that is stored (such as the ar- peratures are extremely hot or cold. A thermal
tist, track and album cover). If this information is protection switch is installed to protect the
not available on the storage medium, the MMI CD/DVD and the laser.
8V2012721B)
will check the Gracenote metadata database. Laser devices: laser devices are divided into safe-
ty classes 1 to 4 in accordance with DIN IEC 76 >
233
Media
(CO) 6/VDE 0837. The optical readers that are in- — Loading a CD/DVD: the CD/DVD is pulled in au-
stalled conform to safety class 1. Lasers in this tomatically. Slide the CD/DVD straight into the
class are very weak and well-shielded, so there is DVD slot @) with the label facing up.
no danger if used correctly. — Automatic playback: playback will start auto-
matically if the inserted CD/DVD contains sup-
Media drives ported audio/video* files > page 246.
— Ejecting a CD/DVD: press the button @).
SD card reader
The CD/DVD is pulled in again automaticallyif it
The SD card reader is located in the glove com- is not removed from the DVD slot within approxi-
partment. mately ten seconds after ejecting it.
— Inserting the SD card: The angled corner of the The DVD drive is accessed and operated through
SD card mustface toward the right front side the MMI Q) & page 241, fig. 210.
when being inserted. Slide the SD card into the
card reader slot until the SD card clicks into @) Note
place. — Never force a CD/DVDinto the drive. The
— Automatic playback: playback will start auto- CD/DVD is pulled in automatically.
matically if the inserted SD card contains sup- — Do not insert CDs/DVDswith labels into the
ported audio/videofiles* > page 246. drive. Labels can come loose from the
— Removingthe SD card: press briefly on the SD CD/DVD and damage the drive.
card.
The SD card reader is accessed and operated G) Tips

through the MMI @) > page 241, fig. 210. — CDs/DVDs that contain audio files with a
high data rate maynotplay.
@ Note — The SIM card reader then does not function.
Only use one-piece SD cards. If adapter cards
(SD cards with more than one piece) are used,
the card could fall out of the adapter when Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive
———
driving becauseofvibrations. Individual
RAH-8826|
pieces could then become stuck in the drive
and impair the functionality.
@ Tips
The SIM card reader then doesnot function.
DVD drive
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
—
Fig. 207 Glove compartment: CD drive
RAH-8826|
— Loading a CD: the CD is pulled in automatically.

Slide the CD straight into the slot @ with the
label facing up.
— Automatic playback: playback will start auto-
matically if the inserted CD contains supported
audio files > page 248, CD drive.
— Ejecting a CD: press the button @.
Fig. 206 Glove compartment: DVD drive
234
Media
The CD is pulled in again automaticallyif it is not Copy to jukebox > This track or Entire album or
removed from the slot within ten seconds of This artist.
ejecting it.
Requirement: a video file must be playing.
The CD drive is accessed and operated through — Select: right control button > Copy to jukebox.
the MMI & page 241, Playing media.
The copying process begins. The status of the
@) Note copying process is shown in the MMI.
— Hiding the importing process: select and con-
— Never force a CD into the drive. The CD is
firm Continue copying in background. The im-
pulled in automatically.
porting processis hidden.
— Do notinsert CDs with labels into the drive.
— Canceling the importing process: select and
Labels can come loose from the CD and
confirm Cancel copying, or remove the source
damage the drive.
that is being imported. Files already copied re-
i) Tips main.
CD playback cannot be guaranteed with audio Requirement: the copying process must be active
files that have a high datarate. in the background.
— Showing the copying process: select: right
control button > Copying in progress.
Appliesto: vehicles with Jukebox When importing, the audio files are automatical-
> Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
ly sorted into the media center categories based
button until the sources overview > page 241 is on the stored additional information > page 242.
displayed. Select and confirm Jukebox. The copied video files are stored in the media
center under the Videos category.
After you havefilled the Jukebox with music
Playing the Jukebox
and/or videos, for example from your SD card,
you can play these files directly from the Jukebox. Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/
The Jukebox memory capacity is approximately video files > page 235, Addingfiles to the Juke-
10 GB. box.
Adding files to the Jukebox The Jukebox is accessed and operated through
the MMI @) & page 241, fig. 210.
— Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
button until the sources overview > page 241 is Displaying Jukebox memory capacity
displayed. Select one of the following sources
Select: right control button > Jukebox memory
to copy to the Jukebox: SD card*, CD-ROM",
capacity. Information about the Jukebox memory
DVD-ROM*, USB storage device*.
capacity and the number ofstored tracksis dis-
Requirement: the media center (for example, played.
tracks, albums) must be open.
Deleting tracks from the Jukebox!)
— Selecting an entry: select an entry from the
media center. Select: right control button > Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/
Copy to jukebox > This entry or Entire list. video files.
Requirement: the playlist must be open. See — Deleting an entry: select an entry from the
=> page 244. Jukebox media center. Select: right control but-
— Selecting a track: select the track that is cur- ton > Delete from jukebox > This entry or En-
tire list. >
8V2012721B)
rently playing. Select: right control button >
Notin the Playback view.
235
Media
— The status of the deleting process is shown in —If necessary, select and confirm Not connected
the MMI. Jukebox playback stops during the de- > Connect Bluetooth audio player. The Blue-
leting process and starts again automatically tooth device search starts. Follow the instruc-
once the deletion is complete. tions in the MMI.
— Select and confirm the desired Bluetooth device
@) Note from the list. The MMI generates a PIN for the
Do not import audio/video files when the en- connection.
gine is turned off becausethis will drain the — Select and confirm Yes.
vehicle battery. — Enter the PIN for connecting on your Bluetooth
device, or if the PIN is already displayed on your
@) Tips Bluetooth device, confirm it on the Bluetooth
— Tracks from audio CDs cannot be imported device. The time allowed for entering the PIN is
to the Jukebox for legal reasons. limited to approximately 30 seconds.
— Files that have already been imported are The media is started and operated through the
automatically recognized and cannot be mobile device or the MMI, depending on the de-
copied to the Jukebox again. vice being used.
— It is not possible to play audio/video*files
in the CD/DVD* drive while importing them. Gi) Tips
— The Jukebox does not provide an export — Check for any connection requests on your
function due to legal reasons. Bluetooth device.
— Files or tracks without additional stored in- — Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
formation arelisted as Unknown. Audi rec- connected to the MMI, but only one mobile
ommends adding additional information device can be active.
(such as ID3 tags) to audio files. — Bluetooth protocols AVRCP (1.0/1.3/1.4)
— Reset the Jukebox to the factory default set- and A2DP are supported.
tings when selling your vehicle > page 254. — Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth
device. Audi recommends setting your mo-
Bluetooth audio player bile device to the maximum volume when
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player using it as a Bluetooth audio player.
— The supported media functions (such as
With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play
music wirelessly from your Bluetooth-capable de- shuffle) depend on the Bluetooth device be-
ing used.
vice (such as a cell phone) through the MMI.
— For more information on supported devices,
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or con-
the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth tact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
settings will open on your mobile device during Audi Service Facility.
the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and
visibility of the MMI > page 256 and mobile de-
Wi-Fi audio player
vice must be switched on. The Bluetooth audio
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi audio player
player > page 256 mustbe switched on in the
MMI. Using the Wi-Fi audio player media source on the
MMI, you can connect and operate your Wi-Fi-ca-
— Connecting a Bluetooth player: press the
pable media player (such as a smartphone) to
[MEDIA] button. Pressthe left control button
wirelessly play music from your media player li-
until the sources overview is displayed. Select
brary. The media player is connected through the
and confirm Bluetooth audio player @)
vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot. A UPnP Server app or an
=> page 241, fig. 211.
integrated UPnP/DLNA server on your media >
236
Media
player is required to access your media player Li-

C@) Note
brary.
Requirement: the Wi-Fi function on your media General information on page 203.
player must be switched on. The myAudi app or
an UPnP server app is installed on your media G@) Tips
player or your media player has an integrated
UPnP/DLNA server.
connect.
— Connecting a media player: press the [MEDIA — Please note that a Wi-Fi connection does
button. Press the left control button until the not automatically makeit possible to use
sources overview > page 241] is displayed. Se- the Internet. For additional information,
lect and confirm Wi-Fi audio player 7) see > page 204.
=> page 241, fig. 211. —To avoid interruptions during playback, de-
—If necessary, select and confirm Wi-Fi turned activate the power saving function on the
off > Turn on Wi-Fi to activate Wi-Fi in the media player or connect it to a charger.
MMI. Select Wi-Fi settings, if necessary. Select —The loading times for the audio data depend
the same settings on the wireless media player on the media player used and the number of
that are used for the Wi-Fi hotspot. files that it contains.
— Starting the Wi-Fi audio player: start the —A maximum of 2,000 entries per directory
myAudi app or a UPnP server app, or set media are displayed in the MMI.
permissions on your media player. — Songs downloaded for offline use using mu-
Operating the media player: the media player is sic streaming services are stored on your
operated through the MMI. mobile device (such as a smartphone) and
may be DRM protected. The Wi-Fi audio
— Press the left control button repeatedly until
player will not play DRM protected files.
the Folders menu item appears. Select and con-
— Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
firm Folders.
thorized Audi Service Facility for additional
— Playing music from the media player: select
information on the Wi-Fi audio player.
and confirm Media center.
Web radio: see > page 237. Online media and

ZA WARNING Internet radio
— Asthe driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
Fi hotspot to distract you from driving, as
this could increase the risk of an accident.
sh
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose
objects, they could be thrown around the in-
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri-
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se-
Fig. 208 Online media
curely while driving.
— Do not use any wireless devices on the front You can playback and operate various online me-
seats within range of the airbags while driv- dia services and Internet radio using the MMI.
ing. Also read and follow the warnings in
=> page 280, Front airbags. > Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
8V2012721B)
button until the sources overview > fig. 208is

displayed. >
237
Media
Applies to: online media and Internet radio usage The following options maybe available, depend-
Requirement: ing on the information shown (such as the sta-
— The myAudi app mustbe installed and open on tion/track that is currently playing):
your mobile device.
— Soundsettings: see > page 257.
— You must be logged in to your myAudi account
— Wi-Fi settings: see > page 208, Wi-Fi settings.
in the myAudi app and you musthave selected
— Connection manager: see > page 254.
your vehicle.
— Additional options maybe available, depending
— The Wi-Fi function on the mobile device and on
on the active online media service or Internet
the MMI must be switched on.
radio.
— If necessary, check in the connection manager
=> page 254 if the mobile device you connected ZA WARNING
is selected under the MMI connect app ().
—The MMI must be connected to the network.
— The symbol for the Online media source (@ is
vehicle is stationary because,like all loose
shown in the MMI.
objects, they could be thrown around the in-
Applies to: online media usage
Additional requirement: side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri-
— A supported online media service must be avail- ous injuries. Store these types of devices se-
able in the country where the vehicle is being curely while driving.
operated. — Do not use any wireless devices on the front
— You must have an account with a supported on- seats within range of the airbags while driv-
line media service. ing. Also read and follow the warnings in
= page 280, Front airbags.
— Depending on the online media service, you
may need to install and open an app on your
@) Note
mobile device.
— Alwaysfollow the information found in >®
Starting Online media
— Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
— There generally are additional costs when
button until the sources overview > page 241 is
using an online media service account, espe
displayed.
cially when it is used internationally.
— Select and confirm an online media service.
Starting Internet radio G) Tips

— Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control — Depending on the Internet connection and
button until the sources overview > page 241 is network traffic, the connection may discon-
displayed. nected when online media sourcesare play-
— Select and confirm Internetradio. The Internet ing.
radio browser or the last station that was play- — Online media and Internet radio usage de-
ing is shown. pends on the service availability of the third
— Selecting the station: if necessary, select and party provider.
confirm a categoryin the Internet radio Brows- — Audi AG simply makes the access to online
er > a station. media services possible through the MMI
and does nottake any responsibility for the
Online media and Internet radio: additional op-
contentsof the online media services.
tions
— Press the right control button.
connect.
— Depending on the mobile device being used,
there may be interruptions during media
playback and when using the myAudi app. >
238
Media
To prevent interruptions when using a mo-

C@) Note
bile device, do not lock the screen on your
mobile device and keep the myAudi app in Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
the foreground. low it to be pinched.
— Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for additional Audi music interface
information about online media.
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music in-
terface in order to operate them through the
Multimedia connections MMI and charge the battery.
USB adapter for Audi music interface The USB ports and AUX inputs on the Audi music
interface are located in the storage compartment
oe!
{RAH-9203]
under the center armrest and in the front of the
S02
center console. The USB portsare labeled with
«=, and the AUX inputs with AUX.
<
USB Input
— Connecting or charging a mobile device using
ot
the USB adapter: connect the matching USB
adapter to the Audi music interface USB port
and then connectit to the mobile device, such
Fig. 209 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter as an iPhone. The battery will charge automati-
cally.
You can connect your mobile devices (such as a — Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
smartphone or MP3 player) to the Audi music in- music interface:: remove the USB adapter from
terface and charge them using a special USB the Audi music interface USB port.
adapter. — Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple
You can purchase the USB adapter fig. 209 Dock connector: remove the Apple Dock con-
from an authorized Audi dealer or at specialty nector from the Apple device with the release
stores: tabs pressed in @) > page 239,fig. 209.
@ USB adapter for devices with a micro USB con- The media are started and operated through the
nection mobile device or the MMI, depending on the de-
vice being used > page 241.
@ USB adapter for devices with an Apple Light-
ning connection Connecting multiple mobile devices: if a mobile
device (such as a smartphone)is connected at the
@ USB adapter for devices with USB type C con-
respective USB port on the Audi music interface,
nection
then all devices can be used as a playback source.
@ USB adapter for devices with an Apple Dock
AUX Input
connector
— Connecting a mobile device to the AUX input:
You can connect your mobile devices through the connect the AUX cable to an AUX input on the
Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB Audi music interface and then to the mobile de-
adapter and charge the battery at the same time. vice (such as an MP3 player or smartphone).
Applies to: vehicles with Audi music interface — Disconnecting a mobile device from the AUX
— Audi music interface: see > page 239. input: remove the AUX cable from the AUX in-
put on the Audi music interface.
8V2012721B)
Applies to: vehicles with USB charging portsin the rear

— USB charging portsin the rear*: see — Operation: select and confirm the External au-
=> page 240. dio player source ©) > page 241, fig. 210.
239
Media
Media is started and operated on the mobile — Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile
device. devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0
specification.
ZA\ WARNING — USB hubs are not supported.
Driving requires your complete and undivided — Some versions of the iPod such as the iPod
attention. As the driver, you have completere- shuffle cannot be connected to the USB
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate adapter for devices with Apple Dock connec-
mobile devices while driving, because this in- tor. Connect these devices using a AUX con-
creases the risk of an accident. nector cable.
— Changed content on a mobile device that
@) Note is connected to the Audi music interface
maynot be displayed in the media center. In
— Use a USB extension cable to connectdevi-
this case, reset the Media settings back to
ces that have an integrated USB connector
Factory settings > page 254.
(such as a USB stick) to prevent damage to
your USB device and the Audi music inter- — Video playback through the Audi music in-
face. terface is only supported if the connected
device is recognized as a USB storage device
— Extremely high or low temperatures that
(for example a USB stick). Apple devices and
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile
MTP devices (such as smartphones)are not
devices and/or impair their performance.
Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in recognized as USB storage devices.
extremely high or low temperatures. — iPod or iPhone malfunctions also affect the
operation of the MMI. Reset your iPod or
G) Tips iPhone if this happens.
— For important information on operating
— Alwaysfollow the information found in
your iPod or iPhone, refer to the user guide
=> page 62.
for the device. Audi recommends updating
— When you switch the ignition off, the USB
the iPod or iPhone softwareto the latest
portsare still supplied with power until the
version.
energy management intervenes.
— For more information about the Audi music
— Do notuse an additional adapter or USB ex-
interface and supported devices, check the
tension cable to connect mobile devices to
Audi database for mobile devices at www.
the Audi music interface that already have a
audiusa.com/mp3 or contact an authorized
cable or that must be connected with a USB
adapter (> page 239). Using an additional
cility.
adapter or US extension cable may impair
functionality.
USB charging portsin the rear
— You can purchase the AUX connector cable
Applies to: vehicles with USB charging portsin the rear
from an authorized Audi dealer or at spe-
cialty stores. You can charge the battery on your mobile device
— Audi recommends setting the volume of a through a USB charging port.
mobile device connected to the AUX input to
Two USB charging ports* are located at the back
approximately 70% of the maximum vol-
of the center console.
ume.
— USB adapter: refer to > page 239, USB adapter
for Audi musicinterface.
1) Applies only to MTP devices. Does not apply to Apple devi-

ces and USB massstorage devices.
240
Media
— Charging a mobile device using the USB Playing media

adapter: connect your mobile device to a USB
charging port using a suitable USB adapter.
— Disconnecting a mobile device from the charg-
ing port: remove the USB adapter from the USB
sro
charging port.
— Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple
Dock connector: remove the Apple Dock con- NTT Tanto almc=S
nector from the Apple device with the release o_
rhe Axternal audio player
tabs pressed in.
Z\ WARNING Fig. 210 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu
Driving requires your complete and undivided

attention. As the driver, you have complete re- Etre Oncts
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate Seen EN
your mobile devices while driving, because Otte)
this increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
Extremely high or low temperatures that can
Fig. 211 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu
occur inside vehicles can damage mobile devi-
ces and/or impair their performance. Never You can start and operate various media through
leave mobile devices in the vehicle in ex- the MMI control panel.
tremely high or low temperatures.
Requirement: a media source must contain au-
@ Tips dio/video* files > page 234.
— Alwaysfollow the information found in > Press the [MEDIA] button. Pressthe left control
=> page 62. button until the sources overviewis displayed.
—When you switch the ignition off, the USB > Select and confirm the desired source, or press
portsare still supplied with power until the the [MEDIA] button repeatedly until the desired
energy management intervenes. source is selected.
— Do notuse any additional USB extension ca-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
bles or adapters to connect mobile devices
ing sources may be displayed in the Media menu:
to the USB charging port that have already
been connected by a USB adapter. Using an @ Jukebox* ..... 2... 235
additional adapter or US extension cable @ DVD/CD drive*................. 234, 234
may impair functionality. @ SDeardreader ................ 234
— USB hubs are not supported.
@ Audi music interface* ........... 239
— Refer to the manufacturer's operating man-
such as an iPhone, USB stick
ual for important information regarding the
©® External audio player ........... 239
operation of your mobile device.
— Correct function of all mobile devices can- such as an MP3 player connected to
not be guaranteed. the AUX input
— The vehicle battery drains when mobile de- © Bluetooth audio player* ........ 236
vices are turned on butthe engine is off. @ Wi-Fiaudio player* ............ 236
8V2012721B)
Online media* and Internet radio* . 237>
241
Media
— Playing audio/videofiles: select a source in the

Media menu > category (such as artists > al-
Track
bum track).
— Moving onelevel up in the folder structure: Oa Folders
press the [BACK] button, or select and confirm Se aaeytse
Folder up. Videos

— Selecting the previous/next track/chapter*)):
Press the On/Off knob for the MMI control pan-
Fig. 213 Example: USBstick categories
el briefly to the left KK or to the right Po.
— Fast-forwarding and rewinding audio/video* Various categories for selecting audio/video* files
files: press and hold the On/Off knob on the are available in the media center.
MMI control panel to the left Kd or right PHI for
a longer time. > Press the [MEDIA] button. Press the left control
— Pausing or resuming playback: press the button until the sources overviewis displayed.
On/Off knob on the MMI control panel briefly. Select and confirm the desired source.
Active source
@) Tips
The active source is highlighted. The active
— You can scroll through long lists quickly by
source symbol (@) may change depending on the
turning the control knob quickly. The scroll-
connected device, the online media service*, or
ing speed depends on the number oflist en-
Internet radio*. The device name maybe dis-
tries.
played (for example: myPhone). As an example, a
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
USB stick is shown > fig. 212 connected to the
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
Audi music interface*.
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing. Depending on the active source, you can select
audio/video files* from the following categories
and add them tothe playlist:
@ Favorites
=e
(1) 7 Artists
The Favorites category appearsif at least one en-
try is stored in the favorites list. > page 244.
@ Artists
(4) ‘tl thoteT aa All available artists are displayed. Select and con-
[ale firm an artist, an album and then track.
@ Albums
Fig. 212 Example: USB stick categories
All available albums are displayed. Select and
confirm an album and then track.
© Genres
All available genresare displayed. Select and con-
firm a genre (such as Pop), an artist, an album
and then a song.
)) Depending on the DVD, this may not be possible during

playback.
242
Media
© Tracks aR)
All available tracks are displayed. Select and con-
firm a track.
@ Folders Oxree Rock Band

Rock Band
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis- ©- Rock Band
played. Select a folder, if necessary. Select and
confirm a track.
Playlists
All available playlists from the source and the Fig. 214 Input field and resultslist for free text search
smartplaylists are displayed. Select and confirm
a playlist and then a track. You can search in the active source by tracks and
video files*, for example
Smartplaylists:
You can open the free text search depending on
— Last played tracks: the last tracks played in the
the selected source.
selected source are displayed.
— Most played: the mostplayed tracksin the se- Requirement: the playlist > page 244 or media
lected source are displayed. center > page 242 mustbe displayed.
— 5 stars to 1 star: tracks from the selected
Opening free text search
source are displayed according to their rating.
— Unrated: all files from the selected source > Keep turning the control knob tothe left until
without rating information (for example, in the the free text search input field @ appears,or
ID3 tag) are displayed. push the control knob up.
© Videos* Using the free text search: see > page 173, Free
text search.
All available video files are displayed. Select and
confirm a video file. Entries that contain the entered search term are
listed in the results list G). You can search for ar-
@) Tips tists @, albums (8) or tracks @) as well as genres
— Only the categories supported by the medi- and videos.
um are available. For example, CD/DVD-
ROM tracks cannotbe selected with catego- @) Tips
ries such as Artists, Albums or Genres. — Only files in the active source will be
With an iPod/iPhone (source: Audi music in- searched.
terface* > page 239), the Podcasts, Audio — If you open free text search in the Folders
books and Composers categories are also category (7) > page 242,fig. 213 or the
available. Composers, Podcasts and Audio bookscat-
— For safety reasons, the video image is only egories, it will only search through the files
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On- in that folder.
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing.
—When synchronizing a portable device with
"Cloud“services, playlists may display incor-
rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
the device.
8V2012721B)
243
Media
Ets and confirm the location of the selected favor-

ite.
— Deleting a favorite: select a favorite from the
Hymn list > right control button > Delete favorite >
as
) The big B
Delete this favorite or Deleteall favorites.
2 Rock E
Sola
kB Additional settings
Fig. 215 Example: playlist Context-specific functions and settings are avail-
able depending on the selected source.
The track,artist, album and album cover,if appli-
cable, will appear in the playlist > fig. 215. > Press the right control button.
Options menu Sound settings
See > page 244, Additional settings. See > page 257.
Input level
iz Wol atest)
Up to 50 entries for every media source can be to the AUX connection cable or to a USB adapter
stored in any order in the favorites list. = page 239, Multimedia connections.
Requirement: the playlist or media center must The volume of the mobile device is adapted to
be open. the MMI. Audi recommends adjusting the volume
— Select the desired entry from the playlist or on the mobile device to 70% of the maximum
media center. volume output.
— Select: right control button > Store as favorite, Bluetooth settings
or press and hold the control knob for several
See > page 256.
seconds.
When you storea track as a favorite, the associat- Wi-Fi settings*

ed album will appear in the favorites list as an See > page 208, Wi-Fi settings.
entry.
Connection manager
Requirement: at least one entry must be stored
in the favorites list. See > page 254.
Displaying the favoriteslist: press the [MEDIA Show "NowPlaying"screen

button. Press the left control button until the With the function switched on ¥ and playlist
sources overview > page 24] is displayed. Select open, various information about the current track
the source that contains the categories (such as artist, album and album cover*) as well
=> page 242 (for example, SD card). Select the Fa- as the playing time and the remaining playing
vorites category. time are displayed.
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
Jukebox memory capacity*
played.
Information on the Jukebox memory capacity and
— Listening to a favorite: select and confirm a fa-
the number ofstored tracks in the Jukeboxis dis-
vorite from the list.
played.
— Movefavorite: select a favorite from the list >
right control button > Movefavorite. Select
244
Media
Rewind/Fast forward Depending on availability, various information

Turn the control knob tothe left or right, or move
will load about the track currently playing when
this function is switched on™.
your finger on the MMI touch control pad* from
the left to the right. Favorites
Shuffle) See > page 244.
With the function switched on,all files in the Additional options
playlist are played and shown in random order.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
Repeattrack!) a video file* or a DVD* mustbe playing.
When the function is switched on ¥,the current Parental control*
track repeats.
Playback of video DVDs can be restricted using
Back to 'Playback' parental control.
The options menu is closed. The track currently Enter the password for parental control. Pass-
playing appearsin the playlist. wordsetat the factory: 1234. You have the fol-
lowing options:
Play similar music*
— Protection level: select and confirm the protec-
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
tion level (for example, Level 5). Eight different
features such as artist, genres, mood, and beat,
protection levels can be set for parental con-
and a smartplaylist with similar tracks will be
trol. If you set the parental control level at Lev-
shown.
el 5, all DVDs from levels 1-5 can be played.
Play more... Video DVDs with a higher level will not play. Se-
lect Unrestricted to remove all of the restric-
A smartplaylist is shown based on the track cur-
tions.
rently playing. You can select between a playlist
with moretracks bythis artist, from this album
— Change password: edit the current password.
or of this genre. Switch to full screen
Copy to jukebox* The video image is displayed. Turn the control
See > page 235, Addingfiles to the Jukebox. knob to display the playlist, or press the [BACK
button.
Set as ringtone*
Replay video!)
to the MMI. The track currently playing must be
Whenthis function is switched on @, the current
in the Jukebox* > page 235. video will replay.
The selected track will be used as the ringtone Show DVD menu
for incoming calls. The DVD main menu opens in the Infotainment
system display.
Gracenote online database*
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet.
8V2012721B)
) The function automatically switches off when the sourceis

changed.
2) This function is notavailable for all cell phones.
245
Media
— Selecting a menu item: select and confirm a Aspectra- Description

menu item, or moveyour finger on the MMI tio
touch control pad* and press the control knob.
Original The image is displayed in the ratio
Audio track) of the source format. Select this
option if the image is distorted or a
You can manually set the audio track (language
section of the image is cut off
and audio format). The language and audio for-
when Autois selected.
mat options depend on the video DVD.
4:3 The image is set to the 4:3 picture
Subtitles») format. Black bars are shown on
the sides of the Infotainment sys-
You can manuallyselect subtitles for playback.
tem display.
The languages available depend on the DVD.
16:9 The image is set to the 16:9 picture
Aspect format. Black bars are shown in the
Audi recommends the Automatic setting for the upper and lower edgesof the Info-
picture format. You can set the picture format tainment system display.
depending on the activefile or source (for exam-
ple video file*, DVD*). @) Tips
— Notall video DVDs have parental control.
Aspect ra- Description
— The protection levels for the Parental con-
tio
trol are based on the US standards from the
Automatic |The MMI detects the picture for- Motion Picture Association of America
matof the source and displays the (MPAA). Note that the age levels for video
image in the optimum ratio. Black DVDsin European countries maydiffer.
bars may appear on the sides of — Password entry for Parental control will be
the display, depending on the
locked for approximately one minute if you
source format and the Infotain- enter the incorrect password three timesin
ment system display that is instal- a row. The passwordcan only be reset by an
led.
authorized Audi dealer.
Zoom The image is enlarged tofill the en-
tire Infotainment system display.
Switch the function off if the image
is distorted.
Cinema- Use this setting for films in cinema
scope format 21:9. Black bars are shown
in the upper and lower edges of the
Infotainment system display.
Supported media and file formats

OTeTN]
The following audio/video file properties are sup- card reader and the USB storage device* connec-
ported by the DVD drive*, the Jukebox”, the SD tion:
)) Depending on the DVD, this may not be possible during

playback.
246
Media
Audio files Videofiles*

Supported SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC memorycards: with a capacity of up to 128 GB
media DVD drive: audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text(artist, album, song)*, CD-ROMs with
a capacity of up to 700 MB; DVD+R/RW;DVD video; DVD audio with audio tracks that
are compatible with a DVD video player;
Audi music interface*: mobile devices (such as an iPod > page 239, MTP player, USB
storage device in “USB Device Subclass 1 and 6” that conforms to USB 2.0: USB sticks,
USB MP3 players (Plug-and-Play-capable), external USB flash drives and hard drives
File system Memorycards: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB storage devices: FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connection
CD/DVDfile systems: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF
Metadata Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max.
800x800 px. The album cover from the
medium or from Gracenote* is displayed,
depending on availability.
Format MPEG Windows MPEG FLAC MPEG 1/2 |MPEG4 AVC Windows Media
1/2 Media 2/4 (H.264) Video 9
Layer3 |Audio9
and 10
File exten- .mp3 .wma .m4a flac -Mpg; -mp4 .wmv
sion .m4b -mpeg .m4v .asf
.aac «Mov
-avi
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
Characteris- up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz up to maximum 2,000 kbit/s and
tics 48 kHz sampling frequencies |sampling 720x576 px. at maximum 25 fps
frequen-
vy
Number DVD drive*: maximum 1,000 files per medium
offiles Jukebox*: approximately 10 GB memory capacity; maximum 3,000 files can be import-
ed
USB storage device and memory cards: maximum 10,000 files per medium; maximum
1,000 files per playlist/directory
@) Tips not always display, depending on the sys-

tem language.
— The media drives do not support the Win- — The manufacturer of the storage device can
dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. provide information about its “USB Device
— For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom- Subclass”.
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The — Some MTP player functions are not support-
display showing the remaining play time ed, such as rating music tracks and video
maydiffer for audio files with variablebit playback.
rate.
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag
8V2012721B)
information) maydisplay differently or may
247
Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive
The following audio file properties are supported

by the CD drive:
Audiofiles
Supported Audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text(artist, album, track)*, CD-ROMs with a capaci-
media ty of up to 700 MB
File system CD file system: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF
Metadata Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover from the medi-
um may be displayed, depending on availability.
Format MPEG 1/2 Windows Media Au- MPEG 2/4 FLAC
Layer 3 dio 9 and 10
File extension |.mp3 -wma -m4a flac
-m4b
aac
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
Characteristics up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequencies /48 kHz sampling
frequency
Number Maximum 1,000 files per medium
of files
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag

@ Tips
information) may display differently or may
— For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom- not always display, depending on the sys-
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The tem language.
display showing the remaining play time
maydiffer for audio files with variable bit
rate.
Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
Audi music interface/Bluetooth Read the instructions in the chapter > page 239, Multimedia con-
audio player*: mobile deviceis nections/> page 236, Bluetooth audio player. You can learn
not supported. about supported mobile devices in the Audi database for mobile
devices at www.audiusa.com/bluetooth.
Audi music interface: the volume Adjust the volume of the mobile device to approximately 70% of
is too high/too low when starting the maximum output > page 244, Input level.
playback through the AUX input.
Audi music interface: the mobile For manycell phones or mobile devices, playback is not possible
device is not recognized as a when the battery Level is too low (less than 5% ofits capacity).
source. The mobile device will only be recognized as a source in the MMI
after connecting if the battery charge is sufficient.
248
Media
Problem Solution
Audi music interface: malfunc- The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
tions during audio playback function off > page 256 when you are not using the Bluetooth au-
through an iPod/iPhone. dio player.
Audi music interface: Changed Reset the Media settings to the factory default settings
content ona mobile device ®that => page 254.
is connected to the Audi music in-
terface is not displayed in the me-
dia center.
AUX input: there is static when When connecting and disconnecting, the External audio player
connecting and disconnecting the source is already selected. Before connecting or disconnecting the
AUX connection cable. mobile device, either mute the device (see > page 257) or switch
to a different audio source (for example > page 228, Opening the
radio).
Bluetooth audio player*/Wi-Fi Only one interface should be actively used at a time to ensure
audio player*: audio playback in- problem-free playback.
terference.
Wi-Fi audio player*: audio play- Audio playback interference can occur on some cell phones if the
back interference. Internet connection in the vehicle was not established through
the SIM card reader on the MMI control panel and the mobile da-
ta option on the cell phone is switched on. Deactivate the mobile
data option on your cell phone.
Jukebox*: tracks on the imported When importing playlists, all of the files themselves must be im-
playlist are grayed out. ported.
Jukebox*: imported tracks cannot If you cannotfind imported tracks in the media center, they may
be played or found. not be supported. Only copy supported files > page 246 to the
Jukebox.
Wi-Fi audio player*: multiple de- Close the myAudi app on the connected devices (such as smart-
vices are connected to the Wi-Fi phones)that are not being used as the Wi-Fi audio player*. Like-
hotspot. A media player (such as a wise, close the UPnP server apps or the media permissions on the
smartphone) appears as the integrated UPnP/DLNA server. Connect the desired device as a Wi-
source and cannot be changed. Fi audio player* > page 236.
Online media*: connection failed To establish a connection to the MMI, the MMI connection switch
between the MMI and the myAudi must be switched on in the myAudi app status screen.
app.
Bluetooth audio player*: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.
playback. Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your Blue-
tooth device (such as a smartphone).
8V2012721B)
249
Media
Wi-Fi hotspot*: your Wi-Fi device |Make sure the network optimization functions are switched off in
is disconnected from the Wi-Fi the Wi-Fi settings or in the network settings for your Wi-Fi device.
hotspot. For additional information refer to the user guide for your Wi-Fi
device.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode MTPis selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possible.
@) Applies only to MTP devices. Does notapply to Apple devices and USB massstorage devices.
250
Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate

interface mobile devices while driving, because this in-
creases the risk of an accident.
Setup
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface @) Note
You can connect your smartphone to the MMIus- Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
ing the Audi smartphone interface. Certain con- General information on page 203.
tent on your smartphone is adapted to the Info-
tainment system display while driving and can G) Tips
be operated through the MMIcontrol panel. — The functions that can be used depend on
Requirement the following factors, among others:
—The brand of your smartphone
The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition
—The version of the operating system in
your smartphone
An iPhone generation 5 or newer with Lightning — The softwareversion of the app used
connector and iOS 7.1.2 operating system or — The USB adapter cable and correct connec-
higher is required. Or: tion
— Your cell phone service provider
A smartphone with the Android Auto app and An-
droid 5.0 Lollipop operating system or higher is — The customized settings on your smart-
phone
required.
— One of the factors above or a combination
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- of any of them could cause your smart-
terface > page 239 using the applicable USB phone to be incompatible with the Audi
adapter > page 239, fig. 209. smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot
> Select and confirm Activate Apple CarPlay or be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
Activate Android Auto now. For more information and assistance, refer
> Follow the system instructions. to the user guide and the manufacturer of
> Pay attention to any additional system prompts your smartphone.
on your smartphone, if applicable. — If the connected smartphone has voice con-
If you chose not to use Apple CarPlay or Android trol, you can operate your smartphone using
Auto when connecting your smartphone for the the external voice recognition system
first time, you can start the Audi smartphone in- => page 186.
terface later on using the Connection manager. — The menu language shown in the MMI is
> Select: [MENU] button > Audi smartphonein- based on the settings in your smartphone.
terface > Change to connection manager. — The time displayed in the MMI is based on
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- the settings in your smartphone.
terface using the appropriate USB adapter — Some MMI functions are not available when
=> page 239, fig. 209. Apple CarPlay or Android Autois active.
> Select and confirm Audi smartphone interface — You cannot connect any mobile devices via
in the Connection manager > page 254. You Bluetooth when an Apple CarPlay connec-
can select your smartphone in the list of devi- tion is active.
ces that are already paired > page 256. — When the Apple CarPlay connection is ac-
> Follow the system instructions. tive, Tag this song for iTunes* is not availa-
ble > page 229.
ZA WARNING
8V2012721B)
Driving requires your complete and undivided

attention. As the driver, you have completere-
251
Audi smartphone interface
Operating Android Auto: to go back to the Android Auto

Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface menu bar, push the control knob down.
Opening a menu Opening a menu item

Apple CarPlay: you can go back to the Apple Car- Select and confirm a menu item using the MMI
Play main menu regardless of the selected menu control panel.
item by pressing and holding the [BACK] button.
Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the battery charge level on your smartphone.
interface cannot be Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
opened. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlayis available in the country wherethe vehi-
cle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Connecting the Makesure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
smartphone to the adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
MMI failed. => page 239.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your smartphone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new vehi-
cles.
The smartphone is Makesure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
not automatically adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
detected. => page 239.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.
252
System settings
System settings Time format

If you select 24h, the clock will display, for exam-
Setting the date and ple, 13:00. If you select AM/PM, the clock will
time display, for example, 1:00 PM.
You can set the clock time manually or using the
Date format
GPS*,
If you select DD.MM.YYYY,the date display will
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control show,for example, 31.08.2017. If you select
button > MMI settings > Date & time. MM/DD/YYVY,the date display will show,for ex-
> Or: select: [MENU] button > Vehicle > left con- ample, 08/31/2017. If you select YYYY-MM-DD,
trol button > Vehicle settings > Date & time. the date display will show, for example,
2017-08-31.
Automatic setting
When this function is switched on ¥, the time
MMI settings
and date are automatically set.
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control
Time
button > MMI settings.
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be
switched off. Language
You can change the display language as well as
Press the control knob. You can set the Time
the language for the voice guidance* and voice
manually by turning and pressing the control
recognition system”*.
knob.
The number of languages available depends on
Date
the market.
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be
Measurement units
switched off.
The following measurement units can be set de-
Press the control knob. You can set the Date
pending on availability: Speed, Distance, Tem-
manually by turning and pressing the control
perature, Fuel consumption, Volume, Pressure.
knob.
Mobile device reminder signal
Time zone
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
When selecting the appropriate time zone, a
Requirement: your cell phone must be Qi-capa-
sampling of countries in this zone will be listed.
ble ) or connected to the Audi music interface @
Automatic time zone* with a USB adapter cable > page 191, fig. 179.
When this function is switched on @, the time When the device reminder signal is switched on,
will automatically adjust to the corresponding you will be notified that your mobile deviceis still
time zone. in the Audi phone box* when you leave the vehi-
cle. You can select between Spoken cue, Signal
Automatic daylight saving time* tone and Off.
When this function is switched on M, the time
Mobile device reminder signal volume: you can
will automatically switch to daylight saving time.
adjust the reminder signal volume by turning the
control knob.
8V2012721B)
D_ The Qi standard makes it possible to charge your mobile

device wirelessly.
253
System settings
Switch off pop-up: when the function is switched Factory settings

on [¥,the messages in the Infotainment system Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
display regarding the charging status of your cell ing functions can be resetto factory settings:
phone in the Audi phone box* are hidden. The re-
minder not to forget your cell phone when leav- — Soundsettings
ing the vehicle is also switchedoff. — Radio
— Media settings
Tool tips — Jukebox*
When this function is switched on M, your MMI — Directory
showsyou tips for input. The frequency of how — Telephone
often it displays decreases with time. — Bluetooth and Wi-Fi*
— Navigation settings*
Speech dialog system
Appliesto: vehicles with voice recognition system
— Navigation and online memory*
— Speech dialog system*
— Message settings*
functions maybe available:
— Apps*
Command display: when this function is switch- — Tool tips
ed on M, the MMI will show you the possible — Audi connect*
commands for voice input in the respective — Audi smartphone interface*
menu.
You can select the desired functions individually
Short dialog: when this function is switched on or all at once with the option Selectall entries.
, a shorter form of the promptsis used. Select and confirm Restore factory settings.
Command during voice output*: this function is
switched on at the factory. When this function is
@) Tips
switched on [M, you can say new commands dur- — Makesure that not only the settings were
ing announcements. You do not need towait for deleted but also the stored data, if necessa-
the signal tone (beep) during an announcement. ry.
When the function is switched off (J, you need to — Please note that the voice recognition sys-
wait for the signal tone (beep) to say a new com- tem* is not available in Cabriolets.
mand.
Volume: you can adjust the volume of the Connection manager

promptsby turning the control knob. Introduction
Individual speech training (only when the vehi- The connection managerprovides an overview of
cle is stationary): you can adapt the voice recog- your connected devices and their network status.
nition system to your voice or pronunciation in or-
der to improve the system's ability to recognize > Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control
your speech. Individual speech training is com- button > MMI settings > Connection manager.
prised of 20 speech entries that consist of com- > Select and confirm a menu item.
mands and sequences of numbers. You can de-
If a mobile device was already connected and you
lete the programmed voice training with the Re-
select and confirm the corresponding menu item,
set individual speech training function.
the device name and connection status are dis-
Display brightness played under the menu item.
You can adjust the brightness of the Infotain- You can individually Connect ()or Disconnect
ment system display by turning the control knob. (L) a paired device.
254
System settings
Requirement: — Connect new device: search for and connect a

mobile device (such as a smartphone).
— The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition
— List of devices already paired: select your mo-
bile device from the list of all the devices that
— The Bluetooth settings will open on your mo-
are already paired.
bile device during the connection setup.
— The Bluetooth function and visibility of the MMI
Audio player
=> page 256 and mobile device must be switch-
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth or Wi-Fi audio player
ed on.
— The mobile device to be connected must not be Bluetooth player*
connected to any other Bluetooth device. Requirement: the Bluetooth function and visibili-
ty must be switched on in the MMI > page 256
aatutleva darelit and on the Bluetooth audio player.
— Connect new device: press the control knob.
— Connect new device: search for and connect a Select Bluetooth audio player. Search for and
cell phone. connect a mobile device.
— List of devices already paired: select your cell — List of devices already paired: select a Blue-
phone from the list of all the devices that are tooth device from the list of all the devices that
already paired. are already paired.
Wi-Fi audio player*

Yelle ave aCe
Applies to: vehicles with telephone Requirement: the Wi-Fi hotspot* on the MMI
= page 208 and on your Wi-Fi audio player must
— Connect new device: search for and connect a
be switched on.
cell phone.
— List of devices already paired: select your cell — Connect new device: press the control knob.
phone from the list of all the devices that are Search for and connect a Wi-Fi capable device.
already paired. — Disconnect Wi-Fi audio player: deactivate the
Wi-Fi on your Wi-Fi capable device. The device
will be automatically removed from the list.
PELMeolaa-laaol)
@) Note
— The data connection is made using the embed- Alwaysfollow the information found in >@ in
ded SIM card )) > page 204. You do not need to General information on page 203.
adjust any additional settings.
@) Note
General information on page 203. Display contacts from a cell phone (or an addi-
tional cell phone).
myAudi app Requirement: no cell phones can be connected to

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment the MMI using the Handsfreeprofile.
Requirement: the myAudi app mustbe installed — Connect new device: search for and connect a
and open on your mobile device. new cell phone.
8V2012721B)
2) SIM card installed in the vehicle at the factory.
255
System settings
— List of devices already paired: select your cell is displayed. You can reset the data usage infor-
phone from the list of all the cell phones that mation to zero using the Reset data counter
are already paired. option.
— Network status: the mobile network provider
Audi smartphone interface for data service as well as the network status
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface are displayed.
— Connect your cell phone to the Audi music in- Wi-Fi settings*
terface > page 239 using a USB adapter See > page 208, Wi-Fi settings.
> page 239,fig. 209.
— Select your cell phone from the list of cell Storing as a default telephone
phones that have already been connected. Applies to: vehicles with telephone

Pele aCe] Mey Latour to the MMI > page 188.
Depending on the selected function, you can use When the mobile device is in range and the Blue-
the right control button to access the available tooth function on the mobile device and in the
additional options in the connection manager. MMLis switched on, this mobile device will be
given priority over the other Bluetooth devices
Delete Bluetooth device* and will be connected directly to the MMI. The
The selected cell phone/mobile device is discon- connected mobile device is displayed first in the
nected from the MMI and is removed from the devicelist.
list of all devices that are already paired. Network settings*
Show Bluetoothprofiles* — Login: you can chose an Automatic login to
You can Connector Disconnect the Handsfree, your cell phone service provider's network, or
Messages’, Directory/contacts and Bluetooth you can choose a Manual login from the list of
audio player profiles separately. available networks.
— Network selection: available networks in the
Bluetooth settings* present location can be selected under network
— Bluetooth: select and confirm a setting for the selection. This function is only available for the
Bluetooth connection visibility. Select Visible Manual login setting.
for the MMI to be visible to other devices. Se-
Apple CarPlay sound settings/Android Auto
lect Invisible for the MMI to not be visible to sound settings
other devices. However,it is still possible to es- Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
tablish a Bluetooth connection with paired de-
See > page 257.
vices when the visibility is switched off. Select
Off to turn visibility off. Then a Bluetooth con- AboutApple CarPlay/About Android Auto
nection is not possible. Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
— Bluetooth audio player: when this function is Here you will find legal information regarding the
switched on , the Bluetooth audio player is use of Apple CarPlay or Android Auto and infor-
available as a source in the Media menu. mation about device-specific data exchange.
— Bluetooth name: the MMI Bluetooth name (for
example "AUDI MMI") is displayed and can be Delete Apple CarPlay device/Delete Android
changed. Auto device
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Online settings*
Requirement: your cell phone must not be con-
— Data usage counter: the amount of data pack- nected to the Audi music interface with a USB
ets that are sent and received through the MMI adapter.
256
System settings
Select: Audi smartphone > a device from the list the time. This allows you to adjust the sound set-
> right control button. tings for each audio source separately.
To remove your mobile device from the list, select Balance/fader (Sound focus)
and confirm Delete Apple CarPlay device or De-
— Adjusting the sound distribution to the left or
lete Android Auto device.
right: press the control knob. Turn the control
knob to the left or right to the desired position.
System update — Adjusting the sound distribution to the front
> Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control or rear: press the control knob again. Turn the
button > System maintenance. control knob tothe left or right to the desired
Position.
— System update: insert the storage device with — Adjusting the sound distribution using the
the update data into the appropriate drive MMI touch*: move your finger on the MMI
=> page 234. Select and confirm the drive > touch control panel* in the desired direction.
Start update. The length of the process de-
pends on the size of the update. Sound effects
— Resetdriver installation: the selected media Select and confirm a Focus setting:
driver package is reset to the settings at the — All: all speakers in the vehicle are active (sym-
time ofdelivery. metrical sound distribution).
— Version information: information on the MMI — Front: only the speakersin the front of the ve-
software version and the navigation database* hicle are active.
software version is displayed. The Softwarein- — Rear*: only the speakers in the rear of the vehi-
formation function also provides information cle are active.
on the software contained in the MMI and the
licensing agreement. Surround level
Turn the control knob to adjust the surround
Sound settings sound level.
The sounddistribution and volume of the MMI Subwoofer
can be adjustedindividually. The settings depend
Turn the control knob to adjust the subwoofer.
on the vehicle equipment.
Speed dependent volume control*
Turn the control knob to adjust the playback vol-
ume to the noise inside the vehicle.
Volume settings
Adjusting the volume
The volume of an audio source or a system mes-
Fig. 216 Adjusting the balance/fader
sage (for example, from the voice recognition
> Select: [MENU] button > Sound > left control system*) can be adjusteddirectly while the
button > Entertainment. sound is playing using the On/Off knob.
Treble/Bass — Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the

On/Off knob (@) > page 165,fig. 160 to the
You can adjust the Treble and Basssettings by
right or left.
8V2012721B)
turning the control knob. The changed settings

only apply for the audio sourcethatis active at
257
System settings
— Muting or pausing: press the On/Off knob Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the voice
briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob tothe left un- guidance volume by turning the control knob. Or:
til the symbol @) > page 174 appears. An active you can adjust the voice guidance volume during
audio/video source is stopped. active route guidance by turning the On/Off knob.
—Unmuting or resuming: press the On/Off knob
Entertainment fader: the volume of audio play-
briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob to the right.
back can be temporarily lowered when the park-
ing system or voice guidance is active.
ZA WARNING
To reducethe risk of an accident, adjust the Voice recognition system
volume of the audio system so that audible
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po- Command display: see > page 254.
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Short dialog: see > page 254.
times.
Speech dialog system volume: see > page 254.
G) Tips Individual speech training: see > page 254.
Volume that is too high or too low is automat-
ically adjusted to a set level when the MMI is Parking aid*
switched on. You can adjust the volume ofthe signal tone by
turning the control knob.
Adjusting the system volume — Adjusting the Front volume: select and con-
> Select: [MENU] button > Sound > left control firm High, Medium or Low.
button. — Adjusting the Rear volume: select and confirm

High, Medium or Low.
Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone MMI touch*
Mute telephone: messages and ringtonesare set Turn the control knob to adjust the volume of the
to mute. spoken prompts from the MMI touch*.
Ringtone: see > page 200, Ringtone and volume

settings.
Restarting the MMI
Ringtone volume: you can adjust the volume of RAH-8611
ew
the selected ringtone by turning the control
knob.
Message volume: you can adjust the volume of

the notification for an incoming text message by
turning the control knob. = «
Microphoneinputlevel: you can adjust the call
volume during a phone call by turning the control
knob. Fig. 217 Button combination to restart the system
Navigation > Briefly press the control knob and both buttons
at the same time to immediately open the
Voice guidance: see > page 220. menu upward > fig. 217.
Voice guidance during phone call: see
=> page 220.
258
System settings
Software license
information
Information on MMI softwareand licensing

agreements
— Select: [MENU] button > Settings > left control
button > System maintenance > Version infor-
mation.
— Or: online at www.audiusa.com/softwareinfo.
Information on instrument cluster software and

licensing agreements
Press the reset button twice within five seconds

after switching the ignition on Y.
8V2012721B)
) Notavailablein all vehicles.
259
Driving safety
Driving safety Important things to do before driving
Basics Safety is everybody's job! Vehicle and occupant

safety always depends on the informed and care-
Safe driving habits ful driver.
Please remember- safetyfirst! For your safety and the safety of your passen-
The individual safety features of your vehicle can gers, before driving always:
work together as a system to help protect you > Make surethat all lights and signals are operat-
and your passengersin a wide range ofaccidents. ing correctly.
These features cannot work as a system if they > Makesure that the tire pressure is correct.
are not always correctly adjusted and correctly > Makesure that all windowsare clean and afford
used. good visibility to the outside.
This chapter contains important information, > Secureall luggage and other items carefully
=> page 63, > page 63.
tips, instructions and warnings that you need to
read and observe for your own safety, the safety > Make sure that nothing can interfere with the
of your passengers and others. We have summar- pedals.
> Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
ized here what you need to know about safety
belts, airbags, child restraints as well as child correctly for your height.
safety. Your safety is for us priority number1. Al- > Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
ways observethe information and warnings in straints according to their height.
this section - for your own safety as well as that > Make sureto use the right child restraint cor-
rectly to protect children > page 301, Child
of your passengers.
safety.
The information in this section applies to all > Sit properly in your seat and makesure that
model versions of your vehicle. Some ofthe fea- your passengers do the same > page 58, Front
tures described in this sections may be standard seats.
equipment on some models, or maybe optional > Fasten your safety belt and wear it properly. Al-
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask so instruct your passengersto fasten their safe-
your authorized Audi dealer. ty belts properly > page 268.
ZXWARNING What impairs driving safety?

— Always makesure that you followthe in-
structions and heed the WARNINGS in this Safe driving is directly related to the condition of
Manual. It is in your interest and in the in- the vehicle, the driver as well as the driver’s abili-
terest of your passengers. ty to concentrate on the road without being dis-

— Always keep the complete Owner's Litera-
tracted.
ture in your Audi when you lend or sell your The driver is responsible for the safety of the ve-
vehicle so that this important information hicle and all of its occupants. If your ability to
will always be available to the driver and drive is impaired, safety risks for everybody in the
passengers. vehicle increase and you also become a hazard to
— Always keep the Owner's literature handy so everyone else on the road > /\. Therefore:
that you can find it easily if you have ques-
tions. > Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers
or by using a cellular telephone.
> NEVER drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (by medications, alcohol, drugs, etc.).
> Observeall traffic laws, rules of the road and
speed limits and plain common sense.
260
Driving safety
> ALWAYSadjust your speed to road, traffic and > Adjust the steering wheel so that the steering
weather conditions. wheel and airbag cover points at your chest and
> Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive not at your face.
for more than two hoursat a stretch. > Grasp the top of the steering wheel with your
> Do NOTdrive when you are tired, under pres- elbow(s) slightly bent.
sure or when you are stressed. > For adjustable head restraints: Adjust the head
restraint so the upper edge is as even as possi-
Z\ WARNING ble with the top of your head. If that is not pos-
sible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it
Impaired driving safety increases the risk of
is as close to this position as possible. Move the
serious personal injury and death whenever a
vehicle is being used. head restraint so that it is as close to the back
of the head as possible.
» Fasten and wear safetybelts correctly
Correct passenger => page 271.
seating positions > Always keep both feetin the footwell so that
you are in control of the vehicle at all times.
Proper seating position for the driver
For detailed information on how to adjust the
The properdriver seating position is important
for safe, relaxed driving. driver's seat, see > page 58.
ZA WARNING
B4G-0375
Drivers who are unbelted, out of position or

too close to the airbag can be seriously injured
by an airbag as it unfolds. To help reduce the
risk of serious personal injury:
— Always adjust the driver's seat and the
steering wheel so that there are at least
10 inches (25 cm) between your breastbone
and the steering wheel.
Fig. 218 Correct seating position — Alwaysadjustthe driver's seat and the
steering wheel so that there are at least
For your ownsafety and to reduce the risk of in- 4 inches (10 cm) between the knees and the
jury in the event of an accident, we recommend lower part of the instrument panel.
that you adjust the driver's seat to the following — Alwayshold the steering wheel on the out-
position:
side of the steering wheel rim with your
> Adjust the driver's seat so that you can easily hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-
push the pedalsall the wayto the floor while tions to help reduce the risk of personal in-
keeping your knee(s) slightly bent > A\. juryif the driver's airbag inflates.
> Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in — Never hold the steering wheel at the
an upright position so that your back comes in 12 o'clock position or with your hands at
full contact with it when you drive. other positions inside the steering wheel
> Adjust the steering wheel so that thereis a dis- rim or on the steering wheel hub. Holding
tance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the the steering wheel the wrong way can cause
steering wheel and your breast bone fig. 218. serious injuries to the hands, arms and head
If not possible, see your authorized Audi deal- if the driver's airbag inflates.
ership about adaptive equipment.
8V2012721B)
261
Driving safety
— Pointing the steering wheel toward your > Keep bothfeet flat on the floor in front of the
face decreases the ability of the supplemen- front passenger seat.
tal driver's airbag to protect you in a colli- > Fasten and wear safety belts correctly
sion. => page 271.
— Alwayssit in an upright position and never
For detailed information on how to adjust the
lean against or place any part of your body
front passenger's seat, see > page 58.
too close to the area wherethe airbags are
located. ZA\ WARNING
— Before driving, always adjust the front seats
Front seat passengers who are unbelted, out
properly and makesure that all passengers
of position or too close to the airbag can be
are properly restrained.
seriously injured or killed by the airbag as it
— For adjustable head restraints: before driv-
unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious per-
ing, always also adjust the head restraints
sonal injury:
properly.
— Passengers mustalways sit in an upright po-
— Never adjust the seats while the vehicleis
sition and never lean against or place any
moving. Your seat may move unexpectedly
part of their body too close to the area
and you could lose control of the vehicle.
wherethe airbags are located.
— Never drive with the backrest reclined or tilt-
— Passengers who are unbelted, out ofposi-
ed far back! The farther the backrests are
tion or too close to the airbag can be seri-
tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due
ously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with
to incorrect positioning of the safety belt
great force in the blink of an eye.
and improper seating position.
— Always makesure that there are at least
— Children must alwaysride in child seats
10 inches (25 cm) between the front pas-
=> page 301. Special precautions apply when
senger‘s breastbone and the instrument
installing a child seat on the front passenger
panel.
seat > page 276.
— Always makesure that thereare at least
4 inches (10 cm) between the front passen-
Proper seating position for the front ger‘s knees and the lower part of the instru-
passenger ment panel.
The proper front passenger seating position is — Each passenger mustalwayssit on a seat of
important for safe, relaxed driving. their own and properly fasten and wear the
safety belt belonging to that seat.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of in- — Before driving, always adjust the front pas-
jury in the event of an accident, we recommend senger seat properly.
that you adjust the seat for the front passenger — For adjustable head restraints: before driv-
to the following position: ing, always also adjust the head restraints
> Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in properly.
an upright position and your back comes in full — Alwayskeep your feet on the floor in front of
contact with it whenever the vehicle is moving. the seat. Never rest them on the seat,in-
> For adjustable head restraints: adjust the head strument panel, out of the window,etc. The
restraint so the upper edge is as even as possi- airbag system and safety belt will not be
ble with the top of your head. If that is not pos- able to protect you properly and can even in-
sible, try to adjust the head restraint so thatit crease the risk of injury in a crash.
is as close to this position as possible — Never drive with the backrest reclined or tilt-
=> page 60. Move the head restraint so that it is ed far back! The farther the backrests are
as close to the back of the head as possible. tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due
262
Driving safety
to incorrect positioning ofthe safety belt — For adjustable head restraints: always adjust
and improper seating position. the head restraint properly so that it can
— Children must alwaysride in child seats give maximum protection.
= page 301. Special precautions apply when
installing a child seat on the front passenger ace) LeeLeeee)
seat > page 276. Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints are an impor-

Proper seating positions for passengers in tant partofyour vehicle's occupant restraint sys-
rear seats
tem and can help to reducethe risk ofinjuries in
Rear seat passengers must sit upright with both accident situations.
feet on the floor consistent with their physical
B4G-0454
size and be properly restrained wheneverthe ve-
hicle is in use.
To reduce the risk of injury caused by an incorrect

seating position in the event of a sudden braking
maneuver or an accident, your passengers on the
rear bench seat must always observethe follow-
ing:
> For adjustable head restraints: adjust the head

Fig. 219 Head restraint: viewed from the front
restraint so the upper edge is as even as possi-
ble with the top of your head. If that is not pos-
The head restraints must be correctly adjusted to
sible, try to adjust the head restraint so that it
achieve the best protection.
is as close to this position as possible
=> page 60. > Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is
> Keep both feet flat in the footwell in front of as even as possible with the top of your head. If
the rear seat. that is not possible, try to adjust the head re-
> Fasten and wear safety belts properly straint so that it is as close to this position as
> page 271. possible > fig. 219.
> Make sure that children are always properly re- > Applies to: forward/back adjustable head re-
strained in a child restraint that is appropriate straints: Move the head restraint so that it is as
for their size and age > page 301. close to the back of the head as possible.
> If there is a passenger on the rear center seat-
Z\ WARNING ing position, slide the center head restraint up-
ward at least to the next notch.
Passengers who are improperly seated on the
rear seat can be seriously injured in a crash. Adjusting head restraints > page 60.
— Each passenger mustalwayssit on a seat of
their own and properly fasten and wear the ZAWARNING
safety belt belonging to that seat. All seats are equipped with head restraints.
— Safety belts only offer maximum protection Driving without head restraints or with head
when the safetybelts are properly posi- restraints that are not properly adjusted in-
tioned on the body and securely latched. By creases the risk of serious or fatal neck injury
notsitting upright, a rear seat passenger in- dramatically. To help reduce the risk of injury:
creasesthe risk of personal injury from im- — Alwaysdrive with the head restraints in
8V2012721B)
properly positioned safety belts! place and properly adjusted.

— Every person in the vehicle must have a
properly adjusted head restraint. >
263
Driving safety
— Always makesure each person in the vehicle — never stand on the seats
properly adjusts their head restraint. Adjust — never kneel on the seats
the head restraint so the upper edge is as — never ride with the seatback reclined
even as possible with the top of your head. — never lie down on the seats
If that is not possible, try to adjust the head — never lean up against the instrument panel
restraint so that it is as close to this position — never sit on the edge of the seat
as possible. — never sit sideways
— Applies to: forward/back adjustable head re- — never lean out the window
straints: Move the head restraint so that it is — never put your feet out the window
as close to the back of the head as possible. — never put your feet on the instrument panel
— Never attempt to adjust head restraint while — never rest your feet on the seat cushion or back
driving. If you have driven off and must ad- of the seat
just the driver headrest for any reason, first — never ride in the footwell
stop the vehicle safely before attempting to — never ride in the cargo area
adjust the head restraint.
— Children must alwaysbe properly restrained ZA\ WARNING
in a child restraint that is appropriate for
Improper seating positions increase the risk
their age and size > page 301.
of serious personal injury and death whenever
a vehicle is being used.
Examples of improper seating positions — Always makesurethat all vehicle occupants
The occupant restraint system can only reduce stay in a proper seating position and are
properly restrained whenever the vehicle is
the risk of injury if vehicle occupants are properly
seated.
being used.
Improper seating positions can cause serious in- Driver's and front
jury or death. Safety belts can only work when
they are properly positioned on the body. Im-
passenger's footwell
proper seating positions reduce the effectiveness ec eNeatly
of safety belts and will even increase the risk of Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
injury and death by moving the safety belt to crit-
ical areas of the body. Improper seating positions ZA WARNING
also increase the risk of serious injury and death Always make sure that the knee airbag can in-
when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant flate without interference. Objects between
who is not in the proper seating position. A driver
yourself and the airbag can increase the risk
is responsible for the safety of all vehicle occu- of injury in an accident by interfering with the
pants and especially for children. Therefore:
way the airbag deploysor by being pushed in-
> Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect to you as the airbag deploys.
seating position when the vehicle is being used — No persons (children) or animals should ride
>A. in the footwell in front of the passenger
seat. If the airbag deploys, this can result in
The following bulletins list only some sample po- serious or fatal injuries.
sitions that will increase the risk of serious injury — No objects of any kind should be carried in
and death. Our hope is that these examples will the footwell area in front of the driver's or
make you more awareof seating positions that passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping
are dangerous. bags, for example) can hamper or prevent
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is moving: proper deployment of the airbag. Small ob-
jects can be thrown through the vehicleif
— never stand up in the vehicle
264
Driving safety
the airbag deploys and injure you or your Floor mats used in your vehicle must be attached
passengers. to these fasteners. Properly securing the floor
matswill prevent them from sliding into posi-
tions that could interfere with the pedals or im-
Pedal area
pair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Z\ WARNING
The pedals must always be free to move and
Pedals that cannot movefreely can result in a
must neverbe interfered with by a floor mat or
loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of
any other object.
serious personal injury.
Makesurethat all pedals movefreely without in- — Always makesure that floor mats are prop-
terference and that nothing prevents them from erly secured.
returning to their original positions. — Never place or install floor mats or other
floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be
Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free
properly secured in place to prevent them
and can be secured with floor mat fasteners.
from slipping and interfering with the ped-
If a brake circuit fails, increased brake pedal trav- als or the ability to control the vehicle.
el is required to bring the vehicle to a full stop. — Never place or install floor mats or other
floor coverings on top of already installed
ZA WARNING floor mats. Additional floor mats and other
Pedals that cannot movefreely can cause loss coverings will reduce the size of the pedal
of vehicle control and increase the risk of seri- area and interfere with the pedals.
ous injury. — Alwaysproperly reinstall and secure floor
— Never place any objects in the driver's foot- matsthat have been taken out for cleaning.
well. An object could get into the pedal area — Always makesure that objects cannotfall in-
and interfere with pedal function. In case of to the driver footwell while the vehicle is
sudden braking or an accident, you would moving. Objects can become trapped under
notbe able to brake or accelerate! the brake pedal and accelerator pedal caus-
— Always makesure that nothing can fall or ing a loss ofvehicle control.
moveinto the driver's footwell.
1a Coley Mela Me lehTeed el
Always use floor mats that can be securely at-

tached to the floor mat fasteners and do not in-
terfere with the free movement of the pedals.
> Make sure that the floor mats are properly se-
cured and cannot moveand interfere with the
pedals > A\.
Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area un-
obstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannotslip out of position. You can obtain
suitable floor mats from your authorized Audi
Dealer.
8V2012721B)
Floor mat fasteners are installed in your Audi.
265
Driving safety
Active rollover AN WARNING

protection system Do not usethe area behind the rear seat head
restraints > fig. 220 as a seat or storage area.
Applies to: vehicles with power top This is the area wherethe rollbars deploy.If
the rollover protection system is triggered,
The rollover protection system protects vehicle
objects placed there can be propelled through
occupantsin the event of a rollover.
the vehicle and makeit moredifficult for the
rollbars to deploy. This increases the risk for
B8V-0333
serious or life-threatening injuries.
When is rollover protection deployed?

Rollover protection deploysin a collision orroll-

over.
Depending on the collision, sensors throughout

Fig. 220 Rear seats: rollbar deployment range the vehicle and the control module trigger the
rollover system to deploy.
B8V-0334
For safety reasons,rollover protection also de-

ploys during front, side and rear collisions above
a certain level of severity.
Retracting rollover protection

B8V-0335
Fig. 221 Rear seats: deployed rollbar
The active rollover protection system consistsof:
— tworollbars
— the safety belts with belt tensioners
— the windshield frame
—the rollover sensors
The active rollover protection system provides

additional safety in the event of a rollover. Within
B8V-0336
milliseconds, sensors deploy tworollbars located

behind the head restraints in the rear seats
fig. 221.
The rollbars, reinforced windshield frame and
belt tensioners help protect front and rear pas-
sengersin the event of a rollover.
The rollover protection system functions when

the power top is both open and closed.
Fig. 223 Deployed rollbar with power top framefacing up-
ward. >
266
Driving safety
If the rollover protection has triggered but the — Modifying the rollover protection system or
vehicle was not involved in an accident, you can individual componentsis not permitted.
retract the rollover protection yourself in an — Work on the rollover protection system
emergency. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or should only be performed by an authorized
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
have the malfunction corrected. ty. Otherwise the system maynot function
correctly in a collision or it could deploy un-
With the power top open
expectedly.
> Pull the loop upwardin the direction of the ar- — Have the system inspected at service inter-
row and holdit in place > fig. 222. vals. This ensures the system will always be
> Slide the rollbar down. ready for use. Have an authorized Audi deal-
> Release the loop just before the rollbar reaches er or authorized Audi Service Facility check
its end position (1-2 in. / 3-5 cm). the rollover protection system every two
> Press the rollbar down until it stops. yearsat the latest.
> Make sure the rollbar is secure before releasing
it.
> Close the cover @) > fig. 223.
> Repeat the procedure on the other rollbar.
With the power top closed

> Switch the ignition on.
> Press the power top switch to adjust the power
top frame until it is vertical > fig. 223.
> Pull the loop upwardin the direction of the ar-
row and hold it in place > fig. 222.
> Slide the rollbar down.
> Release the loop just before the rollbar reaches
its end position (1-2 in. / 3-5 cm).
> Press the rollbar down until it stops.
> Make surethe rollbar is secure before releasing
it:
> Close the cover @) > fig. 223.
> Repeat the procedure on the other rollbar.
> You can now close the power top again.
Z\ WARNING
— Make sure your head or other parts of your
bodyare not located in the area above the
rollbar when pressing the rollbar down. If
the rollbar is not secured correctly, it could
deploy again as soon as you release it and
cause injuries.
— Have the rollover protection system checked
by and authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility if it malfunctions. Oth-
8V2012721B)
erwise the system may not deploy correctly

in a collision.
267
Safety belts
Safety belts — Never strap more than one person, including

small children, into any belt. It is especially
General notes dangerous to place a safety belt over a child
Always wear safetybelts! sitting on your lap.
— Never let more peopleride in the vehicle
Wearing safety belts correctly saveslives! than there are safety belts available.
This chapter explains whysafety belts are neces- — Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
sary, how they work and howto adjust and wear properly restrained with a separate safety
them correctly. belt or child restraint.
> Read all the information that follows and heed

Safety belt warning light
all of the instructions and WARNINGS.
Yourvehicle has a warning system for the driver
ZA\ WARNING and front seat passenger to remind you about
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them im- the importanceof buckling-up.
properly increases the risk of serious personal
B42-0526
injury and death.
— Safety belts are the single most effective
means available to reduce the risk of serious
injury and death in automobileaccidents.
For your protection and that of your passen-
gers, alwayscorrectly wear safety belts
when the vehicle is moving.
— Pregnant women, injured, or physically im-
paired persons must also usesafety belts. Fig. 224 Safety belt warning light in the instrument clus-
Like all vehicle occupants, they are more ter - enlarged
likely to be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts. The best way to protect a Before driving off, always:
fetus is to protect the mother - throughout > Fasten your safety belt and makesure you are
the entire pregnancy.
wearing it properly.
> Make sure that your passengersalso buckle up
Number of seats and properly wear their safety belts.
> Protect children with a child restraint system
Applies to: vehicles without power top: Your Audi
appropriate for the size and age.
has a total of five seating positions: two in the
front and three in the rear. Each seating position The warning light in the instrument cluster
has a safetybelt. lights up when the ignition is on as a reminder to
fasten the safety belts. In addition, you will hear
Applies to: vehicles with power top: Your Audi
a warning tone for a certain period of time.
has a total of four seating positions: two in the
front and twoin the rear. Each seating position Fasten your safety belt and make sure that your
has a safetybelt. passengersalso properly put on their safety
belts.
ZA WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them im- ZA\ WARNING
properly increasesthe risk of serious personal — Safety belts are the single mosteffective
injury and death. means available to reduce the risk of serious
injury and death in automobileaccidents. >
268
Safety belts
For your protection and that of your passen- before the crash, until something stops them -
gers, alwayscorrectly wear safety belts here, the wall > fig. 226.
when the vehicle is moving. The same principles apply to people sitting ina
— Failure to pay attention to the warning light vehicle that is involved in a frontal collision. Even
that come on, could lead to personal injury. at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to 50 km/h),
the forces acting on the body can reach one ton
Whyuse safety belts? (2,000 lbs, or 1,000 kg) or more. At greater
speeds, these forces are even higher.
Frontal collisions and the law of physics
People who do notuse safety belts are also not
Frontal crashes create very strong forces for peo- attached to their vehicle. In a frontal collision
ple riding in vehicles. they will also keep moving forward at the speed
their vehicle was travelling just before the crash.
c B4H-0465
Of course, the laws of physics don't just apply to
frontal collisions, they determine what happens
in all kinds of accidents and collisions.
What happens to occupants not wearing

Cr laallieya
In crashes unbelted occupants cannot stop
themselves from flying forward and being in-
jured or killed. Always wear yoursafety belts!
B4H-0466
Fig. 226 The vehicle crashesinto the wall

Fig. 227 A driver not wearing a safety belt is violently
thrown forward
The physical principles are simple. Both the vehi-
cle and the passengers possess energy which var-
ies with vehicle speed and body weight. Engi-
neerscall this energy “kinetic energy.”
The higher the speed of the vehicle and the

greater the vehicle's weight, the more energy
that has to be “absorbed”in the crash.
Vehicle speed is the mostsignificant factor. If the

speed doubles from 15 to 30 mph (25 to
50 km/h), the energy increases 4 times!
forward and strike the driver
Becausethe passengersofthis vehicle are not us-
8V2012721B)
ing safety belts > fig. 225, they will keep moving Unbelted occupants are not able toresist the tre-
at the same speed the vehicle was moving just mendous forces of impact by holding tight or >
269
Safety belts
bracing themselves. Without the benefit of safe- Safety belts used properly can makea big differ-
ty restraint systems, the unrestrained occupant ence. Safety belts help to keep passengersin
will slam violently into the steering wheel, in- their seats, gradually reduce energylevels ap-
strument panel, windshield, or whatever elseis plied to the body in an accident, and help prevent
in the way > fig. 227. This impact with the vehi- the uncontrolled movement that can causeseri-
cle interior has all the energy they had just before ous injuries. In addition, safety belts reduce the
the crash. danger of being thrown out ofthe vehicle.
Never rely on airbags alone for protection. Even Safety belts attach passengers to the car and give
when they deploy, airbags provide only additional them the benefit of being slowed down more
protection. Airbags are not supposed to deployin gently or “softly” through the “give” in the safety
all kinds of accidents. Although your Audi is belts, crush zones and other safety features engi-
equipped with airbags, all vehicle occupants, in- neered into today's vehicles. By “absorbing” the
cluding the driver, must wear safety belts cor- kinetic energy over a longer period of time, the
rectly in order to minimize the risk of severe in- safety belts make the forces on the body more
jury or death in a crash. “tolerable” and less likely to cause injury.
Remember too,that airbags will deploy only once Although these examplesare based ona frontal
and that your safety belts are always there to of- collision, safety belts can also substantially re-
fer protection in those accidents in which airbags duce the risk of injury in other kinds of crashes.
are not supposed to deploy or when theyhaveal- So, whether you're on a long trip or just going to
ready deployed. Unbelted occupants can also be the corner store, always buckle up and make sure
thrown out of the vehicle where even more severe others do, too. Accident statistics show that vehi-
or fatal injuries can occur. cle occupants properly wearing safety belts have
a lower risk of being injured and a much better
It is also importantfor the rear passengers to
chance of surviving an accident. Properly using
wear safety belts correctly. Unbelted passengers
safety belts also greatly increases the ability of
in the rear seats endanger not only themselves
the supplemental airbags to do their job in a col-
but also the driver and other passengers
lision. For this reason, wearing a safety belt is le-
> fig. 228. In a frontal collision they will be
gally required in most countries including much
thrown forward violently, where they can hit and
of the United States and Canada.
injure the driver and/or front seat passenger.
Although your Audi is equipped with airbags, you
Sila ol heM gela-las still have to wear the safety belts provided. Front
airbags, for example, are activated only in some
Peoplethinkit's possible to use the hands to frontal collisions. The front airbags are notacti-
brace the body in a minor collision. It's simply vatedin all frontal collisions, in side and rear col-
not true! lisions,in roll overs or in cases wherethereis not
enough deceleration through impactto the front
a
|8 of the vehicle. The same goes for the other airbag
~
%
8 systems in your Audi. So, always wear your safety
belt and make sure everybodyin your vehicleis
properly restrained!
Fig. 229 Driver is correctly restrained in a sudden braking

maneuver
270
Safety belts
Importantsafety instructions about safety — Always keep belt buckles free of anything
yl ha) that may prevent the buckle from latching
Safety belts must always be correctly positioned securely.
across the strongest bonesofyour body. — Never use comfortclips or devices that cre-
ate slack in the shoulder belt. However, spe-
> Always wear safetybelts as illustrated and de- cial clips may be required for the proper use
scribed in this chapter. of some child restraint systems.
> Make sure that your safety belts are always —Torn or frayed safety belts can tear, and
ready for use and are not damaged. damaged belt hardware can break in an acci-
dent. Inspect belts regularly. If webbing,
ZA WARNING bindings, buckles, or retractors are dam-
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them im- aged, have belts replaced by an authorized
properly increasesthe risk of serious personal Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
injury and death. Safety belts can work only — Safety belts that have been worn and loaded
when used correctly. in an accident mustbe replaced with the
— Always fasten your safety belts correctly be- correct replacementsafety belt by an au-
fore driving off and makesureall passen- thorized Audi dealer. Replacement may be
gers are correctly restrained. necessary even if damage cannotbe clearly
— For maximum protection, safety belts must seen. Anchorages that were loaded mustal-
always be positioned properly on the body. so be inspected.
— Never strap more than one person, including — Never remove, modify, disassemble, or try
small children, into any belt. to repair the safety belts yourself.
— Never place a safety belt over a child sitting — Alwayskeep the belts clean. Dirty belts may
on your lap. not work properly and can impair the func-
— Alwayskeep feet in the footwell in front of tion of the inertia reel > table Interior
the seat while the vehicle is being driven. cleaning on page 365.
— Never let any person ride with their feet on
the instrument panel or sticking out the Safety belts
window or on the seat.
Fastening safety belts
— Never removea safety belt while the vehicle
is moving. Doing so will increase your risk of Safety first - everybody buckle up!
being injured or killed.
B4H-0462
— Never wear belts twisted.
— Never wear belts over rigid or breakable ob-
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye
|
glasses, pens, keys, etc., as these may cause

injury.
— Never allow safety belts to become dam-
aged by being caughtin door or seat hard-
ware.
— Do not wear the shoulder part of the belt
Fig. 230 Belt buckle and tongue onthe driver's seat
under your arm or otherwise out of position.
— Several layers of heavy clothing may inter-
To provide maximum protection, safety belts
fere with correct positioning of belts and re-
must always be positioned correctly on the wear-
duce the overall effectiveness of the system.
8V2012721B)
er's body.
>» Adjust the front seat and head restraint proper-

ly = page 58, Front seats.
271
Safety belts
> Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is sudden braking, in a sudden maneuver and
in an upright position and securely latched in especially in a crash.
place before using the belt > /\. — Never attach the safety belt to the buckle
> Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest and for another seat. Attaching the belt to the
pelvis > fig. 230, > A\. wrong bucklewill reduce safety belt effec-
> Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of tiveness and can cause serious personal in-
your seat until you hear it latch securely. jury.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely — A passenger who is not properly restrained
latched in the buckle. can be seriously injured by the safety belt it-
Automatic safety belt retractors self when it moves from the stronger parts
of the bodyintocritical areas like the abdo-
Every safety belt is equipped with an automatic men.
belt retractor on the shoulder belt. This feature — Alwayslock the convertible locking retractor
locks the belt when the belt is pulled out fast,
when you are securing a child seat in the ve-
during hard braking and in an accident. The belt hicle > page 314.
mayalso lock when you drive up or down a steep
hill or through a sharp curve. During normal driv-
ing the belt lets you movefreely. Safety belt position
Correct belt position is the key to getting maxi-

Safety belt pretensioners
mum protection from safety belts.
Safety belts with pretensioners help to tighten
the safety belt and remove slack when the pre-
B4H-0751
tensioners are activated > page 275. The func-
tion of the pretensioner is monitored by a warn-
ing light > page 26.
Convertible locking retractor

Every safety belt except the one on the driver
seat is equipped with a convertible locking retrac-
tor that must be used when the safety belt is
used to attach a child seat. Be sure to read the Fig. 231 Safety belt position
important information about this feature
=> page 312. Standard features on your vehicle help you adjust
the position of the safety belt to match your body
ZA WARNING size.
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause — belt height adjustmentfor the front seats*,
serious injury in an accident > page 272, — height-adjustable front seats.
Safety belt position.
— Safety belts offer optimum protection only ZA WARNING
when the seatback is upright and belts are Improperly positioned safety belts can cause
properly positioned on the body. serious personal injury in an accident.
— Always make sure that the rear seat backrest — The shoulder belt shouldlie as close to the
to which the center rear safety belt* is at- center of the collar bone as possible and
tached is securely latched whenever the rear should fit well on the body. Hold the belt
center safety belt is being used. If the back- above the latch tongue and pull it evenly
rest is not securely latched, the passenger across the chestso that it sits as low as pos-
will move forward with the backrest during sible on the pelvis and there is no pressure
on the abdomen. The belt should always fit [>
272
Safety belts
snugly > fig. 231. Pull on the belt to tighten ZX WARNING

if necessary.
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause
— The lap belt portion of the safety belt must
serious personal injury in an accident.
be positioned as low as possible across pel-
— Expectant mothers must always wear the
vis and never over the abdomen. Make sure
lap portion of the safety belt as low as pos-
the belt lies flat and snug > fig. 231. Pull on
sible across the pelvis and below the round-
the belt to tighten if necessary.
ing of the abdomen.
—A loose-fitting safety belt can cause serious
— Always read and heed all WARNINGS and
injuries by shifting its position on your body
other important information > A\ in Fasten-
from the strong bones to more vulnerable,
ing safety belts on page 272.
soft tissue and cause serious injury.
— Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS and
other important information > page 271. Unfastening safety belts
Unbuckle the safety belt with the red release

Pregnant women mustalso becorrectly button only after the vehicle has stopped.
restrained
B4H-0270
The best way to protectthe fetus is to make sure
that expectant mothers always wearsafety belts
correctly - throughout the pregnancy.
}
GS
Fig. 233 Releasing the tongue from the buckle
» Push the red release button on the buckle

> fig. 233. The belt tongue will spring out of
the buckle > A\.
Fig. 232 Safety belt position during pregnancy
> Let the belt wind up on the retractor as you
To provide maximum protection, safety belts
guide the belt tongue to its stowed position.
must always be positioned correctly on the wear-
er's body page 272. Z\WARNING
Never unfasten safety belt while the vehicleis
> Adjust the front seat and adjustable head re-
moving. Doing so will increase your risk of be-
straint* correctly > page 58, Front seats.
ing injured or killed.
> Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest so
that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and
there is no pressure on the abdomen
> fig. 232, > A.
> Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of
your seat until you hear it latch securely.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely
latched in the buckle.
8V2012721B)
273
Safety belts
Adjusting the safety belt latch tongue ZA WARNING

Applies to: vehicles with adjustable latch tongue
Always read and heed all WARNINGS and oth-
S
Ss er important information > page 271.
S.
=
&
3a
(i) Tips
With the front seats, the height adjustment
of the seat can also be used to adjust the po-
sition of the safety belts.
Improperly worn safety belts
Fig. 234 Safety belt: latch tongueclip (example) Incorrectly positioned safety belts can cause se-
vere injuries.
> Slide the clip so that you can easily reach the
belt latch when putting the safety belt on. Wearing safety belts improperly can cause seri-
ous injury or death. Safety belts can only work
when theyare correctly positioned on the body.
Adjusting safety belt height
Appliesto: vehicles with safety belt height adjustment
Improper seating positions reduce the effective-
ness of safety belts and will even increase the risk
With the aid of the safety belt height adjust- of injury and death by moving the safety belt to
ment, the three point safety belt strap routing critical areas of the body. Improper seating posi-
can be fitted to the shoulder area, according to tions also increase the risk of serious injury and
bodysize. death when an airbag deploys and strikes an oc-
cupant who is not in the correct seating position.
B4G-0004)
A driver is responsible for the safety of all vehicle

occupants and especially for children. Therefore:
> Never permit anyone to assume an incorrectsit-

ting position in the vehicle while traveling
ofA.
ZA WARNING
Improperly wornsafety belts increase the risk
Fig. 235 Safety belt height adjustmentfor the front seats
of serious personal injury and death whenever
- loop-around fittings
a vehicle is being used.
The shoulder belt should lie as close to the center — Always makesurethat all vehicle occupants
of the collar bone as possible and should fit well are correctly restrained and stay in a correct
on the body > A\ in Safety belt position on seating position whenever the vehicleis be-
page 272. ing used.
— Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS and
> Push the loop-around fittings up > fig. 235 @), other important information > page 271.
or
> squeeze together the (@) button, and push the
loop-around fittings down (2).
> Pull the belt to make sure that the upper at-
tachment is properly engaged.
274
Safety belts
Belt tensioners damage the safety belt system and preventit

from working correctly in a collision.
Howsafety belt pretensioners work
There are some important things you have to
Reversible safety belt tensioners know to makesurethat the effectiveness of the
The following functions are available when safety system will not be impaired and that discarded
belts with reversible safety belt tensioners are componentsdo notcause injury or pollute the
fastened: environment.
—Incertain driving situations, the safety belts ZA WARNING

may tighten with a reversible tensioning func-
Improper care, servicing and repair proce-
tion > page 136.
dures can increase the risk of personal injury
— The safety belts mayalso tighten with this re-
and death by preventing a safety belt preten-
versible tensioning function in minor collisions.
sioner from activating when neededor acti-
Pyrotechnic safety belt pretensioners vating it unexpectedly:
— The belt pretensioner system can be activat-
Seat belts with pyrotechnic safety belt preten-
ed only once. If belt pretensioners have
sioners are tensioned automatically in severe col-
been activated, the system mustbe re-
lisions, depending on the circumstances. This
placed.
helps to reduce the forward motion of the occu-
— Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of
pants.
the safety belt system.
ZA WARNING — Safety belt systems including safety belt
pretensioners cannotbe repaired. Special
— It is possible for the pretensioners to deploy procedures are required for removal, instal-
incorrectly. lation and disposal of this system.
— The pyrotechnic system can only provide — For any work on the safety belt system, we
protection for one collision. If the pyrotech- strongly recommend that you see your au-
nic pretensioners deploy, the pretensioning thorized Audi dealer or qualified technician
system mustbe replaced. who has an Audi approved repair manual,
training and special equipment necessary.
@ Tips
—A fine dust is released when the pyrotechnic
safety belt pretensioners deploy.This is nor-
mal and is not caused bya fire in the vehi-
eles
— The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components
of the system are scrapped. A qualified
dealership is familiar with these regulations
and will be pleased to pass on the informa-
tion to you.
Service and disposal of safety belt preten-

SCT
The safety belt pretensionersare parts of the

8V2012721B)
safety belts on your Audi. Installing, removing,

servicing or repairing of belt pretensioners can
275
Airbag system
Airbag system reaching the pedals, or if you have concerns with

regard to the function or operation of the Ad-
Important information vanced Airbag System, please contact your au-
thorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop, or
Importance of wearing safety belts and
sitting properly call Audi Customer Relations at 1-800-822-2834
for possible modifications to your vehicle.
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. For
When the airbag system deploys, a gas generator
airbags to do theirjob, occupants must always
will fill the airbags, break open the padded cov-
properly weartheir safety belts and be in a prop-
ers, and inflate between the steering wheel and
er seating position.
the driver and between the instrument panel and
For your safety and the safety of your passen- the front passenger. The airbags will deflate im-
gers, before driving off, always: mediately after deployment so that the front oc-
cupants can see through the windshield again
> Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel
without interruption.
properly > page 261,
> Adjust the front passenger's seat properly All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so
=> page 262, fast that many people don't even realize that the
> Wear safety belts properly > page 271, airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate
> Always properly use the proper child restraint with a great deal of force and nothing should be
to protect children > page 301. in their way when they deploy. Front airbags in
combination with properly worn safety belts slow
Ina collision, airbags mustinflate within the
downand limit the occupant's forward move-
blink of an eye and with considerable force. The ment. Together they help to prevent the driver
supplemental airbags can cause injuries if the and front seat passenger from hitting parts of
driver or the front seat passenger is not seated the inside of the vehicle while reducing the forces
properly. Therefore in order to help the airbag to acting on the occupant during the crash. In this
do its job, it is important, both as a driver and as way they help to reducethe risk ofinjury to the
a passenger to sit properlyat all times. head and upper bodyin the crash. Airbags do not
By keeping room between your body and the protect the arms or the lower parts of the body.
steering wheel and the front of the passenger Both front airbags will notinflate in all frontal
compartment,the airbag can inflate fully and collisions. The triggering of the airbag system de-
completely and provide supplemental protection pends on the vehicle deceleration rate caused by
in certain frontal collisions > page 261, Correct the collision and registered by the electronic con-
passenger seating positions. For details on the trol unit. If this rate is below the reference value
operation of the seat adjustment controls programmed into the control unit, the airbags
=> page 58. will not be triggered, even though the car may be
It's especially important that children are proper- badly damaged as a result of the collision. Vehi-
ly restrained > page 301. cle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehi-
cle damage is not necessarily an indication of
There is a lot that the driver and the passengers
whether an airbag should inflate or not.
can and must do to help the individual safety fea-
tures installed in your Audi work together as a Since the circumstances will vary considerably
system. between one collision and another,it is not possi-
ble to define a range of vehicle speeds that will
Proper seating position is important so that the
cover every possible kind and angle of impact
front airbag on the driver side can do its job. If
that will always trigger the airbags. Important
you have a physical impairment or condition that
factors include, for example, the nature (hard or
prevents you from sitting properly on the driver
soft) of the object which the car hits, the angle of
seat with the safety belt properly fastened and
impact, vehicle speed, etc. The front airbags will >
276
Airbag system
also not inflate in side or rear collisions, or in roll- —To reducethe risk of injury when an airbag
overs. inflates, always wear safety belts properly
Always remember: Airbags will deploy only once, => page 271, Safety belts.
and only in certain kinds ofcollisions. Your safety — Always makecertain that children age 12 or
belts are always thereto offer protection in those younger alwaysride in the rear seat. If chil-
situations in which airbags are not supposed to dren are not properly restrained, they may
deploy, or when they have already deployed; for be severely injured or killed when an airbag
example, when your vehicle strikes or is struck by inflates.
another vehicle after the first collision. — Never let children ride unrestrained or im-
properly restrained in the vehicle. Adjust the
This is just one of the reasons whyan airbag is a
front seats properly.
supplementary restraint and is not a substitute
— Never ride with the backrest reclined.
for a safety belt. The airbag system works most
— Alwayssit as far as possible from the steer-
effectively when used with the safety belts.
ing wheel or the instrument panel
Therefore, always properly wear your safety belts
=> page 261.
=> page 268.
— Alwayssit upright with your back against
ZA WARNING the backrest of your seat.
— Never place your feet on the instrument
Sitting too close to the steering wheel or in- panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet
strumentpanel will decrease the effective- on the floor in front of the seat to help pre-
ness of the airbags and will increase the risk vent serious injuries to the legs and hips if
of personal injury in a collision.
the airbag inflates.
— Never sit closer than 10 inches (25 cm) to — Never recline the front passenger's seat to
the steering wheel or instrument panel. transport objects. Items can also moveinto
— If you cannotsit more than 10 inches the area ofthe side airbag or the front air-
(25 cm) from the steering wheel, investi- bag during braking or in a sudden maneuver.
gate whether adaptive equipment may be Objects near the airbags can become projec-
available to help you reach the pedals and tiles and cause injury when an airbag in-
increase your seating distance from the flates.
steering wheel.
— All vehicle occupants and especially children ZA WARNING
mustbe restrained properly whenever riding
Airbags that have deployed in a crash must be
in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly
replaced.
restrained child could be injured by striking
— Use only original equipment airbags ap-
the interior or by being ejected from the ve-
proved by Audi and installed by a trained
hicle during a sudden maneuver or impact.
technician who has the necessary tools and
An unrestrained or improperly restrained
diagnostic equipment to properly replace
child is also at greater risk of injury or death
any airbag in your vehicle and assure system
through contact with an inflating airbag.
effectiveness ina crash.
— If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
— Never permit salvaged or recycled airbags to
ting sidewaysor out of position in any way,
be installed in your vehicle.
your risk of injury is much higher.
— You will also receive serious injuries and
could even be killed if you are up against the Child restraints on the front seat - some
airbag or too close to it when it inflates - important things to know
even with an Advanced Airbag.
8V2012721B)
> Be sure to read the important information and

heed the WARNINGS for important details
277
Airbag system
about children and Advanced Airbags — will stay on if there is a smallchild or child re-
=> page 301. straint on the front passenger seat,
—will go off if the front passenger seatis occu-
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Ad-
pied by an adult as registered by the capacitive
vanced Airbag System, makecertain that all chil-
passenger detection system > page 288, Moni-
dren, especially those 12 years and younger,al-
toring the Advanced Airbag System.
ways ride in the back seat properly restrained for
their age and size. The airbag on the passenger The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on
side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous when electrical capacitance registered on the
place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the front passenger seat is equal to or less than the
safest place for a child in a forward-facing child combined capacitance of a typical 1 year-old in-
seat. It can be a very dangerous place for an infant and one of the rearward-facing or forward-
fant or a child in a rearward-facing seat. facing child restraints listed in Federal Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standard 208 with which the Ad-
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has
vanced Airbag System in your vehicle was certi-
been certified to comply with the requirements
fied.
of United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor If the total electrical capacitance registered on
Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica- the front passenger seat is more than that of a
ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured. typical 1 year-old child but less than the weight
According to requirements, the front Advanced of a small adult, the front airbag on the passen-
Airbag System on the passenger side has been ger side can deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG
certified for “suppression”for infants of about OFF light does not come on).
12 month old and younger and for “low risk de- If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not
ployment”for children aged 3 to 6 yearsold (as come on, the front airbag on the passenger side
defined in the standard). has not been turned off by the electronic control
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light in the instru- unit and can deployif the control unit senses an
ment panel tells you when the front Advanced impact that meets the conditions stored in its
Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off memory.
by the electronic control unit. For example, the airbag may deployif:
Each time you switch on the ignition, the PAS- —asmallchild that is heavier than a typical 1
SENGER AIR BAGOFF light will come on for a year-old child is on the front passenger seat (re-
few seconds and: gardless of whether the childis in one of the
— will stay on if the front passenger seat is not child seatslisted > page 303), or
occupied, —a child who has outgrown child restraints is on
—will stay on if the electrical capacitance meas- the front passenger seat.
ured by the capacitive passenger detection sys- If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the
tem for the front passenger seat equals the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on in the
combined capacitance of an infant up to about instrument cluster and stays on.
one year of age and one of the rearward-facing
or forward-facing child restraints listed in Fed- If the front passenger airbag deploys, the Federal
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with Standard requires the airbag to meet the “low
which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi- risk” deployment criteria to reduce the risk of in-
cle was certified. For a listing of the child re- jury through interaction with the airbag. “Low
straints that were used to certify your vehicle's risk” deployment occurs in those crashes that
compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard take place at lower decelerations as defined in
=> page 303. the electronic control unit > page 288, PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFFlight.
278
Airbag system
Always remember, a child seat or infant carrier — Never put the forward-facing child restraint
installed on the front seat may be struck and up againstor very near the instrument pan-
knocked out of position by the rapidlyinflating el
passenger's airbag in a frontal collision. The air- — Always movethe front passenger seat to the
bag could greatly reduce the effectiveness of the highest position in the up and down adjust-
child restraint and even seriously injure the child ment range and moveit back to the rear-
during inflation. mostposition in the seat's fore and aft ad-
For this reason, and because the back seat is the justment range, as far away from the airbag
safest place for children - when properly restrain- as possible, before installing the forward-
ed according to their age and size - we strongly facing child restraint.
recommend that children alwayssit in the back — Always makesure that the safety belt upper
seat > page 301, Child safety. anchorage is behind the child restraint and
not next to or in front of the child restraint
ZA WARNING so that the safety belt will be properly posi-
tioned.
A child in a rearward-facing child seat instal-
led on the front passenger seatwill be seri- — Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
ously injured and can be killed if the front air- OFF light comes on and stays on all the time
bag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag whenever the ignition is switched on.
System.
— The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or
Z\ WARNING
infant carrier with great force and will To reduce the risk ofserious injury, make sure
smash the child seat and child against the that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light will
backrest, center armrest, door or roof. be displayed whenever a child restraint is in-
— Alwaysinstall rear-facing child seats on the stalled on the front passenger seat and the ig-
rear seat. nition is switched on.
— If you mustinstall a rearward facing child — If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does
seat on the front passenger seat because of not stay on, perform the checks described
exceptional circumstances and the PASSEN- => page 288, Monitoring the AdvancedAir-
GER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on bag System.
and stay on, immediately install the rear- — Take the child restraint off the front passen-
facing child seat in a rear seating position ger seat and install it properly at one of the
and havethe airbag system inspected by rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
your Audi dealer. BAG OFF light does not stay on.
— Forward-facing child seats installed on the — Have the airbag system inspected by your
front passenger's seat may interfere with Audi dealer immediately.
the deployment ofthe airbag and cause seri- — Alwayscarefully follow instructions from
ous personal injury to the child. child restraint manufacturers when instal-
ling child restraints.
Z\ WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustin- Z\ WARNING
stall a forward-facing child restraint on the If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustin-
front passenger's seat: stall a forward or rearward-facing child re-
— Always makesure the forward-facing seat straint on the front passenger's seat:
has been designed and certified by its manu- — Improper installation ofchild restraints can
facturer for use on front seat with a pas- reducetheir effectiveness or even prevent
8V2012721B)
senger front and side airbag. them from providing any protection.
279
Airbag system
oO
— An improperly installed child restraint can x
2
interfere with the airbag as it deploys and Pd
o
oO
seriously injure or even kill the child - even
with an Advanced Airbag System.
— Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's
instructions provided with the child seat or
carrier.
— Always makesure that there is nothing on
the front passenger seat that will cause the
capacitive passenger detection system in Fig. 237 Location of front passenger's airbag: in the instru-
mentpanel
the seat to signal to the Airbag System that
the seat is occupied by a person when it is
Your vehicle is equipped with an “Advanced Air-
not, or to signal thatit is occupied by some-
bag System” in compliance with United States
one who is heavier than the person actually
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
sitting on the seat. The presence of addi-
(FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle
tional objects could cause the passenger
Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at
front airbag to be turned on when it should
the time your vehicle was manufactured.
beoff, or could cause the airbag to work ina
waythatis different from the way it would The airbag for the driver is in the steering wheel
have worked without the object on the seat. hub > fig. 236 and the airbag for the front pas-
senger is in the instrument panel > fig. 237. The
Front airbags general location of the airbags is marked “AIR-
BAG”.
py Td et helmMiceliat ligey-[eL)
There is a lot you need to know aboutthe airbags
The airbag system can provide supplemental in your vehicle. We urge you to read the detailed
protection to properly restrained front seat occu- information about airbags, safety belts and child
pants. safety in this and the other chapters that make
up the owner's literature. Please be sure to heed
B8U-0376
the WARNINGS- they are extremely important

for your safety and the safety of your passengers,
especially infants and small children.
Z\ WARNING
Never rely on airbags alone for protection.
— Even when they deploy, airbags provide only
supplemental protection.
— Airbag work mosteffectively when used
Fig. 236 Location of driver airbag: in steering wheel
with properly worn safety belts.
— Therefore, always wear your safety belts and
make sure that everybody in your vehicleis
properly restrained.
— Alwayshold the steering wheel with both
hands on the outside of the steering wheel
rim at the 9:00 o'clock and 3:00 o'clock po-
sitions to help reduce the risk of personal in-
jury if the driver's airbag inflates. >
280
Airbag system
— Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ZA WARNING

o'clock position or with your hands any-
A person on the front passenger seat, espe-
whereinside the steering wheel or on the
cially infants and small children, will receive
steering wheel hub. Holding the steering
serious injuries and can even be killed by be-
wheel the wrong wayincreases the risk of
ing too close to the airbag when it inflates.
severe injury to the arms, hands, and head if
— Although the Advanced Airbag System in
the driver airbag deploys.
your vehicle is designed to turn off the front
Z\ WARNING passenger airbag if an infant or a small child
is on the front passenger seat, nobody can
Objects between you and the airbag will in- absolutely guarantee that deployment un-
crease the risk of injury in a crash byinterfer- der these special conditions is impossible in
ing with the way the airbag unfolds and/or by all conceivable situations that may happen
being pushedinto you as the airbag inflates. during the useful life of your vehicle.
— Always makesure nothing is in the frontair- — The Advanced Airbag System can deploy in
bag deployment zone that could be struck accordancewiththe ,,low risk“ option for 3-
by the airbag when it inflates. and 6-year-old children under the U.S. Fed-
— Objects in the zone of a deploying airbag can eral Standard if a child with electrical capac-
become projectiles when the airbag deploys itance greater than the combined capaci-
and causeserious personal injury. tance of a typical one-year old infant re-
— Never hold things in your hands or on your strained in one of the forward facing or rear-
lap when the vehicleis in use. ward-facing child seats with which your ve-
— Never place accessories or other objects hicle was certified is on the front passenger
(such as cup holders, telephone brackets, seat and the other conditions for airbag de-
note pads, navigation systems,or things ployment are met.
that are large, heavy, or bulky) on the doors; — Accident statistics have shownthatchildren
never attach them to the doorsor the wind- are generally safer in the rear seat area than
shield; never place them over or near or at- in the front seating position.
tach them to the area marked ,,AIRBAG“ on — For their ownsafety,all children, especially
the steering wheel, instrument panel or the 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in
seat backrests; never place them between the back properly restrained for their age
these areas and you or any other person in and size.
the vehicle.
— Never attach objects to the windshield
Advanced front airbag system
above the passenger front airbag, such as
accessory GPS navigation units or music Your vehicle is equipped with a front Advanced
players. Such objects could cause serious in- Airbag System in compliance with United States
jury in a collision, especially when the air- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208, as
bags inflate. well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
— Never recline the front passenger seat to (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time your vehi-
transport objects. Items can also moveinto cle was manufactured.
the deployment area of the side airbags or
The front Advanced Airbag System supplements
the front airbag during breaking or in a sud-
the safety belts to provide additional protection
den maneuver. Objects near the airbags can
for the driver's and front passenger's heads and
fly dangerously through the passenger com-
upper bodies in frontal crashes. The airbags in-
partment and cause injury, particularly
flate only in frontal impacts when the vehicle de-
8V2012721B)
when the seatis reclined and the airbags in-

celeration is high enough. >
flate.
281
Airbag system
The front Advanced Airbag System for the front airbag on the passenger side may or may not
seat occupantsis not a substitute for your safety deploy.
belts. Rather,it is part of the overall occupant re-
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on
straint system in your vehicle. Always remember
when the electronic control unit detects a total
that the airbag system can only help to protect
electrical capacitance on the front passenger seat
you, if you are sitting upright, wearing your safe-
that requires the front airbag to be turnedoff. If
ty belt and wearing it properly. This is why you
the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not
and your passengers must always be properly re-
come on, the front airbag on the passenger side
strained, not just because the law requires you to
has not been turned off by the control unit and
be.
can deploy if the control unit senses an impact
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has that meets the conditions stored in its memory.
been certified to meet the “low risk” require-
If the total electrical capacitance registered on
mentsfor 3 and 6 year-old children on the pas-
the front passenger seat is more than that of a
senger side and very small adults on the driver
typical 1 year-old, but less than the weight of a
side. The low risk deployment criteria are intend-
small adult, the front airbag on the passenger
ed to help reduce the risk of injury through inter-
side may deploy (the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
action with the front airbag that can occur,for
light does not come on).
example, by being too close to the steering wheel
and instrument panel when the airbag inflates. For example, the airbag may deployif:
In addition, the system has been certified to —asmall child that is heavier than a typical 1
comply with the “suppression” requirements of year-old child is on the front passenger seat (re-
the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag gardless of whether the child is in one of the
for infants 12 months old and younger who are child seatslisted > page 303),
restrained on the front passenger seat in child re- —a child who has outgrown child restraints is on
straints that are listed in the Standard the front passenger seat.
=> page 303, Child restraints and Advancedfront
If the front passenger airbag is turned off, the
airbag system.
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightin the center of
“Suppression” requires the front airbag on the the instrument panel will come on and stay on.
passenger side to be turned off if:
If the front passenger airbag deploys, the Federal
—a child up to about one year of age is restrained Standard requires the airbag to meet the “low
on the front passenger seat in one ofthe rear- risk” deployment criteria to help reduce the risk
facing or forward-facing infant restraintslisted of injury through interaction with the airbag.
in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 “Low risk” deployment occurs in those crashes
with which the Advanced Airbag System in your that take place at lower decelerations as defined
vehicle was certified. For a listing of the child in the electronic control unit > page 288.
restraints that were used to certify your vehi-
Always remember: Even though your vehicle is
cle's compliance with the US Safety Standard
equipped with Advanced Airbags, the safest place
=> page 303,
for children is properly restrained on the back
—a person is detected on the front passenger
seat. Please be sure to read the important infor-
seat that has an electrical capacitance that is
mation in the sections that follow and be sure to
morethan the total electrical capacitance of a
heed all of the WARNINGS.
child that is about 1 year old restrained in one
of the rear-facing or forward-facing infant re- ZA WARNING
straints (listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag in-
Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag
flates, always wear safety belts properly. >
System in your vehicle was certified), the front
282
Airbag system
— If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit- — Never put the forward-facing child restraint
ting sideways or out of position in any way, up againstor very near the instrument pan-
your risk of injury is much higher. el
— You will also receive serious injuries and — Always movethe front passenger seat to the
could even be killed if you are up against the highest position in the up and down adjust-
airbag or too close to it when it inflates - ment range and moveit back to the rear-
even with an Advanced Airbag > page 276. mostposition in the seat's fore and aft ad-
justment range, as far away from the airbag
Z\ WARNING as possible, before installing the forward-
A child in a rearward-facing child seat instal- facing child restraint.
led on the front passenger seatwill be seri- — Always makesure that the safety belt upper
ously injured and can be killed if the front air- anchorage is behind the child restraint and
bag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag not next to or in front of the child restraint
System. so that the safety belt will be properly posi-
— Although the Advanced Airbag System in tioned.
your vehicle is designed to turn off the front — Always makesure that thereis nothing on
airbag when a rearward-facing child re- the front passenger seat that will cause the
straint has been installed on the front pas- capacitive passenger detection system in
senger seat, nobody can absolutely guaran- the seat to signal to the Airbag System that
tee that deployment is impossible in all con- the seat is occupied by a person when it is
ceivable situations that may happen during not, or to signal that it is occupied by some-
the useful life of your vehicle. one who is heavier than the person actually
— The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or sitting on the seat. The presence of addi-
infant carrier with great force and will tional objects could cause the passenger
smash the child seat and child against the front airbag to be turned on when it should
be off, or could cause the airbag to work ina
backrest, center armrest, door, or roof.
waythat is different from the wayit would
— Alwaysinstall rearward-facing child re-
straints on the rear seat. have worked without the object on the seat.
— If you mustinstall a rearward facing child — Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
seat on the front passenger seat because of OFF light comes on and stays on all the time
exceptional circumstances and the PASSEN-
whenever the ignition is switched on.
GER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on
and stay on, immediately install the rear- Eee We le myee ey
facing child seat in a rear seating position
The front passenger seat in your vehicle has a lot
and havethe airbag system inspected by
of very important parts of the Advanced Airbag
your Audi dealer.
System in it. These parts include the capacitive
ZA WARNING passenger detection system, wiring, brackets,
and more. The control unit monitors the system
If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustin- on the front passenger seat when the ignition is
stall a forward-facing child restraint on the switched on and turns the airbag indicator light
front passenger's seat: on when a malfunction in the one of the system
— Always makesure the forward-facing seat componentsis detected > page 288. Because the
has been designed and certified by its manu- front passenger seat contains important parts of
facturer for use on front seat with a pas- the Advanced Airbag System, you must take care
senger front and side airbag. to prevent it from being damaged. Damage to
8V2012721B)
283
Airbag system
the seat may prevent the Advanced Airbag Sys-

tem for the front passenger seat from doing its
ZA WARNING
job ina crash. Damage to the front passenger seat can pre-
vent the front airbag from working properly.
The front Advanced Airbag System consists — Improper repair or disassembly of the front
of the following: passenger and driver seat will prevent the
— Crash sensorsin the front of the vehicle that Advanced Airbag System from functioning
measurevehicle acceleration/deceleration to properly.
provide information to the Advanced Airbag — Repairs to the front passenger seat must be
System about the severity of the crash. performed by qualified and properly trained
— An electronic control unit, with integrated workshop personnel.
crash sensorsfor front and side impacts. The — Never remove the front passenger or driver
control unit “decides” whether tofire the front seat from the vehicle.
airbags based on the information received from — Never removethe upholstery from the front
the crash sensors. The control unit also “de- Passenger Seat.
cides” whether the safety belt pretensioners — Never disassemble or remove parts from the
should be activated. seat or disconnect wires from it.
— An Advanced Airbag with gas generator for the — Never carry sharp objects in your pockets or
driver inside the steering wheel hub. put them on the seat. The capacitive passen-
— An Advanced Airbag with gas generator inside ger detection mat in the front passenger
the instrument panel for the front passenger. seat will not function properlyif it is punc-
— A capacitive passenger detection system under- tured.
neath the front passenger seat cover. This sys- — Never carry things on your lap or carry ob-
tem measures the electrical capacitance of the jects on the front passenger seat. Such ob-
person in the seat. The information registered jects can influence the capacitance regis-
is sent continuously to the electronic control tered by the capacitive passenger detection
unit to regulate deployment ofthe front Ad- system, so that incorrect information is pro-
vanced Airbag on the passenger side. vided to the airbag control unit.
— An airbag monitoring system and indicator — Never store items under the front passenger
light in the instrument cluster > page 288. seat. Parts of the Advanced Airbag System
—Asensor in each front seat registers the dis- under the passenger seat could be dam-
tance between the respective seat and the aged, preventing them and the airbag sys-
steering wheel or instrument panel. The infor- tem from working properly.
mation registered is sent continuously to the — Never place seat covers or replacement up-
electronic control unit to regulate deployment holstery that have not been specifically ap-
of the front Advanced Airbags. proved by Audi on the frontseats.
— The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on — Seat covers can prevent the Advanced Airbag
and stays on in the center of the instrument System from recognizing child restraints or
panel > page 325 and tells you when the front occupants on the front passenger seat and
Advanced Airbag on the passenger side has prevent the side airbag in the seat backrest
been turned off. from deploying properly.
—Asensor in the safety belt latch for the driver — If a seat heater has been retrofitted or oth-
and for the front seat passenger that senses erwise addedto the front passenger seat,
whether that safety belt is latched or not and never install any child restraint system on
transmits this information to the electronic this seat.
control unit. — Never use cushions,pillows, blankets, or
similar items on the front passenger seat.
The additional layers prevent the capacitive
284
Airbag system
passenger detection system from accurately cushion can have the same effect. If the
measuring the capacitance of the child safe- front passenger frontal airbag is turned on,
ty seat and/or the person on the seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightwill turn
thus keep the Advanced Airbag System from off.
working properly.
— Never place or use any electrical device How the Advanced Airbag System
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic components work together
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat The front Advanced Airbag System and the side
if the device is connected to the 12-volt airbags supplement the protection offered by the
socketor the cigarette lighter socket. Such front three-point safety belts and the adjustable
devices can influence the capacitance regis- head restraints* to help reduce the risk of injury
tered by the capacitive passenger detection in a wide range of accident and crash situations.
system, so that incorrect information is pro- Be sure to read the important information about
vided to the airbag control unit. safety and heed the WARNINGS in this chapter.
— If you mustuse a child restraint on the front Deployment of the Advanced Airbag System and
passenger seat and the child restraint man- the activation of the safety belt pretensioners de-
ufacturer's instructions require the use of a pend on the deceleration measured by the crash
towel, foam cushion or something else to sensors and registered by the electronic control
properly position the child restraint, make unit. Crash severity depends on speed and decel-
certain that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF eration as well as the mass and stiffness of the
light comes on and stays on whenever the vehicle or object involved in the crash.
child restraint is installed on the front pas-
senger seat. On the passenger side, regardless of safety belt
use, the front passenger frontal airbag will be
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does
turned off if the electrical capacitance measured
not come on and stay on, immediately in-
stall child restraint in a rear seating position by the capacitive passenger detection system on
and havethe airbag system inspected by the front passenger seat is less than the amount
programmed in the electronic control unit. The
your Audi dealer.
front passenger frontal airbag will also be turned
ZA WARNING off if the capacitance measured by the system for
the front passenger seat equals that of an infant
If the front passenger seat gets wet, dryit im- of about one year of age in one ofthe child seats
mediately. that was used to certify the Advanced Airbag Sys-
— If liquid soaks into the front passenger seat, tem under Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
this can keep the airbag system from work- 208. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes
ing properly and may,for instance, deacti- on and stays on totell you when the front Ad-
vate the passenger frontal airbag. If this vanced Airbag System on the passenger side has
happens, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF been turned off > page 288.
light will come on and stay on together with
the airbag indicator light Ea in the instru- ZA WARNING
ment cluster.
To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag in-
— If liquid is pooled on the seat, but has not
flates, always wear safety belts properly.
soaked in, this may also keep the airbag sys-
— If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
tem from working properly and cause the
ting sidewaysor out of position in any way,
passenger frontal airbag to be enabled
your risk of injury is much higher.
8V2012721B)
(turned on), even though thereis a properly

— You will also receive serious injuries and
installed child restraint system on the seat.
could even be killed if you are up against the |>
Wet towels or other wet things on the seat
285
Airbag system
airbag or too close to it when it inflates- of the body. Front airbags supplement the three-
even with an Advanced Airbag > page 276. point safety belts only in some frontal collisions
in which the vehicle deceleration is high enough
to deploy the airbags.
Tmtmee Rom anal Lol im iced t a
airbags Front airbags will not deploy:
— if the ignition is switched off when a crash oc-
B4H-0271
curs,
— in side collisions,
— in rear-end collisions,
—in rollovers,
— when the crash deceleration measured by the
airbag system is less than the minimum thresh-
old needed for airbag deployment as registered
by the electronic control unit.
Fig. 238 Inflated front airbags
The front passenger airbag also will not
deploy:
Safety belts are important to help keep front seat
occupantsin the proper seated position so that —when the front passenger seat is not occupied,
airbags can unfold properly and provide supple- — when the electrical capacitance measured by
mental protection in a frontal collision. the capacitive passenger detection system for
the front passenger seat indicates that the pas-
The front airbags are designed to provide addi-
senger side frontal airbag must be switched off
tional protection for the chest and face of the
by the electronic control unit (the PASSENGER
driver and the front seat passenger when:
AIR BAG OFF light > page 288 and how they
— safety belts are worn properly, work comes on and stays on).
— the seats have been positioned so that the oc-
cupant is properly seated as far as possible ZA WARNING
from the airbag, Sitting in the wrong position can increase the
— and for adjustable head restraints: the head re- risk of serious injury in crashes.
straints have been properly adjusted. —To reducethe risk of injury when the airbags
Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye with inflate, the driver and passengers must al-
great force, things you have on your lap or have wayssit in an upright position, must not
placed on the seat could become dangerous pro- lean against or place any part of their body
jectiles, and be pushedinto you if the airbag in- too close to the area wherethe airbags are
flates. located.
— Occupants who are unbelted, out ofposition
When an airbag deploys,fine dust is released.
or too close to the airbag can beseriously in-
This is normal and is not caused bya fire in the
jured by an airbag as it unfolds with great
vehicle. This dust is made up mostly of a powder
force in the blink of an eye > page 277.
used to lubricate the airbags as they deploy.It
could irritate skin.
ZA WARNING
It is important to remember that while the sup- A child in a rearward-facing child seat instal-
plemental airbag system is designed to reduce led on the front passenger seatwill be seri-
the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries, ously injured and can be killed if the frontair-
for example swelling, bruising and minor abra- bag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag
sions, can also happen when airbags inflate. Air- System.
bags do not protect the arms or the lower parts
286
Airbag system
— The inflating airbag will hit the child seat or the seat to signal to airbag system that the
infant carrier with great force and will seat is occupied by a person when it in factis
smash the child seat and child against the not, or that the person on the seatis heavier
backrest, center armrest, door or roof. than he or she actually is. The change in
— Alwaysinstall rear-facing child seats on the electric capacitance because of such objects
rear seat. can cause the passenger front airbag to be
— If you mustinstall a rearward facing child turned on when it should be off, or can
seat on the front passenger seat because of cause the airbag to work in a waythat is dif-
exceptional circumstances and the PASSEN- ferent from the way it would have worked
GER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on without objects on the seat.
and stay on, immediately install the rear- — Always makesure that there is nothing on
facing child seat in a rear seating position the front passenger seat that will cause the
and havethe airbag system inspected by capacitive passenger detection system in
your Audi dealer. the seat to signal to the Airbag System that
the seat is occupied by a person when it is
ZA\ WARNING not, or to signal that it is occupied by some-
one who is heavier than the person actually
Objects between you and the airbag will in-
crease the risk of injury in a crash byinterfer- sitting on the seat. The presence of an ob-
ject could cause the passenger front airbag
ing with the way the airbag unfolds or by be-
to be turned on when it should beoff, or
ing pushed into you as the airbag inflates.
could cause the airbag to work in a way that
— Never hold things in your hands or on your
is different from the way it would have
lap when the vehicleis in use.
worked without the object on the seat.
— Never transport items on or in the area of
the front passenger seat. Objects could
moveinto the area of the front airbags dur-
ZA WARNING
ing braking or other sudden maneuvers and The fine dust created when airbags deploy can
become dangerous projectiles that can cause breathing problems for people with a
cause serious personal injury if the airbags history of asthma or other breathing condi-
inflate. tions.
— Never place or attach accessories or other —To reduce the risk of breathing problems,
objects (such as cup holders, telephone those with asthma or other respiratory con-
brackets, large, heavy or bulky objects) on ditions should getfresh air right away by
the doors, over or near the area marked getting out of the vehicle or opening win-
“AIRBAG”on the steering wheel, instrument dowsor doors.
panel, seat backrests or between those — If you are ina collision in which airbags de-
areas and yourself. These objects could ploy, wash your hands and face with mild
cause injury in a crash, especially when the soap and water before eating.
airbags inflate. — Be careful not to get the dust into your eyes,
— Never recline the front passenger's seat to or into any cuts or scratches.
transport objects. Items can also moveinto —If the residue should get into your eyes,
the area of the side airbag or the front air- flush them with water.
bag during braking or in a sudden maneuver.
Objects near the airbags can become projec-
tiles and causeinjury, particularly when the
seat is reclined.
8V2012721B)
— Never place or transport objects on the front

passenger seat. Objects on the front passen-
ger seat could cause the capacitive sensor in
287
Airbag system
Monitoring the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light

Advanced Airbag System
B8V-0215
Airbag monitoring indicator light
Two separate indicators monitor the function of

the AdvancedAirbag System: the 2] light and
the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light.
The Advanced Airbag System as well as the side

airbags and side curtain airbags with ejection
mitigation features (including the electronic con-
trol unit, sensors and system wiring) are all Fig. 239 Center console: passenger airbag off warning
light
monitored continuously to make sure that they
are functioning properly whenever the ignition is
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light is located in
on. Every time you turn on the ignition, the air-
the center of the instrument panel > fig. 239.
bag system indicator light Ba witt come on fora
few seconds (function check). The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will come on
and stay on totell you when the front Advanced
The system must be inspected when the Airbag on the passenger side has been turned off
indicator light Ba: by the electronic control unit. If the bulb for the
— does not come on when the ignition is switched PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light burns out, the
on, airbag indicator light BQ will come on to signal a
— does not go out a few seconds after you have malfunction in the Advanced Airbag System. Al-
switched on the ignition, or though the burned-out bulb will not change the
— comes on while driving. waythe front passenger's frontal airbag works,it
will no longer be possible to use the PASSENGER
If an airbag system malfunction is detected, the
AIR BAG OFF light to make sure that the airbag
indicator light will come on to serve as a constant
on/off status is correct for the occupant on the
reminder to have the system inspected immedi-
front passenger seat. Have the airbag system in-
ately.
spected immediately by your authorized Audi
If a malfunction occurs that turns the front air- dealer.
bag on the passenger side off, the PASSENGER
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will blink
AIR BAG OFF light will come on and stay on
for about 5 seconds when:
whenever the ignition is on.
— the ignition is switched on and
Z\WARNING — the capacitive passenger detection system,
An airbag system that is not functioning prop- which switchesthe front seat passenger's fron-
erly cannot provide supplemental protection tal Advanced Airbag on and off, detects a
in a frontal crash. change in the status of the front passenger
- If the airbag indicator light > page 26 seat.
comes when the vehicle is being used, have As soon as the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light
the system inspected immediately by your stops blinking, always make sure that the airbag
authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that status (on or off) as shown by the PASSENGER
the airbag will inflate when it is not sup- AIR BAG OFF light is proper for the age, size and
posed to,or will not inflate when it should. electrical capacitance of the person occupying
the front passenger seat. Always makesure that
the safety belt for the front passenger seat is
properly fastened.
288
Airbag system
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light will show straints on the front seat - some important
the status of the front seat passenger's frontal things to know and > page 301, Child safety.
Advanced Airbag a few seconds after the igni-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGlight comes
tion is switched on and theairbag indicator
on...
light goes off. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
light: If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light comes on
when one ofthe conditions listed aboveis met,
— will stay on if the front passenger seat is not
be sure to check the light regularly to makecer-
occupied;
tain that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light
—will stay on if the electrical capacitance meas- stays on continuously whenever the ignition is
ured by the capacitive passenger detection sys- on. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does
tem for the front passenger seat equals the
not appear on and does notstay on all the time,
combined capacitance of an infant up to about
stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
one year of age and one of the rearward-facing
or forward-facing child restraints listed in Fed- — reactivate the system by turning the ignition off
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with for more than 4 seconds and then turning it on
which the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi- again;
cle was certified; For a listing of the child re- — remove and reinstall the child restraint. Make
straints that were used tocertify your vehicle's sure that the child restraint is properly installed
compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard and that the safety belt for the front passenger
=> page 303. seat has been correctly routed through the
— will go out if the front passenger seat is occu- child restraint as described in the child restraint
pied by an adult as registered by the capacitive manufacturer's instructions;
passenger detection system. — makesure that the convertible locking retractor
— The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light must come on the safety belt for the front passenger seat
on and stay on if the ignition is on and... has been activated and that the safety belt has
—a car bed has been installed on the front pas- been pulled tight.
senger seat, or — makesure that no electrical device (such as a
—arearward-facing child restraint has been in- laptop, CD player, electronic games device,
stalled on the front passenger seat, or power inverter or seat heater for child seats)is
—a forward-facing child restraint has been instal- placed or used on the front passenger seat if
led on the front passenger seat, the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or
—and if the electrical capacitance registered on the cigarette lighter socket;
the front passenger seat is equal to or less than — makesure that no seat heater has been retrofit-
the combined capacitance ofa typical 1 year- ted or otherwise added to the front passenger
old infant and one of the rearward-facing or seat;
forward-facing child restraints listed in Federal — makesure that nothing can interfere with the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which safety belt buckles and that they are not ob-
the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was structed;
certified. — makesure that there are no wet objects (such
as a wet towel) and no water or other liquids on
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
the front passenger seat cushion.
front airbag will not deploy, and the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF light will stay on. Never installa If the PASSENGER AIR BAGlightstill does
rearward-facing child restraint on the front pas- not come on...
senger seat, the safest place for a child in any If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light still does
kind of child restraint is at one of the seating po-
8V2012721B)
not come on and does not stay on continuously

sitions on the rear seat > page 277, Child re- (when the ignition is switched on),
289
Airbag system
— take the child restraint off the front passenger — If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does
seat and install it properly at one of the rear not go off when an adult who is not very
seat positions. Have the airbag system inspect- small is sitting on the front passenger seat
ed by your Audi dealer immediately. after taking the steps described above,
— movethe child to a rear seat position and make makesure the adult is properly seated and
sure that the child is properly restrained ina restrained at one of the rear seating posi-
child restraint that is appropriate for its size tions. Have the airbag system inspected by
and age. your authorized Audi dealer before trans-
porting anyone on the front passenger seat.
The PASSENGER AIR BAGlight should NOT
come on...
ZA WARNING
The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light should NOT
An airbag system that is not functioning prop-
come on when the ignition is on and an adultis
erly cannot provide supplemental protection
sitting in a proper seating position on the front
in a frontal crash.
passenger seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
— If the airbag indicator light > page 26
light comes on and stays on or flashes for about
comes when the vehicle is being used, have
5 seconds while driving, under these circumstan-
the system inspected immediately by your
ces, makesurethat:
authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that
— the adult on the front passenger seat is proper- the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
ly seated on the center of the seat cushion with posed to, or will not inflate when it should.
his or her back up against the backrest and the
backrestis not reclined, ZA WARNING
— the adult is not taking weight off the seat by
If the front airbag inflates, a child without a
holding on to the passenger assist handle
child restraint, or in a rearward-facing child
abovethe front passenger door or supporting
safety seat, or in a forward-facing child re-
their weight on the armrest,
straint that has not been properly installed
— the safety belt is being properly worn and that
will be seriously injured and can be killed.
there is not a lot of slack in the safety belt web-
— Even though your vehicle is equipped with
bing,
an Advanced Airbag System, makecertain
— there are no aftermarket seat covers or cush-
that all children, especially 12 years and
ions or other things (such as blankets) on the
younger, alwaysride on the back seat prop-
front passenger seat that might cause the ca-
erly restrained for their age and size.
pacitive passenger detection system to miscal-
— Alwaysinstall forward or rear-facing child
culate electrical capacitance.
seats on the rear seat — even with an Ad-
vanced Airbag System.
MinleXelat etiam iamead (lame) — If you mustinstall a rearward-facing child
monitoring the Advanced Airbag System seat on the front passenger seat because of
ZA\ WARNING GER AIR BAG OFF light does not appear and
— If the status of the Advanced Airbag System stay on, immediately install the rear-facing
has changed while the vehicle is moving, the child seat in a rear seating position and have
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light blinks for the airbag system inspected by your Audi
about 5 seconds to catch the driver's atten- dealer.
tion. If this happens, always stop as soon as — If, in exceptional circumstances, you must
it is safe to do so and check the steps descri- install a forward-facing child restraint on
bed above. the front passenger seat, always move the
seat into its rearmost position in the seat's
290
Airbag system
fore and aft adjustment range, as far away — Never cover, obstruct, or change the steer-
from the airbag as possible. The backrest ing wheel horn pad or airbag cover or the in-
mustbe adjusted to an upright position. strument panel or modify them in any way.
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG — Never attach any objects such as cup holders
OFF light comes on and stays on all the time or telephone mountings to the surfaces cov-
whenever the ignition is switched on. ering the airbag units.
— For cleaning the horn pad or instrument
ZA\ WARNING panel, use only a soft, dry cloth or one mois-
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does tened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners
not go out when an adultis sitting on the could damage the airbag cover or change
front passenger seat after taking the steps the stiffness or strength of the material so
described above, make sure the adult is that the airbag cannot deploy and protect
properly seated and restrained at one of the properly.
rear seating positions. — Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of
— Have the airbag system inspected by your the airbag system.
Audi dealer before transporting anyone on — All work on the steering wheel, instrument
the front passenger seat. panel, front seats or electrical system (in-
cluding the installation of audio equipment,
@) Tips cellular telephones and CB radios,etc.)
must be performed by a qualified technician
If the capacitive passenger detection system
who has the training and special equipment
determines that the front passenger seat is
necessary.
empty,the frontal airbag on the passenger
— For any work on the airbag system, we
side will be turned off, and the PASSENGER
strongly recommend that you see your au-
AIR BAG OFF lightwill stay on.
thorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
— Never modify the front bumper or parts of
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
the vehicle body.
Parts of the airbag system are installed at many — Always makesurethat the side airbag can
different places on your Audi. Installing, remov- inflate without interference:
ing, servicing or repairing a part in an area of the — Never install seat covers or replacement
vehicle can damage a part ofan airbag system upholstery over the front seatbacks that
and prevent that system from working properly have not been specifically approved by Au-
ina collision. di.
— Never use additional seat cushions that
There are some important things you have to
cover the areas wherethe side airbags in-
know to makesurethat the effectiveness of the
flate.
system will not be impaired and that discarded
— Damage tothe original seat covers or to
components do not causeinjury or pollute the
the seam in the area of the side airbag
environment.
module must always be repaired immedi-
ZA WARNING ately by an authorized Audi dealer.
— The airbag system can deploy only once. Af-
Improper care, servicing and repair proce-
ter an airbag has been deployed, it must be
dures can increase the risk of personal injury
replaced with new replacement parts de-
and death by preventing an airbag from de-
signed and approved especially for your Audi
ploying when needed or deploying an airbag
model version. Replacement of complete
unexpectedly:
8V2012721B)
airbag systems or airbag components must

be performed by qualified workshops only.
Makesure that anyairbag service action is
291
Airbag system
entered in your Audi Warranty & Mainte- Knee airbags

nance booklet under AIRBAG REPLACEMENT
Pregl) CooL Aisle)
RECORD.
Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
— Applies to plug-in hybrid* vehicles: In the
event of a collision where the airbags de- The knee airbag system can provide supplemen-
ploy, the electrical connection to the high tal protection to properly restrained front seat
voltage battery is automatically disconnect- occupants.
ed. This prevents a shortcircuit.
Other things that can affect Advanced

Airbag performance
Changing the vehicle's suspension system can

change the way that the Advanced Airbag System
performs in a crash. For example, using tire-rim
combinations not approved by Audi, lowering the
vehicle, changing the stiffness of the suspension,
including the springs, suspension struts, shock Fig. 240 Driver's knee airbag
absorbersetc. can change the forces that are

measured by the airbag sensors and sent to the The driver knee airbag is in the instrument panel
electronic control unit. Some suspension changes underneath the steering wheel > fig. 240, the
can, for example, increase the force levels meas- airbag for the passenger is at about the same
ured by the sensors and makethe airbag system height in the instrument panel underneath the
deploy in crashes in which it would not deployif glove compartment.
the changes had not been made. Other kinds of The knee airbag offers additional protection to
changes may reduce the force levels measured by the driver's and passenger's knees and upper and
the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploy- lower thigh areas and supplements the protec-
ing when it should. tion provided bythe safetybelts.
ZA\WARNING If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also

deployin frontal collisions when the deployment
Changing the vehicle's suspension including
threshold stored in the control unit is met
use of unapproved tire-rim combinations can
=> page 286, More important things to know
change Advanced Airbag performanceand in-
about front airbags.
crease the risk of serious personal injury ina
crash. In addition to their normal safety function, safe-
— Never install suspension components that ty belts help keep the driver or front passenger in
do not have the same performance charac- position ina frontal collision so that the airbags
teristics as the componentsoriginally instal- can provide supplemental protection.
led on your vehicle. The airbag system is not a substitute for your
— Never use tire-rim combinations that have safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occu-
not been approved by Audi. pant restraint system in your vehicle. Always re-
member that the airbag system can only help to
protect you if you are wearing your safety belt
and wearing it properly. This is why you should al-
ways wear your safety belt, not just because the
law requires you to do so > page 268, General
notes.
292
Airbag system
Remember too,airbags will deploy only once and WaalS1e Mold

only in certain kinds of accidents - your safety Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags
belts are alwaysthere to offer protection in those
The risk of injury to the leg area can be reduced
accidents in which airbags are not supposed to
by fully inflated knee airbags.
deploy or when they have already deployed, for
example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by
B8V-0356
another after the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons whyan airbag is

not a substitute for the safety belt. The airbag
system works mosteffectively when used with
the safety belts. Therefore, always wear your
safety belts correctly.
It is important to remember that while the sup-

plemental knee airbag system is designed to re- Fig. 241 Inflated airbags protecting in a frontal collision
duce the likelihood of serious injuries, other inju-
ries, for example, swelling, bruising and minor The knee airbag system has been designed so
abrasions and friction burns can also occur when that the airbags for the driver and front passen-
an airbag inflates. ger deployin certain but not all frontal collisions.
The knee airbag system basically consistsof: If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbags also
— The electronic control module
deployin frontal collisions when the deployment
threshold stored in the control unit is met.
— Twoinflatable airbags (airbag and gas genera-
tor), one for the driver and one for the front When the system deploys, the airbags fill with a
passenger compressed propellant gas, and inflate between
— The airbag indicator light in the instrument the lower part of the instrument panel and the
panel driver and the lower part of the instrument panel
and the front passenger > page 286,fig. 238.
The kneeairbag system will not deploy:
Although theyare not a soft pillow, they can
— when the ignition is switched off
“cushion” the impact and in this way they can
— in frontal collisions when the deceleration
help to reducethe risk of injury to the lower ex-
measured by the control unit is too low
tremities.
— in side collisions
— in rear-end collisions All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so
—in rollovers fast that many people don't even realize that the
— in the event of a system malfunction (warning/ airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate
indicator light is on) > page 26. with a great deal of force and it is important for
occupant safety that nothing should be in their
Z\ WARNING way when theydeploy.
— Safety belts and the airbag system can only Fully inflated airbags in combination with proper-
provide protection when occupantsarein ly worn safety belts slow downand limit the oc-
the proper seating position > page 286. cupant's forward movement and help to reduce
— If the airbag indicator light > page 26 the risk ofinjury.
comes when the vehicle is being used, have
8V2012721B)

the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
posed to,or will not inflate when it should.
293
Airbag system
tial Selacet Lilamiatadolar Mol mate dal -1-) bags, for example) can interfere with or
airbag system prevent proper deployment of the airbag.
Applies to: vehicles with knee airbags Small objects can be thrown through the
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you
wearsafety belts correctly and ride in a proper or your passengers.
seating position. — Makesure there are no cracks, deep scratch-
es or other damage in the area of the instru-
There is a lot that you and your passengers must ment panel where the kneeairbags arelo-
know and do to help the safety belts and airbags cated.
to provide supplemental protection. — If children are incorrectly seated, their risk
of injury increases in a collision > page 301,
ZAWARNING Child safety.
An inflating knee airbag can cause serious in-
jury. Wearing safety belts incorrectly and im-
Side airbags
proper seating positions increase the risk of
serious personal injury and death whenever a plea gl eee eT ere hy
vehicle is being used.
The airbag system can provide supplemental
— The knee airbag system cannot protect you
protection to properly restrained occupants.
properly if you are seated too close to any of
the airbag locations. When adjusting their nN
us}
seat positions, it is important that both the 2
2
a
a
driver and the front passenger keep their
upper bodies and kneesat the following
minimum safe distances:
— at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the
chest and the steering wheel/instrument
panel.
—at least 4 inches (10 cm) between the
knees and the lower part of the instru- Fig. 242 Side airbag location in the driver's seat
mentpanel.
— The risk of personal injury increases if you The side airbags are located in the sides of the
lean forwardor to the side, or if the seat is front seat backrests > fig. 242 and the rear back-
improperly positioned and you are not wear- rest* facing the doors.
ing your safety belt. The risk increases even The side airbags installed for the front seating
more should the airbag deploy. positions have been designed and certified to
— Always makesure that the knee airbag can help reduce the risk of injury that can be caused
inflate without interference. Objects be- by airbags when theyinflate, particularly when
tween you and the airbag can increase the the occupant sitting next to it is not seated prop-
risk of injury in an accidentby interfering erly. The side airbag for the front passenger seat
with the way the airbag deploys or by being can be used with properlyinstalled child re-
pushed into you as the airbag deploys. straints. Please be sure to read the importantin-
— Never let anybody, especially children or formation and warnings whenever using a child
animals ride in the footwell in front of the restraint in a vehicle: Safety belts > page 268,
passenger seat. If the airbag deploys, this Airbag system = page 276,Child safety
can result in serious or fatal injuries. => page 301.
— Never carry objects of any kind in the foot-
The side airbag system basically consistsof: >
well area in front of the driver's or pas-
senger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping
294
Airbag system
— the electronic control module and external side duce the likelihood of serious injuries, other inju-
impact sensors ries, for example, swelling, bruising, friction
— the twoairbags located in the sides of the front burns and minor abrasions can also be associated
backrests and the twoairbags* located in the with deployed side airbags. Remember too, side
rear backrest airbags will deploy only once and only in certain
— the airbag warning light in the instrument clus- kinds of accidents - your safety belts are always
ter. there to offer protection.
The airbag system is monitored electronically to Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of
makecertain thatit is functioning properly at all vehicle damage are not necessarily an indication
times. Each time you switch on the ignition, the of over-sensitive or failed airbag activation. In
airbag system indicator light will come on for a some collisions, both front and side airbags may
few seconds (self diagnostics). inflate. Remember too, that airbags will deploy
only once and only in certain kinds ofcollisions -
The side airbag system supplements the safety
your safety belts are always there to offer protec-
belts and can help to reduce the risk of injury to
tion in those accidents in which airbags are not
the driver's, front and rear* passenger's upper
supposed to deploy or when they have already
torso on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a
deployed.
side collision. The airbag deploys only in side im-
pacts and only when the vehicle acceleration reg- The side airbag system will not deploy:
istered by the control unit is high enough. If this
— when the ignition is switched off
rate is below the reference value programmed in-
— in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
to the control unit, the side airbags will not be
ured by the sensor is too low
triggered, even though the car may be badly
— in front-end collisions
damagedas a result of the collision. It is not pos-
— in rear-end collisions
sible to define an airbag triggering range that
— in rollovers.
will cover every possible angle of impact, since
the circumstances will vary considerably between In some types of accidents the front airbags, side
one collision and another. Important factorsin- curtain airbags and side airbags maybe triggered
clude, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of together.
the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc. > page 296, Important safety in- Z\ WARNING
structions on the side airbag system. — Safety belts and the airbag system will only
Aside from their normal safety function, safety provide protection when occupantsare in
belts work to help keep the driver or front pas- the proper seating position > page 296.
senger in position in the event of a side collision — If the airbag indicator light > page 26
so that the side airbags can provide protection. comes when the vehicle is being used, have
The airbag system is not a substitute for your
safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occu-
the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
pant restraint system in your vehicle. Always re-
posed to, or will not inflate when it should.
member that the side airbag system can only
help to protect you if you are wearing your safety
belt and wearing it properly. This is another rea-
son why you should always wear your safety
belts, not just because the law requires you to do
so > page 268, General notes.
8V2012721B)
It is important to remember that while the sup-

plemental side airbag system is designed to re-
295
Airbag system
How supplemental side airbags work help to reducethe risk of injury to the upper part
of the body.
Side airbags deploy instantly and can help re-
ducetherisk of upper torsoinjuries for occu- A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
pants who are properly restrained. This is normal and does not mean thereis a fire
in the vehicle.
DQ
ra
S
S$
=
o
a Important safety instructions on the side
airbag system
Airbags are only supplementalrestraints. Always

properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper
seating position.
There is a lot that you and your passengers must

know and act accordingly to help the safety belts
Applies to: vehicles without power top
and airbags do their job to provide supplemental
Fig. 243 Side impact protection: inflated side airbags (ex-
ample) protection.
ZA WARNING
B8V-0329
An inflating side airbag can cause serious or

fatal injury. Improperly wearing safety belts
and improper seating positions increase the
risk of serious personal injury and death
whenever a vehicle is being used.
— In order to reducethe risk of injury when the
supplemental side airbag inflates:

— Alwayssit in an upright position and never
Fig. 244 Side impact protection: inflated side airbags lean against the area where the supple-
mental side airbag is located.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled — Never let a child or anyone else rest their
with propellant gas and breaks through a seam in head againstthe side trim panel in the
the seat surface area marked “AIRBAG”. It ex- area where the supplemental side airbag
pands between the side trim panel and the pas- inflates.
senger. In order to help provide this additional — Always makesurethat safety belts are
protection, the side airbag mustinflate within a worn correctly,
fraction of a second at very high speed and with — Do not let anyone sitting in the front seat
great force. The supplemental side airbag could put their hand or any other parts of their
injure you if your seating position is not proper or body out of the window.
uprightor if items are located in the area where — Always makesurethat the side airbag can
the supplemental side airbag expands. This ap- inflate without interference.
plies especially to children > page 301, Child
— Never install seat covers or replacement
safety. Supplemental side airbags inflate be-
upholstery over the front seatbacks that
tween the occupant and the door panel on the
have not been specifically approved by Au-
side of the vehicle that is struck in certain side
di.
collision > fig. 243, > fig. 244.
— Never use additional seat cushions that
Although theyare not a soft pillow, they can cover the areas wherethe side airbags de-
“cushion” the impact and in this way they can ploy.
296
Airbag system
— Damage to the original seat covers or to doors when air escapes through larger, un-
the seam in the area ofthe side airbag closed openings in the door panel.
module must always be repaired immedi- — Never drive with interior door trim panels
ately by an authorized Audi dealer. removed.
— Objects between you and the airbag can in- — Never drive when parts have been removed
creasethe risk of injury in an accidentby in- from the inside door panel and the open-
terfering with the waythe airbag unfolds or ings they leave have not been properly
by being pushed into you as the airbag in- closed.
flates. — Never drive when loudspeakersin the
— Never place or attach accessories or other doors have been removed unless the
objects (such as cup holders, telephone speaker holes have been properly closed.
brackets, or even large, bulky objects) on — Always makecertain that openings are
the doors, over or near the area marked covered or filled if additional speakers or
“AIRBAG”on the seat backrests. other equipmentis installed in the inside
— Such objects and accessories can become door panels.
dangerous projectiles and cause injury — Always have work on the doors done by an
when the supplemental side airbag de- authorized Audi dealer or qualified work-
ploys. shop.
— Never carry any objects or pets in the de-
ployment space between them and the air-
Side curtain airbags
bags or allow children or other passengers
to travel in this position. Pyro a) aCe oLet(s(-Mae ae LLL ky
— Alwaysuse the built-in coat hooksonly for Applies to: vehicles with side curtain airbags
lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy The side curtain airbag system can provide sup-
or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that plemental protection to properly restrained oc-
mayinterfere with side airbag deployment cupants.
and can cause personal injury in an accident.
rr)
— Alwaysprevent the side airbags from being S
2
=
damaged by heavy objects knocking against i
a
or hitting the sides of the seatbacks.
— The airbag system can only be triggered
once. If the airbag has been triggered, the
system mustbe replaced by an authorized
Audi dealership.
— Damage (cracks, deep scratches etc.) to the
original seat covers or to the seam in the
area of the side airbag module must always Fig. 245 Side curtain airbags, driver's side: side curtain air-
be repaired immediately by an authorized baglocation (example)
Audi dealer.
The side curtain airbags are located on both sides
— If children are seated improperly, their risk
of the interior above the front and rear side win-
of injury increases in the case of an accident
dows > fig. 245. They are identified by the word
= page 301, Child safety.
“AIRBAG”on the windshield frame and the cen-
— Never attempt to modify any components of
ter roof pillar.
the airbag system in any way.
— Ina side collision, side airbags will not func- The side curtain airbags contain features that
8V2012721B)
tion properly if sensors cannotcorrectly provide ejection mitigation to help prevent vehi-
measureincreasing air pressure inside the cle occupantsor parts of their bodies from being
completely or partially ejected from the vehicle >
297
Airbag system
interior in certain side impacts and vehicle roll- The side curtain airbag system basically
overs. consists of:
The side curtain airbag system supplements the — The electronic control module and external side
safety belts and can help to reduce the risk ofin- impact sensors
jury for occupants' heads and upper torso on the — The side curtain airbags above the front and
side of the vehicle thatis struck in a side colli- rear side windowswith ejection mitigation fea-
sion. The side curtain airbag inflates in side im- tures
pacts and only when the vehicle acceleration reg- — The airbag indicator light in the instrument
istered by the control unit is high enough. If this panel
rate is below the reference value programmed in- The airbag system is monitored electronically to
to the control unit, the side curtain airbag will makecertain it is functioning properlyatall
not be triggered, even though the car may be times. Each time you switch on the ignition, the
badly damaged as a result of the collision. It is airbag system indicator light will come on for a
not possible to define an airbag triggering range few seconds (self diagnostics).
that will cover every possible angle of impact,
since the circumstances will vary considerably be- The side curtain airbag is not activated:
tween one collision and another. Important fac- — if the ignition is switched off,
tors include, for example, the nature (hard or — in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
soft) of the impacting object, the angle of im- ured by the sensor is too low,
pact, vehicle speed, etc. > page 299, How side
—in rear-end collisions.
curtain airbags work.
Aside from their normal safety function, safety ZA WARNING

belts work to help keep the driver or front pas- — Safety belts and the airbag system will only
senger in position in the event of a collision so provide protection when occupantsare in
that the side curtain airbags can provide protec- the proper seating position > page 58,
tion. Front seats.
The airbag system is not a substitute for your — If the airbag indicator light > page 26
safety belt. Rather,it is part of the overall occu- comes when the vehicle is being used, have
pant restraint system in your vehicle. Alwaysre- the system inspected immediately by your
member that the airbag system can only help to authorized Audi dealer. It is possible that
protect you if you are wearing your safety belt the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
and wearing it properly. This is another reason posed to, or will not inflate when it should.
whyyou should always wear your safety belts,

not just because the law requires you to do so
=> page 268, General notes.
It is important to remember that while the side

curtain airbag system is designed to help reduce
the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries,
for example, swelling, bruising, friction burns
and minor abrasions can also be associated with
these airbags upon deployment. Remember too,
these airbags will deploy only once and onlyin
certain kinds of accidents - your safety belts are
always thereto offer protection.
298
Airbag system
Howside curtain airbags work Important safety instructions on the side

Applies to: vehicles with side curtain airbags (teste Si)
Applies to: vehicles with side curtain airbags
Side curtain airbags can work togetherwith side
airbags to help reduce therisk of head and upper Airbags are only supplementalrestraints. Always
torso injuries for occupants who are properly re- properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper
strained. seating position.
©.
x There is a lot that you and your passengers must
g| know and do to help the safety belts and airbags
=
&
i)
do their job to provide supplemental protection.
ZA WARNING
Improperly wearing safety belts and improper
seating positions increase the risk of serious
personal injury and death whenever a vehicle
Ss »\ Sw. is being used.
Fig. 246 Illustration ofprinciple: Inflated side curtain air- — Never let occupants place any parts of their
bags ontheleft side (example) bodies in the area from which the side cur-
tain airbag inflate.
The side curtain airbags inflate between the oc-
— Always makesure that the side curtain air-
cupant and the windowson the side of the vehi-
bags can inflate without interference.
cle that is struck in a side collision > fig. 246.
— Use the built-in coat hooks onlyfor light-
When the system is triggered, the side curtain weight clothing. Never leave any heavy or
airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks sharp-edged objects in the pockets that may
through a seam abovethe front and rear side interfere with airbag deployment and can
windowsidentified by the AIRBAGlabel. In order cause personal injuryin a collision.
to help provide this additional protection, the — Never use hangers to hang clothes on the
side curtain airbag mustinflate within the blink hooks.
of an eye at very high speed and with great force. — Only use factory-installed sun shades or,if
The side curtain airbag could injure you if your shadesinstalled after the vehicle leaves the
seating position is not proper or upright or if factory, use only genuine Audi sun shades.
items are located in the area where the supple- — Never swing the sun visors over to the side
mental side curtain airbag inflates. This applies windowsif things such as pens, garage door
especially to children > page 301. openers, hands-free speakers,etc. are at-
tached to the sun visors. They could come
Although theyare nota soft pillow,side curtain
loose and cause serious injuryif the side cur-
airbags can “cushion” the impact and in this way
tain airbag inflates.
they can help to reducethe risk of injury to the
head and the upper part of the body. —A deploying airbag inflates in a fraction of a
second and with great force.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. — Never attach objects to the cover or in the
This is quite normal and does not mean there is a deployment zone of a side curtain airbag.
fire in the vehicle. — The airbag deployment zones must be kept
clear at all times. Make sure there are no ob-
jects, pets, or other persons in the space be-
tween anyvehicle occupant and any airbag
8V2012721B)
at any time.
— Do not attach any accessories to the doors.
299
Airbag system
Z\ WARNING
— The airbag system can deploy only once. If
the airbag has been triggered, the system
mustbe replaced by an authorized Audi
dealer or qualified workshop.
— Always have work involving the side curtain
airbag system, removal and installation of
the airbag components,or other repairs per-
formed bya qualified dealership. Otherwise
the airbag system may not work correctly.
— Never attempt to modify any components of
the airbag system in any way.
300
Child safety
Child safety — National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), currently at : http://www.safercar.gov
Important information (for the USA)
— Transport Canada Information Centre, currently
Introduction
at: http://www.tc.gc.ca (for Canada)
The rear seat is generally the safest place ina
Consult the child safety seat manufacturer's in-
collision.
structions in order to be sure the seat is right for
The physical principles of what happens when your child's size > page 305, Important safety
your vehicle is in a crash applyalso to children instructions for using child safety seats. Please
= page 269, What happens to occupants not be sure to read and heed all of the important in-
wearing safety belts?. But unlike adults and formation and WARNINGS about child safety, Ad-
teenagers, their muscles and bonesare notfully vanced Airbags, and the installation of child re-
developed. In many respects children are at straints in this chapter.
greater risk of serious injury in crashes than There is a lot you need to know about the Ad-
adults. vanced Airbags in your vehicle and how they work
Becausechildren's bodies are not fully developed, when infants and children in child restraints are
they require restraint systems especially de- on the front passenger seat. Becauseof the large
signed for their size, weight, and body structure. amountof important information, we cannotre-
Many countries and all states of the United peat it all here. We urge you to read the detailed
States and provinces of Canada havelawsrequir- information in this owner's manual about airbags
ing the use of approved child restraint systems and the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle
for infants and small children. and the very important information about trans-
porting children on the front passenger seat.
Ina frontal crash at a speed of 20-35 mph
Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS - they are
(30-56 km/h) the forces acting on a 13-pound
extremely important for your safety and the safe-
(6 kg) infant will be more than 20 times the
ty of your passengers, especially infants and
weightof the child. This means the weight of the
small children.
child would suddenly be more than 260 pounds
(120 kg). Under these conditions, only an appro- ZA WARNING
priate child restraint properly used can reduce
— Accident statistics have shownthat children
the risk of serious injury. Child restraints, like
are generally safer in the rear seat area than
adult safety belts, must be used properly to be
in the front seating position. Always restrain
effective. Used improperly, they can increase the
any child age 12 and under in the rear.
risk of serious injury in an accident.
— All vehicle occupants and especially children
All children, especially those 12 years and young- mustbe restrained properly whenever riding
er must alwaysride in the back seat properlyre- in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly
strained for their age and size. If you mustinstall restrained child could be injured by striking
a child restraint on the front passenger seat in the interior or by being ejected from the ve-
exceptional circumstances, be sure to read and hicle during a sudden maneuver or impact.
heed the important information and warnings An unrestrained or improperly restrained
= page 277. Infants and other children who are child is also at greater risk of injury or death
properly restrained in an appropriate child re- through contact with an inflating airbag.
straint that is for their size and age can benefit —A suitable child restraint properly installed
from the protection that supplemental side air- and usedat one ofthe rear seating positions
bags provide in some kinds of crashes. provides the highest degree of protection
8V2012721B)
For more information please see information pro- for infants and small children in mostacci-
vided by the: dentsituations.
301
Child safety
ZA\ WARNING — Never put the forward-facing child re-

straint up against or very near the instru-
Children on the front seat of any car even with
mentpanel.
Advanced Airbags can be seriously injured or
— Applies to: vehicles with safety belt height
even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in
adjustment: Alwaysset the safety belt up-
a rearward-facing child safety seat installed
per anchorage to the adjustment position
on the front passenger seat will be seriously
that permits proper installation in accord-
injured and can be killed if the front airbag in-
ancewith the child restraint manufactur-
flates.
er's instructions.
— The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
— Always movethe front passenger seat to
seat or infant carrier with great force and
the highest position in the up and down
will smash the child safety seat and child
adjustment range and moveit back to the
against the backrest, center armrest, or
rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft
door.
adjustment range, as far away from the
— Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
airbag as possible, before installing the
on the rear seat.
forward-facing child restraint.
— If you mustinstall a rearward facing child
— Always makesure that the safety belt up-
safety seat on the front passenger seat in
per anchorage is behind the child restraint
and not next to or in front of the child re-
GER AIR BAG OFF light does not come on
straint so that the safety belt will be prop-
and stay on, immediately install the rear-
erly positioned.
facing child safety seat in a rear seating po-
— Always makesure that nothing prevents
sition and have the airbag system inspected
the front passenger's seat from being
immediately by your Audi dealer.
moved to the rearmostposition in its fore
and aft adjustment range.
ZA\ WARNING — Never place objects on the seat (such as a
— Forward-facing child seats installed on the laptop, CD player, electronic games device,
front passenger seat mayinterfere with the power inverter or seat heater for child
deployment of the airbag and cause serious seats). These mayinfluencethe electrical
personal injury to the child. capacitance measured by the capacitive
— If exceptional circumstances require the use passenger detection system and can also
of a forward-facing child restraint on the fly around in an accident and cause serious
front passenger's seat, the child's safety and personal injury.
well-being require the following special pre- — Never place or use anyelectrical device
cautions to be taken: (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
— Always makesure that the forward-facing gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heat-
seat has been designed and certified by its er for child seats) on the front passenger
manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat if the device is connected to the 12-
seat with a front and side airbag. volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket.
— Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's — Ifa seat heater has been retrofitted or
instructions provided with the child seat or otherwise added to the front passenger
infant carrier. seat, never install any child restraint sys-
— Never install a child restraint without a tem on this seat.
properly attached top tether strap if the — Make sure that there are no wet objects
child restraint manufacturer's instructions (such as a wet towel) and no water or oth-
require the top tether strap to be used. er liquids on the front passenger seat
cushion.
302
Child safety
— Always makesure that the PASSENGER senger seat in child restraints that are listed in
AIR BAG OFF light comes on and stays on the Standard.
all the time whenever the ignition is Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Ad-
switched on. vanced Airbag system, all children, especially
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light those 12 years and younger, should alwaysride in
does not come on and stay on, immediate- the back seat properly restrained for their age
ly install the forward-facing child seat ina and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes
rear seating position and havethe airbag the front seat a potentially dangerous place for a
system inspected by your authorized Audi child to ride. The front seat is not the safest place
dealer. for a child in a forward-facing child safety seat. It
— Alwaysbuckle the child seat firmly in place can be a very dangerous placefor an infant or a
even if a child is not sitting in it. A loose larger child in a rearward-facing seat.
child seat can fly around during a sudden
stop or ina collision. The vehicle's Advanced Airbag System has a ca-
pacitive passenger detection system in the front
— Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS
passenger seat cushion that can detect the pres-
whenever using a child restraint in a vehi-
ence of a baby or a child in a child restraint sys-
cle > page 268, Safety belts, > page 276,
tem on this seat.
Airbag system and = page 301, Important
information. The capacitive passenger detection system regis-
ters the changes that result in an electrical field
@ Tips when child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket
Alwaysreplace child restraints that were in- are on the front passenger seat. The change in
stalled in a vehicle during a crash. Damage to the measured capacitance due to the presence of
a child restraint that is not visible could cause a child, a child restraint, and a baby blanket on
it to fail in another collision situation. the front passenger seat is related to the child re-
straint system resting on the seat. The measured
capacitance of a child restraint system varies de-
Advancedfront airbag system and children
pending on the type of system and specific make
Your vehicle is equipped with a front “Advanced and model.
Airbag System”in compliance with United States
The electrical capacitance of the various types,
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) makes, and models of child restraints specified
208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety by the U.S. National HighwayTraffic Safety Ad-
Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time ministration (NHTSA)in the relevant safety
your vehicle was manufactured. standard are stored in the Advanced Airbag Sys-
The Advanced Airbag system in your vehicle has tem control unit together with the capacitances
been certified to meet the “low-risk” require- typical of infants and a 1-year old child. When a
mentsfor 3- and 6-year old children on the pas- child restraint is used on the front passenger seat
senger side and small adults on the driver side. with a typical 1 year-old infant, the Advanced Air-
The low risk deployment criteria are intended to bag System compares the capacitance measured
reduce the risk of injury through interaction with by the capacitive passenger detection system
the airbag that can occur, for example, by being with the data stored in the electronic control
too close to the steering wheel and instrument unit.
panel when the airbag inflates. In addition, the
system has been certified to comply with the Ce eMeece Phe lieteRaeeli alias Te)
“suppression” requirements of the Safety Stand- system
8V2012721B)
ard, to turn off the front airbag for infants up to

Regardless of the child restraint that you use,
12 months who arerestrained on the front pas-
makesure that it has been certified to meet >
303
Child safety
Safety Standards and has been certified by its Subpart B - Rear-facing child restraints
manufacturer for use with an airbag. Always be
Model Manufactured on or
sure that the child restraint is properly installed
after
at one of the rear seating positions. If in excep-
tional circumstances you mustuseit on the front Century SmartFit 4543 December 1, 1999
passenger seat, carefully read all of the informa- Cosco Arriva September 25, 2007
tion on child safety and Advanced Airbags and 22-013PAW and base
heedall of the applicable WARNINGS. Make cer- 22-999WHO
tain that the child and child restraint are correct- Evenflo Discovery Ad- December 1, 1999
ly recognized by the capacitive passenger detec- just Right 212
tion system in the front passenger seat, that the Evenflo First Choice December 1, 1999
front passenger airbag is turned off, and that the 204
airbag status is alwayscorrectly signaled by the
Graco Infant 8457 December 1, 1999
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light.
Graco Snugride September 25, 2007
Many types and models ofchild restraints have
Peg Perego Primo Viag- September 25, 2007
been available over the years, new modelsare in-
gio SIP IMUNOOUS
troduced regularly incorporating new and im-
proved designs and older models are taken out of SubpartC - Forward-facing and convertible
production. Child restraints are not standardized. child restraints
Child restraints of the same type typically have
Model Manufactured on or
different weights and sizes and different “foot-
after
prints”, the size and shape of the bottom of the
child restraint that sits on the seat, when they Britax Roundabout September 25, 2007
are installed on a vehicle seat. These differences E9LO2xx
makeit virtually impossible to certify compliance Cosco Touriva 02519 December 1, 1999
with the requirements for advanced airbags with Cosco Summit Deluxe September 25, 2007
each and every child restraint that has ever been High Back Booster
sold in the past or will be sold over the course of 22-262
the useful life of your vehicle.
Cosco High Back Boos- September 25, 2007
For this reason, the United States National High- ter 22-209
way Traffic Safety Administration has published a Evenflo Tribute V September 25, 2007
list of specific type, makes and modelsofchild 379Xxxxx
restraints that must be used to certify compli-
Evenflo Medallion 254 December 1, 1999
ance of the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi-
Evenflo Generations September 25, 2007
cle with the suppression requirements of Federal
352xxxx
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. Thesechild
restraints are: Graco ComfortSport September 25, 2007
Graco Toddler Safety September 25, 2007
Subpart A - Car bed child restraints Seat Step 2
Model Manufactured on or Graco Platinum Cargo September 25, 2007
after
Angel Guard Angel September 25, 2007 Z\ WARNING
Ride AA2403FOF To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure
that the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light
comes on and stays on whenever a child re-
straintis installed on the front passenger seat
and the ignition is switched on.
304
Child safety
— Take the child restraint off the front passen- child restraint increases the risk of serious
ger seat and install it properly at one of the personal injury and death.
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR — All vehicle occupants and especially children
BAG OFF light does notstay on. mustbe restrained properly whenever riding
— Have the airbag system inspected by your in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly
authorized Audi dealer immediately. restrained child could be injured by striking
the interior or by being ejected from the ve-
@ Tips hicle during a sudden maneuver or impact.
The child seatslisted in categories A to C have An unrestrained or improperly restrained
been statically tested by Audi only for the Ad- child is also at greater risk of injury or death
vanced Airbag function. through contact with an inflating airbag.
— Commercially available child safety seats are
required to comply with U.S. Federal Motor
Importantsafety instructions for using
Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 213 (in
child safety seats
Canada CMVSS 213).
Correct use ofchild safety seats substantially re- — When buying a child restraint, select one
duces the risk ofinjury in an accident! that fits your child and the vehicle.
As the driver, you are responsible for the safety of — Only usechild restraint systems that fully
everybody in the vehicle, especially children: contact the flat portion of the seat cush-
ion. The child restraint must nottip or
> Alwaysuse the right child safety seat for each lean to either side. Audi does not recom-
child and alwaysuse it properly > page 307. mend using child safety seats that rest on
> Always carefully follow the child safety seat legs or tube-like frames. They do not pro-
manufacturer's instructions on how to route vide adequate contact with the seat.
the safety belt properly through the child safe- — Alwaysheedalllegal requirements per-
ty seat. taining to the installation and use ofchild
> When using the vehicle safety belt to install a safety seats and carefully follow the in-
child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the structions provided by the manufacturer
convertible locking retractor on the safety belt of the seat you are using.
to preventthe child safety seat from moving — Never allow children under 57 inches
> page 312. (1.45 meters) to wear a normal safetybelt.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full They must alwaysberestrained by a proper
weight to get the safety belt really tight so that child restraint system. Otherwise, they
the seat cannot move forward or sideways more could sustain injuries to the abdomen and
than one inch (2.5 cm). neck areas during sudden braking maneu-
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat vers or accidents.
=> page 307. — Never let more than one child occupya child
Always remember: Even though your vehicleis safety seat.
equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all — Never let babies or older children ride ina
children, especially those 12 years and younger, vehicle while sitting on the lap of another
should alwaysride in the back seat properly re- passenger.
strained for their age and size. — Holding a child in your arms is never a sub-
stitute for a child restraint system.
Z\ WARNING — The strongestperson could not hold the
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong child with the forces that exist in an acci-
8V2012721B)
child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a dent. The child will strike the interior of
the vehicle and can also be struck by the
passenger.
305
Child safety
—The child and the passenger can also injure — Always makesure that nothing prevents
each other in an accident. the front passenger's seat from being
Never install rear-facing child safety seats or moved to the rearmostposition in its fore
infant carriers on the front passenger seat. and aft adjustment range.
A child will be seriously injured and can be — Always makesure that the backrestis in
killed when the passenger airbag inflates - the upright position.
even with an Advanced Airbag System. — Never place or use anyelectrical device
The inflating airbag will hit the child safety (such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
seat or infant carrier with great force and gamesdevice, power inverter or seat heat-
will smash the child safety seat and child er for child seats) on the front passenger
against the backrest, center armrest, door seat if the device is connected to the 12-
or roof. volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket.
Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats — If a seat heater has been retrofitted or
or infant carriers on the rear seat. otherwise added to the front passenger
Makesure there is enough spacein front of seat, never install any child restraint sys-
the child in the child seat. If necessary, ad- tem on this seat.
just the angle and position of the seat in — Make sure that there are no wet objects
front of the child seat. (such as a wet towel) and no water or oth-
Forward-facing child safety seats installed er liquids on the front passenger seat
on the front passenger's seat can interfere cushion.
with the airbag when it inflates and cause — Never place objects on the seat (such as a
serious injury to the child. Alwaysinstall for- laptop, CD player, electronic gamesdevice,
ward-facing child safety seats on the rear power inverter or seat heater for child
seat. seats). These may influence the electrical
If exceptional circumstances require the use capacitance measured by the capacitive
of a forward-facing child restraint on the passenger detection system and can also
front passenger's seat, the child's safety and fly around in an accident and cause serious
well-being require that the following special personal injury.
precautions be taken: — Alwaysbuckle the child safety seat firmly in
— Make sure the forward-facing seat has place even if a child is not sitting in it. A
been designed and certified by its manu- loose child safety seat can fly around during
facturer for use on a front seat with a pas- a sudden stop or ina collision.
senger front and side airbag. — Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when-
— Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
instructions provided with the child safety being used > page 268, Safety belts,
seat or carrier. => page 276, Airbag system and > page 301,
— Always movethe front passenger seat to Child safety.
the highest position in the up and down
adjustment range and moveit back to the ZA WARNING
rearmostposition in the seat's fore and aft To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure
adjustment range, as far away from the that the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light
airbag as possible, before installing the comes on and stays on whenever a child re-
forward-facing child restraint. straint is installed on the front passenger seat
— Always makesure that the safety belt up- and the ignition is switched on.
per anchorage is behind the child restraint — Take the child restraint off the front passen-
and not nextto or in front of the child re- ger seat and install it properly at one of the
straint so that the safety belt will be prop- rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
erly positioned. BAGOFF light does not stay on.
306
Child safety
— Have the airbag system inspected by your — Never let anyone sit at the center rear seat-
authorized Audi dealer immediately. ing position* if the center rear safety belt
has been routed around a rear head re-
straint.
STUM eet iaeel heel ae Lee
Child safety seats
B4G-0466
Seat)
Babies andinfants up to about one year old and

20 lbs. or 9 kg need special rearward-facing child
restraints that support the back, neck and head
ina crash.
B4L-1424
Fig. 247 Schematic overview: keep unused safety belts
away from childrenin child safety seats. @ - outer rear
safety belt, - center rear safety belt*
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench,

especially with LATCH universal lower anchorag-
es, the unused safety belts must be secured so
that the child in the child restraint cannot reach
them> A.
Fig. 248 Schematic overview: rearward-facinginfantseat,
— Guide the safety belt webbings @ and (®)* be- properlyinstalled on the rear seat
hind the head restraint of the seat where the
child restraint is installed > fig. 247. When do- > When using the vehicle safety belt to install a
ing so, do not engage the convertible locking child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the
retractor! You should not hear a “clicking” convertible locking retractor on the safety belt
sound when winding up the safety belt. to prevent the child safety seat from moving
— Let the belt retractor wind up the safety belt = page 312 or install the seat using the LATCH
webbing. attachments.
>» Push the child safety seat down with your full
ZA\ WARNING weight to get the safety belt really tight so that
the seat cannot moveforward or sideways more
A child in a child safety seat installed with the
than one inch (2.5 cm).
LATCH lower anchorages or with the standard
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
safety belt or a child in a booster seat on the
=> page 307.
rear seat could play with unused rear seat
safety belts and become entangled. This Infants up to about one year (20 lbs. or 9 kg) are
could cause the child serious personal injury best protected in special infant carriers and child
and even death. safety seats designed for their age group. Many
— Always secure unusedrear seat safety belts experts believe that infants and small children
out of reach ofchildren in child seats such as should ride only in special restraints in which the
by properly routing them around the head child faces the back of the vehicle. These infant
restraint of the seat wherethe child re- seats support the baby's back, neck and head ina
straint is installed. crash fig. 248.
8V2012721B)
— Never activate the convertible locking re-

The airbag on the passenger side makes the front
tractor when routing the safety belts around
seat a potentially dangerous place for achildto >
the head restraints.
307
Child safety
ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a — Make sure that there are no wet objects
child in a forward-facing child seat. It is a very (such as a wet towel) and no water or other
dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
a rearward-facing seat. — Never place objects on the seat (such as a
laptop, CD player, electronic games device,
ZA WARNING power inverter or seat heater for child
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong seats). These may influence the electrical
child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a capacitance measured bythe capacitive pas-
child restraint increases the risk of serious senger detection system and can alsofly
personal injury and death in a crash. around in an accident and cause serious per-
— Never install rear-facing child safety seats or sonal injury.
infant carriers on the front passenger seat - — Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when-
even with an Advanced Airbag System. A ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
child will be seriously injured and can be kil- being used > page 268, Safety belts,
led when the inflating airbag hits the child => page 276, Airbag system and > page 301,
safety seat or infant carrier with great force Important information.
and smashes the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
Convertible child safety seats
or roof > page 277, Child restraints on the
front seat - some important things to Properly used convertible child safety seats can
know. help protect toddlers and children over age one
— Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats who weigh between 20 and 40 lbs. (9 and 18 kg)
or infant carriers on the rear seat. inacrash.
— Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
B4L-1425
the forward-facing direction. Such restraints
are designed for the special needs ofinfants
and very small children and cannot protect
them properlyif the seat is forward-facing.
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not
come on and stay on, immediately install
Fig. 249 Schematic overview: installation of the attach-
the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear ments applicable to a LATCH seat
seating position and have the airbag system
B4L-1426
inspected by your Audi dealer.

— Never place or use any electrical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat
if the device is connected to the 12-volt
socketor the cigarette lighter socket.
— If a seat heater has been retrofitted or oth-
erwise added to the front passenger seat,
never install any child restraint system on Fig. 250 Schematic overview:installation of the seat using
the vehicle's safety belt system
this seat.
>» When using the vehicle safety belt to install a
child safety seat, you mustfirst activate the >
308
Child safety
convertible locking retractor on the safety belt against the backrest, center arm rest, door
to preventthe child safety seat from moving or roof.
= page 312 or install the seat using the LATCH — Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
attachments. on the rear seat.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full — Ifyou mustinstall a rearward facing child
weight to get the safety belt really tight so that safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
the seat cannot move forward or sideways more cause of exceptional circumstances and the
than one inch (2.5 cm) > page 312. PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not
> If the child safety seat is equipped with a tether come on and stay on, immediately install
strap, attach it to the tether anchors the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear
=> page 317. seating position and have the airbag system
> Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat inspected by your Audi dealer.
=> page 307.
—The rear side of the child safety seat should
A toddler or child is usually too large for an in- be positioned as close as possible to the
fant restraint if it is more than one year old and backrest on the vehicle seat.
weighs more than 20 lbs. (9 kg). — For adjustable head restraints: adjust or re-
movethe rear seat head restraint if it is dif-
Toddlers and children who are older than one ficult to install the child seat with the head
year up to about 4 years old and weigh more than restraint in place > page 60. Install the
20 lbs (9 kg) up to 40 lbs. (18 kg) must always be head restraint again immediately once the
properly restrained in a child safety seat certified child seat is removed. Driving without head
for their size and weight > fig. 249 and restraints or with head restraints that are
> fig. 250. not properly adjusted increases the risk of
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front serious or fatal neck injury dramatically.
seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to — Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when-
ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a ever using a child restrainedin a vehicle is
child in a forward-facing child safety seat. Itisa being used > page 268, Safety belts,
very dangerous place for an infantor a larger = page 276, Airbag system and > page 301,
child in a rearward-facing seat. Important information.
ZX WARNING Z\ WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong If exceptional circumstances require the use
child safety seat or improperlyinstalling a of a forward-facing child restraint on the front
child restraint increases the risk of serious passenger's seat, the child's safety and well-
personal injury and death in a collision or oth- being require that the following special pre-
er emergencysituation. cautions be taken:
— Children on the front seat of any car, even — Make sure the forward-facing seat has been
with Advanced Airbags, can be seriouslyin- designed and certified by its manufacturer
jured or even killed when an airbag inflates. for use on a front seat with a passenger
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat front and side airbag.
installed on the front passenger seat will be — Alwaysfollow the manufacturer's instruc-
seriously injured and can be killed if the tions provided with the child safety seat or
front airbag inflates —- even with an Ad- infant carrier.
vanced Airbag System. — Always movethe front passenger seat to the
— The inflating airbag will hit the child safety highest position in the up and down adjust-
8V2012721B)
seat or infant carrier with great force and ment range and moveit back to the rear-
will smash the child safety seat and child mostposition in the seat's fore and aft ad-
justment range, as far away from the airbag
309
Child safety
as possible, before installing the forward- Booster seats and safety belts
facing child restraint.
Properly used booster seats can help protect
— Always makesure that the safety belt upper
children weighing between about 40 lbs. and 80
anchorage is behind the child restraint and
lbs. (18 kg and 36 kg) who areless than 4 ft. 9
not next to or in front of the child restraint
in. (57 inches/1.45 meters) tall.
so that the safety belt will be properly posi-
tioned.
B4H-0275
— Always makesure that nothing prevents the
front passenger's seat from being moved to
the rearmostposition in its fore and aft ad-
justment range.
— Always makesure the backrest is in an up-
right position.
— Never place or use anyelectrical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater Fig. 251 Rear seat:child properly restrained in a booster
for child seats) on the front passenger seat seat
if the device is connected to the 12-volt

socketor the cigarette lighter socket. The vehicle's safety belts alone will not fit most
children until they are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 in-
— If a seat heater has been retrofitted or oth-
ches/1.45 meters) tall and weigh about 80 lbs.
erwise added to the front passenger seat,
never install any child restraint system on (36 kg). Booster seats raise these children up so
that the safety belt will pass properly over the
this seat.
stronger parts of their bodies and the safety belt
— Makesure that there are no wet objects
can help protect them in a crash.
(such as a wet towel) and no water or other
liquids on the front passenger seat cushion. > Do not use the convertible locking retractor
— Never place objects on the seat (such as a when using the vehicle's safety belt to restrain
laptop, CD player, electronic games device, a child on a booster seat.
power inverter or seat heater for child > The shoulder belt must lie as close to the cen-
seats). These mayinfluencethe electrical ter of the child's collar bone as possible and
capacitance measured by the capacitive pas- must lie flat and snug on the upper body.It
senger detection system and can alsofly must never lie across the throat or neck. The
around in an accident and cause serious per- lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never
sonal injury. across the stomach or abdomen. Make sure the
— Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG belt lies flat and snug. Pull on the belt to tight-
OFF light comes on and stayson all the time en if necessary.
whenever the ignition is switched on. > Applies to: vehicles with safety belt height ad-
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does justment: If you must transport an older child
not come on and stay on, immediately in- in a booster seat on the front passenger seat,
stall the forward-facing child seat at a seat- you can use the safety belt height adjustment
ing position on the rear seat and have the to help adjust the shoulder portion properly.
airbag system inspected by your authorized > Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
Audi dealer. => page 307.
— Take the child restraint off the front passen-
Children up to at least 8 years old (over 40 Lbs or
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
18 kg) are best protected in child safety seats de-
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
signed for their age and weight. Experts say that
BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever
the skeletal structure, particularly the pelvis, of >
310
Child safety
these children is not fully developed, and they vide supplemental protection in certain frontal
must not usethe vehicle safety belts without a collisions.
suitable child restraint.
It is usually best to put these children in appro-

ZA WARNING
priate booster seats. Be sure the booster seat Not using a booster seat, using the booster
meetsall applicable safety standards. seat improperly, incorrectly installing a boos-
ter seat or using the vehicle safety belt im-
Booster seats raise the seating position of the properly increasesthe risk of serious personal
child and reposition both the lap and shoulder injury and deathin a collision or other emer-
parts of the safety belt so that they pass across gency situation. To help reduce the risk of se-
the child's body in the right places. The routing of rious personal injury and/or death:
the belt over the child's bodyis very important —The shoulder belt mustlie as close to the
for the child's protection, whether or not a boos- center of the child’s collar bone as possible
ter seat is used. Children age 12 and under must and mustlie flat and snug on the upper
alwaysride in the rear seat. body. It must never lie across the throat or
Children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/ neck. The lap belt mustlie across the pelvis
1.45 meters) tall can generally use the vehicle's and never across the stomach or abdomen.
three point lap and shoulder belts. Never use the Makesure that the belt lies flat and snug.
lap belt portion of the vehicle's safety belt alone Pull on the belt to tighten if necessary.
to restrain any child, regardless of how big the — Failure to properly route safety belts over a
child is. Always remember that children do not child's body will cause severeinjuries in an
have the pronouncedpelvic structure required for accident or other emergencysituation
the proper function of lap belt portion of the ve- => page 268.
hicle's three point lap and shoulder belts. The —The rear side of the child safety seat should
child's safety absolutely requires that a lap belt be positioned as close as possible to the
portion of the safety belt be fastened snugly and backrest on the vehicle seat.
as low as possible around the pelvis. Never let — For adjustable head restraints: adjust or re-
the lap belt portion of the safety belt pass over movethe rear seat head restraint if it is dif-
the child's stomach or abdomen. ficult to install the child seat with the head
restraint in place > page 60. Install the
In a crash, airbags must inflate within a blink of
head restraint again immediately once the
an eye and with considerable force. In order to do
child seat is removed. Driving without head
its job, the airbag needs room toinflate so that it
restraints or with head restraints that are
will be there to protect the occupant as the occu-
not properly adjusted increases the risk of
pant moves forwardinto the airbag.
serious or fatal neck injury dramatically.
A vehicle occupant who is out of position and too — Never let a child put the shoulder belt under
close to the airbag gets in the wayof an inflating the arm or behind the back, because it could
airbag. When an occupant is too close, he or she cause severeinjuries in a crash.
will be struck violently and will receive serious or — Children on the front seat of anycar, even
possibly even fatal injury. with Advanced Airbags, can be seriouslyin-
In order for the airbag to offer protection, it is jured or even killed when an airbag inflates.
important that all vehicle occupants, especially — Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat,
any children, who mustbe in the front seat be- for examplethe frontseat.
cause of exceptional circumstances, be properly — Never let a child ride in the cargo area of
restrained and as far away from the airbag as your vehicle.
8V2012721B)
possible. By keeping room between the child's — Always remember that a child leaning for-
body and the front of the passenger compart- ward, sitting sideways or out of position in
ment, the airbag can inflate completely and pro- any way during an accident can be struck by
311
Child safety
a deploying airbag. This will result in serious ZA WARNING

personal injury or death.
Improperly installed child safety seats in-
— If you mustinstall a booster seat on the
crease the risk of serious personal injury and
front passenger seat because of exceptional
death in a collision.
circumstances the PASSENGER AIR BAG
— Always makesure that the safety belt retrac-
OFF light must come on and stay on, when-
tor is locked when installing a child safety
ever the ignition is switched on.
seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor can-
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does
not hold the child safety seat in place during
not come on and stay on, perform the
normal driving or in a crash.
checks described > page 288, Monitoring
— Alwaysbuckle the child safety seat firmly in
the AdvancedAirbag System.
place even if a child is not sitting in it. A
— Take the child restraint off the front passen-
loose child safety seat can fly around during
a sudden stop or in collision.
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
— Always makesure that the rear seat backrest
BAG OFF light does not stay on whenever
to which the center rear safety belt* is at-
tached is securely latched whenever the rear
— Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when-
center safety belt is being used to secure a
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
child restraint.
being used > page 268, Safety belts,
— If the backrest is not securely latched, the
=> page 276, Airbag system and > page 301,
child and the child restraint will be thrown
Important information.
forward together with the backrest and will
strike parts of the vehicle interior. The child
Securing child safety can be seriously injured or killed.
seats — Never install rear-facing child safety seats or
infant carriers on the front passenger seat.
Tate Ral CReee RRLlad
A child will be seriously injured and can be
erat
killed when the passenger airbag inflates.
Safety belts for the rear seats and the front pas- — The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
sengercan be locked with the convertible locking seat or infant carrier with great force and
retractor to properly secure child safety seats. will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
The safety belts emergency locking retractors for
or roof.
the rear seats safety belts and for the front pas-
— Alwaysinstall rear-facing child safety seats
senger’s seat safety belt have a convertible lock-
or infant carriers on the rear seat.
ing retractor for child restraints. The safety belt
—Forward-facing child safety seats or infant
mustbe locked so that belt webbing cannot un-
carriers installed on the front passenger's
reel. The retractor can be activated to lock the
seat mayinterfere with the deploymentof
safety belt and prevent the safety belt webbing
the airbag and cause serious injury to the
from loosening up during normal driving. A child
child.
safety seat can only be properly installed when
—Itis safer to install a forward-facing child
the safety belt is locked so that the child and
safety seat on the rear seat.
child safety seat will stay in place.
— Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when-
Always remember: Even though your vehicleis ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all being used > page 301. Special precautions
children, especially those 12 years and younger, apply when installing a child safety seat on
should alwaysride in the back seat properly re- the front passenger seat > page 277, Child
strained for their age and size.
312
Child safety
restraints on the front seat - some impor- — Never put the forward-facing child restraint
tant things to know. up, against or very near the instrument pan-
el
ZA WARNING — Always movethe front passenger seat to the
Always take special precautions if you must highest position in the up and down adjust-
install a forward or rearward-facing child re- ment range and moveit back to the rear-
straint on the front passenger's seat in excep- mostposition in the seat's fore and aft ad-
tional situations: justment range, as far away from the airbag
— Whenever a forward or rearward-facing as possible, before installing the forward-
child restraint is installed on the front pas- facing child restraint.
senger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF — Always makesure that the safety belt upper
light must come on and stay on whenever anchorage is behind the child restraint and
the ignition is switched on. not next to or in front of the child restraint
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does so that the safety belt will be properly posi-
not come on and stay on, perform the tioned.
checks described > page 288, Monitoring — Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
the AdvancedAirbag System. OFF light comes on and stays on all the time
— Take the child restraint off the front passen- whenever the ignition is switched on.
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR Z\ WARNING
BAGOFF light does not stay on whenever Rearward-facing child restraints:
the ignition is switched on. —Achild in a rearward-facing child safety seat
— Improper installation of child restraints can installed on the front passenger seat will be
reduce their effectiveness or even prevent seriously injured and can bekilled if the
them from providing any protection. front airbag inflates - even with an Ad-
— An improperly installed child restraint can vanced Airbag System.
interfere with the airbag as it deploys and — The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seriously injure or even kill the child. seat or infant carrier with great force and
— Alwayscarefully follow the manufacturer's will smash the child safety seat and child
instructions provided with the child safety against the backrest, center armrest, door
seator carrier. or roof.
— After checking to makesure that the child — Alwaysbe especially careful if you must in-
restraint is properly installed, make certain stall a rearward facing child safety seat on
that the child restraint is correctly recog- the front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
nized by the capacitive passenger detection cumstances.
system in the front passenger seat and that — Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightsignals OFF light comes on and stays on all the time
the correct front passenger frontal airbag whenever the ignition is switched on.
status. — If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does
not come on and stay on, immediately in-
ZA WARNING stall the rear-facing child safety seat ina
Forward-facing child restraints: rear seating position and havethe airbag
— Always makesure the forward-facing seat system inspected by your Audi dealer.
has been designed and certified by its manu-
facturer for use on front seat with a pas-
8V2012721B)
senger front and side airbag.
313
Child safety
Activating the convertible locking retractor — Always makesure the seat backrest to which
the child restraint is installed is in an up-
Use the convertible locking retractor to secure a
right position and securely latched into
child restraint.
place and cannotfold forward. Otherwise,
Always heed the child safety seat manufacturer's the seatback with the child safety seat at-
instructions when installing a child restraint in tached to it could fly forward in the event of
your vehicle. To activate the convertible locking an accident or other emergencysituation.
retractor: — Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when-
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
> Place the child restraint on a seat, preferably on
being used > page 301. Special precautions
the rear seat.
apply when installing a child safety seat on
> Slowly pull the belt all the way out.
the front passenger seat > page 277, Child
> Route it around or through the child restraint
restraints on the front seat - some impor-
belt path > /\.
tant things to know.
> Push the child safety seat down with your full
weight to get the safety belt really tight.
> Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that Deactivating the convertible locking
seating position. delade) g
> Guide the safety belt back into the retractor un- The convertible locking retractorfor child re-
til the belt lies flat and snug on the child safety straints will be deactivated automatically when
seat. the belt is wound all the way backinto the re-
> You should hear a “clicking” noise as the belt tractor.
winds back into the inertia reel. Test the con-
vertible locking retractor by pulling on the belt. > Press the red button on the safety belt buckle.
You should no longer be ableto pull the belt The belt tongue will pop out of the buckle.
out of the retractor. The convertible locking re- > Guide the safety belt all the way back intoits
tractor is now activated. stowed position.
> Make sure that the red release button is facing
Alwayslet the safety belt retract completely into
away from the child restraint so that it can be
its stowed position. The safety belt can now be
unbuckled quickly.
used as an ordinary safety belt without the con-
> Pull on the belt to make sure the safety belt is
vertible locking retractor for child restraints.
properly tight and fastened so that the seat
cannot move forward or sideways more than If the convertible locking retractor should be ac-
one inch (2.5 cm). tivated inadvertently, the safety belt must be un-
fastened and guided completely back intoits
ZA\ WARNING stowed position to deactivate this feature. If the
convertible locking retractor is not deactivated,
Using the wrong child restraint or an improp-
the safety belt will gradually become tighter and
erly installed child restraint can cause serious
uncomfortable to wear.
personal injury or death in a crash.
— Always makesurethat the safety belt retrac-
tor is locked when installing a child safety
ZA\WARNING
seat. An unlocked safety belt retractor can- Improperly installed child safety seats in-
not hold the child safety seat in place during crease the risk of serious personal injury and
normal driving or in a crash. death in collision.
— Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in — Never unfasten the safety belt to deactivate
place even if a child is not sitting in it. A the convertible locking retractor for child re-
loose child safety seat can fly around during straints while the vehicle is moving. You >
a sudden stop or ina crash.
314
Child safety
would notbe restrained and could be seri- push-on connectors attached to adjustable
ously injured in an accident. straps.
— Alwaysread and heed all WARNINGS when- In addition to the LATCH lower anchorages, these
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is child restraint systems usually require the use of
being used > page 301. Special precautions tether straps to help keep the child restraint
apply when installing a child safety seat on firmly in place.
the front passenger seat > page 277, Child
restraints on the front seat - some impor- Some child restraints may require both the LATCH
tant things to know. lower anchorages as well as the vehicle safety
belt for proper installation. This concurrentuse is
allowed as long as it does notinterfere with ei-
LATCH system (Lower ther attachment system or the adjoining seating
anchorages and tethers positions’ vehicle safety belts, if so applicable.
for children)
ZA\ WARNING
CCR rae ayea eleee Liem rey
ECM ACELem oa CRT1-18] Improper installation of child restraints will
increase the risk of injury and death in a crash.
To provide a simpler and more practicable way to — Alwaysfollow the instructions provided by
attach the child restraint on the vehicle seat, Fed- the manufacturer of the child restraint you
eral regulations require special lower anchorages intend to install in your vehicle.
in vehicles and devices on new child restraints to — Never install a child restraint without a
attach to the vehicle anchorages. properly attached top tether strap if the
In the United States, the combination of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions
tether anchorages and the lower anchorages is require the top tether strap to be used.
now generally called the LATCH system for — Improper use of child restraint LATCH lower
“Lower Anchorages and Tethers for Children”. In anchorage points can lead toinjury in a colli-
Canada, the terms “top tether” with “Lower uni- sion. The LATCH lower anchorage points are
versal anchorages”(or “Lower universal anchor- designed to withstand only those loads im-
age bars”) are used to describe the system. posed bycorrectly fitted child restraints.
— Never mount twochild restraint systems on
In other countries the term “ISOFIX”is used to one LATCH lower anchorage point.
describe the lower anchorages. — Never secure or attach any luggage or other
Forward-facing child restraints manufactured af- item to the LATCH lower anchorages.
ter September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. fed-
eral regulations to comply with new child head oY}a fe)a)
movement performance requirements. These
new performance requirements make a tether
B8V-0406
necessary on most new child seats.
Installing a child restraint that requires a top

tether without one can seriously impair the per-
formanceof the child restraint and its ability to
protect the child in a collision. Installing a child
restraint that requires a top tether without the
top tether may be a violation of state law.
8V2012721B)
Child restraint manufacturers offer LATCH lower Fig. 252 Schematic overview: LATCH anchorage pointloca-
anchorages on their child seats with hook-on or tions (example)
315
Child safety
The illustration showsthe seating locations in All child restraints manufactured after Septem-
your vehicle which are equipped with the lower ber 1, 2002, must have lower anchorage attach-
anchorages system. ments for the LATCH system.
Please remember that the lower anchorage

Description points are only intendedfor installation and at-
The lower anchorage positions are marked for tachment of child restraints specifically certified
quick locating. for use with LATCH lower anchorages. Child re-
straints that are not equipped with the lower an-
chorage attachmentscan still be installed in
compliance with the child restraint manufactur-
er's instructions on using vehicle safety belts.
Improper use of LATCH lower anchorages can

cause serious personal injury in an accident.
— Alwayscarefully follow the child restraints
manufacturer's instructions for proper in-
stallation of the child restraint and proper
use of the lower anchorages or safety belts
in your vehicle.
— Never secure or attach any luggage or other
items to the LATCH lower anchorages.
— Always read and heed the important infor-
mation aboutchild restraints in this chapter
and WARNINGS & page 301, Child safety.
[> Installing a child restraint with LATCH

Fig. 254 Rear seats: lower anchorage bracketlocations lower anchorages
Applies to: vehicles with Top Tether
Lower anchorages
Wheneveryouinstall a child restraint always fol-
The circular markings on the rear seat help you to low the child restraint manufacturer's instruc-
identify the location of lower anchoragesfor the tions.
two outboard seating positions > fig. 253. The
LATCH lower universal anchorage attachment
B4L-1434
points are between the rear seatback and rear

seat cushion.
Removethe covers > fig. 253 to access the lower

anchorage attachment points.
The lower anchorage attachment pointsarevisi-

ble > fig. 254.
Lower anchoragessecurethe child restraint in
Fig. 255 Lower anchorages: proper mounting
the seat without using the vehicle's safety belts.
Anchoragesprovide a secure and easy-to-use at-
tachment and minimize the possibility of improp-
er child restraint installation.
316
Child safety
Mounting and the installation of child restraint sys-

> Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench is tems > page 301, Child safety.
in the upright position and securely latched in
place. Tether anchors and tether straps
» Attach both hook-on connectorswith the spring
catch release on the child safety seat onto the
B8V-0407
LATCH lower anchorage so that the connectors
lock into place > fig. 255.
> Pull on the connector attachments to make
sure they are properly attached to the LATCH
lower anchorage.
> Pull straps tight following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing Applies to: Sedan

Fig. 256 Tether anchors: recessflaps behind the rear seat-
> Loosen the tension on the straps following the
backs
child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
> Depress the spring catches to release the an-
B8V-0562
chorage hooks from the lower anchorages.
Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the

child restraint firmlyin place.
A WARNING
Improper use of the LATCH system can in-
crease the risk of serious personal injury and
deathin an accident. Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback
— These anchors were developed onlyfor child Fig. 257 Tether anchors: recess flaps behind the rear seat-
backs
safety seats using the “LATCH” system.
— Never attach other child safety seats, belts
Applies to: Sedan: The tether anchorsfor the rear
or other objects to these anchors.
seating positions are located in recesses in the
— Always makesure that you hear a click when
rear windowshelf © fig. 256
latching the seat in place. If you do not hear
a click the seat is not secure and couldfly Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback: The tether an-
forward and hit the interior of the vehicle, or chorsfor the rear seating positions are located on
be ejected from the vehicle. the backside of the rear seatbacks > fig. 257.
A tether is a straight or V-shaped strap that at-

ZA\ WARNING taches the top part of a child restraint to special
Improper installation ofchild restraints will anchorage pointsin the vehicle.
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
The purpose of the tether is to reduce the for-
— Alwaysfollowthe child restraint system
ward movementofthe child restraint in a crash,
in order to help reduce the risk of head injury that
stallation of the child restraint system and
could be caused bystriking the vehicle interior.
proper useof tether straps as well as the
lower anchorages or safety belts in your ve- Forwardfacing child restraints manufactured af-
8V2012721B)
hicle. ter September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. fed-

— Always read and heed the importantinfor- eral regulations to comply with new child head
mation and WARNINGSabout child safety movement performance requirements. These
317
Child safety
new performance requirements make a tether Installing the upper tether strap on the
necessary on most new child safety seats. anchorage
ZXWARNING
B4L-1435
Improper installation of child restraints will
increase the risk of injury and deathin a crash.
— Always follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint you
intend to install in your Audi.
— Improper useofchild restraint anchors(in-
cluding tether anchors) can lead to injury in
a collision. The anchors are designed to
Applies to: Sedan
withstand only those loads imposed bycor- Fig. 258 Tether strap: proper routing and mounting
rectly fitted child restraints.
B8V-0565
— Never mount twochild restraint systems on
one LATCH lower anchor point.
— Never attach twochild restraint systems to
one tether strap or tether anchorage.
— Never attach a tether strap to a tie-down
hook in the luggage compartment.
— Never usechild restraint tether anchorages
to secure safety belts or other kinds of occu-
pantrestraints.
— Never secure or attach any luggage or other
items to the LATCH lower anchoragesor to
the tether anchors.
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not
the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the airbag system Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback
inspected by your Audi dealer. Fig. 259 Tether strap: proper routing and mounting. @
center, @) outside
Installing the tether strap

Applies to: Sedan
> Release or deploy the tether strap on the child

restraint according to the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions.
> Guide the upper tether strap under the rear
head restraint (raise the head restraint if neces-
sary) > fig. 258. For child restraints with V-
tether straps, always make sure that the head
restraint guide rods do notinterfere with any
part of the top tether strap.
318
Child safety
> Tilt the recess flap up to expose the anchor

bracket.
ZA WARNING
> Attach the tether strap anchorage hook into the Improper use of the LATCH system can in-
opening of the tether anchorage. crease the risk of serious personal injury and
> Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring death in an accident.
catch of the hook engages. — These anchors were developed onlyfor child
> Tighten the tether strap firmly following the safety seats using the “LATCH” system.
child restraint manufacturer's instructions. — Never attach other child safety seats, belts
or other objects to these anchors.
Installing the tether strap — Always makesure that you hear a click when
Applies to: Cabriolet/Sportback
latching the seat in place. If you do not hear
> Release or deploy the tether strap on the child a click the seat is not secure and could fly
restraint according to the child restraint manu- forward and hit the interior of the vehicle, or
facturer's instructions. be ejected from the vehicle.
> Applies to: Sportback: Unlock the backrest and
fold it slightly forward > page 66, Increasing ZA\WARNING
the cargo area and locate the tether anchor be- Improper installation ofchild restraints will
hind the rear seat backrest. increase the risk of injury in an accident.
> Applies to: Cabriolet: Unlock the backrest and
— Alwaysfollow the child restraint system
fold it slightly forward > page 66, Pass-
through and locate the tether anchor behind
stallation of the child restraint system and
the rear seat backrest.
proper use of tether straps as well as the
> Guide the upper tether strap under the rear
lower anchoragesor safety belts in your ve-
head restraint (raise the head restraint if neces-
hicle.
sary) > fig. 259. For child restraints with V-
— Alwaysread and heed the important infor-
tether straps, always make sure that the head
mation and WARNINGS aboutchild safety
restraint guide rods do not interfere with any
and the installation of child restraint sys-
part of the top tether strap.
tems > page 301, Child safety.
> Attach the tether strap anchorage hook into the
opening of the tether anchorage.
> Pull on the tether strap hook so that the spring Using tether straps on rearward-facing
catch of the hook is engaged. child restraints
> Straighten the backrest back up into its upright Currently, few rear-facing child restraint systems
position and press it firmly into the locking come with a tether. Please read and heed the
mechanism. child restraint system manufacturer's instruc-
> Tighten the tether strap firmly following the tions carefully to determine how to properlyin-
child restraint manufacturer's instructions. stall the tether.
Releasing the tether strap
Z\ WARNING
> Loosen the tension on the straps following the
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat
child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
installed on the front passenger seat will be
> Depress the spring catch on the hook and re-
seriously injured and can be killedif the front
lease it from the anchorage.
airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag
Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the System.
child restraint firmly in place. — The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
8V2012721B)
will smash the child safety seat and child >
319
Child safety
against the backrest, center armrest, or

door.
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light does not
the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the airbag system
inspected by your Audi dealer.
Additional information
Sources of information aboutchild
adelelated ae)
There are a number of sources of additional infor-

mation about child restraint selection, installa-
tion and use:
NHTSAadvises that the best child safety seat is

the one that fits your child and fits in your vehi-
cle, and that you will use correctly and consis-
tently.
Try before you buy!
U.S. National HighwayTraffic Safety Adminis-

tration
Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153)
http://www.nhtsa.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
National SAFE KIDS Campaign

Tel.: (202) 662-0600
http://www.safekids.org
Safety BeltSafe U.S.A.

Tel.: (800) 745-SAFE (English)
Tel.: (800) 747-SANO (Spanish)
http://www.carseat.org
Transport Canada Information Centre

Tel.: 1-800-333-0371 or call 1-613-998-8616 if
you are in the Ottawa area
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm
Audi Customer Experience Center

Tel.: (800) 822-2834
320
Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling @ Tips
Fuel The vehicle maybe filled with fuel that has a

higher octane rating than whatis required by
ahem elt) the engine.
The correct gasoline gradeis stated on the inside
of the fuel filler door. Gasoline mixture
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-Tert-
and mustonly be driven with unleaded gasoline. Butyl-Ether)
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas- You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alco-
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- hol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. compounds)as long as the fuel meets the follow-
ing conditions:
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated
by octane ratings. This value is given with (R Gasoline with methanol content (methylalco-
+M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON. hol or methanol)
— Anti-Knock Indexis at least 87 AKI
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel
—No more than 3% methanol
filler door.
— More than 2% solvent
UNLEADED FUEL ONLYMIN. (R+M)/2 87
Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or
Regular / MIN. RON 91 Regular
ethanol)
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / — Anti-Knock Indexis at least 87 AKI
91 RON > ©. —No more than 15% ethanol
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with Gasoline with MTBE content
minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON to achieve the rated
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
horsepower and torque.
—No more than 15% MTBE
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R
Gasoline adapted to the season
+M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Manygasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI /
When the season changes, we recommend refu-
95 RON is recommended.
eling at high-traffic gas stations. It is morelikely
If premium gasoline is notavailable, you can also that the gasoline will be suitable for the season
use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However there.
this does reduce the engine power slightly.
() Note
C) Note — Gasoline with methanol content that does
— Filling the tank just one time with leaded not meetthe specified conditions may cause
fuel or other metallic additives will cause corrosion damage and damage toplastic or
permanent deterioration to the catalytic rubber componentsin the fuel system.
converter function. — Do not use gasoline that does not meet the
— When gasoline with an octane rating that is specifications.
too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine — If you are unable tofind outif a specific gas-
load can lead to engine damage. oline mixture meets the specifications, ask
the gas station operator or their fuel suppli-
8V2012721B)
er. >
321
— Do not use any gasoline mixture whose Refueling

composition cannotbe identified.
— Audi does not assume anyresponsibility for Fueling procedure
_E
damage to the fuel system or for perform-
B8V-0111
ance problems caused by using gasoline
mixtures different from those specified.
This type of damage also doesnotfall under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under
the emissions control system warranty.
— If you notice a higher fuel consumption or
poor handling or performance problems due
to such gasoline mixtures, we recommend
fueling with unblended gasoline.
Applies to: vehicles without plug-in hybrid drive
Fig. 260 right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel
Gasoline additives filler door
B8V-0110
An important issue for many automobile manu-
facturers is combustion residue in the engine
that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although typesof gasoline differ depending on

the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain
substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in
the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should
keep the engine and fuel system clean do notall
function equally. Fig. 261 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

Plug-in hybrid drive*: refer to the information un-
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De-
der > page 101, Refueling.
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of
central locking system.
time, the maximum engine performance may be
impaired by combustion residue. » Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:
Note the information on > page 101, Opening
@) Note the fuelfiller door.
Damage or malfunctions caused by the use of > Applies to: vehicles without plug-in hybrid
incorrect types of gasoline are not covered by drive: To open, press on the left side of the fuel
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. filler door > fig. 260.
> Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise.
> Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
door > fig. 261.
> Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
fuel filler neck.
> Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Do not
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in
the tank will be filled with fuel.
> After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five
seconds before removing the nozzle to allow >
322
the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the

fuel tank.
ZA WARNING
> Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into Transporting fuel containers inside the vehicle
place. is not recommended. Fuel could leak out of
> Close the fuel filler door and then press on the the container and ignite, especially during an
left side until it latches. accident. This can cause explosions,fires, and
injuries.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be —If you must transportfuel in a fuel contain-
found on label located on the inside of the fuel er, note the following:
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see — Alwaysplace the fuel container on the
=> page 321. ground beforefilling. Never fill the fuel
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the container with fuel whileit is inside or on
Technical Data > page 395. the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can oc-
cur while refueling and the fuel vapors
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors could ignite.
escaping, make surethat the fuel tank is closed
— When using fuel containers made of met-
correctly. Otherwise the ES indicator light will
al, the fuel pump nozzle must alwaysre-
turn on.
main in contact with the container to re-
If the central locking system malfunctions, there duce the risk of static charge.
is a fuel filler door emergency release — Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as pos-
=> page 324. sible into the filler opening while refuel-
ing.
ZA WARNING — Follow the applicable legal regulations in
Improper fueling procedures and improper the country whereyou are driving when
handling of fuel can lead to explosions,fires, using, storing and transporting fuel con-
severe burns, and other injuries. tainers.
— Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames. — Makesure that the fuel container meets
— The ignition must be switched off when re- the industry standards, for example ANSI
fueling. or ASTM F852-86.
— Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra-
dio equipment should always be switched C) Note
off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays — Removefuel that has overflowed onto any
could cause sparks and start fire. vehicle components immediately to reduce
— If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzleall the risk of damage to the vehicle.
the wayintothe filler tube, then fuel can — Never drive until the fuel tank is completely
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
fire. sults from that can cause engine misfires.
— Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust
there is an exceptional situation where you system and increase the risk of damage to
must enter the vehicle, close the door and the catalytic converter.
touch a metal surface before touching the
fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the @) For the sake of the environment
risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause Do notoverfill the fuel tank, or fuel could leak
flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when out when the vehicle is warming up. >
refueling.
8V2012721B)
)) Depending on the engine and country
323
carefully in the direction of the arrow > fig. 262

>©.
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not > Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside us- open it > page 322,fig. 260.
ing the central locking switch.
Plug-in hybrid drive*: read and follow the instruc-
tions under > page 101.
Fuel can age and maylead to problems when Emergencyrelease behind the rear seat
starting. Audi recommends replacing the fuel backrest
in your vehicle within six months. Applies to: version 2
The emergencyrelease is located behind the

Fuel filler door emergency release right rear seat.
If the central locking system malfunctions, the The pull cable for the emergencyrelease is locat-
fuel filler door can be unlocked manually. ed on the cover.
> To access the emergencyrelease, fold the right

B8V-0112
backrest forward > page 66.

> Removethe cover [W) from thetrim panel.
> To release the fuel filler door, pull the cover in
the direction of the arrow carefully at a 45° an-
gle toward the center of the vehicle > fig. 263
>)The tab on the cover mustpoint forward
in the direction you are pulling when pulling on
the cover.
Applies to: version 1 > Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
Fig. 262 Right rear luggage compartment: emergencyre- open it > page 322,fig. 260.
lease (example)
Only pull on the loop/cover until you feel re-

sistance. You will not hear it release. If you
continue to pull, you could damage the emer-
gency release mechanism.
Emissions control
system
Applies to:version 2 General information
Fig. 263 Rear ofthe vehicle: right rear seat folded forward
Emergencyreleasein the luggage

compartment The temperature of the exhaust system is
Applies to: version 1 high, both when driving and after stopping
The emergency opening mechanism is located the engine.
behind the right side trim panel in the luggage — Never touch the exhausttail pipes once they
compartment. have become hot.This could result in burns.
— Do not park your vehicle over flammable
>» Removethe cover in the side panel.
materials such as grass or leaves because
> To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the loop
from the retainer and then pull on the loop
324
the high temperature of the emissions sys- quality and that could damage the catalytic con-
tem could start a fire. verter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer
— Do not apply underbodyprotectant in the or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
exhaust system area, because this increases malfunction corrected.
the risk offire. The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill-
er cap is not closed correctly > page 322).
Catalytic converter
ZAWARNING
Follow the safety precautions > page 324, Gener-
Incorrect use of the connection port for the
al information.
On Board Diagnostic System can cause mal-
The vehicle mayonly be driven with unleaded functions, which can then result in accidents
gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be de- and serious injuries.
stroyed. — Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the
Never drive until the tank is completely empty.
engine data.
The irregular supply of fuel that results from that
can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel
could enter the exhaust system, which could Engine compartment
cause overheating and damage tothe catalytic
General information
converter.
Special careis required ifyou are working in the
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) engine compartment
The On Board Diagnostic System monitors the For work in the engine compartment, such as
engine and transmission componentsthat influ- checking and filling fluids, thereis a risk of in-
ence emissions. jury, scalding, accidents, and burns.For this
reason, follow all the warnings and general
safety precautions providedin the following in-
formation. The engine compartmentis a dan-
gerous area. > /\.
ZX WARNING
— Turn the engine off.
— Switch the ignition off.
— Set the parking brake.
— Select the “P” (Park) selector lever position.
Fig. 264 Footwellonleft side of the vehicle: connection
port for the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) — Allow the engine to cool.
— Keep children away from the engine com-
On Board Diagnostic System partment.
— Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These flu-
Engine data can be read out at the On Board Di-
ids (such as the anti-freezing agent con-
agnostic System connection port using a special
tained in the coolant) can ignite.
testing device > fig. 264.
— Avoid short circuits in the electrical system.
Indicator light — Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there temperature-controlled and can turn on
8V2012721B)
is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions
D Depending on the engine and country
325
suddenly, even when the ignition is switched — All work on the batteryor electrical system
off. in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
— Never open the hood when thereis steam or cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
coolant escaping from the engine compart- this, all work must be performed only by an
ment, because thereis a risk that you could authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is Service Facility.
escaping. — Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
— Never open the cap on the coolant expan- cals to as short a time as possible.
sion tank when the engine is warm. The
cooling system is under pressure. Z\ WARNING
— To protect your face, hands, and arms from California Proposition 65 Warning:
hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a — Engine exhaust, some ofits constituents,
thick cloth when opening. and certain vehicle components contain or
— Do not remove the engine cover under any emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
circumstances. This increases the risk of fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
burns. reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
— Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
the ignition cable or other componentsin ucts of component wear contain or emit
the electronic high-voltage ignition system chemicals known to the State of California
when the engine is running or is starting. to cause cancer and birth defects or other
— If a gear is engaged while the vehicleis sta- reproductive harm.
tionary and the engine is running, do not — Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
press the accelerator pedal inadvertently. sories contain lead and lead compounds,
Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the chemicals known to the State of California
vehicle to move, and this could result in an to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
accident. Wash hands after handling.
— If inspections or repairs must be performed
while the engine is running, moving compo- @) Note
nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator,
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any flu-
and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
ids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe
— Set the parking brake first and select the malfunctions and engine damage will occur.
“P” (Park) selector lever position.
— Always makesure that no parts of the () For thesake of the environment
body,jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and
You should regularly check the ground under
long hair can be caught in moving engine
your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
components. Before any work, alwaysre-
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
move any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
hair, and makesureall clothing fits close
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to be
to the body to reduce the risk of anything
checked.
becoming caught in engine components.
— Pay attention to the following warnings list-
ed when work on the fuel system or on the
electrical equipmentis required.
— Do not smoke.
— Never work near open flames.
— Always have a working fire extinguisher
nearby.
326
Opening and closing the hood so that the gasoline engine does not start auto-
matically.
The hoodis released from inside the vehicle.
> With the door open, pull the lever <> below
the instrument panel in the direction of the ar-
row > fig. 265.
> Raise the hoodslightly > A\.
> Press the rocker switch under the hood upward
=> fig. 266. This releases the catch.
> Open the hood.
Closing the hood

> Push the hood downuntil you override the
Fig. 265 Section from the driver's side footwell: release force of the strut.
lever >» Let the hoodfall lightly into the latch. Do not
= press it in. > JX.
2=
&
oO
ZAWARNING
— Never open the hood when there is steam or
coolant escaping from the engine compart-
ment, because thereis a risk that you could
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
escaping.
— For safety reasons, the hood must always be
Fig. 266 Rocker switch under the hood latched securely while driving. Because of
this, always check the hood after closing it
Read and follow all WARNINGS before checking to makesureit is latched correctly. The hood
anything in the engine compartment is latched if the front corners cannotbelift-
= page 325, General information. ed.
Makesure the wiper arms are not raised up from — If you notice that the hoodis not latched
the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be while you are driving, stop immediately and
damaged. close it, because driving when the hoodis
not latched increases the risk of an accident.
Opening the hood — If the hood is not latched completely, it
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: could fly up while you are driving and ob-
Switch the ignition off before releasing the hood struct your vision.
8V2012721B)
D) The &> symbol on theleverwas still being designed at

the time this manual wasprinted.
327
The most important check points.

S
y
©
2
>
2
co
Fig. 267 Typical location of the reservoir, engine oil dipstick, and engine oil filler opening
Follow the safety precautions > page 325. The engine oil dipstick, the engine oil filling
opening, and washer fluid reservoir may be locat-
@ Coolant expansion tank (=f) > page 333
ed in different places within the engine compart-
Engine oil dipstick > page 329
ment, depending on the engine version.
Engine oil filler opening (%27) > page 329
4) Sticker* for engine oil specifications @) Tips
=> page 328
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:
) Brake fluid reservoir (OC) > page 334 Note the information for the coolant expan-
(©) Applies to: vehicles with jump start point (+): sion tank in > page 101 and for the vehicle
Jump start point (+) under the cover battery (+) in > page 100.
=> page 336, > page 383
@) Applies to: vehicles with vehicle battery in Engine oil
the engine compartment: Vehicle battery (+)
under the battery cover > page 336,
=> page 383
If you need to add engine oil, use an oil thatis
8) Body ground point (-) > page 336, listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the
=> page 383 front of the engine compartment > page 328,
© Washer fluid reservoir (>) > page 337 fig. 267.
Fuse housing > page 379
If the recommended engine oil is not available, in
an emergency you may add a maximum of 1 >
328
quart (1 liter) of ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized Au-
one time until the next oil change. di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have engine oil extracted.
For more information on the correct engine oil
for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal- & Oil level system: malfunction! Please con-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil tact Service
changed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has
ized Service Facility.
malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an author-
Audi recommends ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
Sbastrol/ ZIDIGEPrarzssional ty to have the malfunction repaired.
Audi recommends using the LongLife high-per- & Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please
formanceengine oil from Audi Genuine Parts. contact Service
The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure

has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an au-
Engine oil pressure thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
Biturn off engine! Oil pressure too low
Engine warm-up request*
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level > page 329. F Please drive to warm up engine
—If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
=> page 330. Only continue driving once the in- outside temperatures or frequent short drives.
dicator light turns off. Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in
— If the engine oil level is correct and the indica- the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi when doing this.
sistance.
@ Tips
The oil pressure warning = is not an oil level
Engine oil level indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
Applies to: vehicles with oil level warning
2 Checkoil level Checking the engine oil level

— You may continue driving for the time being.
The engine oil dipstick varies depending on the
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible
engine type.
=> page 329, Checking the engine oillevel.
— If the engine oil level is correct and the indica-
B8V-0588
tor light still turns on, drive at low engine

speed to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Engine oil sensor

3 Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please
a
contact Service
Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause

Fig. 268 Oil dipstick: checking the engineoil level (exam-
the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine
8V2012721B)
ple) >
oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil
to reduce the level, because this will increase the
329
Observethe safety precautions > A\ in General consume moreoil at the beginning during
information on page 325. the break-in period. Then oil consumption
stabilizes after the break-in period.
>» Park the vehicle on level surface.
— Under normal conditions, oil consumption
> Shut the engine off when it is warm.
depends on the quality and viscosity of the
> Wait approximately two minutes.
oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions,
> Open the hood > page 327.
and the road conditions. The dilution of oil
> Removethe oil dipstick > page 328, fig. 267,
from condensation or fuel residue as well as
wipe it off with a clean cloth and insertit all the
the age ofthe oil also play a role. Because
wayin again.
engine wear increases with mileage, oil con-
> Removethe oil dipstick again and then read the
sumption will increase again over time until
oil level > table on page 330.
it may be necessary to replace worn compo-
> Add engine oil if necessary > page 330.
nents.
Areas on the oil dipstick > fig. 268. — Because all these variables play a role, it is
not possible to define an oil consumption
@)] If the engine oil level is just before the
standard. Therefore, the oil level must be
marking (@,then engine oil must be added.
checked regularly.
Seeo®.
— If you believe that your engine has in-
@|Donot add engineoil.
creased its oil consumption, contact an au-
@) Note thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

Service Facility to determine the cause.
— The engine oil level must not be below the Please note that an exact oil consumption
marking ®, because this increases the risk measurement must be done with the neces-
of engine damage. sary care and accuracy and may take time.
— After adding engine oil, the oil level must An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au-
not be above the marking @) > fig. 268, be- di Service Facility is trained in accurately
cause this increases the risk of catalytic con- measuring the oil consumption.
verter and/or engine damage. If the oil level — You can find information on engine oil and
is above the marking @,, drive to an author- engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
Facility immediately to have any engine oil ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/
extracted. Avoid high engine speeds,full ac- customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
celeration, and heavy engine loads. audi-service-schedules.html,or call
800-822-2834.
@) Tips
— The engine oil consumption may be up to Adding engine oil
0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km),
depending on driving style and operating
B8K-2120
conditions. Consumption may be higher dur-

ing the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). The
engine oil level must be checked regularly.
It is best to check each time you refuel your
vehicle and before long drives.
— Because ofthe lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
oil. The oil consumption varies depending
on the engine and may change during the Fig. 269 Engine compartment: engine oil filler opening
service life of the engine. Engines generally cover
330
Observethe safety precautions > A\ in General

information on page 325.
— Oil should never enter the sewer system or
> Turn the engine off. come into contact with the ground.
> Open the hood > page 327.
— Follow the legal regulations in the country
> Unscrew the cap %~ for the engine oil filler whereyou are located when disposing of
opening > fig. 269. emptyoil containers.
> Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct
oil > page 328.
Changing engine oil
> Check the oil level again after two minutes
=> page 329, Checking the engine oillevel. We recommend having the oil changed at an au-
» Add moreoil if necessary. thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
> Close the engine oil filler cap and push the dip- Facility.
stick all the wayin.
> Close the hood > page 327. Follow the safety precautions > page 325, Gener-
al information.
Z\ WARNING The engine oil must be changed at the intervals
—When adding oil, do notlet oil drip onto hot specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Book-
engine components. This increases the risk let. This is very important because the lubrication
ofa fire. function of the oil gradually declines during regu-
— You mustseal the cap on the oil filler open- lar vehicle operation.
ing correctly so that oil does not leak out on- The engine oil should be changed morefrequent-
to the hot engine and exhaust system when ly under certain circumstances. Havethe oil
the engine is running, becausethis is a fire changed more frequently if you often drive short
hazard. distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stop-
— Alwaysclean skin thoroughlyif it comes into and-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environ-
contact with engine oil. ments, or is operated for long periods of time in
— Engine oil is poisonous and mustbe kept out temperatures below zero.
of reach of children.
Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil ap-
— Store the engine oil securely in the original
pear darker after the engine has run briefly. This
container.
is normal and no reason to change the engine oil
more frequently than recommended.
() Note
— The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not
Becausecorrectly disposing of engine oil is diffi-
cover damage or malfunctions if the recom- cult and special tools and technical knowledge
are needed for an oil change, having your engine
mended intended use of the vehicle and
maintenance measures listed in the Audi
oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Main- thorized Audi Service Facility is recommended.
tenance Booklet were not followed. If you change the engine oil yourself, please note
— Only use high-grade engine oil that explicit- the following important information:
ly meets the Audi oil quality standard for
your vehicle. Using another oil may cause ZA\ WARNING
severe vehicle damage. If you change the engine oil on the vehicle
— Do not mix any additional lubricants into yourself, the following precautions must be
the engine oil. Damage caused by such addi- followed:
8V2012721B)
tives is not covered by the warranty. — Wear protective eyewear.

— Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
to cool downsufficiently.
331
— Maintain enough distance when you arere- ing coolant additives. These additives may be
moving the oil drain plug. While doing this, mixed with each other.
keep your forearm parallel to the ground to
Coolant additive Specification
reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
G12++ TL774G
arm.
— Drain the oil into a container designed for G13 TL774)

this purposethatis large enough to hold the The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
full amountof oil in your engine. mixed with water depends on the climate where
— Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-
reach of children. tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze
— Prolonged contact of used engine oil with and damage the engine.
the skin may cause skin damage. Always
wash oil off immediately with soap and wa- Coolant Freeze protec-
ter to protect your skin. additive tion
Warm min. 40% min. -13 °F
@) Note regions max. 45% (-25 °C)
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
Additives may cause engine damage thatis regions max. 55% (-40 °C)
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty. (!) Note
— Before the start of winter, have an author-
@ For the sake of the environment ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— Before changing the engine oil, make sure Facility check if the coolant additive in your
you can disposeof the used engine oil cor- vehicle matches the percentage appropriate
rectly. for the climate. This is especially important
— Engine oil must always be disposed of cor- when driving in colder climates.
rectly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for- — If the appropriate coolant additive is not
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew- available in an emergency, do not add any
ers. other additive. You could damage the en-
— Have your used engine oil recycled by bring- gine. If this happens, only use water and re-
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact store the correct mixture ratio with the
a gas station. specified coolant additive as soon as possi-
ble.
Cooling system — Onlyrefill with new coolant.
— Radiator sealant must not be mixed with
the coolant.
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture

of purified water and coolant additive at the fac-
G) Tips
tory. This coolant must not be not changed. Applies to: RS models: In certain weather
conditions, moisture such as rain or snow may
The coolant level is monitored through the B in-
evaporateon the radiator after stopping the
dicator light > page 25. However, occasionally
vehicle. This may cause steam to escape from
checking the coolant level manually is recom-
the front of the vehicle.
mended.
Coolant additive
The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and
corrosion protection agents. Only use the follow-
332
Adding coolant > Make sure that the fluid level remains stable.
Add morecoolant if necessary.
[RAz-0539]
> Close the cap securely.
=
%
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak.
Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can re-
sult from the coolant boiling due overheating
MIN
and then being forced out of the cooling system.
Fig. 270 Engine compartment- coolant expansion tank
(diagram): @ cover; @) markings ZA WARNING
— The engine compartment in any vehicle can
Observethe safety precautions > page 325, Gen- be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and al-
eral information. low it to cool before working in the engine
Checking the engine coolantlevel compartment. Alwaysfollow the informa-
tion found in > page 325, General informa-
>» Park the vehicle on a level surface. tion.
— Never open the hood if you can see or hear
> Read the coolant level on the coolant expansion steam or coolant escaping from the engine
tank > page 328, fig. 267. The coolant level
compartment. This increases the risk of
must be between the markings (@) > fig. 270
burns. The cooling system is under pressure.
when the engine is cold. When the engine is
When you no longer see or hear steam or
warm it can be slightly above the upper mark- coolant escaping, you may open the engine
ing. compartment with caution.
Adding coolant — When working in the engine compartment,
remember that the radiator fan can switch
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:
on even if the ignition is switched off, which
Your vehicle has two coolant expansion tanks
increasesthe risk of injury.
that are separate from each other. The smaller of
— Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
the two expansion tanks must not be opened
ous to your health. For this reason, store the
= page 101. Read and follow the important safe-
coolantin the original container and away
ty precautions > A\ in Coolant on page 101.
from children. Thereis a risk of poisoning.
Requirement: there must be a residual amount of
coolant in the expansion tank >@). ©) Note
If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is
and coolant additive. Mixing the coolant additive empty. Air could enter the cooling system and
with distilled water is recommended. damage the engine. If this is the case, do not
continue driving. See an authorized Audi deal-
> Allow the engine to cool.
er or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
> Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
tance.
sion tank cover.
> Remove the cover @) © fig. 270 carefully to the
left > AX.
» Add the correct mixture ratio of coolant
8V2012721B)
> page 332 up to the upper marking @)

> fig. 270.
333
Brake fluid equivalent quality may be used, and it must

meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Stand-
BFV-0229]
ard (FMVSS) 116 DOT4, Class 6.
@) Note
— If the brake fluid level is above the MAX
marking, brake fluid may leak out over the
edge of the reservoir and result in damage
to the vehicle.
— Do not allow any brake fluid to come into
contact with the vehicle paint, becauseit
Fig. 271 Engine compartment:cap on brakefluid reservoir
will corrode the paint.
Observethe safety precautions > page 325, Gen-
eral information. Electrical system
Checking the brakefluid level If the = or I indicator light turns on, there is a
malfunction in the generator, the battery, or the
Read the brakefluid level on the brakefluid res-
vehicle electrical system.
ervoir > page 328, fig. 267. The brake fluid level
must be between the MIN and MAX markings = Electrical system: malfunction! Batteryis
oA. not charging
The brakefluid level is monitored automatically. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immediately. Turn off all un-
Changing the brakefluid
necessary electrical equipment because it will
Brake fluid should be changed at regular inter- drain the battery. See an authorized Audi dealer
vals. Have the brake fluid changed by an author- or authorized Audi Service Facility if the battery
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- charge level is too low.
ty. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
= Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not
Service Facility will inform you of the replace-
possible. Please contact Service
ment intervals.
It will not be possible to restart the engine once
ZA\ WARNING you turn it off. Vehicle functions/driving stability
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN maybe limited. Drive to an authorized Audi deal-
marking, it can impair the braking effect and er or authorized Audi Service Facility immediate-
driving safety, which increase the risk of an ly.
accident. Do not continue driving. See an au- = Electrical system: malfunction! Please con-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi tact Service
Service Facility for assistance.
— If the brakefluid is old, bubbles may form in Switch off all electrical equipment that is not
the brake system during heavy braking. This needed. Vehicle functions/driving stability may
could impair braking performanceand driv- be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
ing safety, which increases the risk of an ac- authorized Audi Service Facility immediately.
cident. = Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
— The brakefluid in your vehicle must meet tery will be charged while driving
the standard VW 501 14 and is available at
The starting ability may be impaired.
di Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not If this message turns off after a little while, the
available, another high-grade brakefluid of vehicle battery has charged enough while driving. >
334
If this message does not turn off, drive immedi- Winter operation
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Cold weather places higher demands on the bat-
Audi Service Facility. tery. This results in reduced starting ability. Have
the battery checked by an authorized Audi dealer
Battery or authorized Audi Service Facility before cold
weather begins.
Battery general information
Because of the complex power supply,all work on Z\ WARNING

batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc., — All work on the battery or electrical system
should only be performed by an authorized Audi in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\. cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
this, all work must be performed only by an
Multiple batteries with different technologies
maybe installed in your vehicle: authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
— Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the — Never connect the charging cable or jump
engine, basic power supply) > page 335, Lead start cable directly to your vehicle battery.
battery or > page 336, Other battery types Only use the connections in the engine com-
— Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation partment > page 336.
or optional equipment) > page 336, Otherbat-
tery types ZA\WARNING
— Applies to: Plug-in hybrid drive: High-voltage
California Proposition 65 Warning:
battery (for example, for electric driving)
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
=> page 90, Introduction.
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
Not running the vehicle for long periods of chemicals known to the Stateof California
time to cause cancer and reproductive problems.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle
does not run for long periods of time. To ensure
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical
() Note
equipment will be reduced or switched off If the vehicle will be parked for long periods
=> page 163. Some convenience functions, such of time, protect the battery against the cold
as interior lighting or power seat adjustment, so that it will not be destroyed by “freezing”
may not be available under certain circumstan- = page 336, Charging the battery.
ces. These convenience functions will be available
again once you switch the ignition on and start Lead battery
the engine.
Even when electrical equipment is switched off, Explanation of warnings:

the equipmentcan still drain the batteryif the Always wear eyeprotection.
vehicle is not driven for long periods of time.
Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always
destroys the inside of the battery. The battery wear protective gloves and eye protection.
must be charged every month to prevent this Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
= page 336. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
forbidden.
authorized Audi Service Facility for more infor-
p A highly explosive mixture of gases can
mation.
form when charging batteries. >
8V2012721B)
335
Always keep children away from battery substances and recyclable raw materials. Con-
@) acid and the battery. tact an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility for more information.
@/| Alwaysfollow the instructions in the oper-
fQ ating manual.
Charging the battery
2 ¥ Do notdispose of lead batteries in
household trash. They contain harmful sub-
stances, such as sulfuric acid and lead, and al-
so recyclable raw materials. Contact an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ice Facility for more information.
Other battery types
Explanation of warnings: Fig. 272

-Appliesto: vehicles with vehicle battery in the engine compartment-
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are Engine compartment: connections for charger or jump start
& forbidden. cable
Alwayskeep children away from battery
B8V-0529
es) acid and the battery.
@/| Alwaysfollow theinstructionsin the oper-
fQ ating manual.
ZX WARNING
All work on the batteries must only be per-
formed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— Gases that escape from these different bat-
Fig. 273 Applies to: vehicles with jump start point @)En-
tery types can be poisonous or flammable. gine compartment: connections for charger or jump start
— The contents of these battery types can be cable
corrosive. If any battery contents come into
contact with the skin, flush the affected Note the safety precautions > page 325, General
area for at least 15 minutes with clean wa- information, > /\ in Battery general informa-
ter. Then wash the affected area with soap. tion on page 335 and > /\.
Havethe affected area examined by a medi- Plug-in hybrid drive: > page 100.
cal professional.
Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum
@ Note charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca-
bles remain connected.
Components must not be connected to the
battery terminals and wires on these battery Depending on the engine,the battery is located
types because this increases the risk of dam- in the engine compartment or in the luggage
age, for example due to overvoltage. compartment. For vehicles with the battery in
the luggage compartment, a jump start point
@ For the sake of the environment thatis also used for battery charging is located in
» JX. Do notdisposeof these types of batter- the engine compartment. The battery is always >
ies in household trash. They contain harmful
336
charged in the engine compartment. The ground — Do not connect or disconnect the charging
point ©) is always located on the vehicle body. cable while charging because this increases
> Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip- the risk of an explosion.
ment.
> Open the hood > page 327. (i) Tips
» Applies to: vehicles with vehicle battery in the Read all of the manufacturer's instructions
engine compartment: Open the cover on the for the charger before charging the battery.
positive terminal > fig. 272.
> Applies to: vehicles with jump start point (+): Windshield washer
Open the cover on the positive terminal
system
> fig. 273.
> Clamp the terminal clamps on the charger cor-
B8K-2123
rectly onto the ground point © and the positive
terminal G).
> Insert the power cable for the charging device
into the socket and switch the device on.
> At the end of the charging process, switch the
charger off and pull the power cable out of the
socket.
> Removethe charging device terminal clamps.
> Applies to: vehicles with vehicle battery in the Fig. 274 Engine compartment: windshield washer fluid
engine compartment: Close the cover on the cover (example)
positive terminal.
> Applies to: vehicles with jump start point (+): Observethe safety precautions > page 325, Gen-
Close the cover on the positive terminal. eral information.
» Close the hood > page 327.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir & contains
the cleaning solution for the windshield and the
ZA WARNING headlight washer system* > page 328,fig. 267.
— Applies to: vehicles with jump start connec- The reservoir capacity can be found in
tions in the engine compartment: Never => page 395.
connect the charging cable directly to your
To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the
vehicle battery. Only use the connections in
spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts
the engine compartment > page 336.
of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the wa-
— A highly explosive mixture of gases can form
ter. When the outside temperatures are cold, an
when charging batteries. Only charge the
anti-freezing agent should be added to the water
battery in well-ventilated areas.
so thatit does not freeze.
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or () Note
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
—The concentration of anti-freezing agent
the battery housing can crack and battery
mustbe adjusted to the vehicle operating
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
conditions and the climate. A concentration
risk of an explosion and chemical burns.
that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
— Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
ized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
tives to the washer fluid.
tion.
8V2012721B)
— Do not use a glass cleaner that contains

paint solvents, because this could damage
the paint.
337
Service interval display

The service interval display detects when yourve-
hicle is due for service.
The service interval display works in two stages:
— Inspection or oil change reminder: after driv-

ing a certain distance, a message appearsin the
instrument cluster display each time the igni-
tion is switched on or off. The remaining dis-
tance or time is displayed briefly.
— Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle
has reached an inspection or oil change interval
or both intervals at the same time, the mes-
sage Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil
change and inspection due! appearsbriefly af-
ter switching the ignition on/off.
Checking service intervals

You can check the remaining distance or time un-
til the next oil change or next inspection in the
Infotainment system. Select in the Infotainment
system: the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left con-
trol button > Service & checks > Service inter-
vals.
Resetting the indicator

An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility will reset the service interval dis-
play after performing service.
If you have changed the oil yourself, you mustre-

set the oil change interval.
To reset the display, select in the Infotainment

system: the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left con-
trol button > Service & checks > Service intervals
> Resetoil change interval.
@ Note
— Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil
was changed.
— Following the service intervals is critical to
maintaining the function, servicelife, and
value of your vehicle, especially the engine.
Even if the mileage on the vehicleis low, do
not exceed the time for the nextservice.
338
Wheels
Wheels —Always adapt your driving to

Wheels and Tires the road and traffic condi-
General information tions. Drive carefully and re-
duce your speed on icyor slip-
> Check your tires regularly for pery roads. Even winter tires
damage, such as punctures,
can lose traction on black ice.
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire @ Note
tread.
—Please note that summer and
>If driving over curbs or similar winter tires are designed for
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
the conditions that are typical
proach the curb at an angle. in those seasons. Audi recom-
> Havefaulty tires or rims re-
mends using winter tires dur-
placed immediately. ing the winter months. Low
>Protect your tires from oil,
temperatures significantly de-
grease, and fuel.
crease the elasticity of summ-
>Mark tires before removing er tires, which affects traction
them so that the same running
and braking ability. If summer
direction can be maintained if
tires are used in very cold tem-
they are reinstalled. peratures, cracks can form on
>Lay tires flat when storing and the tread bars, resulting in
store them ina cool, dry location
permanent tire damage that
with as little exposureto light as can cause loud driving noise
possible.
and unbalanced tires.
—Burnished, polished or
A WARNING
chromed rims must not be
—Never drive faster than the used in winter driving condi-
maximum permitted speed for tions. The surface of the rims
your tires. This could cause the does not have sufficient corro-
tires to heat up too much. This sion protection for this and
increases the risk of an acci- could be permanently dam-
dent because it can cause the aged by road salt or similar
8V2012721B)
tire to burst. substances.
339
Wheels
Tire designations @ Tire construction

re)
2
“R” indicates a radial tire.
i
x
©
oO
©) Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
© Load index and speed rating

The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed. Also
see > A in General information on
page 339.
“EXTRA LOAD”, “xl” or “RF” indi-
cates that the tire is reinforced or
Fig. 275 Tire designations on the side-
wall is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- /Maximum permitted speed
@ Tires for passenger vehicles ing
(if applicable) P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
“P” indicates a tire for a passen-
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
ger vehicle. “T” indicates a tire
Ss up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
designated for temporaryuse. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
U up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
@ Nominal width
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Nominal width ofthe tire be- Vv up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
tween the sidewalls in millime- Zz above 149 mph (240 km/h)?
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)?
ters. In general: the larger the
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
number, the wider the tire.
@) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
@) Aspect ratio tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code “ZR”.
Height/width ratio expressed asa
percentage.
340
Wheels
@ US DOT number (TIN) and mustalso specify the materials

manufacture date used in the tire. These include
The manufacture dateis listed on steel, nylon, polyester and other
the tire sidewall (it may only ap- materials.
pear on the inner side of the tire): @) Maximum permitted load
DOT... 2218... This number indicates the maxi-
means, for example, that the tire mum load in kilograms and
was produced in the 22nd week of pounds that the tire can carry.
the year 2018. @ Uniform tire quality grade
Audi Original Tires standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
Audi Original equipment tires resistance
with the designation “AO” have
Treadwear, traction and tempera-
been specially matched to your
ture ranges > page 356.
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards @ Runningdirection
for safety and handling. An au- The arrowsindicate the running
thorized Audi dealer or author- direction of unidirectional tires.
ized Audi Service Facility will be You must always follow the speci-
able to provide you with morein- fied running direction
formation. => page 376.
@) Mud and snow capability Maximum permitted
“M/S” or “M+S” indicates the tire inflation pressure
is suitable for driving on mud and This number indicates the maxi-
snow. /4\ indicates a winter tire. mum pressure to which a tire can
Composition of the tire cord be inflated under normal operat-
and materials ing conditions.
The number ofplies indicates the

number of rubberized fabric lay-
ers in the tire. In general: the
8V2012721B)
morelayers, the more weight a

tire can carry. Tire manufacturers
341
Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading Cord

terminology means the strands forming the
Accessory weight plies in the tire.
means the combined weight (in Cold tire inflation pressure
excess of those standard items means the tire pressure recom-
which may be replaced) of auto- mended by the vehicle manufac-
matic transmission, power steer- turer for a tire of a designated
ing, power brakes, power win- size that has not been driven for
dows, power seats, radio, and more than a couple of miles (kilo-
heater, to the extent that these meters) at low speeds in the three
items are available as factory-in- hour period before the tire pres-
stalled equipment (whether in- sure is measured or adjusted.
stalled or not).
Curb weight
Aspect ratio
means the weight of a motor ve-
means the ratio of the height to hicle with standard equipment in-
the width of the tire in percent. cluding the maximum capacity of
Numbersof 55 or lower indicate a fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
low sidewall for improved steer- tioning and additional weight of
ing response and better overall optional equipment.
handling on dry pavement.
Extra load tire
Bead
means a tire designed to operate
means the partof the tire that is at higher loads and at higher in-
made ofsteel wires, wrapped or flation pressures than the corre-
reinforced by ply cords and that is sponding standard tire. Extra load
shaped tofit the rim. tires may be identified as “XL”,
Bead separation “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF” on
the sidewall.
means a breakdown of the bond
between componentsin the bead.
342
Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating Maximum (permissible)

inflation pressure
(“GAWR’”)
means the load-carrying capacity means the maximum cold infla-

of a single axle system, measured tion pressure to which a tire may
at the tire-ground interfaces. be inflated. Also called “maxi-
mum inflation pressure.”
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(“GVWR”)
Normal occupant weight
means the maximum total loaded means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
weight of the vehicle. times the number of occupants
Groove seated in the vehicle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi-
means the space between twoad-
cle.
jacent tread ribs.
Occupantdistribution
Load rating (code)
means distribution of occupants
means the maximum load that a
in a vehicle.
tire is rated to carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may notfind Outer diameter
this information on all tires be- means the overall diameter of an
cause it is not required by law. inflated newtire.
Maximum load rating Overall width
means the load rating for a tire at means the linear distance be-
the maximum permissible infla- tween the exteriors of the side-
tion pressurefor that tire. walls of an inflated tire, including
Maximum loadedvehicle elevations due to labeling, deco-
weight rations, or protective bands or
ribs.
means the sum of:
Ply
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and parallel cords.
8V2012721B)
(d) Production options weight
343
Wheels
Production options weight Rim

means the combined weight of means a metal supportfor a tire
those installed regular production ora tire and tube assembly upon
options weighing over 5 lbs. which the tire beads are seated.
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stand-
Rim diameter
ard items which theyreplace, not
means nominal diameter of the
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight,in-
bead seat. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
cluding heavy duty brakes, ride
chase new tires to match the new
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
rim diameter.
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire Rim size designation

means rim diameter and width.
means a pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the Rim width
beads are laid at substantially means nominal distance between
90 degrees to the centerline of rim flanges.
the tread.
Sidewall
Recommendedinflation
means that portion of a tire be-
pressure
tween the tread and bead.
see > page 342, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure. Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tireis
Reinforced tire
designed to be driven for extend-
means a tire designed to operate
ed periods of time. The ratings
at higher loads and at higher in-
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
flation pressures than the corre-
to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
sponding standard tire. Rein-
on page 340. You may notfind
forced tires may be identified as
this information on all tires be-
“XL”, “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF”
cause it is not required by law.
on the sidewall.
The speed rating letter code,
where applicable, is molded on
the tire sidewall and indicates the >
344
Wheels
maximum permissible road parisons among tires. The UTQG is

speeds. See also > A in General not a safety rating and not a guar-
information on page 339. antee that a tire will last for a
prescribed number of miles (kilo-
Tire pressure monitoring
system* meters) or perform in a certain
way. It simply gives tire buyers
means a system that detects
additional information to com-
when one or moreofa vehicle's
bine with other considerations,
tires are underinflated and illumi-
such as price, brand loyalty and
nates a low tire pressure warning
dealer recommendations. Under
telltale.
UTQG, tires are graded bythe tire
Tread manufacturers in three areas:
means that portion of a tire that treadwear, traction, and tempera-
comes into contact with the road. ture resistance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
Tread separation
the sidewalls.
means pulling away of the tread
U.S. DOTTire Identification
from the tire carcass.
Number (TIN)
Treadwear indicators (TWI) This is the tire’s “serial number”.
means the projections within the It begins with the letters “DOT”
principal grooves designed to give and indicates that the tire meets
a visual indication of the degrees all federal standards. The next
of wear of the tread. See two numbersor letters indicate
= page 348, Treadwearindicator the plant where it was manufac-
for more information on measur- tured, and the last four numbers
ing tire wear. represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel- DOT... 2218...
oped by the United States Nation- means that the tire was produced
al HighwayTraffic Safety Adminis- in the 22nd week of 2018. The
tration (NHTSA)that is designed other numbers are marketing co-
8V2012721B)
to help buyers makerelative com- des that may or may not be used >
345
Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This in- number of seating positions. Re-

formation is used to contact con- fer to the table > table on
sumersif a tire defect requires a page 351 for the number of peo-
recall. ple that correspond to the vehicle
normal load.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and lug- Newtires or wheels
gage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilo-
Audi recommends having all work
grams) times the vehicle's desig-
on tires or wheels performed by
nated seating capacity.
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle maximum load on the thorized Audi Service Facility.
tire These facilities have the proper
means that load on an individual knowledge and are equipped with
tire that is determined bydistrib- the required tools and replace-
uting to each axle its share of the ment parts.
maximum loaded vehicle weight
>Newtires do not yet have the
and dividing by two.
optimum gripping properties.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Drive carefully and at moderate
means that load on an individual speeds for the first 350 miles
tire that is determined bydistrib- (500 km) with newtires.
uting to each axle its share of the > Only use tires with the same de-
curb weight, accessory weight, sign, size (rolling circumfer-
and normal occupant weight (dis- ence), and as close to the same
tributed in accordance with > ta- tread pattern as possible on all
ble on page 351) and dividing by four wheels.
two. > Applies to: RS models: Only use
tires with the same design and
Occupant loading and distri- the same tread pattern on all
bution for vehicle normal load
four wheels.
for various designated seating
capacities >Do not replace tires individually.
At least replace both tires on the
Refer to the tire inflation pressure
same axle at the same time. >
label > page 350,fig. 278 for the
346
Wheels
> Audi recommends that you use is the same circumference as the
Audi Original Tires. If you would regular tires.
like to use different tires, please
note that the tires may perform A\ WARNING
differently even if they are the —Onlyuse tire/rim combina-
same size > A. tions and suitable wheel bolts
>If you would like to equip your that have been approved by
vehicle with a tire and rim com- Audi. Otherwise, damage to
bination that is different from the vehicle and an accident
what was installed at the facto- could result.
ry, consult with an authorized —For technical reasons,it is not
Audi dealer or authorized Audi possible to use tires from oth-
Service Facility before making a er vehicles. In some cases, you
purchase > A. cannot even use tires from the
same vehicle model.
Because the sparetire® is differ-
—Makesurethat the tires you
ent from the regular tires instal-
select have enough clearance
led on the vehicle (such as winter
to the vehicle. Replacement
tires or wide tires), only use the
tires should not be chosen
spare tire* temporarily in case of
simply based on the nominal
emergency and drive carefully
size, because tires with a dif-
while it is in use. It should be re-
ferent construction can differ
placed with a regular tire as soon
greatly even if they are the
as possible.
same size. If there is not
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel enough clearance, the tires or
drive: All four wheels must be the vehicle can be damaged
equipped with tires that are the and this can reduce driving
same brand and have the same safety and increase the risk of
construction and tread pattern so an accident.
that the drive system is not dam- —Only use tires that are more
aged by different wheel speeds. than six years old when abso-
For this reason, in case of emer- lutely necessary and drive
8V2012721B)
gency, only use a sparetire* that carefully when doing so.
347
Wheels
—Do not use run-flat tires on —Have an authorized Audi dealer

your vehicle. Using them when or authorized Audi Service Facili-
not permitted can lead to ve- ty check the wheel alignment if
hicle damage or accidents. there is unusual wear.
—If you install wheel covers on —Have the wheels rebalanced if an
the vehicle, make sure theyal- imbalance is causing noticeable
low enough air circulation to vibration in the steering wheel.
cool the brake system. If they If you do not, the tires and other
do not, this could increase the vehicle components could wear
risk of an accident. more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Tire wear and damage
Original equipment tires contain
B4H-0415
treadwear indicators in the tread

pattern, which are bars that are
1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are
spaced evenly around the tire per-
pendicular to the running direc-
tion > fig. 276. The letters “TWI”
Fig. 276 Tire profile: treadwear indica- or triangles on the tire sidewall
tor indicate the location of the tread-
wear indicators.
Tire wear
Check the tires regularly for wear. The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth ) when they
—Inflation pressure that is too low
have worn down tothe treadwear
or high can increase tire wear
indicators. Replace the tires with
considerably.
new ones > A.
—Driving quickly through curves,
rapid acceleration, and heavy
braking increase tire wear.
) Obey anyapplicable regulations in the

country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
348
Wheels
Tire rotation
Z\ WARNING
Applies to: RS models: Tires may
—Tread that has worn too low or
only be rotated if the tires on the
uneven tread depths on the
front and rear axles are the same
tires can reduce driving safety.
size > A.
This can increase the risk of an
Rotating the tires regularly is rec- accident because it has a neg-
ommended to ensurethe tires ative effect on handling, driv-
wear evenly. To rotate the tires, ing through curves, and brak-
install the tires from the rear axle ing, and because it increases
on the front axle and vice versa. the risk of hydroplaning when
This will allow the tires to have driving through deep puddles.
approximately the same length of —Applies to: RS models: De-
service life. pending on the equipment,
For unidirectional tires, make sure the widths of the standard
the tires are installed according to summer tires may be different
the running direction indicated on on the front and rear axles.
the tire sidewall > page 376. The wider tires are mounted
on the front axle. The tires
Hidden damage
mustnot be rotated.
Damage to tires and rims can of-
ten occur in locations that are hid-
den. Unusual vibrations in the ve-
hicle or pulling to one side may
indicate that thereis tire damage.
Reduce your speed immediately.
Check the tires for damage. If no
damage is visible from the out-
side, drive slowly and carefully to
the nearest authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
8V2012721B)
ed.
349
Wheels
SU C=e yee) Checking and correcting tire

oO
pressure
oS
o
2
a
o
oO
>Check the tire pressure at least
once per month and also check it
before every long drive.
> Always check the tire pressure
when the tires are cold. Do not
reduce the pressureif it increas-
Fig. oa Driver's side B-pillar: tire pres-
es when the tires are warm.
sure label
> Check the label > fig. 278 for
B8K-1151
the correct tire pressure based
on vehicle load.
>Correct the tire pressure if nec-
SOLD TIRE PRESSURE
sSION DES PNEUS A FROID
Ma KPA, Ml PSI
esSary.
ARRIERE
‘SPARE >Store the newtire pressure in
DE SECOURS
the Infotainment system
Fig. 278 Tire pressure label > page 358 or > page 361.
> Check the pressure in the emer-
The correct tire pressurefor tires
gency tire*/spare tire*. Always
mounted at the factory and for
maintain the maximum temper-
the sparetire* is indicated on la-
ature that is specified for the
bel. The label is located on the B-
tire.
pillar > fig. 277, > fig. 278. The
location may vary depending on
Z\ WARNING
the model.
Always adaptthe tire pressure
Use the tire pressure specified for to your driving style and the ve-
a normal vehicle load when the hicle load.
vehicle is partially loaded > table —Overloading can lead to loss of
on page 351. If driving the vehi- vehicle control and increase
cle when fully loaded, you must the risk of an accident. Read
increase the tire pressure to the and follow the important safe-
maximum specified pressure > A. ty precautions in > page 352,
Tires and vehicle load limits. |»
350
Wheels
—The tire must flex moreif the behavior, which increases the
tire pressure is too low or if risk of an accident.
the vehicle speed or load are
too high. This heats the tire up () Note
too much. This increases the Replace lost valve caps to re-
risk of an accident because it duce the risk of damage to the
can cause the tire to burst and tire valves.
result in loss of vehicle con-
trol. ©) For the sakeof the envi-
ronment
—Incorrect tire pressure increas-
es tire wear and has a negative Tire pressurethat is too low in-
effect on driving and braking creases fuel consumption.
Uc] 1c
Please note that the information Makesure that the tire designa-
contained in the following table tion on your tire matches the des-
was correct at the time ofprint- ignation on the tire pressure label
ing, and the information is sub- and the tire pressure table.
ject to change. If there are any The following table lists recom-
differences, you should always mended tire pressures in cold
follow the Es pressuresticker tires according to the load and
= page 350,fig. 277. the size of the tires installed.
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure
Engine Normal load Maximumload
(up to 2/3* people)”
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA
A3 sedan: 225/40 R18 92Y 35 240 32 220 36 250 36 250
2.0L 225/45 R17 91H 33. 230 30 210 41 280 41 280
4-cylinder 225/40 R18 92H 36 250 33 230 41 280 41 280
235/35 R19 91Y 33 230 30 210 38 260 41 280
S3 sedan: 225/40 R18 92Y 38 260 35 | 240 42 290 42 290
8V2012721B)
2.0L 225/40 R18 92H 38 260 35 240 41 280 41 280

4-cylinder —[335/35R1991Y 39 270 36 250 | 44 300 44 300 |p
351
Wheels
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure

Engine Normalload Maximum load
(up to 2/3* people)?
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI kPA PSI. kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA
RS3sedan: |235/35R1991Y 39/ 270/ 35/ 240/ 44/ 300/ 39/ 270/
2.5L 44») 300%) 395) 2705) 46>) 3205) 445) 3005)
5-cylinder 255/30 R19 91Y 39/ 270/ - - 44/ 300/ - -
445) 3005) 465) 320»)
A3 Cabriolet: |225/40 R18 92Y 35 240 32 220 38 260 38 260
2.0L 225/45 R17 91H 33. 230 30 210 39 270 39 270
4-cylinder 225/40 R18 92H 38 260 35 240 41 280 41 280
235/35 R19 91Y 42 290 39 270 45 310 45 310
A3 Sportback 205/55 R16 91V 35 240 35 240 36 250 39 270
e-tron: 225/40 R18 92Y 33. 230 33 230 36 250 39 270
ae 225/45R1791H 38 260 38 260 38 260 38 260
4-cylinder
225/40 R18 92H 36 250 36 250 41 280 41 280
@) Vehicles with four seating positions: two peoplein the front, Vehicles with five seat-
ing positions: two peoplein the front, one person in the rear
5) The value before the forward slash applies to vehicles with a maximum speed up to
155 mph (250 km/h); the value after the slash is for up to 174 mph (280 km/h).
vehicle and can lead to sudden

Z\, WARNING
tire failure, including a blowout
Please note the important safe-
and sudden deflation that can
ty precautions regarding tire
cause the vehicle to crash.
pressure > page 350 and load
limits > page 352. Your safety and that of your pas-
sengers also depends on making
Tires and vehicle load limits sure that load limits are not ex-
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev-
There are limits to the amount of
erybody and everything in and on
load or weight that any vehicle
the vehicle. These load limits are
and any tire can carry. A vehicle
technically referred to as the vehi-
that is overloaded will not handle
cle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
well and is moredifficult to stop.
(“GVWR”).
Overloading can not only lead to
loss of vehicle control, but can al- The “GVWR”includes the weight
so damage important parts of the of the basic vehicle, all factory >
352
Wheels
installed accessories, a full tank The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

of fuel, oil, coolant and other flu- and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
ids plus maximum Load. The max- are listed on the safety compli-
imum Load includes the number ance sticker label located on the
of passengers that the vehicleis driver’s side B-pillar.
intended to carry (“seating ca-
pacity”) with an assumed weight /\, WARNING
of 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each pas- Overloading a vehicle can cause
senger at a designated seating loss of vehicle control, a crash
position and the total weight of or other accident, serious per-
any luggage in the vehicle. If you sonal injury, and even death.
tow a trailer, the weight of the —Carrying more weight than
trailer hitch and the tongue your vehicle was designed to
weight of the loaded trailer must carry will prevent the vehicle
be included as part of the vehicle from handling properly and in-
load. crease the risk of the loss of
The Gross Axle WeightRating vehicle control.
—The brakes on a vehicle that
(“GAWR”) is the maximum load
that can be applied at each of the has been overloaded may not
vehicle’s two axles. be able to stop the vehicle
within a safe distance.
The fact that there is an upper
—Tires ona vehicle that has
limit to your vehicle’s Gross Vehi-
been overloaded can fail sud-
cle Weight Rating means that the
denly, including a blowout and
total weight of whatever is being
sudden deflation, causing loss
carried in the vehicle (including
of control and a crash.
the weight ofa trailer hitch and
—Always make sure that the to-
the tongue weight of the loaded
tal load being transported -
trailer) is limited. The more pas-
including the weight ofa trail-
sengersin the vehicle or passen-
er hitch and the tongue
gers who are heavier than the
weight of a loaded trailer -
standard weights assumed mean
does not makethe vehicle
8V2012721B)
that less weight can be carried as

luggage.
353
Wheels
heavier than the vehicle’s luggage load capacity. For ex-

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. ample, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will
Determining correct load be five 150 lbs. passengersin
ais your vehicle, the amount of
Use the example below to calcu- available cargo and luggage

late the total weight of the pas- load capacity is 650 lbs.
sengers and luggage or other (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
things that you plan to transport 650 lbs.)
so that you can make sure that 5. Determine the combined
your vehicle will not be overload- weight of luggage and cargo
ed. being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely ex-
Steps for Determining Correct ceed the available cargo and
Load Limit
luggage load capacity calculat-
1. Locate the statement “THE ed in Step 4.
COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD trailer, load from your trailer
NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX will be transferred to your vehi-
LBS” on your vehicle’s placard cle. Consult this manual to de-
(tire inflation pressure label) termine how this reduces the
=> page 350,fig. 277. available cargo and luggage
2. Determine the combined load capacity of your vehicle.
weight of the driver and pas- >Check the tire sidewall
sengers that will be riding in (=> page 340,fig. 275) to deter-
your vehicle. mine the designated load rating
3. Subtract the combined weight for a specific tire.
of the driver and passengers
from “XXX” kilograms or “XXX” Wheel bolts and rims
pounds shown on the sticker Wheel bolts
= page 350,fig. 277. Wheel bolts mustbe clean and loosen/tighten

easily.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
354
Wheels
Rims
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate
covers* consist of multiple pieces. These compo-
time, because they provide better handling
nents were bolted together using special bolts
when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
and a special procedure. You mustnotrepair or
tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel
disassemble them > A\.
consumption.
ZA\ WARNING @) Tips

Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
You can also use all season tires instead of
correctly can become loose and result in loss
winter tires. Please note that in some coun-
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of
tries where winter tires are required, only win-
an accident. For the correct tightening specifi-
ter tires with the 44 symbol may be permit-
cation, see > page 372, After changing a
ted.
wheel.
— Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
in the wheel hub clean and free of grease.
— Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim. Snowchains improve both driving and braking in
— Always have damagedrims repaired by an winter road conditions.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
> Only install snow chains on the front wheels.
Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble
> Check and correct the seating of the snow
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Fol-
of an accident.
low the instructions from the manufacturer.
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain
handling when driving in winter conditions. Be- rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons.
cause of their construction (width, compound, Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use
on ice and snow. snowchains.
> Use winter tires on all four wheels. Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add
> Only use winter tires that are approved for your more than 0.53 inch (13.5 mm) in height, includ-
vehicle. ing the chain lock.
> Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in You must remove the snow chains on roads with-
General information on page 339. An author- out snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- ability and damage the tires.
cility can inform you about the maximum per-
mitted speed for your tires.
ZA WARNING
> Check the tire pressure after installing wheels Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow
=> page 350. chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle
control, which increasesthe risk of an acci-
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great- dent.
ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of
0.157 inch (4 mm). The characteristics of winter () Note
8V2012721B)
tires also decrease greatly as the tire ages, re-

Snow chains can damage the rims and wheel
gardless of the remaining tread.
covers*if the chains come into direct contact >
355
Wheels
with them. Remove the wheel covers*first. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Use coated snow chains. Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
G) Tips Tread wear
When using snow chains,it may be advisable The tread weargrade is a comparative rating
to limit the ESC > page 160. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on specified gov-
ernment test course.
Low-profile tires
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern-
Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
profile tires offer a wider tread surface and a
larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls. The relative performance of tires depends upon
This results in an agile driving style. However,it the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may reduce the level of comfort and increase maydepartsignificantly from the norm due to
road noise when driving on roads in poor condi- variations in driving habits, service practices and
tion. differences in road characteristics and climate.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more Traction

quickly than standard tires when driving over
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's
curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un-
maintain the correct tire pressure > page 350.
der controlled conditions on specified govern-
To reduce the risk of damage tothe tires and ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
rims, drive very carefully on poor roads. marked C may have poor traction performance
SA.
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi
(3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for Temperature
bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
on the rims.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
After a heavy impact or damage, havethe tires generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and rims inspected or replaced immediately by heat when tested under controlled conditions on
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Service Facility.
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand- rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife,
ard tires. and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure > A.
Uc Me Ce LUsvmeleLellire] The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
— Tread wear ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
— Traction AAABC der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
— Temperature A BC
of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the minimum required by law.
the tire side wall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width > page 340,fig. 275. ZA\ WARNING
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Tem- The traction grade assigned tothis tire is
perature A. based on straight-ahead braking traction >
356
Wheels
tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cor- even if under-inflation has not reached the level
nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac- to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pres-
teristics. sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

ZA WARNING malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys-
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and function indicator is combined with the low tire
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- pressure telltale. When the system detects a
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
in combination, can cause heat buildup and mately one minute and then remain continuously
possibletire failure. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
Z\ WARNING function exists.
Temperature grades apply to tires that are When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
properly inflated and notover or underinflat- the system maynot be able to detect or signal
ed. low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including the
Tire Pressure Monitoring installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
System indicator
from functioning properly. Always check the
(1) General notes TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
Each tire, including the spare(if provided), that the replacement or alternate tires and
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the properly.
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
indicator appears
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurela-
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla- dicator
tion pressure for those tires).
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been cluster informsyou if the tire pressure is too low
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system or if there is a system malfunction.
(TPMS)that illuminates a Lowtire pressuretell-
tale when one or moreofyour tires is significant- Using the ABS sensors,the tire pressure monitor-
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ing system compares the tire tread circumference
pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and and vibration characteristics of the individual
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate tires. If the pressure changesin one or more
them to the proper pressure. Driving on signifi- tires, this is indicated in the instrumentcluster
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- display with an @ indicator light and a message.
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation If only one tire is affected, the location of that
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, tire will be indicated.
and mayaffect the vehicle's handling and stop- The tire pressures must be stored in the menu
ping ability. display again each time the pressures change
(switching between partial and full load pres-
8V2012721B)
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re- sure) or after changing or replacing a tire on your
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, vehicle > page 358. The tire pressure monitoring >
357
Wheels
system only monitorsthe tire pressure you have — The driver is responsible for maintaining the
stored. Refer to the tire pressure label for the correct tire pressures. You must check the
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle tire pressures regularly.
=> page 350, fig. 278. — Under certain conditions (such as a sporty
Tire tread circumference and vibration character- driving style, winter conditions or unpaved
istics can change and cause a tire pressure warn- roads), the pressure monitor indicator may
ing if: be delayed.
— Do not use run-flat tires on your vehicle. Us-
— The tire pressure in one or moretires is too low
ing them when notpermitted can lead to ve-
—The tire has structural damage hicle damage or accidents.
— The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
changed and it was not stored > page 358 G) Tips
— One side of the vehicle is more heavily loaded
—The tire pressure monitoring system can al-
than the other
so stop working when there is an ESC/ABS
— The wheels on one axle are more heavily loaded
malfunction.
than the others (for example, when towing a
— Using snow chains mayresult in a system
trailer or when driving up and down hills)
malfunction.
— Snow chains areinstalled
— The tire pressure monitoring system in your
— The sparetire* is installed
Audi was calibrated with “Audi Original
— Only one tire was replaced on each axle
Tires” > page 346. Using thesetires is rec-
Indicator lights ommended.
— The tire pressure monitoring system can on-
@ - Loss of pressure in at least one tire > A\.
ly monitor the tire pressure of the driving
Check the tires and replaceor repair if necessary.
tires. Check the tire pressure of the spare
Check/correct the pressures of all four tires. Then
wheel in the luggage compartment so that
store the tire pressures in the menu > page 358.
if necessaryit is ready for use.
is (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)Tire pres-
sure: malfunction! See owner's manual. If i Storing tire pressures
appears after switching the ignition on or while Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
driving and the @ indicator light in the instru- dicator
ment cluster blinks for approximately one minute A changeintire pressure or a changein tires
and then stays on, there is system malfunction. must be stored in the system.
Check/correct the pressures on all four tires and
store the pressures > page 358. If the indicator Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the
light does turn off or turns on again after a short tire pressures in all four tires meet the specified
period of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer values and are adapted to the load > page 348.
have the malfunction corrected.
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Service &
ZX WARNING checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire

pressure > Yes, store now.
— If the tire pressure indicator appearsin the
instrumentcluster display, reduce your (i) Tips
speed immediately and avoid any hard steer-
Do notstore the tire pressures if snow chains
ing or braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as
are installed.
possible and check the tires and their pres-
sures.
358
Wheels
Tire pressure monitoring installation of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
system
from functioning properly. Always check the
(1) General notes TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
Each tire, including the spare(if provided), that the replacement or alternate tires and
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the properly.
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla- The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tion pressure for thosetires). the pressurein the four tires whendriving.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been The system uses sensors that measure the tem-
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system perature and pressurein the tires. The datais
(TPMS)that illuminates a lowtire pressure tell- sent from these sensors to the control module by
tale when one or moreof your tires is significant- radio frequency.
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
The tire pressure monitoring system shows the
pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and
current pressures and temperatures of the tires
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
in the Infotainment system while driving
them to the proper pressure. Driving ona signifi-
= page 360. It also comparesthe current tire
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
pressures with the stored tire pressures and gives
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
a warning if the tire pressureis different from
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
what is stored > page 360.
and mayaffect the vehicle's handling and stop-
ping ability. The system does not detectif the stored tire
pressures match the recommended tire pres-
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
sures. You muststore the tire pressures again in
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
each of the following situations > page 361:
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level — Each time the tire pressures change, for exam-
to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pres- ple when the load in the vehicle changes
sure telltale. — After replacing a tire
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS — If wheels with new wheel sensorsare used
malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys-
tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
Z\WARNING
function indicator is combined with the low tire —The tire pressure monitoring system assists
pressure telltale. When the system detects a the driver in monitoring tire pressures. The
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- driver is responsible for having the tires in-
mately one minute and then remain continuously flated to the correct pressure.
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon — Do not change the tire pressure when the
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- temperature of the tire is extremely high.
function exists. This could result in serious damage to the
tire and even cause the tire to burst, increas-
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
ing the risk of an accident.
8V2012721B)
the system maynotbe able to detect or signal

— A tire with low pressure flexes more. This
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
heats the tire up too much. This could cause |>
mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including the
359
Wheels
the tread to separate and even causethe tire Note that the tire pressure also depends on the
to burst, increasing the risk of an accident. temperature of the tire. The tire pressure increas-
— The tire pressure monitoring system does es as the engine becomes warmer while driving.
not warn about damage or defectsin the
tire construction that could cause the tire to Z\ WARNING
burst, for example. Inspect your tires regu- Read and follow the important information
larly. and notes > page 359.
@) Tips G) Tips
— If tires are replaced, the sensors and valves The tire pressure or temperatureis not dis-
do not need to be removed or replaced. Only played while the vehicle is stationary and in
replace the valve stem and, if necessary, the adaptation mode. Dashes --.-- are shown in
valve and the wheel electronics. If you have place of the pressure and temperature.
questions, see an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility. (1) Tire pressure loss
— An incorrect display or a malfunction in the Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
tire pressure monitoring system can occur
If the @ indicator light turns on, the pressurein
after using the tire mobility kit. Have the
at least one tire is too low or new sensors were
sensors replaced by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. not adapted:
— For an explanation on conformity with the @ Indicator light turns on after turning the
FCC regulations in the United States and the ignition on
Industry Canada regulations, see
The tire pressure is too low compared to the
=> page 392.
specified pressure.
Displaying tire pressures and temperatures > Check and storethe tire pressure(s) the next
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system time it is possible > page 361.
Requirement: you must bedriving the vehicle. @ Indicator light turns on while driving
> Select in the Infotainment system: the [MENU Wheels with new sensors were not adapted or
button > Vehicle > left control button > Service the tire pressure has reached critical level com-
& checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Display pared to the specified pressure.
tire pressure. > Avoid unnecessary steering and braking maneu-
vers.
The current tire pressures are shown in green,
> Adapt your driving style to the situation.
yellow or red numbersin the Infotainment sys-
> Stop as soon as possible and check the tire(s).
tem:
> If it is possible to continue driving, see an au-
— Green: the current tire pressure and the speci- thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
fied tire pressure are approximately the same. Facility immediately and have your tire(s) re-
— Yellow:the currenttire pressure is lower than paired or replaced.
the specified tire pressure.
— Red: the current tire pressure is much lower ZA\ WARNING
than the specified tire pressure. Read and follow the important information
The specified tire pressure is the last tire pressure and notes > page 359.
that was stored > page 361.
360
Wheels
Storing newtire pressures

Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
ZX WARNING
Read and follow the important information
The tire pressure specifications must be stored and notes > page 359.
correctly for the tire pressure monitoring system
to function reliably.
Malfunctions
It is always necessaryto store the tire pressures Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
when the tire pressures are modified, for exam-

If the tire pressure monitoring system is not
ple due to a change in load or when new sensors
available, the ia indicator light appears in the
are installed.
instrument cluster display along with the mes-
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the sage Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's
tire pressures ofall four tires meet the speci- manual.
fied values and are adapted to the load
If the ia indicator light appears after switching
=> page 350, fig. 278. Only correct and store
the ignition on or while driving and the @ indi-
the pressurein tires whose temperatureis ap-
cator light also blinks for approximately one mi-
proximately the same as the ambient tempera-
nute and then stays on, there is a system mal-
ture. If the temperature of the tire is higher
function. The following are examples of situa-
than the ambient air temperature, the tire
tions that could cause a malfunction:
pressure must be increased approximately
3.0 PSI (0.2 bar) abovethe value on the sticker. — If the message appearsat the end of the adap-
» Switch the ignition on. tation phase, the system maynot detect one or
> Select in the Infotainment system: [MENU] but- several of the wheel sensors necessaryfor pres-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Service & sure monitoring. This may result from one or
checks > Tire pressure monitoring > Store tire more wheels without wheel sensorsor with in-
pressure > Yes, store now. After storing the tire compatible wheel sensorsbeing installed.
pressures,the tire pressure monitoring system —Awheel sensor or another component has
measuresthe current pressures while driving failed.
and stores them as the new specified pressures. — Using snow chains can affect the function of
> If the changed tire pressures are not displayed the system because of the shielding effect of
in the Infotainment system, drive the vehicle the chains.
for approximately 10 minutes so that the sen- — The tire pressure monitoring system is not
sor signal from the wheelsis received again. available due to a malfunction.
— Transmitters with the same frequency, such as
During this adaptation phase, --.-- is displayed
headphonesor remote-controlled devices, may
for the pressure and temperature and the tire
cause a temporary system malfunction due to
pressure monitoring system is only partially
the strong electromagnetic field.
available. It only provides a warning if one or
moretire pressures is below the minimum per- The ia indicator light and the message turn off
mitted specified pressure. once the tire pressure monitoring system is avail-
able again. If you cannot correct the malfunction
If the @ indicator light turns on and the mes-
and the ia indicator light stays on, drive imme-
sage Tire pressure: wheel change detected.
diately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Please check all tires and store pressuresin
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction
MMI also appears, the system has detected that
repaired.
the position of the sensors has changed because
of a tire rotation, or that new sensors wereinstal-
8V2012721B)
led. Store the new tire pressures.
361
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning Pressure washers

When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash-
General information
er, always follow the operating instructions pro-
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: For vided with the pressure washer.This is especially
additional cleaning and care information, see important in regard to the pressure and spraying
=> page 122. distance. Do not aim the spraydirectly at seals on
side windows,doors, the hood, the luggage com-
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi- partment lid, or the panoramic glass roof* or at
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when tires, rubber hoses, insulating material, the pow-
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage er top*, sensors*, or camera lenses*. Keep a dis-
and paint defects on the body. tance of at least 16 in (40 cm).
The necessary care products can be obtained Do not remove snowand ice with a pressure
from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Au- washer.
di Service Facility. Read and follow the instruc-
tions for use on the packaging. Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F

Z\ WARNING (60 °C).
— Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
can be dangerous to your health. Automatic car wash
— Alwaysstore cleaning and care products out Spray off the vehicle before washing.
of reach of children to reducethe risk of poi-
Makesure that the windows, the panoramic glass
soning.
roof*, and the power top” are closed and the
windshield wipersare off. Follow instructions
from the car wash operator, especially if there are
— Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning accessories attached to your vehicle.
productsif possible.
If possible, use car washes that do not have
— Do not dispose of cleaning and care prod-
brushes.
ucts with household trash.
Washing by hand
Car washes Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work-
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird ing downward using a soft sponge or cleaning
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve- brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight hand
increase the damaging effect.
To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with washing, first remove dust and large particles
plenty of water. from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fin-
gerprints are best removed with a special cleaner
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree
for matte finish paint.
sap are best removed with plenty of water anda
microfiber cloth. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To re-
duce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once
not use too much pressure.
road salt stops being used for the season.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then
clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
fiber cloth.
362
Care and cleaning
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and letit air —To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois. decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
—To reducethe risk of damage, do not wash
Z\ WARNING the power top* with a pressure washer.
—To reducethe risk of accidents, only wash —To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
the vehicle when the ignition is off and fol- do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen
low the instructions from the car wash oper- sponges,or similar items.
ator. — When washing mattefinish painted vehicle
—To reducethe risk of cuts, protect yourself components:
from sharp metal components when wash- — To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
ing the underbodyor the inside of the wheel face, do not use polishing agents or hard
housings. wax.
— After washing the vehicle, the braking effect — Never use protective wax. It can destroy
may be delayed due to moisture on the the mattefinish effect.
brake rotorsor ice in the winter. This in- — Do not place any stickers or magnetic
creases the risk of an accident. The brakes signs on vehicle componentspainted with
mustbe dried with a few careful brake appli- matte finish paint. The paint could be
cations. damaged when the stickers or magnets
are removed.
C) Note
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car (@) For thesake of the environment
wash, you mustfold the exterior mirrors in Only wash the vehiclein facilities specially de-
to reducethe risk of damage to the mirrors. signed for that purpose. This will reduce the
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only risk of dirty water contaminated withoil from
be folded in and out using the power folding entering the sewer system.
function.
—To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle are notlisted, consult an authorized Audi dealer
components,refer to the following tables. The or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
information contained there is simply recommen- the information found in > A.
dations. For questions or for components that
Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solution
Windshield wiper | Deposits Soft cloth with glass cleaner > page 55
blades
Headlights/ Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution?
Tail lights
Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with solvent-free cleaning solution
camera lenses Cameralenses: soft cloth with alcohol-free cleaning solu-
tion
8V2012721B)
Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray >
363
Care and cleaning

Wheels Road salt Water
Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution
Exhausttail pipes Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel,if nec-
essary
Power top Deposits Clean water, power top cleaning product,if necessary.
Clean with the grain of the fabric using a soft brush and al-
low toair dry.
Winddeflector Deposits Water, mild soap solution, if necessary®
Decorative parts/ Deposits Mild soap solution ®), a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
trim less steel, if necessary
Paint Paint damage Refer to the paint number on the vehicle data label, repair
with touch up paint > page 394
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, con-
sult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Water no longer Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
beads on the surface
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen with water immediately and remove with a micro-
sects, bird droppings, fiber cloth
tree sap, and road
salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ®anda
taminants such as soft cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon compo- Deposits Clean the same wayas painted components > page 362
nents
Audi e-tron Deposits Soft, dry towel
charging system
Decorative decals Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
a) Mild soap solution: maximum twotablespoonsof neutral soap in 1 quart(1 liter) of water
364
Care and cleaning
Interior cleaning
Windows Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorative parts/ Deposits Mild soap solution®
trim
Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth
Heavier deposits Mild soap solution @), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
tion, if necessary
Displays/instru- Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner
ment cluster
Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution ), allow to dry before letting them re-
tract
Textiles Deposits adhering to Vacuum cleaner
artificial leather, |the surface
Alcantara Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
etc.
Specific types of de- Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
posits such as ink, afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary ®
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Natural leather Fresh stains Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®
Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
such as coffee, tea, Dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
such as oil, make-up, for leather
etc. dried stains: Oil cleaning spray
Specific types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from
light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored
conditioning cream, if necessary.
Carbon compo- Deposits Clean the same wayas plastic components
8V2012721B)
nents
a) Mild soap solution: maximum twotablespoons ofneutral soap in 1 quart(1 liter) of water
365
Care and cleaning
ZA\ WARNING — Never use chrome careor cleaning prod-

ucts.
The windshield must not be treated with wa- — Paint
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un-
— To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
favorable conditions such as wetness, dark-
mustbe free of dirt and dust beforepol-
ness, or low sun can result in increased glare.
ishing or waxing.
Wiper blade chatter is also possible.
— To prevent paint damage, do notpolish or
wax the vehicle in direct sunlight.
@) Note
—To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
— Headlightsand tail lights polish awayrustspots.
— Never clean headlightsor tail lights with a — Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi-
dry cloth or sponge. ately because they could damage the
— Do not use any cleaning products that con- paint.
tain alcohol, because they could cause — Decorative decals
cracks to form. —To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
— Wheels any rough powder or abrasive cleaning
— Never use any paint polish or other abra- products.
sive materials. —To reduce the risk of damage, do notpol-
— Damage to the protective layer on the ish decorative decals that have a matte or
rims, such as stone chips or scratches, printed finish.
mustbe repaired immediately. — Due to the risk of damage, do not use an
— Cameralenses ice scraper to remove snow and ice on win-
— Never use warm or hot water to remove dowswith decorative decals on them.
snowor ice from the cameralens. This — Displays and instrumentcluster
could cause the lens to crack. — The displays/instrument cluster and the
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials or trim surrounding them must not be
alcohol to clean the cameralens. This cleaned with dry cleaning methods be-
could cause scratches and cracks. cause they could be scratched.
— Power top — Make sure that the instrumentcluster is
— Removebird droppings immediately. switched off and has cooled off before
— Never use gasoline, spot remover, ben- cleaning it.
zene, paint thinner or other solvents to re- — Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be-
move. tween the instrument cluster and the
— Door windows trim, because that could cause damage.
— Remove snowand ice on windowsand ex- — Controls
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To re- — Makesure that no fluids enter the con-
ducethe risk of scratches, move the scra- trols, because this could cause damage.
per only in one direction and not back and — Safety belts
forth. — Do not removethe safety belts to clean
— Never remove snowor ice from door win- them.
dowsand mirrors using warm or hot water — Never clean safety belts or their compo-
because this could causecracks to form. nents with chemicals or with corrosive flu-
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rear ids or solvents and never allow sharp ob-
windowdefogger, do not apply anystick- jects to come into contact with the safety
ers on the heating wires on the inside of belts. This could cause damage to the belt
the window. webbing.
— Decorative parts and trim
366
Care and cleaning
—If there is damage to the webbing, the — Decorative decals can age due to environ-
connections, the retractors, or the buck- mental conditions, which can result in dam-
les, have them replaced by an authorized age such as brittleness. The color may fade
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- if exposed to excessive sunlight.
cility.
— Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara Taking your vehicle out
— Never treat artificial leather or Alcantara of service
with leather care products, solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or simi- If you wouldlike to take your vehicle out of serv-
lar products. ice for a longer time, contact an authorized Audi
— Have a cleaning specialist remove stub- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. They
born stains to reduce the risk of damage. will advise you of important measures, such as
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard corrosion protection, service, and storage proce-
sponges, etc. when cleaning. dures. Also follow the information about the ve-
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry hicle battery > page 335.
the seat.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
ple on clothing, can damage seatcovers.
Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
closed.
— Natural leather
— Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
—To help prevent the leather from fading,
do notleave the vehicle in direct sunlight
for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
hicle parked for long periods of time, you
should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
G) Tips
— Insects are easier to remove from paint that
has been freshly waxed.
— Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
8V2012721B)
forming.
367
Emergency assistance
rergen ISTANC Equipment

aa
Trunk escape latch 19's die
Applies to: vehicles with trunk escape latch (Sedan and Cab-
riolet)
In case of an emergency, the rearlid can be

openedfrom theinside using the trunk escape
B8V-0608
latch.
D
R
2
2
2
52
a
Fig. 280 Luggage compartment(example): vehicle toolkit,

tire mobility kit and vehicle jack* placement
Z B8V-0609
Fig. 279 Luggage compartment:Trunk escape latch
> Push the latch in the direction of the arrow un-

til the lock releases.
The trunk escape latch inside the rear lid is made

of fluorescent material to glow in the dark.
Z\WARNING
The trunk escape latch is to be used only in an
emergency.
General information
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
of a flat tire, park the vehicle on level surface.
If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful.
> Set the parking brake.
> Place the selector lever in the “P” position. Fig. 281 Luggage compartment(examples): cargo floor
> Switch the emergencyflashers on. folded up (versions 1 and 2)
> Have the passengersexit the vehicle. They

Plug-in hybrid drive*: the housing location varies
should moveto a safe place, for example be-
=> page 100.
hind a guard rail.
Vehicle tool kit, cargo floor cover and side
_Z\ WARNING panel
Applies to: vehicles with version 1
Pay attention to the steps above. Theyare for
your protection and the for the safety of other The vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit* and the
drivers. compressorare located in the luggage compart-
ment, separated in the side panels @*/@2), or un-
der the cargo floor cover (
368
> To open the side panel, turn the lock and re- Tire mobility kit
move the cover @)* / Q) > fig. 280.
> Lift the cargo floor using the plastic handle @)
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
until the cargo floor engages behind the tabs
@ in both side panels > fig. 281 (upper image). > Read and follow the important safety precau-
> Fold the cargo floor back before closing the tions in > page 368.
luggage compartment lid. >» Set the parking brake.
Vehicle tool kit and cargo floor cover > Move the selector lever into the "P" position.
Applies to: vehicles with version 2 > Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible > page 369.
The vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit* and com-
pressor® are stored in the luggage compartment
under the cargo floor cover @) > fig. 280. OE Baimeue) yaa
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Engage the plastic hook () in the luggage com-
B8K-1475
partment seal > fig. 281.
> Fold the cargo floor back before closing the
luggage compartment lid.
ZA WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with jack
Improper use of the vehicle jack can cause se-

rious personal injuries.
— Never use the screw driver hex head to tight-
Fig. 282 Tire: tire damage that cannotberepaired
en wheel bolts, since the bolts cannot attain
the necessary tightening torque if you use The tire repair is only meant for temporary use.
the hex head, potentially causing an acci- Change the damaged tire as soon as possible
dent. SA.
— The factory-supplied jack is intended only
for your vehicle model. Under no circum- If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail,
stances shouldit be used tolift heavy vehi- do not remove the object from the tire.
cles or other loads; you risk injuring your- The tire repair set is able to be used at tempera-
self. tures as low as - 4 °F (- 20 °C).
— Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised, which could cause an accident. The tire mobility kit must not be used:
— Support the vehicle securely with appropri- — if the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
ate stands if work is to be performed under- than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ © fig. 282
neath the vehicle; otherwise, there is a po- — if the rim is damaged @)
tential risk for injury. — if you drove with very low tire pressure or with-
— Never use the jack supplied with your Audi out air in the tire @)
on another vehicle, particularly on a heavier
In this case, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
one. The jack is only suitable for use on the
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
vehicle it came with.
@) Tips ZA WARNING
— Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
The vehicle jack* does not require any mainte-
8V2012721B)
be used in all situations, and that it may on-

nance.
ly be used temporarily.
369
— The tire sealant must not come in contact Repairing tires

with skin, eyes, or clothing. Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
— If tire sealant comes into contact with your

eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the af-
fected area immediately with clean water.
— Do not inhale the fumes.
— If you swallow anyofthe tire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and
drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
— Change your clothing immediatelyif it
comesinto contact with tire sealant.
— If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
— Keep the tire sealant away from children.
— In vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system*, using tire sealant can result in an
incorrect display or a system malfunction.
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized Au-
di dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
G) Tips
Fig. 284 Diagram: tire mobility kit connection
— If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You
can then peel it off like a sticker. Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
— Note the expiration date on the sealant bot- out and ready for use > page 368, Vehicle tool
tle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized kit/tire mobility kit/compressor.
cility. Plug-in hybrid drive*: the placementof the vehi-
— Radio reception can be interrupted when
cle tool kit varies > page 100.
operating the compressor*. Setting up the tire mobility kit
— Follow the legal regulations that are appli-
> Open the cover (2) on the compressor!)
cable in the country where you are operating
the vehicle.
> fig. 283.
> Removethe connector @) and pressure hose (5)
with pressure gauge from the housing.
> Install the compressor pressure hose (5) onto
the flange © oftire sealant bottle @.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the
bottom into the opening @) on the compressor
cover.
> Removethe valve cap from the faultytire.
> Install the filler hose @) on the valve ()
> fig. 284.
> Connect the plug @) > fig. 283 to a socket in
the vehicle.
D_ The compressor may look different. However, the wayit is

operatedis generally the same.
370
> Switch the ignition on. — Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-
ing fast around curves.
Inflating a tire
— The vehicle may become moredifficult to
> Move the switch > fig. 284 on the compres- control.
sor into position I. — If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on Service Facility for assistance.
the gauge.
> If that tire pressure is not reached, drive your @) For the sake of the environment
vehicle approximately 33 ft (10 m) forward or
You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
backward so that the sealant can be redistribut-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
ed inside the tire.
Service Facility for disposal.
ZA WARNING @) Tips
— Read and follow the manufacturer's safety
Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant
precautions on the compressor and in the in-
from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
structions on the bottle ofsealant.
Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
— Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not con-
Replacing wheels
tinue driving. Before changing a wheel
— If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
Observethe following precautions for your own
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. and your passenger's safety when changing a
wheel.
@ Tips > After you experience tire failure, pull the car
Do not operate the compressor for more than well away from moving traffic and try to reach
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat. level ground before you stop > A\.
Once the compressor has cooled, you can con- > All passengers should leave the car and move
tinue to use it. to a safe location (for instance, behind the
guardrail) > A\.
Completing > Engage the parking braketo prevent your vehi-
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit cle from rolling unintentionally > A\.
> Move selector lever to position P > /\.
> Affix the sticker that says “max. 50 mph (max. > If you are towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer
80 km/h)” that is provided with the tire mobili- from your vehicle.
ty kit within the driver's field of vision. > Take the jack* > page 368 and the sparetire*
> Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi- => page 377 out of the luggage compartment.
nutes and check the tire pressure.
> If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130 ZX WARNING
kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do
You or your passengers could be injured while
not continue driving.
changing a wheel if you do not follow these
ZA WARNING safety precautions:

— If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance
Pay attention to the following after repairing off the road. Turn off the engine, turn the
8V2012721B)
the tire: emergency flashers on and use other warn-

— Do notdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). ing devices to alert other motorists. >
371
— Makesure that passengers wait in a safe ZA WARNING

place away from the vehicle and well away
Always read and follow all WARNINGS and in-
from the road and traffic.
formation > A\ in Raising the vehicle on
— To help prevent the vehicle from moving
page 374 and > page 376.
suddenly and possibly slipping off the jack”,
alwaysfully set the parking brake and block
the front and back of the wheel diagonally After changing a wheel
opposite the wheel being changed. When A wheel changeis not complete without the do-
one front wheel is lifted off the ground,
ing the following.
placing the Automatic Transmission in P
(Park) will not prevent the vehicle from mov- > Alwaysstore the vehicle tool kit, the jack* and
ing. the replaced tire in the luggage compartment
— Before you change a wheel, be sure the => page 63.
ground is level and firm. If necessary, use a > Check the tire pressure on the spare wheel im-
sturdy board under the jack*. mediately after mounting it.
— Alwaysstore the vehicle tool kit, the jack* > As soon as possible, have the tightening tor-
and the replacedtire in the luggage com- queson all wheel bolts checked with a torque
partment > page 63. wrench. The correct tightening torque is
90 ft lb (120 Nm).
G) Tips > Have the flat tire replaced as soon as possible.
Obeyall laws.
(i) Tips
Changing a wheel — If you notice that the wheel bolts are cor-
roded and difficult to turn while changing a
When you changea wheel, follow the sequence tire, they should be replaced before you
described below step-by-step and in exactly that check the tightening torque.
order. — Drive at reduced speed until you have the
tightening torques checked.
1. Remove the decorative wheel cover*. For
moredetails see also > page 372, Decorative — After changing a wheel, the tire pressure in
wheelcovers or > page 373, Wheels with all four tires must be checked/corrected and
wheelbolt caps. the tire pressure monitoring indicator must
2. Loosen the wheel bolts > page 373. be stored in the MMI & page 358.
3. Locate the proper mounting point for the
jack* and align the jack* below that point eye - LMRU -11LE
=> page 374. Applies to: vehicles with decorative wheel covers
4. Raise the car with the jack* > page 374. The decorative wheel covers must be removed
Removethe wheel with the flat tire and then
wa
first to access the wheel bolts.

install the spare > page 375.
[841-1521
6. Tighten all wheel bolts lightly.

Lower the vehicle with the jack*.
=
8. Use the wheel bolt wrench and firmly tighten

all wheel bolts > page 373.
9. Replace the decorative wheel cover*.
Fig. 285 Changing a wheel: Removing the wheel cover >
372
Removing Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts

> Insert the hook (provided with the vehicle tool The wheelbolts must be loosened before raising
kit) in the hole in the wheel hub cover. the vehicle.
> Pull off the decorative wheel cover > fig. 285.
| B8K-1481
Wheels with wheel bolt caps
UZ
Applies to: vehicles with wheel bolts with caps
The caps must be removedfirst from the wheel

bolts before the bolts can be unscrewed.
B4L-1337
ie
Fig. 287 Changing a wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
Loosening
> Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as
far as it will go.
& > Take tight hold of the end of the wrench handle
and turn the wheel bolts counter-clockwise
Fig. 286 Changing a wheel: removing the wheelbolt caps
about one single turn in the direction of arrow
Removing > fig. 287.
> Push the plastic clip (provided with the vehicle Tightening
tool kit) over the wheel bolt cap until the inner
retainers on the clip align with the edge of the > Slide the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as
cover. far as it will go.
> Removethe cap with the plastic clip (vehicle > Take tight hold of the end of the wrench handle
tool kit) > fig. 286. and turn each wheel bolt clockwise until it is
seated.
Refitting
> Place the caps over the wheel bolts and push ZA WARNING
them back on. — Do not use force or hurry when changing a
wheel - you can cause the vehicleto slip off
The caps are to protect and keep the wheel bolts
the jack* and cause serious personal injuries.
clean.
— Do not loosen the wheel bolts more than
one turn before you raise the vehicle with
the jack*. - You risk an injury.
(i) Tips
— Never use the hexagonal socket in the han-
dle of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten
the wheel bolts.
— If a wheel bolt is very tight, you mayfind it
easier to loosen by carefully pushing down
on the end of the wheel bolt wrench with
8V2012721B)
one foot only. As you do so, hold on to the
373
car to keep your balance and take care not sill and the movable base lies flat on the
to slip. ground. The base mustbe vertical under the
lifting point @).
Rete meat mlacs > Wind the jack up further until the flat tire
Applies to: vehicles with jack comesoff the ground > A\.
The vehicle must belifted with the jackfirst be- Position the vehicle jack only under the designat-
fore the wheel can be removed. ed lifting points on the sill > fig. 288. Thereis ex-
©
actly one location for each wheel. The jack must
D
a)
s not be positioned at any other location >A>©.
>
o
oO An unstable surface under the jack can cause the
vehicle to slip off the jack. Always provide a firm
base for the jack on the ground. If necessary
place a sturdy board or similar support under the
jack. On hard, slippery surfaces (such as tiles)
use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack
from slipping > A\.
ZA WARNING
— You or your passengers could be injured
while changing a wheel if you do not follow
these safety precautions:
— Position the vehicle jack only at the desig-
nated lifting points and align the jack.
Otherwise, the vehicle jack could slip and
cause an injuryif it does not have suffi-
cient hold on the vehicle.
— A soft or unstable surface under the jack
Fig. 289 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack
maycausethe vehicle toslip off the jack.
> Engage the parking braketo prevent your vehi- Alwaysprovide a firm base for the jack on
cle from rolling unintentionally. the ground. If necessary, use a sturdy
> Movethe selector lever to position P. board under the jack.
>» Find the marking (imprint) on the sill that is — On hard, slippery surface (such as tiles)
nearest the wheel thatwill be changed use a rubber mator similar to prevent the
> fig. 288. Behind the marking, there is a Lift- jack from slipping.
ing point on the sill for the vehicle jack. — Onlyraise your vehicle with the vehicle
> Vehicles with a sill: Note the position ofthe sill jack provided by the factory. If you use a
when positioning the vehicle jack > fig. 289. vehicle jack for another vehicle, your vehi-
» Place the vehicle jack (vehicle tool kit) on a firm cle can slide and cause injury.
surface. Use a flat, stable support if necessary. — Changes in load can affect the height of
On a slippery surface such as tile, you should the vehicle.
use a non-slip pad (such as a rubber mat) > /A\. — Never start the engine when the vehicleis
> Turn the vehicle jack located under the lifting raised, which could cause an accident.
point on the sill to raise the jack until its arm @ — Support the vehicle securely with appro-
> fig. 289 is located under the designated plas- priate stands if work is to be performed
tic mount > A\, > ©. underneath the vehicle; otherwise, thereis
> Align the jack so thatits arm @) © fig. 289 en- a potential risk for injury.
gagesin the designated lifting point in the door
374
— To help prevent injury to yourself and your After you have loosened all wheel bolts and
passengers: raised the vehicle off the ground, remove and re-
— Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure place the wheel as follows:
the jack is securely engaged. Removing the wheel
— Passengers must not remain in the vehicle
> Use the hexagonal socketin the screwdriver
when it is jacked up.
handle to completely remove the topmost
— Make sure that passengerswait in a safe
wheel bolt and setit aside on a clean surface
place away from the vehicle and well away
> fig. 290.
from the road and traffic.
> Screw the threaded end ofthe alignmentpin
— Makesurejack position is correct, adjust
from the tool kit hand-tight into the empty bolt
as necessary and then continue toraise
hole > fig. 291.
the jack.
> Then removethe other wheel bolts as described
above.
@) Note
> Take off the wheel leaving the alignment pin in
Do notLift the vehicle by the sill. Position the the bolt hole >@.
vehicle jack only at the designated lifting
points on the sill. Otherwise, your vehicle will Putting on the compact spare wheel
be damaged. > Lift the spare wheel and carefully slide it over
the alignment pin to guide it in place >@.
Taking the wheel off/installing the spare > Use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver
handle to screw in and tighten all wheel bolts
Follow these instructions step-by-step for chang-
slightly.
ing the wheel.
> Removethe alignment pin and insert and tight-
@
& en the remaining wheel bolt slightly like the
+
“ rest.
0
oO > Turn the jack handle counter-clockwise to lower
the vehicle until the jack* is fully released.
> Use the wheel bolt wrench to tighten all wheel
bolts firmly > page 373. Tighten them cross-
wise, from one bolt to the (approximately) op-
posite one, to keep the wheel centered.
Fig. 290 Changing a wheel: using the screwdriver handle @) Note

(with the blade removed) to turn the bolts When removing or installing the wheel, the
nS rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the
R
+
“ rotor. Work carefully and have a second per-
oO
oO
son help you.
@) Tips
Never use the hexagonal socketin the handle
of the screwdriver to loosen or tighten the
wheel bolts.
— Pull the reversible blade from the screwdriv-
Fig. 291 Changing a wheel: alignmentpin inside the top er before you use the hexagonal socketin
8V2012721B)
hole the handle to turn the wheel bolts.
375
— When mounting tires with unidirectional sible by your authorized Audi dealer or a
tread design makesure the tread pattern is qualified service station.
pointed the right way > page 376. — With steel and alloy wheel rims, the wheel
— The wheel bolts should be clean and easy to bolts are correctly tightened at a torque of
turn. Check for dirt and corrosion on the 90 ft lbs (120 Nm).
mating surfaces of both the wheel and the — If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded
hub. Removeall dirt from these surfaces be- and difficult to turn while changing a tire,
fore remounting the wheel. they should be replaced before you check the
tightening torque.
Tires with unidirectional tread design — Replace the flat tire with a new one and have
it installed on your vehicle as soon as possi-
Tires with unidirectional tread design must be
ble. Remountthe wheel cover.
mountedwith their tread pattern pointed in the
right direction. Until then, drive with extra care and at reduced
speeds.
Using a sparetire with a tread pattern
intendedfor use in a specific direction ZA WARNING
When using a sparetire with a tread pattern in- — If you are going to equip your vehicle with
tended for usein a specific direction, please note tires or rims which differ from those which
the following: were factory installed, then be sure to read
— The direction of rotation is marked by an arrow the information > page 346.
on the side ofthe tire. — Always makesure the damaged wheel or
— If the sparetire has to be installed in the incor- even a flat tire and the jack* and tool kit are
rect direction, use the sparetire only tempora- properly secured in the luggage compart-
rily since the tire will not be able to achieveits ment and are notloose in the passenger
compartment.
optimum performance characteristics with re-
gard to aquaplaning, noise and wear. —Inan accident or sudden maneuver they
— We recommend that you pay particular atten- could fly forward, injuring anyone in the ve-
tion to this fact during wet weather and that hicle.
you adjust your speed to match road condi- — Always store damaged wheel, jack* and
tions. tools securely in the luggage compartment.
Otherwise, in an accident or sudden maneu-
— Replace the flat tire with a new one and haveit
installed on your vehicle as soon as possible to ver they could fly forward, causing injury to
restore the handling advantagesof a unidirec- passengersin the vehicle.
tional tire.
Notes on wheel changing
Please read the information > page 346 if you

are going to use sparetire which is different
from the tires on your vehicle.
After you change tire:
— Check the tire pressure on the spare immedi-

ately after installation.
— Have the wheel bolt tightening torque
checked with a torque wrench as soon as pos-
376
Sparetire Removing the sparetire

General information
> Lift up the cargo floor with the plastic handle
Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (compact
sparetire) until the cargo floor is clamped behind the tabs
on both side panels @ © fig. 292.
S
6 >» Applies to: vehicles with subwoofer in the spare
SN
2
2 wheel well: Remove the subwoofer*. Check
%
E}
which subwoofer is installed based on the con-
nector: > page 378.
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
moveit.
> Removethe sparetire.
Removing the sparetire

> Lift the cargo floor up using the plastic handle.

> Hang the plastic hook on the luggage compart-
ment weather strip @) 9 fig. 292.
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
moveit.
> Removethe sparetire.
Snowchains
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on
Fig. 292 Luggage compartment: cargofloor folded up the compactsparetire is not permitted.
(versions 1 and 2)
If you haveto drive with snow chains and a front
tire fails, mount the sparetire in place of a rear
BFV-0231
tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that

you removed, and install that in place of the
front tire that failed.
Z\ WARNING
— After installing a sparetire, the tire pressure
mustbe checked as soon as possible. The
tire pressure is available on > page 350,
Fig. 293 Spare tire (example)
fig. 278
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
The spare tire > fig. 293 is intended for short-
with a compactsparetire. Driving faster
term useonly. Have the damaged tire checked
than that increasesthe risk of an accident.
and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi
—To reducethe risk of an accident, avoid hard
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
acceleration or braking and driving fast
as possible.
around curves with the compactsparetire.
There are some restrictions on the use of the —To reducethe risk of an accident, never drive
compactsparetire. The compactsparetire has with more than one compactsparetire.
been designed specifically for your type of vehi- — Normal summer or winter tires must not be
8V2012721B)
cle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from an- mounted on the compact spare wheel rim.
other type of vehicle.
377
Removing the subwoofer > Insert the connector that was removed.
Applies to: vehicles with subwoofer in the spare wheel well > Applies to: vehicles with subwoofer (version 2):
Slide the lock @ back in the direction of the
The subwoofer must be removed before the
subwoofer.
spare wheel* can be removed.
» Secure the subwoofer with the bolt.
ny
|
> Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
S|
>
&
.
@ Tips
The subwoofer can also be mounted when the
sparetire is not in the spare wheel well.
Fig. 295 Sparetire well: subwoofer (version 2)
Removing the subwoofer (version 1)

> Lift up the cargo floor > page 377,fig. 292.
> Press the connector tabs @) > fig. 294 togeth-
er.
> Removethe connector (2) and set the discon-
nected cable aside.
> Removethebolt @).
> Carefully remove the subwoofer.
Removing the subwoofer (version 2)

> Lift up the cargo floor > page 377, fig. 292.
> Pull the lock (@) 9 fig. 295 toward the cable.
> Press the locking tab (2) down.
> Removethe connector (3) and set the removed
cable aside.
> Removethebolt @).
> Carefully remove the subwoofer.
Installing the subwoofer

> Carefully place the subwoofer in the rim well.
The word “FRONT” on the subwoofer must face
forward.
378
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses and bulbs Fuse color identification
Color Current rating

Fuses
in amps
Cees ure mate Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.
Red 10
Blue TS
Yellow 20
White or transparent [25
Green 30
Orange 40
ZA\ WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.
This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem and fire.
(C!) Note
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you
Fig. 297 Left side of the engine compartment: fuse cover
haveinstalled it, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
have burned through.
ty.
The fuses are located behind a cover in the steer-
ing column area > fig. 296 or under a cover on @) Tips
the left side of the engine compartment — The following table doesnotlist fuse loca-
> fig. 297. tions that are not used.
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment — Some of the equipment listed in the follow-
off. ing tables applies only to certain model ver-
> Check the following table to see which fuse be- sions or certain optional equipment.
longs to the equipment > page 380.
> Removethe cover.
> Removethe plastic clip from the fuse panel
cover in the engine compartment > fig. 297.
» Removethe fuse using the plastic clamp.
> Replace the burned fuse with a fuse that has
the same current rating.
> Reinsert the cover.
8V2012721B)
379
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse assignment - interior No.| Equipment

= Electronic steering column lock, conven-
8 F15 |.
§ ience access control module
3 F16/|TV tuner, telephone antenna
‘F2 RS |
F17 Instrument cluster
ore eran | aw. F18 Rearview camera
Aeaeee eee F19 | Vehicle tracking, parallel parking assist
F20 Engine components
a WEEParSEARS F21 Steering column, steering wheel heating
switch module
Prarar -
LF3205330634) E35) £36£37) £23 Panoramic glass roof/power top control
module, power top latch
8 Dl faag Rightvehicle electrical system control
F24 module
F25 Driver's side front/rear power windows
F26 Seat heating
F27 Interior lights
F28 Power top control module
Fig. 298 Vehicle interior: fuse assignment F29 | Interior lights
Nallequlenene F30 Diagnostic connector

Ed |Seatadjastment £32 Front camera, parking system, ACC sensor,
hvdrauli lane change assist
F3 |P ~— t ‘op hydraulic — ; F33 | Airbag
Infotai t t Infotai t
F4 Hrotainment controt panel, snrorainmen Hold assist button, interior sound, back-up
components 5 .
£34 light switch, temperature sensor, neck
FS Gateway heating and sockets, power top operation
56 Selector lever (automatic transmission), button
steering lock Air quality sensor, automatic dimming
Air conditioning/heating controls, auxiliary F35 rearview mirror, diagnostic connector, cen-
F7 |heating, rear window defogger,tire pres- ter console power supply
sure monitor F36 Right headlight (LED, Matrix LED)
Electromechanical parking brake switch, F37 Left headlight (LED, Matrix LED)
light switch, rain/light ti-theft
Ig NESWIER tan '9 PENG! AREEEHS F38 High-voltage battery
F8 |alarm system, diagnostic connector, roof - -
module, emergencycall system, headlight F39 Passenger's side front/rear power windows
range control F40 Sockets
F9 Steering column switch module F41 | Passenger's side safety belt tensioner
F10 Infotainment system display F42 Central locking area
Fil Left vehicle electrical system control mod- F43 Sound-amplifier
ule F44 All wheel drive
F12 Infotainment components F45 | Driver's side seat adjustment
F13 Driver's side safety belt tensioner, airbag F47 | Rear window wiper
F14 Heating and A/C system blower control F48 Outer sound actuator
380
Fuses and bulbs
No.| Equipment No. Equipment

F49 Clutch sensor, engine start, high-voltage F11 |Auxiliary heater heating element 2, en-
battery, power electronics gine components
F52 Level control system control module F12 Auxiliary heater heating element 3, vac-
F53 Rear window defogger uum pump
F13 |T ission fluid
The power seats* are protected via circuit break- ———EEeee
ers that automatically switch on after a few sec- F15 [Horn
onds after the overload has been reduced. Powerandcontrolelectronics, engine
F16 |components,ignition coil, options mod-
Fuse assignment - engine compartment ule
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC), en-
© F17 |.
= gine control module
8 518 Terminal 30 (voltage reference), battery
monitoring
F19 Windshield wipers
F20 Anti-theft alarm system
F21 Automatic transmission
Terminal 50 diagnosis, engine control
F22
module
F23 Engine start
Auxiliary heater heating element 1, brake
F24
booster
F31 Vacuum pump, water pump,high pres-
sure pump, fuel injectors
F33 Brake pressure reservoir, recuperation
F34 Brake booster
F35 Climate control system
Fig. 299 Engine compartment: fuse assignment F36 Left front headlamp
F37 Parking heater
No. Equipment F38 Right front headlamp
Fl Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
F2_ Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) Bulbs
F3 Engine control module
Replacing light bulbs
F4 Engine components, engine cooling
For your safety, we recommendthat you have
FS Engine components, CNG cut-off valve
your authorized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for
Fé Brake light switch you.
Engine components, water pumps, tank
F7 It is becoming increasingly more and morediffi-
system
cult to replace vehicle light bulbs since in many
F8 Heat oxygen sensor
cases, other parts of the car mustfirst be re-
FQ Engine components, exhaust door, glow moved beforeyou are able to get to the bulb.
8V2012721B)
time control module This applies especially to the light bulbs in the >
F10 Fuel control module, fuel pump
381
Fuses and bulbs
front of your car which you can only reach ment is a hazardous area to work in > A\ in
through the engine compartment. General information on page 325.
—It is best to ask your authorized Audi dealer
Sheet metal and bulb holders can have sharp
whenever you wantto change a bulb.
edges that can cause serious cuts, parts must be
correctly taken apart and then properly put back
together to help prevent breakage of parts and
long term damage from water that can enter
housings that have not been properlyresealed.
For your safety, we recommend that you have

your authorized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for
you, since your dealer has the proper tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise.
Gas discharge lamps(Xenon lights)
Due to the high electrical voltage, have the bulbs

replaced by a qualified technician. Headlights
with Xenon light are identified by the high volt-
age sticker.
LED headlights*
LED headlights require no maintenance. Please

contact your authorized Audi dealer if a bulb
needs to be replaced.
ZX WARNING
Changing Xenon lamps without the necessary
equipment can causeserious personal injury.
— Bulbs are pressurized and can explode when
being changed. Potential risk of injury!
— On vehicles equipped with gas discharge
bulbs (Xenon light) life-threatening injuries
can result from improper handling of the
high-voltage portions of such lamps!
— Only your authorized Audi dealer or quali-
fied workshop should change the bulbsin
gas discharge lamps. There are parts with
sharp edges on the openings and on the
bulb holders that can causeserious cuts. If
you are uncertain about what to do, have the
work performed by an authorized Audi deal-
er or qualified workshop. Serious personal
injury may result from improperly per-
formed work.
@) Tips
— If you still prefer to replace the light bulbs
yourself, be aware that the engine compart-
382
Emergencysituations
Emergencysituations tery is frozen, it must be thawed before con-

necting the jump start cables. If it is not,
General the risk of an explosion and chemical burns
This chapter is intended for trained emergency increases. After jump starting the vehicle,
crews and working personnel whohave the nec- drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
essary tools and equipmentto perform these ized Audi Service Facility immediately to
operations. have the vehicle battery checked.
— Read the warnings when working in the en-
gine compartment > page 325.
Starting by pushing or
— Handling the jump start cables incorrectly
towing maycause the vehicle battery to explode
and lead to serious injuries.
@) Note — Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid
Vehicles with an automatic transmission can- drive: You must not give a jump start with
not be started by pushing or towing. your vehicle. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system in your ve-
Jump starting hicle > page 100.
— Applies to: vehicles with battery in the en-
gine compartment: To reducethe risk of
If needed, the engine can be jumpstarted by an- chemical burns, do not bend over the vehicle
other vehicle battery. battery.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: The @) Note

connection points for the jump start cable are
Jump start cables can cause considerable
different > page 100.
damage to the vehicle electrical system if
If the engine does not start because the vehicle they are connected incorrectly.
battery is drained, you can jump start your vehi-
cle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are G) Tips
needed to do this. — There must be no contact between the vehi-
cles, or else voltage could flow when con-
Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal
voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle necting the positive terminal and drain the
battery that is giving power mustnot be less vehicle battery of the vehicle providing the
than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery. jump start.
— The drained vehicle battery must be con-
Jump start cable nected correctly to the electrical system.
Only use a jump start cable with a large enough — Switch off electrical equipmentthat is not
diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifica- needed.
tions.
Only use a jump start cable with insulated termi-

nal clamps.
Positive cable - usually red.
Negative cable - usually black.
ZA WARNING
8V2012721B)
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-

tures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-
383
Emergencysituations
A3 models: starting the engine 8. Clamp the other end of the black jump start
cable only to the ground point (@) on your ve-
Both jump start cables must be connectedin the
hicle >@.
correctorder.
9. Route the jump start cables so they cannot
aI8 get caught in the moving parts in the engine
5|
a= compartment.
Starting the engine

10. First start the engine in the vehicle giving the
charge and let it run at idle.
11. Now start the engine in the vehicle with the
drained vehicle battery and wait two to three
minutes until it “runs smoothly”.
12. If the engine does notstart, stop the starting
Fig. 300 Engine compartment: connecting the jump start
cable (diagram) procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat
it after approximately 30 seconds.
Plug-in hybrid drive*: the connection points for 13. In the vehicle that is being jump started,
the jump start cables vary > page 100. switch the heater fan and rear window de-
froster on to reduce any voltage peaks that
The vehicle battery is located on the left front
may occur when disconnecting the jumper ca-
side of the engine compartment. Open the cover
bles. The headlights must be switched off.
to access the positive terminal of the vehicle bat-
14. While the engines are running, remove the
tery. The procedure for connecting jump start ca-
cables in reverse order from the way they
bles that is described next is designed to help
wereinstalled, as described in > page 384.
jump start your vehicle.
Makesure the cables do not get caught in
Follow the information about the vehicle battery moving engine components.
=> page 335. 15. Fold the cover back on the battery correctly.
16. Switch the heater fan and rear window de-
Preparations
froster off.
1. Read the following carefully > page 383,
Preparation. ZAWARNING
2. Set the parking brake and place the selector
— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the
lever in the "P" position.
terminal clamps. The cable mustalso not
3. Turn the ignition and electrical equipment off
come into contact with vehicle components
in both vehicles.
that conduct electricity when it is connected
Connecting/disconnecting the jump start to the positive terminal. This can cause a
cable short circuit.
— The plugs on the battery cells must not be
4. Fold the battery cover upward.
opened.
5. Clamp the end of the red jump start cable to
— Keep ignition sources (such as open flames,
the positive terminal @ © fig. 300 on your
vehicle >(@) in Preparation on page 383. burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi-
cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo-
6. Clamp the other end of the red jump start ca-
sion.
ble to the positive terminal @) on the vehicle
battery providing the current. — Route the jump start cables so they cannot
7. Clamp the black end of the jump start cable get caught in the moving parts in the other
preferably to the ground point, or to the vehicle's engine compartment.
negative terminal of the vehicle battery @)
on the vehicle providing the current.
384
Emergencysituations
@) Note Jump start points are located on the left side of

the engine compartment instead of the vehicle
Do not use the negative terminal on the vehi- battery fig. 301. Open the cap on the positive
Se eeecy terminal. The procedure for connecting jump

could occur in the vehicleelectrical system. start cables that is described nextis designed to
— Please note that the connecting process de- help jump start your vehicle.
scribed below for the jump start cablesis in-
tended for when your vehicle is being jump Follow the information about the vehicle battery
started. If you are jump starting another ve- => page 335.
hicle, do not connect the negative cable to Preparations
the negative terminal (-) on the drained ve-
hicle battery, but rather connect it to a large 1. Read the following carefully > page 383,
Preparation.
metal componentthat is bolted securely to
the engine block, or to the engine block it- 2. Set the
: parking brake
_ and place the selector
self. If the vehicle battery in the vehicle be- lever in the "P" position.
ing jump started is not ventedto the out- 3. Turn the ignition and electrical equipment off
side, there is a risk of explosion due to hy- in both vehicles.
drogen gas. Connecting/disconnecting the jump start
- cable
@ Tips 4. Open the cover on the positive terminal.
Makesure that the connected positive termi- 5 Clamp the end of the red jump start cable to
nal clamps havesufficient contact with metal. the positive terminal @ > page 384,fig. 300
on your vehicle =>@) in Preparation on
page 383.
6. Clamp the other end of the red jump start ca-
Both jump start cables must be connectedin the
ble to the positive terminal (2) on the vehicle
correctorder.
battery providing the current.
Q 7. Clamp the black end of the jump start cable
N
&
2] preferably to the ground point,or to the
3
&
EJ
negative terminal of the vehicle battery @)
on the vehicle providing the current.
8. Clamp the other end of the black jump start
cable onlyto the ground point() on your ve-
hicle.
9. Route the jump start cables so they cannot
get caught in the moving parts in the engine
Fig. 301 Engine compartment: connectorsfor a charger compartment.
and jump start cables
Starting the engine
2g
8 10. First start the engine in the vehicle giving the
qe|
charge and let it run at idle.
11. Now start the engine in the vehicle with the
drained vehicle battery and wait two to three
minutes until it “runs smoothly”.
12. If the engine does notstart, stop the starting
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat
8V2012721B)
it after approximately 30 seconds. >
Fig. 302 Connecting the jump start cable (diagram)
385
Emergencysituations
13. In the vehicle that is being jump started,

G) Tips
switch the heater fan and rear window de-
froster on to reduce any voltage peaks that Makesure that the connected jump start ca-
may occur when disconnecting the jumper cables have sufficient contact with metal.
bles. The headlights must be switched off.
14. While the engines are running, remove the Towing with a tow truck
cablesin reverse order from the way they
General hints
wereinstalled, as described in > page 384.
Makesure the cables do not get caught in Your Audi requires special handling for towing.
moving engine components.
15. Close the cap on the positive terminal. The following information is to be used by com-
16. Switch the heater fan and rear window de- mercial tow truck operators who know howto op-
froster off. erate their equipmentsafely.
— Never tow your Audi. Towing will cause dam-

ZA WARNING age to the engine and transmission.
— Never connect the jump start cable directly — Never wrap the safety chains or winch cables
to your vehicle battery. Only use the connec- aroundthe brakelines.
tions in the engine compartment. — To prevent unnecessary damage,your Audi
— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the mustbe transported with a flatbed truck.
terminal clamps. The cable must also not — To load the vehicle on to the flatbed, use the
come into contact with vehicle components towing loop found in the vehicle tools and at-
that conduct electricity when it is connected tach to the front or rear anchorage > page 386
to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This and > page 387.
can cause a shortcircuit.
— The plugs on the battery cells must not be ZA WARNING
opened. A vehicle being towed is not safe for passen-
— Keep ignition sources (such as open flames, gers. Never allow anyone toride in a vehicle
burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi- being towed, for any reason.
cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo-
sion. Front towing loop
— Route the jump start cables so they cannot
get caught in the moving parts in the other 2
¢
vehicle's engine compartment. S
i
a
@) Note
Please note that the connecting processprevi-
ously described for the jump start cables is in-
tended for when your vehicle is being jump
started. If you are jump starting another vehi-
cle, connect the negative cable (-) to a large
Fig. 303 Rightside of front bumper:installing the towing
metal component thatis bolted securely to
loop
the engine block, or to the engine block itself.
If the vehicle battery in the vehicle being The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-
jump started is not vented to the outside, cated behind a cover on the right side of the front
there is a risk of explosion due to hydrogen bumper.
gas.
» Removethe towing loop from the vehicle tool
kit > page 368.
386
Emergencysituations
> Press inward on the upper left area of the cap

with brief, strong pressure to removeit from
ZXWARNING
the bumper & fig. 303. If the towing loop is not tightened until it
> Insert the towing loop in the threaded opening stops when installing, the threads may be
until it stops, and then tighten it with the pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
wheel wrench. in an accident.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit. eee aM Roe Mic leltema 4
Z\ WARNING
B8V-0402
If the towing loop is not tightened until it
stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
in an accident.
Rear towing loop
Fig. 305 Vehicle on flatbed truck (example)

BFV-03)
Front hook up
> Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car
carrier ramp.
» Attach the winch hook to the front towline eye
previously installed.
Rear hook up
Fig. 304 Rightside of rear bumper: installing the towing
loop > Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car
carrier ramp.
The towing loop threaded opening is located in > Attach the winch hook to the rear towline eye
the right of the rear bumper cover under a cover. previously installed.
> Removethe towing loop from the vehicle tool

G) Tips
kit > page 368.
> To removethe cap from the bumper, press in on Check carefully to make sure the hook-up is
the upperarea of the cap withbrief, strong secure before moving the car up the flatbed
pressure and lift it up from the lower area truck ramp.
> fig. 304.
> Tighten the towing loop in the threaded open-
ing until it stops and then tighten it with a
wheel wrench.
> After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cover

can vary.
8V2012721B)
387
Emergencysituations
Raising the vehicle Lifting with vehicle jack

Refer to > page 374.
Lifting with workshop hoist and with floor
jack
ZX WARNING
The vehicle may only belifted at the lifting
—To reduce the risk of serious injury and vehi-
pointsillustrated. cle damage.
2
Ss — Alwayslift the vehicle only at the special
x
&
= workshop hoist and floor jack lift pointsil-
e
oO
lustrated > fig. 306 and > fig. 307.
— Failure tolift the vehicle at these points
could cause the vehicle totilt or fall from a
lift if there is a change in vehicle weight
distribution and balance. This might hap-
pen, for example, when heavy components
such as the engine block or transmission
Fig. 306 Frontlifting point (example) are removed.
— When removing heavy componentslike
ex BSV-0404
these, anchor vehicle to hoist or add corre-

sponding weights to maintain the center of
gravity. Otherwise, the vehicle mighttilt or
slip off the hoist, causing serious personal
injury.
@) Note
— Be awareofthe following points before Lift-
ing the vehicle:
Fig. 307 Rear lifting point (example)
— Thevehicle should never belifted or
> Read and heed WARNING > A\. jacked up from underneath the engineoil
> Locatelifting points > fig. 306 and © fig. 307. pan, the transmission housing, the front
> Adjustlifting arms of workshop hoist or floor or rear axle or the body side members.
jack to match vehiclelifting points. This could lead to serious damage.
> Insert a rubber pad between the floor jack/ — To avoid damage to the underbodyor
workshop hoist and the Lifting points. chassis frame, a rubber pad mustbein-
serted betweenthefloor jack and thelift
If you mustlift your vehicle with a floor jack to points.
workunderneath, be sure the vehicle is safely
— Before driving over a workshophoist,
supported on stands intendedfor this purpose.
check that the vehicle weight does not
Frontlifting point exceed the permissible lifting capacity of
the hoist.
The lifting point is located on the floor pan rein-
— Before driving over a workshophoist, en-
forcement about at the same level as the jack
sure thatthereis sufficient clearance be-
mounting point > fig. 306. Do notlift the vehi-
tween thehoist and low partsofthe ve-
cle at the vertical sill reinforcement.
hicle.
Rear lifting point
The lifting point is located on the vertical rein-
forcement of the lower sill for the on-board jack
> fig. 307.
388
Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and — Replacement parts may not always be availa-

ble.
technical changes
— Navigation systems for vehicles built for the
Warranty U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in
Europe, and may not work in other countries.
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
— New Vehicle Limited Warranty () Note

— Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle re-
— Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal sulting from these country-specific differen-
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, ces.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
— Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Maintenance, repairs,
Limited Warranty and technical modifi-
— Applies to: USA models: California Emissions
cations
Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions De-
fects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Note the safety precautions > page 325, General
Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects information and > page 374, Raising the vehicle.
Warranty, California Emissions Performance
Warranty General information
You can find detailed information in your Warran- Due to the increasing complexity of technologyin
these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
ty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California
Emissions Booklet*. mental standards that apply, you can only per-
form a very limited amount of repairs and modifi-
cations to the vehicle yourself.
Audi Literature Shop
Proof of maintenance work maybe required to
Service information is made available as soon as submit a claim within the warranty period.
possible after a model is introduced and can be
ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http:// Werecommend that you have your vehicle serv-
literature.audiusa.com iced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts
and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This
Driving in other
helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality,
countries performance, and safety are not impaired.
Government regulations in the United States and Maintenance and repairs
Canada require motor vehicles to comply with
Your vehicle was designed to help keep mainte-
emissions regulations and safety standards.
nance requirements to a minimum. Some regular
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
U.S. and Canadian marketsare different from ve- maintenanceis required to help ensure that your
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable
hicles produced for other countries.
manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the nance Booklet for more detailed information
United States or Canada, it is possible that: about vehicle maintenance.
— Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rat- When operating the vehicle under more extreme
ing. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage. operating conditions, for example when outside
— Proper maintenance and repair work may not temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
8V2012721B)
be possible because special service equipment, ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
tools, or measuring devices needed for your ve- formed between the specified intervals.
hicle may notbe available.
389
Usually maintenance and repair work requires carry out the job and havethe correct tech-
special tools, measuring devices, and other nical information and the correct tools.
equipment that is available to trained vehicle — If you are uncertain about what to do, have
technicians in order to help ensure that your vehi- the work performed by an authorized Audi
cle and all of its systems operate correctly, relia- dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
bly, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
incorrectly can impair the operation and reliabili- sonal injury may result from improperly per-
ty of your vehicle and may void one or more of formed work.
your vehicle's warranties.
Technical Modifications C) Note

— Maintenance procedures,repairs or techni-
Interference with electronic components,their
cal modifications that are performed incor-
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause
rectly can cause damage to the vehicle, such
malfunctions. Because of the way electronic com-
as corrosion.
ponentsare interconnected, such malfunctions
— If emergency repairs must be performed,
can also impair systems that are notdirectly in-
take your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
volved. This means that you risk both a substan-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
tial reduction in the operational safety of your ve-
as possible.
hicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
— Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle
Some convenience functions, such as the conven- resulting from failure to comply with these
ience turn signal function, individual door open- guidelines.
ing function, and displays, can be reprogrammed
using special workshop equipment. If functions @) For the sake of the environment
are reprogrammed, the information and descrip-
— Regular maintenancecan help protect the
tions about these functions in this Owner's Man-
environment.
ual may no longer apply to the changed func-
— Technical modifications to the vehicle can
tions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi
have a negative impact on fuel consumption
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform
and vehicle emissions.
and verify any reprogramming procedures.
ZA\ WARNING
Undeployed airbag modules and pretension-
Maintenance procedures, repairs, or technical
ers are classified as Perchlorate Material -
modifications that are performed incorrectly
special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.
increase the risk of an accident and can lead
gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. When the
to serious injuries.
vehicle or parts of the restraint system includ-
ing airbag modules and safety belts with pre-
ZA\ WARNING tensioners are scrapped, all applicable laws
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle and regulations must be observed. Your au-
is a potentially dangerous area and can cause thorized Audi dealer is familiar with these re-
serious personal injury. quirements and we recommend that you have
— Always use extreme caution when doing any your dealer perform this service for you.
work in the engine compartment. Always
follow commonly accepted safety practices G) Tips
and use common sense. Never risk personal Because ofyour vehicle's aluminum body de-
injury. sign, all service and repair procedures affect-
— Never perform any work in the engine coming the body should be performed by an au-
partment unless you know exactly how to thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
390
Service Facility, who will perform the work ac- Reporting Safety Defects
cording to Audi factory specifications. Only
Audi Genuine Parts are used when Audi ex- Applicable to U.S.A.
perts perform repair or service procedures.
Failure to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Gen- If you believe that your vehicle
uine Accessories or performing repairs incor-
has a defect which could cause a
rectly may result in severe vehicle damage,
such as corrosion. crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
Accessories and parts
form the National Highway Traffic
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or author- Safety Administration (NHTSA)in
ized Audi Service Facility before purchasing ac-
cessories or replacement parts. We recommend addition to notifying
that you have your vehicle serviced by an author-
Audi of America, Inc.
ty and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine 2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive
Accessories are used.
Herndon, VA 20171
Audi does not endorse the use of products and
accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the If NHTSAreceives similar com-
productis approved by a certified testing agency
plaints, it may open an investiga-
or government agency.
tion, and if it finds that a safety
ZA WARNING defect exists in a group of vehi-
— Installing unapproved accessories or incor-
rect replacement parts can cause vehicle
cles, it may order recall and
damage and can increasethe risk of an acci- remedy campaign. However,
dent.
NHTSA cannot become involved in
— Never attach accessories, such as telephone
holders or cup holders, to the airbag covers individual problems between you,
or within the airbag deploymentzone, be- your dealer, or Audi of America,
cause this increases the risk of injury if the
airbag deploys. Inc.
— Do not use license plate bracket on the
front bumper that is different from the To contact NHTSA, you maycall
bracket installed at the factory, and do not the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
attach any additional brackets.
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-
() Note 800-424-9153); go to http://
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is re- www.safercar.gov;
quired for operating radio equipmentin the
vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromag-
netic waves can cause malfunctions in the ve-
hicle. Observe the regulations in the country
wherethe vehicle is being operated and the
8V2012721B)
instructions from the radio equipment manu-

facturer.
391
or write to: Transport Canada

Administrator NHTSA Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
1200 New Jersey Ave., tions Laboratory
S.E. West Building 80 Noel Street
Washington, DC Gatineau, QC
20590. J8Z OA1
You can also obtain other infor- For additional road safety infor-
mation about motor vehicle safe- mation, please visit the Road
ty from http://www.safercar.gov. Safety websiteat:
English:
Applicable to Canada
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
If you live in Canada and you be- motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
French:
fect that could cause a crash, in- http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
jury or death, you should immedi- securiteautomobile/menu.htm
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. Declaration of
You should also notify Audi Cana- compliance for telecom-
munications equipment
da.
and electronic systems
Canadian customers who wish to The manufacturer is notliable for radio malfunc-
report a safety-related defect to tions that are caused by unauthorized changes to
the equipment.
Transport Canada, DefectInvesti-
gations and Recalls, may either Equipment
The following equipment complies with FCC sec-
call Transport Canada toll-free at:
tion 15 and RSS-Gen:
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or — Audi adaptive cruise control*
Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottaware- — Audi side assist*
— Remote control key
gion and from other countries) — Tire pressure monitoring system*
TTY for hearing impaired:
FCC Part 15.19
1-888-675-6863 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
or contact Transport Canada by
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
mail at: interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
392
FCC Part 15.21

Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
RSS-Gen
This device complies with Industry Canada’sli-
cence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
8V2012721B)
393
Technical data
Technical data The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
Identification data @® Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission
Vehicle identification label ® Engine and transmission codes
@ Paint and interior codes
B4H-0800
© Optional equipment numbers
XXXXX XX -X-XXXX XXX XX
a
WOMEEMTnt, XXXXXXXX XX x XXXXXXKX

[Tye /TyPE Vehicle identification number (VIN)
XXX XXX
The VIN is located in the following areas:
XX XXXXXKK XX KX XK
XXX KW XXX.
— Select: the [MENU] button > Vehicle > left con-
wongenXXX XXX. XXX
WK / WX
trol button > Service & checks > Vehicle infor-
LACKNR./ INNENAUSST. yn 1 XNKK
PAINT NO./ INTERIOR mation.
M.-AUSST. / OPTIONS
— On the vehicle identification label
EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG 5RW
2EH JOZ 1LB 1AS 1BA — At the front behind the windshield*
3FC 5MU 7X1
FOA 9G3 OG7 OYH OJF
a
TL6 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZ7

1xXW 803 908 824 D2D Notes about technical data
7176 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2
3L4 4KC 3Y0 413 5D2 The values may vary based on special equipment
1SA 7GB Q1A 46Q
as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
XX. X XX. X XK. X_—XXXK uring methods.
<<<
Please note that the specifications listed in the
Fig. 308 Vehicle identification label
vehicle documentation always take precedence.
The vehicle identification label > fig. 308 is locat- G) Tips

ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo Any technical data that is missing was not
floor cover. available at the time of printing.
The vehicle identification label information can

also be found in the Warranty and Maintenance
booklet.
Vehicle data
Length (in (mm)) Width (in (mm)) Width across the Height at curb
mirrors (in (mm)) weight (in (mm))
A3 Cabriolet 174.4 (4,430) 70.5 (1,793) 77.1 (1,960) 55.4 (1,409)
A3 sedan 175.8 (4,465) 70.7 (1,796) 77.1 (1,960) 55.7 (1,416)
A3 Sportback e-tron 169.6 (4,311) 70.2 (1,785) 77.4 (1,966) 56.1 (1,426)
RS3 sedan 176.3 (4,479) 70.9 (1,802) 77.1 (1,960) 55.0 (1,397)
S3 sedan 176.1 (4,472) 70.7 (1,796) 77.1 (1,960) 54.8 (1,392)
394
Technical data
Capacities
Fuel tank, front wheel drive 13.2 gal (50.0 L)

Fuel tank, all wheel drive 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
Plug-in hybrid drive fuel tank 10.5 gal (40.0 L)
Windshield washer system 3.2 qt (3.0L)
Windshield and headlight washer system* 5.0 qt (4.7 L)
Windshield and headlight washer system*, S models 4.2 qt (4.0L)
Windshield and headlight washer system*, RS models 3.7 qtB5bD
Weights
Le
Le
|
TAMAAAUOTMA
Fig. 309 Safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The maximum permitted total weight @ of the
vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the
side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ orthe rear axle @) is listed on thesafety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the
driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permittedload is listed on the tire
pressurelabel on the driver's door pillar.
Roof load
The maximum permissible roof load is 165 lbs
(75 kg).
8V2012721B)
395
Air transports, + scsas ov veces oo cxween 3 v aesvaes ov
Alarm system
AC eee eee eee 69
refer to Anti-theft alarm system..........
A/C cooling mode............ eee eee eee ee 69
Alignment pin (tire change)..............
AcCcCeSSOri€S..... 2... cee eee eee 62,391
All-weather lights . 2.0... 0.020.000 ee sees
Active lane assist
ALL S@ASON TIRES: swseii < wswscin + aawen a a aoe ee
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 139
All wheel drive
Active rollover protection system......... 266
refer to quattro (all wheel drive)........
Retracting rollover protection.......... 266
AMI
refer to Audi music interface...........
refer to Audi adaptive cruise control..... 129.
Android Auto
Adaptive light
refer to Audi smartphone interface......
refer to Audi adaptive light.............. 48
Anti-freeze
Adjusting the additional display........... 19
Windshield washer system.............
Adjusting the air distribution............. 70
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ..........
Adjusting the sound..................0- 257
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)...............
Adjusting the temperature............... 69
Anti-theft alarm system ...........-..000-
Adjusting the vents. .............. 00 eee 71
Apple CarPlay
Advanced key refer to Audi smartphone interface......
refer to Convenience key.............--- 75
ASR
Airbags... 6 eee cece eee 276
refer to Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) .......
Airbag system. ........-.0 2 - ee eee 276, 296
Audi active lane assist’; coe. si ciius ceive’
Advanced Airbag System components.... 283
Cleaning the camera area..............
CARG ccacans « 2 eseems @ 2 esears a 2 ewan 2 meteR w © ane 291
MessageS ... 0... cece
Children... eee cee eee 303
Audi adaptive cruise control.............
Child restraints: + gaan a 2 wee a 2 mom x owe 303
Cleaning the sensor...............0005
Components(front airbags) ............ 283
Distance display, distance warning.......
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front
MESSAGES « ances « « ersnne 0 0 mesmo 6 sxenone eo: eres
PaSSCNGErSeat swews x x eeas 5 o ween se eR 277
Audi adaptive light...........0.eeeeeeee
Disposal « isu ss awed + wenn a 6 na ao © nae 291
Audi connect
Front airbags............-.. eee eee ee 281
How do the front airbags work?......... 286 refer toconnect...............4.
How manyairbags does myvehicle have?. 283 Audi connect Infotainment
How the Advanced Airbag System compo- Services overvieW........ eee cece eens
nents work together...............005 285 Audi drive select ....................00.
Important safety instructions on the knee Audi e-tron charging system
airbag systeM.... 6... eee eee eee eee 294 refer to Charging system (version 1).....
Knee airbags...........-...0--00 00 ee 292 Audi e-tron compact charging system
Monitoring « sews ¢ ¢ cams so ewes x ers wx oe 288 refer to Charging system (version 2).....
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light.......... 288 Audi magnetic ride
Repairs... 6... ee eee refer to Suspension control............
Safety instructions.............-...0- Audi MuSiGinterface ssi 6 sss es wee ev ae
Siderainbagstas » v smu 6 © esas v & onus & & neue Audi music stream
Warning/Indicator lights REFEPEO NN Flieie 2 neces © 0 scwvese wo vie
AudioFile: sescecs « o sanes +o wees +o anor & waan a
Air pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator . 357
396
Audio player Bass(SOUNG) « exces + x ssswone wo cease © x enawaue ¥ aa 257
Bluetooth audio player................ 236 Battery nccon oe mama oo enmm @ 2 amune 8 4 amine 4 0 335
Wi-Fi audio player...............00055 236 Charging........... eee eee eee eee eee 336
AUGIONTECK ccs ¢ < ceas 3 5 Hees Fe Bee zB eR 244 Winter operation.................0 ee 335
Audi phone box.... 2.0... eee eee eee eee 191 also refer to High-voltage battery........ 90
Audi presense...........0 0c eee eee eee 136 Before driving « ess: sesau: cence ees see 260
MESSAGES coms = y sees = a sees go eee 4 135, 139 Belt tensionerSixx « + wage: xs memes 2 a cea 2 oe 275
Audi side assist............ 0. eee eee eee 142 BlOWETs « masa 3 mae 4 Rae 2 face FS Soe Fe 69
Cleaning the sensors..............0005 363 Bluetooth
MessageS.... 0.0... eee eee eee eee 146 Audio player » 2ces cams se wees ce eww se 236
Rear cross-traffic assist. ............-.. 145 Connecting acellphone............... 188
Audi smartphone interface.......... 251, 256 Settings.......... 0.00.22. e eee eee 256
Audi virtual cockpit Boost... 0... eee eee eee ee 23,93
refer to Instrument cluster.............. 14 Boosterseats:. « ese a sess sa siete oo saerene 310
AUTO Boost pressure indicator................. 23:
Automatic headlights.................. 48 Brake@Siscwe ss avers ow amie 6 cosues wo aires @ @ Be 161
Climate control system ..............00. 69 Brake assist... 0... eee eee eee 159
Auto Lock (central locking system) ......... 30 Brak@ flidcis s saws 5 ¢ saws & & Hane © x eee 334
Automatic belt retractor................ 271 Electromechanical parking brake......... 80
Automatic climate control system Emergency braking function............. 80
refer to Climate control system (automat- New brake pads..............---000-- 161
IC) eee eee 68, 69 Break-in security feature...............-. 35
Automatic transmission...............005 82 Breaking in
DFiViiG/ tips: = » vox s 5 wees so eames eee 8 es 84 Newbrake pads..............--0000-- 161
Emergency mode.......ceeeecceeee eens 88 NOWARESS: 6s ecw a 6 saci 0 seoti s aI To 346
Hill descent control.................05. 86 Browser
Kick-dOWiles : 2 eews 5 2 eeu ¥ s ere 5 2 ee ys 87 refer to Media center.................. 242
Malfunctions « 5 sion 2 5 eewn ¥ o ween 2 wee = 82 BULBS: & csniss « & aciawse 0 a aunaane a apawana ew aware & « 381
Manual shifting (tiptronic mode)......... 86 Buttons
Parking lock emergency release.......... 89 Control panel (MMI).............-.0.. 165
Selector levels «2 swe ee awa vs mes oo eee 84 Multifunction steering wheel......... 17;,20
Selector lever lock... 0.0.0... cee eee eee 82 Programming (multifunction steering
Selector lever positions................. 82 wheel)... ... 0... cece eee eee eee eens 19
Shift paddles woos » ecas s x euyne a a eee a Ee 86 Switching the Infotainment system display
Automatic wipe/wash system............. 54 ON/Offies « = wives = woo so eeER ee REDS Ge HS 166
Auxiliary climate control................ 121
AUX input... 2... cece eee eee 239
Average consumption................ 21,.22
Cable (USB adapter/AUX connector cable).. 239
Average speed..........-...0--0008- 21, 22
California Proposition 65 Warning........ 326
Batteryispecifices « s saves ss meme © 0 ane « « 335
B Galblist's cos = ¢ sews ¢ © aewe ¥ 9 pews oy ewe 3 193
BACK button... 0.0... . cee eee eee 165 GalboOptionsisa. + = ween se wees se ae ee Bee 200
BagshOoks « sess & esciwna excavate @ ¥ arene wo nana 63 Capacities
Balance (GOUNG). sso @ wasn wo seem wo memo 257 Fuelitanikes « wes 2 2 sna 3 2 aasacs 3s 3 wean 2 8 395
8V2012721B)
Band Washer fluid reservoir...............-. 395

refer to Frequency band............... 228
397
Index
Care Convertible locking retractor........... 314

refer to Cleaning............eee eee ee 362 How do I properlyinstall a child safety seat
Car key... eee eee 31 in MY Vehicle? vc = esen ss wees ye Kee eo we 305
CaRmWaSh. » sesiim « «srr % 4 omens wn comm 2 cee 362 Tinfamtiseatstnss « sonccs sw maname x cmumme i aoe 307
Catalytic converter’. esis 2. exis ev ewe se oe 325 Installing a child restraint using the LATCH
SVSUEMN = ccems & news 3 = eae 2 ee § ee 316
CD drive (media drives)..............004 234
LATCH systettion « 6 sca so emia ow mens ¥ oo 316
Cell phone
Mounting and releasing the anchorage
refer to Telephone..............0.0005 188
HOGKcas 5 2 axes ¢ = eee Fo eS co Bee bn ce 316
Cell phone compartment
Safety instructions.................0- 305
refer to Audi phone box............005 191
SECUAIAG |i » siexens a 6 msennan x winaage 2 « enetoine aH © 312
GeMtralllOCkiAgs. ow snes» © o aouere 0 « vonnere a & wnscene 30
Unused safety belts on the rear seat..... 307
Convenience key..........-.0 eee eee eee 33
Child seats
Convenience opening and closing......... 39
Lower anchorages..........-..00--005 316
Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 35
GlSSSIE VieWre « = seve « = neem 2 2 pee Ea oe & 18
Remote control key............0 ee ee eee 32
Cleaning....... 2... eee eee eee eee 362
S@ttinng + ¢ ewe ss mews 5 7 cows oe ewe ce eR 34
Cleaning/removing ice from windows...... 365
Central locking switch..............00005 34
GEFLITICSEIGHs 5 x wary 5 ¥ mone s 2 eee EE eae 392
Cleaning Alcantara...............000 00s 365
Changing the scale...................005 17 Cleaning artificial leather............... 365
Charge level Cleaning carbon components........ 364, 365

INStrUMOENtClUSEED says ¢ x meee 2 x ose 2s Hew 93 Cleaning controlsis «cso ss sans 6 a ovsece 6 & oe 365
Charging Cleaning decorative parts/trim....... 364, 365
refer to Power sources..........--00000- 62 Cleaning exhausttail pipes.............. 364
Charging clip< « gees + geepe s weve ss eee 107 Cleaning plastic parts...............0.. 365
Charging system (version1)............. 110 Cleaning textiles................00000. 365
Charging system (version 2)............. 115 Cleaning the charging clip............... 122
Charging the battery (mobile devi- Cleaning the charging dock.............. 122
€@S) mos « 2 sais se Hew ee ewe 191, 239, 240 Cleaning the taillights.................. 363
Charging (plug-in hybrid drive)........... 102 Cleaning the windshield...............05- 54
Child restraints Climate control system (automatic)........ 69
Danger of using child restraints in the front Drive select..............00 000 e ee eee 146
SOA ices «x sewnene a « acanwns wo eapsene wo eznwenn 6 0 epene 277 CLOEK scosseas 6 x. avanens os: somite a a eatin a anane 0 253
Wherecan I get additional information Closing
about child restraints and their use?..... 320 Convenience closing..............-.04. 39
Child restraint system anchors........... 315 HGOG): zz seu « 2 eee < 8 aeme 2 Roowe ¢ Beem @ 327
Child Saf@ty.c s « esas s pees ss wees eX eon a 301 Luggage compartment lid............... 36
Important safety instructions for using child Panoramic glass roof................005 40
safety seats......... 0.0.0 c cece ee eee 305 POWER tOpices + seme 9 ¥ couse « EE ee ee Ge 41
Tether anchors............000 220s eee 317 Wind Ows3 ¢ 2 snwow © 2 mamas oo meas 2 8 mam 2 we 38
Tetheristraps s ces: x 2 ees 2 gees & eee 317 Cockpit (overview) ...... 00... cece ee eee 8
Child safety lock Color riumbef se: « « sees x = ewe se ees 5 ees 394
Power Windows. so nicne se saver eo erties oo 38 Coming home/Leaving home
Rear doors... 0... cee ee eee eee 38 refer to Entry/exit lighting.............. 50
Child safety seats.............02.000005 307 Command (voice recognition system) ...... 181
Booster S@atSiies ss ees se eee s nee 8s we 310 COMPATUMENES c.; x 2 eee xo eaee ce gaeG x oe 63
Convertible child seats................ 308 Compassin the mirror...............000. 56
398
Compliance’. « siice 2 exsee ev eee oo em ves 392 Date cscs x x ssncens o & senses ow sneneis w ctssewes ot eet 253
CONNEC Cass 6 & scieas ao mem Fo mes aw OR ¥ Bea 203 Datedisplay’s scenes + swron ao acne a ¥ mae ¥ 253
Audi connect e-tron services............ 207 Daytime running lights................-. 48
Datta Plains: = scca ¢ = seee s apenas aes 5 as 209 Declaration of compliance...........0005 392
Data Privacy s+ oss oo som 3 wm a 9 name 209 Defrosting (windows) .................045 70
TinfOtainMe tier. « scesess ie © suet wo anecnos 9 0 ron 204 DEF (instrument cluster)...............5. 16
Infotainment services...............-- 204
Deluxe automatic climate control
connect e-tron services.............-..- 207
refer to Climate control system (automat-
Connection manager..........-.0..0005 254 HG), rosie ws cease = samen oan ew ite 68, 69
Connections Demo mode
refer to Media................--- 233,241 refer to Presentation mode............. 219
Consumer information.................. 389 Determining correct load limit........... 354
Consumption (fuel) ................0. 21, 22 Digitalicompass evasces < 2 sve x 2 amass 6s oman a 56
CONMEAGES crccers ov soecams ae sowzamn a mteseee a a ete a 8 198 Digital Rights Management.............. 233
Additional directory.............000008 255
Dimensions: « = sess = ¢ eee 2 ¢ eeye oo oats 2 394
Importing/exporting...............005 200
Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 53)
Memiorycapacltyins. 2 6 wesc 0 % meieze © « onnvace » 201
Dimming the rearview mirror............. 53
Storing as destination................. 218
Directory
Control buttons (operating the MMI)...... 167
refer to Contactsa5 = «cuss 2 pees es geese 198
Control knob with joystick function (MMI op-
Displayaws s < sews x s meee ¢ v aoe os SEE Es oes 17
eration)... 62. eee eee 170
Cleaning’. « + ses 2 omcan eo ews © 8 ner © oe 365
Convenience key............00 eee eee 31
Infotainment system display....... 166, 254
Emergency operation.................- 77
Instrument ClUStEr ses < c sees de oes se 2s 20
Starting/stopping the engine............ 75
Multifunction steering wheel............ 17
Unlocking and locking............-...0. 33
DispoSalic: « + exes + ¥ saws 3 ees oe wn 3 ae 389
Convenience opening and closing
DISTANCE acm « o waren <2 wemE & eRe 2 Ee 21,22
Windows or roof... 2.6... eee eee ee 39
Doors
Convertible child safety seats............ 308
Childisafety lock cscs 2 2 cme es even 2 2 eae 38
Convertible locking retractor
Door contact switch..............000005 51
ACtIVAtING:: « 2 acu = e eee se ewes s wae a es 314
Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 35
Deactivating o wows wo wees x 6 seein 6 8 amma ¥ 314
Driver information system
Using to secure a child safety seat....... 314
Changing VieWSic. s » sees «+ news x a ewes wee 17
COOLING MOMS . oxuesexe » snexsen « ¥ miemnae x enews « 69
Economytips (analog instrument cluster)... 23
Cooling system Efficiency program............-.0e-0 00 23
Adding coolant...............-.0000- 333
Energy consumers(Audi virtual cockpit)... 22
COOlaNtinc: « » secs = y mews +e eee Fe eee Te 332
Outside temperature display............. 16
Coolant level checking.............000. 333
Trip computer (analog instrument cluster.. 22
Coolant temperature indicator........... 15
Trip computer (Audi virtual cockpit)....... 21.
Cruise control system.............20--. 126 VICWEs 2c eawone a o enews oo oman woo RRS @ 2 oRUESE 18
Cup holders........ 00... cee eee eee eee 62 Driver seating position................0. 261
CUFFENE CONSUMPLIOM ses 6 «woos so coves vo 21.22 Drives
Feferto.Mediaic « «wis so ene so ear 233, 241
D Drive select
Data plamstieus +e cases 3 2 sree so aren @ 8 rare 209 refer to Audi drive select............... 146
8V2012721B)
Data Privacy’: swoos « 2 saws xo sas go ean soe 209 Driving safely...............0 0. e eee ee 260
Datarecorder’: « saws s © eews s & eee spew xe 163 Driving through water...............000- 72
399
Index
Driving times 5 «scsi + a emcwnn o temo ¥ EHO 21,,22 Jump starting (plug-in hybrid drive)... .. . 100
Driving tips MessageS... 1.6... cece eee eee eee 77
Efficient driving....................00. 73 Start/Stop system « cows sc eves se erew ee oe 78
Driving track. . 2... 2. e eee eee 72 Starting/stopping (button) .............. 75
Dustfilter Starting/stopping (key)..............0.. 74
refer to Pollutantfilter...............0. 68 Engine compartment
DVD drive (media drives)..............55 234 Opening and closing the hood.......... 327
OVENVIEW's sass x s saan @ ¢ eae oo RweS 5 Ewe 328
Dynamic volume
Safety precautions.................... 325
refer to System volume............00-5 258
Engine data
refer to Sport displays..............2... 24
E Engine oil
E-mail... eee eee 197 AGING © acsms < < aaron ¢ § tess FS HER FE SoS 328
e-tron GHANGING) sic 2 & osm os wane ee ee oo oe 331
NaVigatiOniss ss ecsa se eaea s apes ss eee 227 Checking oillevel............02-.00005 328
also refer to Plug-in hybrid drive......... 90 Consumption....................-00- 328
eco mode (climate control system)......... 69 DIpStick:: s ¢ sins « ¢ caves vv saves go nei eve 328
ECONOMICAL KOULE » seme 2 y sees = eee 4 + nee 219 Indicator light..............02.-0000- 329
EDL Replacement interval...............0. 338
refer to Electronic Differential Lock (EDL). 159 Temperature display................00. 23
Efficiency program « ss = ss eee ss eee es sews 23 Enhanced View": ween 2 x nage 3 ¢ mam se gems gg 18
Electrical system. ....... 2. eee eee eee 334 Entering characters/numbers(speller)..... 172
Electric drive... 2... eee eee eee eee eee 90 Entering letters (speller)................ 172
Electric range... ... ee eee eee eee 227 Entertainment sliding menu............. 170
Electromechanical parking brake.......... 80 Entry/exit lighting. .................000. 50
Electromechanical steering.............. 162 Entry assistance
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)......... 159 refer to Seats... . cece eee 59
Electronicimmobilizetiscs. « + eau « 2 emis o 2 ow 31 Environment

Unleaded gasoline..................0. 321
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)...... 159
ESC
Embedded SIM Cat« ecu x = eeae + ¢ ays 5 5s 204
refer to Electronic Stabilization
Emergency assistance.................. 368
COMEROLGES Cyan « mcwonne » casas os snentne 1 6 aban ise
Emergency braking function.............. 80
eSIM
Emergency flashers.............2--0000- 50
refer to Embedded SIM card............ 204
Emergency operation
Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 163
DOONS = eee 5 2 ween 5 o eee 5 Ee; eee 35
Exterior lighting.................002-00- 48
Fueltillerdoor ins & sisi oe ascina oe aesae a 4 ane 324
EXteriOn MIRKOPS sess « sca os sesame wanes a @ 52
Luggage compartment lid............... 37
Folding. ....... 0... cee cece eee eee 52
Panoramic glass r00f .0. 6s ewes cease eo 40
Folding Settings wis ¢ ¢ easn ss sean ss row ee 34
Emergencystarting...............-.0-. 383
External voice operation................ 186
Emissions control system............... 324
Energy consumers..........00-00 eee eee 22
F
Energy management................... 163
Engine Factory default settings
Breakingin............ 0.00 eee eee eee 72 Multi Media Interface................. 254
GOOlant www: ¢ ¢ seme & o see 2 neem © Bet = 332 Fader (SOuUNG) es s ¢ seins se nares se ews ge ee 257
JUMP 'StAFEING « esr 6 «waves 6 2 meee 6 o eens 383
400
Index
Fastening Fueling
Booster seatS...... 0.0... cee ee eee ee 310 Fuel filler door emergency release....... 324
Convertible child safety seats........... 308 FUCLQaUGC wes 3 s eae 8 ¢ wees & a ee 8 eee 16
Infantiseats:: « « esc xv oie © o wei ee oem 307 Fuel tarikecapacity's « 5 soca es ecw « wen a 395
Fast forwarding and rewinding (audio/video Opening the fuel filler door............ 322
file) eee eee 241 FUUSOS%. « ssessenr oo axeias 6 opeone wo: eoettepe ox acne 379
Fast forwarding (audio/video file)......... 241
Fast nOwte ssscse x 2 ones: @ e enewn ve amas @ e sernees 219 G
Favorites
GALA
Media....... cece ccc eee 244
refer to Speed dependent volume control. 257
Navigation..............0......0.00. 213
Garment hooks ........ eee cece nena 63
Jeléphon@acws + « cawy + eon os ees 3 x ewe 195
Gas discharge lamps...........-....0-5 381
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 392
Gasoline... 6... eee eee eee 321
File formats (media drives) .............. 246
Additives... 0.0... cc cece cece eee 322
Floor matS.... 2... eee eee eee eee 265
Gasoline MIXtUNS suis x x sew 2 yews + some 321.
Folding the rear seats.............-..000- 66
GAWR
Foot pedals........... 2... cee ee eee eee 265 refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 395
For the sake of the environment Glossaryof tire and loading terminology... 342
Disposing of engine oil................ 331
GlOVECOMPArtMHENt cwws xs cows xe res +o ee 63
FueLING s « secem « = pees 5 ¢ eetee so Sees ee oes 322
G meter
Leaks... ec ee eee eee ee ee 326
refer to Sport displays.................. 24
Roof rack... 6... eee 67
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 395
Free text search... 22... cee eee eee 173
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 395
Média « x esse ¢ 5 sees bo oes Fe eee 2 2 ee 243
GVWR
Navigation’. « cia « v swan os ewe 3 o nece © 211
Radio... 2... ee eee 229
refer to Gross Vehicle Weight
Telephon@s.< ss ess s cess ss Sees sb veme 199
Rating (GVWR).... 0.0... e cence ee eee 395
Freeze protection
COOlaNt ws « z ewe + s mews +e eee te eee 332 H
Frequency band...........0.2.e00. 228, 231, Hand sire. « o cccmen «meses oe aren a wena see 188
also refer to Frequency band........... 228 Headlight range control...............004 48
Front airbags Headlights’. « cscs se caus oo enim wo omnes 9 & ow 48
DESGCRIPCLOMNE. « 2 exes « exeustnin « snecens 4 © wines 280 Cleaning........ 0... eee eee eee eee 363
How they work . 286 Headlight range control................ 48
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics... 269 Washerisystem's = 2 sees 2 2 wen 2 ean ay we 54
Front center armrest...............0.00- 60 Head restraints « vem s socme : pee ao deme oe 263
Front seats... 20... 0. ee eee eee eee 58 IAGJUSEIN jess. < 6 sisi o neue a 0 aman oa 60, 263
Adjusting..............00 eee eee eee 262 Removing and installing................ 60
Child restraints in the front seat......... 277 Heated
EUG: sep: ¢ ome & o comes 5 2 eee © © GeeRR Fe ne 321: EXtGHOF MUONS « zene sv uses ¢ eee 2 + ee 52
AddiBIVES © exicsee v 2 ssenice w # anes 9 awevene © ave 322 Rear Wind OW & 2 ove ¥ 0 mem oe wane 6 arenes 70
Current consumption............... 21, 22 Seats... ieee eee 70
FUCL GAUGE cu s eves 2 x pee 2 o eee oe 14,16 Washer fluid noZzZleSiiis is cies ss veee ee we 54
Fueltank:capacity’. « ssw x a wasn 0 x moses © 395 Heavy clothing and safety belts.......... 271
8V2012721B)
Gasoline... 2... eee 321 Hex socket... 2... eee cee ee 368
Savitig Tu@l sss 2 x sees ¢ 5 ees yo eee ge oe 146 High-voltage battery...............000.. 91
Saving fuel consumption................ 73 CHANGING, sax & s aaeu ¢ & ams 3 5 cates 3 x ee 121
Index
High beam Swe: + 2 sescne + © seemie 2 w awane ew ewer © 49 Instruments

High beam assistant.................0. 49 Adjusting illumination.................. 51
Hill descent control..............22-000- 86 Interior lighting..................00000- 51
Hill hold assist... 0.2... ee eee eee eee 81 Internet
also refer to Hill hold assist............. 81 refer toconnect.............0005 203, 204
Hold assist (hill)... 0... eee eee eee 81 Internet radio........... 000.00 eee eee 237
Home addresS...........0-00 000 ee 213,218 Interval mode (windshield wipers)......... 54
FIOM: a ssnss 2 aeenons @ & omomews © 6) eres © eens wo & HeEE 8 iPhone
Hotspot refer to Audi music interface........... 239
refer to Wi-Fi... ..... cece eee ee 208, 236 iTunes tagging. ... 6... cece cece eee eee 228
Howare child restraint system anchorsrelat-
ed to child safety................-.000. 315
How manyairbags does myvehicle have?.. 283
J
Jukebox... eee eee 235
Howsafety belt pretensioners work....... 275
JUMAPESbALE « nacnas © 2 eee ae eons @ os area © sree 100
JUMpiStarting sews 2 cme oo ween © 0 eeu 100, 383
I
Ignition
K
Establishing drive ready mode (plug-in hy-
ROY's 6 sri oo meen 2s wow © men o 2 mee 6 8 aN 31
brid drive@)sec «2 sens = 2 own « 2 een oe sae oo 92
Switching on/off (plug-in hybrid drive) ..... 92
Key not recognized ..........ceceeeeees TE
Switching on/off (using the button) ....... 75
Key recognition (climate control system)... 68
Switching on/off (using the key).......... 74
Key replacement............2..0.0000. 31
Imbalance (wheels) ..............00-005 348
Messages ............- 0 eee eee eee eee 77
Immobilizer
Replacing the battery.................. 32
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 31
Unlocking and locking............... 32, 33
Important things to do before driving..... 260
Kick-down (automatic transmission) ........ 87
Importing and exporting (contacts) ....... 200
Kneeairbags:: +s esis ss eww s wean as wows a 292
Improperly worn safety belts............ 274 Description...............0..0.0000. 292
Indicator lights.................00020005 10 How they Workevas » ¢ sews ¢ 5 eeu dB eR GG 293
Airbag system. ............--0ee eee 288 Important safety instructions.......... 294
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF .............. 288
Indicator lights (plug-in hybrid drive)....... 94
INTANWSEAES © scewvs oo samen ow ome oa MOM oO 307
L
Lane assist
Input
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 139
Using the MMEtOWCR esc. 6 sie © a weezer « 0 6 168
Lapetinters « « seccus vo sscewm vo seemnne s & one 128
Using the speller..................0.. 172
Input level (media)................005. 244 LATCH: oo sason 3 wanna as aacea aw mae a © ING 315
Description...........-..002- see eee 316
Inspection interval..............000000 338
Installing a child restraint............. 316
Installing the upper tether strap on the an-
LOGAtION 5 & sis oo ome a oe ets 2 wee 9 wee 315
chorage...... ee eee eee eee eee 318
Mounting and releasing the anchorage
Instrument cluster................000005 14
hook... eee eee 316
GlESNING: + ¢ eam 2 2 same <a eR F ame gE ne 365
Launch Control................2--.-0005 87
Me@SSAGES sei oo cmcon 3 6 omens oo Renn =H aOR 24
Leather care and cleaning............... 365
Plug-in hybrid drive...............00005 93
Service interval display................ 338 EeFECONtOLDUEEOM en oo sme wo scauoue aw aanene ® © 18
License plate bracket..........0.0.ee ees 391
402
Index
Licensing agreements (MMI)............. 259 Memory capacity

Lifting Jack’. siwcic « oases « ¥ wae wo eee @ 8 374 Directory... 2... cece eee eee eee 200
Light/rain sensor JUKEBOX « wee 2 ¢ ores x 4 ome oe owes 2 eee 235
Automatic headlights.................. 48 Memory card
Switching the rain sensor on/off.......... 54 SDicardireader (MMI) i« « o coves. so cease 2 o ov 234
Lighting Supported types and formats........... 246
EXterion « wes : = seen ¢ 5 eee vo ee sv Dees 48 MENU, Buttons & cisies © « cessive w s cetsoaus % 0 saeaiens + 165
AMGETOM cso x 2 cee xe ene oH en oe ae ae 51, Menu language
BIQHES sews ev wisn oe acme wo 2 cece © = come eo as 48 refer to Setting the language........... 253
Interior/reading lights................0. Sl Menu paths (Owner's Manual)............ 167
Listening to music Menus/SyMbolSisie< «sec a6 miei ao ates a 0 174
refer to Media................-.- 233,241 MeSSAQESS 5 o nec so mamem so eee 6 Pm so 195
Load... 6.6... eee eee 395 MUPPOTStcs0 = x aeons 5 2 eves x 2 eeewe & e Bees 8 me 52
Locking and unlocking COMMPASS xine 6 csnuece w 6 esouen @ x cuwaena 6 6 arin 8 56
By remote control. ...... 0... eee eee 32 Dimming ......- 0.0 e cece cece eee 53
With the convenience key............... 33 MMI
Low beam headlights.................... 48 refer to Multi Media Interface.......... 165
Lowering the cargo floor................. 65 MMI search
Luggage compartment................0- 63 refer to Free text search........... 173, 243
COVED: = < weg = 2 tees 5 ¢ eee 5 ove # cee 64 MMI touch : «ees = s eepa s seen as weee ee es 168
POWEPSOURCES ccsins «6 amemens <x evawane © etetotions © ene 62 Mobile device
Tie-dOWns .. 0.6... eee 65 refer to Telephone...............-.04. 188
also refer to Luggage compartment...... 63 Mobile device reminder signal............ 253
Luggage compartment lid MODE button ; « aes <= cece es pees be eee ee 20
Mechanically unlocking. ...........0e ees 37 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System... 288
Opening and closing................... 36
MP3
Luggage compartment net............... 65 refer'to Jukebox: «ees se eewa ee ewe eee 235
Lumbar'Support eo isccs ss cutee oo scones a 6 anwar oe 58 Multifunction steering wheel
Changing viewSier = «sve «a erewe + a oven a oe 17
M Operating................2..0.000. 17,20
SWitching tabs: s x geaw ss seme «a ewe ¢ 17,20
Magnetic ride
Voice recognition system ............64. 19
refer to Suspension control............ 146
Multi Media Interface..........0....005 165
MaiMbeMaMmee . resis oo sseune s + ocmmune a 0 ensnsne x 0 389
Music collection
Maintenanceintervals...............00. 338
Refer ToJUKEDOX:}. « sence « sso « « seweise sa oom 235
Making an emergency call............... 195
MURR bce cos sir sow annie aw anemone a = emo 257
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 325
MYAUGL ys cscs oo eecae 2 3 mee oo ween © 204, 215
Map
Operating « « cssise so csuore so coun & wim @ o sue 220
SettingS .... 20... 60. e cece eee eee 222 N
UpGate » onan s 2 aways ¢ eeu + arene + Reon 211 NAV/MAP button ion « «gay « eam as eam g xe 211
Map Update c < x sau ¢ s eee 3 § coos x Eee 224 NaVIGStION = sexes « = neues ¢ = ees ¢ Yea FE es 211
Massage function.............. eee eee eee 58 ANNOUNCEMENES sees « 6 sees oo eee ov ere 220
Media......... ce cece cece 233, 241 Plug-in hybrid drive..............0000 227
8V2012721B)
DYiVGS§: s x sews 5 ¢ eee 5 2 len s eee Es ee 234 also refer to Map: sews = 2 ees <= seen ex oe 220
Supported formats swiss vi esis se wees vee 246 Navigation (instrument cluster) ...... 178,179
Mediaicenter's » scene cei so same ee swe 9 242 NHTSA... 2.00. cece eee eee 391
Index
Number of'seats css. « csssos ov seies vo avesane oo 268 Parental control

DVD... eee eee eee 244
O Park assist... 22... eee eee eee 153

Parking aid... 0.0... eee eee eee 149
Occupant protectionin. « 2 eves a 2 exes + x suse 136
AdjUStING ©... eee cee ee eee 157
Occupant seating positions.............. 261
Cleaning sensors/camera............-- 363
Octane rating (gasoline)................ 321 Malfunction... 0.0... 00 cece eee eee eee 158
OdGITIGtEHs sex: 5 2 eau 5 x yee cs Ree Gs ee 16 Park assist... 0... eee eee eee 153
Oil Rearview camera............0-0e eee 151
refer te ENGING ibs « 2 coo s vows se ewes a 328 Parking brake
ON/OFF ROD: (MMDins = ¢ caus y s ome 3 © eos & 165 refer to Electromechanical parking brake.. 80
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)........ 325 Parking lightS ws « < esas so news 5 ¥ eae 5 ocr 48
Online destinations Parking lock emergency release........... 89
refer to Point of interest search......... 214 Parking (automatic transmission) ....... 84,85
OHURETIAD + sees & x eees « & sees 6c oeERS ee 223 Pass-through.......... eee eee eee eee 66
Online map update................006. 224 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF light........... 288
Online media........ 00... cee ee eee eee 237 Pause (audio/video file)................. 241
Online services Pedalsiccis: + crores o 0 sscmsme so aowtne & 5 costs a as 265
refer to connect: « « esww + eens x we 203, 204 Perchlorate ls © scviss iv secu we cwoos 2 a caves wx a 389
OPENING: « s seee ss Rene = ¥ ams oo Hee & 8 we 30 Performance/torque display
Convenience opening.................4. 39
refer to Sport displays.................. 24
Fuel filler door. ...... 0.0... cece ee eae 322
Personal route assistance. .............. 217
Hood... 0.2... eee 327
Phonebook
Luggage compartment lid............... 36
refer to ContactS..... 0.0... cee eee eee 198
Panoramic glass roof.............000005 40
Physical principles of a frontal collision.... 269
Power top... ... eee cece eee eee eee 41
WINdOWS': « sxe 5 2 oueay 2 ews § 2 yew «8 38 Picture format (video) ...............005 244
Opening and closing Playback. (tmedia) bie x = smi 3 awoweive v & omanns ot 241
refer to Unlocking and locking..... 30, 32,33 Playlist sscoses eo commis ew onwns ov maemre vo ew =o 244
Operating Plug-in hybrid drive..............2--.45. 90
Multifunction steering wheel......... 17,20 12 volt vehicle battery................ 100
Multi Media Interface................. 166 Auxiliary climate control............... 121
Voice recognition system.............. 181 BOOSE « sews = 3 ceeey + sauee 2 2 mee BS deme eee 97
Options MeN + wees « « wes x 5 ees 18; 167, 171 CHANGING swssiie 6 & aren 6 w memes ow anne ww coe 102
Charging clip................-0000005 107
Outside temperature display.............. 14
Charging doCkeci: s = cows se sews « eee gs 107
Overview (Cockpit) .............0000 000s 8
Charging system PIN................-. 114
Charging the high-voltage battery....... 106
P Charging tithG-es: ss eeus se eee ee ees ae 108
Paint damage........... eee cence eee eee 364 Cleaning the charging system........... 122
Paint number....... 0... ee cece ee ee eens 394 Climate control...................... 121
Panic button. ... 0.2.0.0... eee eee eee 32 COaStiNG les + 5 mace so same s RoR E Nee & Eon 97
COOLANE «: sisi «www a aaa a a ESO w eaHER 101
Panic function... 0.0... ce eee eee ee 32
Driving. ...... 0.00.0... 0. eee eee 92
Panoramiciglassiroof's cciseosn « iexum 2% manus i 40
E-max (power availability)............... 99
Efficient driving « # sss v2 cies oe ore ve ee 98
Emergency closing..............22e-005 40
Ending drive ready mode................ 92
Energy flow display.............-...0-. 99
404
Establishing drive ready mode........... 92 Presets (adios oo esis « x svevoon © x steeds = ou 231
EV mode/hybrid mode...............045 96 Pressure
High-voltage battery........... 90,91,121 Tire pressure monitoring system........ 359
High-voltage system............-..0-0- 90 THESis ¢ « sayau 5 ¥ Mas 4X SGEUR Go SOR 2s BEER 350
Indicator lights............. 0... e ee eee 94 Program guide
Inserting the fuel pump nozzle......... 101 REGO: x 2 owen so see 4 teem 2S sees oe 229
Tintroduetion « & wvivaa sx savas « a amino © a areunits & 90 Proper occupant seating positions........ 261
Jump start... 6.2.2.0... 2 eee eee 100
Proper safety belt position.............. 272
JONG StSRting ase < sas 2s gauee & 3 Bene 5 100
Proper seating position
Power Mete?s «2 aces < o ewim 2 2 we oo mee 93
PRONE PaSSenGer wee + s xewie 2 & eee so eee 2 262
Range and statistics................... 95
OECUPANES « scaises « 6 saves wo cessor ¥ ere we ore 261
Range display............. 0. eee eee eee 95
Rear passengers..............-..0005 263
Reeuperation « sic so sees oe meee se mee os 97
Pyrotechnic elements............-..00- 389
Refueling ......... 0... cece eee eee 101
Setting the modes................-.00. 96
Starting the vehicle.........5..0.ee eee 92 Q
Status displays...............0.. 112,117 quattro (all wheel drive) ............-.-. 162
Switching the ignition on/off............ 92 Selective wheel torque control.......... 159
Tachometer sce: ¢ 2 seme 2 x eww ¢ 2 eee sg oe 93 Question
Tiremobility Kit ececsiss + + cowseie +o smewere © sisuese m 100 What happens to unbelted occupants?... 269
Transport............0 0.00.2 eee eee 100
Vehicle Sound ssc: se cees sv eves ve enen vee 92
Mehicletoolikities os acniss 4 o amuan a 0 sewias eo 100
Pointiof interest’. iii os mien as wav 2 ¥ ee 214 Radio's < = sees = oars © ¢ eee ev eee eg oes ee 228
Point of interest search..........000 sees 214 Additional station information.......... 230
also refer to Point of interest........... 214 Presets....... 0.00.00. eee eee eee eee 231
Radio teXtccic = sacs y ¢ sees ¢ e eeae ¢ eae 229
POLISHING: ses v= cocwens @ a asecens w= eeeees ww anaes ¥ oO 364
Station list cise ceu ss news ee mene oes 228
Pollen filter
refer to Pollutantfilter................. 68 Radio communications equipment........ 391
POllUtamb Filters, crores 1 semen oo aenene a omens © a 68 RadigeQui PGhibscas <2 wens x asee evo as 391.
Power entry assistance

Radio Standards Specification (RSS)....... 392
refer to Seats... 6. eee eee eee 59 Rain/light sensor
Power meter. ......... 0.00. e eee eee eee 93 Automatic headlights.................. 48
Switching the rain sensor on/off.......... 54
Power seat adjustment..............0005 58
Random
Power sources............ 62, 191, 239, 240
refer to Shuffle... 0.2.2.0... eee eee 244
POWEREOP acinus sx sive oo seme @ 9 comme © a one 41
Range (tank level) .............00000. 21, 22
Cleaning... . 2. cece eee ee eee eee 364
Reading lightsicc « « scses « a casos © myazene « # meus 51
Power top storage compartment.......... 43
Rear
Power Wind OWS « ws oe ones. eww a ween a ee 38
Cleaning the rear window............... 54
Malfunction ......... 000 e cee e eee 39
Rear center armrest
Pregnant women
refer to Cup holders...........2.-.000-- 62
Special considerations when wearing a safe-
Rear cross-traffic assist..............0-. 145
ty Delt way se seen so weiss sy eee ee Sows 7 273
pre sense Rear fog lamp(s)..............0.0000e eee 48
refer to Audi presense................ 136 Rear lid
8V2012721B)
Presentation Mode... ..... cece cece ees 220 Escape latch......................004 368
also refer to Luggage compartment lid.... 36
Presets (climate control system)........... 68
405
Index
Rearview camera. « ssi . ecw ee eee se oe 151 Safety

Rear window defogger................05- 70 Airbag system. ......... 0.00 e eee eee 276
Recirculation:Mode eajes ss eine a y caren we ows 70 Belts « wes 2 x gemig 2 waren 3s MeO ao Bae Ge 268
RECUPEFatONews + ¢ eewe 3 2 eas Fo eee ee ee 21. Correct seating position............... 261
Refresh station list (radio). .............. 231 Pedalarea.......... 0. cece 265

Tel6phOne wows sz seus ¢ e sees § ees ge 188
Refueling ....... 66. c cece ences 322
Safety belt position..................0- 272
Plug-in hybrid drive................00. 101
Safety belt height adjustment.......... 274
Remote control key.......... eee eeee neces 31
Safety belts worn by pregnant women.... 273
Safety belt pretensioner
Key replacement........... cece eee 31
Service and disposal...............2... 275
LED « wows : wees 9 ¥ rows « ¢ eos 9g es 32
Replacing the batteryeoe:. 5 & ses ae caw sos 32 Safety belts.............0....004. 268, 271
Synchronization................020-00 32 AGJUStING waxes ¢ 5 eaae + nee Ge SeOR a Hees 274

GIOSNING s 2s wees ss ame s wee es rE eo 365
RE Pals seuss o x suonwes 6 x senses 9 a) acme & 6 econaus oo 389
Airbag system... . 6.0... cece eee eee 291 Danger to passengers who do not wear a
safety belt................0 200000 269
Replacement key..............-00000005 31
Fastening s « seem « « mowa + 2 ween © woes 2 ge 271
Replacement parts.............-.000005 391
Height adjustment.................0. 274
Replacing Improperly Worn... 2... eee eee eee 274
Light bulbs......................000. 381
Not Wort’: + ¢ osws 7 6 een yo pews ve ewe ee 269
Replacing wiper blades...............00. 56 Safety belt position................... 272
Reporting Safety Defects................ 391 Safety instructions...............0005 271
Reset Securing child safety seats............. 312
refer to Restart (MMI)...............-. 258 Special considerations for pregnant wom-
Reset button (trip odometer) ............. 16 CS 273
Resetting the trip odometer.............. 16 UifSStSHi9 caw xs eww « x cama « « eww ewe 273
Restart (MMI) ............000 0000 ee eaee 258 Warning/indicator light............... 268
Retractor csccces «oes a a caine oo onsen vv oo 271 Wornproperly...... 0.20... cee ee eee 270
Reverse (automatic transmission) .......... 83 Safety belt warning light................ 268

Rewinding (audio/video file)............. 241 Safety instructions
for side curtain airbags................ 299
Right control button is. « ¢ ows se esa ss ee 18
for using child safety seats............. 305
RiniSis « saan & 3 maw @ & mae 2 Meee ¢ Sea 354
fomusingsafety, beltS:. . cies « « onunis 6 0 oraue 271
Gleaning’s < sean = s sews 2 o enn 2 cme a 2 me 364
Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System.. 290
RINGtONeSEttINGS ca + wise s wane go eee ee 200
Saving fuel
Rollbar
Economytips (analog instrument cluster)... 23
refer to Active rollover protection system. 266
Efficiency program (analog instrument clus-
ROOTOAG « + sem ¢ weews + ween as eewR 4 Ge 66, 395
ter) oe eee eee 23
ROOTRMAGCK sxx 2 sume: & & nem gx BeE ea OE Eee 66 Energy consumers(Audi virtual cockpit)... 22
also refer to Roof rack... 2.6.0. c eee e eee 66 REGUperationi. » cscsus o meses oo mimes © o anew 21
Rowtelcriteria s « vias x saan a 8 rea 8 wren « 220 Seat (FadiO) ces: » 2 semes 2 o eee 4 ee 2s ewe 229
Route guidance Screen
refer to Navigation............... 179,211 weferto: Display: 2 wwe x mesos @ 6 weno 17, 20
Screwdriver ea se sees ao ears oo owas ve een 368
S SD card reader (MMI) = wens « » sews ¢ 2 aque & 234
Saferdriving Habits ccs oo somes x mune x ees 260 Search area (point of interest)............ 214
406
Search function Ship transports « = sce vo soncne vo wen» & ave 100
refer to Free text search........... 173, 243 ShUfPleis 2 2 eer «weaned + wen Go aero oe a 244
Seat adjustment Side airbags
Head) FEStraints): « saau << wave & mene s ¥ se 263 DOSE PE OMe scenes 6 anecnn w 6 vaameus 3% wnecens 294
Seating capacity. ....... cece cece ee eee 268 How they work... . 0.0... cee e eee eee 296
Seating position Side assist
DIivGl’: scx ¢ = qos = x peers se em Eee 261 refer to Audi side assist................ 142
Front (passengers « s somes «a mavens vane os 262 Side curtain airbags...............0000. 297
How to adjust the front seats........... 262 DeseriptiOnie: ¢ coun <2 ween se wow sy eee 297
Incorrect seat position................ 264 How they work. ........ 0.00 e eee eee 299
OCCUPANES sevoes 2 5 owes +o meri 2 8 wes = we 261 Safety instructions.............-..0-- 299
Rear passengers.................000. 263 SIM card... 6... eee 204
Sea EANSPOM. cccscmess sseiay « w casenia wo 6 comme © 100 SiriusXM alert notifications.............. 230
Seats Sliding/tilting sunroof
Adjusting .............. cee eee eee 58 refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 40
Cleaning « ¢ eeu: se ees ae ees de ee eee 365 Smartphone
Correct seating position............... 261 referto Telephone..............02+00e 188
Easy seatentry............0. 002 0e eae 59
StiOW CHAINS: + = seas x 2 sees yo BeOS go eR 355
FOlAING:: = = sees 2 2 eens x g cee yo ees 5 e eae 66
Socket
Number'of’seat« isscsa a a sain ov ana oo 268
refer to Power sourceS..........---2+--- 62
Seat heating........ 0.0... eee eee eee 70
Software update
Secondary phone.................. 190,255
refer to System update (MMI).......... 257
Selecting a source (media) .............. 241
Software (MMI)
Selection menu.............00. 18,167,171
Licensing agreements............00005 259
Selective door unlocking...............0- 30 Update... 2... ee eee eee eee eee 257
Selector lever (automatic transmission) NGRSIONs 2s wees cy wanes 3 2 game se eS & 2 BS 257
POSIGIONS seccons oo cnewers + w serene vow wv TER wo 82 Sources of information about child restraints
Self-learning navigation ANGMCHMUSCls. «sues av aceon 6 ansnse se axa 320
refer to Personal route assistance....... 217 Space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire) . 377
Service and disposal Sparetire’s x ¢ saws x 5 ews x 8 eases + Ree 7 He 377:
Safety belt pretensioner............... 275 Spare wheels sass = sews se wows so sours eo 377
Service interval display...............0. 338 Speed dependent volume control......... 257
Service position
Speedometer........ 2. eee eee eee 14
refer to Replacing wiper blades.......... 55
Speed warning system.............--.0. 126
Settings
Speller. 2.2... 2. eee eee eee eee 172
DIr@CtOry eaces x ¢ esees + © ees = © ewe oF ee 201
Sport displays............ 0.0 e eee ee eee 24
Maples a scenius 6 ssonius 6 a oxivane Wo oonuene © o exes 222
SPOREVIEWeesis oo aecweus o auaweas we x uno oo eemuoos 3 a 18
Media..... 2... cece eee eee eee eee 244
Navigation: « « ewew s 2 eeem x x eee se eee e 219 Sporty CrivVing « saw + wows 2s wri ao were 3 6 oe 72
RadiOies. x axaiaws sx vce iv cxntewe 1 o amemces a ae 2311, Start/Stop'system os <s sees se cosa enews eee 78
System (MMI)... 0... 6. cee eee eee 253 START ENGINE STOP (convenience key).. 75,76
TeléphOn@scs = = sane = oes ¢ s ees ev ree 200 Station scanning (radio)
Voice recognition system.............. 254 refer to Refresh station list (radio)....... 231.
Wi-Fi hotspot.................000-00 208 SUGCCING i: = x cwses x ¢ ews x 6 we 2 8 ee ZB 162
8V2012721B)
Setting the language................00. 253 Locking steering (ignition lock)........... 74

SHIFELIQGHEINGICAEOR «cess 2 5 cca 2 wrevrecne > wavs 24 Locking the steering (button)
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) ..... 86 also refer to Electromechanical steering.. 162
407
Index
Steering wheel Textamessages snvves sv sowuwes « susswes wo anmnees + 6 195

Adjusting... 2.0... c cece cece eee ee 73 also refer to Text messages............ 195
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) .... 86 Tie-downs ...... 00... cece eee 65
Steering wheel heating................. 71 TIMES: «scree a eecnane © csomes © oh apes © auemees 253
also refer to Multifunction tiptronic (automatic transmission) ......... 86
steering wheel................. 17,19, 20
Tire Mobility System (tire mobility kit) ..... 369
Steps for determining correct load limit... 354
TiteS « scons a ¢ wom a 2 eee 2 eee se eee zc 339
Stopover (navigation) .................. 215 Lowaprofilestines.. ccric 1s wswon «© were s 6 one 356
Storage options........ 00.0.0... e eee ee 63 Mobility kit... 2.0... eee eee eee ee 369
Streaming quattro (all wheel drive)............... 162
refer to Online media................. 237 Repailt Sets « « ssi s « esnrice ou arenes s 2 emer oo 368
S tronic (automatic transmission) .......... 82 Replacing............. cee eee eee eee 371
Subtitles (DVD) .................000000- 244 SERVICE lifewes = = seus = = aes se RE 3 eS 348
Subwoofer......... 00.000 cece eee 257, 378 THRE PROSSUNC sus so cwniee wo cessece vo oowsaE wo 350
SUMVISONS « scans s semen a wavs os owes @ H eaoeNE 6 53 Tire pressure monitoring system.... 357,359
Tire pressure table.................... 351
SUMPOUNG ici «0 sesuas wo amicane aw cian @ w orMUE To 257
Tire pressure (trailer towing)........... 124
SUSPENSION CONtrOlas ¢ ¢ wus + ¢ weewe zy caves 146
Treadwear indicators.................. 348
SWap'all seuss ¢ = sours + ¢ ses ¢ e teas Fe eee 194
Unidifectiotiale: 5 aes 5 2 wan sx oes ose 341
Switching tabs
Uniform tire quality grading............ 356
refer to Multifunction
Tires and wheels
steering wheel................. 17,19, 20
Glossary of tire and loading terminology .. 342
Symbols... 0.0.2... cece eee eee eee 174 Tires and vehicle load limits............ 352
Navigation ....... cece cece eee eee 220
TC
WratfiGis:: + sue a x sem 2 x meee & 2 eee Ee oe 225
refer to Traffic information............. 225
also refer to Indicator lights............. 10
Tone (sound)
Synchronization (climate control system) .... 69
refer to Adjusting the sound............ 257
System settings (MMI)................. 253
ToOls: » cguuze: © comes 2 2 seus 8 2 eet sb Bows & 8s 368
System update (MMI) w: « « cews « s ewww sx es 257
Torn or frayed safety belts............... 271
SysteniVOlUMe sony = » ems = eens =e eeeE Ye 258
Touch
T TEPER TOIMMIL LOUGH wesc 2 2 assim = evo w os 168
Towing
TachOmete rics s « esau as eawe @ e wave a & ae Front:towing lOop'. « « cacus « wears ws aresin 0s 386
Technical data Rear towing loop.............--.00 eee 387
Technical modifications................. 389 TOW €UUCKSS: = x cows s & seas = sees +s ee 386
Telephone....... 0. eee eee eee eee 188 TPMS

Audi phone box Tire pressure monitoring system........ 357
Connecting a mobile device............ 189 also refer to Tires... 10... cece eee eee 357
Dialing anumber.................005- 193 TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system)
Options during a phone call............ 194 Indicator light.............. eee ee eee 361
Playing MUSIC css ss swan ss oes ve eee a 236 Tire pressure monitoring system........ 359
SOULS casero © serine w @ pests & cuneate w & peta 200 Traffic information................ 225, 226
Temperature display Trailer mode (navigation)............... 219
Coolant... 0.0... eee cee eee 14 Trailer towing... 26... cee eee eee eee ee 124
Outside temperature................... 16 Trailer loads « gee s sam 5 o aeeus gx meme 2 124
Tether anichorsis 4 ssa « came ¢ ¢ aes < & Sane 8 317 Transmission malfunction................ 88
Tether strap... 2. eee eee 317 Treble (sound).......... 0.00000 ee ee eee 257
408
Trip computer (analog instrument cluster)... 22 Multifunction steering wheel............ 19
Trip computer (Audi virtual cockpit) ........ 21. Operating ........ 0c cee cece eee eee 181
Trunk lid SGCtinGS avsw s & aeeu 5 Kae 5 K REO S © ROS § 254
Trunk escape latch..............00000. 368 NOLUIM Chess eo seeeies a commas oo ones we x oO 258
Turmesignialis « sss. <= suns © a ewes 3 v amenace #0 ose 49 VOLUIMIGE: 2 susan a 2 aceon os whe ew arte @ @ awe 257
U
Unfastening safety belts................ 273 Warning/Indicator lights
Uniform tire quality grading............. 356 Airbag system... 2.0... eee eee eee 288
Unlocking and locking Warning lights
By:remote:controls. sce <2 ccc ev eee ov oe 32 refer to Indicator lights.............0005 10
Using the lock cylinder...............0. 35 Washing matte finish paint.............. 362
With the central locking switch.......... 34 Wave band
With the convenience key............... 33 refer to Frequency band............... 228
Updating stations (radio)................ 228 Weights ........ 20... eee eee ee eee eee 395
USB charging port.............. 62, 239, 240 What happens if you wear your safety belt too
USB stick loose? .. 2... eee eee eee eee eee 272
refer to Audi music interface........... 239 What happens to unbelted occupants?.... 269
What impairs driving safety?............ 260
V Wheellbollits «isis ov ecemene oo snngeot a ot enone # 0 354

Wheels « isisssn a x asasn 0 a oeasnes ov amenities a avenue 339.
Vanity TROP ses ss senesus so ames ose 6 aaneN 6 53:
Cleaning......... 2. eee eee eee eee 364
Vehicle
Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 342
ComeClearnnng ces x i omusas 2 1 eine weaesrain © 362
Replacing « aviv © x cee v saves x ¥ eee ee oxen 371
Dimensions.......... 0.0 c cece e ee eee 394
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 359
Identification data................04. 394
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 352
OQUEOTSORVICC hw: oo seaiee 6 arenes 6 a arene wa 367
WIhEeLWFETICH!: « & waas 2 onan gs eau 2s cere 368
Raising............. 0... eee eee 388
When musta safety belt be replaced?..... 271
TRatiSpOtt wes 2 esas <2 cee ce tee R EDR G 100
Vehicle battery When mustthe airbag system be inspected? .288
Charge levelivs. < 2 swe ys ees 2s ween 2 6 ee 163 Whereare lower anchorages located?..... 316
Vehicl@careics « + saws + 2 awa x 9 eam 2 8 een 362 Wi-Fi
Audi music stream... ..... 6.620220 eee 236
Vehicle control modules.............4.. 163
AUGIO PlAaVER s see % = eens = 2 ew 2 o temo c 236
Vehicle identification number............ 394
Hotspot settingSic. ss scaise sv srewre so navn @ 208
Vehicle jack. ...........0..0.0000. 368, 374
Online media................0000008. 237
Vehicle sound...............0 000 eee eee 92
Using a hotspot « wins: cass sy cee se eee 204
Vehicle toolkit... 0.0... cee ee eee ee 368 also refer to Wi-Fi................ 208, 236
Version information.................08. 257 Windideflect0ors «= aceon oo saves 6 wasn 2 o aoc 44
VIEW Dettori: oo cae a eves ov ome a e omnia ws i? CLEATTIIG). « «. asexsne » 0 vaunete 1 o etenene «9 enenotn ow 364
Voice guidance Windows
refer to Multifunction Child safety lock............. 02. ee eee 38
steering wheel................. 17,19, 20 Cleaning/removing ice................ 365
Voicemail... 6.6... cece eee eee 198 Convenience opening and closing......... 39
Voice recognition system..............-. 181 Opening and closing............-....-. 38
8V2012721B)
GOMMIANAS = won = x eau 2 see sy ee go: 182 POWEF WINDOWSisn: = x wows 4 « ew & dee ge: 38
Externalsican: «i inns 2 0 saene « seamen » wiosm @ 8 186
409
Index
Windshield washer system........... 54, 337

Reservoir capacity...........-..00000- 395
Windshield wipers...............-00000- 54
Replacing wiper blades................. 55
Winter operation
Battery’: 2 = aces © s mewey : see ¢ See Gz ee 335
Car washes « mauss 5 + sean + © cevanin © % meson © ora 362
Cooling systeM...........0. 2-0 eee ee 332
Defrosting the windows................ 70
Rear window defogger..............0005 70
Removing ice from windows............ 365
Seat Héating’s « seen ss woe se cers « eee es 70
SMOWCHALMS rane. as oxaicams x aeamnees ammews wo oe 355
Steering wheel heating................. 71
Windshield washer system............. 337
WIPTERUINES: 6 scams © seamen a 3 recs w 2 saaweTe 355
X
Xenon headlights.................-- 48, 381
Zz
ZOOM (Map) « v sewn x 2 gow = seem o e Rene 8 zg 220
410
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously These instructions may not be reproduced or
improve its products. AUDI AG reserves the right translated in whole or in part without written
to make changes in design and specifications, consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI
and to make additions or improvementsin its AG.
products without incurring any obligation to in-
stall them on products previously manufactured. (4) For the sake of the environment
This owner's manual is based on the current data Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, out chlorine, recyclable).
and specifications in this owner's manual are
based on the mostcurrent information available
at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a
basis for liability claims.
Owner's Manual
Englisch Nordamerika 11.2018
8V2012721B)
8V2012721B) www.audi.com

2019 Audi A3 19

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Audi A3 19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trustin us.

About this Owner's Manual...... Luggage compartment ............... 63

Siderairbagssevs x 5 soc vo wae wo wee © oe 294

CHARSYiea se maces oe wae ao we 301

Safety belts...................088 Troubleshooting................. 368

Fuses and bulbs.................. B79.

Customer information........... 389

Technical data.................... 394

ENO: 5 scccans 2 & cussions « cave 9 6 ewan 2 wens 396

This Owner's Manual applies to all versions of

KEEP THIS GUIDE

Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. This

This owner's manual describes the equipment

Some sections in this manual do not apply toall

The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

=> A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING”within a

@ For the sake of the environment

Fig. 2 Cockpit: right section

©OOOCOLO Door handle @) Infotainment system display ..... 166

— Horn be —Parkingaid .................. 150

Windshield washer system lever .. 54 (0) 1) 82

Lever for: equipment,it may have:

Instrument illumination ......... 51 @4 Electromechanical parking brake . . 80

ment) for: Some the equipment listed here is only instal-

Power windows .............4.- 38

Indicator lights overview Brake system 4

Some indicator lights in the display can display in Electrical system

Electronic Stabilization Control Remote control key

e-tron: vehicle sound Speed warning system

e-tron: tank system

Instrument cluster overview

Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit

Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster

@® Speedometer ment cluster display turns on, the coolant tem-

Normal range Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are

The engine has reached its operating tempera-

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by press-

and thatice can increase the risk of accidents.

Fig. 5 Instrumentcluster: odometer

Trip odometer and odometer

Multifunction steering Third tab Radio > page 176

a) This tab is only visible when thereis at least one indicator

First tab Vehicle functions > page 21

Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit

Fig. 8 Selection menu and options menu

Left control button

Right control button

Fig. 9 Standard view: classic/sport*

Other function buttons

Fig. 10 Enhanced view

@ ls] bei] button

©) [x] button / steering wheelheating [#

— Programmable steering wheel button - Open-

— Opening thecall list: if no phone call is in prog- @ [=] Button

For more information about the voice recognition

© [x] button / steering wheel heating* |[#

— Programmablesteering wheel button - Re-

> Steering wheel button assignment.

— Date and time > page 253

The short-term memorycollects driving informa-